You are on page 1of 663

Service Guide

HP 8560E and 8560EC Spectrum Analyzers


Manufacturing Part Number: 08560-90157 Supersedes: 08560-90149
Printed in USA
December 1999
Copyri ght 1990 1999 Hewl ett-Packard Company
2
Notice
Hewl ett-Packard makes no warranty of any ki nd wi th regard to thi s
materi al , i ncl udi ng but not l i mi ted to, the i mpl i ed warranti es of
merchantabi l i ty and tness for a parti cul ar purpose. Hewl ett-Packard
shal l not be l i abl e for errors contai ned herei n or for i nci dental or
consequenti al damages i n connecti on wi th the furni shi ng, performance,
or use of thi s materi al .
Al l Ri ghts Reserved. Reproducti on, adaptati on, or transl ati on wi thout
pri or wri tten permi ssi on i s prohi bi ted, except as al l owed under the
copyri ght l aws.
The i nformati on contai ned i n thi s document i s subject to change
wi thout noti ce.
Certication
Hewl ett-Packard Company certi es that thi s product met i ts publ i shed
speci cati ons at the ti me of shi pment from the factory.
Hewl ett-Packard further certi es that i ts cal i brati on measurements
are traceabl e to the Uni ted States Nati onal I nsti tute of Standards and
Technol ogy, to the extent al l owed by the I nsti tute's cal i brati on faci l i ty,
and to the cal i brati on faci l i ti es of other I nternati onal Standards
Organi zati on members.
General Safety Considerations
The fol l owi ng safety notes are used throughout thi s manual .
Fami l i ari ze yoursel f wi th these notes before operati ng thi s i nstrument.
WARNING Warning denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure
which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in
injury or loss of life. Do not proceed beyond a warning note
until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met.
CAUTION Al ways use the three-prong AC power cord suppl i ed wi th thi s product.
Fai l ure to ensure adequate groundi ng may cause product damage.
3
WARNING This is a Safety Class 1 Product (provided with a protective
earth ground incorporated in the power cord). The mains plug
shall be inserted only in a socket outlet provided with a
protected earth contact. Any interruption of the protective
conductor insideor outsideof theproduct is likely to makethe
product dangerous. Intentional interruption is prohibited.
CAUTION Before this instrument is switched on, make sure i ts pri mary power
ci rcui try has been adapted to the vol tage of the ac power source.
Fai l ure to set the ac power i nput to the correct vol tage coul d cause
damage to the i nstrument when the ac power cabl e i s pl ugged i n.
Thi s product conforms to Encl osure Protecti on I P 2 0 accordi ng to
I EC-529. The encl osure protects agai nst nger access to hazardous
parts wi thi n the encl osure; the encl osure does not protect agai nst the
entrance of water.
CAUTION Cauti on denotes a hazard. I t cal l s attenti on to a procedure that, i f not
correctl y performed or adhered to, coul d resul t i n damage to or
destructi on of the i nstrument. Do not proceed beyond a cauti on si gn
unti l the i ndi cated condi ti ons are ful l y understood and met.
WARNING No operator serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to
qualied personnel. To prevent electrical shock do not remove
covers.
WARNING Before thi s i nstrument i s swi tched on, make sure it has been
properly grounded through the protective conductor of the ac
power cable to a socket outlet provided with protective earth
contact.
Any interruption of the protective (grounding) conductor,
inside or outside the instrument, or disconnection of the
protective earth terminal can result in personal injury.
If this instrument is used in a manner not specied by
Hewlett-Packard Co., the protection provided by the
instrument may be impaired.
There are many points in the instrument which can, if
contacted, cause personal injury. Be extremely careful. Any
adjustmentsor serviceproceduresthat requireoperationof the
instrument with protective covers removed should be
performed only by trained service personnel.
4
Warranty
Thi s Hewl ett-Packard i nstrument product i s warranted agai nst defects
i n materi al and workmanshi p for a peri od of one year from date of
shi pment. Duri ng the warranty peri od, Hewl ett-Packard Company wi l l ,
at i ts opti on, ei ther repai r or repl ace products that prove to be defecti ve.
For warranty servi ce or repai r, thi s product must be returned to a
servi ce faci l i ty desi gnated by Hewl ett-Packard. Buyer shal l prepay
shi ppi ng charges to Hewl ett-Packard and Hewl ett-Packard shal l pay
shi ppi ng charges to return the product to Buyer. However, Buyer shal l
pay al l shi ppi ng charges, duti es, and taxes for products returned to
Hewl ett-Packard from another country.
Hewl ett-Packard warrants that i ts software and rmware desi gnated
by Hewl ett-Packard for use wi th an i nstrument wi l l execute i ts
programmi ng i nstructi ons when properl y i nstal l ed on that i nstrument.
Hewl ett-Packard does not warrant that the operati on of the
i nstrument, or software, or rmware wi l l be uni nterrupted or
error-free.
LIMITATION OF WARRANTY
The foregoi ng warranty shal l not appl y to defects resul ti ng from
i mproper or i nadequate mai ntenance by Buyer, Buyer-suppl i ed
software or i nterfaci ng, unauthori zed modi cati on or mi suse, operati on
outsi de of the envi ronmental speci cati ons for the product, or i mproper
si te preparati on or mai ntenance.
NO OTHER WARRANTY I S EXPRESSED OR I MPLI ED.
HEWLETT-PACKARD SPECI FI CALLY DI SCLAI MS THE I MPLI ED
WARRANTI ES OF MERCHANTABI LI TY AND FI TNESS FOR A
PARTI CULAR PURPOSE.
EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES
THE REMEDI ES PROVI DED HEREI N ARE BUYERS SOLE AND
EXCLUSI VE REMEDI ES. HEWLETT-PACKARD SHALL NOT BE
LI ABLE FOR ANY DI RECT, I NDI RECT, SPECI AL, I NCI DENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTI AL DAMAGES, WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT,
TORT, OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY.
Contents
5
1. General Information
I ntroducti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
How to Use thi s Gui de . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Conventi ons fol l owed i n thi s gui de: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Documentati on Outl i ne. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Di fferences between HP 8560 EC-Seri es and E-Seri es Spectrum Anal yzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
I nstrument Vari ati ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Seri al Numbers and Repai r I nformati on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
HP 8529B Test and Adjustment Modul e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Servi ce Ki t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Recommended Test Equi pment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
El ectrostati c Di scharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Reduci ng Potenti al for ESD Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Stati c-Safe Accessori es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Returni ng I nstruments for Servi ce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Servi ce Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Ori gi nal Packagi ng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Other Packagi ng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Sal es and Servi ce Ofces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
2. Adjustment Procedures
I ntroducti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Safety Consi derati ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Whi ch Adjustments Shoul d Be Performed? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Test Equi pment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Adjustabl e and Factory-Sel ected Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Adjustment Tool s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
I nstrument Servi ce Posi ti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Usi ng the TAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Test Equi pment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Adjustment I ndi cator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
1. Hi gh Vol tage Power Suppl y Adjustment (8560E onl y). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Assembl y Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Rel ated Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Descri pti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Equi pment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
2. Di spl ay Adjustment (8560E onl y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Assembl y Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Rel ated Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Descri pti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Equi pment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Prel i mi nary Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Cutoff Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Deecti on Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
I ntensi ty Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Fast Zero Span Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
3. I F Bandpass Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
6
Contents
Assembl y Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Rel ated Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Descri pti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Equi pment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
4. I F Ampl i tude Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Assembl y Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Rel ated Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Equi pment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
A4 Log Amp/Cal Osci l l ator Ampl i tude Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
A5 Reference Attenuator Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
A5 Adjustment Veri cati on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
5. DC Log Ampl i er Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Assembl y Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Rel ated Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Equi pment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
A4 Li mi ter Phase Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
A4 Li near Fi del i ty Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
A4 Log Fi del i ty Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
6. Sampl i ng Osci l l ator Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Assembl y Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Rel ated Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Descri pti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Equi pment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Sampl i ng Osci l l ator Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Sampl er Match Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
7. YTO Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Assembl y Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Rel ated Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Descri pti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Equi pment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
YTO Mai n Coi l Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
YTO FM Coi l Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
8. Fi rst LO Di stri buti on Ampl i er Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Assembl y Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Rel ated Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Descri pti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Equi pment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
9. Tracki ng Generator Power Level Adjustments (Opti on 002) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Assembl y Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Rel ated Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Descri pti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Contents
7
Equi pment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
10. Frequency Response Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Assembl y Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Rel ated Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Descri pti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Equi pment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
11. Cal i brator Ampl i tude Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Assembl y Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Rel ated Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Descri pti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Equi pment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
12. 10 MHz Reference Adjustment-TCXO (Opti on 103) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Assembl y Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Rel ated Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Descri pti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Equi pment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
13. Demodul ator Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Assembl y Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Rel ated Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Descri pti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Equi pment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
14. External Mi xer Bi as Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Assembl y Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Rel ated Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Descri pti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Equi pment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
15. External Mi xer Ampl i tude Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Assembl y Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Rel ated Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Descri pti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Equi pment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
16. Si gnal I D Osci l l ator Adjustment (seri al prex 3517A and bel ow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Assembl y Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Rel ated Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Descri pti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Equi pment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
17. 10 MHz Reference Adjustment-OCXO (Non-Opti on 103) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Assembl y Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Rel ated Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Descri pti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Equi pment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
8
Contents
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
18. Tracki ng Osci l l ator Adjustment
(Opti on 002) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Assembl y Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Rel ated Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Descri pti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Equi pment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
19. 16 MHz PLL Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Assembl y Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Rel ated Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Descri pti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Equi pment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
20. 600 MHz Reference Adjustment
(seri al prex 3406A and above) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Assembl y Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Rel ated Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Descri pti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Equi pment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
2a. Adjustment Procedures: HP 3335A Source not Available
What You'l l Fi nd i n Thi s Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Requi red Test Equi pment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
4a. I F Ampl i tude Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Assembl y Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Rel ated Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Equi pment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
A4 Log Amp/Cal Osci l l ator Ampl i tude Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
A5 Reference Attenuator Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
A5 Adjustment Veri cati on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
5a. DC Log Ampl i er Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Assembl y Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Rel ated Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Equi pment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
A4 Li mi ter Phase Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
A4 Li near Fi del i ty Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
A4 Log Fi del i ty Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
3. Assembly Replacement
I ntroducti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Access to I nternal Assembl i es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Cabl e Col or Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Contents
9
Procedure 1. Spectrum Anal yzer Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Removal /Repl acement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Procedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A18 LCD (8560EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Removal of the Front Frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Removal of the Di spl ay Dri ver Board, I nverter Board, and LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Removal of the Backl i ghts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Removal of the Li ne Swi tch from the Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Removal of the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Repl acement of the Front Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Repl acement of the Di spl ay Dri ver Board, I nverter Board, and LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Repl aci ng the Backl i ghts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Repl acement of the Li ne Swi tch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Repl acement of the Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Procedure 2B. A1 Front Frame/A18 CRT (8560E). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Repl acement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Procedure 3. A1A1 Keyboard/Front Panel Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Repl acement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Procedure 4. A1A2 RPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Repl acement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assembl i es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Repl acement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Procedure 6A. A6 Power Suppl y Assembl y (8560EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Repl acement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Procedure 6B. A6 Power Suppl y Assembl y (8560E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Repl acement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Procedure 7. A6A1 Hi gh Vol tage Assembl y (8560E onl y). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Repl acement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Procedure 8. A7 through A13 Assembl i es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
A7 1st LO Di stri buti on Ampl i er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
A8 Low Band Mi xer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
A9 I nput Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
A10 Tracki ng Generator (Opti on 002) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
A11 YTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
A13 Second Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Procedure 9. A14 and A15 Assembl i es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Repl acement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Procedure 10. A16 FADC/A17 CRT Dri ver (8560E ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Repl acement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Procedure 11. B1 Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Removal /Repl acement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
10
Contents
Procedure 12. BT1 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Removal /Repl acement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Procedure 13. Rear Frame/Rear Dress Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Repl acement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Procedure 14. W3 Li ne Swi tch Cabl e (8560E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Repl acement (Usi ng Contact Removal Tool , HP Part Number 8710-1791) . . . . . . . . . . .215
Repl acement (wi thout Contact Removal Tool ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Procedure 15. EEROM (A2U501 or A2U500) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Removal /Repl acement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Procedure 16. A21 OCXO (Non-Opti on 103) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Repl acement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
4. Replaceable Parts
I ntroducti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Orderi ng I nformati on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Di rect Mai l -Order System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Di rect Phone-Order System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Parts Li st Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Fi rmware-Dependent Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
5. Major Assembly and Cable Locations
I ntroducti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
6. General Troubleshooting
I ntroducti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Assembl y Level Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Bl ock Di agrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Assembl y Test Poi nts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Ri bbon Cabl es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
Servi ce Cal Data Softkey Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Troubl eshooti ng to a Functi onal Secti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Usi ng the TAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Di agnosti c Functi ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
TAM Requi rements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Test Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
I nconsi stent Resul ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Erroneous Resul ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Bl ank Di spl ay (8560E onl y). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Automati c Faul t I sol ati on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Manual Probe Troubl eshooti ng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Cal Osci l l ator Troubl eshooti ng Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Vi ewi ng Mul ti pl e Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Error Message El i mi nati on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
System Anal yzer Programmi ng Errors
Contents
11
(100 to 150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
ADC Errors (200 to 299) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
LO and RF Hardware/Fi rmware Fai l ures (300 to 399) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Automati c I F Errors (400 to 599) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
System Errors (600 to 651) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Di gi tal and Checksum Errors (700 to 799) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Battery Probl em (718) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Model Number Error (719) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
System Errors (750 to 759) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Fast ADC Error (760) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Opti on Modul e Errors (800 to 899) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
User-Generated Errors (900 to 999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Bl ock Di agram Descri pti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
RF Secti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Synthesi zer Secti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
I F Secti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
ADC/I nterface Secti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Control l er Secti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Di spl ay/Power Suppl y Secti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
7. ADC/Interface Section
I ntroducti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Troubl eshooti ng Usi ng the TAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Automati c Faul t I sol ati on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Keyboard/RPG Probl ems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Keyboard I nterface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
RPG I nterface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Tri ggeri ng or Vi deo Gati ng Probl ems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Presel ector Peaki ng Control (Real Ti me DAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Fl atness Control (RF Gai n DACs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
A3 Assembl y Vi deo Ci rcui ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Log Offset/Log Expand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Vi deo MUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Vi deo Fi l ter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Vi deo Fi l ter Buffer Ampl i er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Posi ti ve/Negati ve Peak Detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Peak Detector Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Rosenfel l Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
ADC MUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Vari abl e Gai n Ampl i er (VGA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Track and Hol d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
A3 Assembl y ADC Ci rcui ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
ADC Control Si gnal s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
ADC Start/Stop Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
ADC ASM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
ADC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Ramp Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
A3 Assembl y Control Ci rcui ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Anal og Bus Dri vers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
12
Contents
Anal og Bus Ti mi ng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
I nterface Strobe Sel ect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
A16 Assembl y Fast ADC Ci rcui ts
(8560E wi th Opti on 007) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Vi deo I nput Scal i ng Ampl i ers and Li mi ter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
8-Bi t Fl ash ADC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Peak/Pi t Detecti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
32 K-Byte Stati c RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
A16 Assembl y Fast ADC Control Ci rcui ts (8560E wi th Opti on 007) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
CPU I nterface and Control Regi sters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Reference Cl ock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Cl ock and Sampl e Rate Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Tri gger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
316-Bi t Post-Tri gger Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
15-Bi t (32 K) Ci rcul ar Address Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Vi deo Tri gger Comparator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
8. IF Section
I ntroducti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Troubl eshooti ng Usi ng the TAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Troubl eshooti ng the Log Ampl i er wi th the TAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Troubl eshooti ng A5 wi th the TAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Troubl eshooti ng the Cal Osci l l ator wi th the TAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Automati c I F Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Parameters Adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
Requi rements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Performance Test Fai l ures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
I F Gai n Uncertai nty Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
Scal e Fi del i ty Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Resol uti on Bandwi dths Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Log Ampl i er Assembl y (P/O A4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Log Ampl i er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Li near Ampl i ers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Vi deo Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Vi deo Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Frequency Counter Prescal er/Condi ti oner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
AM/FM Demodul ator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
4.8 kHz I F Fi l ters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
10.7 MHz I F Fi l ters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
4.8 kHz and 10.7 MHz I F Fi l ters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
10.6952 MHz VCXO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
I nput Swi tch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
LO Swi tch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Synchronous Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Log Offset/Gai n Compensati on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Vi deo MUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
A5 I F Assembl y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
I F Si gnature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Common I F Si gnature Probl ems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Contents
13
1 MHz Resol uti on Bandwi dth Probl ems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
30 kHz Resol uti on Bandwi dth Probl ems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
3 kHz and 10 kHz Resol uti on Bandwi dth Probl ems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Step Gai ns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Cal Osci l l ator Assembl y (P/O A4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Cal Osci l l ator Unl ock at Begi nni ng of I F Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
I nadequate CAL OSC AMPTD Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
300 Hz to 3 kHz Resol uti on Bandwi dth Out of Speci cati on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Low-Pass Fi l ter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Sweep Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
AM/FM Demodul ati on, Audi o Ampl i er, and Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
9. Controller Section
I ntroducti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Troubl eshooti ng Usi ng the TAM (8560E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Bl ank Di spl ay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Di gi tal Si gnature Anal ysi s DSA (8560E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Di spl ay Probl ems (8560E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Li ne Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Bl anki ng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Di spl ay Jumbl ed or Trace Off Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
I ntensi ty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Bad Characters or Grati cul e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Long Li nes Di mmer than Short Li nes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Anal og Zero-Span Probl ems (8560E onl y). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Frequency-Count Marker Probl ems (8560EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Frequency-Count Marker Probl ems (8560E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Frequency Counter (8560EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Frequency Counter (8560) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Vi deo I nput Scal i ng Ampl i ers and Li mi ter (8560EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
12-Bi t Fl ash ADC (8560EC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
32 K-Byte Stati c RAM (8560EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Reference Cl ock (8560EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
16 MHz Harmoni c Fi l ter (8560EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
State- and Trace-Storage Probl ems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Keyboard Probl ems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
10. Synthesizer Section
I ntroducti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Synthesi zer Troubl eshooti ng Secti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Test Setup Troubl eshooti ng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Troubl eshooti ng Usi ng the TAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
General PLL Troubl eshooti ng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
PLL Locked at Wrong Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Unl ocked PLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Unl ocked Reference PLL (100 MHz VCXO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Operati on (100 MHz VCXO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Troubl eshooti ng (100 MHz VCXO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
14
Contents
Thi rd LO Dri ver Ampl i er (100 MHz VCXO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Unl ocked Reference PLL (600 MHz SAWR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Operati on (600 MHz SAWR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Troubl eshooti ng (600 MHz SAWR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Thi rd LO dri ver ampl i er (600 MHz SAWR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Unl ocked Offset Lock Loop
(Sampl i ng Osci l l ator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Operati on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Troubl eshooti ng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Unl ocked YTO PLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Operati on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Troubl eshooti ng an Unl ocked YTO PLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Unl ocked Fracti onal N PLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Operati on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Conrmi ng an Unl ocked Condi ti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Fracti onal N PLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Frequency Span Accuracy Probl ems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Determi ni ng the Fi rst LO Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Conrmi ng Span Probl ems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
YTO Mai n Coi l Span Probl ems (LO spans >20 MHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
YTO FM Coi l Span Probl ems (LO spans 2.01 MHz to 20 MHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Fracti onal N Span Probl ems (LO spans 2 MHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Fi rst LO Span Probl ems (Al l Spans) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Phase Noi se Probl ems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
Phase Noi se i n Locked versus Lock-and-Rol l Spans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
Reference versus Reference PLL Phase Noi se . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Fracti onal N versus Offset PLL or YTO PLL Phase Noi se . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Fracti onal N PLL Phase Noi se (08560-60062 and bel ow onl y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Sampl er and Sampl er I F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Sweep Generator Ci rcui t (for Spectrum Anal yzers wi th 100 s max. Sweep Ti me) . . . . . . .565
Sweep Generator Ci rcui t (for Spectrum Anal yzers wi th 2000 s max. Sweep Ti me) . . . . . .568
A21 OCXO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
11. RF Section
I ntroducti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Troubl eshooti ng Usi ng the TAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Low Band Probl ems (30 Hz to 2.9 GHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Low Band Probl ems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
A7 LODA (LO Di stri buti on Ampl i er) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
A8 Low Band Mi xer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
A9 I nput Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
A13 Second Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
A14 Frequency Control Assembl y. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
A7 LODA Dri ve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
A15 RF Assembl y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Conrmi ng a Faul ty Thi rd Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Conrmi ng a Thi rd Converter Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Thi rd Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
Fl atness Compensati on Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Contents
15
Control Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
SI G I D Osci l l ator (Opti on 008) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
10 MHz Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
A10 Tracki ng Generator (Opti on 002) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Bl ock Di agram Descri pti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Output Goes Unl evel ed (ERR 900 or ERR 901) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
Excessi ve Resi dual FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
Fl atness Out-of-Tol erance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
Verni er Accuracy Out-of-Tol erance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
Harmoni c/Spuri ous Outputs Too Hi gh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
Power Sweep Not Functi oni ng Properl y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
No Power Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
12. Display/Power Supply Section
I ntroducti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
LCD Di spl ay (8560EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
Overvi ew of A17 Di spl ay Dri ver Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
Troubl eshooti ng the LCD Di spl ay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
Bl ank Di spl ay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
Di m Di spl ay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
Troubl eshooti ng usi ng the VGA port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
Troubl eshooti ng usi ng part substi tuti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
CRT Di spl ay (8560E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
Troubl eshooti ng Usi ng the TAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
Bl ank Di spl ay (Usi ng the TAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
Bl ank Di spl ay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Bl anki ng Si gnal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Di spl ay Di storti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
Focus Probl ems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
I ntensi ty Probl ems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Power Suppl y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Troubl eshooti ng Usi ng the TAM (8560E onl y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
A6 Power Suppl y Assembl y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
Dead Power Suppl y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
Li ne Fuse Bl owi ng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
Suppl y Restarti ng Every 1.5 Seconds (Ki ck Start) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
Low Vol tage Suppl i es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
Hi gh Vol tage Suppl i es (8560E). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
CRT Suppl y Droppi ng Out (8560E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
Bl anki ng Si gnal (8560E). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
Buck Regul ator Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
DC-DC Converter Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
13. Component-Level Information Packets
I ntroducti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
16
Contents
17
Figures
Figure 1-1 . Serial Number Label Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Figure 1-2 . Earlier Serial Number Label Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Figure 1-3 . Example of a Static-Safe Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Figure 1-4 . HP 8560E/EC Shipping Container and Cushioning Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Figure 2-1 . High Voltage Power Supply Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Figure 2-2 . Display Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Figure 2-3 . CRT Adjust Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Figure 2-4 . A2 Display Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Figure 2-5 . IF Bandpass Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Figure 2-6 . IF Amplitude Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Figure 2-7 . IF Amplitude Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Figure 2-8 . Sampler Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Figure 2-9 . TAM Connector Pin Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Figure 2-10 . YTO Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Figure 2-11 . YTO Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Figure 2-12 . First LO Distribution Amplifier Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Figure 2-13 . TAM Connector Pin Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Figure 2-14 . Tracking Generator Power Setup and Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Figure 2-15 . Frequency Response Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Figure 2-16 . Calibrator Amplitude Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Figure 2-17 . 10 MHz Frequency Reference Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Figure 2-18 . Demodulator Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Figure 2-19 . Demodulator Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Figure 2-20 . External Mixer Bias Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Figure 2-21 . External Mixer Amplitude Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Figure 2-22 . Signal ID Oscillator Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Figure 2-23 . Signal ID Oscillator Adjustment Jumper Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Figure 2-24 . 10 MHz Reference Adjustment Setup and Adjustment Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Figure 2-25 . Tracking Oscillator Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Figure 2-26 . 16 MHz PLL Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Figure 2-27 . 16 MHz PLL Adjustment Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Figure 2a-1 . IF Amplitude Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Figure 2a-2 . IF Amplitude Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Figure 2a-3 . IF Amplitude Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Figure 2a-4 . IF Amplitude Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Figure 3-1 . Hinged Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Figure 3-2 . LCD Assembly - Exploded View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Figure 3-3 . Discharging High Voltage on the CRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Figure 3-4 . A9, A18, and Line Switch Assembly Mounting Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Figure 3-5 . Front Frame Mounting Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Figure 3-6 . Installing the CRT and front Frame Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Figure 3-7 . Placing the CRT into the Front Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Figure 3-8 . A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assembly Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Figure 3-9 . Assembly Cables (1 of 3) EC-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Figure 3-10 . Assembly Cables (2 of 3) EC-series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Figure 3-11 . Assembly Cables (3 of 3) E-series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Figure 3-12 . Coaxial Cable Clip EC-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Figure 3-13 . Coaxial Cable Clip E-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Figure 3-14 . HP-IB and A1A1 W1 Cable Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Figure 3-15 . Power Supply Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Figure 3-16 . Power Supply Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Figure 3-17 . A6 Power Supply Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Figure 3-18 . Power Supply Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
18
Figures
Figure 3-19 . A17 CRT Driver Mounting Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Figure 3-20 . Assembly Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Figure 3-21 . RF Section Bias Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Figure 3-22 . A9 Mounting Screws at Right Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Figure 3-23 . A10 Tracking Generator Mounting Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Figure 3-24 . A11 Mounting Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Figure 3-25 . A14 and A15 Assembly Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Figure 3-26 . A14 and A15 Assembly Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Figure 3-27 . A16 and A17 Mounting Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Figure 3-28 . A16 Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Figure 3-29 . Main Deck Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Figure 3-30 . A6 Power Supply Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Figure 3-31 . W3 Dress and Connection to A6 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Figure 3-32 . Line Switch Mounting Screw and Cable Dress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Figure 3-33 . W3 Cable Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Figure 3-34 . Side Frame Mounting Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Figure 3-35 . A21 OCXO Mounting Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Figure 4-1 . Parts Identification, Assembly Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Figure 4-2 . Parts Identification, Cover Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Figure 4-3 . Parts Identification, Main Chassis (8560E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Figure 4-4 . Parts Identification, RF Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Figure 4-5 . Parts Identification, Front Frame (1 of 2), 8560E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Figure 4-5 . Parts Identification, Front Frame (2 of 2), Option 002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Figure 4-6 . Parts Identification, Rear Frame (8560E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Figure 4-7 . Parts Identification, Chassis (8560EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Figure 4-8 . Parts Identification, Front Frame (8560EC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Figure 4-9 . Parts Identification, Rear Frame (8560EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Figure 5-1 . Hinged Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Figure 5-2 . Top View (A2 and A3 Unfolded) EC-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Figure 5-3 . Top View (A2, A3, A4, and A5 Unfolded) EC-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Figure 5-4 . Top View (A2 Unfolded) E-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Figure 5-5 . Top View (A2 and A3 Unfolded) E-Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Figure 5-6 . Top View (A2, A3, A4, and A5 Unfolded) E-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Figure 5-7 . Bottom View (A15 Unfolded) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Figure 5-8 . Bottom View (A15 and A14 Unfolded) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Figure 5-9 . Front End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Figure 5-10 . Rear View EC-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Figure 5-11 . Rear View E-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Figure 6-1 . Assembly Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Figure 6-2 . Ribbon Cable Connections (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Figure 6-3 . Ribbon Cable Connections (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Figure 6-4 . Ribbon Cable Connections (3 of 3) - EC-Series Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Figure 6-5 . Service Cal Data Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Figure 6-6 . Functional Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Figure 6-7 . Phase Lock Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Figure 6-8 . Simplified Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Figure 6-9 . Overall Block Diagram (1 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Figure 6-9 . Overall Block Diagram (2 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Figure 6-9 . Overall Block Diagram (3 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Figure 6-9 . Overall Block Diagram (4 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Figure 6-9 . Overall Block Diagram (5 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Figure 7-1 . A3 Test Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Figure 7-2 . A3 Interface Assembly Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
19
Figures
Figure 7-3 . Fast ADC Block Diagram (Option 007 in E-series instruments) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Figure 8-1 . A4 and A5 Test Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Figure 8-2 . IF Section Troubleshooting with the TAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Figure 8-3 . IF Adjust Signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Figure 8-4 . Detailed IF Adjust Signature (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Figure 8-5 . Detailed IF Adjust Signature (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Figure 8-6 . Detailed IF Adjust Signature (3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Figure 8-7 . Detailed IF Adjust Signature (4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Figure 8-8 . Detailed IF Adjust Signature (5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Figure 8-9 . Noisy Signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Figure 8-10 . Noise with Correct Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Figure 8-11 . Region B Amplitude Variation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Figure 8-12 . Region B Amplitude Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Figure 8-13 . Faulty Crystal Short . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Figure 8-14 . Faulty LC Pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Figure 8-15 . Faulty Crystal Symmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Figure 8-16 . Output Waveform, 10 kHz Resolution Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Figure 8-17 . Output Waveform, 3 kHz Resolution Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Figure 8-18 . Output Waveform, 1 kHz Resolution Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Figure 8-19 . Output Waveform, 300 Hz Resolution Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Figure 8-20 . Failed Crystal Set Symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Figure 8-21 . A4 Log Amplifier/Cal Oscillator Block Diagram (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Figure 8-21 . A4 Log Amplifier/Cal Oscillator Block Diagram (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Figure 8-22 . A5 IF Assembly Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Figure 9-1 . A2 Test Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Figure 9-2 . Line Generator Output Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Figure 9-3 . Blanking Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Figure 9-4 . Expanded Blanking Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Figure 9-5 . Switch Driver Waveform LCHAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Figure 9-6 . Distorted X/Y Line Generator Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Figure 9-7 . Expanded X/Y Line Generator Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Figure 9-8 . Normal X/Y Line Generator Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Figure 9-9 . Delta X Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Figure 9-10 . Delta Y Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Figure 9-11 . DEF1 Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Figure 9-12 . A2 Controller Block Diagram (E-Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Figure 9-13 . A2 Controller Block Diagram (EC-Series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Figure 10-1 . YTO Loop Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Figure 10-2 . Sampler and Sampling Oscillator Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Figure 10-3 . A14 and A15 Test Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Figure 10-4 . TAM Connector Pin Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Figure 10-5 . PLL Locked at Wrong Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Figure 10-6 . Unlocked PLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Figure 10-7 . Troubleshooting an Unlocked YTO PLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Figure 10-8 . VCO Bias Voltages for A14 Assemblies 08560-60069 and Above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Figure 10-8a . VCO Bias Voltages for A14 boards(08560-60062 and below) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Figure 10-9 . Simplified Sweep Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Figure 10-10 . Simplified Sweep Generator during Retrace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Figure 10-11 . Simplified Synthesizer Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Figure 10-12 . Simplified A14 Assembly Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Figure 10-13 . Simplified A15 Assembly Block Diagram (100 MHz PLL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Figure 10-13a . Simplified A15 Assembly Block Diagram (600 MHz PLL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Figure 10-14 . Frequency Control Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
20
Figures
Figure 10-15 . RF Block Diagram (for A15 08563-60054, 08563-60055, or 08563-60056) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Figure 10-16 . RF Block Diagram (for A15 <08563-60054, 08563-60055, or 08563-60056) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Figure 11-1 . A14 and A15 Test Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Figure 11-2 . A7 LODA Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
Figure 11-3 . 10 MHz Reference at A15J302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Figure 11-4 . 10 MHz TTL Reference at U304 Pin 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Figure 11-5 . HP 8560E RF Section Troubleshooting Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Figure 12-1 . Simplified Section Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
Figure 12-2 . Probe Power Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
Figure 12-3 . Location of +5V supply pins on J1 of A17 and J8 of A2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
Figure 12-4 . Power Supply and CRT Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Figure 12-5 . A17 Test Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
Figure 12-6 . Probe Power Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Figure 12-7 . Simplified Power Supply Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
Figure 12-8 . Buck Regulator Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
Figure 12-9 . A17 CRT Driver Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
Figure 12-10 . A6 Power Supply Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Figure 13-1 . HP 8560 EC-Series Interconnect Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
Figure 13-2 . HP 8560 E-Series Interconnect Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
21
Tables
Table 1-1 . Instrument Variations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Table 1-2 . Service Kit Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Table 1-3 . Recommended Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Table 1-4 . Static-Safe Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Table 1-5 . Static-Safe Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Table 1-6 . Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Offices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Table 2-1 . Related Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Table 2-2 . Adjustable Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Table 2-3 . Factory Selected Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Table 2-4 . TAM Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Table 2-5 . Required Test Equipment for TAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Table 2-6 . Factory-Selected LC Filter Capacitors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Table 2-7 . LC Factory-Selected Capacitor Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Table 2-8 . Factory-Selected XTAL Filter Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Table 2-9 . XTAL Factory-Selected Capacitor Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Table 2-10 . Capacitor Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Table 2-11 . Sampling Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Table 2-12 . Conversion Loss Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Table 2-13 . Tracking Oscillator Range Centering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Table 2a-1 . Recommended Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Table 3-1 . Required Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Table 4-1 . Reference Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Table 4-2 . Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Table 4-3 . Reference Designations, Abbreviations, and Multipliers (4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Table 4-4 . Replaceable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Table 4-5 . Assembly Mounting (see Figure 4-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Table 4-6 . Parts List, Cover Assembly (See Figure 4-2) 8560E and 8560EC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Table 4-7 . Parts List, Main Chassis 8560EC (see Figure 4-8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Table 4-8 . Parts List, Main Chassis (See Figure 4-3) 8560E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Table 4-9 . Parts List, RF Section 8560E and 8560EC (see Figure 4-4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Table 4-10 . Parts List, Front Frame 8560EC (see Figure 4-9). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Table 4-11 . Parts List, Front Frame 8560E (see Figure 4-5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Table 4-12 . Parts List, Rear Frame 8560EC (see Figure 4-10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Table 4-13 . Parts List, Rear Frame 8560E (see Figure 4-7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Table 6-1 . Location of Assembly Troubleshooting Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Table 6-2 . Location of Assembly Troubleshooting Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Table 7-1 . W2 Control Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Table 7-2 . Automatic Fault Isolation References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Table 7-3 . TAM Tests versus A3 Test Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Table 7-4 . Keyboard Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Table 7-5 . Counter Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Table 7-6 . Trigger MUX Truth Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Table 7-7 . A3U102 Latch Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Table 7-8 . HMUX_SELO/1 versus Detector Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Table 7-9 . Logic Levels at A3U108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Table 7-10 . Demultiplexer A3U410 Truth Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Table 7-11 . Demultiplexer A3U500 Truth Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Table 7-12 . LP/Q Truth Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Table 7-13 . Control Word at Primary Address (U3 and U4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Table 8-1 . Automatic Fault Isolation References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Table 8-2 . TAM Tests versus Test Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Table 8-3 . Sweep Width Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Table 8-4 . IF Gain Application Guidelines (ATTEN=10 dB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
22
Tables
Table 9-1 . TAM Tests versus Test Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Table 9-2 . Gate Times. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Table 9-3 . Gate Times. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Table 10-1 . Center Frequency Tuning Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Table 10-2 . Sampling Oscillator Test Frequencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Table 10-3 . Measured Signal Line Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Table 10-4 . Automatic Fault Isolation References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Table 10-5 . TAM Tests versus Test Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Table 10-6 . TAM Tests versus Test Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Table 10-7 . Sampling Oscillator PLL Divide Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Table 10-8 . Amplifier Polarities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Table 10-9 . Voltages in FM Coil and Main Loop Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Table 10-10 . Main Coil Coarse and Fine DACs Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Table 10-11 . Postscaler Divide Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Table 10-12 . Unlocked Fractional N Troubleshooting Areas (08560-60069 and Above) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Table 10-13 . Unlocked Fractional N Troubleshooting Areas (08560-60062 and below) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Table 10-14 . Divider and Integrator Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Table 10-15 . Sweep Signal Destination versus Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Table 10-16 . Harmonic Mixing Number versus Center Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Table 10-17 . Settings of Sweep Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Table 10-18 . Settings of Sweep Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Table 11-1 . Automatic Fault Isolation References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Table 11-2 . TAM Tests versus Test Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Table 11-3 . Attenuator Pin Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
Table 11-4 . RF Section Mnemonic Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
Table 12-1 . Automatic Fault Isolation References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
Table 12-2 . TAM Tests versus Test Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
Table 12-3 . W1 Power-Cable Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Table 12-4 . Automatic Fault Isolation References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
Table 13-1 . CLIPs Available for HP 8560E and 8560EC Spectrum Analyzers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
23
1 General Information
24 Chapter 1
General Information
Introduction
Introduction
Thi s HP 8560E and 8560EC SpectrumAnalyzer ServiceGuidecontai ns
i nformati on requi red to adjust and servi ce the HP 8560E and 8560EC
to the assembl y l evel .
How to Use thi s Gui de ....................................................... page 25
Di fferences between HP 8560 EC-seri es and E-seri es Spectrum
Anal yzers ............................................................................ page 26
I nstrument Vari ati ons ....................................................... page 27
Seri al Number and Repai r I nformati on............................ page 29
HP 85629B Test and Adjustment Modul e ........................ page 31
Servi ce Ki t .......................................................................... page 32
Recommended Test Equi pment ......................................... page 33
El ectrostati c Di scharge...................................................... page 33
Returni ng I nstrument for Servi ce..................................... page 43
Chapter 1 25
General Information
Introduction
How to Use this Guide
Chapters 1 through 5 contai n adjustments and parts i nformati on that
can be used to hel p you x probl ems.
Chapter 6, General Troubl eshooti ng, can be used to i sol ate the
l ocati on of a probl em to a board or to a functi onal area i n the spectrum
anal yzer.
Chapters 7 through 13, whi ch cover functi onal areas, can then be used
to hel p you l ocal i ze the probl em further.
Conventions followed in this guide:
Documentation Outline
HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Calibration Guide and HP
8560 EC-Series Calibration Guide
Tel l s you how to run veri cati on software.
Tel l s you what your spectrum anal yzers speci cati ons are.
Tel l s you how to test your spectrum anal yzer.
HP 8560 E-Series and EC-Series Users Guide
Tel l s you how to make measurements wi th your spectrum
anal yzer.
Tel l s you how to i nstal l your spectrum anal yzer.
Tel l s you how to program your spectrum anal yzer.
HP 8560E-Series and EC-Series SpectrumAnalyzer Quick Reference
Guide
Provi des an abbrevi ated versi on of the HP 8560 E-Series and
EC-Series Spectrum Analyzers Users Guide.
Provi des you wi th a l i sti ng of al l remote programmi ng commands.
HP 8560E-Series SpectrumAnalyzer Component Level I nformation
Provi des schemati cs, component l ocati on di agrams, and parts
l i sts for the i nstrument.
Screen Text Thi s font i ndi cates text di spl ayed on the screen
Key Thi s font i ndi cates a softkey or a front panel key
HP 8560E/EC Thi s term i s used to refer to both HP 8560 E-seri es
and HP 8560 EC-seri es i nstruments
26 Chapter 1
General Information
Differences between HP 8560 EC-Series and E-Series Spectrum Analyzers
Differences between HP 8560 EC-Series and
E-Series Spectrum Analyzers
I n al l other operati onal respects the EC-seri es and E-seri es are
i denti cal . Unl ess otherwi se noted, the i nformati on i n thi s manual
appl i es to al l 8560EC and 8560E i nstruments.
NOTE FADC i s a standard feature, and not an opti on i n HP 8560 EC-seri es
i nstruments. However, i t i s sti l l necessary that opti on 007 be i n the
i nstruments seri al I D stri ng. For thi s reason, i f you press the
Datecode &Options key, the message shown on the di spl ay wi l l i ndi cate
that opti on 007 i s present. I n addi ti on, a statement on the rear panel of
the i nstrument reads Opti on 007 must be i n seri al I D stri ng.
NOTE Di agrams that i l l ustrate features common to E-seri es and EC-seri es
i nstruments are shown wi th E-seri es i nstruments. Where there are
di fferences between E-seri es and EC-seri es features, separate di agrams
are provi ded for E-seri es and for EC-seri es i nstruments.
Features HP 8560 EC-Series HP 8560 E-Series
Display LCD di spl ay
col or
di spl ay not adjustabl e
backl i ght bul bs are
repl aceabl e (repl ace both
bul bs when di spl ay i s di m)
requi res A17 LCD dri ver
board
CRT di spl ay
monochrome
di spl ay adjustabl e for
i ntensi ty, focus, and
quadrature
requi res hi gh vol tage
modul e (HVM), whi ch i s
l ocated i n the A6 power
suppl y
requi res A17 CRT dri ver
board
Fast ADC
sweep times
(FADC)
enabl es sweep
ti mes of 30 ms
to 50 s
FADC i s standard
FADC ci rcui try i ntegrated
i nto A2 control l er board
FADC i s avai l abl e as an
opti on (Opti on 007)
separate A16 FADC board
requi red
VGA port l ocated on rear panel
al ways acti ve
does not requi re user
i nterface
Not avai l abl e
Chapter 1 27
General Information
Instrument Variations
Instrument Variations
There are opti ons avai l abl e to the HP 8560E/EC spectrum anal yzer.
The fol l owi ng tabl e l i sts these opti ons and i denti es the assembl i es
whi ch are uni que to them.
Table 1-1 Instrument Variations
Option Added Deleted
HP 8560E/EC
Option 001
W19 Cabl e Assembl y
(2nd IF Output) Rear Panel J10
HP 8560E/EC
Option 002
A10 Tracki ng Generator
(Tracking Generator) Assembl y
Front Dress Panel Front Dress Panel
(Opt 002) (Standard)
W14 Cabl e Assembl y W36 Cabl e Assembl y
W16 Cabl e Assembl y W42 Cabl e Assembl y
W43 Cabl e Assembl y Front-panel J3
W46 Cabl e Assembl y
W47 Cabl e Assembl y
W48 Cabl e Assembl y
Rear panel J11
Front-panel J6
HP 8560E/EC
Option 005
W58 Cabl e Assembl y
(Add Alternate
Sweep Output)
HP 8560E
Option 007(Fast
ADC)
A16 Fast ADC Assembl y
-Fast ADC i s avai l abl e
as an opti on for 8560E
i nstruments
A3 I nterface Assembl y
(Opt 007)
A3 I nterface Assembl y
(Standard)
-Fast ADC i s a standard
feature of 8560EC
i nstruments and does
not requi re addi ti onal
W20 Cabl e Assembl y
(Opt 007)
assembl i es W59 Cabl e Assembl y W20 Cabl e Assembl y
(Standard)
HP 8560E/EC
Option 008
A15 RF Assembl y (Opt
008)
A15 RF Assembl y (Std)
(SIG ID)
28 Chapter 1
General Information
Instrument Variations
HP 8560E/EC
Option 103
A15 RF Assembl y (Opt
103)
W49 Cabl e Assembl y
(Delete OCXO) W50 Cabl e Assembl y
A15 RF Assembl y (Std)
A21 OCXO
HP 8560E/EC
Option 104
HP 85620A Mass
(Delete HP 85620A) Memory Modul e
HP 8560E/EC
Option 327
W24 Cabl e Assembl y
(Delete IF Input W36 Cabl e Assembl y
and Video Output) Front-panel J3
Rear-panel J4
Table 1-1 Instrument Variations
Option Added Deleted
Chapter 1 29
General Information
Serial Numbers and Repair Information
Serial Numbers and Repair Information
Hewl ett-Packard makes frequent i mprovements to i ts products to
enhance performance, usabi l i ty, or rel i abi l i ty. Hewl ett-Packard servi ce
personnel have access to compl ete records of desi gn changes to each
type of equi pment, based on the equi pment seri al number. Whenever
you contact Hewl ett-Packard about a product, have the compl ete seri al
number avai l abl e to ensure obtai ni ng the most compl ete and accurate
i nformati on possi bl e.
The seri al number l abel i s usual l y attached to the rear of the product.
The seri al number has two parts: the prex (two l etters and the rst
four numbers), and the sufx (the l ast four numbers).
Figure 1-1 Serial Number Label Example
The two l etters i denti fy the country i n whi ch the uni t was
manufactured. The four numbers of the prex are a code i denti fyi ng the
date of the l ast major desi gn change i ncorporated i n your
Hewl ett-Packard product. The four-di gi t sufx i s a sequenti al number
and, coupl ed wi th the prex, provi des a uni que i denti cati on for each
uni t produced. Whenever you l i st the seri al number or refer to i t i n
obtai ni ng i nformati on about your Hewl ett-Packard product, be sure to
use the compl ete number, i ncl udi ng the ful l prex and the sufx.
Uni ts whi ch were produced before the seri al number format was
changed may al so be covered by thi s documentati on. On earl i er seri al
number l abel s, the prex consi sts of the rst four numbers and a si ngl e
l etter. The sufx i s a ve-di gi t sequenti al number.
30 Chapter 1
General Information
Serial Numbers and Repair Information
Figure 1-2 Earlier Serial Number Label Example
I t i s i mportant that you real i ze that the new seri al number format
(US00000000) i s al ways consi dered "above" the earl i er format
(0000A00000) when you encounter change i nformati on such as
".seri al prex 3425A and above" or ".seri al number 3425A00564
and above."
Chapter 1 31
General Information
HP 8529B Test and Adjustment Module
HP 8529B Test and Adjustment Module
When attached to the spectrum anal yzer rear panel , the HP 85629B
Test and Adjustment Modul e (TAM) provi des di agnosti c functi ons for
the HP 8560E/EC. Because the TAM connects di rectl y to the spectrum
anal yzer i nternal data and address bus, i t control s the spectrum
anal yzer hardware di rectl y. I t woul d be i mpossi bl e to control the
hardware to the same extent ei ther from the spectrum anal yzer front
panel or over the HP-I B.
The TAM measures vol tages at key poi nts i n the ci rcui try and ags a
fai l ure whenever the vol tage fal l s outsi de the l i mi ts. The TAM l ocates
the fai l ure to a smal l functi onal area whi ch can be exami ned manual l y.
32 Chapter 1
General Information
Service Kit
Service Kit
The Servi ce Ki t (HP part number 08562-60021) contai ns servi ce tool s
requi red to repai r the i nstrument. Refer to Tabl e 1-2 for a l i st of i tems
i n the servi ce ki t.
Table 1-2 Service Kit Contents
Description Quantity HP Part Number
Cabl e Pul l er 1 5021-6773
PC Board Prop 1 5021-7459
Li ne Fi l ter Assembl y 1 5061-9032
Li ne Swi tch Cabl e 1 5062-0728
Extender Cabl e 1 5062-0737
BNC to SMB (snap-on) Cabl e 2 85680-60093
Connector Extractor Tool Ki t 1 8710-1791
Chapter 1 33
General Information
Recommended Test Equipment
Recommended Test Equipment
Equi pment requi red for operati on veri cati on, performance tests,
adjustments, troubl eshooti ng, and the Test and Adjustment Modul e i s
l i sted i n Tabl e 1-3 on page 34. Other equi pment may be substi tuted i f i t
meets or exceeds the cri ti cal speci cati ons l i sted i n the tabl e. Refer to
the HP 8560 E-Series and EC-Series Spectrum Analyzer Calibration
Guidefor the performance tests.
34 Chapter 1
General Information
Recommended Test Equipment
Table 1-3 Recommended Test Equipment
Instrument Critical Specications for Equipment Substitution Recommended
Model
Use
Sources
Synthesi zed Frequency range: HP 8340A/B*
P,A,T,
sweeper 10 MHz to 12.0 GHz HP 83630A M,V
(tworequired)) Opt 001, 008
Frequency accuracy (CW): 1 10
9
/day
Level i ng modes: I nternal &External
Modul ati on modes: AM &Pul se
Power l evel range: 80 to +16 dBm
Synthesi zer/ Frequency range: 200 Hz to 80 MHz
HP 3335A*,

P,A,T,
l evel
generator
Frequency accuracy: 1 10
7
/month
M,V
Fl atness: 0.15 dB
Attenuator accuracy: <0.09 dB
External 10 MHz reference i nput
Frequency resol uti on: 1 Hz
Synthesi zed Frequency range: 100 kHz to 2.5 GHz HP 8663A
P,V
si gnal
generator
Resi dual SSB phase noi se at 1 GHz:
<73 dBc/Hz at 10 Hz offset
<107 dBc/Hz at 1 kHz offset
<124 dBc/Hz at 10 kHz offset
<124 dBc/Hz at 100 kHz offset
Pul se/functi on Frequency range: 10 kHz to 50 MHz HP 8116A
P,A
generator Pul se wi dth: 200 ns
Output ampl i tude: 5 V peak-to-peak
Functi ons: pul se &tri angl e
Pul se ri se ti me: <100 ns
TTL sync output
AM/FM Frequency range: 1 MHz to 200 MHz HP 8640B
A
si gnal
generator
Frequency modul ati on mode HP 8642A
Modul ati on osci l l ator frequency: 1 kHz
FM peak devi ati on: 5 kHz
* Part of mi crowave workstati on;

I f an HP 3335A i s not avai l abl e, see chapter 2a for performance tests usi ng
al ternate equi pment.
P = performance tests; A = adjustments; M = test & adjustment modul e
T = troubl eshooti ng;
V = operati on veri cati on
Chapter 1 35
General Information
Recommended Test Equipment
Counters
Frequency Output frequency: 10 MHz HP 5061B
P,A
standard
Accuracy: <1 10
10
Mi crowave Frequency range: 9 MHz to 26.5 GHz HP 5343A* P,A,M,V
frequency
counter
Ti mebase accuracy (agi ng): <5 10
10
/day
Opti on 001
External frequency reference i nput
Uni versal Modes: TI AB, frequency count HP 5334A/B
P
counter Ti me i nterval measurement range: 100 ns to 120 s
Frequency count range: 400 Hz to 11 MHz
Frequency resol uti on: 1 mHz
Ti mebase accuracy (agi ng): <3 10
7
/month
External 10 MHz reference i nput
Receivers
Spectrum
anal yzer
Frequency range: 300 kHz to 7 GHz HP 8566B* P,A,T
(for HP
8560E/ EC
Rel ati ve ampl i tude accuracy:
Option 002) 300 kHz to 2.7 GHz: <1.8 dB
300 kHz to 7 GHz: <4.0 dB
Absol ute ampl i tude accuracy:
3.9 GHz to 6.9 GHz: <2.7 dB
Frequency accuracy:
<10 kHz at 7 GHz
Spectrum
anal yzer
Frequency range: 300 kHz to 7 GHz HP 8566B*
A,T
Ampl i tude range: 70 dBm to +20 dBm
Measuri ng Compati bl e w/power sensors HP 8902A*
P,A,T,
recei ver dB rel ati ve mode M,V
Resol uti on: 0.01 dB
Reference accuracy: <1.2%
* Part of mi crowave workstati on
P = performance tests; A = adjustments; M = test & adjustment modul e;
T = troubl eshooti ng;
V = operati on veri cati on
Table 1-3 Recommended Test Equipment
Instrument Critical Specications for Equipment Substitution Recommended
Model
Use
36 Chapter 1
General Information
Recommended Test Equipment
Sensors
Power sensor Frequency range: 10 MHz to 12 GHz HP 8481A*
P,A,T,
Maxi mum SWR: M,V
1.40 (10 to 30 MHz)
1.18 (30 to 50 MHz)
1.10 (50 MHz to 2 GHz)
1.18 (2 to 12.4 GHz)
Power sensor Frequency range: 250 MHz to 350 MHz HP 8481D
P,A
Power range: 100 nW to 10 W
Maxi mum SWR: 1.15 (250 to 350 MHz)
Power sensor Frequency range: 100 kHz to 2.9 GHz HP 8482A*
P,A,T,
Maxi mum SWR: M,V
1.1 (1 MHz to 2.0 GHz)
1.30 (2.0 GHz to 2.9 GHz)
Other
Equipment
Control l er Requi red to run operati on veri cati on software HP 9816A,
V
and adjustment/di agnosti c software (HP 8564E/ HP 9836A/C,
HP 8565E) HP 310, 320
HP 332, 360
Osci l l oscope Bandwi dth (3 dB): dc to 100 MHz HP 54501A*
P,A,T
Two channel s
Mi ni mum verti cal deecti on factor: 5 mV/di v
Mi ni mum ti mebase setti ng: <100 ns
Di gi ti zi ng di spl ay wi th ti me cursors
Del ta-t cursor accuracy i n 500 ns/Di v: <0.1 s
Ampl i er Frequency range: HP 11975A
P
HP 8560E/EC, 2.0 to 2.9 GHz
HP 8561E, 2.0 to 6.5 GHz
HP 8563E, 2.0 to 8.0 GHz
HP 8564E, 2.0 to 8.0 GHz
HP 8565E, 2.0 to 8.0 GHz
Mi ni mum output power (l evel ed)
2.0 to 8.0 GHz: +16 dBm
* Part of mi crowave workstati on
P = performance tests; A = adjustments; M = test & adjustment modul e; T = troubl eshooti ng;
V = operati on veri cati on
Table 1-3 Recommended Test Equipment
Instrument Critical Specications for Equipment Substitution Recommended
Model
Use
Chapter 1 37
General Information
Recommended Test Equipment
Output SWR (l evel ed): <1.7
Power suppl y Output vol tage: 24 Vdc HP 6114A
A
Output vol tage accuracy: <0.2 V
Si gnature
mul ti meter
Cl ock frequency >10 MHz HP 5005A/B
T
Ti me i nterval functi on
Di gi tal
vol tmeter
Range: 15 Vdc to +120 Vdc HP 3456A*
A,T
Accuracy: <1 mV on 10 V range
I nput i mpedance: 1 M
Probes
DVM test l eads 36 i nches, al l i gator cl i ps, probe ti ps HP 34118A
A,T
Hi gh-frequency
probe
No substi tute HP 85024A T
Hi gh-vol tage
probe
Vol tage di vi si on rati o: 1000:1 HP 34111A T
Accessori es
Di recti onal Frequency range: 1 to 80 MHz HP 8721A
P
bri dge Coupl i ng: 6 dB (nomi nal )
Maxi mum coupl i ng devi ati on: <1 dB (nomi nal )
Di recti vi ty: 40 dB mi ni mum
I mpedance: 50 (nomi nal )
Di recti onal Frequency range: 2.0 to 6.5 GHz 0955-0098
P
coupl er Coupl i ng: 16.0 dB (nomi nal )
Maxi mum coupl i ng devi ati on: 1 dB (nomi nal )
Di recti vi ty: 14 dB mi ni mum
Fl atness: 0.75 dB maxi mum
VSWR: <1.45
I nserti on l oss: <1.3 dB
10 dB step Attenuati on range: 30 dB HP 355D
P,V
attenuator Frequency range: dc to 80 MHz
Connectors: BNC(f)
1 dB step Attenuati on range: 12 dB HP 355C
P,V
attenuator Frequency range: dc to 80 MHz
* Part of mi crowave workstati on
V = operati on veri cati on
P = performance tests; A = adjustments; M = test & adjustment modul e; T = troubl eshooti ng;
Table 1-3 Recommended Test Equipment
Instrument Critical Specications for Equipment Substitution Recommended
Model
Use
38 Chapter 1
General Information
Recommended Test Equipment
Connectors: BNC(f)
20 dB xed Frequency range: dc to 18 GHz HP 8491B
P,V
attenuator Attenuati on accuracy: <1 dB Opti on 020
Maxi mum SWR: 1.2 (dc to 2.9 GHz)
10 dB xed Frequency range: dc to 18 GHz HP 8491B
P,V
attenuator Attenuati on accuracy: <0.6 dB Opti on 010
Maxi mum SWR: 1.2 (dc to 2.9 GHz)
Reference
attenuator
suppl i ed wi th HP 8481D HP 11708A
P,A
Termi nati on Frequency range: dc to 2.9 GHz HP 908A P,M,V
I mpedance: 50
Maxi mum SWR: <1.10
Connector: Type N(m)
Low-pass l ter Cutoff frequency: 50 MHz 0955-0306
P,M,V
Rejecti on at 65 MHz: >40 dB
Rejecti on at 75 MHz: >60 dB
Power spl i tter Frequency range: 1 kHz to 12 GHz HP 11667A
P,A,M,V
I nserti on l oss: 6 dB (nomi nal )
Output tracki ng: <0.25 dB
Equi val ent output SWR: <1.22
Servi ce
accessory ki t
No substi tute 08562-60021
A,T
Tuni ng tool No substi tute 8710-1010 A
Cables
Test cabl e Connectors: BNC (m)-to-SMB (f) 85680-60093
A,M
Length: 61 cm (24 i n.)
Cabl e,
RG-214/U
Connectors: Type N (m) HP 11500A
P,V
Length: 91 cm (36 i n.)
Cabl e Connectors: SMA (m) 8120-1578
P
Length: 24 to 36 i nches
* Part of mi crowave workstati on
P = performance tests; A = adjustments; M = test & adjustment modul e; T = troubl eshooti ng;
V = operati on veri cati on
Table 1-3 Recommended Test Equipment
Instrument Critical Specications for Equipment Substitution Recommended
Model
Use
Chapter 1 39
General Information
Recommended Test Equipment
Cabl e, 50
coaxi al
Connectors: BNC (m) HP 10503A P,A,V
(ve required) Length: 122 cm (48 i n.)
Cabl e Frequency range: 30 Hz to 26.5 GHz 8120-4921
P,A,M,V
(two required) Maxi mum SWR: <1.4 at 26.5 GHz
Maxi mum i nserti on l oss: 3 dB
Connectors: APC 3.5 (m), both ends
Length: 61 cm (24 i n.)
Cabl e Frequency range: 30 Hz to 50 GHz 8120-6164
P,A,V,T
(for HP 8564E Maxi mum SWR: <1.55 at 50 GHz
and HP
8565E)
Maxi mum i nserti on l oss: 5.75 dB
Connectors: 2.4 mm (f) to 2.4 mm (m)
Length: 1 m (39 i n.)
Cabl e, HP-I B Requi red w/operati on veri cati on software HP 10833B
P,A,M
(eight
required)
Requi red w/HP 85629B test & adjustment modul e
Length: 2 m (6.6 ft.)
Adapters
Adapter Type N(f)-to-BNC(m) 1250-1477
P,A
Adapter Type N(m)-to-BNC(f) 1250-1476 P,A,V
(three
required)
Adapter Type N(f)-to-BNC(f) 1250-1474 P,V
Adapter Type N(m)-to-N(m) 1250-1475 P
Adapter Type N(f)-to-APC 3.5(m) 1250-1750 A
Adapter Type N(m)-to-APC 3.5(m) 1250-1743 P,M,V
(two required)
Adapter Type N(m)-to-APC 3.5(f) 1250-1744
P,V
* Part of mi crowave workstati on
P = performance tests; A = adjustments; M = test & adjustment modul e; T = troubl eshooti ng;
V = operati on veri cati on
Table 1-3 Recommended Test Equipment
Instrument Critical Specications for Equipment Substitution Recommended
Model
Use
40 Chapter 1
General Information
Recommended Test Equipment
Adapter Type N(m)-to-BNC(m) 1250-1473 P
Adapter Type N(m)-to-N(f) 1250-1472 P
Adapter Type N(f)-to-APC 3.5(f) 1250-1745 P,V
(two required)
Adapter Type N(m)-to-SMA(f) 1250-1250
P,V
(two required)
Adapter Type N(f)-to-SMA(f) 1250-1772
P
Adapter BNC(f)-to-BNC(f) 1250-0059 A
Adapter BNC tee(f)(m)(f) 1250-0781 P,A,M,V
Adapter BNC(f)-to-SMA(m) 1250-1200 P,A,V
Adapter BNC(f)-to-dual banana pl ug 1251-2816 A,T
Adapter APC 3.5(f)-to-APC 3.5(f) 5061-5311 P,M,V
(two required)
Adapter APC 3.5(m)-to-APC 3.5(m) 1250-1748
P,V
(two required)
Adapter 2.4 mm(f)-to-2.4 mm(f) HP 11900B
P,A,T,V
Adapter APC 3.5(f)-to-2.4 mm(f) HP 11901B P
Adapter APC 3.5(m)-to-2.4 mm(f) HP 11901D P
Adapter Type N(f)-to-2.4 mm(f) HP 11903B P,A,T,V
Adapter Type N(f)-to-2.4 mm(m) HP 11903C P
* Part of mi crowave workstati on
P = performance tests; A = adjustments; M = test & adjustment modul e;
T = troubl eshooti ng;
V = operati on veri cati on
Table 1-3 Recommended Test Equipment
Instrument Critical Specications for Equipment Substitution Recommended
Model
Use
Chapter 1 41
General Information
Electrostatic Discharge
Electrostatic Discharge
El ectrostati c di scharge (ESD) can damage or destroy el ectroni c
components. Therefore, al l work performed on assembl i es consi sti ng of
el ectroni c components shoul d be done at a stati c-free workstati on.
Fi gure 1-3 i s an exampl e of a stati c-safe workstati on usi ng two ki nds of
ESD protecti on:
Conducti ve tabl e mat and wri st-strap combi nati on.
Conducti ve oor mat and heel -strap combi nati on.
These methods may be used together or separatel y.
Figure 1-3 Example of a Static-Safe Workstation
42 Chapter 1
General Information
Electrostatic Discharge
Reducing Potential for ESD Damage
The suggesti ons that fol l ow may hel p reduce ESD damage that occurs
duri ng i nstrument testi ng and servi ci ng:
Before connecti ng any coaxi al cabl e to a spectrum anal yzer
connector for the rst ti me each day, momentari l y ground the center
and outer connectors of the cabl e.
Personnel shoul d be grounded wi th a resi stor-i sol ated wri st strap
before touchi ng the center i n of any connector and before removi ng
any assembl y from the uni t.
Be sure al l i nstruments are properl y earth-grounded to prevent
bui l d-up of stati c di scharge.
Static-Safe Accessories
Table 1-4 Static-Safe Accessories
HP Part
Number
Description
9300-0797 Set i ncl udes: 3M stati c control mat 0.6 m 1.2 m (2
ft 4 ft) and 4.6 cm (15 ft) ground wi re. (The
wri st-strap and wri st-strap cord are not i ncl uded.
They must be ordered separatel y.)
9300-0980 Wri st-strap cord 1.5 m (5 ft)
9300-1383 Wri st-strap, col or bl ack, stai nl ess steel , wi thout
cord, has four adjustabl e l i nks and a 7 mm
post-type connecti on.
9300-1169 ESD heel -strap (reusabl e 6 to 12 months).
Chapter 1 43
General Information
Returning Instruments for Service
Returning Instruments for Service
Service Tag
I f you are returni ng the i nstrument to Hewl ett-Packard for servi ci ng,
l l i n and attach a bl ue servi ce tag. Servi ce tags are suppl i ed i n the
back of thi s chapter.
Pl ease be as speci c as possi bl e about the nature of the probl em. I f you
have recorded any error messages that appeared on the screen, or have
compl eted a performance test record, or have any other speci c data on
the performance of the spectrum anal yzer, pl ease send a copy of thi s
i nformati on wi th the uni t.
Original Packaging
Before shi ppi ng, pack the uni t i n the ori gi nal factory packagi ng
materi al s i f they are avai l abl e. I f the ori gi nal materi al s are
unavai l abl e, i denti cal packagi ng materi al s may be acqui red through
any Hewl ett-Packard Sal es and Servi ce Ofce. Descri pti ons of the
packagi ng materi al s are l i sted i n Fi gure 1-4 on page 45.
Other Packaging
CAUTION Spectrum anal yzer damage can resul t from usi ng packagi ng materi al s
other than those speci ed. Never use styrene pel l ets i n any shape as
packagi ng materi al s. They do not adequatel y cushi on the equi pment or
prevent i t from shi fti ng i n the carton. They cause equi pment damage by
generati ng stati c el ectri ci ty and by l odgi ng i n the spectrum anal yzer
fan.
Repackage the spectrum anal yzer i n the ori gi nal packagi ng materi al s
or wi th commerci al l y avai l abl e materi al s descri bed i n steps 4 and 5,
bel ow.
1. Attach a compl eted servi ce tag to the i nstrument.
2. I nstal l the front-panel cover on the i nstrument.
3. Wrap the i nstrument i n anti stati c pl asti c to reduce the possi bi l i ty of
damage caused by el ectrostati c di scharge.
44 Chapter 1
General Information
Returning Instruments for Service
4. Use the ori gi nal materi al s or a strong shi ppi ng contai ner that i s
doubl e-wal l ed, corrugated cardboard carton wi th 159 kg (350 l b)
bursti ng strength. The carton must be both l arge enough and strong
enough to accommodate the spectrum anal yzer and al l ows at l east 3
to 4 i nches on al l si des of the spectrum anal yzer for packi ng
materi al .
5. Surround the equi pment wi th at l east 3 to 4 i nches of packi ng
materi al , or enough to prevent the equi pment from movi ng i n the
carton. I f packi ng foam i s unavai l abl e, the best al ternati ve i s SD-240
Ai r Cap from Seal ed Ai r Corporati on (Commerce, CA 90001). Ai r
Cap l ooks l i ke a pl asti c sheet covered wi th 1-1/4 i nch ai r-l l ed
bubbl es. Use the pi nk-col ored Ai r Cap to reduce stati c el ectri ci ty.
Wrap the equi pment several ti mes i n thi s materi al to both protect
the equi pment and prevent i t from movi ng i n the carton.
6. Seal the shi ppi ng contai ner securel y wi th strong nyl on adhesi ve
tape.
7. Mark the shi ppi ng contai ner "FRAGI LE, HANDLE WI TH CARE"to
assure careful handl i ng.
8. Retai n copi es of al l shi ppi ng papers.
Chapter 1 45
General Information
Returning Instruments for Service
Figure 1-4 HP 8560E/EC Shipping Container and Cushioning Materials
Table 1-5 Static-Safe Accessories
Item Description HP Part Number
1 9211-5636 Outer Carton
2 08590-80013 Pads (2)
3 08590-80014 Bottom Tray
46 Chapter 1
General Information
Sales and Service Ofces
Sales and Service Ofces
Hewl ett-Packard has sal es and servi ce ofces around the worl d
provi di ng compl ete support for Hewl ett-Packard products. To obtai n
servi ci ng i nformati on, or to order repl acement parts, contact the
nearest Hewl ett-Packard Sal es and Servi ce Ofce l i sted i n Tabl e 1-6 on
page 47. I n any correspondence, be sure to i ncl ude the perti nent
i nformati on about model numbers, seri al numbers, and assembl y part
numbers.
NOTE Wi thi n the USA, a tol l -free phone number i s avai l abl e for orderi ng
repl acement parts. Refer to the secti on enti tl ed, "Orderi ng I nformati on"
i n Chapter 4, "Repl aceabl e Parts," for the phone number and more
i nformati on.
Chapter 1 47
General Information
Sales and Service Ofces
Table 1-6 Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Ofces
UNI TED STATES
I nstrument Support Center
Hewl ett-Packard Company
(800) 403-0801
EUROPEAN FI ELD OPERATI ONS
Headquarters
Hewl ett-Packard S.A.
150, Route du Nant-dAvri l
1217 Meyri n 2/Geneva
Swi tzerl and
(41 22) 780.8111
France
Hewl ett-Packard France
1 Avenue Du Canada
Zone DActi vi te De
Courtaboeuf
F-91947 Les Ul i s Cedex
France
(33 1) 69 82 60 60
Germany
Hewl ett-Packard GmbH
Hewl ett-Packard Strasse
61352 Bad Homburg v.d.H
Germany
(49 6172) 16-0
Great Bri tai n
Hewl ett-Packard Ltd.
Eskdal e Road, Wi nnersh
Tri angl e Woki ngham,
Berkshi re RG41 5DZ Engl and
(44 118) 9696622
I NTERCON FI ELD OPERATI ONS
Headquarters
Hewl ett-Packard Company
3495 Deer Creek Rd.
Pal o Al to, CA 94304-1316
USA
(415) 857-5027
Japan
Hewl ett-Packard Japan, Ltd.
9-1 Takakura-Cho, Hachi oji
Tokyo 192, Japan
(81 426) 60-2111
Austral i a
Hewl ett-Packard Austral i a
Ltd.
31-41 Joseph Street
Bl ackburn, Vi ctori a 3130
(61 3) 895-2895
Si ngapore
Hewl ett-Packard Si ngapore
(Pte.) Ltd.
150 Beach Road
#29-00 Gateway West
Si ngapore 0718
(65) 291-9088
Canada
Hewl ett-Packard (Canada) Ltd.
17500 South Servi ce Road
Trans-Canada Hi ghway
Ki rkl and, Quebec H9J 2X8
Canada
(514) 697-4232
Tai wan
Hewl ett-Packard Tai wan
8th Fl oor, H-P Bui l di ng
337 Fu Hsi ng North Road
Tai pei , Tai wan
(886 2) 712-0404
Chi na
Chi na Hewl ett-Packard Co.
38 Bei San Huan X1 Road
Shuang Yu Shu
Hai Di an Di stri ct
Bei ji ng, Chi na
(86 1) 256-6888
48 Chapter 1
General Information
Sales and Service Ofces
49
2
Adjustment Procedures
50 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
Introduction
Introduction
Thi s chapter contai ns i nformati on on automated and manual
adjustment procedures for the HP 8560E/EC spectrum anal yzer.
Perform the automated procedures usi ng the HP 85629B Tests and
Adjustment Modul e (TAM). Never perform adjustments as routi ne
mai ntenance. Adjustments shoul d be performed after a repai r or
performance test fai l ure.
I ntroducti on ........................................................................... page 50
Safety Consi derati ons ......................................................... page 51
Whi ch Adjustments Shoul d Be Performed?....................... page 51
Test Equi pment ................................................................... page 51
Adjustabl e and Factory-Sel ected Components .................. page 51
Adjustment Tool s ................................................................ page 52
I nstrument Servi ce Posi ti on ............................................... page 52
Usi ng the TAM...................................................................... page 57
Test Equi pment ................................................................... page 51
Adjustment I ndi cator .......................................................... page 57
1. Hi gh Vol tage Power Suppl y Adjustment (8560E).......... page 60
2. Di spl ay Adjustment (8560E) .......................................... page 63
3. I F Bandpass Adjustment ................................................ page 70
4. I F Ampl i tude Adjustments ............................................. page 75
5. DC Log Ampl i er Adjustments ...................................... page 80
6. Sampl i ng Osci l l ator Adjustment .................................... page 84
7. YTO Adjustment ............................................................. page 87
8. Fi rst LO Di stri buti on Ampl i er Adjustment................. page 91
9. Tracki ng Generator Power Level Adjustments (002).... page 94
10. Frequency Response Adjustment ................................. page 97
11. Cal i brator Ampl i tude Adjustment ............................. page 101
12. 10 MHz Reference Adjustment-TCXO (Opti on 103) . page 103
13. Demodul ator Adjustment ........................................... page 105
14. External Mi xer Bi as Adjustment ............................... page 108
15. External Mi xer Ampl i tude Adjustment ..................... page 110
16. Si gnal I D Osci l l ator Adjustment (prex<3517A)...... page 114
17. 10 MHz Reference Adjustment-OCXO....................... page 118
18. Tracki ng Osci l l ator Adjustment (Opti on 002)........... page 122
19. 16 MHz PLL Adjustment............................................ page 126
20. 600 MHz Reference Adjustment (prex> 3406A)...... page 130
NOTE Before performi ng any adjustments, al l ow the i nstrument to warm up
for 5 mi nutes.
Chapter 2 51
Adjustment Procedures
Introduction
Safety Considerations
Al though thi s i nstrument has been desi gned i n accordance wi th
i nternati onal safety standards, thi s manual contai ns i nformati on,
cauti ons, and warni ngs whi ch must be fol l owed to ensure safe operati on
and to prevent damage to the i nstrument. Servi ce and adjustments
shoul d be performed onl y by qual i ed servi ce personnel .
WARNING Adjustmentsin thissection areperformed with power supplied
to the instrument and protective covers removed. There are
voltages at many points in the instrument which can, if
contacted, cause personal injury. Be extremely careful.
Adjustments should be performed only by trained service
personnel.
WARNING Power is still applied to this instrument with the LINE switch
in the off position. Before removing or installing any assembly
or printed circuit board, remove the line-power cord.
WARNING Capacitors inside the instrument may still be charged, even if
theinstrument hasbeen disconnected fromitssourceof supply.
WARNING Use a nonmetallic adjustment tool whenever possible.
Which Adjustments Should Be Performed?
Tabl e 2-1 on page 52 l i sts the manual adjustments that shoul d be
performed when an assembl y i s repai red or changed. I t i s i mportant to
perform the adjustments i n the order i ndi cated to ensure that the
i nstrument meets i ts speci cati ons.
Test Equipment
The equi pment requi red for the manual adjustment procedures i s l i sted
i n Tabl e 2-1 on page 52, "Recommended Test Equi pment." Any
equi pment that sati ses the cri ti cal speci cati ons gi ven i n the tabl e
may be substi tuted for the preferred test equi pment.
I f an HP 3335A i s not avai l abl e for performance tests, tests usi ng
al ternate test equi pment are avai l abl e. See Chapter 2a, Adjustment
Procedures: HP 3335A Source not Avai l abl e, on page 131.
Adjustable and Factory-Selected Components
Tabl e 2-2 on page 54 l i sts the adjustabl e components by reference
desi gnati on and name. For each component, the tabl e provi des a
descri pti on and l i sts the adjustment number.
52 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
Introduction
Refer to Tabl e 2-3 on page 56 for a compl ete l i st of factory-sel ected
components used i n the i nstrument al ong wi th thei r functi ons.
Factory-sel ected components are i denti ed wi th an asteri sk on the
schemati c di agrams.
Adjustment Tools
For adjustments requi ri ng a nonmetal l i c tuni ng tool , use ber tuni ng
tool , HP part number 8170-0033.
Two di fferent tuni ng tool s may be necessary for I F bandpass
adjustments, dependi ng upon the type of tuni ng sl ug used i n the
sl ug-tuned i nductors. I f the tuni ng sl ug requi res a sl otted tuni ng tool ,
use HP part number 8710-1010. I f the tuni ng sl ug requi res a forked
tuni ng tool , use HP part number 8710-0772.
Never try to force an adjustment control . Thi s i s especi al l y cri ti cal
when tuni ng vari abl e capaci tors or sl ug-tuned i nductors. Requi red
servi ce accessori es, wi th part numbers, are l i sted under "Servi ce Ki t"i n
Chapter 1.
Instrument Service Position
Refer to Chapter 3 for i nformati on on removi ng the spectrum anal yzer
cover assembl y and accessi ng al l i nternal assembl i es.
Table 2-1 Related Adjustments
Assembly
Changed or
Repaired
Perform the Following Related Adjustments in the
Order Listed
Adjustment
Number
A1A1 Keyboard No rel ated adjustment
A1A2 RPG No rel ated adjustment
A2 Control l er 16 MHz PLL Adjustment 19
Di spl ay Adjustment (8560E onl y) 2
I f the ol d EEROM cannot be used i n a new A2 or i f an
EEROM must be repl aced, the fol l owi ng adjustments
must be performed:
Fi rst LO Di stri buti on Ampl i er Adjustment 8
External Mi xer Ampl i tude Adjustment 15
Frequency Response Adjustment 10
A3 I nterface Di spl ay Adjustment (fast zero span) (8560E onl y) 2
Frequency Response Adjustment 10
A4 Log Amp/Cal
Osc
Di spl ay Adjustment (fast zero span) (8560E onl y) 2
Demodul ator Adjustment 13
I F Ampl i tude Adjustment 4
DC Log Ampl i er Adjustment 5
Chapter 2 53
Adjustment Procedures
Introduction
A5 I F I F Bandpass Adjustment 3
I F Ampl i tude Adjustment 4
A6 Power Suppl y Hi gh Vol tage Power Suppl y Adjustment (8560E onl y) 1
Di spl ay Adjustment (8560E onl y) 2
A6A1 HV Modul e Hi gh Vol tage Power Suppl y Adjustment (8560E onl y) 1
Di spl ay Adjustment (8560E onl y) 2
A7 1ST LO Fi rst LO Di stri buti on Ampl i er Adjustment 8
Di stri buti on
Ampl i er
Frequency Response Adjustment (or perform the
Frequency Response Performance Test i n the
10
HP 8560 E-Series and EC-Series Spectrum Analyzer
Calibration Guide. The adjustment must be performed i f
the performance test fai l s.)
A8 Low Band Mi xer Frequency Response Adjustment 10
A9 I nput
Attenuator
Frequency Response Adjustment (or perform the
Frequency Response Performance Test i n the
10
HP 8560 E-Series and EC-Series Spectrum Analyzer
Calibration Guide. The adjustment must be performed i f
the performance test fai l s.)
A10 Tracki ng
Generator
Tracki ng Generator Power Level Adjustment 9
Frequency Response Adjustment 10
A11 YTO YTO Adjustment 7
Frequency Response Adjustment (or perform the
Frequency Response Performance Test i n the
10
HP 8560 E-Series and EC-Series Spectrum Analyzer
Calibration Guide. The adjustment must be performed i f
the performance test fai l s.)
A13 2nd Converter Frequency Response Adjustment 10
A14 Frequency
Control
Di spl ay Adjustment (fast zero span) 2
YTO Adjustment 7
Fi rst LO Di stri buti on Ampl i er Adjustment 8
Frequency Response Adjustment 10
A15 RF 10 MHz Reference Adjustment (Opti on 103) 12
Cal i brator Ampl i tude Adjustment 11
External Mi xer Bi as Adjustment 14
Sampl i ng Osci l l ator Adjustment 6
Si gnal I D Osci l l ator Adjustment 16
External Mi xer Ampl i tude Adjustment 15
Table 2-1 Related Adjustments
Assembly
Changed or
Repaired
Perform the Following Related Adjustments in the
Order Listed
Adjustment
Number
54 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
Introduction
Frequency Response Adjustment 10
A15U100 Sampl er Sampl i ng Osci l l ator Adjustment 6
A17 CRT Dri ver Di spl ay Adjustment (8560E onl y) 2
A18V1 CRT Di spl ay Adjustment (8560E onl y) 2
A19 HP-I B No rel ated adjustment
A21 OCXO 10 MHz Reference Adjustment (OCXO) 17
Table 2-2 Adjustable Components
Reference
Designator
Adjustment
Name
Adjustment
Number
Description
A2R152 16 MHz PLL ADJ 19 Adjusts the free-runni ng frequency of the
16 MHz CPU cl ock.
A2R206 DGTL X GAI N 2 Adjusts the hori zontal gai n i n the X l i ne generator.
A2R209 SWEEP OFFSET 2 Adjusts the begi nni ng of the trace to the l eftmost verti cal
grati cul e l i ne i n fast-anal og, zero-span mode.
A2R215 DGTL Y GAI N 2 Adjusts the verti cal gai n i n the Y l i ne generator.
A2R218 VI DEO OFFSET 2 Adjusts the verti cal posi ti on i n fast-anal og, zero-span to
match the di gi tal zero-span i nput.
A2R262 STOP BLANK 2 Adjusts the bl anki ng at the end of a vector on the di spl ay.
A2R263 START BLANK 2 Adjusts the bl anki ng at the start of a vector on the
di spl ay.
A2R268 VI DEO GAI N 2 Adjusts the verti cal gai n i n fast-anal og, zero- span to
match wi th the di gi tal zero-span i nput
A2R271 SWEEP GAI N 2 Adjusts the end of the trace to the ri ghtmost
verti cal -grati cul e l i ne i n fast-anal og,
zero-span mode.
A4C707 FM DEMOD 13 Adjusts the FM demodul ati on for a peak response.
A4R445 LI MI TER
PHASE
5 Adjusts Li mi ter Phase for peak response
A4R531 LOG AMP TOS 5 Mi ni mi zes Log error near Top of Screen.
A4R544 LI N FI DELI TY
BOW
5 Mi ni mi zes Li neari ty Fi del i ty error.
A4R826 CAL OSC
AMPTD
4 Sets cal i brati on osci l l ator output power.
(nomi nal l y 35 dBm). Thi s power i s i njected i nto the I F
duri ng the AUTO I F ADJUST routi nes.
A5L300 LC CTR 1 3 Adjusts center frequency of rst stage of LC
bandwi dth l ter to 10.7 MHz.
A5L301 LC CTR 2 3 Adjusts center frequency of second stage of LC bandwi dth
l ter to 10.7 MHz.
A5L700 LC CTR 3 3 Adjusts center frequency of thi rd stage of LC
bandwi dth l ter to 10.7 MHz.
Table 2-1 Related Adjustments
Assembly
Changed or
Repaired
Perform the Following Related Adjustments in the
Order Listed
Adjustment
Number
Chapter 2 55
Adjustment Procedures
Introduction
A5L702 LC CTR 4 3 Adjusts center frequency of fourth stage of LC bandwi dth
l ter to 10.7 MHz.
A5R343 15 DB ATT 4 Adjusts the attenuati on of the Reference 15 dB
attenuator for 15 dB between mi ni mum
and maxi mum attenuati on.
A5T200 XTAL CTR 1 3 Adjusts center frequency of rst stage of crystal
bandwi dth l ter to 10.7 MHz.
A5T202 XTAL CTR 2 3 Adjusts center frequency of second stage of crystal
bandwi dth l ter to 10.7 MHz.
A5T500 XTAL CTR 3 3 Adjusts center frequency of thi rd stage of crystal
bandwi dth l ter to 10.7 MHz.
A5T502 XTAL CTR 4 3 Adjusts center frequency of fourth stage of crystal
bandwi dth l ter to 10.7 MHz.
A6R410 HV ADJ 1 Adjusts the vol tage between A6TP405 and A6TP401 to
the vol tage marked on the A6A1
Hi gh Vol tage Modul e.
A10R13 10 dB ADJ 9 Offsets power l evel range of A10 Tracki ng
Generator.
A10R18 0 dB ADJ 9 Adjusts gai n of power l evel range of A10
Tracki ng Generator.
A10C3 TRK OSC CTR 20 Centers range of the A10 Tracki ng Generator
tracki ng osci l l ator.
A14R42 6.01 GHz 7 Adjusts the mai n coi l tune dri ver current at a
YTO frequency of 6.01 GHz (near the upper YTO
frequency l i mi t)
A14R76 FM SPAN 7 Adjusts the FM span accuracy by affecti ng the sensi ti vi ty
of the FM coi l dri ver.
A14R93 3.2 GHz 7 Adjusts the mai n coi l xed dri ver current at a
YTO frequency of 3.2 GHz (near the l ower
YTO frequency l i mi t).
A15C100 SMPL MATCH 1 6 Transforms the sampl er i nput i mpedance to 50 ohms over
the 280 to 298 MHz range
A15C210 VCO RANGE 6 Adjusts the VCO tank capaci tance so that 21 V on the
VCO tune l i ne equal s 298 MHz
VCO frequency.
A15C629 298 MHz ADJ 17 Fi ne adjusts the 298 MHz SI G I D Osci l l ator (Opt. 008)
frequency to opti mi ze i ts performance.
A15U302 10 MHz ADJ 12 Adjusts frequency of the temperature
compensated crystal osci l l ator (TCXO) to 10 MHz.
A15R561 CAL AMPTD 11 Adjusts ampl i tude of the 300 MHz cal i brator si gnal to
10.0 dBm.
A15R926 EXT BI AS ZERO 14 Adjusts zero bi as poi nt of external mi xer bi as.
A17R4 Z GAI N 2 Adjusts maxi mum i ntensi ty.
A17R11 CUTOFF 2 Adjusts i ntensi ty to turn off bl anked l i nes.
A17R21 Z FOCUS 2 Adjusts focus for l i nes of di fferent bri ghtness.
Table 2-2 Adjustable Components
Reference
Designator
Adjustment
Name
Adjustment
Number
Description
56 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
Introduction
A17R26 X FOCUS 2 Adjusts focus at the l eft and ri ght corners of the di spl ay.
A17R34 COARSE FOCUS 2 Adjusts focus at the center of the di spl ay.
A17R55 X GAI N 2 Adjusts the hori zontal -deecti on ampl i er gai n.
A17R57 X POSN 2 Adjusts the CRT hori zontal posi ti on.
A17R75 Y GAI N 2 Adjusts the verti cal -deecti on ampl i er gai n.
A17R77 Y POSN 2 Adjusts the CRT verti cal posi ti on.
A17R90 TRACE ALI GN 2 Adjusts the di spl ay axi s rotati on.
A17R92 DDD 2 Adjusts focus of the center of the di spl ay.
A17R93 ASTI G 2 Adjusts for the spot roundness on the CRT di spl ay.
Table 2-3 Factory Selected Components
Reference
Designator
Adjustment
Number
Basis of Selection
A5C204 3 Sel ected to opti mi ze center frequency of LC tank that l oads the crystal .
A5C216 3 Sel ected to opti mi ze center frequency of LC tank that l oads the crystal .
A5C326 3 Sel ected to opti mi ze LC pol e center frequency.
A5C327 3 Sel ected to opti mi ze LC pol e center frequency.
A5C505 3 Sel ected to opti mi ze center frequency of LC tank that l oads the crystal .
A5C516 3 Sel ected to opti mi ze center frequency of LC tank that l oads the crystal .
A5C717 3 Sel ected to opti mi ze LC pol e center frequency.
A5C718 3 Sel ected to opti mi ze LC pol e center frequency.
A15U802 16 Sel ected to set the gai n of the second I F to 12 dB.
Table 2-2 Adjustable Components
Reference
Designator
Adjustment
Name
Adjustment
Number
Description
Chapter 2 57
Adjustment Procedures
Using the TAM
Using the TAM
The HP 85629B TAM can be used to perform approxi matel y hal f of the
HP 8560E/EC adjustment procedures. Tabl e 2-4 on page 58 l i sts the
TAM adjustments and thei r correspondi ng manual adjustments.
The TAM adjustments do not i ncl ude procedures for choosi ng
factory-sel ected components. I f an adjustment cannot be made and a
factory-sel ected component must be changed, refer to the correspondi ng
manual adjustment.
To sel ect an adjustment, press MODULE to di spl ay the TAM mai n menu,
then press ADJUST. Posi ti on the poi nter next to the desi red adjustment
usi ng ei ther the knob or step keys. Press EXECUTE, then fol l ow the
i nstructi ons di spl ayed on the screen.
Test Equipment
Duri ng the TAM adjustments, i nstructi ons for setti ng test equi pment
control s are di spl ayed, wi th the excl usi on of the test l i sted bel ow. Test
equi pment for thi s adjustment i s control l ed automati cal l y.
Test 8. Low Band Fl atness
Tabl e 2-5 on page 58 l i sts the test equi pment needed to perform each
TAM adjustment. Requi red model s must be used. Substi tuti ons may be
made for recommended model s. Substi tute sources must operate over
the frequency ranges i ndi cated. Recommended substi tutes are l i sted i n
the Congurati on Menu. I f you must substi tute the source wi th a
user-dened model , the adjustments run faster usi ng a synthesi zed
source rather than an unsynthesi zed source.
NOTE When connecti ng si gnal s from the HP 8340A/B (or any mi crowave
source) to the adjustment setup, use a hi gh frequency test cabl e wi th
mi ni mum attenuati on to 2.9 GHz. HP part number 8120-4921 i s
recommended for i ts ruggedness, repeatabi l i ty, and l ow i nserti on l oss.
Adjustment Indicator
To ai d i n maki ng adjustments, the TAM di spl ays an "Anal og Vol tmeter
Di spl ay Box" al ong the l eft-hand si de of the di spl ay. A hori zontal l i ne
moves i nsi de the box to represent the needl e of an anal og vol tmeter. A
di gi tal readout appears underneath the box. Ti ck marks are often
di spl ayed on the i nsi de edges of the box i ndi cati ng the desi red needl e
posi ti on. (The ti ck marks and needl e are i ntensi ed when the needl e i s
wi thi n thi s acceptabl e regi on.) Duri ng some adjustments, an arrow
appears al ong the ri ght edge of the box. Thi s arrow al ways i ndi cates the
hi ghest posi ti on the needl e has reached. The arrow i s useful when a
58 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
Using the TAM
component must be adjusted for a peak response; i f the peak i s
overshot, the arrow i ndi cates where the peak was. The component can
be readjusted unti l the needl e i s at the same posi ti on as the arrow.
Table 2-4 TAM Adjustments
TAM Adjustment Corresponding Manual Adjustment Adjustment
Number
1. I F Bandpass, LC Pol es I F Bandpass Adjustment 3
2. I F Bandpass, Crystal
Pol es
I F Bandpass Adjustment 3
3. I F Ampl i tude I F Ampl i tude Adjustment 4
4. Li mi ter Phase DC Log Ampl i er Adjustments, A4
Li mi ter Phase
5
5. Li near Fi del i ty DC Log Ampl i er Adjustments, A4
Li near Fi del i ty
5
6. Log Fi del i ty DC Log Ampl i er Adjustments, A4 Log
Fi del i ty
5
7. Sampl i ng Osci l l ator Sampl i ng Osci l l ator Adjustment 6
8. YTO YTO Adjustment 7
9. LO Di stri buti on Amp Fi rst LO Di stri buti on Ampl i er
Adjustment
8
10. Low Band Fl atness Frequency Response Adjustment 10
11. Cal i brator Ampl i tude Cal i brator Ampl i tude Adjustment 11
12. 10 MHz Reference
Osci l l ator
10 MHz Reference Adjustment TCXO 12
(Opti on 103)
13. External Mi xer Bi as * External Mi xer Bi as Adjustment 14
14. External Mi xer
Ampl i tude *
External Mi xer Ampl i tude Adjustment 15
* Adjustment excl uded i f the HP 8560E/EC i s an Opti on 002.
Table 2-5 Required Test Equipment for TAM
Adjustment Equipment Used Required
Model
Recommended
Model
1. I F Bandpass, LC Pol es None
2. I F Bandpass, Crystal
Pol es
None
3. I F Ampl i tude Synthesi zer/Level
Generator
HP
3335A
Test Cabl e (SMB to BNC) 85680-60093
Manual Probe Cabl e
4. Li mi ter Phase Synthesi zer/Level
Generator
HP
3335A
Test Cabl e BNC HP 10503A
5. Li near Fi del i ty Synthesi zer/Level
Generator
HP
3335A
Test Cabl e BNC HP 10503A
Chapter 2 59
Adjustment Procedures
Using the TAM
6. Log Fi del i ty Synthesi zer/Level
Generator
HP
3335A
Test Cabl e BNC HP 10503A
7. Sampl i ng Osci l l ator Manual Probe Cabl e
8. YTO Frequency Counter
(3 to 6.8 GHz)
HP 5342A,
HP 5343A
9. LO Di stri buti on
Ampl i er
Power Meter HP 8902A,
HP 436A,
HP 438A
Power Sensor (3 to 6.8 HP 8485A
GHz, 10 to 20 dBm)
10. Low Band Fl atness Source (10 MHz to 2.9
GHz)
HP 8340A/B
Power Meter HP 8902A,
HP 436A,
HP438A
Power Sensor HP 8482A,
HP 8481A
(10 MHz to 2.9 GHz)
Power Spl i tter HP 11667B
(10 MHz to 2.9 GHz)
11. Cal i brator Ampl i tude Power Meter HP 8902A,
HP 436A,
HP 438A
Power Sensor HP
8482A,
HP 8481A
12. 10 MHz Reference Frequency Counter HP 5342A,
HP 5343A
Osci l l ator (9 to 11 MHz)
13. External Mi xer Bi as Manual Probe Cabl e
14. External Mi xer
Ampl i tude
Power Meter HP 8902A,
HP 436A,
HP 438A
Power Sensor
(310.7 MHz, 25 to 35
HP 8481D,
HP 8484A
dBm)
Source (310.7 MHz, 30 dBm) HP 8340A/B
Table 2-5 Required Test Equipment for TAM
Adjustment Equipment Used Required
Model
Recommended
Model
60 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
1. High Voltage Power Supply Adjustment (8560E only)
1. High Voltage Power Supply Adjustment
(8560E only)
Assembly Adjusted
A6 power suppl y
Related Performance Test
There i s no rel ated performance test for thi s adjustment.
Description
The hi gh vol tage power suppl y i s adjusted to the vol tage marked on the
A6A1 HV modul e. The A6A1 HV modul e i s characteri zed i n the factory
to ensure that the di spl ay l ament vol tage i s set to 6.0 V rms when the
+110 Vdc (nomi nal ) suppl y i s set to the vol tage marked on the HV
modul e.
WARNING To minimize shock hazard, use a nonmetallic adjustment tool
when adjusting the A6 power supply.
WARNING The following procedure probes voltages that, if contacted,
could cause personal injury or death.
NOTE Adjustment of the hi gh vol tage power suppl y shoul d not be a routi ne
mai ntenance procedure. Any adjustments shoul d be done onl y i f the A6
power suppl y, A6A1 HV modul e, or A18 CRT (di spl ay) i s repai red or
repl aced.
NOTE You must perform the di spl ay adjustments after thi s adjustment i f
ei ther the di spl ay or HV modul e has been repl aced.
Chapter 2 61
Adjustment Procedures
1. High Voltage Power Supply Adjustment (8560E only)
Figure 2-1 High Voltage Power Supply Adjustment Setup
Equipment
Di gi tal mul ti meter ...............................HP 3456A
DVM test l eads ................................... HP 34118A
Procedure
WARNING After disconnecting the ac power cord, allow capacitors in the
high voltage supply to discharge for at least 30 seconds before
removing the protective cover from the A6 power supply.
1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer off, di sconnect the power
cord, and remove the spectrum anal yzer cover. Fol d down the A2
control l er, A3 i nterface, A4 l og ampl i er, and A5 I F assembl i es.
Remove the A6 power suppl y cover.
2. Posi ti on the HP 8560E/EC as shown i n Fi gure 2-1. Connect the
negati ve DVM l ead to A6TP401 and the posi ti ve DVM l ead to
A6TP405 (pl ace the posi ti ve DVM l ead on the i nductor (L401) l ead
whi ch i s adjacent to the l abel that reads U401; a whi te square
outl i nes the area on the PC board where thi s l ead i s i nserted i nto the
A6 board).
3. Set the HP 3456A control s as fol l ows:
Functi on ......................................... DC VOLTS
Range ............................................. 1000 VOLTS
4. Reconnect the power cord to the spectrum anal yzer and press LINE to
turn the spectrum anal yzer on.
5. Record the vol tage marked on the A6A1 HV modul e.
62 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
1. High Voltage Power Supply Adjustment (8560E only)
Vol tage marked on A6A1 HV Modul e = 0pt.......................... Vdc
6. Adjust A6R410 HV ADJ for a vol tage equal to the vol tage recorded
i n step 5.
7. Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer off and di sconnect the
power cord. Wai t at l east 30 seconds for the hi gh vol tage power
suppl y capaci tors to di scharge.
8. Di sconnect the DVM test l eads from A6TP401 and A6TP405.
Rei nstal l the power suppl y cover.
Chapter 2 63
Adjustment Procedures
2. Display Adjustment (8560E only)
2. Display Adjustment (8560E only)
Assembly Adjusted
A2 control l er A17 CRT dri ver
Related Performance Test
Sweep Ti me Accuracy (sweep ti mes <30 ms)
Description
Coarse adjustment of the deecti on ampl i ers, Z-axi s ampl i ers, and
l i ne generators i s done usi ng the CRTadjust pattern. Fi ne adjustments
use the grati cul e. The fast zero-span ampl i tude adjustments correct for
di fferences between anal og and di gi tal di spl ay modes. The di spl ayed
sweep ti me accuracy i s adjusted i n fast zero-span sweep adjustments
for non-Opti on 007 spectrum anal yzers.
Figure 2-2 Display Adjustment Setup
Equipment
10 dB VHF step attenuator routi nes................................ HP355D
Photometer/radi ometer routi nes ................................ TEK J16-TV
Adapters
Type N (m) to BNC (f) 1250-1476
Cables
BNC, 122 cm (2 required)HP 10503A
64 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
2. Display Adjustment (8560E only)
Procedure
1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer off. Remove the spectrum
anal yzer cover and fol d out the A2 Control l er and A3 I nterface
assembl i es as i l l ustrated i n Fi gure 2-2 on page 63. Connect the CAL
OUTPUTto the I NPUT. Adjustment l ocati ons are shown on the CRT
neck for A17 adjustments and i n Fi gure 2-4 on page 67 for the A2
adjustments.
Preliminary Adjustments
2. Set A17R55 X GAI N, A17R75 Y GAI N, A17R92 DDD, A17R93
ASTI G, A2R206 DGTL X GAI N, A2R215 DGTL Y GAI N, A2R262
STOP BLANK, and A2R263 START BLANK to mi drange. Al so set
the rear panel X POSN, Y POSN, and TRACE ALI GN to mi drange.
3. Set A17R21 Z FOCUS, A17R26 X FOCUS, and A17R11 CUTOFF
ful l y countercl ockwi se.
4. Set A17R4 Z GAI N ful l y cl ockwi se.
5. Turn the spectrum anal yzer on and al l ow i t to warm up for at l east 3
mi nutes. Adjust A17R11 CUTOFF unti l the di spl ay i s vi si bl e and
A17R34 COARSE FOCUS for best possi bl e focus.
Cutoff Adjustment
6. Press PRESET, DISPLAY, INTENSITY, 255, ENTER, STORE INTENSITY,
MORE 1 of 2, FOCUS, 127, ENTER, STORE FOCUS, then GRAT OFF.
Adjust A17R11 CUTOFF unti l the l i ne between the bottom of trace
A and the annunci ators at the bottom of the di spl ay just di sappears.
Deection Adjustments
7. Press GRAT ON, MORE 2 of 2, INTENSITY, 80 ENTER, STORE
INTENSITY, CAL, MORE 1 of 2, and CRT ADJ PATTERN. Fol d up the A3
I nterface assembl y.
8. Refer to Fi gure 2-3 on page 66 for l ocati ng the l i nes used for
adjusti ng DGTL X GAI N and DGTL Y GAI N. Each of these l i nes i s
actual l y two l i nes adjusted for coi nci dence. The two l i nes wi l l form
an "X" i f they are not adjusted properl y.
9. Adjust A2R206 DGTL X GAI N unti l the two verti cal l i nes near the
l eft edge of the di spl ay appear to be one si ngl e l i ne.
10.Adjust A2R215 DGTL Y GAI N unti l the two hori zontal l i nes near
the top edge of the di spl ay appear to be one si ngl e l i ne.
Chapter 2 65
Adjustment Procedures
2. Display Adjustment (8560E only)
11.Adjust A2R262 STOP BLANK and A2R263 START BLANK for the
sharpest corners of the outer box i n the test pattern. The i ntensi ty of
the corners shoul d be the same as the mi ddl e of the l i nes between
the corners.
12.Adjust the rear panel TRACE ALI GN unti l the l eftmost l i ne of the
test pattern i s paral l el wi th the CRT bezel . See Fi gure 2-3 on page
66.
13.Adjust the rear panel X POSN and A17R55 X GAI N unti l the
l eftmost "@"characters and the softkey l abel s appear just i nsi de the
l eft and ri ght edges of the CRT bezel .
14.Adjust the rear panel Y POSN and A17R75 Y GAI N unti l the softkey
l abel s al i gn wi th thei r appropri ate softkeys.
15.Press PRESET. I f necessary, readjust STOP BLANK and START
BLANK for the best-l ooki ng i ntersecti on of the grati cul e l i nes. Thi s
wi l l be most noti ceabl e al ong the center verti cal and hori zontal
grati cul e l i nes.
Intensity Adjustments
16.Press AMPLITUDE then set the REF LVL to 70 dB and the LOG dB/DIV
to 1. Thi s shoul d al most compl etel y l l the screen wi th the noi se
oor. Press SGL SWP. Adjust A17R4 Z GAI N unti l the i ntensi ty at
the center of the screen i s 15 NI Ts, as i ndi cated by the TEK J16-TV
Photometer/Radi ometer.
17.Press CAL, MORE 1 of 2, and CRT ADJ PATTERN. Locate the dot just
under the HP l ogo. Adjust A17R93 ASTI G for the smal l est round dot
possi bl e.
66 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
2. Display Adjustment (8560E only)
Figure 2-3 CRT Adjust Pattern
Chapter 2 67
Adjustment Procedures
2. Display Adjustment (8560E only)
Figure 2-4 A2 Display Adjustment Locations
18.Adjust A17R34 COARSE FOCUS and A17R92 DDD for the best
focus of the characters at the center of the screen.
19.Adjust A17R21 Z FOCUS for the best focus of the outsi de box of the
test pattern.
20.Adjust A17R26 X FOCUS for best focus of the "@" characters at the
corners of the test pattern.
21.Repeat steps 17 through 20 to obtai n the best overal l focus qual i ty.
68 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
2. Display Adjustment (8560E only)
Fast Zero Span Adjustments
NOTE The fol l owi ng adjustments appl y onl y to anal yzers not equi pped wi th
Opti on 007, fast di gi ti zed ti me domai n sweeps.
22.Set A2R209 SWEEP OFFSET, A2R218 VI DEO OFFSET, A2R268
VI DEO GAI N and A2R271 SWEEP GAI N to mi drange. Adjustment
l ocati ons are shown i n Fi gure 2-4 on page 67 for these A2
adjustments.
23.Set the HP 355D attenuator to provi de 30 dB attenuati on.
24.Press PRESET on the spectrum anal yzer, and connect the equi pment
as shown i n Fi gure 2-2 on page 63. Set the HP 8560E/EC control s as
fol l ows:
Center frequency .................... ....................................... 300 MHz
Span .......................... ............................................................ 0 Hz
Reference l evel ..................... .......................................... 40 dBm
Resol uti on BW ......................... ........................................... 1 kHz
Vi deo BW . ....................... .................................................. 300 Hz
Sweep ti me ........................ ................................................. 50 ms
25.Press MKR, MKR->, and MARKER-> REF LVL. I f the marker i s not at
the top grati cul e, press MARKER-> REF LVL agai n.
26.Press SAVE, SAVE STATE, and STATE 0.
27.Set the sweep ti me to 10 ms.
28.Press SAVE, SAVE STATE, and STATE 1.
29.Adjust A2R209 SWEEP OFFSETto pl ace the begi nni ng of the trace
at the l eftmost verti cal grati cul e l i ne.
30.Adjust A2R271 SWEEP GAI N to pl ace the end of the trace at the
tenth verti cal grati cul e l i ne (one di vi si on from the ri ght edge of the
grati cul e).
31.Press AMPLITUDE and press the key 7 ti mes.
32.Press SAVE, SAVE STATE, and STATE 2.
33.Set the sweep ti me to 50 ms. Press SAVE, SAVE STATE, and STATE 3.
34.Press RECALL, RECALL STATE, and STATE 1.
35.Swi tch between STATE 1 and STATE 2. Adjusti ng A2R268 and
A2R218 so that i n STATE 1 the trace i s l i ned up wi th the top
grati cul e and i n STATE 2 the trace i s l i ned up wi th the ei ghth
grati cul e (from the top l i ne). Repeat unti l they al i gn to wi thi n
0.2 di vi si ons.
Chapter 2 69
Adjustment Procedures
2. Display Adjustment (8560E only)
36.Adjust A2R209 and A2R271 unti l the start of sweep i s al i gned to the
l eftmost verti cal grati cul e l i ne and the stop sweep i s al i gned wi th
the ri ght most verti cal grati cul e l i ne.
37.Press STATE 2 and STATE 3. The two traces shoul d be al i gned wi thi n
0.1 di vi si ons.
38.Press STATE 0 and STATE 1. The two traces shoul d be al i gned wi thi n
0.1 di vi si ons.
70 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
3. IF Bandpass Adjustment
3. IF Bandpass Adjustment
Assembly Adjusted
A5 I F assembl y
Related Performance Test
Resol uti on Bandwi dth Accuracy and Sel ecti vi ty
Description
The center frequency of each I F bandpass l ter pol e i s adjusted by
DAC-control l ed varactor di odes and an i nductor (for the LC pol es) or a
transformer (for the crystal pol es). The i nductors and transformers are
for coarse tuni ng and the varactors are for ne tuni ng by the
mi croprocessor. The i nductors and transformers are adjusted such that
the varactor di odes are bi ased near the mi ddl e of thei r capaci tance
range. The varactor di ode bi as i s measured wi th the DVM.
NOTE Thi s procedure i s not a routi ne adjustment. I t shoul d be performed onl y
i f repai rs to the A5 I F assembl y are made. I f the enti re A5 I F assembl y
i s repl aced, the assembl y arri ves pre-adjusted from the factory and
requi res no further adjustment.
Figure 2-5 IF Bandpass Adjustment Setup
Chapter 2 71
Adjustment Procedures
3. IF Bandpass Adjustment
Equipment
Di gi tal vol tmeter ........... ..................................................HP3456A
DVM test l eads .......... ....................................................HP34118A
Speci al tuni ng tool (for sl ot-type tuni ng sl ugs) ...... ...... 8710-1010
Speci al tuni ng tool (for fork-type tuni ng sl ugs) ..... ...... 8710-0772
Procedure
1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer off and di sconnect the
power cord. Remove the spectrum anal yzer cover and fol d down the
A2 control l er, A3 i nterface, A4 l og amp, and A5 I F assembl i es.
Reconnect the power cord and press LINE to turn the spectrum
anal yzer on. Al l ow the spectrum anal yzer to warm up for at l east 30
mi nutes.
2. Connect the negati ve DVM l ead to pi n 6 of A5J6. See Fi gure 2-5 on
page 70. Set the HP 3456A control s as fol l ows:
Functi on ................................................................... DC VOLTS
Range .................................................................................. 10 V
3. On the HP 8560E/EC, press PRESET, SPAN, 2, MHz, CAL, and IF ADJ
OFF.
LC Bandpass Adjustments
4. On the HP 8560E/EC, press ADJ CURR IF STATE. Wai t for the IF
ADJUST STATUS message to di sappear before conti nui ng wi th the
next step.
5. Read the vol tage on A5TP5 (thi s i s an empty hol e type of test poi nt).
I f the vol tage i s l ess than +6.06 Vdc, turn A5L300 LC CTR 1
cl ockwi se. I f the vol tage i s greater than +6.26 Vdc, turn LC CTR 1
countercl ockwi se.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 unti l the vol tage reads +6.16 Vdc 100 mV.
NOTE I f the range for the LC CTR adjustment i s i nsufci ent, repl ace the
appropri ate factory-sel ected capaci tor as l i sted i n Tabl e 2-6 on page 72.
To determi ne the correct repl acement val ue, center the LC CTR
adjustment and press ADJ CURR IF STATE. After the IF
ADJUST STATUS message di sappears, read the DVM di spl ay. Choose a
capaci tor val ue from Tabl e 2-7 on page 72, based on the DVM readi ng
and the presentl y l oaded capaci tor val ue. Tabl e 2-10 on page 74 l i sts a
few capaci tor part numbers.
CAUTION Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer off before removi ng or
repl aci ng any shi el d.
7. Move the posi ti ve DVM l ead to A5TP6.
72 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
3. IF Bandpass Adjustment
8. Adjust A5L301 LC CTR 2 by repeati ng steps 4 through 6.
9. Move the posi ti ve DVM test l ead to A5TP2 (thi s i s a resi stor-l ead
type of test poi nt).
10.Adjust A5L700 LC CTR 3 by repeati ng steps 4 through 6.
11.Move the posi ti ve DVM test l ead to A5TP1 (thi s i s a resi stor-l ead
type of test poi nt).
12.Adjust A5L702 LC CTR 4 usi ng the procedure i n steps 4 through 6.
Table 2-6 Factory-Selected LC Filter Capacitors
LC CTR Adjustment Fixed Factory Select
Capacitor
A5L300 LC CTR 1 A5C326
A5L301 LC CTR 2 A5C327
A5L700 LC CTR 3 A5C717
A5L702 LC CTR 4 A5C718
Table 2-7 LC Factory-Selected Capacitor Selection
DVM
Reading
(V)
Currently Loaded Capacitor Value (pF)
Repl ace Repl ace Repl ace Repl ace Repl ace Repl ace Repl ace
6.8 wi th: 8.2 wi th: 10 wi th: 12 wi th: 15 wi th: 18 wi th: 20 wi th:
0 to 1.5 * * * * * * *
1.5 to 2.5 18 18 * * * * *
2.5 to 3.5 15 15 18 18 * * *
3.5 to 4.5 10 12 15 15 18 * *
4.5 to 5.5 8.2 10 12 15 18 * *
5.5 to 6.5 no
change
no
change
no
change
no
change
no
change
no
change
no
change
6.5 to 7.5 no
change
no
change
no
change
no
change
no
change
no
change
no
change
7.5 to 8.5 * 6.8 8.2 10 12 15 18
8.5 to 9.5 * * 6.8 8.2 12 15 18
9.5 to 10 * * 6.8 8.2 10 12 15
* I ndi cates a condi ti on that shoul d not exi st; suspect broken hardware.
Chapter 2 73
Adjustment Procedures
3. IF Bandpass Adjustment
XTAL Bandpass Adjustments
13.On the HP 8560E/EC, press SPAN, 1, MHz, and CAL.
14.Move the posi ti ve DVM test l ead to A5TP7.
15.On the HP 8560E/EC, press ADJ CURR IF STATE. Wai t for the IF
ADJUST STATUS message to di sappear before conti nui ng to the next
step.
16.Read the vol tage di spl ayed on the DVM. I f the vol tage i s l ess than
+6.06 Vdc, turn A5T200 XTAL CTR 1 cl ockwi se. I f the vol tage i s
greater than +6.26 Vdc, turn XTAL CTR 1 countercl ockwi se.
17.Repeat steps 15 and 16 unti l the vol tage reads +6.16 Vdc 100 mV.
NOTE I f the range for the XTAL CTR adjustment i s i nsufci ent, repl ace the
appropri ate factory-sel ected capaci tor as l i sted i n Tabl e 2-9 on page 74.
To determi ne the correct repl acement val ue, center the XTAL CTR
adjustment, and press ADJ CURR IF STATE. After the IF
ADJUST STATUS message di sappears, read the DVM di spl ay. Choose a
capaci tor val ue from Tabl e 2-10 on page 74, based on the DVM readi ng
and the presentl y l oaded capaci tor val ue. Tabl e 2-10 on page 74 l i sts a
few capaci tor part numbers.
CAUTION Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer off before removi ng or
repl aci ng any shi el d.
18.Move the posi ti ve DVM test l ead to A5TP8.
19.Adjust A5T202 XTAL CTR 2 usi ng steps 15 through 17.
20.Move the posi ti ve DVM test l ead to A5TP3.
21.Adjust A5T500 XTAL CTR 3 usi ng steps 15 through 17.
22.Move the posi ti ve DVM test l ead to A5TP4.
23.Adjust A5T502 XTAL CTR 4 usi ng steps 15 through 17.
Table 2-8 Factory-Selected XTAL Filter Capacitors
XTAL CTR Adjustment Fixed Factory Select
Capacitor
A5T200 XTAL CTR 1 A5C204
A5T202 XTAL CTR 2 A5C216
A5T500 XTAL CTR 3 A5C505
A5T502 XTAL CTR 4 A5C516
74 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
3. IF Bandpass Adjustment
Table 2-9 XTAL Factory-Selected Capacitor Selection
DVM
Reading
(V)
Currently Loaded Capacitor Value (pF)
Repl ace Repl ace Repl ace Repl ace Repl ace Repl ace
15 wi th: 18 wi th: 20 wi th: 22 wi th: 24 wi th: 27 wi th:
0 to 1.5 * * * * * *
1.5 to 2.5 27 * * * * *
2.5 to 3.5 22 27 27 * * *
3.5 to 4.5 18 22 24 27 27 *
4.5 to 5.5 18 20 22 24 27 *
5.5 to 6.5 no
change
no
change
no
change
no
change
no
change
no
change
6.5 to 7.5 no
change
no
change
no
change
no
change
no
change
no
change
7.5 to 8.5 * 15 18 18 22 24
8.5 to 9.5 * 15 15 18 20 24
9.5 to 10 * * 15 18 20 24
* I ndi cates a condi ti on that shoul d not exi st; suspect broken hardware.
Table 2-10 Capacitor Part Numbers
Capacitor
Value (pF)
HP Part
Number
6.8 0160-4793
8.2 0160-4792
10 0160-4791
12 0160-4790
15 0160-4789
18 0160-4788
20 0160-5699
22 0160-4787
24 0160-5903
27 0160-4786
Chapter 2 75
Adjustment Procedures
4. IF Amplitude Adjustments
4. IF Amplitude Adjustments
The I F Ampl i tude Adjustments consi st of the Cal Osci l l ator Ampl i tude
adjustment and the Reference 15 dB Attenuator adjustment.
Assembly Adjusted
A4 l og amp/cal osci l l ator A5 I F assembl y
Related Performance Tests
I F Gai n Uncertai nty Scal e Fi del i ty
Equipment
Frequency synthesi zer ................ ................................... HP3335A
Adapters
Type N (m) to BNC (f) ................ ................................... 1250-1476
Cables
BNC, 122 cm (48 i n) ............... ...................................... HP10503A
Test cabl e ......... .......................................................... 85680-60093
Figure 2-6 IF Amplitude Adjustment Setup
76 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
4. IF Amplitude Adjustments
Figure 2-7 IF Amplitude Adjustment Locations
A4 Log Amp/Cal Oscillator Amplitude Adjustment
Thi s adjustment sets the output ampl i tude of the cal osci l l ator on the
A4 assembl y, and the absol ute ampl i tude of the reference 15 dB
attenuator.
The output of the cal osci l l ator i s adjusted so that a 55 dBm si gnal
appl i ed to the 10.7 MHz I F i nput on the A5 I F assembl y (A5J3) causes a
di spl ayed si gnal of 60 dBm. The effect of thi s adjustment i s vi si bl e
onl y after the ADJ CURR IF STATE sequence i s compl ete. ADJ
CURR IF STATE causes the I F gai n adjustment to use the "new" output
ampl i tude from the cal osci l l ator. When the adjustment sequence i s
compl ete, the resul t of the adjustment shoul d cause the 35 dBm si gnal
at A5J5 to be di spl ayed at 60 dBm.
Thi s procedure al so sets the attenuator of the reference 15 dB
attenuator so that a source ampl i tude change of 50 dB combi ned wi th a
spectrum anal yzer reference l evel change of 50 dB di spl ays an
ampl i tude di fference of 50 dB.
NOTE The 15 dB reference attenuator adjustment i s preset at the factory and
need not be done i f the enti re A5 I F assembl y i s repl aced.
Chapter 2 77
Adjustment Procedures
4. IF Amplitude Adjustments
Procedure
1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer off. Remove the spectrum
anal yzer cover and pl ace the spectrum anal yzer i n the servi ce
posi ti on as i l l ustrated i n Fi gure 2-6 on page 75. See Fi gure 2-7 on
page 76 for adjustment l ocati on.
2. Di sconnect W29, vi ol et coax cabl e, from A5J3. Connect the test cabl e
between A5J3 and the 50 output of the HP 3335A. Press LINE to
turn the spectrum anal yzer on.
3. Set the HP 8560E/EC control s as fol l ows:
Center frequency ....... ................................................ 10.7 MHz
Span ....... ...................................................................... 200 kHz
Reference l evel ........ .................................................... 60 dBm
Attenuator .......................................................................... 0 dB
Log/di vi si on ......................................................... 1 Log/di vi si on
Resol uti on BW . ......... ................................................... 300 kHz
Vi deo BW ........... ............................................................ 100 Hz
4. On the HP 8560E/EC, press MKR, CAL, and IF ADJ OFF.
5. Set the HP 3335A control s as fol l ows:
Frequency ........ .......................................................... 10.7 MHz
Ampl i tude ......... .......................................................... 55 dBm
6. Note the marker val ue. I deal l y i t shoul d read 60 dBm 0.1 dB.
7. I f the marker reads l ess than 60.1 dBm, rotate A4R826 CAL OSC
AMPTD one-thi rd turn counter-cl ockwi se for every 0.1 dB l ess than
60 dBm. See Fi gure 2-7 on page 76 for the l ocati on of A4R826.
8. I f the marker reads greater than 59.9 dBm, rotate A4R826 CAL
OSC AMPTD one-thi rd turn cl ockwi se for every 0.1 dB greater than
60 dBm. A change i n the di spl ayed ampl i tude wi l l not be seen at
thi s poi nt.
NOTE I f A4R826 has i nadequate range, refer to "I nadequate CAL OSC
AMPTD Range" i n Chapter 9.
9. Press ADJ CURR IF STATE. After al l owi ng the spectrum anal yzer ti me
to compl ete the adjustments, the di spl ayed ampl i tude and marker
readi ng shoul d change.
10.Repeat steps 7 and 8 unti l the marker reads 60 dBm 0.1 dB.
11.Di sconnect the test cabl e from A5J3 and reconnect W29 to A5J3.
78 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
4. IF Amplitude Adjustments
A5 Reference Attenuator Adjustment
1. Set the HP 3335A AMPLITUDE to 60 dBm.
2. Connect a BNC cabl e between the 50 output of the HP 3335A and
the HP 8560E/EC I NPUT 50 .
3. On the HP 8560E/EC, press CAL and REF LEVEL ADJUST. Use the
front panel knob or step keys to pl ace the peak of the di spl ayed
si gnal 3 dB to 5 dB bel ow the reference l evel .
4. On the HP 8560E/EC, press PEAK SEARCH and MARKER DELTA. Set
the spectrum anal yzer reference l evel to 10 dBm.
5. Change the HP 3335A AMPLITUDE to 10 dBm.
6. On the HP 8560E/EC, press CAL.
7. Note the MKR ampl i tude. I deal l y, i t shoul d read 50.00 dB 0.1 dB.
8. I f the MKR ampl i tude i s l ess than 49.9 dB, rotate A5R343 (15 dB
ATTEN) one-hal f turn countercl ockwi se for each 0.1 dB l ess than
50.00 dB. I f the MKR ampl i tude i s greater than 50.1 dB, rotate
A5R343 one-hal f turn cl ockwi se for each 0.1 dB greater than 50.00
dB. Do not adjust A5R343 more than ve turns before conti nui ng
wi th the next step.
9. On the HP 8560E/EC, press ADJ CURR IF STATE. Note the MKR
ampl i tude readi ng.
10.Set the HP 8560E/EC reference l evel to 60 dBm and press MKR and
MARKERS OFF.
11.Repeat steps 12 through 21 unti l the MKR ampl i tude readi ng i s
50.00 dB 0.1 dB.
A5 Adjustment Verication
1. On the HP 8560E/EC, di sconnect W29 from A5J3. Connect the test
cabl e between A5J3 and the 50 output of the HP 3335A.
2. Set the HP 8560E/EC reference l evel to 10 dBm.
3. Set the HP 3335A AMPLITUDE to 5 dBm.
4. On the HP 8560E/EC press MKR and MARKER NORMAL.
5. The MARKER ampl i tude shoul d read 10 dBm 0.13 dB. I f the
readi ng i s outsi de of thi s range, repeat steps 3 through 21.
Chapter 2 79
Adjustment Procedures
4. IF Amplitude Adjustments
6. On the HP 8560E/EC, reconnect W29 to A5J3. Press PRESET and set
the control s as fol l ows:
Center frequency .... .......... ....................................... 300 MHz
Span ........................ ......................................................... 0 Hz
Reference l evel ............. ............................................ 10 dBm
Resol uti on BW .... .......... ............................................ 300 kHz
7. Connect a BNC cabl e between the HP 8560E/EC CAL OUTPUT
and I NPUT 50.
8. On the HP 8560E/EC, press MKR, CAL, and REF LVL ADJ.
9. Use the knob or step keys to adjust the REF LEVEL CAL setti ng
unti l the MKR reads 10.00 dBm 0.1 dB.
10.On the HP 8560E/EC, press STORE REF LVL.
80 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
5. DC Log Amplier Adjustments
5. DC Log Amplier Adjustments
There are three DC Log adjustments; Li mi ter Phase, Li near Fi del i ty,
and Log Fi del i ty.
These adjustment need onl y be done under the fol l owi ng condi ti ons:
Li mi ter Phase Onl y i f a repai r i s made to bl ocks F, G, H, I , or J.
Li near Fi del i ty Onl y i f a repai r i s made to bl ocks C, D, F, G, H, I , J, K,
O, I F Gai n Accuracy, RBW swi tchi ng, or Log Fi del i ty.
Log Fi del i ty Onl y i f a repai r i s made to bl ocks D, F, H, K, I F Gai n
Accuracy, RBW swi tchi ng, or Log Fi del i ty.
I f mul ti pl e adjustments are requi red, they shoul d be done i n the
fol l owi ng order:
1. Li mi ter Phase
2. Li near Fi del i ty
3. Log Fi del i ty
Al l adjustments shoul d be made wi th al l of the shi el ds on and onl y after
al l owi ng at l east a 20-mi nute warmup.
Assembly Adjusted
A4 l og ampl i er
Related Performance Tests
I F Gai n Uncertai nty Scal e Fi del i ty
Equipment
Frequency synthesi zer .............. ....................................... HP3335A
Adapters
Type N (m) to BNC (f) ............... ....................................... 1250-1476
Cables
BNC, 122 cm (48 i n) ............. .........................................HP10503A
Test cabl e ......... ...........................................................85680-60093
A4 Limiter Phase Adjustment
Thi s adjustment consi sts of adjusti ng A4R445 for maxi mum on screen
ampl i tude under the fol l owi ng condi ti ons.
Chapter 2 81
Adjustment Procedures
5. DC Log Amplier Adjustments
Procedure
1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer off. Remove the spectrum
anal yzer cover and pl ace the spectrum anal yzer i n the servi ce
posi ti on as i l l ustrated i n Fi gure 2-8 on page 84. See Fi gure 2-9 on
page 85 for adjustment l ocati on.
2. Connect the HP 3335A 50 output to the HP 8560E/EC 50 i nput.
Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer on.
3. Set the HP 8560E/EC control s as fol l ows:
Center frequency ................... ....................................... 15 MHz
Span ........................... .............................................................. 0
Reference l evel ................. ........................................... 10 dBm
Log/di vi si on .......... ............................................... 1 Log/di vi si on
Resol uti on BW ................... .......................................... 300 kHz
I F Adjust ........................... ...................................................... off
4. Set up an HP 3335A as fol l ows:
Frequency .................. ....................................................15 MHz
Ampl i tude .............. ..................................................... 18 dBm
5. Press CAL and ADJ CURR IF STATE, wai t for the spectrum anal yzer to
compl ete adjustments, then press MKR.
6. Adjust A4R445 for maxi mum on-screen ampl i tude. Refer to Fi gure
2-7 on page 76 for the l ocati on of A4R445.
A4 Linear Fidelity Adjustment
Thi s adjustment consi sts of adjusti ng A4R544 unti l the del ta marker
reads 40 dB under the fol l owi ng condi ti ons.
Procedure
1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer off. Remove the spectrum
anal yzer cover and pl ace the spectrum anal yzer i n the servi ce
posi ti on as i l l ustrated i n Fi gure 2-6 on page 75. See Fi gure 2-7 on
page 76 for adjustment l ocati on.
2. Connect the HP 3335A 50 output to the HP 8560E/EC 50 i nput.
Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer on.
3. Press PRESET, AMPLITUDE, LINEAR, MORE 1 of 3, AMPD UNITS, dBm,
CAL, and IF ADJ OFF.
4. Set the HP 8560E/EC control s as fol l ows:
Center frequency ...................... .................................... 15 MHz
Span ....................... .......................................................... 5 MHz
Resol uti on BW ...................... ....................................... 300 kHz
Reference l evel ..................... ....................................... 10 dBm
82 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
5. DC Log Amplier Adjustments
5. Set up an HP 3335A as fol l ows:
Frequency .......................... .............................................. 15 MHz
Ampl i tude ........................ .............................................. 18 dBm
6. Press PEAK SEARCH and MARKER DELTA.
7. Reduce the i nput power by 40 dB, to 58 dBm (use an attenuator or
a source wi th a good rel ati ve ampl i tude accuracy).
8. I f the si gnal i s l ower on the screen than expected (del ta marker
reads a change of greater than 40 dB, such as 41dB), then adjust
A4R544 (see <Undened Cross-Reference>) for an even l ower l evel
and press CAL and ADJ CURR IF STATE. Al l ow sufci ent ti me for the
spectrum anal yzer to compl ete the adjustment.
9. I f the si gnal i s hi gher on the screen than expected (del ta marker
reads a change of l ess than 40 dB, such as reads 39 dB), then adjust
A4R544 for an even hi gher l evel si gnal and press CAL and ADJ CURR
IF STATE. Al l ow sufci ent ti me for the spectrum anal yzer to compl ete
the adjustment.
10.Repeat the adjustment and adjust current state unti l the del ta
marker reads 40 dB 2 dB.
A4 Log Fidelity Adjustment
Thi s adjustment consi sts of adjusti ng A4R531 unti l the error i s
adjusted to zero.
Procedure
1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer off. Remove the spectrum
anal yzer cover and pl ace the spectrum anal yzer i n the servi ce
posi ti on as i l l ustrated i n Fi gure 2-6 on page 75. See Fi gure 2-7 on
page 76 for adjustment l ocati on.
2. Connect the HP 3335A 50 output to the HP 8560E/EC 50 i nput.
Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer on.
3. Press PRESET, CAL, IF ADJ OFF and ADJ CURR IF
STATE.
4. Set the HP 8560E/EC control s as fol l ows:
Center frequency ............................ ................................. 15 MHz
Span .................................... ........................................................ 0
Resol uti on BW ........................... ..................................... 300 kHz
Reference l evel ........................... .................................... 10 dBm
5. Set up an HP 3335A as fol l ows:
Frequency ............................. ........................................... 15 MHz
Ampl i tude ........................ .............................................. 10 dBm
Chapter 2 83
Adjustment Procedures
5. DC Log Amplier Adjustments
6. Press MKR, MARKER DELTA and decrease the source power to
26 dBm.
7. Cal cul ate the error. The error = Del ta Marker readi ng + 16 (i n dB).
8. Set the source power to 10 dBm.
9. Adjust A4R531 (see Fi gure 2-7 on page 76) to read 2 ti mes the error,
press CAL and ADJ CURR IF STATE.
10.Repeat to check. Readjust as necessary to get error adjusted to zero.
84 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
6. Sampling Oscillator Adjustment
6. Sampling Oscillator Adjustment
Assembly Adjusted
A15 RF assembl y
Related Performance Test
There i s no rel ated performance test for thi s adjustment procedure.
Description
The sampl i ng osci l l ator tank ci rcui t i s adjusted for a tuni ng vol tage of
5.05 Vdc when the sampl i ng osci l l ator i s set to 297.222 MHz. The
vol tage moni tored i s actual l y the tuni ng vol tage di vi ded by 4.05. The
setti ng i s then checked at other frequenci es for the ful l tuni ng range of
the sampl i ng osci l l ator.
Figure 2-8 Sampler Adjustment Setup
Equipment
Di gi tal vol tmeter ................. .............................................. HP3456A
DVM test l eads ............. .................................................. HP34118A
Procedure
1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer off and di sconnect the l i ne
power cord. Remove the spectrum anal yzer cover and fol d down the
A15 RF and A14 frequency control assembl i es. Prop up the A14
frequency control assembl y. Reconnect the l i ne power cord and press
LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer on. Connect the equi pment as
i l l ustrated i n Fi gure 2-8 on page 84.
Chapter 2 85
Adjustment Procedures
6. Sampling Oscillator Adjustment
2. Press PRESET on the HP 8560E/EC and set the control s as fol l ows:
Center frequency ................. ......................................2126 MHz
Span ........................ ........................................................... 0 Hz
3. Set the HP 3456A control s as fol l ows:
Functi on ................................................................... DC VOLTS
Range .......... .........................................................10V,MANUAL
Sampling Oscillator Adjustment
1. Connect the negati ve DVM test l ead to A15J200 pi n 6. Connect the
posi ti ve DVM l ead to A15J200 pi n 13.
2. Adjust A15C210 VCO RANGE for a DVM readi ng of 5.05 V 0.05 V.
Figure 2-9 TAM Connector Pin Locations
Sampler Match Adjustment
1. Connect the negati ve DVM test l ead to A15J400 pi n 6, and the
posi ti ve DVM test l ead to A15J400 pi n 1.
2. Press FREQUENCY and set the HP 8560E/EC center frequency to
2302.3 MHz. Thi s sets the sampl i ng osci l l ator to 291.667 MHz.
3. Adjust A15C100 SMPL MATCH to peak the vol tage di spl ayed on the
DVM.
4. Record the di spl ayed vol tage i n Tabl e 2-11 on page 86 as the
di spl ayed vol tage for the sampl i ng osci l l ator frequency of 291.667
MHz.
5. Press FREQUENCY on the HP 8560E/EC. Use the keypad to set the
spectrum anal yzer center frequency to the frequenci es l i sted i n
Tabl e 11 on page 86. At each l i sted frequency, record the di spl ayed
vol tage i n the tabl e.
86 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
6. Sampling Oscillator Adjustment
6. I f the di fference between the maxi mum and mi ni mum vol tages i s
l ess than 0.50 V, and al l vol tage readi ngs are between +0.5 and +2.5
Vdc, proceed to step 15.
7. Locate the center frequency at whi ch the vol tage i s l owest. Use the
keypad to set the HP 8560E/EC to thi s frequency.
8. Readjust SMPL MATCH to set the di spl ayed vol tage to 0.8 0.1 Vdc.
9. Set the HP 8560E/EC center frequency to 2302.3 MHz and repeat
steps 9 through 13.
10.Move the posi ti ve DVM test l ead to A15J400 pi n 3. Check that the
measured vol tage i s the negati ve of the vol tage at pi n 1, wi thi n 0.1
Vdc.
11.Di sconnect the DVM probes from A15J400.
Table 2-11 Sampling Adjustments
Center
Frequency
(MHz)
Sampling
Oscillator
(MHz)
Displayed Voltage (Vdc)
1st
Trial
2nd
Trial
3rd
Trial
4th
Trial
5th
Trial
2156.3 285.000
2176.3 286.364
2230.3 288.462
2263.3 290.000
2302.3 291.667
2158.3 293.478
2196.3 295.000
2378.3 296.471
2422.3 297.222
Chapter 2 87
Adjustment Procedures
7. YTO Adjustment
7. YTO Adjustment
Assembly Adjusted
A14 frequency control assembl y
Related Performance Tests
Frequency Span Accuracy Frequency Readout Accuracy and Frequency
Count Marker Accuracy
Description
The YTO mai n coi l adjustments are made wi th the phase-l ock l oops
di sabl ed. The YTO endpoi nts are adjusted to bri ng these poi nts wi thi n
the capture range of the mai n l oop. The YTO FM coi l i s adjusted to
pl ace the 300 MHz CAL OUTPUTsi gnal at the center verti cal grati cul e
i n a 20 MHz span.
Figure 2-10 YTO Adjustment Setup
Equipment
Mi crowave frequency counter......................... HP 5343A Opti on 001
Adapters
Type N (m) to BNC (f) ...... ........................................ 1250-1476
Type N (f) to APC 3.5 (f) (Option 026 only)........ ...... 1250-1745
APC 3.5 (f) to APC 3.5 (f) ...... .................................... 5061-5311
Cables
BNC, 122 cm (48 i n) .......... ..................................... HP 10503A
SMA, 61 cm (24 i n)............. ....................................... 8120-1578
88 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
7. YTO Adjustment
Procedure
NOTE Thi s adjustment cannot be performed i f the spectrum anal yzer
presel ected external mi xer mode i s sel ected.
YTO Main Coil Adjustments
1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer off. Remove the spectrum
anal yzer cover and fol d down the A15 RF and A14 frequency control
assembl i es.
2. Di sconnect the 50 termi nati on from the 1ST LO OUTPUT.
Connect the equi pment as shown i n Fi gure 2-10 on page 87. Press
LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer on.
3. Move the jumper on A14J23 from the NORM posi ti on (pi ns 1 and 2
jumpered) to the TEST posi ti on (pi ns 2 and 3 jumpered).
4. I f the HP 8560E/EC spectrum anal yzer does not have Opti on 002,
press the fol l owi ng keys:
CONFIG, EXT MXR PRE UNPR, (UNPR)
AUX CTRL, EXTERNAL MIXER, LOCK HARMONIC, 6 Hz
SPAN, ZERO SPAN
FREQUENCY, CENTER FREQ, 18.8893 GHz, SGL SWP
SAVE, SAVE STATE, STATE 0
FREQUENCY, 35.7493 GHz
SAVE, SAVE STATE, STATE 1
RECALL, RECALL STATE, STATE 0.
5. I f the HP 8560E/EC spectrum anal yzer has Opti on 002, press the
fol l owi ng keys:
SPAN, ZERO SPAN
FREQUENCY, CENTER FREQ, 300 KHz
SAVE, SAVE STATE, STATE 0
FREQUENCY, 2.0993 GHz
SAVE, SAVE STATE, STATE 1
RECALL, RECALL STATE, STATE 0.
6. On the HP 5343A, press SHIFT 7 and set the control s as fol l ows:
SAMPLE RATE ........................................................ Ful l y Countercl ockwi se
10 Hz 500 MHz/500 MHz 26.5 GHz SWI TCH ............ 500 MHz 26.5 GHz
Chapter 2 89
Adjustment Procedures
7. YTO Adjustment
7. Adjust A14R93 3.2 GHz for the appropri ate frequency counter
readi ng:
3.200 GHz 1 MHz
3.911 GHz 1 MHz i f Opti on 002
8. On the HP 8560E/EC, press STATE 1.
9. Adjust A14R42 6.01 GHz for a frequency counter readi ng of 6.010
GHz 1 MHz.
10.On the HP 8560E/EC, press STATE 0.
11.Repeat steps 6 through 9 unti l both of these i nteracti ng adjustments
meet thei r tol erances.
12.Pl ace the jumper on A14J23 i n the NORM posi ti on (pi ns 1 and 2
jumpered).
13.Di sconnect the SMA cabl e from the 1ST LO OUTPUT jack and
reconnect the 50 termi nati on on the 1ST LO OUTPUT.
90 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
7. YTO Adjustment
Figure 2-11 YTO Adjustment Locations
YTO FM Coil Adjustments
1. On the HP 8560E/EC, press PRESET and set the control s as fol l ows:
Center frequency ................................ 300 MHz
Span ....................................................... 20 MHz
2. Adjust A14R76 FM SPAN unti l the 300 MHz CAL OUTPUT
SI GNAL i s al i gned wi th the center verti cal grati cul e l i ne.
Chapter 2 91
Adjustment Procedures
8. First LO Distribution Amplier Adjustment
8. First LO Distribution Amplier Adjustment
Assembly Adjusted
A14 frequency control assembl y
Related Performance Test
Fi rst LO OUTPUT Ampl i tude
Description
The gate bi as and SENSE vol tages for the A7 swi tched LO di stri buti on
ampl i er i s adjusted to the val ue speci ed on the l abel of A7.
Figure 2-12 First LO Distribution Amplier Adjustment Setup
Equipment
Measuri ng recei ver ................. ........................................HP8902A
DVM .............. ................................................................. HP3456A
Power sensor ................ .................................................. HP8485A
DVM test l eads ............. ............................................... HP 34118A
92 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
8. First LO Distribution Amplier Adjustment
Procedure
1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer off and di sconnect the l i ne
cord. Remove the cover and fol d down the A15 RF and A14
Frequency Control assembl i es.
2. Move the jumper on A2J12 from the WR PROT to the WR ENA
posi ti on. The jumper i s on the edge of the A2 board assembl y and
can be moved wi thout fol di ng the board down.
3. Reconnect the l i ne cord and turn on the spectrum anal yzer.
4. Set the HP 8560E/EC control s as fol l ows:
Center frequency ...................................... 1.45 GHz
Span ............................................................. 0 Hz
5. On the HP 8560E/EC, press CAL, MORE 1 OF 2, SERVICE CAL
DATA, LO LEVELS, and INT LO LEVEL.
6. Use the knob or key pad to enter the val ue 32. Thi s sets the LO
power to a l ow l evel .
7. To set the gate bi as, connect the posi ti ve l ead of the DVM to A14J18
pi n 15 and the negati ve l ead to A14J18 pi n 6. See Fi gure 2-13 on
page 92 for a pi n l ocati on drawi ng.
Figure 2-13 TAM Connector Pin Locations
8. On the HP 8560E/EC, press LO GATE LEVEL.
9. Note the Gate Bi as vol tage pri nted on the A7 LO di stri buti on amp
l abel . Use the knob or keypad to change the di spl ayed DAC val ue so
the DVM readi ng i s equal to the l abel vol tage, 10 mV.
10.To set the l ow band sense vol tage, connect the posi ti ve l ead of the
DVM to A14J18 pi n 13 and the negati ve l ead to A14J18 pi n 6.
11.On the HP 8560E/EC press INT LO LEVEL. The message DRIVE FOR
BAND# 0 wi l l be di spl ayed.
12.Note the Sense vol tage pri nted on the A7 LO di stri buti on amp l abel .
Use the knob or keypad, and press enter, to change the di spl ayed
DAC val ue so the DVM readi ng i s equal to the l abel vol tage, 5 mV.
13.Record the DAC val ue:
Chapter 2 93
Adjustment Procedures
8. First LO Distribution Amplier Adjustment
DAC val ue for 1.45 GHz = ____________________________
14.Set the "Sense EXT" val ue by pressi ng EXT LO LEVEL.
15.Use the knob or keypad to enter the DAC val ue for 1.45 GHz from
the band 0 sense vol tage adjustment above.
16.Save the adjustment val ues by pressi ng PREV MENU, STORE
DATA, and YES.
17.Move the jumper on A2J12 from WR ENA back to the WR PROT
posi ti on.
94 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
9. Tracking Generator Power Level Adjustments (Option 002)
9. Tracking Generator Power Level
Adjustments (Option 002)
Assembly Adjusted
A10 tracki ng generator assembl y
Related Performance Test
Absol ute Ampl i tude and Verni er Accuracy
Description
The A10 tracki ng generator has two adjustments for setti ng the output
power. A10R13 10 dB ADJ sets the power l evel when the TRK GEN
RF POWER i s set to 10 dBm and A10R18 0 dB ADJ sets the power
l evel when the TRK GEN RF POWER i s set to 0 dBm. The 10 dB ADJ
acts as an offset adjustment whi l e 0 dB ADJ acts as a gai n adjustment.
These adjustments are set i n the factory for a 10 dB di fference i n
output power between the 10 dBm and 0 dBm TRK GEN RF POWER
setti ngs. When i nstal l i ng a repl acement tracki ng generator, i t shoul d
onl y be necessary to adjust 10 dB ADJ (the offset adjustment) to
account for vari ati ons i n cabl e l oss from the tracki ng generator to the
RF OUT50 connector. Thi s adjustment i s done at a 0 dBm TRK GEN
RF POWER setti ng. Thi s ensures that the absol ute power l evel wi th a 0
dBm TRK GEN RF POWER setti ng i s 0 dBm wi th l i ttl e effect, i f any, on
the verni er accuracy.
I n some cases, the power l evel at the 10 dBm TRK GEN RF POWER
setti ng mi ght be out of tol erance. I n such cases, the 10 dB ADJ i s set
at a TRK GEN RF POWER of 10 dBm and the 0 dB ADJ i s set at a
TRK GEN RF POWER of 0 dBm. These two adjustments must be
i terated unti l the power l evel at the two setti ngs are wi thi n the gi ven
tol erance.
Equipment
Measuri ng recei ver ................... ....................................... HP8902A
Power sensor .................. ................................................... HP8482A
Cable
Type N, 62 cm (24 i n)................................................ HP 11500B/C
Chapter 2 95
Adjustment Procedures
9. Tracking Generator Power Level Adjustments (Option 002)
Procedure
1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer off. Remove the spectrum
anal yzer cover and pl ace the spectrum anal yzer i n the servi ce
posi ti on as i l l ustrated i n Fi gure 2-14 on page 95.
Figure 2-14 Tracking Generator Power Setup and Adjustment Locations
2. Connect the Type N cabl e between the RF OUT50 and RF I NPUT
50 connectors on the HP 8560E/EC.
3. Press PRESET on the HP 8560E/EC and set the control s as fol l ows:
Center frequency ............................................. 300 MHz
Span..................................................................... 0 Hz
96 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
9. Tracking Generator Power Level Adjustments (Option 002)
4. On the HP 8560E/EC, press MKR, AUX CTRL, TRACKING
GENRATOR, SRC PWR ON, 0, and dBm.
5. On the HP 8560E/EC, press MORE 1 OF 3, TRACKING PEAK. Wai t for
the PEAKING message to di sappear.
6. Zero and cal i brate the measuri ng recei ver/power sensor combi nati on
i n l og mode (power l evel s readout i n dBm). Enter the power sensor
300 MHz Cal Factor i nto the measuri ng recei ver.
7. Di sconnect the Type N cabl e from the RF OUT 50 and connect the
power sensor to the RF OUT 50.
8. On the HP 8560E/EC, press 0, dBm, and SGL SWP.
9. Adjust A10R13 10 dB ADJ for a 0 dBm 0.05 dB readi ng on the
measuri ng recei ver.
10.Set the TRK GEN RF POWER to 10 dBm. Note the power
di spl ayed on the measuri ng recei ver.
11.Proceed wi th steps 12 through 14 onl y i f the power l evel noted i n the
previ ous step was outsi de the range of 10 dBm 0.23 dB.
12.Wi th the TRK GEN RF POWER set to 10 dBm, adjust A10R13 10
dB ADJ for a 10 dBm 0.1 dB readi ng on the measuri ng recei ver.
Refer to Fi gure 2-14 on page 95 for adjustment l ocati on.
13.Set the TRK GEN RF POWER to 0 dBm. Adjust A10R18 0 dB ADJ
for a 0 dBm 0.2 dB readi ng on the measuri ng recei ver. Refer to
Fi gure 2-14 on page 95 for adjustment l ocati on.
Sampling Adjustments
Power at 10 dBm Setti ng ____________________ dBm
14.Repeat steps 12 and 13 unti l the output power l evel i s wi thi n the
tol erances i ndi cated at both the 10 dBm and 0 dBm TRK GEN RF
POWER setti ngs. Adjust 10 dB ADJ onl y wi th the TRK GEN RF
POWER set to 10 dBm and adjust 0 dB ADJ onl y wi th the TRK
GEN RF POWER set to 0 dBm.
Chapter 2 97
Adjustment Procedures
10. Frequency Response Adjustment
10. Frequency Response Adjustment
Assembly Adjusted
A15 RF assembl y
Related Performance Tests
Di spl ayed Average Noi se Level Frequency Response
Description
A si gnal of the same known ampl i tude i s appl i ed to the spectrum
anal yzer at several di fferent frequenci es. At each frequency, the DAC
control l i ng the atness compensati on ampl i ers i s adjusted to pl ace the
peak of the di spl ayed si gnal at the same pl ace on the screen. Wi th
rmware revi si ons greater than 920528, there are correcti on poi nts at 2
MHz and 6 MHz. These poi nts are outsi de frequency range of the
synthesi zed sweeper. The DAC val ues for these two poi nts are set to a
xed offset from the DAC val ue at 10 MHz. The DAC val ues are stored
i n EEROM.
98 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
10. Frequency Response Adjustment
Figure 2-15 Frequency Response Adjustment Setup
Equipment
Synthesi zed sweeper ............... ...................................... HP 8340A/B
Measuri ng recei ver .................. ........................................ HP 8902A
Power sensor .................... ................................................. HP 8482A
Power spl i tter ................. .................................................HP11667A
Adapters
Type N (m) to Type N (m).................. ...............................1250-1475
Type N (m) to APC 3.5 (f).................. ................................1250-1744
Type APC 3.5 (f) to APC 3.5 (f)................. ........................ 5061-5311
Cables
BNC, 122 cm (48 i n)............... ......................................... HP10503A
APC 3.5, 91 cm (36 i n)................. ..................................... 8120-4921
Chapter 2 99
Adjustment Procedures
10. Frequency Response Adjustment
Procedure
1. Connect the equi pment as shown i n Fi gure 2-15 on page 98. Do not
connect the HP 8482A Power Sensor to the HP 11667B Power
Spl i tter.
2. Zero and cal i brate the HP 8902A/HP 8482A combi nati on i n l og mode
(power l evel s read out i n dBm) and connect the power sensor
through an adapter to the power spl i tter.
3. Pl ace the WR PROT/WR ENA jumper on the A2 Control l er assembl y
i n the WR ENA posi ti on.
4. Press PRESET on the HP 8560E/EC and set the control s as fol l ows:
Center frequency .............................. ......................... 10 MHz
Span ....................................................... .......................... 0 Hz
Resol uti on BW ................................................. .......... 300 kHz
Log/di vi si on ...................................................................... 2 dB
5. Press INSTR PRESET on the HP 8340A/B and set the control s as
fol l ows:
CW ...................................................................... ........ 10 MHz
Power l evel ................................................................. 4 dBm
6. Set ref l evel cal DAC to zero. Press CAL, REF LVL ADJ and use the
knob to set the val ue to 0. Press STORE REF LVL.
7. On the HP 8560E/EC, press MKR, CAL, MORE 1 OF 2, SERVICE CAL
DATA, then FLATNESS. The current val ue of the RF Gai n DAC shoul d
be di spl ayed i n the acti ve functi on area. I f the frequency di spl ayed i n
the acti ve functi on area i s not 10 MHz, press or unti l 10 MHz i s
di spl ayed.
8. Enter the appropri ate Power Sensor Cal i brati on factor i nto the HP
8902A.
9. Set the HP 8340A/B CW output to the frequency i ndi cated i n the
acti ve functi on area of the HP 8560E/EC di spl ay. Adjust the HP
8340A/B POWER LEVEL for a 10 dBm readi ng on the HP 8902A.
100 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
10. Frequency Response Adjustment
10.On the HP 8560E/EC spectrum anal yzer, adjust the RF Gai n DAC
val ue usi ng the front panel knob or keypad unti l the marker reads
10 dBm 0.10 dB. Each DAC count yi el ds an approxi mate 0.01 dB
change.
11.On the spectrum anal yzer, press to proceed to the next frequency.
12.Repeat steps 7 through 10 for al l l ow-band frequenci es 10 MHz.
13.I f the rmware revi si on i s l ater than 920528, perform steps 13
through 17. Otherwi se, ski p to step 18.
14.Press unti l 10 MHz i s di spl ayed i n the acti ve functi on bl ock.
Record the RF gai n DAC val ue at 10 MHz.
10 MHz RF gai n DAC val ue ______________________
15.Add 67 to the 10 MHz RF gai n DAC val ue and record as the 2 MHz
RF gai n DAC val ue.
2 MHz RF gai n DAC val ue _______________________
16.Add 62 to the 10 MHz RF gai n DAC val ue and record as the 6 MHz
RF gai n DAC val ue.
6 MHz RF gai n DAC val ue ________________________
17.Press unti l 2 MHz i s di spl ayed i n the acti ve functi on bl ock. Use the
DATA keys to enter the 2 MHz RF gai n DAC val ue recorded i n step
14.
18.Press unti l 6 MHz i s di spl ayed i n the acti ve functi on bl ock. Use the
DATA keys to enter the 6 MHz RF gai n DAC val ue recorded i n step
15.
19.Press PREV MENU STORE DATA, then YES on the HP 8560E/EC.
20.Pl ace the WR PROT/WR ENA jumper on the A2 Control l er assembl y
i n the WR PROT posi ti on.
Chapter 2 101
Adjustment Procedures
11. Calibrator Amplitude Adjustment
11. Calibrator Amplitude Adjustment
Assembly Adjusted
A15 RF assembl y
Related Performance Test
Cal i brator Ampl i tude and Frequency Accuracy
Description
The CAL OUTPUT ampl i tude i s adjusted for 10.00 dBm measured
di rectl y at the front panel CAL OUTPUT connector.
Figure 2-16 Calibrator Amplitude Adjustment Setup
Equipment
Measuri ng recei ver ........... ............................................. HP8902A
Power sensor ......... ......................................................... HP8482A
Adapters
Type N (f) to BNC (m) .......... ......................................... 1250-1477
102 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
11. Calibrator Amplitude Adjustment
Procedure
NOTE The HP 8560E/EC shoul d be al l owed to warm up for at l east 30 mi nutes
before performi ng thi s adjustment.
1. Pl ace the HP 8560E/EC i n the servi ce posi ti on shown i n Fi gure 2-16
on page 101. Prop the A14 Frequency Control Board assembl y i n the
servi ce posi ti on.
2. Zero and cal i brate the HP 8902A/HP 8482A combi nati on i n l og
di spl ay mode. Enter the power sensor 300 MHz Cal Factor i nto the
HP 8902A.
3. Connect the HP 8482A through an adapter di rectl y to the HP
8560E/EC CAL OUTPUT connector.
4. Adjust A15R561 CAL AMPTD for a 10.00 dBm readi ng on the HP
8902A di spl ay.
Chapter 2 103
Adjustment Procedures
12. 10 MHz Reference Adjustment-TCXO (Option 103)
12. 10 MHz Reference Adjustment-TCXO
(Option 103)
Assembly Adjusted
A15 RF assembl y
Related Performance Test
10 MHz Reference Output Accuracy
Description
The frequency counter i s connected to the CAL OUTPUT, whi ch i s
l ocked to the 10 MHz reference. Thi s yi el ds better effecti ve resol uti on.
The temperature-compensated crystal osci l l ator (TCXO) i s adjusted for
a frequency of 300 MHz as read by the frequency counter.
Figure 2-17 10 MHz Frequency Reference Adjustment Setup
104 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
12. 10 MHz Reference Adjustment-TCXO (Option 103)
Equipment
Mi crowave frequency counter ....................... HP 5343A Opti on 001
Frequency standard ................. HP 5061B Cesi um Beam Standard
(or any 10 MHz frequency standard wi th accuracy <1 X 10
10
)
Cables
BNC, 122 cm (2 required) ............ ................................ HP 10503A
Procedure
NOTE Al l ow the HP 8560E/EC spectrum anal yzer to warm up for at l east 30
mi nutes before performi ng thi s adjustment.
1. Connect the equi pment as shown i n Fi gure 2-17 on page 103. Prop
up the A14 Frequency Control Assembl y.
2. Set the HP 5343A control s as fol l ows:
SAMPLE RATE ..................................................................... Mi drange
50 1 M SWI TCH ......................................................... 50
10 Hz 500 MHz/500 MHz 26.5 GHz SWI TCH ............ 10 Hz 500 MHz
3. Press AUX CTRL, REAR PANEL, and ensure that the 10 MHz reference
i s set to 10 MHz INT.
NOTE When the 10 MHz reference i s set to 10 MHz EXT, the TCXO i s not
operati ng and warmed up. I f the reference i s set to 10 MHz
EXT, set the reference to 10 MHz INT and al l ow 30 mi nutes for the TCXO
to warm up.
4. Remove dust cap from A15U302, TCXO. The dust cap i s toward the
rear of the spectrum anal yzer.
5. Adjust 10 MHz ADJ on A15U302 for a frequency counter readi ng of
300.000000 MHz 30 Hz.
6. Repl ace the dustcap on A15U302.
Chapter 2 105
Adjustment Procedures
13. Demodulator Adjustment
13. Demodulator Adjustment
Assembly Adjusted
A4 l og ampl i er assembl y
Related Performance Test
There i s no rel ated performance test for thi s adjustment procedure.
Description
A 5 kHz peak devi ati on FM si gnal i s appl i ed to the I NPUT 50. The
detected audi o i s moni tored by an osci l l oscope. FM DEMOD i s adjusted
to peak the response di spl ayed on the osci l l oscope.
Figure 2-18 Demodulator Adjustment Setup
106 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
13. Demodulator Adjustment
Equipment
AM/FM si gnal generator ........ ....................................... HP8640B
Osci l l oscope ................................................................. HP1980A/B
Adapters
Type N (m) to BNC (f) (2 required).......... ...................... 1250-1476
Cables
BNC, 122 cm (48 i n) ................................................ HP 10503A
Osci l l oscope probe ... .................................................... HP10432A
Procedure
1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer off. Pl ace the spectrum
anal yzer i n the servi ce posi ti on as i l l ustrated i n Fi gure 2-18 on page
105.
2. Connect the osci l l oscope probe from the osci l l oscope channel 1 i nput
to probe A4C723 (the end cl osest to A4U707) as i n Fi gure 2-19 on
page 107. Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer on. Connect the
HP 8640B RF OUTPUT to the HP 8560E/EC I NPUT 50.
3. Set the HP 8640B control s as fol l ows:
Range MHz ............. ........................ ............................... 61 to 128
Frequency .............. ................. ................................ 100.000 MHz
Output l evel ............ ....................... .................................10 dBm
RF.............................. ............................. .................................. ON
AM .......................................................................................... OFF
FM .............................. ............................ .................................I NT
Modul ati on frequency ......... ......................... ...................1000 Hz
Peak devi ati on .................... ......................... ....................... 5 kHz
Scal e FM ........................... ................................................(k/MHz)
4. Adjust the HP 8640B FM devi ati on verni er for a ful l -scal e readi ng
on the meter. Set the FM to off.
5. Set the osci l l oscope control s as fol l ows:
Channel 1 .............................................. ................................. on
Channel 2 ................................................ ............................... off
Channel 1 ....................................... ........................... 50 mV/di v
Channel 1 ................................................................................ ac
Channel 1 ....................................................................... BWl i m
Ti me base ...................................... ............................ 1.0 ms/di v
Tri gger ......................... ....................................................... auto
Tri gger source ........................................ .................................. 1
Tri gger l evel ....................................................................... 0.0 V
Chapter 2 107
Adjustment Procedures
13. Demodulator Adjustment
6. On the HP 8560E/EC, press PRESET and set the control s as fol l ows:
Center frequency .............. ....................................... 100 MHz
Span .................. ........................................................... 5 MHz
Ref l evel .............. ..................................................... 10 dBm
Resol uti on BW ................ .......................................... 100 kHz
7. On the HP 8560E/EC press: PEAK SEARCH, MARKER
CF SPAN, ZERO SPAN AUX CTRL, AM/FM DEMOD, FM DEMOD ON OFF
(ON) CAL, IF ADJ ON OFF (OFF) TRIG, and SWEEP CONT SGL (SGL).
Set the vol ume control to mi drange.
8. Set the HP 8640B FM to I NT.
9. A 1 kHz si ne wave shoul d be observed on the osci l l oscope. Rotate the
vol ume knob on the front panel of the spectrum anal yzer unti l the
ampl i tude of the 1 kHz si gnal i s at about 150 mV (3 di vi si ons on the
osci l l oscope).
10.Adjust A4C707 FM DEMOD for a maxi mum peak-to-peak response
on the osci l l oscope.
11.Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer off. Di sconnect the test
cabl e from A4C723.
Figure 2-19 Demodulator Adjustment Locations
108 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
14. External Mixer Bias Adjustment
14. External Mixer Bias Adjustment
(Non-Opti on 002 and Non-Opti on 327)
Assembly Adjusted
A15 RF assembl y
Related Performance Test
There i s no rel ated performance test for thi s adjustment procedure.
Description
A vol tmeter i s connected to the HP 8560E/EC I F I NPUT wi th the
external mi xer bi as set to off. The bi as i s adjusted for a 0 Vdc output.
Figure 2-20 External Mixer Bias Adjustment Setup
Equipment
DVM............................................................................... HP 3456A
Adapters
Type BNC (f) to SMA (m) ......................................... 1250-1200
Type BNC (f) to dual banana pl ug .......................... 1251-2816
Cables
BNC, 122 cm (48 i n).................................................. HP 10503A
Chapter 2 109
Adjustment Procedures
14. External Mixer Bias Adjustment
Procedure
1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer off and di sconnect the ac
power cord. Remove the spectrum anal yzer cover and connect the
equi pment as i l l ustrated i n Fi gure 2-20 on page 108. Reconnect the
power cord and press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer on.
2. Set the HP 3456A control s as fol l ows:
Functi on .................................................................... DC VOLTS
Range .................................................................................. 0.1 V
Resol uti on ........... .......................................................... 100 mV
3. On the HP 8560E/EC, press AUX CTRL, EXTERNAL MIXER, BIAS, then
BIAS OFF.
4. Adjust A15R926 EXT BI AS ZERO for a DVM readi ng of 0.000 Vdc
12.5 mV.
110 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
15. External Mixer Amplitude Adjustment
15. External Mixer Amplitude Adjustment
Assembly Adjusted
A15 RF assembl y
Related Performance Test
I F I nput Ampl i tude Accuracy
Description
The sl ope of the atness compensati on ampl i ers i s determi ned. The
user-l oaded conversi on l osses for K-band are recorded and reset to 30
dB. A 310.7 MHz si gnal i s appl i ed to the power sensor and the power
l evel of the source i s adjusted for a 30 dBm readi ng. The si gnal i s then
appl i ed to the I F I NPUT. The atness compensati on ampl i ers are then
adjusted (vi a DACs) to pl ace the di spl ayed si gnal at the reference l evel .
Onl y the determi nati on of the Fl atness Compensati on Ampl i er sl ope
i s performed i f the HP 8560E/EC has Opti on 002.
Figure 2-21 External Mixer Amplitude Adjustment Setup
Chapter 2 111
Adjustment Procedures
15. External Mixer Amplitude Adjustment
Equipment
Synthesi zed sweeper ....................................................HP8340A/B
Measuri ng recei ver ............... ..........................................HP8902A
Power sensor . .....................................................HP 8484A, 8481D
50 MHz reference attenuator ............. .........................HP11708A
(supplied with HP 8481D)
Adapters
Type N (f) to SMA (f)................ ...................................... 1250-1772
Type N (m) to BNC (f)................ .................................... 1250-1476
Type APC 3.5 (f) to APC 3.5 (f) ............... ...................... 5061-5311
Cables
BNC, 122 cm (48 i n).............. ....................................... HP10503A
SMA, 61 cm (24 i n)................. ........................................ 8120-1578
Procedure
1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer off and di sconnect the
power cord. Remove the spectrum anal yzer cover and reconnect the
power cord.
2. Set up the equi pment as i l l ustrated i n Fi gure 2-21 on page 110. Do
not connect the SMA cabl e to the HP 8560E/EC.
3. Move the WR PROT/WR ENA jumper on the A2 Control l er assembl y
to the WR ENA posi ti on. (The jumper i s on the edge of the A2
control l er assembl y and can be moved wi thout fol di ng the board
down.) Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer on.
4. On the HP 8560E/EC, press AUX CTRL, EXTERNAL MIXER, AMPTD
CORRECT, then CNV LOSS VS FREQ.
5. On the HP 8560E/EC, press CAL, MORE 1 OF 2, SERVICE
CAL DATA, 3RD IF AMP, and CAL 3RD AMP GAIN. Wai t unti l the
message ADJUSTMENT-DONE appears i n the acti ve functi on bl ock.
NOTE Perform steps 6 through 13 onl y i f the HP 8560E/EC does not have
Opti on 002.
6. Press or to di spl ay the conversi on l oss val ue for each frequency
l i sted i n Tabl e 2-12 on page 112. Record any conversi on l oss readi ng
not equal to 30 dB i n Tabl e 2-12 on page 112 at the appropri ate
frequency.
7. I f al l conversi on l oss val ues equal 30 dB, ski p to step 8, otherwi se
conti nue to step a.
a. Refer to Tabl e 2-12 on page 112 and press or to sel ect a
frequency at whi ch the conversi on l oss val ue does not equal 30
dB.
112 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
15. External Mixer Amplitude Adjustment
b. Use the spectrum anal yzer front panel keys to set the conversi on
l oss val ue to 30 dB.
c. Repeat steps a and b for al l frequenci es havi ng a conversi on l oss
val ue other than 30 dB.
8. Press INSTR PRESET on the HP 8340A/B and set the control s as
fol l ows:
CW frequency ........................................................ 310.7 MHz
Power l evel .............................................................30 dBm
9. Connect the power sensor to the HP 11708A attenuator al ready
connected to the HP 8902A RF power connector. Zero and cal i brate
the HP 8902A/power sensor combi nati on i n l og mode. Enter the
power sensor 50 MHz Cal Factor i nto the HP 8902A. Connect the
power sensor, through an adapter, to the SMA cabl e.
10.Adjust the HP 8340A POWER LEVEL unti l the power di spl ayed on the
HP 8902A reads 30 dBm 0.05 dB.
11.Di sconnect the SMA cabl e from the power sensor/adapter and
connect the cabl e to the HP 8560E/EC I F I NPUT.
12.On the HP 8560E/EC, press CAL, MORE 1 OF 2, SERVICE
CAL DATA, 3RD IF AMP, then EXT MXR REF CAL.
Table 2-12 Conversion Loss Data
Frequency
(GHz)
Conversion Loss (dB) (30 dB)
18
20
22
24
26
27
Chapter 2 113
Adjustment Procedures
15. External Mixer Amplitude Adjustment
13.Use the HP 8560E/EC front panel knob, step keys, or keypad to
change the ampl i tude of the di spl ayed si gnal unti l the marker reads
0 dBm 0.17 dB.
14.Press PREV MENU, STORE DATA and YES on the HP 8560E/EC.
15.Pl ace the WR PROT/WR ENA jumper on the A2 Control l er
assembl y i n the WR PROT posi ti on.
NOTE The fol l owi ng steps shoul d onl y be performed i f you need to repl ace the
30 dB conversi on l oss val ues wi th those recorded i n Tabl e 2-12 on page
112.
16.Press AUX CTRL, EXTERNAL MIXER, AMPTD CORRECT, then CNV
LOSS VS FREQ on the HP 8560E/EC.
17.Press L or M to sel ect frequenci es where the conversi on l oss val ue
was recorded i n Tabl e 2-12 on page 112.
18.Use the spectrum anal yzer front panel keys to enter the conversi on
l oss val ues recorded for the frequency.
114 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
16. Signal ID Oscillator Adjustment (serial prex 3517A and below)
16. Signal ID Oscillator Adjustment (serial
prex 3517A and below)
Assembly Adjusted
A15 RF assembl y
Related Performance Test
There i s no rel ated performance test for thi s adjustment.
Description
NOTE Thi s adjustment appl i es onl y to spectrum anal yzers wi th A15 RF
assembl y 08563- 60083 or earl i er (seri al prex 3517A and bel ow). Later
A15 RF assembl i es have no 298 MHz adjustment. Thi s procedure i s
requi red for spectrum anal yzers wi th a seri al prex l ess than 3310A
(standard and al l opti ons), or from 3310A through 3517A wi th Opti on
008 i nstal l ed.
The frequency range of the 298 MHz si gnal I D osci l l ator i s determi ned
by counti ng the 10.7 MHz I F as A15C629 i s rotated through i ts range of
adjustment. The SI G I D osci l l ator i s then set to the frequency
determi ned by the fol l owi ng equati on:
Oscillator frequency 12.7 MHz
Oscillator frequency range
4
--------------------------------------------------------------- -


+ =
Chapter 2 115
Adjustment Procedures
16. Signal ID Oscillator Adjustment (serial prex 3517A and below)
Figure 2-22 Signal ID Oscillator Adjustment Setup
Equipment
Mi crowave frequency counter ....................................HP 5343A
Spectrum anal yzer ..................................................... HP 8566A/B
Adapters
Type N (m) to BNC (f) (2 required) ........................... 1250-1476
BNC tee (f, m, f) .............................................................1250-0781
Cables
Test cabl e, BNC (m) to SMB (f) .................................. 85680-60093
BNC, 122 cm (48 i n) (2 required) ............................... HP 10503A
116 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
16. Signal ID Oscillator Adjustment (serial prex 3517A and below)
Procedure
1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer off, di sconnect the power
cord, and remove the spectrum anal yzer cover. Fol d down the A15
RF and A14 frequency control assembl i es. Prop up the A14
frequency control assembl y.
2. Connect the HP 8560E/EC CAL OUTPUT to the I NPUT 50 usi ng
an adapter. Di sconnect the W29 cabl e from A15J601 (10.7 MHz I F
out) and connect the SMB end of the test cabl e to A15J601. Connect
the rest of the equi pment as shown i n Fi gure 2-22 on page 115.
3. Remove the four screws hol di ng the brace on the A15 RF assembl y
(near J2).
4. Connect a jumper between the l eads of A15R914 and A15C904 (the
ends near U908). See Fi gure 2-23 on page 116 for the l ocati on of the
components.
5. Reconnect the power cord and press LINE to turn the spectrum
anal yzer on. After the power-on sequence i s compl ete, set the HP
8560E/EC control s as fol l ows:
Center frequency ....................................... 300 MHz
Span ............................................................ 0 Hz
6. Press CAL, IF ADJ ON OFF (OFF), and SGL SWP.
Figure 2-23 Signal ID Oscillator Adjustment J umper Location
Chapter 2 117
Adjustment Procedures
16. Signal ID Oscillator Adjustment (serial prex 3517A and below)
7. Press INSTR PRESET on the HP 8566A/B and set the control s as
fol l ows:
Center frequency .............................................................. 12.7 MHz
Span .................................................................................... 500 kHz
8. Set the HP 5343A control s as fol l ows:
Sampl e rate ................................................ .Ful l y countercl ockwi se
50 1 M SWI TCH .......................................................... 50
10 Hz 500 MHz/500 MHz 26.5 GHz swi tch ............10 Hz 500 MHz
9. I f no si gnal i s di spl ayed on the HP 8566A/B, adjust A15C629 SI G I D
unti l a si gnal i s di spl ayed.
NOTE I f the 298 MHz SI G I D osci l l ator i s severel y mi stuned, i t mi ght be
necessary to wi den the span on the HP 8566A/B to see the I F si gnal .
10.Rotate A15C629 SI G I D sl i ghtl y whi l e observi ng the HP 8566A/B
di spl ay.
NOTE The nomi nal counted frequency shoul d be 12.7 MHz, not 10.7 MHz.
11.Whi l e observi ng the HP 8566A/B di spl ay, adjust A15C629 SI G I D for
the hi ghest obtai nabl e frequency, wi th l ess than 3 dB decrease i n
ampl i tude from maxi mum. Read thi s frequency from the frequency
counter and record as F
3 dB HI GH
.
F
3 dB HI GH
= _________________________MHz
12.Observe the HP 8566A/B di spl ay as you adjust A15C629 SI G I D for
the l owest obtai nabl e frequency, wi th l ess than 3 dB decrease i n
ampl i tude from maxi mum. Record the frequency counter readi ng as
F
3 dB LOW
.
F
3 dB LOW
= __________________________MHz
13.Cal cul ate the di fference between F
3 dB HI GH
and F
3 dB LOW
, then
di vi de resul ts by four. Enter the resul t as F
OFFSET
.
F
OFFSET
= ___________________________kHz
14.Add F
OFFSET
to F
3 dB LOW
recorded i n step 10 and record the resul t
as F
SI GI D
.
F
SI GI D
= _____________________________MHz
15.Adjust A15C629 for a frequency counter readi ng equal i ng F
SI GI D
.
The nal adjusted frequency must equal 12.7 MHz 50 kHz.
118 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
17. 10 MHz Reference Adjustment-OCXO (Non-Option 103)
17. 10 MHz Reference Adjustment-OCXO
(Non-Option 103)
Assembly Adjusted
A21 OCXO assembl y
NOTE Repl acement osci l l ators are factory adjusted after a compl ete warmup
and after the speci ed agi ng rate has been achi eved. Thus,
readjustment shoul d typi cal l y not be necessary after osci l l ator
repl acement and i s general l y not recommended.
Related Performance Test
10 MHz Reference Accuracy
Description
The frequency of the i nternal 10 MHz frequency reference i s compared
to a known frequency standard and adjusted for mi ni mum frequency
error. Thi s procedure does not adjust the short-term stabi l i ty or
l ong-term stabi l i ty of the A21 10 MHz oveni zed crystal osci l l ator
(OCXO). Stabi l i ty i s determi ned by the characteri sti cs of the parti cul ar
osci l l ator and the envi ronmental and warmup condi ti ons to whi ch i t
has been recentl y exposed. The spectrum anal yzer must be on
conti nuousl y for at l east 24 hours i mmedi atel y pri or to osci l l ator
adjustment to al l ow both the temperature and frequency of the
osci l l ator to stabi l i ze.
Chapter 2 119
Adjustment Procedures
17. 10 MHz Reference Adjustment-OCXO (Non-Option 103)
Figure 2-24 10 MHz Reference Adjustment Setup and Adjustment Location
Equipment
Frequency counter ...................................................... HP5334A/B
Frequency standard..................... HP 5061B Cesi um Beam Standard
(or any 10 MHz frequency standard wi th accuracy <1 X 10
10
)
Cable
BNC, 122 cm (2 required)..... ........................................ HP10503A
Procedure
NOTE Fai l ure to al l ow a 24 hour mi ni mum warmup ti me for OCXO frequency
and temperature stabi l i zati on may resul t i n osci l l ator mi sadjustment.
120 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
17. 10 MHz Reference Adjustment-OCXO (Non-Option 103)
1. Connect equi pment as shown i n Fi gure 2-24 on page 119. Perform
the fol l owi ng steps:
a. Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer on. After the automati c
power-on adjustment sequence i s compl ete, press PRESET to
ensure that the frequency reference i s set to i nternal .
b. Al l ow the spectrum anal yzer to remai n powered on conti nuousl y
for at l east 24 hours to ensure that the A21 OCXO temperature
and frequency stabi l i ze.
NOTE I f the reference i s set to 10 MHz EXT, press 10 MHz INT. Al l ow the 24-hour
warmup for the OCXO before conti nui ng. When the 10 MHz reference
i s set to 10 MHz EXT, the OCXO i s not operati ng or warmed up.
c. Connect the frequency standard to the frequency counter rear
panel TI MEBASE I N/OUT connector.
d. Connect a BNC cabl e between the spectrum anal yzer rear panel
10 MHz REF I N/OUT connector and I NPUT A on the frequency
counter.
2. Set the frequency counter control s as fol l ows:
Functi on/data ............................... ..................................freqA
I nput . .....................................................................................A
10 Attenuator .............................................................. OFF
AC.......... ................................................... OFF (DC coupl ed)
50 .. ........ ..................................................OFF (1 Mi nput
i mpedance)
Auto tri gger .. ......................................................................ON
100 kHz l ter A .. ..............................................................OFF
I NT/EXT swi tch (rear panel ) .. ........................................ EXT
3. Sel ect a 1 second gate ti me on the HP 5334A/B frequency counter by
pressi ng GATE TIME, 1, and GATE TIME.
4. To offset the di spl ayed frequency by 10.0 MHz, press MATH
SELECT/ENTER, CHX/EEX, 10, CHS/EEX, 6, SELECT/ENTER,
SELECT/ENTER. The frequency counter shoul d now di spl ay the
di fference between the frequency of the I NPUT A si gnal and 10.0
MHz wi th a di spl ayed resol uti on of 0.010 Hz (10 MHz).
5. Locate the FREQ ADJ control on the HP 8560E/EC. Thi s control i s
accessi bl e through the center deck of the spectrum anal yzer. See
Fi gure 2-24 on page 119.
6. Remove the dust-cap screw.
7. Use a nonconducti ve adjustment tool to adjust the FREQ ADJ
control on the A21 OCXO for a frequency counter readi ng of 0.00 Hz.
8. On the HP 5334A/B frequency counter, sel ect a 10-second gate ti me
by pressi ng GATE TIME, 10, GATE TIME. The frequency counter shoul d
Chapter 2 121
Adjustment Procedures
17. 10 MHz Reference Adjustment-OCXO (Non-Option 103)
now di spl ay the di fference between the frequency of the I NPUT A
si gnal and 10.0 MHz wi th a resol uti on of 0.001 Hz (1 MHz).
9. Wai t at l east two gate peri ods for the frequency counter to stabi l i ze,
then adjust the FREQ ADJ control on A21 OCXO for a stabl e
frequency counter readi ng of 0.000 Hz 0.010 Hz.
10.Repl ace the dust-cap screw to A21 OCXO.
122 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
18. Tracking Oscillator Adjustment (Option 002)
18. Tracking Oscillator Adjustment
(Option 002)
NOTE Thi s i s not a routi ne adjustment. Thi s adjustment shoul d onl y be
performed i f there i s i nsufci ent tracki ng adjustment range.
Assembly Adjusted
A10 tracki ng generator assembl y
Related Performance Test
Tracki ng Adjustment Range
Description
The centeri ng of the tracki ng osci l l ator range i s adjusted i n the factory
to ensure that the tracki ng adjustment functi ons properl y. Over a
peri od of 5 years, however, the center frequency of the tracki ng
osci l l ator range may dri ft outsi de of acceptabl e l i mi ts. Thi s adjustment
shoul d onl y be performed i f there i s i nsufci ent tracki ng adjustment
range.
Thi s adjustment recenters the tracki ng osci l l ator range. The A10
tracki ng generator i s parti al l y removed from the spectrum anal yzer to
perform thi s adjustment. A synthesi zed sweeper i s used as the rst
l ocal osci l l ator si gnal . A frequency counter i s used to measure the
output frequency.
Equipment
Synthesi zed sweeper...... ............................................. HP8340A/B
Mi crowave frequency counter ................. ...................... HP5343A
50 termi nati on ........... ............. ................................... 1810-0118
Al i gnment tool , non-metal l i c ... .............. ....................... 8710-0033
Cables
SMA, 91 cm (36 i n) ............ ............ ................................ 5061-5458
BNC, 122 cm (48 i n) (3 requi red) ............. ................... HP10503A
Adapters
APC 3.5 (f) to APC 3.5 (f) .... ........... ............................. 5061-5311 .
SMA (m) to BNC (f) ....... .............. .................................. 1250-1200
BNC tee ..................................... ..................................... 1250-0781
Chapter 2 123
Adjustment Procedures
18. Tracking Oscillator Adjustment (Option 002)
Procedure
1. Remove the A10 tracki ng generator assembl y as descri bed i n
Chapter 3. Wi th the A10 tracki ng generator posi ti oned next to the
HP 8560E/EC, reconnect W14 (10-wi re ri bbon cabl e) to A10J1.
Reconnect W48 to A10J8. Connect the 50 termi nati on to A10J3.
2. Connect the equi pment as shown i n Fi gure 2-25 on page 123. The
frequency counter provi des the frequency reference for the
synthesi zed sweeper and the HP 8560E/EC.
Figure 2-25 Tracking Oscillator Adjustment Setup
124 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
18. Tracking Oscillator Adjustment (Option 002)
3. Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer on. Press AUX CTRL,
TRACKING GENRATOR, SRC PWR ON, AUX CTRL, REAR PANEL, and
10 MHz EXT. Al l ow the HP 8560E/EC to warm up for at l east 5
mi nutes. Set the control s as fol l ows:
Center frequency .......................................................... 300 MHz
Span......................................... ............................................ 0 Hz
4. Press I NSTR PRESET on the synthesi zed sweeper and set the
control s as fol l ows:
CW ............................................................................. 4.2107 GHz
Power l evel ................................ .................................. +12 dBm
Frequency standard swi tch (rear panel ) ........ ................... EXT
5. Set the frequency counter control s as fol l ows:
SAMPLE RATE ................. ................................................ Ful l y CCW
10 Hz 500 MHz /500 MHz 26.5 GHz Swi tch ....... 10 Hz500 MHz
50 1 M Swi tch ............................. ............. ......................... 50
6. Remove the dust cap screw used to seal the tracki ng osci l l ator
adjustment.
7. On the HP 8560E/EC, press AUX CTRL, TRACKING GENRATOR, MORE
1 OF 3, MAN TRK ADJ, 0, and Hz. Rotate the knob countercl ockwi se
unti l FI NE TRACK ADJ i s set to 0.
8. Record the frequency counter readi ng i n Tabl e 2-13 on page 125 as
F1.
9. On the HP 8560E/EC, press MAN TRK ADJ, 255, and Hz. Rotate the
knob cl ockwi se unti l the FI NE TRACK ADJ i s set to 255.
10.Record the frequency counter readi ng i n Tabl e 2-13 on page 125 as
F2.
11.Cal cul ate F
center
as shown bel ow and record i n Tabl e 2-13 on page
125.
F
center
= (F1 + F2) /2
12.Set COARSE TRACK ADJ to 25. Thi s sets the tracki ng osci l l ator
near the center of i ts frequency range (the rel ati onshi p between the
COARSE TRACK ADJ dac number and the output frequency i s
nonl i near). Adjust COARSE TRACK ADJ and FI NE TRACK ADJ
unti l the frequency counter reads F
center
100 Hz.
13.Record the val ues of COARSE TRACK ADJ and FI NE TRACK ADJ
i n Tabl e 2-13 on page 125.
Chapter 2 125
Adjustment Procedures
18. Tracking Oscillator Adjustment (Option 002)
14.Adjust A10C3 TRK OSC CTR unti l the frequency counter reads 300
MHz 500 Hz.
15.Repeat steps 7 through 14 at l east once more unti l no further
adjustment of A10C3 TRK OSC CTR i s necessary.
16.Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer off. Repl ace the dust cap
screw on A10. Di sconnect al l cabl es from A10.
17.Rei nstal l A10 i n the HP 8560E/EC.
Table 2-13 Tracking Oscillator Range Centering
N F1 (MHz) F2 (MHz) F
center
(MHz)
TRACK ADJ DAC Settings
COARSE FINE
1
2
3
4
5
126 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
19. 16 MHz PLL Adjustment
19. 16 MHz PLL Adjustment
NOTE Thi s adjustment appl i es onl y to spectrum anal yzers wi th A2 control l er
assembl i es other than 08563-60017.
Assembly Adjusted
A2 control l er assembl y
Related Performance Tests
Sweep Ti me Accuracy Gate Del ay Accuracy and Gate Length Accuracy
Del ayed Sweep Accuracy Fast Sweep Ti me Accuracy (Opti on 007)
Description
I n spectrum anal yzers wi th seri al prex numbers greater than or equal
to 3310A, the 16MHz CPU cl ock i s phase l ocked to the 10 MHz
reference. The output of the 16 MHz PLL l oop i ntegrator i s adjusted for
a cl ock frequency of approxi matel y 14.4 MHz wi th the l oop unl ocked.
Thi s ensures that the CPU wi l l sti l l functi on and the di spl ay annotati on
wi l l be di storted but readabl e, even i f the 10 MHz reference to A2 i s
absent.
NOTE I f necessary, perform the di spl ay adjustments after performi ng the
fol l owi ng adjustment.
Chapter 2 127
Adjustment Procedures
19. 16 MHz PLL Adjustment
Figure 2-26 16 MHz PLL Adjustment Setup
Equipment
Mi crowave frequency counter ................................... HP 5343A
10:1 probe ...................................................................... HP 10432A
Procedure
1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer off. Remove the spectrum
anal yzer cover and fol d out the A2 control l er and A3 i nterface
assembl i es. Use a pc board prop to hol d up the A3 i nterface
assembl y, as shown i n Fi gure 2-26 on page 127.
2. Connect the equi pment as shown i f Fi gure 2-26 on page 127. The
10:1 probe ground l ead connects to A2TP10 and the probe ti p
connects to A2TP101.
3. The 16 MHz PLL adjustment l ocati on i s shown i n Fi gure 2-27 on
page 128.
128 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
19. 16 MHz PLL Adjustment
Figure 2-27 16 MHz PLL Adjustment Location
4. Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer on. Wai t unti l the
spectrum anal yzer power-on adjustments have compl eted.
5. Set the mi crowave frequency counter as fol l ows:
Sampl e rate ........................................................................ Ful l y countercl ockwi se
10 Hz 500 MHz/500 MHz 26.5 GHz Swi tch.................10 Hz 500 MHz
50 /1 M Swi tch ............................................................ 1 M
6. On the HP 8560E/EC spectrum anal yzer, press AUX CTRL, REAR
PANEL, and 10 MHz EXT.
Chapter 2 129
Adjustment Procedures
19. 16 MHz PLL Adjustment
7. Di sconnect W22 (10 MHz frequency counter) from A2J8. The di spl ay
wi l l probabl y appear di storted and error messages may appear.
I gnore the error messages.
8. Adjust A2R152 (16 MHz PLL ADJ) unti l the mi crowave frequency
counter reads 14.4 MHz 200 kHz.
9. Reconnect W22 to A2J8. The mi crowave frequency counter shoul d
read 16 MHz. I f the counter reads 16 MHz and the di spl ay i s sti l l
di storted, perform the di spl ay adjustments i n "Di spl ay Adjustment,"
i n thi s chapter.
10.On the spectrum anal yzer, press CAL and REALIGN LO and
IF to cl ear any error messages.
130 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures
20. 600 MHz Reference Adjustment (serial prex 3406A and above)
20. 600 MHz Reference Adjustment
(serial prex 3406A and above)
Assembly Adjusted
A15 RF assembl y
Related Performance Test
There i s no rel ated performance test for thi s adjustment.
Description
The 100 MHz VCXO and the tri pl er are adjusted for a maxi mum si gnal
l evel at 600 MHz. A spectrum anal yzer i s used to moni tor the
ampl i tude of the 600 MHz si gnal whi l e performi ng these adjustments.
Equipment
Spectrum anal yzer ............................... .....................HP 8566A/B.
Procedure
1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer off, di sconnect the power
cord, and remove the spectrum anal yzer cover. Fol d down the A15
RF and A14 frequency control assembl i es. Prop up the A14
frequency control assembl y.
2. Di sconnect W33, gray/brown coax cabl e, from A15J701.
3. Connect the si gnal at A15J701 to the i nput of the HP 8566A/B
spectrum anal yzer.
4. Reconnect the power cord and press LINE to turn the spectrum
anal yzer on.
5. Set the center frequency of the HP 8566A/B to 600 MHz, and set the
frequency span and resol uti on bandwi dth of the HP 8566A/B for the
best di spl ay of the 600 MHz si gnal .
6. Set the peak of the 600 MHz si gnal near the top grati cul e l i ne on the
HP 8566A/B di spl ay and set to 1 dB per di vi si on.
7. Adjust A15C750, VCXO Adjust, for maxi mum ampl i tude.
8. Adjust A15C751 Tri pl er Adjust, for maxi mum ampl i tude. The l evel ,
after proper adjustment, shoul d be between 3 and +4.8 dBm
(typi cal l y 0 to +1 dBm).
9. Reconnect W33 to A15J701.
131
2a Adjustment Procedures:
HP 3335A Source not Available
132 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures: HP 3335A Source not Available
What You'll Find in This Chapter
What You'll Find in This Chapter
Thi s chapter provi des al ternati ve procedures for the adjustment of the
spectrum anal yzer that do not requi re the use of the HP 3335A
Synthesi zer Level Generator. The HP 3335A has been obsol eted.
Because of the unavai l abi l i ty of the HP 3335A, new adjustment
procedures are requi red that use di fferent si gnal sources. I f the
HP 3335A i s not avai l abl e, substi tute these procedures for those of the
same number found i n Chapter 2.
Chapter 2 133
Adjustment Procedures: HP 3335A Source not Available
Required Test Equipment
Required Test Equipment
The fol l owi ng tabl e l i sts the test equi pment requi red to execute the
adjustments i n thi s chapter. These adjustments ori gi nal l y requi red the
use of the HP 3335A Synthesi zer Level Generator.
Table 2a-1 Recommended Test Equipment
Instrument Critical Specications for Equipment
Substitution
Recommended
Model
Sources
Synthesi zed Si gnal Generator Frequency range: 250 kHz to 3 GHz
Frequency resol uti on: 1 Hz
Attenuator resol uti on: 0.02 dB
Level accuracy: 0.5 dB
External 10 MHz Ref. I nput
HP E4421B or
HP E4422B,
HP E4432B,
HP E4433B
Cables
Cabl e, 50 coaxi al
(four required)
Connectors: BNC (m)
Length: 122 cm (48 i n.)
HP 10503A
Cabl e Test Cabl e 85680-60093
Adapters
Adapter
(four required)
Type N (m)-to-BNC (f) 1250-1476
Adapter
(Option 026 only)
APC-3.5 (f) to APC-3.5 (f) 5061-5311
Adapter
(Option 026 only)
APC-3.5 (f) to BNC-3.5 (f) 1250-1200
134 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures: HP 3335A Source not Available
4a. IF Amplitude Adjustments
4a. IF Amplitude Adjustments
The I F Ampl i tude Adjustments consi st of the Cal Osci l l ator Ampl i tude
adjustment and the Reference 15 dB Attenuator adjustment.
Assembly Adjusted
A4 l og amp/cal osci l l ator A5 I F assembl y
Related Performance Tests
I F Gai n Uncertai nty Scal e Fi del i ty
Equipment
Si gnal Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP E4421B
Adapters
Type N (m) to BNC (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1476
Cables
BNC, 122 cm (48 i n). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 10503A
Test cabl e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85680-60093
Figure2a-1IF Amplitude Adjustment Setup
Chapter 2 135
Adjustment Procedures: HP 3335A Source not Available
4a. IF Amplitude Adjustments
Figure2a-2IF Amplitude Adjustment Locations
A4 Log Amp/Cal Oscillator Amplitude Adjustment
Thi s adjustment sets the output ampl i tude of the cal osci l l ator on the
A4 assembl y, and the absol ute ampl i tude of the reference 15 dB
attenuator.
The output of the cal osci l l ator i s adjusted so that a 55 dBm si gnal
appl i ed to the 10.7 MHz I F i nput on the A5 I F assembl y (A5J3) causes a
di spl ayed si gnal of 60 dBm. The effect of thi s adjustment i s vi si bl e
onl y after the ADJ CURR IF STATE sequence i s compl ete.
ADJ CURR IF STATE causes the I F gai n adjustment to use the new
output ampl i tude from the cal osci l l ator. When the adjustment
sequence i s compl ete, the resul t of the adjustment shoul d cause the
35 dBm si gnal at A5J5 to be di spl ayed at 60 dBm.
Thi s procedure al so sets the attenuator of the reference 15 dB
attenuator so that a source ampl i tude change of 50 dB combi ned wi th a
spectrum anal yzer reference l evel change of 50 dB di spl ays an
ampl i tude di fference of 50 dB.
NOTE The 15 dB reference attenuator adjustment i s preset at the factory and
need not be done i f the enti re A5 I F assembl y i s repl aced.
136 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures: HP 3335A Source not Available
4a. IF Amplitude Adjustments
Procedure
1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer off. Remove the spectrum
anal yzer cover and pl ace the spectrum anal yzer i n the servi ce
posi ti on as i l l ustrated i n Fi gure 2a-1. See Fi gure 2a-2 for adjustment
l ocati on.
2. Di sconnect W29, vi ol et coax cabl e, from A5J3. Connect the test cabl e
between A5J3 and the RF output of the HP E4421B. Press LINE to
turn the spectrum anal yzer on.
3. Set the spectrum anal yzer control s as fol l ows:
Center frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7 MHz
Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 kHz
Reference l evel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 dBm
Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 dB
Log/di vi si on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Log/di vi si on
Resol uti on BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 kHz
Vi deo BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Hz
4. On the spectrum anal yzer, press MKR, CAL, and IF ADJ OFF.
5. Set the HP E4421B control s as fol l ows:
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7 MHz
Ampl i tude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 dBm
Mod On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off
6. Note the marker val ue. I deal l y i t shoul d read 60 dBm 0.1 dB.
7. I f the marker reads l ess than 60.1 dBm, rotate A4R826 CAL OSC
AMPTD one-thi rd turn counter-cl ockwi se for every 0.1 dB l ess than
60 dBm. See Fi gure 2a-2 for the l ocati on of A4R826.
8. I f the marker reads greater than 59.9 dBm, rotate A4R826 CAL
OSC AMPTD one-thi rd turn cl ockwi se for every 0.1 dB greater than
60 dBm. A change i n the di spl ayed ampl i tude wi l l not be seen at
thi s poi nt.
NOTE I f A4R826 has i nadequate range, refer to I nadequate CAL OSC
AMPTD Range i n Chapter 9.
9. On the spectrum anal yzer, press ADJ CURR IF STATE. After al l owi ng
the spectrum anal yzer ti me to compl ete the adjustments, the
di spl ayed ampl i tude and marker readi ng shoul d change.
Chapter 2 137
Adjustment Procedures: HP 3335A Source not Available
4a. IF Amplitude Adjustments
10.Repeat step 7 through step 9 unti l the marker reads 60 dBm
0.1 dB.
11.Di sconnect the test cabl e from A5J3 and reconnect W29 to A5J3.
A5 Reference Attenuator Adjustment
1. Set the HP E4421B AMPLITUDE to 60 dBm.
2. Connect a BNC cabl e between the RF output of the HP E4421B and
the spectrum anal yzer I NPUT 50.
3. On the spectrum anal yzer, press CAL and REF LEVEL ADJUST. Use
the front panel knob or step keys to pl ace the peak of the di spl ayed
si gnal 3 dB to 5 dB bel ow the reference l evel .
4. On the spectrum anal yzer, press PEAK SEARCH and MARKER DELTA.
Set the spectrum anal yzer reference l evel to 10 dBm.
5. Change the HP E4421B Amplitude to 10 dBm.
6. On the spectrum anal yzer, press CAL.
7. Note the MKR ampl i tude. I deal l y, i t shoul d read 50.00 dB 0.1 dB.
8. I f the MKR ampl i tude i s l ess than 49.9 dB, rotate A5R343 (15 dB
ATTEN) one-hal f turn countercl ockwi se for each 0.1 dB l ess than
50.00 dB. I f the MKR ampl i tude i s greater than 50.1 dB, rotate
A5R343 one-hal f turn cl ockwi se for each 0.1 dB greater than
50.00 dB. Do not adjust A5R343 more than ve turns before
conti nui ng wi th the next step.
9. On the spectrum anal yzer, press ADJ CURR IF STATE. Note the MKR
ampl i tude readi ng.
10.Set the spectrum anal yzer reference l evel to 60 dBm and press MKR
and MARKERS OFF.
11.Repeat step 1 through step 10 unti l the MKR ampl i tude readi ng i s
50.00 dB 0.1 dB.
A5 Adjustment Verication
1. On the spectrum anal yzer, di sconnect W29 from A5J3. Connect the
test cabl e between A5J3 and the RF output of the HP E4421B.
2. Set the spectrum anal yzer reference l evel to 10 dBm.
3. Set the HP E4421B Amplitude to 5 dBm.
4. On the spectrum anal yzer press MKR and MARKER NORMAL.
5. The MARKER ampl i tude shoul d read 10 dBm 0.13 dB. I f the
readi ng i s outsi de of thi s range, repeat step 3, on page 2a-136
through step 10, on page 2a-137.
138 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures: HP 3335A Source not Available
4a. IF Amplitude Adjustments
6. On the spectrum anal yzer, reconnect W29 to A5J3. Press PRESET
and set the control s as fol l ows:
Center frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 MHz
Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 Hz
Reference l evel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 dBm
Resol uti on BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 kHz
7. Connect a BNC cabl e between the spectrum anal yzer CAL OUTPUT
and I NPUT 50.
8. On the spectrum anal yzer, press MKR, CAL, and REF LVL ADJ.
9. Use the knob or step keys to adjust the REF LEVEL CAL setti ng
unti l the MKR reads 10.00 dBm 0.1 dB.
10.On the spectrum anal yzer, press STORE REF LVL.
Chapter 2 139
Adjustment Procedures: HP 3335A Source not Available
5a. DC Log Amplier Adjustments
5a. DC Log Amplier Adjustments
There are three DC Log adjustments; Li mi ter Phase, Li near Fi del i ty,
and Log Fi del i ty.
These adjustments need onl y be done under the fol l owi ng condi ti ons:
Li mi ter Phase Onl y i f a repai r i s made to bl ocks F, G, H, I , or J.
Li near Fi del i ty Onl y i f a repai r i s made to bl ocks C, D, F, G, H, I , J, K,
O, I F Gai n Accuracy, RBW swi tchi ng, or Log Fi del i ty.
Log Fi del i ty Onl y i f a repai r i s made to bl ocks D, F, H, K, I F Gai n
Accuracy, RBW swi tchi ng, or Log Fi del i ty.
I f mul ti pl e adjustments are requi red, they shoul d be done i n the
fol l owi ng order:
1. Li mi ter Phase
2. Li near Fi del i ty
3. Log Fi del i ty
Al l adjustments shoul d be made wi th al l of the shi el ds on and onl y after
al l owi ng at l east a 20 mi nute warmup.
Assembly Adjusted
A4 l og ampl i er
Related Performance Tests
I F Gai n Uncertai nty Scal e Fi del i ty
Equipment
Si gnal Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP E4421B
Adapters
Type N (m) to BNC (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1476
Cables
BNC, 122 cm (48 i n). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP 10503A
Test cabl e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85680-60093
140 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures: HP 3335A Source not Available
5a. DC Log Amplier Adjustments
Figure2a-3IF Amplitude Adjustment Setup
Figure2a-4IF Amplitude Adjustment Locations
Chapter 2 141
Adjustment Procedures: HP 3335A Source not Available
5a. DC Log Amplier Adjustments
A4 Limiter Phase Adjustment
Thi s adjustment consi sts of adjusti ng A4R445 for maxi mum on screen
ampl i tude under the fol l owi ng condi ti ons.
Procedure
1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer off. Remove the spectrum
anal yzer cover and pl ace the spectrum anal yzer i n the servi ce
posi ti on as i l l ustrated i n Fi gure 2a-3. See Fi gure 2a-4 for adjustment
l ocati on.
2. Connect the HP E4421B RF output to the spectrum anal yzer 50
i nput. Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer on.
3. Set the spectrum anal yzer control s as fol l ows:
Center frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 MHz
Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 kHz
Reference l evel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 dBm
Log/di vi si on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Log/di vi si on
Resol uti on BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 kHz
I F Adjust. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . off
4. Set up an HP E4421B as fol l ows:
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 MHz
Ampl i tude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 dBm
Mod On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off
5. On the spectrum anal yzer, press CAL and ADJ CURR IF STATE, wai t
for the spectrum anal yzer to compl ete adjustments, then press MKR.
6. Adjust A4R445 for maxi mum on-screen ampl i tude. Refer to Fi gure
2a-4 for the l ocati on of A4R445.
A4 Linear Fidelity Adjustment
Thi s adjustment consi sts of adjusti ng A4R544 unti l the del ta marker
reads 40 dB under the fol l owi ng condi ti ons.
142 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures: HP 3335A Source not Available
5a. DC Log Amplier Adjustments
Procedure
1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer off. Remove the spectrum
anal yzer cover and pl ace the spectrum anal yzer i n the servi ce
posi ti on as i l l ustrated i n Fi gure 2a-3. See Fi gure 2a-4 for adjustment
l ocati on.
2. Connect the HP E4421B RF output to the spectrum anal yzer 50
i nput. Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer on.
3. On the spectrum anal yzer, press PRESET, AMPLITUDE, LINEAR,
MORE 1 of 3, AMPD UNITS, dBm, CAL, and IF ADJ OFF.
4. Set the spectrum anal yzer control s as fol l ows:
Center frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 MHz
Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 MHz
Resol uti on BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 kHz
Reference l evel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 dBm
5. Set up an HP E4421B as fol l ows:
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 MHz
Ampl i tude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 dBm
Mod On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off
6. On the spectrum anal yzer, press PEAK SEARCH and MARKER DELTA.
7. Reduce the i nput power by 40 dB, to 58 dBm (use an attenuator or
a source wi th a good rel ati ve ampl i tude accuracy).
8. I f the si gnal i s l ower on the screen than expected (del ta marker
reads a change of greater than 40 dB, such as 41dB), then adjust
A4R544 (see Fi gure 2a-4) for an even l ower l evel and press CAL and
ADJ CURR IF STATE. Al l ow sufci ent ti me for the spectrum anal yzer
to compl ete the adjustment.
9. I f the si gnal i s hi gher on the screen than expected (del ta marker
reads a change of l ess than 40 dB, such as reads 39 dB), then adjust
A4R544 for an even hi gher l evel si gnal and press CAL and ADJ CURR
IF STATE. Al l ow sufci ent ti me for the spectrum anal yzer to compl ete
the adjustment.
10.Repeat the adjustment and adjust current state unti l the del ta
marker reads 40 dB 2 dB.
Chapter 2 143
Adjustment Procedures: HP 3335A Source not Available
5a. DC Log Amplier Adjustments
A4 Log Fidelity Adjustment
Thi s adjustment consi sts of adjusti ng A4R531 unti l the error i s
adjusted to zero.
Procedure
1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer off. Remove the spectrum
anal yzer cover and pl ace the spectrum anal yzer i n the servi ce
posi ti on as i l l ustrated i n Fi gure 2a-3. See Fi gure 2a-4 for adjustment
l ocati on.
2. Connect the HP E4421B RF output to the spectrum anal yzer 50
i nput. Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer on.
3. On the spectrum anal yzer, press PRESET, CAL, IF ADJ OFF, and ADJ
CURR IF STATE.
4. Set the spectrum anal yzer control s as fol l ows:
Center frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 MHz
Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
Resol uti on BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 kHz
Reference l evel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 dBm
5. Set up an HP E4421B as fol l ows:
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 MHz
Ampl i tude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 dBm
6. On the spectrum anal yzer, press MKR and MARKER DELTA, then
decrease the source power to 26 dBm.
7. Cal cul ate the error. The error = Del ta Marker readi ng + 16 (i n dB).
8. Set the source power to 10 dBm.
9. Adjust A4R531 (see Fi gure 2a-4) to read 2 ti mes the error, press CAL
and ADJ CURR IF STATE.
10.Repeat to check. Readjust as necessary to get error adjusted to zero.
144 Chapter 2
Adjustment Procedures: HP 3335A Source not Available
5a. DC Log Amplier Adjustments
145
3 Assembly Replacement
146 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Introduction
Introduction
Thi s chapter descri bes the removal and repl acement of al l major
assembl i es. The fol l owi ng repl acement procedures are provi ded:
Access to I nternal Assembl i es ............................................ page 147
Cabl e Col or Code ................................................................. page 148
Procedure 1. Spectrum Anal yzer Cover ............................. page 149
Procedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A18 LCD (8560EC) ......... page 150
W3 Li ne Swi tch Cabl e (8560EC)...................................... page 153
Procedure 2B. A1 Front Frame/A18 CRT (8560E) ............ page 160
Procedure 3. A1A1 Keyboard/Front Panel Keys................ page 169
Procedure 4. A1A2 RPG...................................................... page 170
Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assembl i es..................... page 171
Procedure 6A. A6 Power Suppl y Assembl y (8560EC)....... page 178
Procedure 6B. A6 Power Suppl y Assembl y (8560E).......... page 181
Procedure 7. A6A1 Hi gh Vol tage Assembl y (8560E)......... page 185
Procedure 8. A7 through A13 Assembl i es.......................... page 189
A7 1st LO Di stri buti on Ampl i er ..................................... page 191
A8 Low Band Mi xer .......................................................... page 192
A9 I nput Attenuator ......................................................... page 192
A10 Tracki ng Generator (Opti on 002) ............................. page 194
A11 YTO............................................................................ page 195
A13 Second Converter ....................................................... page 196
Procedure 9. A14 and A15 Assembl i es............................... page 197
Procedure 10. A16 FADC/A17 CRT Dri ver (8560E).......... page 200
Procedure 11. B1 Fan .......................................................... page 203
Procedure 12. BT1 Battery ................................................. page 204
Procedure 13. Rear Frame/Rear Dress Panel .................... page 205
Procedure 14. W3 Li ne Swi tch Cabl e (8560E)................... page 210
Procedure 15. EEROM (A2U501)....................................... page 219
Procedure 16. A21 OCXO (Non-Opti on 103)...................... page 221
Tool s requi red to perform the procedures are l i sted i n Tabl e 3-1 on
page 148.
The words right and left are used throughout the repl acement
procedures to i ndi cate the si de of the spectrum anal yzer as vi ewed from
the front panel . See Fi gure 3-1 on page 149.
Numbers i n parentheses are used throughout the repl acement
procedures to i ndi cate numeri cal cal l outs on the gures.
CAUTION The spectrum anal yzer contai ns stati c-sensi ti ve components. Read the
secti on enti tl ed, "El ectrostati c Di scharge" i n Chapter 1.
Chapter 3 147
Assembly Replacement
Access to Internal Assemblies
Access to Internal Assemblies
Servi ci ng the HP 8560E/EC requi res the removal of the spectrum
anal yzer cover assembl y and the fol di ng down of si x board assembl i es.
Four of these assembl i es l ay at al ong the top of the spectrum anal yzer
and two l ay at al ong the bottom of the spectrum anal yzer. Al l si x
assembl i es are attached to the spectrum anal yzer ri ght si de frame
usi ng hi nges and fol d out of the spectrum anal yzer al l owi ng access to
al l major assembl i es. See Fi gure 3-1 on page 149.
To remove the spectrum anal yzer cover assembl y, refer to procedure 1.
To access the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assembl i es, refer to procedure 5.
To access the A14 and A15 assembl i es, refer to procedure 9.
To remove and repl ace the backl i ght cabl es, whi ch i l l umi nate the
A18 LCD, refer to procedure 2A.
To remove A17 LCD assembl y, refer to procedure 2A.
To remove A16 or A17, refer to procedure 10.
NOTE Di agrams that i l l ustrate features common to E-seri es and EC-seri es
i nstruments are shown wi th E-seri es i nstruments. Where there are
di fferences between E-seri es and EC-seri es features, separate di agrams
are provi ded for E-seri es and for EC-seri es i nstruments.
148 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Cable Color Code
Cable Color Code
Coaxi al cabl es and wi res wi l l be i denti ed i n the procedures by
reference desi gnati on, or name, fol l owed by a col or code. The code i s
i denti cal to the resi stor col or code. The rst number i ndi cates the base
col or wi th second and thi rd numbers i ndi cati ng any col ored stri pes. For
exampl e, W23, coax 93, i ndi cates a whi te cabl e wi th an orange stri pe.
Table 3-1 Required Tools
Description HP Part
Number
5/16-i nch open-end wrench 8720-0015
3 mm hex (Al l en) wrench 8710-1366
4 mm hex (Al l en) wrench 8710-1164
17 mm hex (Al l en) wrench T362609
No. 6 hex (Al l en) wrench 5020-0289
7 mm nut dri ver 8710-1217
3/8-i nch nut dri ver 8720-0005
7/16-i nch nut dri ver 8720-0006
9/16-i nch nut dri ver (dri l l ed out, end covered 8720-0008
wi th heatshri nk tubi ng)
Smal l No.1 pozi dri ve screwdri ver 8710-0899
Large No.2 pozi dri ve screwdri ver 8710-0900
T-8 TORX screwdri ver 8710-1614
T-10 TORX screwdri ver 8710-1623
T-15 TORX screwdri ver 8710-1622
Long-nose pl i ers 8710-0030
Wi re cutters 8710-0012
Chapter 3 149
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 1. Spectrum Analyzer Cover
Procedure 1. Spectrum Analyzer Cover
Removal/Replacement
1. Di sconnect the l i ne-power cord, remove any adapters from the front
panel connectors, and pl ace the spectrum anal yzer on i ts front panel .
2. I f an HP 85620A Mass Memory Modul e or HP 85629B Test and
Adjustment Modul e i s mounted on the rear panel , remove i t. Loosen
(but do not remove) the four rear-bumper screws, usi ng a 4 mm hex
wrench. Pul l the cover assembl y off towards the rear of the
i nstrument.
CAUTION When repl aci ng the spectrum anal yzer cover, use cauti on to avoi d
damagi ng any cabl es.
3. When i nstal l i ng the cover assembl y, be sure to l ocate the cover ai r
vent hol es on the bottom si de of the spectrum anal yzer. Attach wi th
the four screws l oosened i n step 2, and ti ghten the four screws
gradual l y to ensure that the cover i s seated i n the front frame gasket
groove.
4. Torque each screw to 40 to 50 i nch-pounds to ensure proper gasket
compressi on to mi ni mi ze EMI .
Figure 3-1 Hinged Assemblies
NOTE Fi gure 3-1 shows an 8560 E-seri es i nstrument. I n the assembl y removal
and repl acement procedures the words l eft and ri ght assume you
are faci ng the front panel of the i nstrument, as shown i n Fi gure 3-1,
wi th A14 and A15 to your l eft, and A2 through A5 on your ri ght. The
8560 EC-seri es i nstrument i s i denti cal except the A2 board i s smal l er.
150 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A18 LCD (8560EC)
Procedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A18 LCD
(8560EC)
Removal of the Front Frame
1. Remove the spectrum anal yzer cover assembl y as descri bed i n
"Procedure 1. Spectrum Anal yzer Cover." Pl ace the i nstrument on
i ts si de, wi th the di spl ay secti on upper-most, as shown i n Fi gure 3-1
on page 149.
2. Fol d out the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assembl i es as descri bed i n steps 2
through 6 under "Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assembl i es
Removal ."Faci ng the front panel , the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assembl i es
wi l l l ay to your l eft.
3. Fol d out the A14 and A15 assembl i es as descri bed i n steps 3 through
4 under Procedure 9. A14 and A15 Assembl i es. Faci ng the front
panel , the A14 and A15 assembl i es wi l l l ay to your ri ght.
4. Di sconnect ri bbon cabl e A1A1W1, whi ch connects HDR1 on the A1
front frame assembl y and A3J602 on the A3 i nterface board.
5. Di sconnect the fol l owi ng cabl es from the A2 control l er board:
a. Ri bbon cabl e W60, whi ch connects J8 on the A2 control l er board
wi th J1 on the A17 di spl ay dri ver board.
b. W61, whi ch connects J9 on the A2 control l er board wi th J7 on the
A17 di spl ay dri ver board.
6. Di sconnect ri bbon cabl e W64 from the J1 VGA port on the rear panel
(do not di sconnect W64 from the A17 di spl ay dri ver board).
7. Di sconnect the W3 l i ne swi tch cabl e from the power suppl y.
a. Remove the power suppl y cover. Use a T-6 TORX dri ver to remove
the 3 screws (0515-2309) that secure the power suppl y cover to
the power suppl y.
b. Remove the l i ne swi tch connector from A6J2 on the power suppl y.
c. Loosen FL 1. Remove the two screws (0515-2332) whi ch are used
to secure FL 1 to the ri ght si de of the chassi s.
d. After FL 1 has been l oosened, route the W3 l i ne swi tch cabl e
through the openi ng behi nd FL 1, from the l eft to the ri ght si de of
the i nstrument (i f you sti l l have di fcul ty routi ng W3 through the
openi ng, use an open ended 5/16-i nch wrench to further l oosen, or
di sconnect FL 1).
To di sconnect the l i ne swi tch from the front panel , see Removal of
the Li ne Swi tch from the Front Panel on page 153.
Chapter 3 151
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A18 LCD (8560EC)
8. Di sconnect the fol l owi ng connectors whi ch are attached to the i nsi de
of the A1 front panel assembl y:
a. I NPUT 50 RF connector. Use a 5/16-i nch open-end wrench to
di sconnect cabl e W41 from the front panel . Loosen the opposi te
end of cabl e W41, whi ch i s connected to the attenuator.
b. RF OUT50 connector for Option 002spectrumanalyzers. Use a
5/16-i nch wrench to di sconnect cabl e W47 from the front panel .
c. 1ST LO OUTPUT connector. Di sconnect cabl e W42 from A7J3
and from the front panel 1st LO OUTPUT connector.
To remove the 1st LO OUTPUT connector use a 5/16 socket and
thread pl i ers. Use the pl i ers to hol d the 1st LO connector i n pl ace,
whi l e l ooseni ng the connector i nsi de the i nstrument wi th the
5/16-i nch socket.
d. 1ST LO OUTPUT connector For Option 002 spectrum analyzers.
Di sconnect W46 from the front panel .
e. I F I NPUT connector. Di sconnect W36 from the front panel .
9. Remove the fol l owi ng from the face of the front panel :
a. VOLUME knob. Use a 0.050 Al l en wrench to remove the two
screws (3030-0007) that secure the vol ume knob to the face of the
front panel . I f necessary, use a 5/16-i nch nut dri ver to dri l l out the
nut whi ch secures the VOLUME potenti ometer assembl y. Cover
the ti p wi th heatshri nk tubi ng or tape to avoi d scratchi ng the
enamel ed front panel .
b. CAL OUTPUT connector. Use a 9/16-i nch nut dri ver to remove
the dress nut that hol ds the front panel CAL OUTPUT connector
to the front panel . I f necessary, dri l l out the nut dri ver to t over
the BNC connectors and cover the ti p wi th heatshri nk tubi ng or
tape to avoi d scratchi ng the enamel ed front panel .
10.Remove the front frame from the chassi s of the i nstrument.
a. Remove the screw (0515-1227) that secures the top of the
attenuator to the i nsi de of the front frame of the i nstrument.
b. Remove the three screws (0515-1101) that secure the A1 front
frame assembl y to the bottom of the spectrum anal yzer.
c. Remove the three screws (0515-1101) that secure the A1 front
frame assembl y to the top of the spectrum anal yzer.
d. Remove the A1 front frame assembl y from the chassi s.
Note that the l i ne swi tch cabl e i s sti l l attached to the front frame. To
remove the l i ne swi tch you must rst remove the di spl ay dri ver and
LCD assembl y. For i nstructi ons on removi ng the l i ne swi tch, see
Removal of the Li ne Swi tch from the Front Panel on page 153.
152 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A18 LCD (8560EC)
Removal of theDisplay Driver Board, Inverter Board,
and LCD
After the front panel has been removed, fol l ow these steps to remove
the di spl ay dri ver and LCD:
1. Di sconnect the fol l owi ng cabl es from the A17 di spl ay dri ver board.
These can be di sconnected through openi ngs i n the di spl ay dri ver
shi el d. See Fi gure 3-2 on page 154.
a. W60, a ri bbon cabl e that connects J1 on the A17 di spl ay dri ver
board wi th J8 on the A2 control l er board.
b. W61, whi ch connect J7 on the A17 di spl ay dri ver board wi th J9 on
the A2 control l er board.
2. Remove the four screws (0515-0665) that secure the di spl ay dri ver
shi el d to the LCD backpl ate. Use a T-10 TORX dri ver set to 6 i n./l bs.
Remove the di spl ay dri ver shi el d.
3. Di sconnect the fol l owi ng cabl es from the A17 di spl ay dri ver board:
a. W64, the VGA ri bbon cabl e, whi ch connects J4 on the A17 di spl ay
dri ver board to J1 on the rear panel .
b. W63, a ri bbon cabl e that connect J5 on the A17 di spl ay dri ver
board wi th the LCD.
4. I f you want to remove the A17A1 i nverter board, proceed to step a. I f
you i ntend to keep the A17A1 i nverter board secured to the A17
di spl ay dri ver board, proceed to step 4.
a. Remove the two screws (0515-0430) whi ch secure the A17A1
i nverter board to standoffs on the A17 di spl ay dri ver board.
b. Di sconnect W62 from J6 on the A17 di spl ay dri ver board (do not
di sconnect W62 from the A17A1 i nverter board, to whi ch i t i s
attached).
5. Remove the two backl i ght cabl es from the i nverter board.
6. Remove the four screws (0515-0372) whi ch secure the di spl ay dri ver
board to the LCD backpl ate. Use a T-10 TORX dri ver. Remove the
di spl ay dri ver board.
7. Remove four bl ack cushi ons (0400-0333) from the i nner-most posts
on the LCD backpl ate.
8. Remove the two l arge screws (0515-0382) whi ch secure the LCD
backpl ate to the l eft si de of the front panel chassi s. Use a T-15 TORX
dri ver.
9. Remove the four (0515-0430) screws whi ch secure the LCD
backpl ate to the ri ght si de of the front panel chassi s. Use a T-8
TORX dri ver.
Chapter 3 153
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A18 LCD (8560EC)
10.Careful l y l i ft the di spl ay dri ver backpl ate over the two backl i ght
cabl es and the W63 ri bbon cabl e.
11.Remove the LCD assembl y from the bl ack rubber mount Take care
not to damage the backl i ght cabl es or W63 ri bbon cabl e.
12.To remove the gl ass pl ate, rst remove the LCD di spl ay from the
di spl ay mount. Careful l y remove the gl ass from the i nsi de of the
di spl ay mount.
NOTE The LCD gl ass pl ate was ori gi nal l y pl aced i n the LCD assembl y i n a
cl ean room envi ronment to ensure opti mal performance of the LCD
di spl ay. Take al l possi bl e precauti ons to ensure that the gl ass pl ate i s
cl ean before repl aci ng i t i n the LCD assembl y.
Removal of the Backlights
1. Remove the LCD assembl y by fol l owi ng steps 1 through 12 i n
Removal of the Di spl ay Dri ver Board, I nverter Board, and LCD on
page 152.
2. Remove each backl i ght cabl e assembl y (2090-0380). Carefully grasp
the end of the metal backl i ght assembl y, whi ch i s connected to the
backl i ght cabl e, and pul l the backl i ght out from i ts sl ot. The
backl i ght cabl e sl ots are l ocated at the top and at the bottom of the
LCD.
NOTE Whenever there i s a need to repl ace a si ngl e backl i ght, both backl i ghts
must be repl aced.
Removal of the Line Switch from the Front Panel
After the A1 front frame assembl y, the A17 di spl ay dri ver, and the A18
LCD have been removed, you can proceed to remove the l i ne swi tch.
Fol l ow these steps:
1. Remove the green LED from the l i ne swi tch assembl y on the front
frame, by gentl y pul l i ng on the orange and bl ack cabl es (wrapped i n
shri nk tubi ng), to whi ch the LED i s connected.
2. Remove the two screws (0515-1521) that secure the l i ne swi tch to the
front frame.
3. Remove the screw (0515-0430) that secures the stri ped green and
whi te ground cabl e to the l i ne swi tch.
4. Remove the l i ne swi tch from the front panel .
154 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A18 LCD (8560EC)
Figure 3-2 LCD Assembly - Exploded View
Chapter 3 155
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A18 LCD (8560EC)
Removal of the Keyboard
1. Di sconnect cabl e A1A1W1 from HDR1 on the A1 front panel
assembl y and from A3J602 on the A3 i nterface board.
2. Di sconnect the power probe cabl e from the probe power connector on
the front frame PC board.
3. Unhook the RPG cabl e.
4. Remove the seven screws (0515-1934) that secure the front frame PC
board to the front frame. Use a T-8 TORX dri ver set to 6-i n/l bs.
Replacement of the Front Frame
1. Remove the cover assembl y as descri bed i n "Procedure 1. Spectrum
Anal yzer Cover." Pl ace the i nstrument on i ts si de, wi th the di spl ay
secti on upper-most, as shown i n Fi gure 3-1 on page 149.
2. Fol d out the A14 and A15 assembl i es as descri bed i n steps 3 through
4 under Procedure 9. A14 and A15 Assembl i es. Faci ng the front
panel , the A14, and A15 assembl i es wi l l l i e to your ri ght.
3. Fol d out the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assembl i es as descri bed i n steps 2
through 6 under "Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assembl i es
Removal ."Faci ng the front panel , the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assembl i es
wi l l l i e to your l eft.
4. Pl ace the A1 front frame assembl y i n the chassi s of the i nstrument.
a. Posi ti on the A1 front frame assembl y i n the chassi s.
b. I nsert the three screws (0515-1101) that secure the front frame
chassi s to the bottom of the spectrum anal yzer.
c. I nsert the three screws (0515-1101) that secure the front frame
chassi s to the top of the spectrum anal yzer.
d. I nsert the screw (0515-1227) that secures the top of the
attenuator to the i nsi de of the A1 front frame assembl y.
5. Secure the fol l owi ng connectors to the i nsi de of the A1 front panel
assembl y.
a. I NPUT 50 RF connector. Use a 5/16-i nch open-end wrench to
connect cabl e W41 to the front panel from the attenuator.
b. RF OUT50 connector for Option 002spectrumanalyzers. Use a
5/16-i nch open-end wrench to connect cabl e W47 to the front
panel .
c. 1STLO OUTPUTconnector. Connect cabl e W42 from A7J3 to the
front panel 1st LO OUTPUT connector.
To repl ace the 1st LO OUTPUT connector use a 5/16 socket and
thread pl i ers. Use the pl i ers to hol d the 1st LO connector i n pl ace,
156 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A18 LCD (8560EC)
whi l e ti ghteni ng the connector i nsi de the i nstrument wi th the
5/16-i nch socket.
d. 1ST LO OUTPUT connector for Option 002 spectrum analyzers.
Connect W46 from the front panel .
e. I F I NPUT connector. Connect W36 from the front panel .
6. Repl ace the fol l owi ng from the face of the front panel :
a. VOLUME knob and potenti ometer. Use a 5/16-i nch nut dri ver to
secure the VOLUME potenti ometer assembl y. Use a 0.050 Al l en
wrench to repl ace the two screws (3030-0007) that secure the
vol ume knob to the face of the front panel .
b. CAL OUTPUT connector. Repl ace the dress nut that hol ds the
CAL OUTPUT connector to the front panel .
7. I f the l i ne swi tch has been di sconnected from the power suppl y you
wi l l have to route the W3 l i ne swi tch cabl e from the ri ght si de of the
i nstrument, through the openi ng behi nd FL 1, to the power suppl y
on the l eft si de of the i nstrument.
a. Loosen the two screws (0515-2332) that secure FL 1 to the
i nstruments chassi s.
b. Route the W3 l i ne swi tch cabl e from the ri ght si de of the
i nstrument to the l eft si de, through the openi ng that can now be
accessed, si nce FL 1 has been l oosened. I f the openi ng i s sti l l
ti ght, l oosen or remove FL 1 usi ng a 5/16 -i nch wrench.
c. Secure the W3 l i ne swi tch cabl e to the i nstrument chassi s by
routi ng i t through the whi te col l ar, that i s adjacent to the power
suppl y assembl y, on the chassi s of the i nstrument.
d. Route the W3 l i ne swi tch cabl e through the notched openi ng on
the ri ght si de of the power suppl y, and i nsert the l i ne swi tch
connector i nto A6J2.
I f the l i ne swi tch has been di sconnected from the front panel , see the
i nstructi ons for i ts repl acement on page 159.
8. Repl ace the power suppl y cover by i nserti ng the 3 screws
(0515-2309) that secure the power suppl y cover to the power suppl y.
9. I f the LCD assembl i es have not been removed from the front panel
assembl y, you wi l l need to reconnect the fol l owi ng cabl es, whi ch are
routed through openi ngs i n the di spl ay dri ver shi el d.
a. W60, the l arge ri bbon cabl e (80 l i nes) that goes to J8 on the A2
control l er board.
b. W61, a coax cabl e that connects to J10 on the A2 control l er board.
c. W64, the VGA ri bbon cabl e (10 l i nes), that goes to J1 on the rear
panel .
Chapter 3 157
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A18 LCD (8560EC)
Replacement of the Display Driver Board, Inverter
Board, and LCD
Fol l ow these steps to repl ace the A18 LCD assembl y, the A17 di spl ay
dri ver, and the A17A1 i nverter board.
NOTE I f the l i ne swi tch assembl y has been removed from the front panel , i t
must be repl aced before you repl ace the di spl ay dri ver and LCD
assembl i es.
1. Pl ace the front panel face down on your bench. The openi ng for the
di spl ay wi l l be on the ri ght si de of the front panel .
2. I f the LCD gl ass pl ace has been removed, careful l y i nsert the gl ass
pl ate i nto the brackets on the front si de of the rubber di spl ay mount.
Make sure that the si de of the gl ass whi ch has a broad si l ver border
(the l eft si de, when faci ng the front of the di spl ay) i s i nserted i nto
the si de of the mount that has l arger brackets, i nto whi ch the gl ass
pl ate wi l l sl i de.
NOTE The gl ass pl ate was ori gi nal l y pl aced i n the LCD assembl y i n a cl ean
room envi ronment to ensure opti mal performance of the LCD di spl ay.
Take al l possi bl e precauti ons to ensure that the gl ass pl ate i s cl ean
before pl aci ng i t i n the LCD assembl y.
3. I nsert the LCD i nto the di spl ay mount. The LCD i s correctl y
ori ented when the smal l ri bbon cabl e from the LCD extends through
an openi ng i n the ri ght si de of the di spl ay mount, and the two
backl i ght cabl es extend through openi ngs on the l eft si de of the
mount.
4. Careful l y l ower the LCD bookpl ate onto the di spl ay mount. Ensure
that the ri bbon cabl e on the ri ght, and the two backl i ght cabl es on
the l eft, are i nserted i nto the appropri ate openi ngs i n the LCD
backpl ate.
5. Lower the LCD backpl ate and LCD assembl y, as a uni t, i nto the
di spl ay secti on on the ri ght si de of the A1 front frame chassi s.
6. Secure the LCD backpl ate to the chassi s.
a. I nsert four (0515-0444) screws i nto the ri ght si de of the
backpl ate. Use a T-8 TORX dri ver.
b. I nsert two l arge (0515-0382) screws i nto the l eft si de of the LCD
backpl ate. Use a T-15 TORX dri ver.
7. Pl ace the four bl ack cushi ons (0400-0333) on the four i nner-most
posts on the LCD backpl ate.
158 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A18 LCD (8560EC)
8. Pl ace the A17 di spl ay dri ver board on the four bl ack cushi ons. I nsert
the four screws (0515-0372) that secure the A17 di spl ay dri ver board
to the LCD backpl ate, i nto the posts on whi ch you have set the
cushi ons. Use a T-10 TORX dri ver.
9. I f the A17A1 i nverter board has been removed from the dri ver board,
proceed to step a. bel ow. I f the i nverter board i s attached to the A17
di spl ay dri ver, proceed to step 10.
a. Connect the W62 cabl e from the A17A1 i nverter board to J6 on
the A17 di spl ay dri ver board.
b. I nsert 2 screws (0515-0430) that secure the A17A1 i nverter board
to the standoffs on the A17 di spl ay dri ver board.
10.Reconnect ri bbon cabl e W63, whi ch connects the A18 LCD wi th J5
on the A17 di spl ay dri ver board.
11.Connect the two backl i ght cabl es from the A18 LCD to the two
sl otted connectors on the A17A1 i nverter board.
12.Route W64, the VGA cabl e, from J1 on the rear panel , through the
rectangul ar openi ng i n the di spl ay dri ver shi el d, to J7 on the A17
di spl ay dri ver board (the di spl ay dri ver shi el d has not yet been
secured to the LCD backpl ate).
13.Lower the di spl ay dri ver shi el d onto the LCD backpl ate. I nsert four
screws (0515-0665) that secure the LCD backpl ate to the di spl ay
dri ver board shi el d. Use a T-10 TORX dri ver.
14.Route cabl e W61 from J9 on the A2 control l er board, through the
ci rcul ar openi ng i n the di spl ay dri ver shi el d, to J7 on the A17 di spl ay
dri ver board.
15.Route cabl e W60 from J8 on the A2 control l er board, through the
rectangul ar openi ng i n the di spl ay dri ver shi el d, to J7 on the A17
di spl ay dri ver board.
16.Connect ri bbon cabl e A1A1W1 from J602 on the A3 i nterface board
to HDR1 on the A1 front panel assembl y.
Replacing the Backlights
1. I f the LCD or backl i ghts have not been removed from the front
frame, fol l ow the procedures outl i ned i n Removal of the Front
Frame on page 150, Removal of the Di spl ay Dri ver Board, I nverter
Board, and LCD on page 152, and Removal of the Backl i ghts on
page 153, as needed.
2. Carefully grasp the end of the repl acement backl i ght cartri dge
(2090-0380), whi ch i s attached to the backl i ght cabl e, and i nsert the
backl i ght i nto the backl i ght sl ot at the top of the LCD. Repeat for the
backl i ght l ocated at the bottom of the LCD.
Chapter 3 159
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A18 LCD (8560EC)
NOTE Whenever there i s a need to repl ace a si ngl e backl i ght, both backl i ghts
must be repl aced.
3. I nsert the LCD i nto the di spl ay mount. The LCD assembl y i s
correctl y ori ented when the smal l ri bbon cabl e extends through an
openi ng i n the ri ght si de of the di spl ay mount.
4. Fol l ow steps 4 through 17 of Repl acement of the Di spl ay Dri ver
Board, I nverter Board, and LCD on page 157 to compl ete
repl acement of the LCD i nto the front panel . Fol l ow the i nstructi ons
i n Repl acement of the Front Frame on page 155 to repl ace the
front panel i n the front frame.
Replacement of the Line Switch
After you have repl aced the A1 front frame assembl y you can repl ace
the l i ne swi tch by fol l owi ng these steps (note that the l i ne swi tch must
be repl aced before the LCD and di spl ay dri ver can be repl aced):
1. I nsert the l i ne swi tch i nto the A1 front frame assembl y. I nsert the
two screws (0515-1521) that secure the l i ne swi tch to the front
frame.
2. I nsert the screw (0515-0430) that secures the stri ped green and
whi te ground cabl e for the l i ne swi tch (thi s screw al so secures the
ground for the power probe; i f the bl ack cabl e from the power probe
cabl e assembl y i s not secured to the ground, secure i t al so).
3. Careful l y i nsert the green LED from the top-center of the l i ne swi tch
assembl y i nto the LED openi ng i n the A1 front frame assembl y.
Replacement of the Keyboard
1. I nsert the seven screws (0515-1934) that secure the front frame PC
board to the A1 front frame assembl y. Use a T-8 TORX dri ver.
2. Connect the RPG cabl e to the RPG connector on the front frame PC
board.
3. Connect the power probe cabl e to the connector that i s l abel l ed
probe power on the front frame PC board.
4. Connect A1A1W1 from HDR1 on A1 front frame assembl y to A3J602
on the A3 i nterface board.
160 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 2B. A1 Front Frame/A18 CRT (8560E)
Procedure 2B. A1 Front Frame/A18 CRT
(8560E)
Removal
WARNING The voltage potential at A6A1W3 is +9 kV. Disconnect at the
CRT with caution! Failure to properly discharge A6A1W3 may
result in severeel ectri cal shock topersonnel and damagetothe
instrument.
1. Remove the spectrum anal yzer cover assembl y as descri bed i n
"Procedure 1. Spectrum Anal yzer Cover."
2. Fol d out the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assembl i es as descri bed i n steps 2
through 6 under "Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assembl i es
Removal ."
3. Di sconnect A1A1W1 from A3J602.
4. Pl ace the spectrum anal yzer top-si de-up on the workbench.
5. Connect the spectrum anal yzer l i ne-power cord to provi de proper
groundi ng whi l e di schargi ng the A6A1W3 post-accel erator cabl e.
Make sure that the spectrum anal yzer l i ne-power swi tch i s i n the off
posi ti on.
6. Connect a hi gh vol tage probe (1000:1), such as the HP 34111A to a
vol tmeter wi th a 10 megohm i nput.
7. Connect the cl i p l ead of the probe (ground) to the chassi s of the
spectrum anal yzer.
8. Sl i p the ti p of the hi gh vol tage probe under the rubber shroud of the
A6A1W3 post-accel arator cabl e to obtai n a readi ng on the vol tmeter.
See Fi gure 3-3 on page 162.
9. Keep the hi gh vol tage probe on the post-accel erator connector unti l
the vol tage has dropped to a vol tmeter readi ng of l ess than 5 mV
(l ess than 5 V at the connector). Thi s normal l y takes about 30
seconds.
10.Di sconnect the l i ne-power cord from the spectrum anal yzer.
WARNING To avoid possible electrical shock, in the next step, use a
screwdriver having a conductive metal shank and tip, with an
insulated handle.
Chapter 3 161
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 2B. A1 Front Frame/A18 CRT (8560E)
11.Connect one end of a wi re cl i p l ead to a smal l screwdri ver havi ng a
conducti ve shank and ti p. Connect the other end of the cl i p l ead to
the CRT shi el d assembl y as shown i n Fi gure 3-3 on page 162. Hol d
the i nsul ated screwdri ver handl e and sl i p the ti p of the screwdri ver
under the rubber shroud of the A6A1W3 post-accel erator cabl e,
shorti ng the cabl e to ground through the CRT shi el d assembl y. See
Fi gure 3-3 on page 162.
12.Usi ng a smal l screwdri ver wi th the shank i n contact wi th the CRT
shi el d assembl y, sl i p the ti p of the screwdri ver under the A6A1W3
post-accel erator cabl e rubber shroud and short the cabl e to ground
on the CRT shi el d assembl y.
13.Pry out the bl ack grommet protecti ng post-accel erator cabl e
A6A1W3 from the CRT shi el d assembl y.
14.Careful l y unsnap the A6A1W3 post-accel erator cabl e from the CRT
and di scharge i t by shorti ng the cabl e to chassi s ground on the CRT
shi el d assembl y.
15.Pl ace the spectrum anal yzer on i ts ri ght si de frame wi th the front
frame assembl y hangi ng over the front edge of the workbench.
16.Fol d out the A14 and A15 assembl i es as descri bed i n steps 3 and 4
under "Procedure 9. A14 and A15 Assembl i es Removal ."
WARNING The voltage potential at A6A1W3 is +9 kV. Failure to discharge
A6A1W3 correctly may result in severe el ectri cal shock to
personnel and damage to the instrument.
162 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 2B. A1 Front Frame/A18 CRT (8560E)
Figure 3-3 Discharging High Voltage on the CRT
Chapter 3 163
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 2B. A1 Front Frame/A18 CRT (8560E)
Figure 3-4 A9, A18, and Line Switch Assembly Mounting Screws
17.Remove screw (2) securi ng the A9 i nput attenuator assembl y to the
center support on the front frame. See Fi gure 3-4 on page 163.
18.Use a 5/16-i nch open-end wrench to di sconnect W41 from the front
panel I NPUT 50 connector. Loosen the opposi te end of W41.
19.For Option 002spectrumanalyzers: use a 5/16-i nch open-end wrench
to di sconnect W47 from the front panel RF OUT 50 connector.
20.Di sconnect W42 from A7J3 and the front panel 1ST LO OUTPUT
connector. For Option 002 spectrum analyzers: di sconnect W46 from
the front panel 1ST LO OUTPUT connector.
21.Di sconnect W36, coax 86, from the front panel I F I NPUT connector.
164 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 2B. A1 Front Frame/A18 CRT (8560E)
22.Remove the VOLUME knob and potenti ometer from the front panel .
I f necessary, dri l l out the nut dri ver used to remove the VOLUME
potenti ometer and cover the ti p wi th heatshri nk tubi ng or tape to
avoi d scratchi ng the enamel ed front panel .
23.Use a 9/16-i nch nut dri ver to remove the dress nut hol di ng the front
panel CAL OUTPUT connector to the front panel . I f necessary, dri l l
out the nut dri ver to t over the BNC connectors and cover the ti p
wi th heatshri nk tubi ng or tape to avoi d scratchi ng the enamel ed
front panel .
24.Remove screw (3) securi ng the l i ne swi tch assembl y to the front
frame. See Fi gure 3-4 on page 163.
25.Gentl y remove the l i ne swi tch assembl y, usi ng cauti on to avoi d
damagi ng A1W1 and power i ndi cator LED A1W1DS1.
26.Remove A1W1 and A1W1DS1 from the l i ne-power swi tch assembl y.
27.Remove the three screws (1) securi ng the front frame assembl y to
the spectrum anal yzer ri ght si de frame. See Fi gure 3-5 on page 164.
Figure 3-5 Front Frame Mounting Screws
28.Remove the three screws securi ng the front frame assembl y to the
spectrum anal yzer l eft si de frame.
29.Remove the four screws (1) ( Fi gure 3-4 on page 163) securi ng the
CRT cl amps to the deck.
Chapter 3 165
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 2B. A1 Front Frame/A18 CRT (8560E)
30.Pul l the cabl e ti e (1) to free W9. See Fi gure 3-6 on page 165. Gentl y
pry W9, the CRT cabl e, from the end of the CRT assembl y.
31.Support the A18 CRTassembl y whi l e gentl y pul l i ng the front frame
and CRT out of the spectrum anal yzer 1 or 2 i nches.
32.Di sconnect A18W1, the trace al i gn wi res, from A17J5. Remove the
front frame and CRT assembl i es.
33.Gentl y pul l the CRT assembl y off of the front frame assembl y.
Figure 3-6 Installing the CRT and front Frame Assemblies
Replacement
NOTE Use care when handl i ng the gl ass CRT EMI shi el d. The gl ass may be
cl eaned usi ng thi n l m cl eaner (HP part number 8500-2163) and a
l i nt-free cl oth. When i nstal l i ng the gl ass shi el d, face the si de of the
gl ass wi th the si l ver coated edge towards the i nsi de of the spectrum
anal yzer.
1. Pl ace the spectrum anal yzer on i ts ri ght si de frame wi th the front
end extendi ng sl i ghtl y over the front of the workbench.
166 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 2B. A1 Front Frame/A18 CRT (8560E)
2. Gentl y pl ace the A18 CRT assembl y i nto the A1 front frame
assembl y as i l l ustrated i n Fi gure 3-7 on page 166.
3. Pl ace the front frame and CRT assembl i es i nto the spectrum
anal yzer, usi ng cauti on to avoi d pi nchi ng any cabl es.
4. Dress the A18W1 trace-al i gn wi res between the CRT assembl y
mounts and the A6 power suppl y top shi el d.
Figure 3-7 Placing the CRT into the Front Frame
Chapter 3 167
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 2B. A1 Front Frame/A18 CRT (8560E)
5. Connect A18W1 to A17J5.
6. Snap CRT cabl e W9 onto the end of the CRT assembl y.
7. Ful l y seat the front frame and CRT assembl i es i nto the spectrum
anal yzer.
8. Secure the front frame to the spectrum anal yzer si de frames, usi ng
three athead screws per si de. See Fi gure 3-5 on page 164.
9. Reti ghten the four screws securi ng the CRT cl amps to the deck.
10.Pl ace W9 between the CRT assembl y and the A6 power suppl y
assembl y top shi el d so that the W9 wi res are underneath the surface
of the top shi el d.
11.Connect W42 to A7J3 and the front panel 1ST LO OUTPUT
connector. For Option 002 spectrum analyzers: connect W46 to the
front panel 1ST LO OUTPUT connector.
12.Use a 9/16-i nch nut dri ver to reconnect CAL OUTPUT connector to
the front panel .
13.Connect the VOLUME potenti ometer and knob to the front panel .
14.For Option 002spectrumanalyzers: use a 5/16-i nch open-end wrench
to connect W47 to the front panel RF OUT connector.
15.Connect W36, coax 86, to the front panel I F I NPUT connector.
16.Use a 5/16-i nch wrench to connect W41 from the A9 i nput attenuator
to the front panel I NPUT50 connector. Make sure that W40, W36,
and A1W1 are routed between W41 and the attenuator bracket.
Secure the A9 i nput attenuator bracket to the center support on the
front frame usi ng one panhead screw. See Fi gure 3-4 on page 163
(2).
17.Pl ace l ed A1W1DS1 i nto the l i ne-power swi tch assembl y.
18.Attach the l i ne swi tch assembl y i nto the front frame usi ng one
panhead screw. Be sure to connect the l i ne-power swi tch ground l ug
wi th the screw. The screw i s capti ve.
19.Fol d up the A14 and A15 assembl i es as descri bed i n steps 3 through
5 under "Procedure 9. A14 and A15 Assembl i es Repl acement."
20.Pl ace the spectrum anal yzer top-si de-up on the workbench and
connect A1A1W1 to A3J602.
21.Snap post-accel erator cabl e A6A1W3 to the A18 CRT assembl y.
22.Snap the bl ack grommet protecti ng the A6A1W3 i nto the CRT
shi el d.
23.Fol d up assembl i es A2, A3, A4, and A5 as descri bed i n steps 6
through 12 under "Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assembl i es
Repl acement."
168 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 2B. A1 Front Frame/A18 CRT (8560E)
24.Repl ace the spectrum anal yzer cover assembl y.
25.Connect the l i ne-power cord and swi tch the spectrum anal yzer
power on. I f the di spl ay does not operate properl y, turn off spectrum
anal yzer power, di sconnect the l i ne cord, and recheck the spectrum
anal yzer.
Chapter 3 169
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 3. A1A1 Keyboard/Front Panel Keys
Procedure 3. A1A1 Keyboard/Front Panel
Keys
Removal
1. Remove the front frame from the spectrum anal yzer. Pl ace the front
frame face down on the bench. For 8560EC i nstruments, fol l ow the
i nstructi ons i n "Procedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A22 LCD (8560EC)."
For 8560E i nstruments, fol l ow the i nstructi ons i n "Procedure 2B. A1
Front Frame/A18 CRT (8560E)."
For 8560EC i nstruments, proceed to step 3. For 8560E i nstruments,
proceed to step 2.
2. Remove the front frame center support.
3. Di sconnect A1W1 from A1A1J3 and the RPG cabl e from A1A1J2.
4. Remove the ni ne screws hol di ng the A1A1 keyboard assembl y to the
front frame and remove the assembl y.
5. Remove the rubber keypad.
NOTE I n 8560E i nstruments, the front panel softkey actuators are part of the
CRT bezel assembl y and are not repl aceabl e. Shoul d the softkeys
become damaged, repl ace the bezel assembl y.
Replacement
1. I nstal l the rubber keypad, ensuri ng that the screw hol es are vi si bl e
through the pad.
2. Pl ace the A1A1 keyboard assembl y over the rubber keypad. Secure
wi th ni ne panhead screws.
3. Connect the RPG cabl e to A1A1J2, and A1W1 to A1A1J3.
For 8560EC i nstruments, proceed to step 5. For 8560E i nstruments,
proceed to step 4.
4. Secure the center support to the front frame usi ng two panhead
screws. The arrow stamped on the center support shoul d poi nt to the
top of the frame.
5. I nstal l the front frame assembl y. For 8560EC i nstruments, fol l ow
the i nstructi ons i n "Procedure 2A. A1 Front Frame/A22 LCD
(8560EC)." For 8560E i nstruments, fol l ow the i nstructi ons i n
"Procedure 2B. A1 Front Frame/A18 CRT (8560E)."
170 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 4. A1A2 RPG
Procedure 4. A1A2 RPG
Removal
1. Remove the A9 i nput attenuator as descri bed i n "Procedure 8. A7
through A13 Assembl i es."
2. Di sconnect the RPG cabl e from the A1A1 keyboard assembl y.
3. I f the seri al number of your i nstrument i s above or equal to
3738A03198 (8560E/EC) proceed to step a. I f the seri al number of
your i nstrument i s bel ow3738A03198 (8560E) proceed to step b.
a. Pul l the front panel RPG knob off of the face of the front panel of
the spectrum anal yzer. Proceed to step 4.
b. Remove the set screw from the front panel RPG knob usi ng a
number 6 hex (Al l en) wrench. Proceed to step 4.
4. Use a 7/16-i nch nut dri ver, set to 20-i n./l bs., to remove the nut
hol di ng the RPG shaft to the front panel .
5. Remove the RPG.
Replacement
1. Pl ace the RPG i nto the front frame wi th the cabl e faci ng the bottom
of the spectrum anal yzer. Pl ace a l ock washer and nut on the RPG
shaft to hol d i t i n the frame. I f the seri al number of your i nstrument
i s bel ow 3738A03198 (8560E) proceed to step a. Otherwi se, proceed
to step 2.
a. I nsert the set screw i nto the RPG knob usi ng a number 6 hex
(Al l en) wrench. Proceed to step 2.
2. Use a 7/16-i nch nut dri ver to secure the RPG assembl y to the front
frame.
3. Connect the RPG cabl e to A1A1J2.
4. I nsert the RPG knob i nto the front panel assembl y.
5. Repl ace the A9 i nput attenuator as descri bed i n "Procedure 8. A7
through A13 Assembl i es."
Chapter 3 171
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies
Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies
Removal
1. Remove the spectrum anal yzer cover.
2. Pl ace the spectrum anal yzer on i ts ri ght si de frame.
3. Remove the ei ght screws hol di ng the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assembl i es
to the top of the spectrum anal yzer. These screws are l abel ed (2), (3),
and (4) i n Fi gure 3-8 on page 172. They are al so l abel ed on the back
of the A2 board assembl y.
4. Remove ri bbon cabl e W4 from A2J6. See Fi gure 3-8 on page 172.
CAUTION Do not fol d the board assembl i es out of the spectrum anal yzer one at a
ti me. Al ways fol d the A2 and A3 assembl i es as a uni t and the A4 and
A5 assembl i es as a uni t. Fol di ng out one assembl y at a ti me bi nds the
hi nges attachi ng the assembl i es and may damage an assembl y and
hi nge.
5. The board assembl i es are attached to the ri ght si de frame of the
spectrum anal yzer wi th two hi nges. Fol d both the A2 and A3
assembl i es out of the spectrum anal yzer as a uni t.
6. Fol d both the A4 and A5 assembl i es out of the spectrum anal yzer as
a uni t.
7. Remove the cabl es from the assembl y bei ng removed, as i l l ustrated
i n Fi gure 3-9 on page 173.
8. Remove the two screws that attach the assembl y bei ng removed to
i ts two mounti ng hi nges.
CAUTION Do not torque shi el d TORX screws to more than 8 i nch-pounds.
Appl yi ng excessi ve torque wi l l cause the screws to stretch.
NOTE Di agrams that i l l ustrate features common to E-seri es and EC-seri es
i nstruments are shown wi th E-seri es i nstruments. Where there are
di fferences between E-seri es and EC-seri es features separate di agrams
are provi ded.
172 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies
Figure 3-8 A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assembly Removal
Replacement
1. Pl ace the spectrum anal yzer on i ts ri ght si de on the work bench.
2. Attach the assembl y bei ng i nstal l ed to the two chassi s hi nges wi th
two panhead screws.
3. Leave the assembl y i n the fol ded-out posi ti on and attach ri bbon
cabl es W1 and W2.
4. Attach al l cabl es to the assembl y, as i l l ustrated i n Fi gure 3-9 on
page 173.
5. Locate the cabl e cl i p on the i nsi de of the ri ght si de frame. Make sure
Chapter 3 173
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies
that the coaxi al cabl es are routed properl y on the cl i p as i l l ustrated
i n Fi gure 3-12 on page 175 for EC-seri es i nstruments, and i n Fi gure
3-13 on page 176 for E-seri es i nstruments.
6. Lay the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assembl i es at agai nst each other i n the
fol ded-out posi ti on. Make sure that no cabl es become pi nched
between the two assembl i es.
Figure 3-9 Assembly Cables (1 of 3) EC-Series
174 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies
Figure 3-10 Assembly Cables (2 of 3) EC-series
Figure 3-11 Assembly Cables (3 of 3) E-series
Chapter 3 175
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies
Figure 3-12 Coaxial Cable Clip EC-Series
7. Check to ensure that no cabl es wi l l become pi nched under the hi nges
when fol di ng up the A4 and A5 assembl i es.
176 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies
8. Fol d the A4 and A5 assembl i es together as a uni t i nto the spectrum
anal yzer. Use cauti on to avoi d damagi ng any cabl e assembl i es. The
standoffs on the A5 assembl y must t i nto the cups on the A6 power
suppl y top shi el d.
9. Fol d the A2 and A3 assembl i es together as a uni t i nto the spectrum
anal yzer. Be sure to fol d HP-I B cabl e A19W1 between the A3 and A4
assembl i es, usi ng the two sets of hook and l oop (Vel cro) fasteners.
10.Fol d ri bbon cabl e A1A1W1 between A3 and A4 assembl i es. Take care
to dress the protecti ve tubi ng as cl ose to A3J602 connector as
possi bl e, so that the tubi ng does not fol d wi th the cabl e. See Fi gure
3-14 on page 177.
11.Attach ri bbon cabl e W4 to A2J6 whi l e fol di ng up the assembl i es.
12.Secure the assembl i es usi ng the ei ght screws removed i n "Removal ,"
step 3. See Fi gure 3-8 on page 172.
Figure 3-13 Coaxial Cable Clip E-Series
Chapter 3 177
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assemblies
Figure 3-14 HP-IB and A1A1 W1 Cable Placement
178 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 6A. A6 Power Supply Assembly (8560EC)
Procedure 6A. A6 Power Supply Assembly
(8560EC)
Removal
WARNING The A6 Power Supply assembly contains lethal voltages with
lethal currents in all areas. Use extreme care when servicing
this assembly. Always disconnect the power cord from the
instrument before beginning this replacement procedure.
Failure to follow this precaution will represent a shock hazard
which may result in personal injury.
1. Di sconnect the power cord from the spectrum anal yzer.
2. Remove the spectrum anal yzer cover assembl y. Refer to "Procedure
1. Spectrum Anal yzer Cover."
3. Fol d out the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assembl i es as descri bed i n steps 2
through 6 under "Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assembl i es
Removal ."
4. Pl ace the spectrum anal yzer on the workbench wi th A2, A3, A4, and
A5 fol ded out to the ri ght.
5. Remove the three screws securi ng the power suppl y shi el d to the
power suppl y and remove the shi el d. See Fi gure 3-16 on page 180.
6. Di sconnect al l cabl es from the A6 power suppl y assembl y. See Fi gure
3-17 on page 183.
7. Use a T-10 TORX dri ver to remove the screws from the shi el d wal l ,
the heatsi nk, the base of the power suppl y (0515-1950) and the A6
power suppl y assembl y.
8. Remove the A6 power suppl y assembl y by l i fti ng from the regul ator
heatsi nk toward the front of the spectrum anal yzer.
Chapter 3 179
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 6A. A6 Power Supply Assembly (8560EC)
Figure 3-15 Power Supply Cover
180 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 6A. A6 Power Supply Assembly (8560EC)
Replacement
1. Ensure that the bottom shi el d wal l i s i n pl ace before repl aci ng the
A6 power suppl y assembl y.
2. Attach the A6 power suppl y assembl y to the spectrum anal yzer
chassi s and top shi el d wal l usi ng the four screws, torqued to 10-i nch
l bs. Attatch al l other screws, torqued to 6-i nch l bs.
3. Connect W1 to A6J1, W3 to A6J2, fan power wi res to A6J3, W8 to
A6J4, and the l i ne-power jack to A6J101. See Fi gure 3-17 on page
183.
4. Ensure that al l cabl es are safel y routed and wi l l not be damaged
when securi ng the A6 cover.
5. Secure the power suppl y cover shi el d to the power suppl y usi ng
three athead screws (1). See Fi gure 3-16 on page 180. One end of
the cover ts i nto a sl ot provi ded i n the rear frame assembl y. Ensure
that the extended porti on of the cover shi el d i s seated i n the shi el d
wal l groove.
6. Fol d the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assembl i es i nto the spectrum anal yzer
as descri bed i n steps 6 through 12 under "Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4,
and A5 Assembl i es Repl acement."
Figure 3-16 Power Supply Cover
Chapter 3 181
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 6B. A6 Power Supply Assembly (8560E)
Procedure 6B. A6 Power Supply Assembly
(8560E)
Removal
WARNING The A6 Power Supply and A6A1 High Voltage assemblies
contain lethal voltages with lethal currents in all areas. Use
extreme care when servicing these assemblies. Always
disconnect the power cord from the instrument before
beginning this replacement procedure. Failure to follow this
precaution will represent a shock hazard which may result in
personal injury.
1. Di sconnect the power cord from the spectrum anal yzer.
2. Remove the spectrum anal yzer cover assembl y. Refer to "Procedure
1. Spectrum Anal yzer Cover."
3. Fol d out the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assembl i es as descri bed i n steps 2
through 6 under "Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assembl i es
Removal ."
4. Pl ace the spectrum anal yzer top-si de-up on the workbench wi th A2,
A3, A4, and A5 fol ded out to the ri ght.
WARNING The voltage potential at A6A1W3 is +9 kV. Disconnect at the
CRT with caution! Failure to properly discharge A6A1W3 may
result in severeel ectri cal shock topersonnel and damagetothe
instrument.
5. Connect the spectrum anal yzer l i ne-power cord to provi de proper
groundi ng whi l e di schargi ng the A6A1W3 post-accel erator cabl e.
Make sure that the spectrum anal yzer l i ne-power swi tch i s i n the off
posi ti on.
6. Connect a hi gh vol tage probe (1000:1), such as the HP 34111A to a
vol tmeter wi th a 10 megohm i nput.
7. Connect the cl i p l ead of the probe (ground) to the chassi s of the
spectrum anal yzer.
8. Sl i p the ti p of the hi gh vol tage probe under the A6A1W3
post-accel arator cabl e rubber shroud to obtai n a readi ng on the
vol tmeter. See Fi gure 3-3 on page 162.
9. Keep the hi gh vol tage probe on the post-accel erator connector unti l
the vol tage has dropped to a vol tmeter readi ng of l ess than 5 mV
(l ess than 5 V at the connector). Thi s normal l y takes about 30
seconds.
182 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 6B. A6 Power Supply Assembly (8560E)
10.Di sconnect the l i ne-power cord from the spectrum anal yzer.
11.Usi ng a smal l screwdri ver wi th the shank i n contact wi th the CRT
shi el d assembl y, sl i p the ti p of the screwdri ver under the A6A1W3
post-accel erator cabl e rubber shroud and short the cabl e to ground
on the CRT shi el d assembl y. See Fi gure 3-3 on page 162.
12.Remove the three screws securi ng the power suppl y shi el d to the
power suppl y and remove the shi el d.
13.Remove the three screws securi ng the A6A1 hi gh vol tage assembl y
to the A6 power suppl y assembl y.
14.Di sconnect ri bbon cabl e A6A1W1 from A6J5 and l i ft the A6A1
assembl y out of the way. See Fi gure 3-17 on page 183.
15.Di sconnect al l cabl es from the A6 power suppl y assembl y. See Fi gure
3-17 on page 183.
16.Use a TORX screwdri ver to remove the hardware from the shi el d
wal l , the heatsi nk, and the A6 power suppl y assembl y.
17.Remove the A6 power suppl y assembl y by l i fti ng from the regul ator
heatsi nk toward front of spectrum anal yzer.
Replacement
1. Ensure that the bottom shi el d wal l i s i n pl ace before repl aci ng the
A6 power suppl y assembl y.
2. Attach the A6 power suppl y assembl y to the spectrum anal yzer
chassi s and top shi el d wal l usi ng the four screws.
3. Connect W1 to A6J1, W3 to A6J2, fan power wi res to A6J3, W8 to
A6J4, and the l i ne-power jack to A6J101. See Fi gure 3-17 on page
183.
4. Secure the A6A1 hi gh vol tage assembl y to the A6 power suppl y
assembl y, usi ng three panhead screws. Connect ri bbon cabl e
A6A1W1 to A6J5.
5. Snap post-accel erator cabl e A6A1W3 to the CRT assembl y.
Chapter 3 183
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 6B. A6 Power Supply Assembly (8560E)
Figure 3-17 A6 Power Supply Connections
6. Ensure that al l cabl es are safel y routed and wi l l not be damaged
when securi ng the A6 cover.
7. Secure the power suppl y cover shi el d to the power suppl y usi ng
three athead screws (1). See Fi gure 3-18 on page 184. One end of
the cover ts i nto a sl ot provi ded i n the rear frame assembl y. Ensure
that the extended porti on of the cover shi el d i s seated i n the shi el d
184 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 6B. A6 Power Supply Assembly (8560E)
wal l groove.
8. Fol d the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assembl i es i nto the spectrum anal yzer
as descri bed i n steps 6 through 12 under "Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4,
and A5 Assembl i es Repl acement."
Figure 3-18 Power Supply Cover
Chapter 3 185
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 7. A6A1 High Voltage Assembly (8560E only)
Procedure 7. A6A1 High Voltage Assembly
(8560E only)
Removal
WARNING TheA6power supply andA6A1high voltageassembliescontain
lethal voltages with lethal currents in all areas. Use extreme
care when servicing these assemblies. Always disconnect the
power cord from the instrument before beginning this
replacement procedure. Failure to follow this precaution can
represent a shock hazard which may result in personal injury.
1. Di sconnect the power cord from the spectrum anal yzer.
2. Remove the spectrum anal yzer cover assembl y as descri bed i n
"Procedure 1. Spectrum Anal yzer Cover."
3. Fol d out the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assembl i es as descri bed i n
"Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assembl i es."
4. Pl ace the spectrum anal yzer top-si de-up on the workbench.
WARNING The voltage potential at A6A1W3 is +9 kV. Disconnect at the
CRT with caution! Failure to properly discharge A6A1W3 may
result in severeel ectri cal shock topersonnel and damagetothe
instrument.
5. Connect the spectrum anal yzer l i ne-power cord to provi de proper
groundi ng whi l e di schargi ng the A6A1W3 post-accel erator cabl e.
Make sure that the spectrum anal yzer l i ne-power swi tch i s i n the off
posi ti on.
6. Connect a hi gh vol tage probe (1000:1), such as the HP 34111A to a
vol tmeter wi th a 10 megohm i nput.
7. Connect the cl i p l ead of the probe (ground) to the chassi s of the
spectrum anal yzer.
8. Sl i p the ti p of the hi gh vol tage probe under the A6A1W3
post-accel arator cabl e rubber shroud to obtai n a readi ng on the
vol tmeter. See Fi gure 3-3 on page 162.
9. Keep the hi gh vol tage probe on the post-accel erator connector unti l
the vol tage has dropped to a vol tmeter readi ng of l ess than 5 mV
(l ess than 5 V at the connector). Thi s normal l y takes about 30
seconds.
10.Di sconnect the l i ne-power cord from the spectrum anal yzer.
11.Usi ng a smal l screwdri ver wi th the shank i n contact wi th the CRT
186 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 7. A6A1 High Voltage Assembly (8560E only)
shi el d assembl y, sl i p the ti p of the screwdri ver under the A6A1W3
post-accel erator cabl e rubber shroud and short the cabl e to ground
on the CRT shi el d assembl y. See Fi gure 3-3 on page 162.
12.Pry out the bl ack grommet protecti ng post-accel erator cabl e
A6A1W3 from the CRT shi el d assembl y.
13.Careful l y unsnap the A6A1W3 post-accel erator cabl e from the CRT
and di scharge i t by shorti ng the cabl e to chassi s ground on the CRT
shi el d assembl y.
14.Remove the three screws securi ng the power suppl y shi el d to the
power suppl y and remove the shi el d.
15.Remove the three screws securi ng the A6A1 hi gh vol tage assembl y
to the A6 power suppl y assembl y.
16.Di sconnect ri bbon cabl e A6A1W1 from A6J5. See Fi gure 3-17 on
page 183.
17.For Option 007 spectrum analyzers: Remove the two screws (1)
securi ng two board-mounti ng posts to the l eft si de frame and remove
the posts. See Fi gure 3-19 on page 187.
18.Remove the two l eft si de frame screws (2) securi ng the A17 assembl y
(and A16 assembl y i n Opti on 007). For Option 007 spectrum
analyzers: Li ft up the A16 FADC assembl y and swi ng i t out of the
spectrum anal yzer. Do not remove any cabl es.
19.Li ft up the A17 CRT dri ver assembl y and di sconnect A6A1W2 from
A17J6. Do not remove any other cabl es from the A17 assembl y.
20.Di sconnect the ti e wraps from the A6A1 assembl y cabl es and remove
the A6A1 hi gh vol tage assembl y from the spectrum anal yzer.
Chapter 3 187
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 7. A6A1 High Voltage Assembly (8560E only)
Figure 3-19 A17 CRT Driver Mounting Screws
Replacement
1. Secure the A6A1 hi gh vol tage assembl y to the A6 power suppl y
usi ng three panhead screws. Connect ri bbon cabl e A6A1W1 to A6J5.
2. Snap post-accel erator cabl e A6A1W3 to the CRT assembl y.
3. Pl ace the bl ack grommet protecti ng the post-accel erator cabl e i nto
the CRT shi el d.
4. Ensure that al l cabl es are safel y routed and wi l l not be damaged
when securi ng the A6 cover.
5. Secure the power suppl y cover shi el d to the power suppl y usi ng
three athead screws (1). See Fi gure 3-18 on page 184. One end of
the cover ts i nto a sl ot provi ded i n the rear frame assembl y. Ensure
that the extended porti on of the cover shi el d i s seated i n the shi el d
wal l groove.
6. Connect A6A1W2 to A17J6.
7. Pl ace the A17 CRT Dri ver assembl y i nto the center-deck mounti ng
sl ot nearest the CRT. Use cauti on when routi ng cabl es to avoi d
damage.
8. For Option 007 spectrum analyzers: Pl ace the A16 FADC assembl y
i nto the center-deck mounti ng sl ot nearest the l eft si de frame.
188 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 7. A6A1 High Voltage Assembly (8560E only)
Ensure that the A16 FADC assembl y i s properl y seated i n the ri ght
end of the sl ot.
9. Secure the A17 assembl y (and A16 assembl y i n Opti on 007) wi th the
two athead screws removed i n step 18 under "Removal ."See Fi gure
3-19 on page 187 (2).
10.For Option 007spectrumanalyzers: Connect the two mounti ng posts
to the l eft si de frame usi ng the two screws removed i n step 17 under
"Removal ." See Fi gure 3-19 on page 187 (1).
11.Fol d the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assembl i es i nto the spectrum anal yzer
and secure the spectrum anal yzer cover assembl y as descri bed i n
"Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assembl i es."
Chapter 3 189
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 8. A7 through A13 Assemblies
Procedure 8. A7 through A13 Assemblies
A separate repl acement procedure i s suppl i ed for each assembl y l i sted
bel ow. Before begi nni ng a procedure, do the fol l owi ng:
CAUTION Turn off the spectrum anal yzer power when repl aci ng any of the
fol l owi ng assembl i es. Fai l ure to turn off the power may resul t i n
damage to the assembl y bei ng removed.
Fol d out the A14 and A15 assembl i es as descri bed i n "Procedure 9.
A14 and A15 assembl i es."
I f the A11 YTO or A10 tracki ng generator (Opti on 002) assembl y i s
bei ng removed, al so fol d down the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assembl i es as
descri bed i n "Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 assembl i es."
A7 Fi rst LO Di stri buti on Ampl i er
A8 Low Band Mi xer
A9 I nput Attenuator
A10 Tracki ng Generator (Opti on 002)
A11 YTO
A13 Second Converter
Fi gure 3-20 on page 190 i l l ustrates the l ocati on of the assembl i es and
Fi gure 3-21 on page 191 provi des the col ors and l ocati ons of the
assembl y bi as wi res.
NOTE Use a torque wrench (HP part number 8710-1655) to ti ghten al l SMA
connectors to 113 Ncm (10 i n-l b). The styl e of the torque wrench may
vary, but i n al l cases do not ti ghten the connectors beyond the poi nt at
whi ch the torque wrench "cl i cks" or "breaks-away."
190 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 8. A7 through A13 Assemblies
Figure 3-20 Assembly Locations
Chapter 3 191
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 8. A7 through A13 Assemblies
Figure 3-21 RF Section Bias Connections
A7 1st LO Distribution Amplier
Removal
1. Remove the two screws securi ng the assembl y to the spectrum
anal yzer center deck.
2. Use a 5/16-i nch wrench to di sconnect W38 and W39 at A7J1 and J2.
3. Di sconnect W42 (W43 on Opti on 002) at the front panel 1ST LO
OUTPUT connector. Loosen W42 (W43 on Opti on 002) at A7J3.
192 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 8. A7 through A13 Assemblies
4. Remove the gate bi as wi re, col or code 97, and W12 from the A7
assembl y.
5. Remove the assembl y and di sconnect W34.
Replacement
1. Use a 5/16-i nch wrench to attach W34 to A7J4 and W42 (W43 on
Opti on 002) to A7J3.
2. Connect gate bi as wi re, col or code 97, to the A7 gate bi as connecti on
next to A7J2.
3. Connect cabl e W12 to the A7 assembl y.
4. Pl ace gate bi as wi re, col or code 97, beneath W38 and connect W38 to
A7J1. Connect W42 (W43 on Opti on 002) to the front panel 1ST LO
OUTPUT connector. Connect W39 to A7J2.
5. Use two panhead screws to secure A7 to the center deck. Be sure to
attach the ground l ug on the screw next to A7J4.
6. Torque al l SMA RF cabl e connectors to 113 Ncm (10 i n-l b).
A8 Low Band Mixer
Removal
1. Use a 5/16-i nch wrench to remove W45 from FL1 and A8J1.
2. Loosen the semi -ri gi d coax cabl e connecti ons at A8J2 and A8J3.
3. Remove the two screws securi ng A8 to the center deck.
4. Remove al l semi -ri gi d coax cabl es from the A8 assembl y.
Replacement
1. Pl ace A8 on the center deck and attach al l semi -ri gi d cabl es, starti ng
wi th A8J3. Use cauti on to avoi d damagi ng any of the cabl es' center
conductor pi ns.
2. Use two panhead screws to secure A8 to the center deck. Reconnect
W45 to FL1 and A8.
3. Torque al l semi -ri gi d coax connecti ons on A8 to 113 Ncm (10 i n-l b).
Ensure that al l cabl e connecti ons are ti ght.
A9 Input Attenuator
Removal
1. Pl ace the spectrum anal yzer upsi de-down on the workbench.
2. Remove W41 and di sconnect W44 from the attenuator.
Chapter 3 193
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 8. A7 through A13 Assemblies
3. Remove screw (1) securi ng the attenuator to the front frame center
support. See Fi gure 3-21 on page 191.
4. Remove screw (1) securi ng the A9 i nput attenuator to the ri ght si de
frame. See Fi gure 3-22 on page 193.
5. Remove the attenuator and di sconnect the attenuator ri bbon cabl e.
Replacement
1. Connect the attenuator-control ri bbon cabl e to the A9 i nput
attenuator.
2. Pl ace the A9 i nput attenuator i nto the spectrum anal yzer wi th the
A9 mounti ng brackets resti ng agai nst the front frame center support
and the ri ght si de frame. Use cauti on to avoi d damagi ng any cabl es.
3. Attach the attenuator to the center support wi th one panhead screw
(1). See Fi gure 3-21 on page 191.
4. Attach the attenuator to the ri ght si de frame, usi ng one athead
screw (1). See Fi gure 3-22 on page 193.
5. Connect semi -ri gi d cabl es W41 and W44 to the attenuator assembl y.
Connect opposi te end of W41 to the front frame. Torque al l SMA
connectors to 113 Ncm (10 i n-l b).
Figure 3-22 A9 Mounting Screws at Right Frame
194 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 8. A7 through A13 Assemblies
A10 Tracking Generator (Option 002)
Removal
1. Use a 5/16-i nch wrench to remove the A10 tracki ng generator RF
OUT, LO OUT, and LO I N semi -ri gi d cabl es.
2. Di sconnect W14 and W16 from the A10 tracki ng generator.
3. Remove the three screws (1) securi ng the A10 tracki ng generator to
the center deck. These screws are l ocated on the top si de of the
center deck as i l l ustrated i n Fi gure 3-23 on page 194.
4. Remove the A10 tracki ng generator and di sconnect W48, coax 80.
Figure 3-23 A10 Tracking Generator Mounting Screws
Replacement
1. Connect W48, coax 80, to the A10 tracki ng generator I NPUT
connector.
2. Ori ent the tracki ng generator so that i ts LO I N, LO OUT, and RF
OUT connectors are cl osest to the A13 Second Converter.
3. Loosel y connect the LO I N, LO OUT, and RF OUT semi -ri gi d cabl es.
4. Secure the A10 tracki ng generator to the spectrum anal yzer center
Chapter 3 195
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 8. A7 through A13 Assemblies
deck usi ng the three screws removed i n step 3 under "Removal ."
5. Torque the semi -ri gi d cabl es to 113 Ncm (10 i n-l b).
6. Connect W14 and W16 to the A10 tracki ng generator.
A11 YTO
Removal
1. I f the spectrum anal yzer i s an Opti on 002, remove the A10 tracki ng
generator before proceedi ng.
2. Pl ace the spectrum anal yzer top-si de-down on the workbench.
3. Use a 5/16-i nch wrench to remove W56/FL2/W57 (as a uni t).
4. Di sconnect W38 at the A11 assembl y.
5. Remove the A11 mounti ng screws (1) shown i n Fi gure 3-24 on page
195.
6. Di sconnect W10 from A11.
Figure 3-24 A11 Mounting Screws
Replacement
1. Reconnect W10 to A11.
2. Pl ace the A11 assembl y i n the spectrum anal yzer.
3. Secure the A11 assembl y to the ri ght si de frame usi ng the four
screws (1) removed i n step 5 under "Removal ."
196 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 8. A7 through A13 Assemblies
4. Connect W38 to A11.
5. I nstal l W56/FL2/W57. Ensure that al l of the connecti ons are ti ght.
Torque al l SMA connectors to 113 Ncm (10 i n-l b).
6. I f the spectrum anal yzer i s an Opti on 002, i nstal l the A10 tracki ng
generator.
A13 Second Converter
CAUTION Turn off the spectrum anal yzer power when repl aci ng the A13 second
converter assembl y. Fai l ure to turn off the power may resul t i n damage
to the assembl y.
Removal
1. Pl ace the spectrum anal yzer upsi de-down on the workbench.
2. Di sconnect W33, coax 81, and W35, coax 92, from the A13 assembl y.
3. For Option 002 instruments: Di sconnect W48, coax 8, from A13J3.
4. Di sconnect W57 from A13J1.
5. Remove the four screws securi ng A13 to the mai n deck and remove
the assembl y.
6. Di sconnect ri bbon cabl e W13 from the A13 assembl y.
Replacement
1. Connect ri bbon cabl e W13 to the A13 assembl y.
2. Secure A13 to the spectrum anal yzer mai n deck, usi ng four panhead
screws.
3. Connect W33, coax 81, to A13J4 600 MHz I N jack.
4. Connect W35, coax 92, to A13J2 310.7 MHz OUT jack.
5. For Option 002 instruments: Connect W48, coax 8, to A13J3. Route
W48 under W35, coax 92.
6. Connect W57 to A13J1. Ensure that al l of the cabl e connecti ons are
ti ght. Torque al l SMA cabl e connectors to 113 Ncm (10 i n-l b).
Chapter 3 197
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 9. A14 and A15 Assemblies
Procedure 9. A14 and A15 Assemblies
Removal
1. Remove the spectrum anal yzer cover as descri bed i n "Procedure 1.
Spectrum Anal yzer Cover."
2. Pl ace the spectrum anal yzer on i ts ri ght si de frame.
3. Remove the ei ght screws (1) hol di ng the A14 and A15 assembl i es to
the bottom of the spectrum anal yzer. See Fi gure 3-25 on page 197
Figure 3-25 A14 and A15 Assembly Removal
198 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 9. A14 and A15 Assemblies
CAUTION DO NOT fol d the board assembl i es out of the spectrum anal yzer one at
a ti me. Al ways fol d the A14 and A15 assembl i es as a uni t. Fol di ng out
one assembl y at a ti me bi nds the hi nges attachi ng the assembl i es and
may damage an assembl y and hi nge.
4. The board assembl i es are attached to the spectrum anal yzer ri ght
si de frame wi th two hi nges. Fol d both the A14 and A15 assembl i es
out of the spectrum anal yzer as a uni t.
5. Remove al l cabl es from the assembl y bei ng removed.
6. Remove the two screws that attach the assembl y bei ng removed to
i ts two mounti ng hi nges.
CAUTION DO NOT torque shi el d screws to more than 8 i nch-pounds. Appl yi ng
excessi ve torque wi l l cause the screws to stretch.
Replacement
1. Attach the removed assembl y to the two chassi s hi nges wi th two
panhead screws.
2. Attach al l cabl es to the assembl y as i l l ustrated i n Fi gure 3-26 on
page 199. When connecti ng W34 to A15, torque the SMA connector
to 113 Ncm (10 i n-l b).
3. Lay the A14 and A15 assembl i es at agai nst each other i n the fol ded
out posi ti on. Make sure that no cabl es become pi nched between the
two assembl i es. Ensure that al l coaxi al cabl es are cl ear of hi nges and
standoffs before conti nui ng onto the next step.
4. Fol d both board assembl i es i nto the spectrum anal yzer as a uni t.
Use cauti on to avoi d damagi ng any cabl e assembl i es.
5. Secure the assembl i es usi ng the ei ght screws removed i n step 3
under "Removal ." See Fi gure 3-25 on page 197.
6. Secure the spectrum anal yzer cover assembl y as descri bed i n
"Procedure 1. Spectrum Anal yzer Cover."
Chapter 3 199
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 9. A14 and A15 Assemblies
Figure 3-26 A14 and A15 Assembly Cables
200 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 10. A16 FADC/A17 CRT Driver (8560E )
Procedure 10. A16 FADC/A17 CRT Driver
(8560E )
Removal
1. Remove the spectrum anal yzer cover assembl y and fol d out the A2,
A3, A4, and A5 assembl i es as descri bed i n steps 3 through 6 under
"Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assembl i es Removal ."
2. Pl ace the spectrum anal yzer top-si de-up on the workbench wi th A2,
A3, A4, and A5 fol ded out to the ri ght.
3. For Option 007 spectrum analyzers: Remove two screws (1) securi ng
the two board-mounti ng posts to the l eft si de frame, and remove the
posts. See Fi gure 3-27 on page 201.
4. Remove two screws (2) securi ng the A17 assembl y (and A16
assembl y i n Opti on 007) to the l eft si de frame. Remove the two
spacers (non-Opti on 007).
5. Pul l the A17 assembl y out of the spectrum anal yzer.
6. For Option 007spectrumanalyzers: Pul l the A16 assembl y out of the
spectrum anal yzer.
7. Di sconnect W7, W8, W9, A6A1W2, and A18W1 from the A17 CRT
dri ver assembl y.
8. For Option 007 spectrum analyzers: Di sconnect al l cabl es from the
A16 FADC assembl y.
Chapter 3 201
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 10. A16 FADC/A17 CRT Driver (8560E )
Figure 3-27 A16 and A17 Mounting Screws
Replacement
1. Connect W7, W8, W9, A6A1W2, and A18W1 to the A17 CRT dri ver
assembl y. Pl ace the assembl y i nto the center-deck mounti ng sl ot
next to the CRT assembl y.
2. For Option 007spectrumanalyzers: Connect al l A16 assembl y cabl es
as i l l ustrated i n Fi gure 3-28 on page 202 whi ch shows the l eft si de
frame removed so that proper A16 assembl y cabl e routi ng may be
vi ewed. Pl ace the A16 assembl y i nto the center-deck mounti ng sl ot
nearest the l eft si de frame.
3. Secure the A17 assembl y (and A16 assembl y i n Opti on 007) to the
l eft si de frame usi ng two athead screws (and two spacers i n
non-Opti on 007). For Option 007: Attach the board mounts to the l eft
si de frame usi ng two athead screws (1). See Fi gure 3-27 on page
201.
4. Pl ace the spectrum anal yzer on i ts ri ght si de frame.
5. Fol d the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assembl i es i nto the spectrum anal yzer
as descri bed i n "Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assembl i es."
Secure the spectrum anal yzer cover assembl y.
202 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 10. A16 FADC/A17 CRT Driver (8560E )
Figure 3-28 A16 Cable Routing
Chapter 3 203
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 11. B1 Fan
Procedure 11. B1 Fan
Removal/Replacement
WARNING Always disconnect the power cord from the instrument before
beginning this replacement procedure. Failure to follow this
precaution can present a shock hazard which may result in
personal injury.
1. Remove the four screws securi ng the fan assembl y to the rear frame.
2. Remove the fan and di sconnect the fan wi re from the A6 Power
Suppl y assembl y.
3. To rei nstal l the fan, connect the fan wi re to A6J3 and pl ace the wi re
i nto the channel provi ded on the l eft si de of the rear frame openi ng.
Secure the fan to the rear frame usi ng four panhead screws.
NOTE The fan must be i nstal l ed so that the ai r enters through the front and
si des of the i nstrument and exi ts out the rear of the i nstrument.
204 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 12. BT1 Battery
Procedure 12. BT1 Battery
WARNING Battery BT1 contains lithium polycarbon monouoride. Do not
incinerate or puncture this battery. Dispose of discharged
battery in a safe manner.
CAUTION To avoi d l oss of the cal i brati on constants stored on the A2 Control l er
assembl y, connect the spectrum anal yzer to the mai n power source and
turn on before removi ng the battery.
The battery used i n thi s i nstrument i s desi gned to l ast several years.
An output vol tage of +3.0 V i s mai ntai ned for most of i ts useful l i fe.
Once thi s vol tage drops to +2.6 V, i ts l i fe and use are l i mi ted and the
output vol tage wi l l deteri orate qui ckl y. When the i nstrument i s turned
off, stored states and traces wi l l onl y be retai ned for a short ti me and
may be l ost. Refer to "State- and Trace-Storage Probl ems"i n Chapter 9,
"Control l er Secti on," i n thi s manual . The battery shoul d be repl aced i f
i ts vol tage i s +2.6 V or l ess.
Removal/Replacement
1. Remove any opti on modul e attached to the rear panel .
2. Locate the battery assembl y cover on the spectrum anal yzer rear
panel . Use a screwdri ver to remove the two athead screws securi ng
the cover to the spectrum anal yzer.
3. Remove the ol d battery and repl ace i t wi th the new one, ensuri ng
proper pol ari ty.
4. Measure the vol tage across the new battery. Nomi nal new battery
vol tage i s approxi matel y +3.0 V. I f thi s i s not the case, check the
battery cabl e and A2 Control l er assembl y.
5. Secure the battery assembl y i nto the spectrum anal yzer.
Chapter 3 205
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 13. Rear Frame/Rear Dress Panel
Procedure 13. Rear Frame/Rear Dress Panel
Removal
WARNING The A6 power supply (in E-series and EC-series instruments)
and the A6A1 high voltage (in E-series instruments) assemblies
contain lethal voltages with lethal currents in all areas. Use
extreme care when servicing these assemblies. Always
disconnect the power cord from the instrument before
beginning this replacement procedure. Failure to follow this
precaution can present a shock hazard which may result in
personal injury.
NOTE Di agrams that i l l ustrate features common to E-seri es and EC-seri es
i nstruments are shown wi th E-seri es i nstruments. Where features
di ffer for E-seri es and EC-seri es i nstruments, separate di agrams are
provi ded.
1. Di sconnect the l i ne-power cord from the spectrum anal yzer.
2. Remove the spectrum anal yzer cover, and pl ace the spectrum
anal yzer on i ts ri ght si de frame.
3. Fol d out the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assembl i es as descri bed i n
"Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assembl i es Removal ," steps 3
through 5.
4. Di sconnect the HP-I B cabl e at A2J5.
5. Pl ace the spectrum anal yzer top-si de-up on the work bench wi th A2
through A5 fol ded out to the ri ght.
For EC-seri es i nstruments, proceed to step 13. For E-seri es
i nstruments proceed to step 6.
WARNING The voltage potential at A6A1W3 is +9 kV. Disconnect at the
CRT with caution! Failure to properly discharge A6A1W3 may
result in severeelectrical shock topersonnel anddamagetothe
instrument.
6. Connect the spectrum anal yzer l i ne-power cord to provi de proper
groundi ng whi l e di schargi ng the A6A1W3 post-accel erator cabl e.
Make sure that the spectrum anal yzer l i ne-power swi tch i s i n the off
posi ti on.
206 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 13. Rear Frame/Rear Dress Panel
7. Connect a hi gh-vol tage probe (1000:1), such as the HP 34111A to a
vol tmeter wi th a 10 megohm i nput.
8. Connect the cl i p l ead of the probe (ground) to the chassi s of the
spectrum anal yzer.
9. Sl i p the ti p of the hi gh-vol tage probe under the A6A1W3
post-accel erator cabl e's rubber shroud to obtai n a readi ng on the
vol tmeter. See Fi gure 3-3.
10.Keep the hi gh-vol tage probe on the post-accel erator connector unti l
the vol tage has dropped to a vol tmeter readi ng of l ess than 5 mV
(l ess than 5 V at the connector). Thi s normal l y takes about 30
seconds.
11.Di sconnect the l i ne-power cord from the spectrum anal yzer.
12.Usi ng a smal l screwdri ver wi th the shank i n contact wi th the CRT
shi el d assembl y, sl i p the ti p of the screwdri ver under the A6A1W3
post-accel erator cabl e's rubber shroud and short the cabl e to ground
on the CRT shi el d assembl y. See Fi gure 3-3.
13.Remove the three screws securi ng the power-suppl y shi el d to the
power suppl y, and remove the shi el d. See (1) i n Fi gure 3-30.
14.Di sconnect the fan and l i ne-power cabl es from A6J3 and A6J101 on
the A6 power suppl y assembl y.
15.Remove the two athead screws that secure the rear-panel battery
assembl y, and remove the assembl y. Remove the battery and
unsol der the two wi res attached to the battery assembl y.
16.Use a 9/16-i nch nut dri ver to remove the dress nuts hol di ng the BNC
connectors to the rear frame. I f necessary, dri l l out the nut dri ver to
t over the BNC connectors, and cover i t wi th heatshri nk tubi ng or
tape to avoi d scratchi ng the dress panel .
17.Remove four screws that secure the rear frame to the mai n deck. See
(1) i n Fi gure 3-29.
18.Remove the si x screws that secure the rear frame to the l eft and
ri ght si de frames.
19.Remove the knurl ed nut that secures the earphone jack. Careful l y
remove the jack usi ng cauti on to avoi d l osi ng the l ock washer l ocated
on the i nsi de of the rear-frame assembl y. Repl ace the washer and
nut onto the jack for safekeepi ng.
20.Remove the rear-frame assembl y.
21.To remove the rear dress panel , remove the two nuts l ocated on the
i nsi de of the rear frame near the di spl ay adjustment hol es.
Chapter 3 207
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 13. Rear Frame/Rear Dress Panel
Figure 3-29 Main Deck Screws
Replacement
1. I f the rear dress panel i s removed, secure i t to the rear frame usi ng
two nuts. Ensure that the dress panel i s al i gned wi th the frame.
2. Pl ace the spectrum anal yzer on i ts front panel al l owi ng easy access
to the rear-frame area.
3. Pl ace the rear frame on the spectrum anal yzer and secure the
knurl ed nut on the earphone jack. A l ock washer shoul d be used on
the i nsi de of the rear frame and a at washer on the outsi de.
4. Pl ace the coax cabl e's BNC connectors i nto the appropri ate
rear-frame hol es as descri bed bel ow. Use a 9/16-i nch nut dri ver to
attach the dress nuts hol di ng the BNC connectors to the rear frame.
5. Secure the rear frame to the spectrum anal yzer mai n deck, usi ng
four panhead screws (1). See Fi gure 3-29.
Rear Panel J ack
EC-series E-series RF Cable
J1 n/a W64
n/a J1 W55
J4 J4 W24, coax 5
J5 J5 W23, coax 93
J6 J6 W25, coax 4
J7 n/a W55
J8 J8 W18, coax 97
J9 J9 W31, coax 8
J11 J11 W58, coax 8
208 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 13. Rear Frame/Rear Dress Panel
6. Secure the rear frame to the spectrum anal yzer si de frames usi ng
three athead screws per si de. Use cauti on to avoi d damagi ng any
coaxi al cabl es.
7. Pl ace the spectrum anal yzer top-si de-up on the work bench.
8. Pul l the red and bl ack battery wi res through the rear-frame's
battery-assembl y hol e. Sol der the red wi re to the battery-assembl y's
posi ti ve l ug and the bl ack wi re to the negati ve l ug. Repl ace the
battery.
9. Secure the battery assembl y to the rear frame, usi ng two athead
screws.
10.Connect the fan and l i ne-power cabl es to A6J3 and A6J101 on the
A6 power suppl y.
For EC-seri es i nstruments, proceed to step 13. For E-seri es
i nstruments proceed to step 11.
11.Snap the A6A1W3 post-accel erator cabl e to the CRT assembl y.
12.Snap the bl ack grommet protecti ng A6A1W3 i nto the CRT shi el d.
13.Ensure that al l cabl es are safel y routed and wi l l not be damaged
when securi ng the A6 cover.
14.Secure the power-suppl y cover shi el d to the power suppl y, usi ng
three athead screws (1). One end of the cover ts i nto a sl ot
provi ded i n the rear-frame assembl y. Ensure that the extended
porti on of the cover shi el d i s seated i n the shi el d wal l groove. See
Fi gure 3-30.
15.Connect the HP-I B cabl e to A2J5.
16.Fol d the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assembl i es i nto the spectrum anal yzer
as descri bed i n procedure 5.
Chapter 3 209
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 13. Rear Frame/Rear Dress Panel
Figure 3-30 A6 Power Supply Cover
210 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 14. W3 Line Switch Cable (8560E)
Procedure 14. W3 Line Switch Cable (8560E)
Removal
NOTE To remove the l i ne swi tch for 8560EC i nstruments see Removal of the
Li ne Swi tch from the Front Panel on page 153.
WARNING Due to possible contact with high voltages, disconnect the
spectrum analyzer line-power cord before performing this
procedure.
1. Remove the spectrum anal yzer cover assembl y as descri bed i n
"Procedure 1. Spectrum Anal yzer Cover."
2. Fol d out the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assembl i es as descri bed i n steps 3
through 5 under "Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assembl i es
Removal ."
3. Di sconnect A1A1W1 from A3J602.
4. Pl ace the spectrum anal yzer top-si de-up on the workbench wi th A2
through A5 fol ded out to the ri ght.
WARNING The voltage potential at A6A1W3 is +9 kV. Disconnect at the
CRT with caution! Failure to properly discharge A6A1W3 may
result in severeel ectri cal shock topersonnel and damagetothe
instrument.
5. Connect the spectrum anal yzer l i ne-power cord to provi de proper
groundi ng whi l e di schargi ng the A6A1W3 post-accel erator cabl e.
Make sure that the spectrum anal yzer l i ne-power swi tch i s i n the off
posi ti on.
6. Connect a hi gh vol tage probe (1000:1), such as the HP 34111A, to a
vol tmeter wi th a 10 megohm i nput.
7. Connect the cl i p l ead of the probe (ground) to the chassi s of the
spectrum anal yzer.
8. Sl i p the ti p of the hi gh vol tage probe under the A6A1W3
post-accel arator cabl e rubber shroud to obtai n a readi ng on the
vol tmeter. See Fi gure 3-3 on page 162.
9. Keep the hi gh vol tage probe on the post-accel erator connector unti l
the vol tage has dropped to a vol tmeter readi ng of l ess than 5 mV
(l ess than 5 V at the connector). Thi s normal l y takes about 30
seconds.
10.Di sconnect the l i ne-power cord from the spectrum anal yzer.
Chapter 3 211
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 14. W3 Line Switch Cable (8560E)
11.Usi ng a smal l screwdri ver wi th the shank i n contact wi th the CRT
shi el d assembl y, sl i p the ti p of the screwdri ver under the A6A1W3
post-accel erator cabl e rubber shroud and short the cabl e to ground
on the CRT shi el d assembl y. See Fi gure 3-3 on page 162.
12.Remove the three screws securi ng the power suppl y shi el d to the
power suppl y, and remove the shi el d.
13.Pul l the cabl e ti e (1), Fi gure 3-31 on page 212, to free W9 and the
post-accel erator cabl es.
14.Di sconnect W3 from A6J2.
15.Pul l W3 up from between the power suppl y and the CRTassembl y to
rel ease i t from the cabl e cl amp.
16.Pl ace the spectrum anal yzer on i ts ri ght si de frame.
17.Fol d out the A14 and A15 assembl i es as descri bed i n steps 3 and 4
under "Procedure 9. A14 and A15 Assembl i es Removal ."
18.Loosen the screw (1) securi ng W3, the l i ne swi tch assembl y, to the
front frame. The screw i s capti ve. See Fi gure 3-32 on page 213.
19.Remove A1W1 and A1W1DS1 from the l i ne swi tch assembl y. Let
each hang freel y.
NOTE I f contact removal tool , HP part number 8710-1791, i s avai l abl e,
compl ete assembl y removal by performi ng "Removal " steps 20 and 21.
I f not, ski p to step 23 under "Removal ."
20.Wi th wi re cutters, cl i p the ti e wrap hol di ng the cabl e to the contact
housi ng. From the top si de of the spectrum anal yzer, use contact
removal tool , HP part number 8710-1791, to remove the four wi res
from the W3 connector. See Fi gure 3-33 on page 214.
21.Compl etel y remove the cabl e from the i nstrument.
22.Remove the A1 front frame assembl y. Remove the front panel and
A18 CRT assembl y as descri bed i n steps 16 through 29 under
"Procedure 2B. A1 Front Frame/A18 CRT (8560E)."
23.Remove the l eft si de frame from the spectrum anal yzer. See Fi gure
3-34 on page 217. (The si de frame wi l l sti l l be attached by the
speaker wi res. Do not l et i t hang freel y.)
24. Fol l ow these steps to remove the l i ne swi tch from the front panel :
a. gentl y remove the green LCD from the top-center of the l i ne
swi tch assembl y,
b. remove the two screws (0515-1521) that secure the l i ne swi tch to
the front frame,
c. remove the screw whi ch secures the orange and the whi te ground
212 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 14. W3 Line Switch Cable (8560E)
cabl es for the probe power and l i ne swi tch, and
d. remove the l i ne swi tch.
Figure 3-31 W3 Dress and Connection to A6 Power Supply
Chapter 3 213
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 14. W3 Line Switch Cable (8560E)
Figure 3-32 Line Switch Mounting Screw and Cable Dress
214 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 14. W3 Line Switch Cable (8560E)
Figure 3-33 W3 Cable Connector
Chapter 3 215
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 14. W3 Line Switch Cable (8560E)
Replacement (Using Contact Removal Tool, HP Part
Number 8710-1791)
1. Ensure that the acti on of the swi tch i s worki ng properl y. Wi th a pai r
of wi re cutters, cl i p the ti e wrap hol di ng the cabl e to the contact
housi ng of the repl acement W3 assembl y.
2. Usi ng the contact removal tool , remove the four wi res from the
repl acement cabl e assembl y connector.
3. From the bottom si de of the spectrum anal yzer, i nsert the contact
end of W3 through the sl otted openi ng i n the mai n deck. W3 shoul d
come through to the top si de of the spectrum anal yzer between the
A18 CRT assembl y and the post-accel erator cabl e.
4. Pl ace LED A1W1DS1 i nto the l i ne swi tch assembl y.
5. Attach the l i ne swi tch assembl y i nto the front frame, usi ng the
capti ve panhead screw. Ensure the connecti on of the l i ne swi tch
groundi ng l ug to the screw.
6. Dress W3 between the mai n deck standoff and the si de frame. See
Fi gure 3-32 on page 213.
7. On the top si de of the spectrum anal yzer, redress W3.
8. I nsert the four contacts i nto the W3 connector.
9. Attach the cabl e to the connector housi ng usi ng the suppl i ed ti e
wrap.
10.Connect W3 to A6J2. Dress W3 i nto the sl otted openi ng i n the deck.
11.Connect A1A1W1 to A3J602.
12.Secure the power suppl y cover shi el d to the power suppl y, usi ng
three athead screws. One end of the cover ts i nto a sl ot provi ded i n
the rear frame assembl y. Ensure that the extended porti on of the
cover shi el d i s seated i n the shi el d wal l groove.
13.Redress W3 and the other cabl e assembl i es down between the CRT
assembl y and the power suppl y cover such that the W9 wi res are
underneath the surface of the power suppl y cover.
14.Fol d up the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assembl i es i nto the spectrum
anal yzer as descri bed i n steps 5 through 10 under "Procedure 5. A2,
A3, A4, and A5 Assembl i es Repl acement."
15.Fol d up A14 and A15 assembl i es as descri bed i n steps 9 through 11
under "Procedure 9. A14 and A15 Assembl i es Repl acement."
216 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 14. W3 Line Switch Cable (8560E)
Replacement (without Contact Removal Tool)
1. Lay the repl acement l i ne swi tch cabl e assembl y between the si de
frame and mai n deck. Ensure that the acti on of the swi tch i s
worki ng properl y.
2. Attach the l eft si de frame to the deck and rear frame. See Fi gure
3-34 on page 217.
Screw Quantity
(1) SCREW-MACH M4 X 0.7 8 mm-LG FLAT HD.............. 3
(2) SCREW-MACH M3 X 0.5 35 mm-LG FLAT HD............ 2
(3) SCREW-MACH M3 X 0.5 6 mm-LG FLAT HD.............. 6
3. Dress W3 between the mai n deck standoff and the si de frame. See
Fi gure 3-32 on page 213.
4. Attach the A1 Front Frame assembl y, fol l owi ng the A18 CRT
assembl y i nstructi ons as descri bed i n steps 1 through 16 under
"Procedure 2B. A1 Front Frame/A18 CRT (8560E)."
5. Pl ace LED A1W1DS1 i nto the l i ne swi tch assembl y.
6. Attach the l i ne swi tch assembl y i nto the front frame usi ng the
capti ve panhead screw. Ensure the connecti on of the l i ne swi tch
groundi ng l ug to the screw.
Chapter 3 217
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 14. W3 Line Switch Cable (8560E)
Figure 3-34 Side Frame Mounting Screws
7. On the top si de of the spectrum anal yzer, redress W3.
8. Connect W3 to A6J2. Dress W3 i nto the sl otted openi ng i n the deck.
9. Connect A1A1W1 to A3J602.
10.Secure the power suppl y cover shi el d to the power suppl y usi ng
three athead screws. One end of the cover ts i nto a sl ot provi ded i n
the rear frame assembl y. Ensure that the extended porti on of the
cover shi el d i s seated i n the shi el d wal l groove. See Fi gure 3-30 on
page 209.
11.Pl ace W3 and the other cabl e assembl i es between the CRTassembl y
and the power suppl y cover so the W9 wi res are underneath the
surface of the power suppl y cover.
12.Fol d up the A2, A3, A4, and A5 assembl i es i nto the spectrum
anal yzer as descri bed i n steps 5 through 10 under "Procedure 5. A2,
A3, A4, and A5 Assembl i es Repl acement."
13.Fol d up A14 and A15 assembl i es as descri bed i n steps 3 through 5
under "Procedure 9. A14 and A15 Assembl i es Repl acement."
14.Repl ace the spectrum anal yzer cover assembl y.
218 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 14. W3 Line Switch Cable (8560E)
15.Connect the l i ne-power cord and swi tch the spectrum anal yzer
power on. I f the spectrum anal yzer does not operate properl y, turn
off the spectrum anal yzer power, di sconnect the l i ne cord, and
recheck the spectrum anal yzer.
Chapter 3 219
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 15. EEROM (A2U501 or A2U500)
Procedure 15. EEROM (A2U501 or A2U500)
Removal/Replacement
CAUTION The EEROM i s repl aced wi th the power on. Use a nonmetal l i c tool to
remove the defecti ve EEROM and i nstal l the new EEROM.
NOTE I n newer spectrum anal yzers, the EEPROM reference desi gnator i s
U500. I n ol der spectrum anal yzers, the EEROM reference desi gnator i s
U501.
1. Turn the HP 8560E/EC LINE swi tch off. Remove the spectrum
anal yzer cover assembl y and fol d out the A2, A3, A4, and A5
assembl i es as descri bed i n steps 3 through 5 under "Procedure 5.
A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assembl i es Removal ."
2. Turn the HP 8560E/EC LINE swi tch on.
3. Set the WR PROT/WR ENA jumper on the A2 Control l er Assembl y
to the WR ENA posi ti on.
4. Press CAL, MORE 1 OF 2, SERVICE CAL DATA, COPY EEROM. The
spectrum anal yzer wi l l store the contents of the EEROM i nto the
program RAM.
5. Usi ng a nonmetal l i c tool , careful l y remove the defecti ve EEROM.
6. Careful l y i nstal l a new EEROM.
7. Press COPY TO EEROM. The spectrum anal yzer wi l l store the
contents of the program RAM i nto the new EEROM.
8. Turn the HP 8560E/EC LINE swi tch off, then on, cycl i ng the
spectrum anal yzer power. Al l ow the power-on sequence to ni sh.
9. I f error message 701, 702, or 703 i s di spl ayed, press RECALL, MORE,
and RECALL ERRORS. Use the STEP keys to vi ew any other errors.
10.I f error message 701 or 703 i s di spl ayed, perform Adjustment 9,
"Frequency Response Adjustment" i n Chapter 2. (I f a TAM i s
avai l abl e, perform the "Low Band Fl atness" adjustment. Press
MODULE, ADJUST to enter the adjust menu of the TAM.)
11.I f there are no errors after cycl i ng the spectrum anal yzer power, the
EEROM i s worki ng properl y, but the frequency response correcti on
data mi ght be i nval i d. Check the spectrum anal yzer frequency
response.
12.Pl ace the WR PROT/WR ENA jumper i n the WR PROT posi ti on.
13.Fol d the A2 and A3 assembl i es i nto the spectrum anal yzer as
220 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 15. EEROM (A2U501 or A2U500)
descri bed i n "Procedure 5. A2, A3, A4, and A5 Assembl i es." Secure
the spectrum anal yzer cover assembl y.
Chapter 3 221
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 16. A21 OCXO (Non-Option 103)
Procedure 16. A21 OCXO (Non-Option 103)
Removal
1. Remove the rear frame assembl y as descri bed i n steps 1 through 22
under "Procedure 13. Rear Frame/Rear Dress Panel Removal ,"
steps 1 through 22.
2. Pl ace the spectrum anal yzer on i ts ri ght si de frame.
3. Fol d out the A14 and A15 assembl i es as descri bed i n steps 3 and 4
under "Procedure 9. A14 and A15 Assembl i es Removal ."
4. Remove the three screws (1) and three shoul der washers securi ng
the OCXO to the mai n deck. See Fi gure 3-35 on page 222.
5. Di sconnect W49, coax 82, from the OCXO and di sconnect W50
(orange cabl e) from the A15 RF assembl y. Cl i p the ti e wraps that
hol d W49 and W50 together and remove the OCXO and i nsul ator
from the spectrum anal yzer (l eavi ng the orange cabl e connected).
222 Chapter 3
Assembly Replacement
Procedure 16. A21 OCXO (Non-Option 103)
Figure 3-35 A21 OCXO Mounting Screws
Replacement
1. Connect W49, coax 82, to the OCXO and posi ti on the OCXO and
i nsul ator i n the spectrum anal yzer. Dress W50 (orange cabl e) next to
W49 through the openi ng i n the deck.
2. Secure the OCXO to the spectrum anal yzer mai n deck usi ng three
screws (1) and three shoul der washers. See Fi gure 3-35 on page 222.
3. Fol d the A14 and A15 assembl i es i nto the spectrum anal yzer as
descri bed i n procedure 9.
4. Perform the rear frame assembl y repl acement procedure descri bed
i n procedure 13.
223
4 Replaceable Parts
224 Chapter 4
Replaceable Parts
Introduction
Introduction
Thi s chapter contai ns i nformati on on orderi ng al l repl aceabl e parts and
assembl i es. Locate the i nstrument parts i n the fol l owi ng gures and
tabl es:
Tabl e 4-1 on page 227. Reference Desi gnati ons
Tabl e 4-2 on page 228. Abbrevi ati ons
Tabl e 4-3 on page 232. Mul ti pl es
Tabl e 4-4 on page 233 Repl aceabl e Parts
Tabl e 4-5 on page 241. Parts Li st, Assembl y Mounti ng
Tabl e 4-6 on page 242. Parts Li st, Cover Assembl y
Tabl e 4-7 on page 242. Parts Li st, Mai n Chassi s (8560EC)
Tabl e 4-8 on page 243. Parts Li st, Mai n Chassi s (8560E)
Tabl e 4-9 on page 245. Parts Li st, RF Secti on
Tabl e 4-10 on page 245. Parts Li st, Front Frame (8560EC)
Tabl e 4-11 on page 246. Parts Li st, Front Frame (8560E)
Tabl e 4-12 on page 247. Parts Li st, Rear Frame (8560EC)
Tabl e 4-13 on page 248. Parts Li st, Rear Frame (8560E)
Fi gure 4-1 on page 241. Parts I denti cati on, Assembl y Mounti ng
Fi gure 4-2 on page 249. Parts I denti cati on, Cover Assembl y
Fi gure 4-3 on page 251. Parts I denti cati on, Mai n Chassi s (8560E)
Fi gure 4-4 on page 253. Parts I denti cati on, RF Secti on
Fi gure 4-5 on page 255. Parts I denti cati on, Front Frame (8560E)
Fi gure 4-5 on page 257. Parts I denti cati on, Front Frame (8560E)
Fi gure 4-6 on page 259. Parts I denti cati on, Rear Frame (8560E)
Fi gure 4-7 on page 261. Parts I denti cati on, Mai n Chassi s (8560EC)
Fi gure 4-8 on page 263. Parts I denti cati on, Front Frame (8560EC)
Fi gure 4-9 on page 265. Parts I denti cati on, Rear Frame (8560EC)
Chapter 4 225
Replaceable Parts
Ordering Information
Ordering Information
To order a part or assembl y, quote the Hewl ett-Packard part number,
i ndi cate the quanti ty requi red, and address the order to the nearest HP
Sal es and Servi ce ofce.
To order a part that i s not l i sted i n the repl aceabl e parts tabl e, i ncl ude
the i nstrument model number, the descri pti on and functi on of the part,
and the number of parts requi red. Address the order to the nearest HP
Sal es and Servi ce ofce.
Direct Mail-Order System
Wi thi n the USA, Hewl ett-Packard can suppl y parts through a di rect
mai l -order system. Advantages of usi ng the system are as fol l ows:
Di rect orderi ng and shi pment from the HP Support Materi al s
Organi zati on i n Rosevi l l e, Cal i forni a.
No maxi mum or mi ni mum on any mai l order. (There i s a mi ni mum
order amount for parts ordered through a l ocal HP Sal es and Servi ce
ofce when the orders requi re bi l l i ng and i nvoi ci ng.)
Prepai d transportati on. (There i s a smal l handl i ng charge for each order.)
No i nvoi ces.
To provi de these advantages, a check or money order must accompany
each order. Mai l -order forms and speci c orderi ng i nformati on i s
avai l abl e through your l ocal Hewl ett-Packard Sal es and Servi ce ofce.
See Tabl e 1-6 on page 47.
Direct Phone-Order System
Wi thi n the USA, a phone order system i s avai l abl e for regul ar and
hotl i ne repl acement parts servi ce. A tol l -free phone number i s
avai l abl e, and Mastercard and Vi sa are accepted.
Regular Orders: The tol l -free phone number, (800) 227-8164, i s
avai l abl e 6 am to 5 pm, Paci c standard ti me, Monday through Fri day.
Regul ar orders have a four-day del i very ti me.
Hotline Orders: Hotl i ne servi ce for orderi ng emergency parts i s
avai l abl e 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. There i s an addi ti onal hotl i ne
charge to cover the cost of frei ght and speci al handl i ng.
The tol l -free phone number i s (800) 227-8164, i s avai l abl e 6 am to 5 pm,
Paci c standard ti me, Monday through Fri day and (916) 785-8HOT for
after hours, weekends, and hol i days. Hotl i ne orders are normal l y
del i vered the fol l owi ng busi ness day.
226 Chapter 4
Replaceable Parts
Parts List Format
Parts List Format
The fol l owi ng i nformati on i s l i sted for each part:
1. The Hewl ett-Packard part number.
2. The total quanti ty (Qty) i n the assembl y. Thi s quanti ty i s gi ven onl y
once, at the rst appearance of the part i n the l i st.
3. The descri pti on of the part.
4. A ve-di gi t code i ndi cati ng a typi cal manufacturer of the part.
5. The manufacturer part number.
Chapter 4 227
Replaceable Parts
Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers
Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers
Refer to the fol l owi ng rmware note, part number 5961-6734:
HP 8560 Series, HP 85620A, and HP 85629B Firmware Note.
Table 4-1 Reference Designations
REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS
A Assembl y F Fuse RT Thermi stor
AT Attenuator,
I sol ator,
FL Fi l ter S Swi tch
Li mi ter,
Termi nati on
HY Ci rcul ator T Transformer
B Fan, Motor J El ectri cal
Connector
TB Termi nal
Board
BT Battery (Stati onary
Porti on),
TC Thermocoupl e
C Capaci tor Jack TP Test Poi nt
CP Coupl er K Rel ay U I ntegrated
Ci rcui t,
CR Di ode, Di ode L Coi l , I nductor Mi croci rcui t
Thyri stor,
Step
M Meter V El ectron Tube
Recovery
Di ode,
MP Mi scel l aneous VR Breakdown
Di ode
Varactor Mechani cal
Part
(Zener),
DC Di recti onal
Coupl er
P El ectri cal
Connector
Vol tage
Regul ator
DL Del ay Li ne (Movabl e
Porti on),
W Cabl e, Wi re,
Jumper
DS Annunci ator,
Lamp,
Pl ug X Socket
Li ght
Emi tti ng
Q Si l i con
Control l ed
Y Crystal Uni t
Di ode (LED), Recti er (SCR), (Pi ezoel ectri c,
Si gnal i ng
Devi ce
Transi stor, Quartz)
(Vi si bl e) Tri ode
Thyri stor
Z Tuned Cavi ty,
E Mi scel l aneous
El ectri cal
Part
R Resi stor Tuned Ci rcui t
228 Chapter 4
Replaceable Parts
Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers
Table 4-2 Abbreviations
ABBREVIATIONS
A C CONT Contact,
Conti nuous,
A Across Fl ats,
Acryl i c,
C Capaci tance, Control ,
Ai r (Dry
Method),
Capaci tor, Control l er
Ampere Center Tapped, CONV Converter
ADJ Adjust,
Adjustment
Cermet, Col d, CPRSN Compressi on
ANSI Ameri can
Nati onal
Compressi on CUP-PT Cup Poi nt
Standards
I nsti tute
CCP Carbon
Composi ti on
CW Cl ockwi se,
(formerl y Pl asti c Conti nuous
Wave
USASI -ASA) CD Cadmi um,
Card,
D
ASSY Assembl y Cord
AWG Ameri can
Wi re Gage
CER Cerami c D Deep,
Depl eti on,
CHAM Chamfer Depth,
Di ameter,
B CHAR Character, Di rect
Current
BCD Bi nary Coded Characteri sti c, DA Darl i ngton
Deci mal Charcoal DAP-GL Di al l yl
Phthal ate
BD Board,
Bundl e
CMOS Compl ementary Gl ass
BE-CU Beryl l i um
Copper
Metal Oxi de DBL Doubl e
BNC Type of
Connector
Semi conductor DCDR Decoder
BRG Beari ng,
Bori ng
CNDCT Conducti ng, DEG Degree
BRS Brass Conducti ve, D-HOL
E
D-Shaped
Hol e
BSC Basi c Conducti vi ty, DI A Di ameter
BTN Button Conductor DI P Dual I n-Li ne
Package
Chapter 4 229
Replaceable Parts
Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers
D
FDTHRU
Feedthrough HEX Hexadeci mal ,
DI P-SLDR
Di p Sol der FEM Femal e Hexagon,
D-MODE Depl eti on
Mode
FI L-HD Fi l l i ster Head Hexagonal
DO Package Type FL Fl ash, Fl at,
Fl ui d
HLCL Hel i cal
Desi gnati on FLAT-PT Fl at Poi nt HP
Hewl ett-Packard
DP Deep, Depth,
Di a-
FR Front Company,
Hi gh Pass
metri c Pi tch,
Di p
FREQ Frequency I
DP3T Doubl e Pol e
Three
FT Current Gai n I C Col l ectorCurrent,
I ntegrated Ci rcui t
Throw Bandwi dth
Product
I D
I denti cati on,
I nsi de Di ameter
DWL Dowel l (Transi ti on I N I nch
E Frequency),
Feet, Foot
I NT
I ntegral ,I ntensi ty,
I nternal
E-R E-Ri ng FXD Fi xed J
EXT Extended,
Extensi on,
JFET Juncti on
Fi el d
External ,
Exti ngui sh
G Effect
Transi stor
F GEN General ,
Generator
K
F Fahrenhei t,
Farad,
GND Ground K Kel vi n, Key,
Ki l o, Potassi um
Femal e, Fi l m
(Resi stor),
GP General
Purpose,
KNRLD Knurl ed
Fi xed, Group KVDC Ki l ovol ts-
Di rect Current
Fl ange,
Frequency
H L
FC Carbon Fi l m/ LED Li ght
Emi tti ng
Composi ti on,
Edge
H Henry, Hi gh Di ode
of Cutoff
Frequency,
HDW Hardware LG Length, Long
Face HEX Hexadeci mal , LI N Li near,
Li neari ty
Table 4-2 Abbreviations
230 Chapter 4
Replaceable Parts
Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers
L N PC Pri nted
Ci rcui t
LK Li nk, Lock N Nano, None PCB Pri nted
Ci rcui t
LKG Leakage,
Locki ng
N-CHA
N
N-Channel Board
LUM Lumi nous NH Nanohenry P-CHA
N
P-Channel
NM Nanometer, PD Pad, Power
M Nonmetal l i c Di ssi pati on
M Mal e,
Maxi mum,
NO Normal l y
Open,Number
PF Pi cofarad,
Power Factor
Mega, Mi l ,
Mi l l i , Mode
NOM Nomi nal PKG Package
MA Mi l l i ampere NPN Negati ve
Posi ti ve
MACH Machi ned Negati ve
(Transi stor)
PLSTC Pl asti c
MAX Maxi mum NS Nanosecond, PNL Panel
MC Mol ded
Carbon
Non-Shorti ng,
Nose
PNP Posi ti ve
Negati ve
MET Metal ,
Metal l i zed
NUM Numeri c Posi ti ve
(Transi stor)
MHz Megahertz NYL Nyl on
(Pol yami de)
POLYC Pol ycarbonate
MI NTR Mi ni ature O POLYE Pol yester
MI T Mi ter POT Potenti ometer
MLD Mol d, Mol ded OA Over-Al l POZI Pozi dri v
Recess
MM Magneti zed
Materi al ,
OD Outsi de
Di ameter
PREC Preci si on
Mi l l i meter OP
AMP
Operati onal PRP Purpl e,
Purpose
MOM Momentary Ampl i er PSTN Pi ston
MTG Mounti ng OPT Opti cal , Opti on, PT Part, Poi nt,
MTLC Metal l i c Opti onal Pul se Ti me
SMA Submi ni ature P PW Pul se Wi dth
MW Mi l l i watt PA Pi coampere,
Power Ampl i er
PF Pi cofarad,
Power
Q
PAN-HD Pan Head Q Fi gure of Meri t
Table 4-2 Abbreviations
Chapter 4 231
Replaceable Parts
Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers
R SPCG Spaci ng U
R Range,Red, SPDT Si ngl e Pol e UCD Mi crocandel a
Resi stance,
Resi stor
SPST Si ngl e Pol e,
Si ngl e Throw
UF Mi crofarad
Ri ght, Ri ng SQ Square UH Mi crohenry
REF Reference SST Stai nl ess Steel UL Mi crol i ter,
RES Resi stance,
Resi stor
STL Steel
Underwri ters
Laboratori es, I nc.
RF Radi o
Frequency
UNHDND
Unhardened
RGD Ri gi d T V
RND Round T Teeth, V
Vari abl e, Vi ol et,
RR Rear Temperature, Vol t, Vol tage
S Thi ckness,
Ti me,
VAC Vacuum,
Vol ts
SAWR
SurfaceAcousti c
Wave Resonator
Typi cal Al ternati ng
Current
SEG Segment PB Lead (Metal ), VAR Vari abl e
SGL Si ngl e TA Ambi ent VDC Vol tsDi rect
Current
SI Si l i con, Temperature, W
Square I nch Tantal um W Watt, Wattage,
SL Sl i de, Sl ow TC
Temperature
Coefci ent
Whi te, Wi de,
Wi dth
SLT Sl ot, Sl otted THD Thread,
Threaded
W/SW Wi th Swi tch
SMA
Type((Threaded
Submi ni ature
A-Connector)
THK Thi ck WW Wi re Wound
TO Package Type W Watt, Wattage,
SMB Submi ni ature Desi gnati on X
B Type (Sl i p-on
TPG Tappi ng X By (Used wi th
Connector)
TR-HD Truss Head Di mensi ons),
SMC Submi ni ature TRMR Tri mmer Reactance
SEG Segment TRN Turn, Turns Y
C-Type
(Threaded
TRSN Torsi on YI G Ytri um-I ron-
Garnet
SMB Submi ni ature
(Connector)
Z
ZNR Zener
Table 4-2 Abbreviations
232 Chapter 4
Replaceable Parts
Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers
Manufacturers Code List
Refer to the Manufacturers Code Li st i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum
Analyzer Component Level I nformation.
Table 4-3 Reference Designations, Abbreviations, and Multipliers (4 of 4)
MULTIPLIERS
Abbreviation Prex Multiple Abbreviation Prex Multiple
T tera
10
12
m mi l l i
10
3
G gi ga
10
9
mi cro
10
6
M mega
10
6
n nano
10
9
k ki l o
10
3
p pi co
10
12
da deka 10 f femto
10
15
d deci
10
1
a atto
10
18
c centi
10
2
Chapter 4 233
Replaceable Parts
Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers
Table 4-4 Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designator
HP Part
Number
Qty Description Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
ACCESSORIES SUPPLIED
1810-0118 1 TERMI NATI ON-COAXI AL SMA; 0.5W; 50 16179 2003-6113-02
1250-0780 1 ADAPTER-COAX F-BNC M-N 24931 29JP104-2
HP 10502A 1 50 COAX CABLE WI TH BNC MALE 28480 HP 10502A
8710-1755 3 WRENCH-HEX KEY 55719 AWML4
OPTION 908
5062-0800 1 RACK KI T WI TH FLANGES
(I ncl udes Parts Li sted Bel ow)
5001-8739 2 PANEL-DRESS 28480 5001-8739
5001-8740 2 PANEL-SUB 28480 5001-8740
5001-8742 2 SUPPORT-REAR 28480 5001-8742
5021-5807 2 FRAME-FRONT 28480 5021-5807
5021-5808 2 FRAME-REAR 28480 5021-5808
5021-5836 5 CORNER-STRUT 28480 5021-5836
0510-1148 10 RETAI NER-PUSH-ON KB-TO-SHFT EXT 11591 669
0515-0886 16 SCREW-MACH M3 0.5 6MM-LG PAN-HD 28480 0515-0886
0515-0887 8 SCREW-MACH M3.5 0.6 6MM-LG PAN-HD 28480 0515-0887
0515-0889 12 SCREW-MACH M3.5 0.6 6MM-LG 28480 0515-0889
0515-1241 8 SCREW-MACH M5 0.8 12 MM-LG PAN-HD 28480 0515-1241
0515-1331 22 SCREW-METRI C SPECI ALTY M4 0.7 THD; 7MM 28480 0515-1331
5061-9679 2 MOUNT FLANGE 28480 5061-9679
0515-1114 6 SCREW-MACH M4 0.7 10MM-LG PAN-HD 28480 0515-1114
8710-1755 WRENCH-HEX KEY 55719 AWML4
5958-6573 2 ASSEMBLY I NSTRUCTI ONS 28480 5958-6573
OPTION 909
5062-1900 1 RACK KI T WI TH FLANGES AND HANDLES
(I ncl udes Parts Li sted Bel ow)
5001-8739 PANEL-DRESS 28480 5001-8739
5001-8740 PANEL-SUB 28480 5001-8740
5001-8742 SUPPORT-REAR 28480 5001-8742
5021-5807 FRAME-FRONT 28480 5021-5807
5021-5808 FRAME-REAR 28480 5021-5808
5021-5836 CORNER-STRUT 28480 5021-5836
0510-1148 RETAI NER- PUSH-ON KB-TO-SHFT EXT 11591 669
0515-0886 SCREW-MACH M3 0.5 6MM-LG PAN-HD 28480 0515-0886
0515-0887 SCREW-MACH M3.5 0.6 6MM-LG PAN-HD 28480 0515-0887
0515-0889 SCREW-MACH M3.5 0.6 6MM-LG 28480 0515-0889
0515-1241 SCREW-MACH M5 0.8 12MM-LG PAN-HD 28480 0515-1241
0515-1331 SCREW-METRI C SPECI ALTY M4 0.7 THD; 7MM 28480 0515-1331
5061-9501 2 FRONT HANDLE ASS'Y 28480 5061-9501
5061-9685 2 MOUNT FLANGE 28480 5061-9685
234 Chapter 4
Replaceable Parts
Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers
0515-1106 6 SCREW-MACH M4 0.7 16MM-LG PAN-HD 28480 0515-1106
8710-1755 WRENCH-HEX KEY 55719 AWML4
5958-6573 ASSEMBLY I NSTRUCTI ONS 28480 5958-6573
RACK SLIDE KIT
1494-0060 1 SLI DE-CHAS 25-I N-LG 21.84-I N-TRVL 01561 C858-2
(I ncl udes Parts Li sted Bel ow. Sl i des cannot be
ordered separatel y.)
0515-0949 4 SCREW-MACH M5 0.8 14MM-LG PAN-HD 28480 0515-0949
0515-1013 9 SCREW-MACH M4 0.7 12MM-LG 28480 0515-1013
0515-0909 4 SCREW-MACH M4 0.7 12MM-LG PAN-HD 28480 0515-0909
0535-0080 8 NUT-CHANNEL M4 0.7 3.5MM-THK 10.3MM-WD 28480 0535-0080
MAJ OR ASSEMBLIES
A1 FRONT FRAME ASSEMBLY
(not avai l abl e as a el d repl acement)
(The A1 assembl y i ncl udes the front frame, front facepl ate, front panel keys, and
other hardware. Refer to Fi gures 4-5 and 4-8 for i ndi vi dual part numbers.)
A1A1
(8560EC)
08563-60162 1 BD AY-KEYBOARD 28480 08563-60162
A1A1(8560E) 08562-60140 1 BD AY-KEYBOARD 28480 08562-60140
A1A1W1 5062-8259 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, RI BBON, KEYBOARD 28480 5062-8259
(A1A1J1 to A3J602)
A1A2 0960-0745 1 RPG ASSEMBLY (I ncl udes Cabl e) 28480 0960-0745
A1A2 0960-0745 1 RPG ASSEMBLY (I ncl udes Cabl e) 28480 0960-0745
A1W1 8120-8153 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY PROBE POWER/LED 28480 8120-8153
A2 (8560EC) 08563-60160 1 CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY 28480 08563-60160
A2 (8560E) 08563-60032 1 CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY* 28480 08563-60032
A3 08563-60021 1 I NTERFACE ASSEMBLY 28480 08563-60021
A3 08563-60033 1 I NTERFACE ASSEMBLY (Opti on 007) 28480 08563-60033
A4 08563-60050 1 LOG AMPLI FI ER/CAL OSC. ASSY. 28480 08563-60050
A5 08563-60023 1 I F FI LTER ASSEMBLY 28480 08563-60023
A6 08563-60020 1 POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY* 28480 08563-60020
(Does not i ncl ude A6A1)
A6A1 5062-7089 1 HI GH VOLTAGE ASSEMBLY 28480 5062-7089
A7 5086-7744 1 FI RST LO DI STRI BUTI ON AMPL 28480 5086-7744
A8 5086-7748 1 LOW BAND MI XER 28480 5086-7748
(seri al prex <3632A)
A8 5086-7982 1 LOW BAND MI XER 28480 5086-7982
(seri al prex 3632A)
* These board assembl i es are part of the rebui l t board exchange program. To order
a rebui l t board, use the same number as that of the new board wi th the excepti on
of the 7th di gi t whi ch shoul d be a 9. Exampl e: New board number i s 08562-60094.
Table 4-4 Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designator
HP Part
Number
Qty Description Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
Chapter 4 235
Replaceable Parts
Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers
Therefore, the rebui l t board number wi l l be 08562-69094.
MAJ OR ASSEMBLIES (Cont.)
A9 5086-7822 1 PORT ATTEN, 22 GHz 28480 5086-7822
5086-6822 1 REBUI LT A9, EXCHANGE REQUI RED 28480 5086-6822
A10 5086-7879 1 BUI LT-I N TRACKI NG GENERATOR 28480 5086-7879
5086-6879 REBUI LT A10, EXCHANGE REQUI RED 28480 5086-6879
A11 5086-7906 1 PORTABLE LVLD YTO 28480 5086-7906
A13 5086-7812 1 SECOND CONVERTER 28480 5086-7812
A14 08560-60059 1 FREQUENCY CONTROL ASSEMBLY 28480 08560-60059
A15 08563-60043 1 Opti on 103, wi thout SI G I D 28480 08563-60043
A15 08563-60044 1 Non-Opti on 103, wi thout SI G I D 28480 08563-60044
A15 08563-60045 1 Opti on 103, wi th SI G I D 28480 08563-60045
A15 08563-60046 1 Non-Opti on 103, wi thout SI G I D 28480 08563-60046
A15U100 5086-7806 1 SAMPLER 28480 5086-7806
A16 08563-60030 1 FAST ADC ASSEMBLY (Opti on 007) 28480 08563-60030
A17 (8560EC) 08562-60166 1 LCD DRI VER 28480 08562-60166
A17A1
(8560EC)
0950-3644 1 LCD I NVERTER BOARD 28480 0950-3644
A17 (8560E) 08563-60101 1 CRT ASSEMBLY 28480 08563-60101
A18 (8560EC) 08563-60170 1 LCD ASSEMBLY-I ncl udes LCD, LCD MOUNT, LCD
GLASS, and two BACKLI GHTS
28480 08563-60170
A18DS1 and
A18DS2
2090-0380 1 Repl aceabl e LCD Backl i ght Cartri dge (part of
LCD ASSEMBLY)
28480 2090-0380
A18 (8560E) 1 CRT ASSEMBLY (Order by I ndi vi dual Parts)
A18MP
(8560E)
5062-7095 1 CRTWI RI NG ASSEM. (I ncl udes Shi el d A18L1, and
A18W1)
28480 5062-7095
A18MP2
(8560E)
5041-3987 1 SPACER, CRT 28480 5041-3987
A18V1
(8560E)
2090-0225 1 TUBE, CRT 6.7 I N 28480 2090-0225
A18W1
(8560E)
CABLE ASSEMBLY, TWO WI RE, TRACE ALI GN
(P/O A18MP1, A17J5 to A18L1)
A19 08562-60042 1 HP-I B ASSEMBLY 28480 08562-60042
A19W1 5061-9031 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, RI BBON, HP-I B 28480 5061-9031
(A2J5 to Rear Panel J2)
A20 5062-7755 1 BATTERY ASSY (I ncl udes W6) 28480 5062-7755
A21

5063-0245 1 OCXO CABLE ASSEMBLY, 10.0 MHz 28480 5063-0245


B1 5061-9036 1 FAN ASSEMBLY (I ncl udes Wi re) 28480 5083-9036
BT1 1420-0341 1 BATTERY 3.0 V 1.2 A-HR LI THI UM 08709 BR 213 A 55P
POLYCARBON MONOFLORI DE
F1 2110-0709 1 THI ONYL FUSE 5A 250V NTD FE I EC 16428 GDA-5
(230 VAC Operati on)
Table 4-4 Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designator
HP Part
Number
Qty Description Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
236 Chapter 4
Replaceable Parts
Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers

Not present i n Opti on 103.


F1 2110-0756 1 FUSE 5A 125V NTD UL 28480 2110-0756
(115 VAC Operati on)
FL1 0955-0703 1 LOW PASS FI LTER, 2.9 GHz 28480 0955-0703
FL2 0955-0519 1 LOW PASS FI LTER, 4.4 GHz 28480 0955-0519
FL3 NOT ASSI GNED
LS1 9160-0282 1 LOUDSPEAKER 2.5 I N SQ (Part of W5) 28480 9160-0282
CHASSIS MECHANICAL PARTS
(See Fi gures 4-1 through 4-9 for a
compl ete l i sti ng of mechani cal
chassi s parts.)
ASSEMBLY SHIELDS
A3 Assembl y 5021-6723 1 PEAK DETECTOR (TOP) 28480 5021-6723
5021-6724 1 PEAK DETECTOR (BOTTOM) 28480 5021-6724
0515-2080 2 SCREW M2.5 14L 28480 0515-2080
0515-1486 10 SCREW M2.5 9.5L 28480 0515-1486
0905-0375 12 0-RI NG .070I D 28480 0905-0375
2190-0583 12 WSHR LK M2.5I D 28480 2190-0583
A4 Assembl y 5063-0222 1 AMP 1 (BOTTOM) 28480 5063-0222
5063-0221 1 AMP 1 (TOP) 28480 5063-0221
5063-0219 1 AMP 2 (TOP) 28480 5063-0219
5063-0220 1 AMP 2 (BOTTOM) 28480 5063-0220
0515-1486 4 SCREW SMM 2.5 10 PNTROX 28480 0515- 1486
0515-2080 23 SCREW M2.5 14L 28480 0515-2080
2190-0583 23 WSHR LK M2.5I D 28480 2190-0583
0905-0375 23 0-RI NG .070I D 28480 0905-0375
A5 Assembl y 5021-6729 1 I F 1 (TOP) 28480 5021-6729
5021-6730 1 I F 1 (BOTTOM) 28480 5021-6730
5021-6731 1 I F 2 (TOP) 28480 5021-6731
5021-6732 1 I F 2 (BOTTOM) 28480 5021-6732
0515-2081 16 SCREW 5MM 2.5 16 PNPDS 28480 0515-2081
0905-0375 16 0-RI NG .070I D 28480 0905-0375
2190-0583 16 WSHR LK M2.5I D 28480 2190-0583
A14 Assembl y 5063-0209 1 FC (TOP) 28480 5063-0209
5063-0210 1 FC (BOTTOM) 28480 5063-0210
0515-0951 13 SCREW 5MM 2.5 16 PNPDS 28480 0515-0951
0905-0375 13 0-RI NG .070I D 28480 0905-0375
2190-0583 13 WSHR LK M2.5I D 28480 2190-0583
A15 Assembl y 5021-6735 1 REF (TOP) 28480 5021-6735
5021-6736 1 REF (BOTTOM) 28480 5021-6736
5022-0047 1 SYNTHZR (TOP) 28480 5022-0047
Table 4-4 Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designator
HP Part
Number
Qty Description Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
Chapter 4 237
Replaceable Parts
Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers
5022-0046 1 SYNTHZR (BOTTOM) 28480 5022-0046
5021-6739 1 SI GPATH (TOP) 28480 5021-6739
5021-6740 1 SI GPATH (BOTTOM) 28480 5021-6740
5002-0631 1 BRACE, RF BD 28480 5002-0631
0515-2081 36 SCREW 5MM 2.5 16 PNPDS 28480 0515-2081
0905-0375 36 0-RI NG .070I D 28480 0905-0375
2190-0583 36 WSHR LK M2.5 I D 28480 2190-0583
0515-0367 2 SCREW 2.5M X 8MM LG TORX 28480 0515- 0367
CABLE ASSEMBLIES
W1 8120-5682 1 POWER CABLE, RI BBON 28480 8120-5682
W2 5061-9025 1 CONTROL CABLE, RI BBON 28480 5061-9025
W3 5062-0728 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY LI NE SWI TCH 28480 5062-0728
W4 5061-9033 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, RI BBON, OPTI ON 28480 5061-9033
MODULE (A2J6 to Rear Panel J3)
W5 5062-6471 1 VOLUME CONTROL ASSEMBLY 28480 5062-6471
(I ncl udes W55)
W6 5062-0767 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, BATTERY 28480 5062-0767
(A2J9 to Rear Panel Battery Hol der)
W7 8120-5697 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, RI BBON (A2J3 to A17J1) 28480 8120-5697
W7 8120-6172 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, RI BBON 28480 8120-6172
Opti on 007 (A2J3 to A17J1, A16J1 and A16J2)
W8 5061-9030 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, DI SPLAY POWER 28480 5061-9030
(A6J4 to A17J2)
W9 5062-6482 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, CRT, YOKE 28480 5062-6482
(A17J3 and J7 to A18V1)
W10 5062-0742 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, RI BBON, A11 YTO DRI VE 28480 5062-0742
(A14J3 to A11J1)
W11 08562-60064 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, RI BBON, A9 ATTEN. 28480 08562-60064
DRI VE (A14J6 to A9)
W12 8120-5681 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, A7 LODA DRI VE 28480 08562-60064
(seri al prex <3632A)
W12 08560-60081 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, A7 LODA AND 28480 08562-60064
A8 MI XER DRI VE (seri al prex 3632A)
W13 5062-0743 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, RI BBON, A13 2ND CONV 28480 5062-0743
DRI VE (A14J12 to A13) (Part of Cabl e)
Assembl y-Mi croci rcui t, 08562-60045)
W14 08560-60002 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, RI BBON, A10 CONTROL 28480 08560-60002
SI GNAL (A14J13 to A10J1)
W15 NOT ASSI GNED
W16 08560-60001 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, A10 ALC EXT (Opti on 002) 28480 08560-60001
(Rear Panel J11 to A10)
W18 5062-0721 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 97, LO SWEEP 28480 5062-0721
Table 4-4 Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designator
HP Part
Number
Qty Description Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
238 Chapter 4
Replaceable Parts
Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers
0.5 V/GHz (A14J7 to Rear Panel J8)
CABLE ASSEMBLIES (Cont.)
W19 5062-0723 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 83, OPT 001 28480 5062-0723
2ND I F OUT (A15J803 to Rear Panel J10)
W20 5062-0717 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 6, 0 SPAN VI DEO 28480 5062-0717
(A3J103 to A2J4) (Non-Opti on 007)
W20 5063-0281 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 6, 0 SPAN VI DEO 28480 5063-0281
(A3J103 to A16J4) Opti on 007
W22 5062-0709 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 0, 10 MHz FREQ. 28480 5062-0709
COUNT (A15J302 to A2J8)
(Rear Panel J5 to A3J600)
W24* 5062-0720 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX, 5 VI DEO OUT 28480 5062-0720
(A3J102 to Rear Panel J4)
W25 5062-0718 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 4, BLANKI NG 28480 5062-0718
OUT (A3J601 to Rear Panel J6)
W27 5062-0714 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, FI LTER 10.7 MHz 28480 5062-0714
(A5J5 to A4J3)
W29 5062-0711 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 7, 10.7 I F 28480 5062-0711
(A15J601 to A5J3)
W31 5062-0722 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 8, REF I N/OUT 28480 5062-0722
(A15J301 to Rear Panel J9)
W32 5062-0705 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 87, SAMPLER I F 28480 5062-0705
(A15J101 to A14J501)
W33 5062-0706 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 81, 2ND LO 28480 5062-0706
DRI VE (A15J701 to A13J4)
W34 8120-5446 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 0, 1ST LO SAMP. 28480 8120-5446
(A7J4 to A15A2J1)
W35 5062-0710 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 92, I NT 2ND I F 28480 5062-0710
(A13J2 to A15J801)
W36 5062-0725 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 86, EXT 2ND I F 28480 5062-0725
(Front Panel J3 to A15J802)
W37 5062-0707 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 85, 10 MHz REF 1 28480 5062-0707
(Front Panel J3 to A15J802)
W38 08560-20005 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY and SEMI -RI GI D, 1st LO I N 28480 08560-20002
(A15J303 to A14J301)
(A11J2 to A7J1)
W39 08560-20068 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, SEMI -RI GI D, 1ST MI XER 28480 08560-20006
OUT (A7J2 to A8J3) (seri al prex 3632A)
W40 5062-0724 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 89, CAL OUT 28480 5062-0724
(A15J501 to Front Panel J5)
W41 5021-8635 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, SEMI -RI GI D, RF I NPUT 28480 5021-8635
(Front panel J1 to A9J1)
Table 4-4 Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designator
HP Part
Number
Qty Description Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
Chapter 4 239
Replaceable Parts
Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers
*Not present i n Opti on 327.
CABLE ASSEMBLIES (Cont.)
W43 08560-20001 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, SEMI -RI GI D, A10 LO I N 28480 08560-20001
(A10 to A7J3) (Opti on 002)
W44 5022-1125 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, SEMI -RI GI D 28480 5022-1125
(A9 to FL1J1)
W45 5022-1123 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, SEMI -RI GI D 28480 5022-1123
(FL1J2 to A8J1) (seri al prex <3632A)
W45 5022-2826 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, SEMI -RI GI D 28480 5022-1123
(FL1J2 to AT1) (seri al prex 3632A and <3804A)
W46 08560-20002 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, SEMI -RI GI D, A10 LO OUT 28480 08560-20002
(A10 to Front Panel J4) (Opti on 002)
W47 08560-20003 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, SEMI -RI GI D, A10 RF OUT 28480 08560-20003
(A10 to Front Panel J6) (Opti on 002)
W48 08560-60003 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 80, 28480 08560-60003
A10 600 MHz (A15J702 to A10) Opti on 002
(A21 to A15J305)
W50

5063-0245 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, OCXO 28480 5063-0245


(A21 to A15J306)
W51 5062-6478 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 84, 10 MHz REF2 28480 5062-6478
(A15J304 to A4J7)
W52 5062-6477 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 9, 10.7 MHz CAL SI G 28480 5062-6477
(A5J4 to A4J8)
W53 5062-6476 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 1, FREQ COUNTER 28480 5062-6476
(A2J7 to A4J5)
W54 5062-6475 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 2, VI DEO 28480 5062-6475
(A3J101 to A4J4)
W55 5062-6471 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, AUDI O 28480 5062-6471
(A4J6 to LSI J1 and Rear Panel J1)
W56 5022-0049 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, SEMI -RI GI D 28480 5022-0049
(A8J2 to FL2J1) (seri al prex <3632A)
W56 5022-2827 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, SEMI -RI GI D 28480 5022-0049
(A8J2 to FL2J1) (seri al prex 3632A)
W57 5022-0050 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, SEMI -RI GI D 28480 5022-0050
(FL2J2 to A13J1)
W58 5062-0722 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 8, ALT SWEEP 28480 5062-0722
OUT (A14J20 to Rear Panel J11) (Opti on 005)
W59 5063-0282 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY, COAX 839, FAST ADC 28480 5063-0282
CLOCK (A2J15 to A16J3) (Opti on 007)
W60 8120-6919 1 DI SPLAY CABLE, RI BBON (A2J8 to A17J1) 28480 8120-6919
Not present i n Opti on 002 or Opti on 327.
Table 4-4 Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designator
HP Part
Number
Qty Description Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
240 Chapter 4
Replaceable Parts
Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers

Not present i n Opti on 103.


W61 8120-5026 1 CABLE, COAX (A2J9to A17J7) 28480 8120-5026
W62 8120-8482 1 CABLE, RI BBON (A17J6 to A17A1) 28480 8120-8482
W63 8120-8409 1 CABLE, RI BBON (A17J5 to A18) 28480 8120-8409
W64 8121-0062 1 VGA CABLE ASSEMBLY (A17J4 to J1 on rear
panel )
28480 8121-0062
Table 4-4 Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designator
HP Part
Number
Qty Description Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
Chapter 4 241
Replaceable Parts
Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers
Figure 4-1 Parts Identication, Assembly Mounting
Table 4-5 Assembly Mounting (see Figure 4-1)
Item HP Part
Number
Qty Description Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
1 0515-1349 11 SCREW-MACH M3 X 30MM-LG PAN-HD TORX 28480 0515-1349
2 0515-2310 3 SCREW-MACH M3 X 60MM-LG PAN-HD TORX 28480 0515-2310
3 0515-2308 2 SCREW-MACH M3 X 100MM-LG PAN-HD TORX 28480 0515-2308
4 0515-2332 10 SCREW-MACH M3 X 6MM-LG PAN-HD TORX 28480 0515-2332
4 0515-0664 2 SCREW-MACH M3 X 12MM-LG PAN-HD TORX 28480 0515-0664
242 Chapter 4
Replaceable Parts
Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers
Table 4-6 Parts List, Cover Assembly (See Figure 4-2) 8560E and 8560EC
Item HP Part
Number
Qty Description Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
1 5041-8911 1 BAI L HANDLE 28480 5041-8911
2 5041-8912 2 TRI M CAP 28480 5041-8912
3 0515-1114 4 SCREW MACH M4 X 10MM-LG PAN-HD 28480 0515-1114
4 1460-2164 2 SPRI NG-CPRSN .845 I N-OD 1.25-1N-OA-LG 28480 1460-2164
5 5021-6343 2 RI NG GEAR 28480 5021-6343
6 5021-6344 2 SOCKET GEAR 28480 5021-6344
7 5021-8667 2 HANDLE PLATE 28480 5021-8667
8 5001-8728 2 BACKUP PLATE 28480 5001-8728
9 0515-1367 6 SCREW MACH M4 X 8MM-LG 90DEG-FLH-HD 28480 0515-1367
10 0515-1133 2 SCREW-MACH M5 X 16MM-LG 28480 0515-1133
11 5001-8800 1 COVER 28480 5001-8800
12 5041-7238 1 MOI STURE DEFLECTOR-LF 28480 5041-7238
13 5041-3989 1 MOI STURE DEFLECTOR-RT 28480 5041-3989
14 5041-8913 2 SI DE TRI M 28480 5041-8913
15 0515-1114 2 SCREW-MACH M4 X 10MM-LG PAN-HD 28480 0515-1114
16 5041-8907 2 REAR FOOT 28480 5041-8907
17 0900-0024 4 O-RI NG .145-1N-XSECT-DI A SI L 51633 A5568-007
18 2190-0587 4 WASHER-LK HLCL 5.0 MM 5.1-MM-I D 28480 2190-0587
19 0515-1218 4 SCREW-SKT-HD-CAP M5 X 40MM-LG 28480 0515-1218
20 08562-80028 1 I NSULATOR 292 X 355 MM .51 THK 28480 08562-80028
Table 4-7 Parts List, Main Chassis 8560EC (see Figure 4-8)
Item HP Part
Number
Qty Description Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
1 0515-2145 4 SCREW-MACH M3 X 8MM-LG PAN-HD TORX 28480 0515-2145
4 0380-2052 2 SPACER 0.937LG 0.166I D 28480 0380-2052
5 5002-1010 1 COVER, A6 POWER SUPPLY (I ncl udes l abel ) 28480 5002-1010
6 0515-2309 3 SCREW-MACH M3 X 0.5 45MM-LG TORX 28480 0515-2309
7 5041-7246 1 BOARD MOUNT 28480 5041-7246
8 0515-0372 2 SCREW-MACH M3 X 8MM-LG PAN-HD TORX 28480 0515-0372
14 5002-1008 1 MAI N DECK 28480 5002-1008
15 5002-1002 1 FRONT END DECK 28480 5002-1002
16 0515-1101 4 SCREW-MACH M4 X 8MM-LG FLH-HD TORX 28480 0515-1101
17 0515-1227 2 SCREW MACH M3 X 6MM-LG FLH-HD TORX 28480 0515-1227
18 5021-7464 2 SI DE FRAME 28480 5021-7464
19 0515-1101 12 SCREW-MACH M4 X 8MM-LG FLH-HD TORX 28480 0515-1101
20 0515-1227 12 SCREW MACH M3 X 6MM-LG FLH-HD TORX 28480 0515-1227
21 0515-1227 8 SCREW MACH M3 X 6MM-LG FLH-HD TORX 28480 0515-1227
22 0515-1227 5 SCREW MACH M3 X 6MM-LG FLH-HD TORX 28480 0515-1227
23 5021-5484 5 MOUNTI NG POST 28480 5021-5484
24 5062-0750 2 HI NGE, 2 BOARD 28480 5062-0750
25 5062-0751 2 HI NGE, 4 BOARD 28480 5062-0751
26 5041-7250 1 CABLE CLAMP 28480 5041-7250
Chapter 4 243
Replaceable Parts
Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers
27 0515-2164 2 SCREW-MACH M3 X 35MM-LG TORX 28480 0515-2164
28 0515-1227 2 SCREW-MACH M3 X 6MM-LG FLH-HD TORX 28480 0515-1227
30 5063-0269 1 SHI ELD WALL, TOP 28480 5063-0269
31 5063-0268 1 SHI ELD WALL, BOTTOM 28480 5063-0268
32 0515-0382 2 SCREW 28480 0515-0382
33 0515-0430 2 SCREW-I NVERTER BOARD 28480 0515-0430
34 0515-0372 4 SCREW-DI SPLAY DRI VER 28480 0515-0372
35 0400-0333 4 STANDOFF CUSHI ONS 28480 0400-0333
36 1000-1014 1 LCD GLASS PLATE 28480 1000-1014
37 5041-9632 1 LCD MOUNT 28480 5041-9632
38 5000-8314 1 LCD BACKPLATE 28480 5000-8314
39 5022-3667 1 LCD DRI VER SHI ELD 28480 5022-3667
A17 08562-6016 1 LCD DRI VER BOARD 28480 08562-6016
A17A1 0950-60166 1 I NVERTER BOARD 28480 0950-60166
A18 2090-0379 1 LCD ASSEMBLY- I NCLUDES LCD GLASS, LCD
MOUNT, AND A18DS1 and A18DS2 BACKLI GHT
CABLES
28480 2090-0379
Table 4-8 Parts List, Main Chassis (See Figure 4-3) 8560E
Item HP Part
Number
Qty Description Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
1 0515-2145 4 SCREW-MACH M3 X 8MM-LG PAN-HD TORX 28480 0515-2145
3 0515-1715 3 SCREW-MACH M3 X 35MM-LG PAN-HD TORX 28480 0515-1715
4 0380-2052 2 SPACER .937LG .166I D 28480 0380-2052
5 5002-1010 1 COVER, A6 POWER SUPPLY 28480 5002-1010
5181-8215 1 WARNI NG LABEL (not shown) 28480 5181-8215
08562-80029 1 I NSULATOR 100 X 140 (not shown) 28480 08562-80029
6 0515-2309 3 SCREW-MACH M3 X 0.5 45MM-LG TORX 28480 0515-2309
7 5041-7246 1 BOARD CLI P 28480 5041-7246
8 0515-0372 2 SCREW-MACH M3 X 8MM-LG PAN-HD TORX 28480 0515-0372
9 5041-8961 1 TOP COVER, A17 28480 5041-8961
5041-7248 1 BOTTOM COVER, A17 28480 5041-7248
10 5021-5486 2 CRT MOUNT 28480 5021-5486
11 5001-5870 2 CRT MOUNT STRAP 28480 5001-5870
13 0515-0372 4 SCREW-MACH M3 X 8MM-LG PAN-HD TORX 28480 0515-0372
14 5002-1008 1 MAI N DECK 28480 5002-1008
5002-1009 1 EMI SHI ELD (not shown) 28480 5002-1009
15 5001-8755 1 FRONT END DECK 28480 5001-8755
16 0515-1101 4 SCREW-MACH M4 X 8MM-LG FLH-HD TORX 28480 0515-1101
17 0515-1227 2 SCREW MACH M3 X 6MM-LG FLH-HD TORX 28480 0515-1227
18 5021-7464 2 SI DE FRAME 28480 5021-7464
19 0515-1101 12 SCREW-MACH M4 X 8MM-LG FLH-HD TORX 28480 0515-1101
20 0515-1227 12 SCREW MACH M3 X 6MM-LG FLH-HD TORX 28480 0515-1227
Table 4-7 Parts List, Main Chassis 8560EC (see Figure 4-8)
Item HP Part
Number
Qty Description Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
244 Chapter 4
Replaceable Parts
Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers
21 0515-1227 8 SCREW MACH M3 X 6MM-LG FLH-HD TORX 28480 0515-1227
22 0515-1227 5 SCREW MACH M3 X 6MM-LG FLH-HD TORX 28480 0515-1227
23 5021-5484 5 MOUNTI NG POST 28480 5021-5484
24 5062-0750 2 HI NGE, 2 BOARD 28480 5062-0750
25 5062-0751 2 HI NGE, 4 BOARD 28480 5062-0751
26 5041-7250 1 CABLE CLAMP 28480 5041-7250
27 0515-2164 2 SCREW-MACH M3 X 35MM-LG TORX 28480 0515-2164
28 0515-1227 2 SCREW-MACH M3 X 6MM-LG FLH-HD TORX 28480 0515-1227
29 5181-8214 1 LABEL, ASSEMBLY LOCATI ONS 28480 5181-8214
30 5063-0269 1 SHI ELD WALL, TOP 28480 5063-0269
31 5063-0268 1 SHI ELD WALL, BOTTOM 28480 5063-0268
A18MP1 5062-7095 1 CRT WI RI NG ASSY (I NCLUDES A18L1, A18W1) 28480 5062-7095
A18MP2 5041-3987 1 SPACER, CRT 28480 5041-3987
A18V1 2090-0225 1 TUBE, CRT 28480 2090-0225
A18W1 P/O A18MP1
5181-5046 1 LABEL, CRT ADJUSTMENT 28480 5181-5046
Table 4-8 Parts List, Main Chassis (See Figure 4-3) 8560E
Item HP Part
Number
Qty Description Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
Chapter 4 245
Replaceable Parts
Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers
Table 4-9 Parts List, RF Section 8560E and 8560EC (see Figure 4-4)
Item HP Part
Number
Qty Description Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
1 0515-2332 2 SCREW-MACH M3 X 6MM-LG PAN-HD TORX 28480 0515-2332
2 0515-1032 2 SCREW-MACH M3 X 14MM-LG FLH-HD TORX 28480 0515-1032
3 0515-2332 2 SCREW-MACH M3 X 6MM-LG PAN-HD TORX 28480 0515-2332
4 5021-7467 1 FI LTER CLAMP 28480 5021-7467
6 0515-2332 2 SCREW-MACH M3 X 6MM-LG PAN-HD TORX 28480 0515-2332
7 5002-1008 1 MAI N DECK 28480 5002-1008
8 0515-1227 2 SCREW-MACH M3 X 6MM-LG FLH-HD TORX 28480 0515-1227
9 5001-8755 1 FRONT END DECK 28480 5001-8755
11 0515-1227 3 SCREW-MACH M3 X 6MM-LG FLH-HD TORX 28480 0515-1227
12 2360-0461 4 SCREW-MACH 6-32 .375-I N-LG FLH-HD TORX 28480 2360-0461
13 0515-0372 1 SCREW-MACH M3 X 8MM-LG PAN-HD TORX 28480 0515-0372
14 0515-1250 2 SCREW-MACH M3 X 6MM-LG PAN-HD TORX 28480 0515-1250
15 5001-8731 1 ATTENUATOR BRACKET 28480 5001-8731
18 08560-00002 1 ATTENUATOR BRACKET 28480 08560-00002
19 0515-1250 2 SCREW-MACH M3 X 6MM-LG PAN-HD TORX 28480 0515-1250
20 0515-1227 1 SCREW-MACH M3 X 6MM-LG FLH-HD TORX 28480 0515-1227
22 0515-1227 4 SCREW-MACH M3 X 6MM-LG FLH-HD TORX 28480 0515-1227
23 0515-1410 2 SCREW-MACH M3 X 20MM-LG PAN-HD TORX 28480 0515-1410
Table 4-10 Parts List, Front Frame 8560EC (see Figure 4-9)
Item HP Part
Number
Qty Description Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
1 08560-80037 1 DRESS PANEL OVERLAY 28480 08560-80037
08560-80039 1 DRESS PANEL OVERLAY - OPTI ON 002 28480 08560-80039
2 08560-80039 CONNECTOR DRESS PANEL OVERLAY 08560-80039
4 0370-3069 1 KNOB BASE 1-1/8 JGK .252-I N-I O 28480 0370-3069
(I NCLUDES I TEM 5)
5 3030-0022 2 SCREW-SET 6-32 .125-I N-LG SMALL CUP-PT 00000 DESCRI BE
6 2950-0043 1 NUT-HEX-DBL-CHAM 3/8-32-THD .094-I N-THK 00000 DESCRI BE
7 2190-0016 1 WASHER-LK I NTL T 3/8 I N .377-I N-I D 28480 2190-0016
8 5181-8246 1 FRONT PANEL-DRESS 28480 5181-8246
9 5060-0467 1 PROBE POWER JACK 28480 5060-0467
10 0590-1251 1 NUT-SPCLY 15/32-32-THD .1-I N-THK .562-WD 00000 DESCRI BE
6960-0171 1 PLUG-HOLE (Opt. 327)(not shown) 28480 6960-0171
11 1250-1666 2 ADAPTOR COAX STR F-SMA F-SMA 28480 1250-1666
12 0515-2145 12 SCREW-MACH M3 X 0.5 8MM-LG PAN-HD TX 28480 0515-2145
13 5062-4806 1 BUMPER KI T (I ncl udes 4 bumpers) 28480 5062-4806
15 5021-5483 2 CATCH LATCH 28480 5021-5483
16 0515-0366 4 SCREW-MACH M2.5 X 0.45 6MM-LG PAN-HD TX 28480 0515-0366
17 5022-0199 1 FRONT FRAME 28480 5022-0199
18 8160-0520 1 RFI ROUND STRI P STL MSH/SI L RBR CU/SN 28480 8160-0520
246 Chapter 4
Replaceable Parts
Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers
19 2950-0154 1(2) NUT (use 2 for 002 i nstruments) 28480 2950-0154
20 2190-0016 1 WASHER-LK I NTL T 3/8 I N .377-I N-I D 28480 2190-0016
21 2950-0043 1 NUT-HEX-DBL-CHAM 3/8-32-THD .094-I N-THK 00000 DESCRI BE
22 1250-1811 1 ADAPTER N(f) SMA (f) (Standard) 28480 1250-2191
22 1250-1811 2 ADAPTER N(f) SMA (f) (Opti on 002) 28480 1250-2191
23 5022-3711 1 (2) WASHER (use 2 for 002 i nstruments) 28480 0515-0430
24 5041-9630 RUBBER KEYPAD (I NCLUDES KEYCAPS) 28480 5041-9630
25 1990-1131 1 LED-LAMP LUM-I NT=560UCD I F=20MA-MAX 2M627 LD-101MG
26 5063-3966 1 LI NE SWI TCH CABLE ASSEMBLY 28480 5063-3966
27 0900-0010 1 O-RI NG .101-I N-I D .07-I N-XSECT-DI A NTRL 51633 AS568-005
28 0515-0664 1 SCREW-MACHI NE ASSEMBLYM3 X0.5 12MM-LG 28480 0515-0664
31 0515-1934 7 SCREW-MACH M2.5 X 0.45 6MM-LG PAN-HD TX 28480 0515-1934
(P/O A1W1)
32 2100-4232 1 R-VC 20K 20% LOG 28480 2100-4232
33 3050-0014 2 WASHER-FL .250I D12 28480 3050-0014
34 2190-0067 1 WASHER-LK I NTL .256-I N-I D 28480 2190-0067
35 2950-0072 1 NUT-HEX 1/4-32 THD 28480 2950-0072
36 0370-3079 1 KNOB RND .125 JG 28480 0370-3079
Table 4-11 Parts List, Front Frame 8560E (see Figure 4-5)
Item HP Part
Number
Qty Description Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
1 0515-1622 4 SCREW-SKT-HD-CAP M4 X 0.7 8MM-LG 28480 0515-1622
2 5041-8906 1 CRT BEZEL 28480 5041-8906
3 1000-0897 1 RFI CRT FACEPLATE 28480 1000-0897
4 0370-3069 1 KNOB BASE 1-1/8 JGK .252-I N-I O (I NCLUDES 5) 28480 0370-3069
5 3030-0022 2 SCREW-SET 6-32 .125-I N-LG SMALL CUP-PT 00000 DESCRI BE
6 2950-0043 1 NUT-HEX-DBL-CHAM 3/8-32-THD .094-I N-THK 00000 DESCRI BE
7 2190-0016 1 WASHER-LK I NTL T 3/8 I N .377-I N-I D 28480 2190-0016
8 08560-00011 1 FRONT PANEL-DRESS (Standard) 28480 08560-00011
8 08560-00010 1 FRONT PANEL-DRESS (Opti on 002) 28480 08560-00010
9 5060-0467 1 PROBE POWER JACK 28480 5060-0467
10 0590-1251 1 NUT-SPCLY 15/32-32-THD .1-I N-THK .562-WD 00000 DESCRI BE
6960-0171 1 PLUG-HOLE (Opt. 327)(not shown) 28480 6960-0171
11 1250-1666 2 ADAPTOR COAX STR F-SMA F-SMA 28480 1250-1666
12 0515-2145 12 SCREW-MACH M3 X 0.5 8MM-LG PAN-HD TX 28480 0515-2145
13 5062-4806 1 BUMPER KI T (I ncl udes 4 bumpers) 28480 5062-4806
14 0905-1018 4 O-RI NG .126TD 28480 0905-1018
15 5021-5483 2 CATCH LATCH 28480 5021-5483
16 0515-0366 4 SCREW-MACH M2.5 X 0.45 6MM-LG PAN-HD TX 28480 0515-0366
17 5022-0199 1 FRONT FRAME 28480 5022-0199
18 8160-0520 1 RFI ROUND STRI P STL MSH/SI L RBR CU/SN 28480 8160-0520
Table 4-10 Parts List, Front Frame 8560EC (see Figure 4-9)
Item HP Part
Number
Qty Description Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
Chapter 4 247
Replaceable Parts
Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers
19 0535-0082 2 NVTM W LKWR M4 28480 0535-0082
20 2190-0016 1 WASHER-LK I NTL T 3/8 I N .377-I N-I D 28480 2190-0016
21 2950-0043 1 NUT-HEX-DBL-CHAM 3/8-32-THD .094-I N-THK 00000 DESCRI BE
22 1250-2191 1 ADAPTER N(f) SMA (f) (Standard) 28480 1250-2191
22 1250-2191 2 ADAPTER N(f) SMA (f) (Opti on 002) 28480 1250-2191
23 0515-0430 2 SCREW-MACH M3 X 0.5 8MM-LG PAN-HD TX 28480 0515-0430
24 5041-8985 1 RUBBER KEYPAD (I NCLUDES KEYCAPS) 28480 5041-8985
25 1990-1131 1 LED-LAMP LUM-I NT=560UCD I F=20MA-MAX 2M627 LD-101MG
26 5062-0728 1 LI NE SWI TCH CABLE ASSEMBLY 28480 5062-0728
27 0900-0010 1 O-RI NG .101-I N-I D .07-I N-XSECT-DI A NTRL 51633 AS568-005
28 0515-0664 1 SCREW-MACHI NE ASSEMBLYM3 X0.5 12MM-LG 28480 0515-0664
29 5021-5482 1 SUPPORT CENTER 28480 5021-5482
30 0515-1143 2 SCREW-MACH M4 X 0.7 16MM-LG PAN-HD TX 28480 0515-1143
31 0515-1934 9 SCREW-MACH M2.5 X 0.45 6MM-LG PAN-HD TX 28480 0515-1934
(P/O A1W1)
32 2100-4232 1 R-VC 20K 20% LOG 28480 2100-4232
33 3050-0014 2 WASHER-FL .250I D12 28480 3050-0014
34 2190-0067 1 WASHER-LK I NTL .256-I N-I D 28480 2190-0067
35 2950-0072 1 NUT-HEX 1/4-32 THD 28480 2950-0072
36 0370-3079 1 KNOB RND .125 JG 28480 0370-3079
Table 4-12 Parts List, Rear Frame 8560EC (see Figure 4-10)
Item HP Part
Number
Qty Description Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
1 0515-1946 2 SCREW-MACH M3 6MM-LG FLH-HD TORX 28480 0515-1946
2 5062-7755 1 BATTERY HOLDER (I NCLUDES WI RES) 28480 5062-7755
3 0515-2216 4 SCREW-MACH M4 40MM-LG PAN-HD TORX 28480 0515-2216
4 3160-0309 1 FAN GRI LL 28480 3160-0309
5 0380-0012 4 SPACER-RND .875-I N-I D 28480 0380-0012
6 NOT ASSI GNED
7 6960-0149 1 PLUG-HOLE TR-HD FOR 0.5-D-HOLE STL 05093 6960-0149
8 6960-0023 1 PLUG-HOLE DOME-HD FOR 0.312-D-HOLE STL 04213 D-2730-LC2
9 1250-1753 1 ADAPTOR-COAX STR F-SMA OPT 001 28480 1250-1753
(I NCLUDES WASHER AND NUT)
10 0515-1946 4 SCREW-MACH M3 6MM-LG FLH-HD TORX 28480 0515-1946
11 0515-0684 1 SCREW-MACH M3 6MM-LG PAN-HD TORX 28480 0515-0684
12 2950-0035 5 NUT HEX 15/32THD 28480 2950-0035
13 5062-4838 1 CONNECTOR-TEL 2-CKT .141-SHK-DI A 28480 5062-4838
(I NCLUDES NUT AND JACK) PART OF W5
14 5002-4049 1 REAR PANEL-DRESS 28480 5002-4049
15 0515-2145 4 SCREW-MACH M3 6MMLG PAN-HD TORX 28480 0515-2145
16 8160-0520 1 RFI ROUND STRI P STL SPI RA .150 28480 8160-0520
Table 4-11 Parts List, Front Frame 8560E (see Figure 4-5)
Item HP Part
Number
Qty Description Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
248 Chapter 4
Replaceable Parts
Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers
17 5022-3778 1 REAR FRAME 28480 5022-3778
18 5021-6391 2 SCREW-CONNECTOR HP-I B 28480 5021-6391
19 2200-0225 2 SCREW-MACH 4-40 .25-I N-LG TORX 28480 2200-0225
20 0535-0082 2 NUT M4.0 W/LOCKWR 28480 0535-0082
21 0515-0433 1 SCREW-MACH M4 8MM-LG PAN-HD TORX 28480 0515-0433
22 0535-0023 2 NUT-HEX DBL-CHAM M4 X 0.7 3.2MM-THK 28480 0535-0023
23 8121-0062 1 VGA CONNETOR AND CABLE 28480 8121-0062
B1 5061-9036 1 FAN ASSEMBLY (I NCLUDES WI RE) 28480 5061-9036
BT1 1420-0341 1 BATTERY 3.0V 1.2A-HR LI THI UM POLYCARBON 08709 BR 2/3A SSP
MONOFLOURI DE
Table 4-13 Parts List, Rear Frame 8560E (see Figure 4-7)
Item HP Part
Number
Qty Description Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
1 0515-1946 2 SCREW-MACH M3 6MM-LG FLH-HD TORX 28480 0515-1946
2 5062-7755 1 BATTERY HOLDER (I NCLUDES WI RES) 28480 5062-7755
3 0515-2216 4 SCREW-MACH M4 40MM-LG PAN-HD TORX 28480 0515-2216
4 3160-0309 1 FAN GRI LL 28480 3160-0309
5 0380-0012 4 SPACER-RND .875-I N-I D 28480 0380-0012
6 NOT ASSI GNED
7 6960-0149 1 PLUG-HOLE TR-HD FOR 0.5-D-HOLE STL 05093 6960-0149
8 6960-0023 1 PLUG-HOLE DOME-HD FOR 0.312-D-HOLE STL 04213 D-2730-LC2
9 1250-1753 1 ADAPTOR-COAX STR F-SMA OPT 001 28480 1250-1753
(I NCLUDES WASHER AND NUT)
10 0515-1946 4 SCREW-MACH M3 6MM-LG FLH-HD TORX 28480 0515-1946
11 0515-0684 1 SCREW-MACH M3 6MM-LG PAN-HD TORX 28480 0515-0684
12 2950-0035 5 NUT HEX 15/32THD 28480 2950-0035
13 5062-4838 1 CONNECTOR-TEL 2-CKT .141-SHK-DI A 28480 5062-4838
(I NCLUDES NUT AND JACK) PART OF W5
14 5002-1012 1 REAR PANEL-DRESS 28480 5002-1012
15 0515-2145 4 SCREW-MACH M3 6MMLG PAN-HD TORX 28480 0515-2145
16 8160-0520 1 RFI ROUND STRI P STL SPI RA .150 28480 8160-0520
17 5021-5479 1 REAR FRAME 28480 5021-5479
18 5021-6391 2 SCREW-CONNECTOR HP-I B 28480 5021-6391
19 2200-0225 2 SCREW-MACH 4-40 .25-I N-LG TORX 28480 2200-0225
20 0535-0082 2 NUT M4.0 W/LOCKWR 28480 0535-0082
21 0515-0433 1 SCREW-MACH M4 8MM-LG PAN-HD TORX 28480 0515-0433
22 0535-0023 2 NUT-HEX DBL-CHAM M4 X 0.7 3.2MM-THK 28480 0535-0023
B1 5061-9036 1 FAN ASSEMBLY (I NCLUDES WI RE) 28480 5061-9036
BT1 1420-0341 1 BATTERY 3.0V 1.2A-HR LI THI UM POLYCARBON 08709 BR 2/3A SSP
MONOFLOURI DE
Table 4-12 Parts List, Rear Frame 8560EC (see Figure 4-10)
Item HP Part
Number
Qty Description Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
250 Chapter 4
Replaceable Parts
Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers
252 Chapter 4
Replaceable Parts
Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers
254 Chapter 4
Replaceable Parts
Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers
256 Chapter 4
Replaceable Parts
Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers
258 Chapter 4
Replaceable Parts
Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers
260 Chapter 4
Replaceable Parts
Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers
262 Chapter 4
Replaceable Parts
Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers
264 Chapter 4
Replaceable Parts
Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers
266 Chapter 4
Replaceable Parts
Firmware-Dependent Part Numbers
267
5 Major Assembly and Cable
Locations
268 Chapter 5
Major Assembly and Cable Locations
Introduction
Introduction
Thi s chapter i denti es i nstrument cabl es and assembl i es, and contai ns
the fol l owi ng gures:
Fi gure 5-1. Hi nged Assembl i es........................................... page 270
Fi gure 5-2. Top Vi ew (A2 and A3 Unfol ded) EC-seri es ..... page 271
Fi gure 5-3. Top Vi ew (A2, A3, A4, A5 Unfol ded) EC-seri espage 272
Fi gure 5-4. Top Vi ew (A2 Unfol ded) E-seri es ................... page 273
Fi gure 5-5. Top Vi ew (A2 and A3 Unfol ded) E-seri es........ page 274
Fi gure 5-6. Top Vi ew (A2, A3, A4,A5 Unfol ded) E-seri es.. page 275
Fi gure 5-7 Bottom Vi ew (A15 Unfol ded)............................ page 276
Fi gure 5-8. Bottom Vi ew (A15 and A14 Unfol ded)............ page 277
Fi gure 5-9. Front End ......................................................... page 278
Fi gure 5-10. Rear Vi ew - EC-seri es .................................. page 279
Fi gure 5-11. Rear Vi ew - E-seri es...................................... page 279
NOTE Di agrams that i l l ustrate features common to E-seri es and EC-seri es
i nstruments are shown wi th E-seri es i nstruments. Where there are
di fferences between E-seri es and EC-seri es features, separate di agrams
are provi ded for E-seri es and for EC-seri es i nstruments.
Use the l i st bel ow to determi ne the gure(s) i l l ustrati ng the desi red
assembl y or cabl e.
Assemblies ............................................................................. Figure
A1 Front Frame ............................................................................... 5-8
A1A1 Keyboard ............................................................................... 5-8
A2 Control l er ............................................................................ 5-3, 5-4
A3 I nterface .............................................................................. 5-1, 5-4
A4 Log Ampl i er/Cal Osci l l ator .............................................. 5-1, 5-5
A5 I F Fi l ter ............................................................................... 5-1, 5-6
A6 Power Suppl y ............................................................................. 5-6
A6A1 Hi gh Vol tage Modul e ............................................................ 5-6
A7 LO Di stri buti on Ampl i er ......................................................... 5-7
A8 Low Band Mi xer ........................................................................ 5-7
A9 RF Attenuator ............................................................................ 5-7
A10 Tracki ng Generator (Opti on 002) ........................................... 5-7
A11 YTO .......................................................................................... 5-7
A12 ............................................................................... (Not Assi gned)
A13 Second Converter ..................................................................... 5-7
A14 Frequency Control ............................................................ 5-1, 5-8
A15 RF ............................................................................... 5-1, 5-7, 5-8
A16 Fast ADC (Opti on 007) ..................................................... 5-4, 5-6
A17 LCD Dri ver ....................................................................................
A17 CRT Dri ver ............................................................................... 5-6
A18 LCD Assembl y ...............................................................................
A18 CRT Assembl y ......................................................................... 5-6
Chapter 5 269
Major Assembly and Cable Locations
Introduction
A19 HP-I B ....................................................................................... 5-6
A20 Battery Assembl y .................................................................. 5-10
A21 OCXO ....................................................................................... 5-6
B1 Fan ............................................................................................ 5-10
BT1 Battery ................................................................................... 5-10
FL1 Low Pass Fi l ter ........................................................................ 5-7
FL2 Low Pass Fi l ter ........................................................................ 5-7
FL3 Li ne Fi l ter .............................................................................. 5-10
LS1 Speaker .................................................................................... 5-6
Cables ...................................................................................... Figure
A1A1W1 Keyboard Cabl e ........................................................ 5-4, 5-6
A3W1 I nterface Cabl e ..................................................................... 5-4
A19W1 HP-I B Cabl e ................................................................ 5-4, 5-6
W1 Power Cabl e ........................................................ 5-4, 5-5, 5-6, 5-7
W2 Control Cabl e ...................................................... 5-4, 5-5, 5-6, 5-7
W3 Li ne Swi tch Cabl e .............................................................. 5-6, 5-9
W4 Opti on Modul e Cabl e ................................................................ 5-6
W5 ...........................................................................(NOT ASSI GNED)
W6 Battery Cabl e ............................................................................ 5-4
W7 Di spl ay/FADC Cabl e ................................................................. 5-4
W8 Di spl ay Power Cabl e ................................................................. 5-6
W9 CRT Yoke Cabl e ........................................................................ 5-6
W10 YTO Dri ve Cabl e .............................................................. 5-8, 5-9
W11 Attenuator Dri ve Cabl e .......................................................... 5-6
W12 A7 LODA Dri ve Cabl e ..................................................... 5-8, 5-9
W13 A13 Second Conv. Dri ve Cabl e ............................................... 5-8
W14 A10 Control Si gnal Cabl e (Opti on 002) .......................... 5-8, 5-9
W15 .........................................................................(NOT ASSI GNED)
W16 A10 ALC EXT Cabl e (Opti on 002) ...................................5-8, 5-9
W17 .........................................................................(NOT ASSI GNED)
W18 LO Sweep (coax 97) ................................................................. 5-8
W19 Second I F Out (coax 83) (Opti on 001) ............................... 5-75-7
W20 Zero-Span Vi deo (coax 6) ........................................................ 5-4
W21 .........................................................................(NOT ASSI GNED)
W22 10 MHz Freq. Count (coax 0) .......................................... 5-4, 5-7
W23 Ext. Tri gger I n (coax 93) ........................................................ 5-4
W24 Vi deo Out (coax 5) (Del eted i n Opt. 327) ............................... 5-4
W25 Bl anki ng Out (coax 4) ............................................................. 5-4
W26 .........................................................................(NOT ASSI GNED)
W27 Fi l ter 10.7 MHz .......................................................... 5-55-5, 5-6
W28 .........................................................................(NOT ASSI GNED)
W29 10.7 I F (coax 7) ................................................................. 5-6, 5-7
W30 .........................................................................(NOT ASSI GNED)
W31 Ref. I n/Out (coax 8) ................................................................. 5-7
W32 Sampl er I F (coax 87) ........................................................ 5-7, 5-8
W33 Second LO Dri ve (coax 81) .............................................. 5-7, 5-9
W34 Fi rst LO Samp. (coax 0) ........................................... 5-7, 5-8, 5-9
W35 I nt Second I F (coax 92) .................................................... 5-7, 5-9
270 Chapter 5
Major Assembly and Cable Locations
Introduction
W36 Ext Second I F (coax 86) (Del eted i n Opt. 002 and Opt. 327) 5-7
W37 10 MHz Ref 1 (coax 85) .................................................... 5-7, 5-8
W38 Semi ri gi d coax, A11J2 to A7J1 .............................................. 5-9
W39 Semi ri gi d coax, A7J2 to A8J3 ................................................ 5-9
W40 Cal . Out (coax 89) ................................................................... 5-7
W41 Semi ri gi d coax, front panel J1 to A9J1 ................................. 5-9
W42 Semi ri gi d coax, A7J3 to front panel J4 (Standard) .............. 5-9
W43 Semi ri gi d coax, A7J3 to A10J4 (Opti on 002) ........................ 5-9
W44 Semi ri gi d coax, A9J2 to FL1J1 .............................................. 5-9
W45 Semi ri gi d coax, FL1J2 to A8J1 .............................................. 5-9
W46 Semi ri gi d coax, A10J3 to front panel J4 (Opti on 002) .......... 5-9
W47 Semi ri gi d coax, A10J2 to front panel J6 (Opti on 002) .......... 5-9
W48 A10 600 MHz (coax 80) (Opti on 002) ..................................... 5-7
W49 OCXO 10 MHz output (coax 82) ............................................ 5-7
W50 OCXO power (part of A21 OCXO assembl y) .......................... 5-7
W51 10 MHz I N (coax 84) ........................................................ 5-5, 5-7
W52 CAL Osci l l ator Out (coax 9) ................................................... 5-6
W53 Frequency Counter (coax 1) ............................................ 5-4, 5-5
W54 Vi deo (coax 2) ................................................................... 5-4, 5-5
W55 Audi o Out ......................................................................... 5-5, 5-6
W56 Semi ri gi d coax, A8J2 to FL2J1 .............................................. 5-9
W57 Semi ri gi d coax, FL2J2 to A13J1 ............................................ 5-9
W58 ALT SWEEP OUT (coax 8) ..................................................... 5-8
W59 FADC cl ock (coax 839) (8560E wi th Opti on 007)................... 5-4
W60 ri bbon, A2J8 to A17J1 ....................................................... 5-2,5-3
W61 coax, A2J9 to A17 J7 ..........................................................5-2,5-3
W62 ri bbon, A17J6 to A17A1 .....................................................5-2,5-3
W63 ri bbon, A17J5 to A18 ..........................................................5-2,5-3
W64, A17J4 to J1 on the rear panel (VGA port)........................5-2,5-3
Figure 5-1 Hinged Assemblies
NOTE Fi gure 5-1 shows an 8560 E-seri es i nstrument. The 8560 EC-seri es
i nstrument i s i denti cal except the A2 board i s smal l er.
Chapter 5 271
Major Assembly and Cable Locations
Introduction
Figure 5-2 Top View (A2 and A3 Unfolded) EC-Series
272 Chapter 5
Major Assembly and Cable Locations
Introduction
Figure 5-3 Top View (A2, A3, A4, and A5 Unfolded) EC-Series
Chapter 5 273
Major Assembly and Cable Locations
Introduction
Figure 5-4 Top View (A2 Unfolded) E-Series
274 Chapter 5
Major Assembly and Cable Locations
Introduction
Figure 5-5 Top View (A2 and A3 Unfolded) E-Series
Chapter 5 275
Major Assembly and Cable Locations
Introduction
Figure 5-6 Top View (A2, A3, A4, and A5 Unfolded) E-Series
276 Chapter 5
Major Assembly and Cable Locations
Introduction
Figure 5-7 Bottom View (A15 Unfolded)
Chapter 5 277
Major Assembly and Cable Locations
Introduction
Figure 5-8 Bottom View (A15 and A14 Unfolded)
278 Chapter 5
Major Assembly and Cable Locations
Introduction
Figure 5-9 Front End
Chapter 5 279
Major Assembly and Cable Locations
Introduction
Figure 5-10 Rear View EC-Series
Figure 5-11 Rear View E-Series
280 Chapter 5
Major Assembly and Cable Locations
Introduction
281
6 General Troubleshooting
282 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
Introduction
Introduction
Thi s chapter provi des i nformati on needed to troubl eshoot the
i nstrument to one of the si x major functi onal secti ons. Chapters 7
through 12 cover troubl eshooti ng for each of these secti ons. Before
troubl eshooti ng, read the rest of thi s i ntroducti on. To begi n
troubl eshooti ng, refer to "Troubl eshooti ng to a Functi onal Secti on" i n
thi s chapter.
Troubl eshooti ng to a Functi onal Secti on ........................... page 290
Usi ng the TAM.................................................................... page 292
Error Messages.................................................................... page 298
System Anal yzer Programmi ng Errors (100 to 150)......... page 300
Bl ock Di agram Descri pti on................................................. page 329
NOTE When a part or assembl y i s repl aced, adjustment of the affected
ci rcui try i s usual l y requi red. Refer to Chapter 2, "Adjustment
Procedures."
WARNING Troubleshooting and repair of this instrument with the cover
removed exposes high voltage points that may, if contacted,
cause personal injury. Maintenance and repair of this
instrument should, therefore, be performed only by a skilled
person who knows the hazards involved. Where maintenance
can be performed without power applied, the power should be
removed. When any repair is completed, be sure that all safety
featuresareintact andfunctioningandthat all necessary parts
are connected to their grounds.
Assembly Level Text
To l ocate troubl eshooti ng i nformati on for an i ndi vi dual assembl y, refer
to Tabl e 6-1 on page 291.
Block Diagrams
I nstrument-l evel bl ock di agrams are l ocated at the end of thi s chapter.
Power l evel s and vol tages shown on bl ock di agrams are provi ded as a
troubl eshooti ng ai d onl y. They shoul d not be used for maki ng
i nstrument adjustments.
Assembly Test Points
The spectrum anal yzer board assembl i es contai n four types of test
poi nts: post, pad, extended component l ead, and test jack. Fi gure 6-1 on
page 284 i l l ustrates each type of test poi nt as seen on both bl ock
Chapter 6 283
General Troubleshooting
Introduction
di agrams and ci rcui t boards. The name of the test poi nt wi l l be etched
i nto the ci rcui t board next to the test poi nt (for exampl e, TP2). I n some
i nstances, the test poi nt wi l l be i denti ed on the board by i ts number
onl y.
Pad
Each pad test poi nt uses a square pad and a round pad etched i nto the
board assembl y. The square pad i s the poi nt bei ng measured. The round
pad suppl i es a groundi ng poi nt for the test probe.
Test J ack
The test jack i s a col l ecti on of test poi nts l ocated on a 16-pi n jack. There
are over 26 test jacks used throughout the spectrum anal yzer. The HP
85629B Test and Adjustment Modul e uses the spectrum anal yzer test
jacks duri ng di agnosti c and adjustment procedures. The pi ns on the
test jack may be manual l y probed, provi ded cauti on i s used to prevent
acci dental shorti ng between adjacent pi ns.
Fi gure 6-1 on page 284 i l l ustrates the pi n congurati on for the test
jack. Li ne names are the same for al l test jacks. The fol l owi ng
mnemoni cs are used: MS "measured si gnal ," TA "test and adjustment
Modul e address l i ne," and OS "output si gnal ." Test jack test poi nts are
i denti ed on bl ock di agrams by both the jack/pi n number and l i ne
name.
Ribbon Cables
Ri bbon cabl es are used extensi vel y i n the spectrum anal yzer. The
fol l owi ng ve cabl es use di fferent pi n numberi ng methods on the jacks
(si gnal names remai n the same but the pi n numbers vary):
W1, Power Cabl e
W2, Control Cabl e
W4, Opti on Cabl e
A3W1, I nterface Cabl e
A19W1, HPI B Cabl e
Fi gure 6-2 on page 285 and Fi gure 6-3 on page 286 i l l ustrate the pi n
congurati ons of these ve cabl es. Cabl es W1 and W2 use two pi n
numberi ng methods on thei r many jacks. These methods are i denti ed
i n the i nterconnect and bl ock di agrams by the l etters "A" and "B" next
to the jack desi gnator (for exampl e, J1(A)). Board assembl y jacks
connected to W1 wi l l al ways be l abel ed J1. Board assembl y jacks
connected to W2 wi l l al ways be l abel ed J2.
Fi gure 6-4 on page 287 shows the pi n congurati on for the 80 pi n, W60
cabl e that i s found on EC-seri es i nstruments. The numberi ng of the
pi ns i s i denti cal at J8 on the A2 Control l er board and at J1 on the A17
Di spl ay Dri ver board.
284 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
Introduction
Figure 6-1 Assembly Test Points
Chapter 6 285
General Troubleshooting
Introduction
Figure 6-2 Ribbon Cable Connections (1 of 3)
286 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
Introduction
Figure 6-3 Ribbon Cable Connections (2 of 3)
Chapter 6 287
General Troubleshooting
Introduction
Figure 6-4 Ribbon Cable Connections (3 of 3) - EC-Series Only
Figure 6-4 shows A2J 8 connections on 8560 EC-Series
Instruments. Lines 25 and 42 44 supply +5V to the two LCD
backlights. Lines 1 and 41 supply +5V to the A17A1 Inverter
board. Lines 1 6 and 41 44 are identical on A17J 1.
288 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
Introduction
Service Cal Data Softkey Menus
The jumper on jack A2J12 i s shi pped from the factory i n the WR PROT
(wri te protect) posi ti on (jumper on pi ns 2 and 3). When the jumper i s
set to the WR ENA (wri te enabl e) posi ti on (jumper on pi ns 1 and 2), an
addi ti onal servi ce cal data menu i s di spl ayed under CAL. Fi gure 6-5 on
page 289 i l l ustrates those areas of the servi ce cal data menu that are
avai l abl e.
Chapter 6 289
General Troubleshooting
Introduction
Figure 6-5 Service Cal Data Menu
290 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting to a Functional Section
Troubleshooting to a Functional Section
1. Refer to Tabl e 6-1 on page 291 for the l ocati on of troubl eshooti ng
i nformati on.
2. I f the HP 85629B Test and Adjustment Modul e (TAM) i s avai l abl e,
refer to "Usi ng the TAM" i n thi s chapter for 8560E i nstruments.
3. I f error messages are di spl ayed, refer to "Error Messages" i n thi s
chapter. You wi l l nd both error descri pti ons and troubl eshooti ng
i nformati on.
4. I f a si gnal cannot be seen, and no errors messages are di spl ayed, the
faul t i s probabl y i n the RF secti on. Refer to Chapter 11, "RF
Secti on."
5. Bl ank di spl ays resul t from probl ems caused by ei ther the control l er
or di spl ay/power-suppl y secti ons. Because error messages 700 to 755
caused by the control l er secti on cannot be seen on a bl ank di spl ay,
use the fol l owi ng BASI C program to read these errors over HP-I B. I f
the program returns an error code of 0, there are no errors.
10 DIM Err$[128]
20 OUTPUT 718;"ERR?;"
30 ENTER 718; Err$
40 PRINT Err$
50 END
a. I f there i s no response over HP-I B, set an osci l l oscope to the
fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Sweep ti me ........................................................... ms/di v
Ampl i tude scal e ................................................... 1 V/di v
b. The si gnal s at A2J202 pi n 3 and pi n 14 shoul d measure about 4
Vp-p. I f the l evel s are i ncorrect, refer to Chapter 9 and
troubl eshoot the A2 control l er assembl y.
c. Set the osci l l oscope to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Sweep ti me ......................................................... 1 ms/di v
Ampl i tude scal e ....................................................2 V/di v
d. The si gnal at A2J202 pi n 15 shoul d consi st of TTL pul ses. I f the
si gnal i s at a constant l evel (hi gh or l ow), troubl eshoot the A2
control l er assembl y.
6. Di spl ay probl ems on 8560E i nstruments, such as i ntensi ty or
di storti on, are caused by ei ther the control l er or di spl ay/power
suppl y secti ons. Refer to Chapter 9 or Chapter 12.
Chapter 6 291
General Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting to a Functional Section
Table 6-1 Location of Assembly Troubleshooting Text
Instrument Assembly Location of Troubleshooting Text
A1A1 keyboard Chapter 7. ADC/I nterface Secti on
A1A2 RPG Chapter 7. ADC/I nterface Secti on
A2 control l er Chapter 9. Control l er Secti on
A3 i nterface Chapter 7. ADC/I nterface Secti on
Chapter 8. I F Secti on
A4 l og ampl i er/cal osci l l ator Chapter 8. I F Secti on
A5 I F Chapter 8. I F Secti on
A6 power suppl y Chapter 12. Di spl ay/Power Suppl y
Secti on
A6A1 HV modul e Chapter 12. Di spl ay/Power Suppl y
Secti on
A7 1ST LO di st. ampl . Chapter 10. Synthesi zer Secti on
A8 l ow band mi xer Chapter 11. RF Secti on
A9 i nput attenuator Chapter 11. RF Secti on
A10 tracki ng generator Chapter 11. RF Secti on
A11 YTO Chapter 10. Synthesi zer Secti on
A13 2nd converter Chapter 11. RF Secti on
A14 frequency control Chapter 10. Synthesi zer Secti on
Chapter 11. RF Secti on
A15 RF assembl y Chapter 10. Synthesi zer Secti on
Chapter 11. RF Secti on
A17 LCD dri ver Chapter 12. Di spl ay/Power Suppl y
Secti on
A17 CRT dri ver Chapter 12. Di spl ay/Power Suppl y
Secti on
A18 LCD Chapter 12. Di spl ay/Power Suppl y
Secti on
A18 CRT Chapter 12. Di spl ay/Power Suppl y
Secti on
A19 HP-I B Chapter 9. Control l er Secti on
FL1,2 Chapter 11. RF Secti on
292 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
Using the TAM
Using the TAM
When attached to the spectrum anal yzer rear panel , the HP 85629B
test and adjustment modul e (TAM) provi des di agnosti c functi ons for
supporti ng the HP 8560E/EC. Because the TAM i s connected di rectl y to
the i nternal data and address buses of the spectrum anal yzer, i t
control s the spectrum anal yzer hardware di rectl y through rmware
control . I t woul d be i mpossi bl e to control the hardware to the same
extent ei ther from the spectrum anal yzer front panel or over the HP-I B.
Revi si on C (date code 890704), or l ater, of the HP 85629B TAM
rmware supports the HP 8560E/EC spectrum anal yzer.
The TAM measures vol tages at key poi nts i n the ci rcui try and ags a
fai l ure whenever the vol tage fal l s outsi de the l i mi ts. The TAM l ocates
the fai l ure to a smal l functi onal area whi ch can be exami ned manual l y.
Remember the fol l owi ng when usi ng the TAM:
Be sure the spectrum anal yzer power i s turned off when i nstal l i ng or
removi ng the TAM.
Use the LP softkey (found i n al l menus) for useful i nformati on.
Pressi ng MODULE wi l l return you to the mai n menu of the TAM.
The TAM acts as the acti ve control l er on the HP-I B bus. No other
acti ve control l er shoul d be connected to the bus.
Diagnostic Functions
The TAM provi des the three di agnosti c functi ons l i sted bel ow.
(Addi ti onal menu sel ecti ons support the TAM i tsel f.) Refer to the
fol l owi ng for a descri pti on of each functi on.
Diagnostic
1. Automati c Faul t I sol ati on
2. Manual Probe Troubl eshooti ng (requires cover removal)
3. Cal Osci l l ator Troubl eshooti ng Mode (requires cover removal)
NOTE The HP 85629B test and adjustment modul es wi th rmware revi si on A
or B wi l l not properl y execute automati c faul t i sol ati on on the HP
8560E/EC spectrum anal yzer.
TAM Requirements
For the TAM to functi on properl y, certai n parts of the spectrum
anal yzer must be operati ng properl y. These i ncl ude the CPU, parts of
the program ROM and program RAM, the keyboard and keyboard
Chapter 6 293
General Troubleshooting
Using the TAM
i nterface, and the di spl ay.
Even though the TAM communi cates to the operator vi a the di spl ay,
some di spl ay probl ems can be troubl eshot usi ng the TAM. Thi s i s
possi bl e by usi ng the Print Page softkey. Even i f the di spl ay i s dead, Print
Page i s sti l l acti ve. Refer to Chapter 12 for i nstructi ons on usi ng the
TAM when the di spl ay i s not functi oni ng.
Test Connectors
The TAM uses a bui l t-i n dc vol tmeter and DAC to measure vol tages on
any one of the "test connectors" l ocated throughout the HP 8560E/EC.
NOTE HP 85629B test and adjustment modul es wi th rmware revi si ons A or
B cannot make val i d measurements on test connector A14J16 on
standard HP 8560E/EC spectrum anal yzers, nor test connector A14J17
on HP 8560E/EC Opti on 002 spectrum anal yzers.
Revision Connectors
One test connector on each assembl y i s reserved as a "revi si on
connector." The TAM uses the revi si on connector to i denti fy the desi gn
revi si on of the assembl y. A "revi si on vol tage"(pl aced onto one measured
si gnal l i ne, MSL, pi n) i ndi cates desi gn changes.
The TAM must be pl ugged i nto the revi si on connector rst to determi ne
whi ch tests to use for the assembl y. I f the revi si on connector has not
been probed, a message wi l l appear i nstructi ng you to connect the probe
to the revi si on connector and press TEST. You can then probe the rest of
the assembl y connectors.
NOTE I f the revi si on of the PC board i s newer than the TAM, a message wi l l
be di spl ayed stati ng that the revi si on code for thi s board i s not known
by thi s modul e. The choi ces presented are to use the test for the l atest
known revi si on board, measure onl y vol tages, or exi t. I n general , most
poi nts wi l l not change from one board revi si on to another, so usi ng the
most current tests i s sti l l very useful . However, any fai l ure shoul d be
veri ed usi ng the manual troubl eshooti ng procedures before doi ng a
repai r.
Inconsistent Results
Many of the si gnal s measured by the TAM are di gi tal l y control l ed. I f
i nconsi stent resul ts are obtai ned, or i f fai l ures appear i n unrel ated
areas, the di gi tal control may be at faul t. Refer to the manual
troubl eshooti ng procedures for those assembl i es to i sol ate those
fai l ures.
294 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
Using the TAM
Erroneous Results
I f the TAM manual probe troubl eshooti ng seems to be gi vi ng erroneous
resul ts, i ts performance can be checked by pl aci ng the probe on the
TAM test connector (A2J11) l ocated on the A2 control l er assembl y and
executi ng the manual probe di agnosti cs. I f ei ther of the tests fai l , the
TAM i s mal functi oni ng and shoul d be servi ced.
Blank Display (8560E only)
I t i s possi bl e to use TAM manual probe troubl eshooti ng wi thout a
di spl ay, i f an HP-I B pri nter i s avai l abl e. Refer to Chapter 12 for more
i nformati on.
Automatic Fault Isolation
Automati c faul t i sol ati on (AFI ) i s desi gned to i sol ate most faul ts to one
or two assembl i es. AFI can be run wi th the spectrum anal yzer cover i n
pl ace, and requi res onl y the CAL OUTPUT si gnal as a sti mul us. The
enti re procedure takes l ess than 2 mi nutes to compl ete i f no fai l ures are
found.
AFI performs checks of ve functi onal areas i n a pre-dened sequence.
The sequence mi ni mi zes the chance of maki ng fal se assumpti ons. The
TAM checks the spectrum anal yzer "from the i nsi de out." For exampl e,
the ADC i s checked before the I F i s checked. Thi s ensures that i f no
si gnal i s detected through the I F, the faul t i s i n the I F secti on and not a
faul ty ADC. (The ADC measures the vi deo si gnal from the I F secti on.)
The sequence of checks i s as fol l ows:
1. Control l er check
2. ADC/i nterface check
3. I F/LOG check
4. LO control check
5. RF l ow band check
Display/Power Supply
AFI cannot check the di spl ay/power-suppl y secti on because thi s secti on
powers the TAM and provi des the di spl ay of AFI resul ts.
Controller Check (8560E only)
The TAM performs a checksum of al l ROMs, RAMs, and the EEROM.
The CPU i s al so checked, si nce parts of the CPU coul d be nonfuncti onal
whi l e the TAM sti l l operates. These checks are very si mi l ar to those
done by the spectrum anal yzer at power-on.
Chapter 6 295
General Troubleshooting
Using the TAM
ADC/Interface Check
The keyboard i nterface and strobe-sel ect ci rcui try must be functi oni ng
correctl y, si nce these are requi red to operate the TAM. The TAM checks
the ADC by attempti ng to measure three si gnal s from three di fferent
l ocati ons. Thi s ensures that an open or short i n one cabl e wi l l not hi de
the fact that the ADC i s operati ng sati sfactori l y.
The anal og bus (W2 control cabl e) i s checked by sendi ng data out on the
data l i nes and readi ng the data back. I f thi s check fai l s, di sconnect one
board at a ti me and rerun AFI to determi ne i f an assembl y causes the
probl em. I f the faul t remai ns wi th al l assembl i es di sconnected from W2,
troubl eshoot W2 or the A3 i nterface assembl y.
IF/LOG Check
The TAM uses the cal osci l l ator on the A4 assembl y as the sti mul us for
checki ng the I F secti on. I f the si gnal i s undetected, the TAM repeats
the test wi th a si gnal ori gi nati ng from the RF secti on. Presence of thi s
si gnal through the I F i ndi cates a faul ty cal osci l l ator.
LO Control Check
The LO control check veri es test that al l phase-l ock l oops (PLLs) i n
the synthesi zer secti on l ock. (Some osci l l ators are checked to ensure
that they wi l l l ock outsi de thei r normal operati ng frequency range.) The
TAM al so performs an operati onal check on several DACs i n the
synthesi zer secti on.
RF Check
The TAM tests the operati on of A8 l ow band mi xer, A9 i nput attenuator,
second I F di stri buti on, and most of the A13 second converter.
AFI al so checks the atness compensati on ampl i ers (part of the A15
RF assembl y), ensuri ng that thei r gai n can be adjusted over a certai n
range.
I f no si gnal i s detected through the RF secti on, AFI wi l l substi tute the
298 MHz SI G I D osci l l ator (Opti on 008 onl y) for the 3rd LO whi l e
si mul taneousl y decreasi ng the 1st LO frequency by 2 MHz. I f a si gnal
can now be detected, troubl eshoot the 3rd LO dri ver ampl i er on the
A15 RF assembl y.
296 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
Using the TAM
Manual Probe Troubleshooting
Manual probe troubl eshooti ng probes the i nstrument test connectors to
perform the fol l owi ng types of measurements:
Ampl i er and osci l l ator dc current draw by moni tori ng the vol tage
across a resi stor of known val ue.
Osci l l ator tune vol tages ensuri ng proper operati on of
phase/frequency detectors and l oop i ntegrators.
Stati c bi as vol tages.
NOTE Unl i ke E-seri es i nstruments, EC-seri es i nstruments do not have a TAM
connector on the A2 Control l er board
I f probi ng a connector for a check yi el ds a "FAI L" i ndi cati on, sel ect the
desi red check usi ng ei ther the knob or step keys and press More Info. A
descri pti on of the functi on checked (wi th measured and expected
vol tages/currents) i s di spl ayed wi th a l i st of addi ti onal areas to check.
These areas can someti mes be checked by l ooki ng at another TAM
connector, but usual l y requi re manual troubl eshooti ng techni ques to
i sol ate the probl em further. I f an HP-I B pri nter i s connected, press Print
Page to provi de a hard copy of the currentl y di spl ayed screen (the
softkey l abel s wi l l not be pri nted).
Each test connector has fteen pi ns (one pi n i s mi ssi ng to act as a key).
The pi ns contai n ei ght measured si gnal l i nes (measured si gnal l i nes
denoted as MS1 through MS8), one i nput si gnal l i ne (OS1), one ground,
and ve pi ns encodi ng a ve-bi t connector address.
The TAM needs to probe the revi si on connector of each assembl y once;
subsequent readi ngs are not necessary. I t i s possi bl e, for exampl e, to
probe the A5 I F assembl y, then the A4 l og ampl i er assembl y, and then
return to A5 wi thout havi ng to re-probe the A5 revi si on connector.
However, the revi si on connector must be re-probed i f the spectrum
anal yzer i s returned to normal operati on and then back to TAM control .
(Thi s i s al so true i f the spectrum anal yzer i s turned off.)
Cal Oscillator Troubleshooting Mode
The cal osci l l ator troubl eshooti ng mode enabl es front-panel control of
the cal osci l l ator on the A4 assembl y. The cal osci l l ator can be
xed-tuned to three di fferent frequenci es. The cal osci l l ator may al so be
set to one of four sweep wi dths, centered at 10.7 MHz.
Fi xed-tuned setti ngs:
11.5 MHz
10.7 MHz
9.9 MHz
Chapter 6 297
General Troubleshooting
Using the TAM
Sweep-wi dth setti ngs:
20 kHz
10 kHz
4 kHz
2 kHz
The cal osci l l ator troubl eshooti ng mode sends the cal osci l l ator output
(35 dBm) to the A5 I F assembl y. On the A5 I F assembl y al l crystal
l ter pol es are shorted, al l LC pol es enabl ed, and the 15 dB attenuator
di sabl ed. Si gnal s from the RF secti on are attenuated as much as
possi bl e.
298 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
Error Messages
Error Messages
The spectrum anal yzer di spl ays error messages i n the l ower ri ght-hand
corner of the di spl ay. A number, or error code, i s associ ated wi th each
error message. These error messages al ert the user to errors i n
spectrum anal yzer functi on or use.
Mul ti pl e error messages may exi st si mul taneousl y. Refer to "Vi ewi ng
Mul ti pl e Messages" bel ow.
The fol l owi ng i nformati on can be found i n thi s secti on:
Vi ewi ng Mul ti pl e Messages
Error Message El i mi nati on
System Anal yzer Programmi ng Errors (100 to 150)
ADC Errors (200 to 299)
LO and RF Hardware/Fi rmware Fai l ures (300 to 399)
YTO Loop Errors (300 to 301)
Rol l er PLL Errors (302 to 316)
YTO Loop Errors (317 to 318)
Rol l er Osci l l ator Errors (321 to 329)
YTO Loop Error (331)
600 MHz Reference Loop (333)
YTO Level i ng Loop (334)
Sampl i ng Osci l l ator (335)
Span Accuracy Cal i brati on Errors (356 to 361)
10 MHz Reference (336)
Fracti onal N PLL (337)
YTO Loop Settl i ng Errors (351 to 354)
Sampl i ng Osci l l ator (355)
Automati c I F Errors (400 to 599)
System Errors (600 to 651)
Di gi tal and Checksum Errors (700 to 799)
EEROM Checksum Errors (700 to 704)
Program ROM Checksum Errors (705 to 710)
RAM Check Errors (711 to 716)
Mi croprocessor Error (717)
Battery Probl em (718)
Model Number Error (719)
System Errors (750 to 759)
Fast ADC Error (760)
Opti on Modul e Errors (800 to 899)
User Generated Errors (900 to 999)
Chapter 6 299
General Troubleshooting
Error Messages
Viewing Multiple Messages
Al though mul ti pl e errors may exi st, the spectrum anal yzer di spl ays
onl y one error message at a ti me. To vi ew any addi ti onal messages, do
the fol l owi ng:
1. Press RECALL and MORE 1 OF 2.
2. Press RECALL ERRORS. An error message i s di spl ayed i n the acti ve
functi on bl ock.
3. Use the up and down step keys to scrol l through any other error
messages whi ch mi ght exi st, maki ng note of each error code.
Error Message Elimination
When an error message i s di spl ayed, al ways perform the fol l owi ng
procedure:
1. Press SAVE and SAVE STATE.
2. Store the current state i n a conveni ent STATE regi ster. (I t may be
necessary to set SAVELOCK to OFF.)
3. Press CAL and REALIGN LO &IF. Wai t for the sequence to ni sh.
4. Press RECALL and RECALL STATE.
5. Recal l the previ ousl y stored STATE.
6. I f an error message i s sti l l di spl ayed, refer to the l i st of error
messages bel ow for an expl anati on of the error messages.
300 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
System Analyzer Programming Errors (100 to 150)
System Analyzer Programming Errors
(100 to 150)
Refer to the HP 8560 E-Series and EC-Series Spectrum Analyzers
User's Guide for i nformati on on programmi ng the spectrum anal yzer.
100 NO PWRON Power-on state i s i nval i d; defaul t state i s l oaded. Press
SAVE, PWR ON STATE to cl ear error message.
101 NO STATE State to be RECALLed not val i d or not SAVEd.
106 ABORTED! Current operati on i s aborted; HP-I B parser reset.
107 HELLO ?? No HP-I B l i stener i s present.
108 TIME OUT Anal yzer ti med out when acti ng as control l er.
109 CtrlFail Anal yzer unabl e to take control of the bus.
110 NOT CTRL Anal yzer i s not system control l er.
111 # ARGMTS Command does not have enough arguments.
112 ??CMD?? Unrecogni zed command.
113 FREQ NO! Command cannot have frequency uni ts.
114 TIME NO! Command cannot have ti me uni ts.
115 AMPL NO! Command cannot have ampl i tude uni ts.
116 ?UNITS?? Unrecogni zabl e uni ts.
117 NOP NUM Command cannot have numeri c uni ts.
118 NOP EP Enabl e parameter cannot be used.
119 NOP UPDN UP/DN are not val i d arguments for thi s command.
120 NOP ONOF ON/OFF are not val i d arguments for thi s command.
121 NOP ARG AUTO/MAN are not val i d arguments for thi s command.
122 NOP TRC Trace regi sters are not val i d for thi s command.
123 NOP ABLK A-bl ock format not val i d here.
124 NOP IBLK I -bl ock format not val i d here.
125 NOP STRNG Stri ngs are not val i d for thi s command.
126 NO ? Thi s command cannot be queri ed.
127 BAD DTMD Not a val i d peak detector mode.
128 PK WHAT? Not a val i d peak search parameter.
129 PRE TERM Premature A-bl ock termi nati on.
Chapter 6 301
General Troubleshooting
System Analyzer Programming Errors (100 to 150)
130 BAD TDF Arguments are onl y for TDF command.
131 ?? AM/FM AM/FM are not val i d arguments for thi s command.
132 !FAV/RMP FAV/RAMP are not val i d arguments for thi s command.
133 !INT/EXT I NT/EXT are not val i d arguments for thi s command.
134 ??? ZERO ZERO i s not a val i d argument for thi s command.
135 ??? CURR CURR i s not a val i d argument for thi s command.
136 ??? FULL FULL i s not a val i d argument for thi s command.
137 ??? LAST LAST i s not a val i d argument for thi s command.
138 !GRT/DSP GRT/DSP are not val i d arguments for thi s command.
139 PLOTONLY Argument can onl y be used wi th PLOT command.
140 ?? PWRON PWRON i s not a val i d argument for thi s command.
141 BAD ARG Argument can onl y be used wi th FDI AG command.
142 BAD ARG Query expected for FDI AG command.
143 NO PRESL No presel ector hardware to use command wi th.
144 COUPL?? I nval i d COUPLI NG argument, expected AC or DC.
ADC Errors (200 to 299)
These errors are di rectl y rel ated to the ADC/i nterface
secti on. Suspect a faul ty A2 control l er, A3 i nterface
assembl y or, i n 8560 E-seri es anal yzers, the A16 fast
ADC (FADC) assembl y (Opti on 007).
Errors 202 through 207 appl y onl y to EC-seri es
anal yzers and E-seri es anal yzers wi th fast ADC
(Opti on 007).
200 SYSTEM ADC dri ver/ADC hardware/rmware i nteracti on; check
for other errors.
201 SYSTEM ADC control l er/ADC hardware/rmware i nteracti on;
check for other errors.
202 FADC CAL Bi nary search fai l ed duri ng FADC l i near offset
cal i brati on.
Thi s error appl i es onl y to EC-seri es anal yzers and
E-seri es anal yzers wi th fast ADC (Opti on 007)
203 FADC CAL Bi nary search fai l ed duri ng FADC l og offset
cal i brati on.
Thi s error appl i es onl y to EC-seri es anal yzers and
E-seri es anal yzers wi th fast ADC (Opti on 007)
302 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
System Analyzer Programming Errors (100 to 150)
204 FADC CAL Bi nary search fai l ed duri ng FADC l og expand offset
cal i brati on.
Thi s error appl i es onl y to EC-seri es anal yzers and
E-seri es anal yzers wi th fast ADC (Opti on 007).
205 FADC CAL Sl ope deri vati on fai l ed duri ng FADC l i near offset
cal i brati on.
Thi s error appl i es onl y to EC-seri es anal yzers and
E-seri es anal yzers wi th fast ADC (Opti on 007).
206 FADC CAL Sl ope deri vati on fai l ed duri ng FADC l og offset
cal i brati on.
Thi s error appl i es onl y to EC-seri es anal yzers and
E-seri es anal yzers wi th fast ADC (Opti on 007)
207 FADC CAL Sl ope deri vati on fai l ed duri ng FADC l og expand offset
cal i brati on.
Thi s error appl i es onl y to EC-seri es anal yzers and
E-seri es anal yzers wi th fast ADC (Opti on 007)
250 OUTOF RG ADC i nput i s outsi de of ADC range.
251 NO IRQ Mi croprocessor not recei vi ng i nterrupt from ADC.
LO and RF Hardware/Firmware Failures (300 to 399)
YTO Loop Errors (300 to 301)
These errors often requi re troubl eshooti ng the A14
frequency control assembl y (synthesi zer secti on) or the
ADC ci rcui ts.
300 YTO UNLK YTO(rst LO) phase l ocked l oop i s unl ocked. The ADC
measures YTO_ERR vol tage under phase-l ock
condi ti on.
301 YTO UNLK YTO (rst LO) phase l ocked l oop i s unl ocked. Same as
ERR 300 except ERR 301 i s set i f the vol tage i s outsi de
certai n l i mi ts.
Roller PLL Errors (302 to 316)
These errors i ndi cate a faul ty rol l er osci l l ator on the
A14 frequency control assembl y. Refer to Chapter 10.
The A3 i nterface ADC ci rcui ts may al so be faul ty. I f
error codes 333 and 499 are present, suspect the 10
MHz reference, the A21 OCXO, or on the A15 assembl y
(Opti on 103). These errors do not appl y to the hardware
i n an HP 8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es spectrum anal yzer.
I f they occur i n an HP 8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es
spectrum anal yzer, suspect a probl em wi th the model
Chapter 6 303
General Troubleshooting
System Analyzer Programming Errors (100 to 150)
number i denti cati on i n the spectrum anal yzer
rmware.
302 OFF UNLK Offset rol l er osci l l ator PLL i s unl ocked. May i ndi cate
l oss of 10 MHz reference. The 10 MHz reference shoul d
measure greater than 7 dBm at A15J303. The ADC
measures OFFSENSE at the begi nni ng of each sweep
and, i f the vol tage i s outsi de certai n l i mi ts, the offset
osci l l ator pretuned DAC i s adjusted to bri ng
OFFSENSE wi thi n the proper range. ERR 302 i s set i f
thi s cannot be accompl i shed. Thi s error i s not
appl i cabl e to HP 8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es spectrum
anal yzers. I f i t occurs i n an HP 8560 E-Seri es spectrum
anal yzer, suspect a probl em wi th the model number
i denti cati on i n the spectrum anal yzer rmware.
303 XFR UNLK Transfer rol l er osci l l ator PLL i s unl ocked. May
i ndi cate l oss of 10 MHz reference. The 10 MHz
reference shoul d measure greater than 7 dBm at
A15J303. The ADC measures XFRSENSE at the
begi nni ng of each sweep and, i f the vol tage i s outsi de
certai n l i mi ts, the transfer osci l l ator pretuned DAC i s
adjusted to bri ng XFRSENSE wi thi n the proper range.
ERR 303 i s set i f thi s cannot be accompl i shed. Thi s
error i s not appl i cabl e to HP 8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es
spectrum anal yzers. I f i t occurs i n an HP 8560 E-seri es
or EC-seri es spectrum anal yzer, suspect a probl em wi th
the model number i denti cati on i n the spectrum
anal yzer rmware.
304 ROL UNLK Mai n rol l er osci l l ator PLL i s unl ocked. May i ndi cate
l oss of 10 MHz reference. The 10 MHz reference shoul d
measure greater than 7 dBm at A15J303. The ADC
measures MAI NSENSE at the begi nni ng of each sweep
and, i f the vol tage i s outsi de certai n l i mi ts, the mai n
rol l er pretune DAC i s adjusted to bri ng OFFSENSE
wi thi n the proper range. ERR 304 i s set i f thi s cannot
be accompl i shed. Thi s error i s not appl i cabl e to HP
8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es spectrum anal yzers. I f i t
occurs i n an HP 8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es spectrum
anal yzer, suspect a probl em wi th the model number
i denti cati on i n the spectrum anal yzer rmware.
305 FREQ ACC Unabl e to adjust MAI NSENSE cl ose to 0 vol ts usi ng
the coarse adjust DAC. The coarse adjust and ne
adjust DAC are used together to set MAI NSENSE to 0
vol ts wi th the l oop opened. ERR 305 i s set i f the coarse
adjust DAC cannot bri ng MAI NSENSE cl ose enough to
0 vol ts for the ne adjust DAC to bri ng MAI NSENSE to
exactl y 0 vol ts. Thi s error i s not appl i cabl e to HP 8560
E-seri es or EC-seri es spectrum anal yzers. I f i t occurs i n
304 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
System Analyzer Programming Errors (100 to 150)
an HP 8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es spectrum anal yzer,
suspect a probl em wi th the model number
i denti cati on i n the spectrum anal yzer rmware.
306 FREQ ACC Unabl e to adjust MAI NSENSE to 0 vol ts usi ng the ne
adjust DAC. The coarse adjust and ne adjust DAC are
used together to set MAI NSENSE to 0 vol ts wi th the
l oop opened. ERR 306 i s set i f the ne adjust DAC
cannot bri ng MAI NSENSE to 0 vol ts. Thi s error i s not
appl i cabl e to HP 8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es spectrum
anal yzers. I f i t occurs i n an HP 8560 E-seri es or
EC-seri es spectrum anal yzer, suspect a probl em wi th
the model number i denti cati on i n the spectrum
anal yzer rmware.
307 FREQ ACC Transfer osci l l ator pretuned DAC out of range. The
transfer osci l l ator pretune procedure attempts to nd
pretuned DAC val ues by programmi ng the PLL to 25
di fferent frequenci es and i ncrementi ng the transfer
osci l l ator pretune DAC unti l XFRSENSE changes
pol ari ty. ERR 307 i s set i f the DAC i s set to 255
(maxi mum) before XFRSENSE changes pol ari ty. Thi s
error i s not appl i cabl e to HP 8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es
spectrum anal yzers. I f i t occurs i n an HP 8560 E-seri es
or EC-seri es spectrum anal yzer, suspect a probl em wi th
the model number i denti cati on i n the spectrum
anal yzer rmware.
308 FREQ ACC Offset osci l l ator pretune DAC not wi thi n prescri bed
l i mi ts at l ow frequency. The offset osci l l ator pretune
DAC i s set to provi de a frequency l ess than 189 MHz
whi l e the PLL i s programmed for 189 MHz. ERR 308 i s
set i f XFRSENSE i s greater than +5 V (i t shoul d be at
the negati ve rai l ). Thi s error i s not appl i cabl e to HP
8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es spectrum anal yzers. I f i t
occurs i n an HP 8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es spectrum
anal yzer, suspect a probl em wi th the model number
i denti cati on i n the spectrum anal yzer rmware.
Chapter 6 305
General Troubleshooting
System Analyzer Programming Errors (100 to 150)
309 FREQ ACC Offset osci l l ator pretune DAC not wi thi n prescri bed
l i mi ts at hi gh frequency. The offset osci l l ator pretune
DAC i s set to provi de a frequency l ess than 204 MHz
whi l e the PLL i s programmed for 204 MHz. ERR 309 i s
set i f XFRSENSE i s greater than +5 V (i t shoul d be at
the negati ve rai l ). Thi s error i s not appl i cabl e to HP
8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es spectrum anal yzers. I f i t
occurs i n an HP 8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es spectrum
anal yzer, suspect a probl em wi th the model number
i denti cati on i n the spectrum anal yzer rmware.
310 FREQ ACC Mai n rol l er pretune DAC set to 255. The mai n rol l er
pretune DAC i s set to 5, causi ng MAI NSENSE to go to
the posi ti ve rai l . The DAC i s i ncremented unti l
MAI NSENSE changes pol ari ty. ERR 310 i s set i f the
DAC i s set to 255 before MAI NSENSE changes to a
negati ve pol ari ty. Thi s error i s not appl i cabl e to HP
8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es spectrum anal yzers. I f i t
occurs i n an HP 8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es spectrum
anal yzer, suspect a probl em wi th the model number
i denti cati on i n the spectrum anal yzer rmware.
311 FREQ ACC Mai n rol l er pretune DAC set to 255. The mai n rol l er
pretune DAC i s set to 5, causi ng MAI NSENSE to go to
the posi ti ve rai l . The DAC i s i ncremented unti l
MAI NSENSE changes pol ari ty. ERR 311 i s set i f the
DAC i s set to 255 before MAI NSENSE changes to a
negati ve pol ari ty. Thi s error i s not appl i cabl e to HP
8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es spectrum anal yzers. I f i t
occurs i n an HP 8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es spectrum
anal yzer, suspect a probl em wi th the model number
i denti cati on i n the spectrum anal yzer rmware.
312 FREQ ACC Unabl e to adjust MAI NSENSE to 0 vol ts usi ng the ne
adjust DAC. The coarse adjust and ne adjust DAC are
used together to set MAI NSENSE to 0 vol ts wi th the
l oop opened. ERR 312 i s set i f the ne adjust DAC
cannot bri ng MAI NSENSE to 0 vol ts. Thi s error i s not
appl i cabl e to HP 8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es spectrum
anal yzers. I f i t occurs i n an HP 8560 E-seri es or
EC-seri es spectrum anal yzer, suspect a probl em wi th
the model number i denti cati on i n the spectrum
anal yzer rmware.
313 FREQ ACC Error i n LO synthesi s al gori thm. ERR 313 i s set i f a
combi nati on of sampl er osci l l ator and rol l er osci l l ator
frequenci es coul d not be found to correspond to the
requi red YTO start frequency. Contact the factory. Thi s
error i s not appl i cabl e to HP 8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es
spectrum anal yzers. I f i t occurs i n an HP 8560 E-seri es
or EC-seri es spectrum anal yzer, suspect a probl em wi th
306 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
System Analyzer Programming Errors (100 to 150)
the model number i denti cati on i n the spectrum
anal yzer rmware.
314 FREQ ACC I ndi cates probl ems i n the span cal i brati on.
Troubl eshoot any unl ocks before attempti ng to
troubl eshoot span cal i brati on probl ems, because the
l oops must al l l ock i n order to perform the cal i brati on.
I f LO spans greater than 1 MHz are correct, check
A14U114B, A14U115A, A14U116, or A14Q101. Thi s
error message appears when the mai n rol l er osci l l ator
sweep sensi ti vi ty i s 0. A sweep ramp i s i njected i nto the
l ocked mai n rol l er l oop whi ch shoul d generate a
negati ve-goi ng ramp on MAI NSENSE. ERR 314 i s set
i f the sl ope of thi s ramp i s 0. Thi s i s an i ndi cati on of an
unl ocked mai n rol l er l oop or l ack of a sweep ramp. Thi s
error i s not appl i cabl e to HP 8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es
spectrum anal yzers. I f i t occurs i n an HP 8560 E-seri es
or EC-seri es spectrum anal yzer, suspect a probl em wi th
the model number i denti cati on i n the spectrum
anal yzer rmware.
315 FREQ ACC I ndi cates probl ems i n the span cal i brati on.
Troubl eshoot any unl ocks before attempti ng to
troubl eshoot span cal i brati on probl ems, because the
l oops must al l l ock i n order to perform the cal i brati on.
I f LO spans greater than 1 MHz are correct, check
A14U114B, A14U115A, A14U116, or A14Q101. Thi s
error message appears when the rol l er span attenuator
DAC i s out of range. Thi s DAC val ue i s recal cul ated
each ti me there are changes to the span or start
frequency. ERR 315 i s set i f thi s val ue i s l ess than 10 or
greater than 245. Thi s error i s not appl i cabl e to HP
8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es spectrum anal yzers. I f i t
occurs i n an HP 8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es spectrum
anal yzer, suspect a probl em wi th the model number
i denti cati on i n the spectrum anal yzer rmware.
316 FREQ ACC Sensi ti vi ty of mai n rol l er pretune DAC i s 0. Once the
mai n rol l er i s l ocked, the MAI NSENSE vol tage i s
measured and the pretune DAC val ue i s i ncremented
by two. ERR 316 i s set i f the di fference between the
new MAI NSENSE vol tage and the previ ous
MAI NSENSE vol tage i s 0. Thi s error i s not appl i cabl e
to HP 8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es spectrum anal yzers. I f
i t occurs i n an HP 8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es spectrum
anal yzer, suspect a probl em wi th the model number
i denti cati on i n the spectrum anal yzer rmware.
Chapter 6 307
General Troubleshooting
System Analyzer Programming Errors (100 to 150)
YTO Loop Errors (317 to 318)
These messages i ndi cate that the YTO mai n coi l coarse
DAC (ERR 317) or ne DAC (ERR 318) i s at i ts l i mi t. I f
error codes 300 or 301 are not present, a hardware
probl em exi sts i n the YTO l oop but the l oop can sti l l
acqui re l ock. Refer to Chapter 10 to troubl eshoot the
YTO PLL. The ADC ci rcui t on the A3 i nterface
assembl y may al so cause thi s error.
317 FREQ ACC Mai n coi l coarse DAC at l i mi t. The mai n coi l coarse
DAC i s set to bri ng YTOERR cl ose enough to 0 vol ts for
the mai n coi l ne DAC to bri ng YTO ERR to exactl y 0
vol ts. ERR 317 i s set i f the mai n coi l coarse DAC i s set
to one of i ts l i mi ts before bri ngi ng YTO ERR cl ose
enough to 0 vol ts.
318 FREQ ACC Mai n coi l ne DAC at l i mi t. The mai n coi l ne DAC i s
set to bri ng YTO ERR to 0 vol ts after the mai n coi l
coarse DAC has brought YTOERR cl ose to 0 vol ts. ERR
318 i s set i f the mai n coi l ne DAC i s set to one of i ts
l i mi ts before bri ngi ng YTO ERR to 0 vol ts.
319 WARN COA The YTO coarse tune DAC i s near i ts l i mi ts.
320 WARN FIN The YTO ne tune DAC i s near i ts l i mi ts.
Roller Oscillator Errors (321 to 329)
These errors i ndi cate a faul ty rol l er osci l l ator on the
A14 frequency control assembl y. Refer to Chapter 10.
The A3 i nterface ADC ci rcui ts may al so be faul ty. I f
error codes 333 and 499 are al so present, suspect the 10
MHz reference, the A21 OCXO, or the A15 assembl y
(Opti on 103). These errors do not appl y to the hardware
i n an HP 8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es spectrum anal yzer.
I f they occur i n an HP 8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es
spectrum anal yzer, suspect a probl em wi th the model
number i denti cati on i n the spectrum anal yzer
rmware.
321 FREQ ACC Mai n rol l er tuni ng sensi ti vi ty i s not greater than 0.
The MAI NSENSE vol tage i s noted i n a l ocked condi ti on
and the mai n rol l er i s programmed to a frequency 400
kHz hi gher. ERR 321 i s set i f the new MAI NSENSE
vol tage i s not greater than the previ ous MAI NSENSE
vol tage. Thi s error i s not appl i cabl e to HP 8560 E-seri es
or EC-seri es spectrum anal yzers. I f i t occurs i n an HP
8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es spectrum anal yzer, suspect a
probl em wi th the model number i denti cati on i n the
spectrum anal yzer rmware.
322 FREQ ACC Mai n rol l er pretune DAC val ue set greater than 255.
308 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
System Analyzer Programming Errors (100 to 150)
Duri ng the LO adjust sequence, the mai n rol l er i s
l ocked and then programmed to a frequency 1.6 MHz
hi gher. A new pretune DAC val ue i s cal cul ated based
upon the mai n rol l er tuni ng sensi ti vi ty. ERR 322 i s set
i f thi s cal cul ated val ue i s greater than 255. Thi s error i s
not appl i cabl e to HP 8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es
spectrum anal yzers. I f i t occurs i n an HP 8560 E-seri es
or EC-seri es spectrum anal yzer, suspect a probl em wi th
the model number i denti cati on i n the spectrum
anal yzer rmware.
324 FREQ ACC Unabl e to adjust MAI NSENSE cl ose to 0 vol ts usi ng
the coarse adjust DAC. The coarse adjust and ne
adjust DAC are used together to set MAI NSENSE to 0
vol ts wi th the l oop opened. ERR 324 i s set i f the coarse
adjust DAC cannot bri ng MAI NSENSE cl ose enough to
0 vol ts for the ne adjust DACs to bri ng MAI NSENSE
to exactl y 0 vol ts. Thi s error i s not appl i cabl e to HP
8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es spectrum anal yzers. I f i t
occurs i n an HP 8560 E-seri es or EC-seri esHP 8560
E-seri es or EC-seri es spectrum anal yzer, suspect a
probl em wi th the model number i denti cati on i n the
spectrum anal yzer rmware.
325 FREQ ACC Unabl e to adjust MAI NSENSE to 0 vol ts usi ng the ne
adjust DAC. The coarse adjust and ne adjust DAC are
used together to set MAI NSENSE to 0 vol ts wi th the
l oop opened. ERR 325 i s set i f the ne adjust DAC
cannot bri ng MAI NSENSE to 0 vol ts. Thi s error i s not
appl i cabl e to HP 8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es spectrum
anal yzers. I f i t occurs i n an HP 8560 E-seri es or
EC-seri es spectrum anal yzer, suspect a probl em wi th
the model number i denti cati on i n the spectrum
anal yzer rmware.
326 FREQ ACC Fi ne adjust DAC near end of range. The ne adjust
DAC i s set to bri ng MAI NSENSE to 0 vol ts. ERR 326 i s
set i f the ne adjust DAC val ue i s set to l ess than 5 or
greater than 250. Thi s error i s not appl i cabl e to HP
8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es spectrum anal yzers. I f i t
occurs i n an HP 8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es spectrum
anal yzer, suspect a probl em wi th the model number
i denti cati on i n the spectrum anal yzer rmware.
327 OFF UNLK Offset rol l er osci l l ator PLL i s unl ocked. May i ndi cate
l oss of 10 MHz reference. The 10 MHz reference shoul d
measure greater than 7 dBm at A15J303. The ADC
measures OFFSENSE at the begi nni ng of each sweep
and, i f the vol tage i s outsi de certai n l i mi ts, the offset
osci l l ator pretune DAC i s adjusted to bri ng OFFSENSE
wi thi n the proper range. ERR 327 i s set i f thi s cannot
Chapter 6 309
General Troubleshooting
System Analyzer Programming Errors (100 to 150)
be accompl i shed. Thi s error i s not appl i cabl e to HP
8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es spectrum anal yzers. I f i t
occurs i n an HP 8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es spectrum
anal yzer, suspect a probl em wi th the model number
i denti cati on i n the spectrum anal yzer rmware.
328 FREQ ACC Rol l er ne adjust DAC sensi ti vi ty l ess than or equal to
0. Duri ng the LO adjust routi ne, the ne adjust DAC i s
set to two di fferent val ues and the MAI NSENSE
vol tage i s measured at each setti ng. ERR 328 i s set i f
the di fference between these vol tages i s 0 or negati ve.
Thi s i s typi cal l y because the mai n rol l er l oop i s
unl ocked. Thi s error i s not appl i cabl e to HP 8560
E-seri es or EC-seri es spectrum anal yzers. I f i t occurs i n
an HP 8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es spectrum anal yzer,
suspect a probl em wi th the model number
i denti cati on i n the spectrum anal yzer rmware.
329 FREQ ACC Rol l er coarse adjust DAC sensi ti vi ty l ess than or equal
to 0. Duri ng the LO adjust routi ne, the coarse adjust
DAC i s set to two di fferent val ues and the
MAI NSENSE vol tage i s measured at each setti ng. ERR
329 i s set i f the di fference between these vol tages i s 0 or
negati ve. Thi s i s typi cal l y because the mai n rol l er l oop
i s unl ocked. Thi s error i s not appl i cabl e to HP 8560
E-seri es or EC-seri es spectrum anal yzers. I f i t occurs i n
an HP 8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es spectrum anal yzer,
suspect a probl em wi th the model number
i denti cati on i n the spectrum anal yzer rmware.
YTO Loop Error (331)
Thi s error rarel y occurs but i s usual l y i ndi cati ve of a
di gi tal hardware fai l ure.
331 FREQ ACC I nval i d YTO frequency. Fi rmware attempted to set the
YTO to a frequency outsi de the range of the YTO (2.95
to 6.8107 GHz). Suspect a di gi tal hardware probl em,
such as a bad RAM on the A2 control l er assembl y.
Contact the factory.
600 MHz Reference Loop (333)
Thi s error requi res troubl eshooti ng the A14 frequency
control assembl y (synthesi zer secti on) or the ADC
ci rcui ts.
333 600 UNLK The 600 MHz reference osci l l ator PLL i s unl ocked. I f
error codes 302, 303, 304, 327 or 499 are al so present,
suspect the 10 MHz reference, the A21 OCXO, or the
TCXOon Opti on 103, or the A15 RF assembl y. ERR 333
i s set i f LO3ERR i s outsi de of i ts prescri bed l i mi ts.
310 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
System Analyzer Programming Errors (100 to 150)
YTO Leveling Loop (334)
Thi s error often requi res troubl eshooti ng the A14
frequency control assembl y or A7 LODA (synthesi zer
secti on) or the ADC ci rcui ts.
334 LO AMPL 1ST LO di stri buti on ampl i er i s unl evel ed. Error 334
may be di spl ayed i f the front-panel LO OUTPUT i s not
termi nated i nto 50 ohms. Thi s error i s usual l y
accompani ed by error codes 300 or 301. ERR 301 YTO
UNLK i s cl eared once ERR 334 has been cl eared. Check
the output of the A11 YTO wi th the jumper on A14J23
i n the TESTposi ti on. The YTO power output shoul d be
between +9 and +13 dBm. I f the YTO i s worki ng
properl y, refer to "A7 LODA Dri ve" i n Chapter 10. The
LODA AGC vol tage i s moni tored by the ADC. ERR 334
i s set i f LODA AGC i s outsi de of i ts prescri bed l i mi ts.
Refer to "A7 LODA Dri ve" i n Chapter 11.
Sampling Oscillator (335)
Thi s error i ndi cates an unl ocked sampl i ng osci l l ator
(al so known as the offset l ock l oop).
335 SMP UNLK Sampl i ng osci l l ator PLL i s unl ocked. ERR 335 i s set i f
OFL_ERR i s outsi de i ts prescri bed l i mi ts.
10 MHz Reference (336)
Thi s message occurs duri ng the i nternal I F cal i brati on
routi nes. The routi ne l ocks the cal osci l l ator to the
i nternal 10 MHz reference, regardl ess of the setti ng of
I NT/EXT REF.
336 10 MHz Ref Cal i brati on osci l l ator fai l ed to l ock wi thi n 5 seconds
after goi ng to i nternal 10 MHz reference. ERR 336 wi l l
not be cl eared unti l a successful ful l cal "LO Re-Al i gn"
i s executed.
Fractional N PLL (337)
Thi s error i ndi cates an unl ocked fracti onal N phase
l ocked l oop. Thi s error onl y appl i es to the hardware i n
an HP 8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es spectrum anal yzer.
337 FN UNLK Fracti onal N ci rcui try i s unabl e to l ock.
YTO Loop Settling Errors (351 to 354)
These errors are generated when the YTO l oop error
vol tage wi l l not stabi l i ze at an acceptabl e val ue duri ng
the YTO l oop l ocki ng routi nes. These errors onl y appl y
to the hardware i n an HP 8560 E-seri es or EC-seri es
Chapter 6 311
General Troubleshooting
System Analyzer Programming Errors (100 to 150)
spectrum anal yzer.
351 SETL FLD YTO error vol tage i s not settl i ng.
352 TWID FLD Unabl e to bri ng YTO error vol tage DAC's to qui escent
poi nt.
353 SRCH FLD No acceptabl e YTO DAC val ue found.
354 LK ITERS Cannot l ock. Lock i terati on routi ne termi nated.
Sampling Oscillator (355)
Thi s error i ndi cates an unl ocked sampl i ng osci l l ator
duri ng the l ocal osci l l ator (LO) al i gnment routi ne. Thi s
error onl y appl i es to the hardware i n an HP 8560
E-seri es or EC-seri es spectrum anal yzer.
355 SMP CAL Sampl er unl ock condi ti on duri ng cal i brati on routi ne.
Thi s error remai ns unti l a successful recal i brati on i s
performed.
Span Accuracy Calibration Errors (356 to 361)
These errors are generated when the span accuracy
cal i brati on fai l s. The span accuracy cal i brati on i s done
duri ng "power up", I F cal i brati on (every 5 mi nutes),
and LO I F real i gnment routi nes. Span accuracy
cal i brati on sweeps occur duri ng the retrace (dead ti me)
of the mai n sweep ramp. The rmware then detects any
span accuracy cal i brati on errors. These errors onl y
appl y to rmware revi si ons 931216 and l ater.
356 SPAC CAL Sweep data probl em ndi ng "bucket 1" of the span
accuracy cal i brati on sweep. Thi s error i ndi cates a
possi bl e fai l ure of the sweep generator, span
attenuator, or mai n/FM coi l sweep swi tches on the A14
frequency control assembl y. Refer to Chapter 10,
"Synthesi zer Secti on."
357 SPAC CAL Cannot nd the "x" i ntersecti on for "bucket 1" of the
span accuracy cal i brati on sweep. Thi s error i ndi cates a
possi bl e fai l ure of the sweep generator, span
attenuator, or mai n/FM coi l sweep swi tches on the A14
frequency control assembl y. Refer to Chapter 10,
"Synthesi zer Secti on."
358 SPAC CAL Sweep data probl em ndi ng "bucket 2" of the span
accuracy cal i brati on sweep. Thi s error i ndi cates a
possi bl e fai l ure of the sweep generator, span
attenuator, or mai n/FM coi l sweep swi tches on the A14
frequency control assembl y. Refer to Chapter 10,
"Synthesi zer Secti on."
312 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
System Analyzer Programming Errors (100 to 150)
359 SPAC CAL Cannot nd "x" i ntersecti on for "bucket 2" of the span
accuracy cal i brati on sweep. Thi s error i ndi cates a
possi bl e fai l ure of the sweep generator, span
attenuator, or mai n/FM coi l sweep swi tches on the A14
frequency control assembl y. Refer to Chapter 10,
"Synthesi zer Secti on."
360 SPAC CAL The start bucket correcti on i s out of range. Thi s error
i ndi cates a possi bl e fai l ure of the sweep generator on
the A14 frequency control assembl y. Refer to "Sweep
Generator Ci rcui t" i n Chapter 10, "Synthesi zer
Secti on."
361 SPAC CAL The percent of span correcti on i s out of range. Thi s
error i ndi cates a possi bl e fai l ure of the sweep generator
on the A14 frequency control assembl y. Refer to "Sweep
Generator Ci rcui t" i n Chapter 10, "Synthesi zer
Secti on."
Automatic IF Errors (400 to 599)
These error codes are generated when the automati c I F
adjustment routi ne detects a faul t. Thi s routi ne rst
adjusts ampl i tude parameters, then resol uti on
bandwi dths i n thi s sequence: 300 kHz, 1 MHz, 2 MHz,
100 kHz, 30 kHz, 10 kHz, 3 kHz, 1 kHz, 300 Hz, 100
Hz, 30 Hz, 10 Hz, 3 Hz, and 1 Hz. The routi ne restarts
from the begi nni ng i f a faul t i s detected. Parameters
adjusted after the routi ne begi ns but before the faul t i s
detected are correct; parameters adjusted l ater i n the
sequence are suspect. Refer to "Automati c I F
Adjustment" i n Chapter 8.
The I F Secti on rel i es on the ADC and vi deo ci rcui try to
perform i ts conti nuous I F adjustments. I F-rel ated
errors occur i f the ADC, vi deo ci rcui try, or A4 assembl y
l i near path i s faul ty.
400 AMPL <300 Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of resol uti on bandwi dths
l ess than 300 Hz.
401 AMPL 300 Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of 300 Hz resol uti on
bandwi dth.
402 AMPL 1K Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of 1 kHz resol uti on
bandwi dth.
403 AMPL 3K Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of 3 kHz resol uti on
bandwi dth.
404 AMPL 10K Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of 10 kHz resol uti on
bandwi dth.
Chapter 6 313
General Troubleshooting
System Analyzer Programming Errors (100 to 150)
Errors 405 to 416: When these 10K resol uti on
bandwi dth (RBW) error messages appear, use the
fol l owi ng steps to check for errors 581 or 582.
1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer off.
2. Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer on and
observe the l ower ri ght-hand corner of the di spl ay
for 10 seconds.
3. I f ERR 581 or ERR 582 appears, the faul t i s most
l i kel y caused by the cal osci l l ator. Refer to errors 581
and 582.
4. I f ERR 581 or ERR 582 does not appear,
troubl eshoot the A5 I F assembl y.
Mul ti pl e I F Errors Duri ng I F adjust: I f a FULL I F ADJ
sequence (pressi ng CAL and FULL IF ADJ) resul ts i n I F
errors whi l e di spl ayi ng IF ADJUST STATUS:
AMPLITUDE, the cal osci l l ator on A4 mi ght not be
provi di ng the correct output si gnal . Perform the
fol l owi ng steps:
1. Di sconnect W30 (whi te) from A5J4.
2. Connect W30 to the i nput of a second spectrum
anal yzer and set i ts control s as fol l ows:
Center Frequency ........................ 10.7 MHz
Reference Level ............................. 30 dBm
3. Observe the spectrum anal yzer di spl ay whi l e
pressi ng FULL IF
ADJ on the spectrum anal yzer. I f a 35 dBm si gnal
does not appear, troubl eshoot the cal osci l l ator on
A4.
4. I f a 35 dBm si gnal does appear, troubl eshoot the A5
I F assembl y.
405 RBW 10K Unabl e to adjust 10 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth i n rst
crystal pol e.
406 RBW 10K Unabl e to adjust 10 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth i n
second crystal pol e.
407 RBW 10K Unabl e to adjust 10 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth i n thi rd
crystal pol e.
408 RBW 10K Unabl e to adjust 10 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth i n fourth
crystal pol e.
409 RBW 10K Unabl e to adjust 10 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth i n rst
crystal pol e.
314 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
System Analyzer Programming Errors (100 to 150)
410 RBW 10K Unabl e to adjust 10 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth i n
second crystal pol e.
411 RBW 10K Unabl e to adjust 10 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth i n thi rd
crystal pol e.
412 RBW 10K Unabl e to adjust 10 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth i n fourth
crystal pol e.
413 RBW 10K Unabl e to adjust 10 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth i n rst
crystal pol e.
414 RBW 10K Unabl e to adjust 10 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth i n
second crystal pol e.
415 RBW 10K Unabl e to adjust 10 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth i n thi rd
crystal pol e.
416 RBW 10K Unabl e to adjust 10 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth i n fourth
crystal pol e.
417 RBW 3K Unabl e to adjust 3 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth i n rst
crystal pol e.
418 RBW 3K Unabl e to adjust 3 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth i n second
crystal pol e.
419 RBW 3K Unabl e to adjust 3 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth i n thi rd
crystal pol e.
420 RBW 3K Unabl e to adjust 3 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth i n fourth
crystal pol e.
421 RBW 10K Unabl e to adjust 10 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth i n rst
crystal pol e.
422 RBW 10K Unabl e to adjust 10 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth i n
second crystal pol e.
423 RBW 10K Unabl e to adjust 10 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth i n thi rd
crystal pol e.
424 RBW 10K Unabl e to adjust 10 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth i n fourth
crystal pol e.
425 RBW 3K Unabl e to adjust 3 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth i n rst
crystal pol e.
426 RBW 3K Unabl e to adjust 3 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth i n second
crystal pol e.
427 RBW 3K Unabl e to adjust 3 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth i n thi rd
crystal pol e.
428 RBW 3K Unabl e to adjust 3 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth i n fourth
crystal pol e.
429 RBW 100 Unabl e to adjust resol uti on bandwi dths l ess than
Chapter 6 315
General Troubleshooting
System Analyzer Programming Errors (100 to 150)
300Hz. ADC handshake.
430 RBW 300 Unabl e to adjust 300 Hz resol uti on bandwi dth. ADC
handshake.
431 RBW 1K Unabl e to adjust 1 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth. ADC
handshake.
432 RBW 3K Unabl e to adjust 3 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth. ADC
handshake.
433 RBW 10K Unabl e to adjust 10 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth. ADC
handshake.
434 RBW 300 300 Hz resol uti on bandwi dth ampl i tude l ow i n rst
crystal pol e.
435 RBW 300 300 Hz resol uti on bandwi dth ampl i tude l ow i n second
crystal pol e.
436 RBW 300 300 Hz resol uti on bandwi dth ampl i tude l ow i n thi rd
crystal pol e.
437 RBW 300 300 Hz resol uti on bandwi dth ampl i tude l ow i n fourth
crystal pol e.
438 RBW 1K 1 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth ampl i tude l ow i n rst
crystal pol e.
439 RBW 1K 1 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth ampl i tude l ow i n second
crystal pol e.
440 RBW 1K 1 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth ampl i tude l ow i n thi rd
crystal pol e.
441 RBW 1K 1 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth ampl i tude l ow i n fourth
crystal pol e.
442 RBW 3K 3 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth ampl i tude l ow i n rst
crystal pol e.
443 RBW 3K 3 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth ampl i tude l ow i n second
crystal pol e.
444 RBW 3K 3 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth ampl i tude l ow i n thi rd
crystal pol e.
445 RBW 3K 3 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth ampl i tude l ow i n fourth
crystal pol e.
446 RBW 10K 10 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth ampl i tude l ow i n rst
crystal pol e.
447 RBW 10K 10 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth ampl i tude l ow i n second
crystal pol e.
448 RBW 10K 10 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth ampl i tude l ow i n thi rd
crystal pol e.
316 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
System Analyzer Programming Errors (100 to 150)
449 RBW 10K 10 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth ampl i tude l ow i n fourth
crystal pol e.
450 IF SYSTM I F hardware fai l ure. Check other error messages.
451 IF SYSTM I F hardware fai l ure. Check other error messages.
452 IF SYSTM I F hardware fai l ure. Check other error messages.
454 AMPL Unabl e to adjust step gai n ampl i ers. Check other
errors.
455 AMPL Unabl e to adjust ne attenuator of the step gai n
ampl i ers.
456 AMPL Unabl e to adjust ne attenuator of the step gai n
ampl i ers.
457 AMPL Unabl e to adjust ne attenuator of the step gai n
ampl i ers.
458 AMPL Unabl e to adjust rst step gai n stage.
459 AMPL Unabl e to adjust rst step gai n stage.
460 AMPL Unabl e to adjust rst step gai n stage.
461 AMPL Unabl e to adjust second step gai n stage.
462 AMPL Unabl e to adjust second step gai n stage.
463 AMPL Unabl e to adjust thi rd step gai n stage.
464 AMPL Unabl e to adjust thi rd step gai n stage.
465 AMPL Unabl e to adjust thi rd step gai n stage.
466 LIN AMPL Unabl e to adjust l i near ampl i er scal e.
467 AMPL Unabl e to adjust step gai n ampl i ers.
468 AMPL Unabl e to adjust thi rd step gai n stage.
469 AMPL Unabl e to adjust step gai n ampl i ers.
470 AMPL Unabl e to adjust thi rd step gai n stage.
471 RBW 30K Unabl e to adjust 30 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth i n rst
LC pol e.
472 RBW 100K Unabl e to adjust 100 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth i n rst
LC pol e.
473 RBW 300K Unabl e to adjust 300 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth i n rst
LC pol e.
474 RBW 1M Unabl e to adjust 1 MHz resol uti on bandwi dth i n rst
LC pol e.
475 RBW 30K Unabl e to adjust 30 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth i n
Chapter 6 317
General Troubleshooting
System Analyzer Programming Errors (100 to 150)
second LC pol e.
476 RBW 100K Unabl e to adjust 100 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth i n
second LC pol e.
477 RBW 300K Unabl e to adjust 300 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth i n
second LC pol e.
478 RBW 1M Unabl e to adjust 1 MHz resol uti on bandwi dth i n second
LC pol e.
483 RBW 10K Unabl e to adjust 10 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth.
484 RBW 3K Unabl e to adjust 3 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth.
485 RBW 1K Unabl e to adjust 1 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth.
486 RBW 300 Unabl e to adjust 300 Hz resol uti on bandwi dth.
487 RBW 100 Unabl e to adjust 100 Hz resol uti on bandwi dth.
488 RBW 10 Unabl e to adjust 100 Hz resol uti on bandwi dth.
489 RBW 100 Unabl e to adjust 100 Hz resol uti on bandwi dth.
490 RBW 100 Unabl e to adjust 100 Hz resol uti on bandwi dth.
491 RBW <300 Unabl e to adjust resol uti on bandwi dths l ess than 300
Hz. Crystal sweep gai n probl em.
492 RBW 300 Unabl e to adjust 300 Hz resol uti on bandwi dth. Crystal
sweep gai n probl em.
493 RBW 1K Unabl e to adjust 1 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth. Crystal
sweep gai n probl em.
494 RBW 3K Unabl e to adjust 3 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth. Crystal
sweep gai n probl em.
495 RBW 10K Unabl e to adjust 10 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth. Crystal
sweep gai n probl em.
496 RBW 100 Unabl e to adjust 100 Hz resol uti on bandwi dth.
I nadequate Q.
497 RBW 100 Unabl e to adjust 100 Hz resol uti on bandwi dth.
Al i gnment probl em.
498 RBW 100 Unabl e to adjust 100 Hz resol uti on bandwi dth. Gai n
probl em.
499 CAL UNLK Cal osci l l ator i s unl ocked. Veri fy the unl ocked
condi ti ons as fol l ows:
1. Pl ace A4 i n i ts servi ce posi ti on and di sconnect W51
(gray-yel l ow) from A4J7.
2. Connect W51 to the i nput of another spectrum
anal yzer. Thi s i s the 10 MHz reference for the cal
318 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
System Analyzer Programming Errors (100 to 150)
osci l l ator.
3. I f a 10 MHz si gnal (approxi matel y 0 dBm) i s not
present, suspect the A15 RF assembl y, the A21
OCXO, or the A15 assembl y TCXO (Opti on 103). I f
the 10 MHz reference i s present, conti nue wi th step
4.
4. Reconnect W17 to A4J7 and moni tor the tune
vol tage at A4J9 pi n 3 wi th an osci l l oscope.
5. Press PRESET on the spectrum anal yzer under test.
6. I f the vol tage i s ei ther +15 Vdc or 15 Vdc, the cal
osci l l ator i s probabl y at faul t. Normal l y, the vol tage
shoul d be near +15 V duri ng a sweep, and between
9 V and +9 V duri ng retrace.
An intermittent error 499 i ndi cates the cal osci l l ator
phase-l ocked-l oop probabl y can l ock at 10.7 MHz, but
cannot l ock at the 9.9 and 11.5 MHz extremes. Thi s
may prevent the cal osci l l ator from adjusti ng the 1
MHz or 30 kHz through 300 kHz bandwi dths. Thi s
symptom i mpl i es a fai l ure i n the osci l l ator, functi on
bl ock X. (See the A4 l og amp/cal osci l l ator schemati c
sheet 4 of 4.) The osci l l ator i s unabl e to tune the
requi red frequency range wi th the 9 V to +9 V control
vol tage. Troubl eshoot A4CR802 (most probabl e cause),
L801, C808, C809, and U807.
500 AMPL 30K Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of 30 kHz resol uti on
bandwi dth.
501 AMPL .1M Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of 100 kHz resol uti on
bandwi dth.
502 AMPL .3M Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of 300 kHz resol uti on
bandwi dth.
503 AMPL 1M Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of 1 MHz resol uti on
bandwi dth.
504 AMPL 30K Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of 30 kHz resol uti on
bandwi dth.
505 AMPL .1M Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of 100 kHz resol uti on
bandwi dth.
506 AMPL .3M Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of 300 kHz resol uti on
bandwi dth.
507 AMPL 1M Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of 1 MHz resol uti on
bandwi dth.
508 AMPL 30K Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of 30 kHz resol uti on
Chapter 6 319
General Troubleshooting
System Analyzer Programming Errors (100 to 150)
bandwi dth. I nsufci ent gai n duri ng LC bandwi dth
cal i brati on.
509 AMPL .1M Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of 100 kHz resol uti on
bandwi dth. I nsufci ent gai n duri ng LC bandwi dth
cal i brati on.
510 AMPL .3M Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of 300 kHz resol uti on
bandwi dth. I nsufci ent gai n duri ng LC bandwi dth
cal i brati on.
511 AMPL 1M Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of 1 MHz resol uti on
bandwi dth. I nsufci ent gai n duri ng LC bandwi dth
cal i brati on.
512 RBW 100 Unabl e to adjust 100 Hz resol uti on bandwi dth.
I nsufci ent gai n duri ng crystal bandwi dth cal i brati on.
513 RBW 300 Unabl e to adjust 300 Hz resol uti on bandwi dth.
I nsufci ent gai n duri ng crystal bandwi dth cal i brati on.
514 RBW 1K Unabl e to adjust 1 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth.
I nsufci ent gai n duri ng crystal bandwi dth cal i brati on.
515 RBW 3K Unabl e to adjust 3 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth.
I nsufci ent gai n duri ng crystal bandwi dth cal i brati on.
516 RBW 10K Unabl e to adjust 10 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth.
I nsufci ent gai n duri ng crystal bandwi dth cal i brati on.
517 RBW 100 Unabl e to adjust 100 Hz resol uti on bandwi dth. Crystal
sweep probl em.
518 RBW 300 Unabl e to adjust 300 Hz resol uti on bandwi dth. Crystal
sweep probl em.
519 RBW 1K Unabl e to adjust 1 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth. Crystal
sweep probl em.
520 RBW 3K Unabl e to adjust 3 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth. Crystal
sweep probl em.
521 RBW 10K Unabl e to adjust 10 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth. Crystal
sweep probl em.
522 RBW 10K Unabl e to adjust symmetry of 10 kHz resol uti on
bandwi dth i n rst crystal pol e.
523 RBW 10K Unabl e to adjust symmetry of 10 kHz resol uti on
bandwi dth i n second crystal pol e.
524 RBW 10K Unabl e to adjust symmetry of 10 kHz resol uti on
bandwi dth i n thi rd crystal pol e.
525 RBW 10K Unabl e to adjust symmetry of 10 kHz resol uti on
bandwi dth i n fourth crystal pol e.
320 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
System Analyzer Programming Errors (100 to 150)
526 RBW <300 ADC ti meout duri ng I F ADJUSTof <300 Hz resol uti on
bandwi dth.
527 RBW <300 Step gai n correcti on fai l ed for <300 Hz resol uti on
bandwi dth. Check narrow BW SGO attenuator.
528 RBW <300 Cal i brati on of dc l evel at ADC fai l ed for <300 Hz
resol uti on bandwi dth.
529 RBW <300 I nval i d demodul ated data for <300 Hz resol uti on
bandwi dth atness and I F down-converter. Demod data
for cal i brati on may be bad.
530 RBW <300 Adjustment of VCXO down-converter fai l ed. Narrow
bandwi dth VCXO cal i brati on fai l ed.
531 RBW <300 Fl atness correcti on data for resol uti on bandwi dths
<300 Hz not acceptabl e.
532 RBW <300 Absol ute gai n data for resol uti on bandwi dths <300 Hz
not acceptabl e.
533 RBW <300 ADC ti meout adjusti ng resol uti on bandwi dths l ess
than 300 Hz. Ti meout duri ng data sampl i ng narrow
bandwi dth chunk.
534 RBW <300 Unabl e to do frequency count of CAL OSC usi ng I F
down-converter when adjusti ng resol uti on bandwi dths
l ess than 300 Hz.
535 RBW <300 Unabl e to obtai n adequate FM demod range to
measure 500 Hz I F l ter wi th resol uti on bandwi dths
l ess than 300 Hz.
536 RBW <300 Unabl e to auto-range chi rp si gnal whi l e setti ng VCXO
or doi ng atness cal i brati on wi th resol uti on
bandwi dths l ess than 300 Hz.
537 RBW <300 Unabl e to auto-range CW CAL OSC si gnal to count
VCXO si gnal wi th resol uti on bandwi dths l ess than 300
Hz.
538 RBW <300 Shape of 500 Hz I F l ter appears too noi sy to adjust
VCXO down-converter for resol uti on bandwi dths l ess
than 300 Hz.
539 RBW <300 Unabl e to auto-range the CW CAL OSC si gnal to
pretune the VCXO for resol uti on bandwi dths l ess than
300 Hz.
540 RBW <300 Unabl e to nd CW CAL OSC si gnal duri ng VCXO
pretune at power-up wi th resol uti on bandwi dths l ess
than 300 Hz.
550 IDCALOSC CAL Osci l l ator I D. I ndi cates i ncompati bl e hardware.
Cal osci l l ator on A16 Cal Osc not expected.
Chapter 6 321
General Troubleshooting
System Analyzer Programming Errors (100 to 150)
551 LOG AMPL LOG Board I D. I ndi cates i ncompati bl e hardware. Cal
osci l l ator on A4 assembl y not expected.
552 LOG AMPL Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of l og scal e.
553 LOG AMPL Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of l og scal e.
554 LOG AMPL Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of l og scal e.
555 LOG AMPL Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of l og scal e.
556 LOG AMPL Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of l og scal e.
557 LOG AMPL Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of l og scal e.
558 LOG AMPL Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of l og scal e.
559 LOG AMPL Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of l og scal e.
560 LOG AMPL Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of l og scal e.
561 LOG AMPL Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of l og scal e. Possi bl e
probl em i n second step gai n.
562 LOG AMPL Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of l og scal e. Possi bl e
probl em i n second step gai n.
563 LOG AMPL Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of l og scal e. Possi bl e
probl em i n thi rd step gai n range.
564 LOG AMPL Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of l og scal e.
565 LOG AMPL Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of l og scal e.
566 LOG AMPL Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of l og scal e.
567 LOG AMPL Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of l og scal e. Possi bl e
probl em i n Log offset/Log Expand stage.
568 LOG AMPL Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of l og scal e. Possi bl e
probl em i n Log offset/Log Expand stage.
569 LOG AMPL Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of l og scal e. Possi bl e
probl em i n Log offset/Log Expand stage.
570 LOG AMPL Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of l og scal e. Possi bl e
probl em i n Log offset/Log Expand stage.
571 AMPL Unabl e to adjust step gai n ampl i ers.
572 AMPL 1M Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of 1 MHz resol uti on
bandwi dth.
573 LOG AMPL Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of l og scal e. Check vi deo
offset ci rcui try.
574 LOG AMPL Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of l og scal e. Check vi deo
offset ci rcui try.
575 LOG AMPL Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of l og scal e. Check vi deo
322 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
System Analyzer Programming Errors (100 to 150)
offset ci rcui try.
576 LOG AMPL Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of l og scal e. Check vi deo
offset ci rcui try.
577 LOG AMPL Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of l og scal e. Check vi deo
offset ci rcui try.
578 LOG AMPL Li mi ter cal i brati on error from DC l ogger cal i brati on.
579 LOG AMPL Attenuator CAL l evel error from DC l ogger cal i brati on.
580 LOG AMPL cal i brati on l evel error from DC l ogger cal i brati on.
581 AMPL Unabl e to adjust 100 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth and
resol uti on bandwi dths l ess than or equal to 10 kHz.
ADC/CALOSC handshake cal i brati on probl em i n
crystal sweep. Refer to Error 582.
582 AMPL Unabl e to adjust 100 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth and
resol uti on bandwi dths l ess than or equal to 10 kHz.
Bad CALOSC cal i brati on i n sweep rate. Test the 100
kHz resol uti on bandwi dth l ter 3 dB bandwi dth as
fol l ows:
1. Connect the CAL OUTPUT si gnal (A4J8) to the
I NPUT 50 .
2. Press PRESET and set the control s as fol l ows:
CENTER FREQ........................... 300 MHz
SPAN ..............................................500 kHz
Resol uti on Bandwi dth ...................100 kHz
LOG dB/DI V.........................................1 dB
REF LEVEL.......adjust to pl ace si gnal peak at
top of the screen
3. Press PEAK SEARCH and MARKER DELTA and turn
the knob cl ockwi se to posi ti on the marker unti l the
del ta MKR reads 3 dB 0.1 dB.
4. Press MARKER DELTA and move the marker to the
other si de of the peak unti l the del ta MKR reads 0
dB 0.1 dB.
5. I f the del ta MKR frequency i s between 90 kHz and
110 kHz, the 100 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth i s
worki ng properl y. I f the frequency i s outsi de these
l i mi ts, read the fol l owi ng i nformati on on the A4 cal
osci l l ator sweep generator.
I f the 100 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth works properl y,
the cal osci l l ator sweep generator i s fai l i ng to sweep i ts
osci l l ator frequency at the correct rate. The error i s
detected i n sweepi ng on the ski rts of the 100 kHz
Chapter 6 323
General Troubleshooting
System Analyzer Programming Errors (100 to 150)
resol uti on bandwi dth.
A properl y operati ng sweep generator generates a
seri es of negati ve-goi ng parabol as. These parabol as
generate the sweeps used to adjust resol uti on
bandwi dths of 10 kHz and l ess. Check the sweep
generator wi th the fol l owi ng steps. Refer al so to "300
Hz to 3 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth out of speci cati on"
i n the A4 cal osci l l ator troubl eshooti ng text i n Chapter
8.
1. Remove the shi el ds.
2. Connect an osci l l oscope probe to A4U804C pi n 8.
3. On the spectrum anal yzer, press CAL and FULL IF
ADJ.
4. Approxi matel y 8 seconds after starti ng the FULL IF
ADJ, check for negati ve-goi ng parabol as (si mi l ar to
hal f-si ne waves) 5 ms wi de and approxi matel y 4 V
at thei r peak. Refer to Chapter 8, "I F Secti on," for
more i nformati on on the A4 l og amp/cal osci l l ator
assembl y.
583 RBW 30K Unabl e to adjust 30 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth.
584 RBW 100K Unabl e to adjust 100 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth.
585 RBW 300K Unabl e to adjust 300 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth.
586 RBW 1M Unabl e to adjust 1 MHz resol uti on bandwi dth.
587 RBW 30K Unabl e to adjust 30 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth.
588 RBW 100K Unabl e to adjust 100 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth.
589 RBW 300K Unabl e to adjust 300 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth.
590 RBW 1M Unabl e to adjust 1 MHz resol uti on bandwi dth.
591 LOG AMPL Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of l og scal e.
592 LOG AMPL Unabl e to adjust ampl i tude of l og scal e.
593 LOG TUNE Li mi ter cal i brati on tune error from DC l ogger
cal i brati on.
594 LOG OFST Attenuator cal i brati on offset error from DC l ogger
cal i brati on.
595 LOG ATTN Attenuator cal i brati on absol ute error from DC l ogger
cal i brati on.
596 LOG FID Fi del i ty error from DC l ogger cal i brati on.
597 LOG OFST Fi del i ty offset error from DC l ogger cal i brati on.
598 LOG OFST Fi del i ty offset unstabl e from DC l ogger cal i brati on.
324 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
System Analyzer Programming Errors (100 to 150)
599 LOG GAIN Fi del i ty gai n error from DC l ogger cal i brati on.
System Errors (600 to 651)
ADC ti meout errors occur i f the A2 control l er assembl y
frequency counter i s faul ty. Refer to Chapter 7,
"ADC/I nterface Secti on."
600 SYSTEM Hardware/rmware i nteracti on; check other errors.
601 SYSTEM Hardware/rmware i nteracti on; check other errors.
650 OUTOF RG ADC i nput i s outsi de of the ADC range.
651 NO IRQ Mi croprocessor i s not recei vi ng i nterrupt from ADC.
Digital and Checksum Errors (700 to 799)
EEROM Checksum Errors (700 to 704)
Faul ts on the A2 control l er assembl y can cause these
errors. Refer to Chapter 9, "Control l er Secti on."
Al though some of these errors mi ght resul t i n a
bl anked di spl ay, i t i s possi bl e to read these errors over
HP-I B. Refer to "Troubl eshooti ng to a Functi onal
Secti on" i n thi s chapter.
The EEROM on A2 i s used to store data for frequency
response correcti on, el apsed ti me, focus, and i ntensi ty
l evel s. Error codes from 700 to 703 i ndi cate that some
part of the data i n EEROM i s i nval i d. An EEROM error
coul d resul t from ei ther a defecti ve EEROM or an
i mproper sequence of stori ng data i n EEROM. Check
the EEROM wi th the fol l owi ng steps:
1. Pl ace the WR PROT/WR ENA jumper on the A2
control l er assembl y i n the WR ENA posi ti on.
2. On the spectrum anal yzer, press CAL, MORE 1 OF 2,
SERVICE CAL DATA, FLATNESS, and FLATNESS DATA.
Enter a val ue of 130. Press PREV MENU, STORE
DATA, YES, and DISPLAY.
3. Press INTEN, enter an i ntensi ty val ue of 90, and
press STORE INTEN.
4. Press MORE 1 OF 2, FOCUS, enter a focus val ue of
128, and press STORE
FOCUS. Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer off,
then on, cycl i ng the power.
5. I f errors are sti l l present, the EEROM A2U501 i s
defecti ve. Refer to the EEROM repl acement
procedure i n Chapter 3.
Chapter 6 325
General Troubleshooting
System Analyzer Programming Errors (100 to 150)
700 EEROM Checksum error of EEROM A2U501.
701 AMPL CAL Checksum error of frequency response correcti on data.
702 ELAP TIM Checksum error of el apsed ti me data.
703 AMPL CAL Checksum error of frequency response correcti on data.
Defaul t val ues bei ng used.
704 PRESELCT Checksum error of customer presel ector peak data.
External presel ector data recal l ed i n i nternal mode, or
i nternal presel ector data recal l ed i n external mode. To
cl ear the error, press RECALL, MORE 1 OF 2, FACTORY
PRSELPK, SAVE, and SAVE PRSEL PK.
Program ROM Checksum Errors (705 to 710)
The i nstrument power-on di agnosti cs perform a
checksum on each programmed ROM (A2 control l er
assembl y). I f an i nval i d checksum i s found for a
parti cul ar ROM, an error code i s generated. I f a
defecti ve programmed ROM i s found, repl ace i t wi th
another ROM wi th the same HP part number. Refer to
Chapter 4, "Repl aceabl e Parts."
Al though some of these errors mi ght resul t i n a
bl anked di spl ay, i t i s possi bl e to read these errors over
HP-I B. Refer to "Troubl eshooti ng to a Functi onal
Secti on" i n thi s chapter.
705 ROM U306 Checksum error of program ROM A2U306.
706 ROM U307 Checksum error of program ROM A2U307.
707 ROM U308 Checksum error of program ROM A2U308.
708 ROM U309 Checksum error of program ROM A2U309.
709 ROM U310 Checksum error of program ROM A2U310.
710 ROM U311 Checksum error of program ROM A2U311.
RAM Check Errors (711 to 716)
The i nstrument power-on di agnosti cs check the
program RAM. Thi s i ncl udes the two RAMs used for
STATE storage. I f any STATE i nformati on i s found to
be i nval i d, al l data i n that RAM i s destroyed. A
separate error code i s generated for each defecti ve
program RAM. Al l RAM i s backed-up by battery. See
"State- and Trace- Storage Probl ems" i n Chapter 9.
711 RAM U303 Checksum error of system RAM A2U303.
712 RAM U302 Checksum error of system RAM A2U302.
326 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
System Analyzer Programming Errors (100 to 150)
713 RAM U301 Checksum error of system RAM A2U301.
714 RAM U300 Checksum error of system RAM A2U300.
715 RAM U305 Checksum error of system RAM A2U305.
716 RAM U304 Checksum error of system RAM A2U304.
Microprocessor Error (717)
717 BAD uP Mi croprocessor not ful l y operati onal . Refer to Chapter
9, "Control l er Secti on."
Battery Problem (718)
I f STATE or TRACE data i s found to be corrupt, the
processor tests the di spl ay RAMs and the program
RAMs contai ni ng the STATE i nformati on. I f the RAMs
are worki ng properl y, thi s error message i s generated.
To check the BT1 battery and the battery backup
ci rcui try, refer to "STATE and TRACE Storage
Probl ems" i n Chapter 9.
718 BATTERY? Nonvol ati l e RAM not worki ng; check battery BT1.
Thi s error can al so be generated i f the battery has been
di sconnected then reconnected. I f thi s i s the cause,
cycl i ng power cl ears the error.
Model Number Error (719)
I f thi s error occurs, return the i nstrument to a servi ce
center for repai r.
719 MODEL #? Coul d not read I D stri ng from EEROM A2U501.
System Errors (750 to 759)
These errors often requi re troubl eshooti ng the A2
control l er and A3 i nterface assembl i es.
750 SYSTEM Hardware/rmware i nteracti on, zero di vi de. Check for
other errors.
751 SYSTEM Hardware/rmware i nteracti on, oati ng poi nt overow.
Check for other errors.
752 SYSTEM Hardware/rmware i nteracti on, oati ng poi nt
underow. Check for other errors.
753 SYSTEM Hardware/rmware i nteracti on, l og error. Check for
other errors.
754 SYSTEM Hardware/rmware i nteracti on, i nteger overow.
Check for other errors.
Chapter 6 327
General Troubleshooting
System Analyzer Programming Errors (100 to 150)
755 SYSTEM Hardware/rmware i nteracti on, square root error.
Check for other errors.
756 SYSTEM Hardware/rmware i nteracti on, tri pl e overow. Check
for other errors.
757 SYSTEM Hardware/rmware i nteracti on, BCD overow. Check
for other errors.
758 SYSTEM Unknown system error.
759 SYSTEM Hardware/rmware i nteracti on. Code i nvoked for
wrong i nstrument.
Fast ADC Error (760)
Thi s error appl i es onl y to EC-seri es i nstruments and to
E-seri es i nstruments wi th fast ADC (Opti on 007).
760 NO FADC The FADC board di d not respond properl y to
i ni ti al i zati on commands.
Option Module Errors (800 to 899)
These error codes are reserved for opti on modul es, such
as the HP 85629 test and adjustment modul e and the
HP 85620A mass memory modul e. Refer to the opti on
modul e manual for a l i sti ng of error messages.
User-Generated Errors (900 to 999)
These error codes i ndi cate user-generated errors.
900 TG UNLVL Tracki ng generator output i s unl evel ed.
901 TGFrqLmt Tracki ng generator output unl evel ed because START
FREQ i s set bel ow tracki ng generator frequency l i mi t
(300 kHz).
902 BAD NORM The state of the stored trace does not match the
current state of the spectrum anal yzer.
903 A > DLMT Unnormal i zed trace A i s off-screen wi th trace math or
normal i zati on on.
904 B > DLMT Cal i brati on trace (trace B) i s off-screen wi th trace
math or normal i zati on on.
905 EXT REF Unabl e to l ock cal osci l l ator when set to external
frequency reference. Check that the external 10 MHz
reference i s wi thi n tol erance.
906 OVENCOLD The oven-control l ed crystal osci l l ator (OCXO) oven i s
col d.
328 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
System Analyzer Programming Errors (100 to 150)
907 DO IF CAL Uni t i s sti l l performi ng I F cal i brati ons, or i s i n need
of I F cal i brati ons whi ch were not yet done due to an
OVENCOLD condi ti on, si nce an OVENCOLD error i s
i ndi cati ve of a bandwi dth 1 kHz not getti ng cal i brated.
908 BW>>SPCG Channel bandwi dth i s too wi de, compared to the
channel spaci ng, for a meani ngful adjacent channel
power computati on.
909 SPANACP The frequency span i s too smal l to obtai n a val i d
adjacent channel power (ACP) measurement.
910 SPAN>ACP The frequency span i s too wi de, compared to the
channel bandwi dth, to obtai n a val i d adjacent channel
power (ACP) measurement.
Chapter 6 329
General Troubleshooting
Block Diagram Description
Block Diagram Description
The spectrum anal yzer i s compri sed of the si x mai n secti ons l i sted
bel ow. See Fi gure 6-6 on page 330. The fol l owi ng descri pti ons appl y to
the Si mpl i ed Bl ock Di agram and Overal l Bl ock Di agram l ocated at the
end of thi s chapter. Assembl y l evel bl ock di agrams are l ocated i n
Chapters 7 through 12.
330 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
Block Diagram Description
Figure 6-6 Functional Sections
Chapter 6 331
General Troubleshooting
Block Diagram Description
RF Section
The RF Secti on i ncl udes the fol l owi ng assembl i es:
A7 LODA (LO di stri buti on ampl i er)
A8 l ow band mi xer
A9 i nput attenuator
A10 tracki ng generator (Opti on 002)
A11 YTO (YI G-tuned osci l l ator)
A13 second converter
A14 frequency control assembl y (al so i n synthesi zer secti on)
A15 RF assembl y (al so i n synthesi zer secti on)
FL1, FL2 l ow-pass l ters
The RF secti on converts al l i nput si gnal s to a xed I F of 10.7 MHz. The
RF secti on mi croci rcui ts are control l ed by si gnal s from the A14
frequency control and A15 RF assembl i es.
The HP 8560E/EC spectrum anal yzer uses tri pl e conversi on to produce
the 10.7 MHz I F and a fourth conversi on used onl y i n resol uti on
bandwi dths 100 Hz. A8 l ow band mi xer up-converts the RF i nput to a
rst I F of 3.9107 GHz. A13 second converter down-converts the 3.9107
GHz I F to an I F of 310.7 MHz. A thi rd conversi on on the A15 RF
assembl y down-converts the second I F to the 10.7 MHz thi rd I F. A
fourth conversi on on the A4 l og ampl i er assembl y down-converts the
thi rd I F to the 4.8 kHz fourth I F used onl y i n resol uti on bandwi dths
100 Hz.
A7 LODA
The A7 LODA (LO di stri buti on ampl i er) l evel s the output of the A11
YTO and di stri butes the power to the front-panel 1STLO OUTPUT, A8
Low Band Mi xer, Opti on 002 Tracki ng Generator, and A15U100
Sampl er. The l evel i ng ci rcui try i s on the A14 Frequency Control
Assembl y.
A8 Low Band Mixer
A8 l ow band mi xer i s dc-coupl ed and contai ns a l i mi ter. I n spectrum
anal yzers wi th seri al number prex 3632A and greater, the A8 l ow
band mi xer al so contai ns an LObuffer ampl i er and an I F preampl i er.
A14 frequency control board assembl y provi des power for these
ampl i ers vi a cabl e harness W12.
332 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
Block Diagram Description
A9 Input Attenuator
The attenuator i s a 50 preci si on, coaxi al step attenuator. Attenuati on
i n 10 dB steps from 0 dB to 70 dB i s accompl i shed by swi tchi ng the
si gnal path through one or more of the three resi sti ve pads. The
attenuator automati cal l y sets to 70 dB and DC bl ock when the
spectrum anal yzer turns off, provi di ng ESD protecti on. (Note that the
i nput attenuator i s not el d-repai rabl e.)
A11 YTO
A11 i s a YTO (YI G-tuned osci l l ator). YI G (yttri um-i ron-garnet) i s a
ferro-magneti c materi al whi ch i s pol i shed i nto a smal l sphere and
preci sel y ori ented i n a magneti c el d. Changes i n thi s magneti c el d
al ter the frequency generated by the YTO. Current control of the
magneti c el d surroundi ng the YI G sphere tunes the osci l l ator to the
desi red frequency.
A13 Second Converter
The A13 second converter down-converts the 3.9107 GHz 1st I F to a
310.7 MHz 2nd I F. The converter generates a 3.6 GHz second LO by
mul ti pl yi ng a 600 MHz reference. Bandpass l ters remove unwanted
harmoni cs of the 600 MHz dri vi ng si gnal . Fi rst I F and 2nd LO si gnal s
are l tered by cavi ty l ters.
Second IF Distribution Amplier (part of A15)
The second I F di stri buti on ampl i er (SI FA) ampl i es and l ters the
second I F. (Opti on 001 i nstruments provi de the pre-l tered si gnal at
the rear panel 2ND I F OUTPUT.)
The external mi xi ng i nput from the front-panel I F I NPUT connector i s
al so di rected through the SI FA. A dc bi as i s pl aced onto the I F I NPUT
l i ne for bi asi ng external mi xers.
Third Converter (part of A15)
The thi rd converter down-converts the 310.7 MHz I F to 10.7 MHz. A
PI N-di ode swi tch sel ects the LO si gnal used. For normal operati on, a
300 MHz LO si gnal i s used. The si gnal i s deri ved from the 600 MHz
reference PLL. Duri ng si gnal i denti cati on (SI G I D ON) for Opti on 008,
the 298 MHz SI G I D osci l l ator i s fed to the doubl e bal anced mi xer on
al ternate sweeps.
Flatness Compensation Ampliers (part of A15)
The atness compensati on ampl i ers ampl i fy the output of the
doubl e-bal anced mi xer. The vari abl e gai n of the ampl i er (8 to 32 dB)
compensates for atness vari ati ons wi thi n a band. Band conversi on l oss
i s compensated by step gai n ampl i ers i n the I F secti on.
Chapter 6 333
General Troubleshooting
Block Diagram Description
Control for the ampl i ers ori gi nates from two DACs on the A3 i nterface
assembl y. (DAC val ues are i nterpol ated approxi matel y every 17 MHz
based on data obtai ned duri ng the frequency response adjustment.) A15
atness-compensati on control ci rcui try converts the RF GAI N vol tage,
from A3, i nto two currents: RF GAI N1 and RF GAI N2. These currents
dri ve PI N di odes i n the atness compensati on ampl i ers.
Synthesizer Section
The rst LO i s phase-l ocked to the i nternal 10 MHz standard of the
i nstrument by four PLLs. See Fi gure 6-7 on page 335.
The Reference PLL suppl i es reference frequenci es for the i nstrument.
The three remai ni ng PLLs tune and phase-l ock the LO through i ts
frequency range. To tune the LO to a parti cul ar frequency, the
i nstrument mi croprocessor must set the programmabl e feedback
di vi ders (N) and reference di vi ders (R) contai ned i n each PLL.
Sweeping the First LO
The spectrum anal yzer uses a method cal l ed l ock and rol l to sweep the
rst LO (A11 YTO) for LO spans >2 MHz. Thi s i nvol ves phase-l ocki ng
the spectrum anal yzer at the start frequency duri ng the retrace of the
sweep, then sweepi ng through the desi red frequency range i n an
unl ocked condi ti on. The sweep ramp, whi ch sweeps the LO duri ng the
rol l part of the l ock and rol l process, i s generated on the A14 frequency
control assembl y. I t i s appl i ed to ei ther A11 YTO mai n coi l or the A11
YTO FM coi l . For LO spans2.0 MHz, the YTO PLL remai ns l ocked and
the fracti onal N PLL sweeps whi l e remai ni ng phase l ocked. The
frequency/span rel ati onshi ps are as fol l ows:
When the sweep ramp i s appl i ed to the YTO, the spectrum anal yzer
must prevent thi s l oop from tryi ng to compensate for changes i n the
output frequency. To accompl i sh thi s, the spectrum anal yzer breaks the
PLL by di sconnecti ng the YTO PLL phase detector output.
Reference PLL (part of A15)
The 600 MHz reference PLL provi des 600 MHz for the second LO and
the A10 tracki ng generator (Opti on 002), 300 MHz for the thi rd LO, and
the sampl i ng osci l l ator reference and 10 MHz to the fracti onal N PLL.
The reference PLL i s l ocked to a 10 MHz OCXO (oven-compensated
Table 6-2 Location of Assembly Troubleshooting Text
A11 YTO Spanwidth Sweep Applied To
20.1 MHz to 3.8107 GHz A11 YTO mai n coi l
2.01 MHz to 20.0 MHz A11 YTO FM coi l
100 Hz to 2 MHz Fracti onal N phase l ocked l oop
334 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
Block Diagram Description
crystal osci l l ator) or an Opti on 103 TCXO (temperature-compensated
crystal osci l l ator). The PLL can al so be l ocked to an external frequency
reference.
The 10 MHz reference al so suppl i es the reference for the frequency
counter on the A2 control l er assembl y, and the cal osci l l ator on the A4
l og ampl i er assembl y.
YTO PLL (A7, A11, part of A14, part of A15)
The YTOPLL produces the rst LOof the i nstrument (3.0 to 6.81 GHz).
The YTO output i s mi xed wi th a harmoni c of the sampl i ng osci l l ator i n
the sampl er (A15U100), and the resul ti ng frequency i s phase-l ocked to
the output of the fracti onal N PLL.
The A15U100 sampl er mi xes the LO si gnal from the A7 LODA wi th a
harmoni c of the sampl i ng osci l l ator. The mi xi ng product, the sampl er
I F, i s between 60 and 96 MHz (same frequency range as the fracti onal
N PLL).
Offset Lock Loop (part of A15)
The 285 MHz to 297.2 MHz sampl i ng osci l l ator i s used to sampl e the
YTO. By changi ng the offset l ock l oop programmabl e di vi ders, the YTO
frequency can be changed.
Chapter 6 335
General Troubleshooting
Block Diagram Description
Figure 6-7 Phase Lock Loops
Fractional N PLL (part of A14)
The fracti onal N PLL produces an output of 60 MHz to 96 MHz. Thi s
PLL output serves as the reference frequency for the YTO PLL. A
one-to-one rel ati onshi p i n frequency tracki ng exi sts between the
fracti onal N PLL and the YTO. A change of 1 MHz i n the fracti onal N
PLL wi l l produce a 1 MHz change i n the YTO frequency.
IF Section
The I F secti on processes the 10.7 MHz output of the RF secti on and
sends the detected vi deo to the ADC/i nterface secti on. The fol l owi ng
major assembl i es are i ncl uded i n thi s secti on:
A3 i nterface assembl y
A4 l og ampl i er/cal osci l l ator assembl y
A5 I F assembl y
336 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
Block Diagram Description
The HP 8560E/EC uses trace-data mani pul ati on to generate the 5
dB/DI V scal e from the 10 dB/DI V scal e. The A3 i nterface assembl y
ampl i es and offsets the 10 dB/DI V vi deo to generate the 2 dB/DI V
scal e. The 1 dB/DI V scal e i s generated from the 2 dB/DI V scal e through
trace data mani pul ati on.
The rst 50 dB of I F gai n (l og and l i near mode) i s achi eved usi ng the
l i near step-gai n ampl i ers of the A5 assembl y. The A4 assembl y
vi deo-offset ci rcui t provi des the remai ni ng 60 dB of l og mode I F gai n.
The A4 assembl y l i near ampl i ers provi de 40 dB of l i near mode gai n.
I F gai n steps of l ess than 10 dB (regardl ess of the reference l evel ) are
accompl i shed on the A5 assembl y.
A4 Log Amplier/Cal Oscillator Assembly
The A4 l og ampl i er has separate l og and l i near ampl i er paths. After
ampl i cati on, the si gnal path consi sts of a l i near detector, vi deo l og
amp, buffer ampl i er, vi deo offset, and vi deo buffer ampl i er. Other
auxi l i ary functi ons i ncl ude the frequency counter prescal er/condi ti oner,
the AM/FM demodul ator, and down-conversi on to 4.8 kHz for di gi tal
resol uti on bandwi dths of 1 Hz through 100 Hz.
The cal osci l l ator, whi ch i s part of A4, suppl i es the sti mul us si gnal for
automati c I F adjustments. Normal l y, the osci l l ator operates onl y duri ng
retrace (for a few mi l l i seconds) to adjust part of the I F. (Al l I F
parameters wi l l be re-adjusted approxi matel y every ve mi nutes.) Wi th
conti nuous I F adjust on, a group of I F parameters are adjusted duri ng
each retrace peri od (non-di srupti ve). I f conti nuous I F adjust i s off, the
most recent I F cal i brati on data wi l l be used.
The I F parameters adjusted i ncl ude step gai ns, l og ampl i er gai n and
offset, bandwi dth centeri ng, 3 dB bandwi dth, bandwi dth ampl i tude,
crystal -l ter symmetry, and osci l l ator frequency used i n 1 Hz through
100 Hz resol uti on bandwi dths.
The cal osci l l ator output has three forms (al l 35 dBm):
10.7 MHz
9.9 to 11.5 MHz i n 100 kHz steps
Frequency sweeps from 20 kHz to 2 kHz centered at 10.7 MHz
(l asti ng 5 to 60 ms respecti vel y)
The purpose of these si gnal s i s to:
adjust gai ns, l og amps, and vi deo sl opes and offsets
adjust 3 dB bandwi dth and center frequenci es of LC resol uti on BW
l ters (30 kHz through 1 MHz)
adjust 3 dB bandwi dth, symmetry, and gai n of the crystal resol uti on
BW l ters (300 Hz through 10 kHz)
Chapter 6 337
General Troubleshooting
Block Diagram Description
adjust gai n and gai n-vs-frequency for di gi tal resol uti on bandwi dths
(1 Hz through 100 Hz)
A5 IF Assembly
The A5 I F assembl y has four crystal l ter pol es, four LC l ter pol es,
and step gai n ampl i ers. The crystal l ters provi de resol uti on
bandwi dths of 300 Hz to 10 kHz. The LC l ters provi de resol uti on
bandwi dths of 30 kHz to 2 MHz. Al l l ter stages are i n seri es. PI N di ode
swi tches bypass unwanted stages.
An automati c I F adjustment, i n spectrum anal yzer rmware, sets
center frequency and 3 dB bandwi dth of al l l ter pol es through varactor
and PI N di odes. The rmware al so control s crystal -pol e symmetry and
the step gai n ampl i cati on.
ADC/Interface Section
The ADC/i nterface secti on i s the l i nk between the control l er secti on and
the rest of the spectrum anal yzer. I t control s the RF, synthesi zer, and I F
secti ons through address and data l i nes on the W2 control cabl e (anal og
bus). Anal og si gnal s from these secti ons are moni tored by the ADC
(anal og to di gi tal converter) ci rcui t on the ADC/i nterface secti on.
The ADC/i nterface secti on i ncl udes the A3 i nterface assembl y, A1A1
keyboard, and A1A2 RPG (front-panel knob). The A3 assembl y i ncl udes
l og expand, vi deo l ter, peak detector, track-and-hol d, real -ti me DACs,
RF gai n DACs, +10 V reference, and ADC ci rcui try. The di gi tal secti on
i ncl udes ADC ASM, sweep tri gger, keyboard i nterface, RPG i nterface,
and anal og bus i nterface ci rcui try.
ADC
The HP 8560E/EC spectrum anal yzer can di gi ti ze si gnal s wi th ei ther
the mai n ADC on the A3 i nterface assembl y or wi th fast ADC ci rcui try,
whi ch i s avai l abl e as a standard feature, l ocated on the A2 control l er
board, on 8560EC i nstruments, and i s avai l abl e as an opti on, l ocated on
the A16 board (Opti on 007) on 8560E i nstruments. The mai n ADC i s
used for di gi ti zi ng vi deo si gnal s when the sweep ti me i s 30 ms and
vari ous other si gnal s, such as PLL error vol tages. The fast ADC i s used
onl y to di gi ti ze vi deo si gnal s for sweep ti mes <30 ms.
Main ADC (part of A3)
For sweep ti mes 30 ms, the spectrum anal yzer uses a successi ve
approxi mati on type of ADC. The mai n ADC has 10-bi t resol uti on but i t
i s real i zed wi th 12-bi t hardware. The ADC al gori thmi c state machi ne
(ADC ASM) control s the i nterface between the start/stop control and
the ADC, swi tchi ng between posi ti ve and negati ve peak detectors when
the NORMAL detector mode i s sel ected, and swi tchi ng the ramp
counter i nto the ADC for compari son to the anal og sweep ramp.
338 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
Block Diagram Description
Fast ADC in 8560 EC-series instruments
Fast ADC i s a standard feature i n al l 8560EC i nstruments.When sweep
ti mes <30 ms are sel ected, the spectrum anal yzer di gi ti zes vi deo si gnal s
wi th the fast ADC ci rcui try on the A2 control l er board. The fast ADC
uses an 8-bi t ash ADC that i s sampl ed at a 12 MHz rate. Onl y POS
PEAK, NEG PEAK, and SAMPLE detector modes are avai l abl e wi th
the fast ADC; NORMAL detector mode i s not avai l abl e. Pre-tri ggeri ng
i s possi bl e wi th the fast ADC.
A16 Fast ADC (8560 E-series only)
When opti on 007 i s i nstal l ed, and sweep ti mes <30 ms are sel ected, the
spectrum anal yzer di gi ti zes vi deo si gnal s wi th the A16 fast ADC. The
fast ADC uses an 8-bi t ash ADC that i s sampl ed at a 12 MHz rate.
Onl y POS PEAK, NEG PEAK, and SAMPLE detector modes are
avai l abl e wi th the fast ADC; NORMAL detector mode i s not avai l abl e.
Pre-tri ggeri ng i s possi bl e wi th the fast ADC.
Log Expand/Video Functions
The A3 i nterface assembl y performs l og expand and offset functi ons.
The l og expand/l og offset ampl i er provi des a 2 dB/di v l og scal e. When
the mai n ADC i s used, the 5 dB/di v scal e i s deri ved by mul ti pl yi ng the
di gi ti zed 10 dB/di v trace data by two i n the CPU. When the fast ADC i s
used, the 5 dB/di v scal e i s deri ved by ampl i fyi ng the vi deo si gnal by
two. The 1 dB/di v scal e i s deri ved by ei ther mul ti pl yi ng the 2 dB/di v
trace data by two (mai n ADC) or ampl i fyi ng the vi deo si gnal by two
(fast ADC).
The spectrum anal yzer uses two types of vi deo l ters. An RC l ow-pass
ci rcui t provi des 300 Hz to 3 MHz vi deo bandwi dths. Vi deo bandwi dths
of 1 Hz to 100 Hz are generated usi ng di gi tal l teri ng. When a di gi tal
l ter i s sel ected, a D appears al ong the l eft edge of the CRT, i ndi cati ng
that somethi ng other than the normal detector mode i s bei ng used.
Di gi tal l y l tered bandwi dths use a sampl e detector.
After l teri ng, the vi deo i s sent to the posi ti ve and negati ve peak
detectors. These detectors are desi gned for opti mum pul se response.
The posi ti ve peak detector resets at the end of each hori zontal "bucket"
(there are 601 such buckets across the screen). The negati ve peak
detector resets at the end of every other bucket. When reset, the output
of the peak detector equal s i ts i nput.
Triggering
The HP 8560E/EC has ve tri gger modes: free run, si ngl e, external ,
vi deo, and l i ne. The free run and si ngl e tri gger si gnal comes from the 1
MHz ADC cl ock. The l i ne tri gger si gnal comes from the A6 power
suppl y. Vi deo tri ggeri ng ori gi nates from the vi deo l ter buffer ci rcui t on
A3. External tri ggeri ng requi res ei ther a hi gh or l ow TTL l ogi c l evel as
determi ned by the setti ng of the tri gger pol ari ty functi on. The external
Chapter 6 339
General Troubleshooting
Block Diagram Description
tri gger si gnal i s recei ved from a rear panel BNC connector. A DAC i n
the tri gger ci rcui t sets the vi deo tri gger l evel . The tri gger ci rcui t i s
responsi bl e for setti ng HSCAN hi gh.
Controller Section
The control l er secti on i ncl udes the A2 control l er assembl y and A19
HP-I B assembl y. The battery on the rear panel provi des battery backup
for state and trace storage.
I n 8560EC i nstruments the A2 contai ns the CPU, RAM, ROM, the
di spl ay ASM, Fast ADC ci rcui try, HP-I B i nterface, control , frequency
counter, di spl ay RAM, opti on modul e i nterface, and EEROM.
I n 8560E i nstruments the A2 contai ns the CPU, RAM, ROM, the
di spl ay ASM and l i ne generators, CRTbl anki ng, focus, i ntensi ty, HP-I B
i nterface, control , frequency counter, di spl ay RAM, opti on modul e
i nterface, and EEROM. I n 8560E i nstruments the A2 assembl y control s
the A17 CRT dri ver through W7.
The A19 HP-I B i s a mechani cal i nterface between the standard HP-I B
connector and the ri bbon cabl e connector on the A2 control l er assembl y.
Al l si x RAM I Cs (there are onl y four RAM I Cs on newer A2 control l er
assembl i es) are battery-backed. The battery-backed RAM stores trace
i nformati on (two di spl ay memory RAMs) and spectrum anal yzer state
i nformati on (two program RAMs). A total of ei ght traces and ten states
may be stored. Typi cal battery l i fe i s ve years wi th the l i thi um battery.
Trace and state i nformati on may be retai ned for up to 30 mi nutes wi th
a dead battery and power turned off. Thi s i s due to the very l ow data
retenti on current of the RAMs.
EEROM
The EEROM stores i mportant ampl i tude-rel ated correcti on data. Thi s
i ncl udes data for LODA DACs and RF Gai n DACs (atness correcti on).
The spectrum anal yzer seri al number, model number, and i nstal l ed
opti ons are al so stored i n EEROM.
Firmware
The spectrum anal yzer rmware reads the model number and i nstal l ed
opti ons from the EEROM to determi ne how to respond to certai n
keystrokes.
Display ASM
Much of the mi scel l aneous di gi tal control i s performed by A2U100.
U100 functi ons as the di spl ay ASM (al gori thmi c state machi ne) and
character ROM. I t al so converts the 16-bi t CPU data bus to an 8-bi t
data bus for the rest of the spectrum anal yzer.
340 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
Block Diagram Description
Display/Power Supply Section
A6 Power Supply
The A6 power suppl y i s a swi tchi ng suppl y operati ng at 40 kHz for l ow
vol tages i n both EC-seri es and E-seri es i nstruments.
I n E-seri es i nstruments, the power suppl y al so provi des the 30 kHz
si gnal for the CRT suppl i es (cathode, l ament, +110 Vdc, and post
accel erator). The A6A1 hi gh vol tage modul e contai ns the hi gh-vol tage
transformer and post-accel erator mul ti pl i er. Power i s di stri buted
through W8 to A17 and through W1 to the rest of the assembl i es.
A6A1W2 suppl i es CRT cathode and l ament vol tages to the A17
assembl y.
The speed of the spectrum anal yzer fan i s vari abl e. A thermi stor on A6
senses the temperature and adjusts the fan speed accordi ngl y. Thi s
al l ows the spectrum anal yzer to run qui etl y i n most room-temperature
envi ronments and faster (l ouder) onl y when necessary.
A17 LCD Display Driver (EC-series)
The di spl ay i s an LCD col or at panel screen wi th 640 X 480 VGA
resol uti on. A connector for an external VGA i s avai l abl e at the rear
panel . The A17A1 backl i ght suppl y provi des the hi gh vol tage to suppl y
the two backl i ghts i n the LCD di spl ay. The LCD di spl ay i s not
adjustabl e.
The di spl ay dri ver board consi sts of the Hi tatchi 7707 processor, an
Actel FPGA, DRAM, SRAM, a l ter ci rcui t, and a vi deo DAC. Thi s
board moni tors the 8560 EC-seri es control l er board, copi es di spl ay
i nstructi ons to l ocal memory, creates a bi tmap from the data, and
generates the si gnal s needed to dri ve the LCD and a VGA moni tor. The
vi deo DAC converts the di gi tal col or i nformati on from the LCD to
anal og; these anal og si gnal s dri ve the RGB col or l i nes on the VGA port
on the rear panel .
A17 CRT Display Driver (E-series)
The l i ne generators on the A2 assembl y dri ve the A17 CRT dri ver. The
A17 assembl y contai ns X and Y deecti on ampl i ers, focus and
i ntensi ty gri d ampl i ers, and mi scel l aneous CRT bi as ci rcui try. The
hi gh vol tage i s suppl i ed by A6A1 hi gh vol tage modul e.
I n fast-anal og zero-span mode (sweep ti mes 30 ms wi thout Opti on
007), the 0-SPAN VI DEO si gnal from A3 and the sweep ramp from A14
connects to the A17 CRT dri ver. The grati cul e and annotati on are sti l l
di gi tal l y drawn.
342 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
Block Diagram Description
344 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
Block Diagram Description
346 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
Block Diagram Description
348 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
Block Diagram Description
350 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
Block Diagram Description
352 Chapter 6
General Troubleshooting
Block Diagram Description
353
7 ADC/Interface Section
354 Chapter 7
ADC/Interface Section
Introduction
Introduction
The ADC/I nterface secti on i ncl udes the A1A1 keyboard, A1A2 RPG
(rotary pul se generator), and A3 i nterface assembl i es. I n 8560E
i nstruments wi th opti on 007, the A16 fast ADC board i s al so part of the
ACD ci rcui try. For an expl anati on of fast ADC ci rcui try i n 8560EC
i nstruments see the secti on on the fast ADC l ocated i n chapter 9.
Tabl e 7-1 on page 355 l i sts si gnal versus pi n numbers for control cabl e
W2.
Troubl eshooti ng Usi ng the TAM........................................ page 357
Automati c Faul t I sol ati on ................................................. page 357
Keyboard/RPG Probl ems .................................................... page 360
Keyboard I nterface............................................................ page 360
RPG I nterface.................................................................... page 361
Tri ggeri ng or Vi deo Gati ng Probl ems ................................ page 363
Presel ector Peaki ng Control (Real Ti me DAC).................. page 366
Fl atness Control (RF Gai n DACs)...................................... page 367
A3 Assembl y Vi deo Ci rcui ts
Log Offset/Log Expand ..................................................... page 371
Vi deo MUX ........................................................................ page 372
Vi deo Fi l ter ........................................................................ page 372
Vi deo Fi l ter Buffer Ampl i er ............................................ page 374
Posi ti ve/Negati ve Peak Detectors..................................... page 374
Peak Detector Reset .......................................................... page 376
Rosenfel l Detector ............................................................. page 377
ADC MUX.......................................................................... page 378
Vari abl e Gai n Ampl i er (VGA) ........................................ page 380
Track and Hol d.................................................................. page 380
A3 Assembl y ADC Ci rcui ts ................................................. page 381
ADC Control Si gnal s ......................................................... page 381
ADC Start/Stop Control .................................................... page 382
ADC ASM .......................................................................... page 383
ADC.................................................................................... page 383
Ramp Counter ................................................................... page 384
A3 Assembl y Control Ci rcui ts ............................................ page 385
Anal og Bus Dri vers ........................................................... page 385
Anal og Bus Ti mi ng............................................................ page 386
I nterface Strobe Sel ect...................................................... page 387
A16 Assembl y Fast ADC Ci rcui ts (Opti on 007 i n the 8560E)....page 389
Vi deo I nput Scal i ng Ampl i ers and Li mi ter ................... page 389
8-Bi t Fl ash ADC................................................................ page 390
Peak/Pi t Detecti on............................................................. page 391
32 K-Byte Stati c RAM....................................................... page 392
A16 Assembl y Fast ADC Control Ci rcui ts (Opti on 007 i n the 8560E page 393
CPU I nterface and Control Regi sters .............................. page 393
Reference Cl ock ................................................................. page 397
Cl ock and Sampl e Rate Generator ................................... page 397
Chapter 7 355
ADC/Interface Section
Introduction
Tri gger ......................................................................... page 398
16-Bi t Post-Tri gger Counter ....................................... page 398
15-Bi t (32 K) Ci rcul ar Address Counter .................... page 399
Vi deo Tri gger Comparator .......................................... page 399
Table 7-1 W2 Control Cable Connections
Signal A3J 2(pins) A4J 2(pins) A5J 2(pins) A14J 2
(pins)
A15J 2
(pins)
D0 1* 1 50 1 1
D GND 2* 2 49 2 2
D1 3* 3 48 3 3
D2 4* 4 47 4 4
D3 5* 5 46 5 5
D4 6* 6 45 6 6
D GND 7* 7 44 7 7
D5 8* 8 43 8 8
D6 9* 9 42 9 9
D7 10* 10 41 10 10
A0 11* 11 40 11 11
D GND 12* 12 39 12 12
A1 13* 38 13 13
A2 14* 37 14 14
A3 15* 15 36 15 15
A4 16* 35 16 16
D GND 17* 17 34 17 17
A5 18* 33 18
A6 19* 32
A7 20* 31 20
D GND 21* 21 30 21 21
LRF_STB 22* 22
LFC_STB 23* 23
LI F_STB 24* 27
CAL OSC
TUNE
25 25*
LLOG_STB 26* 26
VCMON 27
D GND 28* 28 23 28 28
RT PULSE 29*
HSCAN 30* 30
D GND 31* 31 20 31 31
RESERVED
OFL ERR 33 33*
R/T DAC3 34*
356 Chapter 7
ADC/Interface Section
Introduction
A GND 35* 35 16 35 35
RF GAI N 36* 36
LO3 ERR 37 37*
A GND 38* 38 13 38 38
LVFC_
ENABLE
39* 39
FC ERR 40 40*
A GND 41* 41 10 41 41
YTO ERR 42 42*
+10V REF 43* 43 43
A GND 44* 44 7 44 44
SCAN
RAMP
45 45*
VI DEO
TRI GGER
46*
A GND 47* 47 4 47 47
NC
R/T DAC2 49*
R/T DAC1 50* 50
* I ndi cates si gnal source.
Table 7-1 W2 Control Cable Connections
Signal A3J 2(pins) A4J 2(pins) A5J 2(pins) A14J 2
(pins)
A15J 2
(pins)
Chapter 7 357
ADC/Interface Section
Troubleshooting Using the TAM
Troubleshooting Using the TAM
When usi ng Automati c Faul t I sol ati on, the TAM i ndi cates suspected
ci rcui ts that need to be manual l y checked. Use Tabl e 7-2 on page 358 to
l ocate the manual procedure.
Tabl e 7-3 on page 359 l i sts assembl y test connectors associ ated wi th
each Manual Probe Troubl eshooti ng test. Fi gure 7-1 on page 357
i l l ustrates the l ocati on of A3 test connectors.
Figure 7-1 A3 Test Connectors
Automatic Fault Isolation
Anal og data bus errors that occur duri ng Automati c Faul t I sol ati on
resul t from ei ther a shorted W2 control cabl e or faul ty A3 assembl y.
Perform the fol l owi ng steps to determi ne the cause of the error:
1. Di sconnect W2 from A3J2 and repeat the Automati c Faul t I sol ati on
procedure.
2. I f the anal og data bus error i s sti l l present, troubl eshoot the A3
I nterface assembl y. I f the error di sappears, l ook for a short on W2 or
another assembl y connecti ng to i t.
3. To i sol ate a short on W2, reconnect W2 to A3J2 and di sconnect W2
from al l other assembl i es.
4. Repeat the Automati c Faul t I sol ati on routi ne.
5. I f the anal og data bus error i s sti l l present, W2 i s shorted. I f the
error di sappears, reconnect the other assembl i es one at a ti me and
repeat the procedure. Once the faul ty assembl y i s reconnected to
W2, the error shoul d reappear.
358 Chapter 7
ADC/Interface Section
Troubleshooting Using the TAM
Table 7-2 Automatic Fault Isolation References
Suspected Circuit
Indicated by Automatic
Fault Isolation
Manual Procedure to Perform
Check ADC ASM ADC ASM
Check ADC MUX ADC MUX
Check ADC Start/Stop
Control
ADC Start/Stop Control
Check Anal og Bus Dri vers Automati c Faul t I sol ati on (in this chapter)
Anal og Bus Dri vers
Check Anal og Bus Ti mi ng Automati c Faul t I sol ati on (in this chapter)
Anal og Bus Ti mi ng
Check I nterface Strobe Sel ect I nterface Strobe Sel ect
Check Keyboard I nterface Keyboard/RPG Probl ems
Check Negati ve Peak
Detector
Posi ti ve/Negati ve Peak Detectors (steps 3
through 10)
Check Peak Detector Reset Peak Detector Reset
Check Posi ti ve Peak Detector Posi ti ve/Negati ve Peak Detectors (steps 3
through 10)
Check Real Ti me DAC Presel ector Peaki ng Control (Real Ti me DAC)
Check Ramp Counter Ramp Counter
Check RF Gai n DACs Band Fl atness Control (RF Gai n DACs)
Check Rosenfel l Detector Rosenfel l Detector
Check RPG I nterface Keyboard/RPG Probl ems
Check Track and Hol d Track and Hol d
Check Tri gger Tri ggeri ng Probl ems
Check Vari abl e Gai n
Ampl i er (VGA)
Vari abl e Gai n Ampl i er (VGA)
Check Vi deo Fi l ter Vi deo Fi l ter
Check Vi deo Fi l ter Buffer
Ampl i er
Vi deo Fi l ter Buffer Ampl i er
Check Vi deo MUX Vi deo MUX
Chapter 7 359
ADC/Interface Section
Troubleshooting Using the TAM
Table 7-3 TAM Tests versus A3 Test Connectors
Connector Manual ProbeTroubleshooting
Test
Measured Signal
Lines
A3J105 Vi deo I nput to I nterface MS1
Vi deo to Rear Panel MS1, MS2
Vi deo MUX MS1, MS3
LOG Offset/LOG Expand MS1, MS3
Vi deo Fi l ter Buffer Amp. MS3, MS5, OS1
Vi deo Peak Detectors MS5, MS6
ADC MUX MS6
Vari abl e Gai n Ampl i er MS6, MS7
Track and Hol d MS7, MS8
A3J400 Revi si on MS2
Tri gger MS8
ADC Start/Stop Control MS7
Vi deo Tri gger DAC MS1
Real Ti me DAC #1 MS3
RF Gai n DACs MS6
360 Chapter 7
ADC/Interface Section
Keyboard/RPG Problems
Keyboard/RPG Problems
Keyboard Interface
Refer to functi on bl ock G of A3 I nterface Assembl y Schemati c
Di agram (sheet 3 of 6) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer
Component Level I nformation.
A pressed key resul ts i n a l ow on a keyboard sense l i ne (LKSNS0
through LKSNS7). Thi s sets the output of NAND gate U607 hi gh,
generati ng KBD/RPG_I RQ. The CPU determi nes the key pressed by
setti ng onl y one keyboard scan l i ne (LKSCN0 through LKSCN5) l ow
through U602 and readi ng the keyboard sense l i nes.
1. I f none of the keys or RPG responds, check ri bbon cabl e, A1A1W1.
(Thi s cabl e connects the A1A1 keyboard to the A3 i nterface
assembl y.) The keys are arranged i n a row/col umn matri x, as shown
i n Tabl e 7-4 on page 360.
2. I f an enti re row or col umn of keys does not respond, and the RPG
does respond, there mi ght be an open or shorted wi re i n A1A1W1.
3. Check that al l i nputs to NAND gate A3U607 (LKSNS l i nes) are hi gh
when no key i s pressed. I f any i nput i s l ow, conti nue wi th the
fol l owi ng:
a. Di sconnect A1A1W1 from A3J602 and agai n check al l i nputs to
U607.
b. I f any i nput i s l ow wi th A1A1W1 di sconnected, suspect A3U604,
A3U607, or A3U602.
c. Reconnect A1A1W1 to A3J602.
4. Moni tor A3U607 pi n 8 wi th a l ogi c probe. A TTL hi gh shoul d be
present when any key i s hel d down. Moni tor thi s poi nt whi l e
pressi ng each key i n successi on.
Table 7-4 Keyboard Matrix
LKSNS0 LKSNS1 LKSNS2 LKSNS3 LKSNS4 LKSNS5 LKSNS6 LKSNS7
LKSCN0 CONFI G SAVE RECALL GHz MHz kHz Hz PRESET
LKSCN1 MODULE TRI G DI SP 9 6 3 BK SP
LKSCN2 PEAK BW TRACE 8 5 2
SEARCH
LKSCN3 FREQ AUTO MKR 7 4 1 0 HOLD
COUNT COUPLE
LKSCN4 SWEEP SK1 SK2 SK3 SK4 SK5 SK6 MKR
LKSCN5 AUX MEAS/
USER
CAL SGL COPY FRE- SPAN AMPLI -
CTRL SWP QUENCY TUDE
Chapter 7 361
ADC/Interface Section
Keyboard/RPG Problems
5. Check that the LKSCN l i nes (outputs of A3J602 pi ns 1 through 6)
read a TTL l ow wi th no key pressed. (Any TTL hi gh i ndi cates a
faul ty A3 I nterface assembl y.)
6. Check that a pul se i s present at each LKSCN output of U602 when a
key i s pressed.
7. Check that onl y one i nput to U607 (LKSNS l i nes) goes l ow when a
key i s pressed.
8. Check that U602 pi n 9 (LKBD_RESET) pul ses l ow when a key i s
pressed.
9. I f LKBD_RESET i s i ncorrect and a pul se i s not present at each of
the LKSCN outputs of U602 when a key i s pressed, check for
LWRCLK and LSCAN_KBD.
RPG Interface
Refer to functi on bl ock J of A3 I nterface Assembl y Schemati c
Di agram (sheet 3 of 6) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer
Component Level I nformation.
U608B l atches the RPG di recti on from the two RPG outputs,
RPG_COUNT and RPG_COUNT1. Countercl ockwi se RPG rotati on
produces l ow-goi ng pul ses whi ch resul t i n a hi gh output on U608B.
Cl ockwi se RPG rotati on resul ts i n a l ow output from U608B. U612A
provi des the edge to tri gger one-shot U423B, whi ch generates a 90 ms
pul se. Thi s pul se gates U610A for counti ng of RPG pul ses by U606.
Gates U610D and U614D prevent retri ggeri ng of U423B unti l i ts 90 ms
pul se has ti med out.
NOTE El sewhere, RPG_COUNT1 i s referred to as RPG_01 and RPG_COUNT
i s referred to as RPG_02.
1. Moni tor A3U401 pi n 2 wi th a l ogi c probe or osci l l oscope. Pul ses
shoul d be present as the RPG i s rotated.
2. Moni tor A3U608 pi n 12 as the RPG i s rotated. Pul ses shoul d be
present.
3. I f pul ses are mi ssi ng at both poi nts, check for power and ground
si gnal s to A1A1W1 and A1A2W1. I f both power and ground are
there, the A1A2 RPG i s probabl y defecti ve.
4. I f pul ses are mi ssi ng at onl y one poi nt, check for an open or short on
A1A1W1 and A1A2W1. I f these cabl es are worki ng properl y, A1A2
RPG i s probabl y defecti ve.
5. Press LINE to turn spectrum anal yzer off and di sconnect A1A1W1
from A3J602. Jumper A3U608 pi n 12 (RPG_COUNT) to U608 pi n 14
(+5 Vdc). Jumper U401 pi n 2 (RPG_COUNT1) to U511 pi n 11
(HDPKD_CLK). Thi s provi des a 7.8 kHz square wave to the
362 Chapter 7
ADC/Interface Section
Keyboard/RPG Problems
RPG_COUNT1 i nput of the RPG I nterface.
6. Press LINE to turn spectrum anal yzer on.
7. Check A3U608 pi n 9 for narrow, l ow-goi ng pul ses approxi matel y
every 90 ms.
8. Check A3U608 pi n 13 (LRPG_RESET) for narrow, l ow-goi ng pul ses
approxi matel y every 90 ms.
9. Check A3U612 pi n 5 for narrow, l ow-goi ng pul ses approxi matel y
every 90 ms.
10.Check U608 pi n 5 (HRPG_I RQ) for narrow, hi gh-goi ng pul ses
approxi matel y every 90 ms.
11.I f HRPG_I RQ i s correct but LRPG_RESET i s i ncorrect, check U505
pi n 13 (LKBD/RPG_I RQ) for narrow, l ow-goi ng pul ses approxi matel y
every 90 ms.
12.I f HRPG_I RQand LKBD/RPG_I RQare correct but LRPG_RESETi s
i ncorrect, suspect a fai l ure on the A2 control l er assembl y.
13.Check U610 pi n 3 for a 7.8 kHz square wave. Check U606 pi n 2
(HRPG_RESET) for narrow, hi gh-goi ng pul ses approxi matel y every
90 ms. Refer to Tabl e 7-5 on page 362 and check the frequenci es at
di vi de-by-16 counter A3U606.
14.I f al l the checks above are correct but the spectrum anal yzer does
not respond to the RPG, suspect a probl em i n ei ther the A1A2 RPG
or the A1A1 Keyboard.
15.Press LINE to turn spectrum anal yzer off.
16.Reconnect A1A1W1 to A3J602 and remove al l jumpers.
Table 7-5 Counter Frequencies
A3U606 pin # Nominal Frequency (Hz)
3 3900
4 1950
5 975
6 488
11 244
10 122
9 61
Chapter 7 363
ADC/Interface Section
Triggering or Video Gating Problems
Triggering or Video Gating Problems
Refer to functi on bl ock H of A3 I nterface Assembl y Schemati c
Di agram (sheet 3 of 6) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer
Component Level I nformation.
The 1 MHz ADC cl ock provi des synchroni zati on i n FREE RUN and
SI NGLE tri ggeri ng. LI NE tri ggeri ng synchroni zati on ori gi nates on the
A6 power suppl y. Tri gger MUX A3U613 sel ects between FREE RUN,
VI DEO, LI NE, and EXTERNAL tri gger sources. The tri gger si gnal sets
the output of the HSCAN l atch hi gh. HBADC_CLK0 provi des the
tri gger si gnal for FREE RUN. The VI DEO TRI G si gnal must be at l east
25 mV (0.25 di vi si ons) peak-to-peak to tri gger i n vi deo tri gger mode.
The tri gger for Gated Vi deo has two modes of operati on, l evel mode and
edge mode. I n the edge mode, posi ti ve-edge or negati ve-edge tri ggeri ng
can be sel ected. Output 0 from pi n 10 of A3U617 generates the gate
del ay and output 1 from pi n 13 of A3U617 generates the gate l ength.
The durati on of these two ti me i nterval s i s set usi ng front panel
softkeys under the SWEEP key. The tri gger i nput for Gated Vi deo i s the
rear panel EXT/GATE TRI G I NPUT (TTL > 10 k).
1. Check that the tri gger MUX i s recei vi ng the proper tri gger source
i nformati on by sel ecti ng each of the fol l owi ng tri gger modes and
checki ng the TRI G_SOURCE0 and TRI G_SOURCE1 l i nes as
i ndi cated i n Tabl e 7-6 on page 363.
2. I f a tri gger mode does not work, check that a tri gger si gnal i s present
at the appropri ate tri gger MUX i nput, as i ndi cated i n Tabl e 7-6 on
page 363.
3. Check that the appropri ate tri gger MUX i nput si gnal i s present at
the tri gger MUX output (A3U613 pi n 7).
4. To check the vi deo tri gger l evel DAC, connect the posi ti ve l ead of a
DVM to A3J400 pi n 1, and the negati ve l ead to A3TP4.
Table 7-6 Trigger MUX Truth Table
Trigger
Mode
TRIG_SOU
RCE0U613
pin 14
TRIG_SOU
RCE1U613
pin 2
MUXInput
Pin
Number
U613
FREE RUN L L 6
VI DEO H L 5
LI NE H H 3
EXTERNAL L H 4
364 Chapter 7
ADC/Interface Section
Triggering or Video Gating Problems
5. Press TRIG and VIDEO.
6. Press the STEP M key several ti mes whi l e noti ng the DVM readi ng
and posi ti on of the vi deo tri gger l evel on the screen.
7. Check that the vol tage di spl ayed on the DVM changes by 1 V for
each step of the VI DEO TRI G LEVEL.
8. I f the vol tage changes i ncorrectl y, proceed as fol l ows:
a. Check the 10 Vdc reference (A3U409 pi n 4).
b. Whi l e usi ng the front panel knob to adjust the vi deo tri gger l evel ,
check for the presence of pul ses on A3U409 pi n 15 (LDAC2).
c. Whi l e usi ng the front panel knob to adjust the vi deo tri gger l evel ,
check for the presence of pul ses on A3U409 pi n 16 (LWRCLK).
d. Check that pul ses are present on U409 pi n 6 (I A0).
9. I f the LWRCLK and LDAC2 si gnal s are not correct, refer to
"I nterface Strobe Sel ect" i n thi s chapter.
10.I f correct tri gger pul ses are present at the tri gger MUX output
(A3U613 pi n 7), but the i nstrument does not appear to be sweepi ng,
proceed as fol l ows:
a. Press PRESET, SWEEP, and DLY SWP ON OFF unti l ON i s
underl i ned, then DLY SWP [ ] 30 mi l l i seconds.
b. Usi ng an osci l l oscope, check for acti vi ty at pi ns 1 and 3 of
A3U615A.
c. I f there i s acti vi ty at pi n 1 but not at pi n 3 of A3U615A, suspect
A3U616 or A3U617.
d. I f there i s acti vi ty at pi n 1 and pi n 3 of A3U615A, suspect
A3U615. (Check pi n 5 for acti vi ty.)
11.I f there i s a probl em wi th Vi deo Gati ng, proceed as fol l ows:
a. Press PRESET and set the HP 8560E/EC as fol l ows:
Center frequency ................................................ 300 MHz
Span ............................................................................ 0 Hz
Sweep ti me ............................................................. 150 ms
b. Press TRIG, EXTERNAL, then SWEEP and GATE ON
OFF unti l ON i s underl i ned.
c. Press GATE DLY [ ] 10 mi l l i seconds, then press GATE
LEN [ ] 30 mi l l i seconds.
d. Connect a pul se/functi on generator (such as an HP 8116A) to
provi de a 5 V peak-to-peak square wave (TTL l evel ) to the HP
8560E/EC rear panel EXT/GATE TRI G I NPUT and al so (usi ng a
BNC tee) to the channel 4 i nput of the osci l l oscope (HP 54501A).
Chapter 7 365
ADC/Interface Section
Triggering or Video Gating Problems
e. Set the pul se/functi on generator to NORMAL mode wi th a duty
cycl e of 50% and a frequency of 10 Hz.
f. Press the fol l owi ng keys on the osci l l oscope:
CLEAR DISPLAY
off frame axes grid ........................................hi ghl i ght grid
connect dots off on ......................................... hi ghl i ght on
TRIG
source 1 2 3 4 ................................................... hi ghl i ght 4
level .............................................................................. 2 V
TIMEBASE
TIMEBASE ......................................................... 50 ms/di v
CHAN
CHANNEL 1 2 3 4 off on
CHANNEL 1 on
set V/di v to 0.2 V and offset to 0.6 V (10:1 probe used)
CHANNEL 4 on
set V/di v to 2 V and offset to 0 V
DISPLAY
DISPLAY norm avg env ...............................hi ghl i ght norm
g. Usi ng a 10:1 probe connected to channel 1 of the osci l l oscope,
check for acti vi ty at pi ns 10 and 13 of A3U617.
h. I f ei ther pi n (or both) show no acti vi ty, check for acti vi ty at pi n 21
(LTI MER) of A3U617.
i . I f LTI MER i s not acti ve, troubl eshoot the I nterface Strobe Sel ect
ci rcui try (bl ock K).
j. I f there was acti vi ty at pi ns 10 and 13 of A3U617, suspect
A3U616.
366 Chapter 7
ADC/Interface Section
Preselector Peaking Control (Real Time DAC)
Preselector Peaking Control (Real Time DAC)
Refer to functi on bl ock L of A3 I nterface Assembl y Schemati c
Di agram (sheet 4 of 6) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer
Component Level I nformation.
The HP 8560E/EC uses a real -ti me DAC (R/T DAC1) to peak the
presel ector.
1. Press PRESET on the HP 8560E/EC and set the span to 0 Hz.
2. Connect a posi ti ve DVM l ead to A3J400 pi n 3 and the negati ve DVM
l ead to A3TP4.
3. Press MKR, AUX CTRL, INTERNAL MIXER, and PRESEL MAN
ADJ.
4. Moni tor the DVM readi ng whi l e changi ng the PRESELECTOR
TUNE val ue from 0 to 255. The PRESELECTOR TUNE val ue i s the
setti ng of R/T DAC1.
5. Check that the DVM readi ng i ncreases from 0 to approxi matel y +10
Vdc as R/T DAC1 i s set from 0 to 255.
6. I f the vol tage does not change as descri bed, set the spectrum
anal yzer to si ngl e tri gger mode and check the fol l owi ng:
a. Check that A3U409B pi n 18 i s at 10 Vdc.
b. Check for the presence of pul ses at U409 pi n 6 (I A0).
c. Check that pul ses are present at U409 pi n 15 (LDAC2).
d. Check that pul ses are present at U409 pi n 16 (LWRCLK).
7. I f the LDAC2 or LWRCLK si gnal s are i ncorrect, refer to "I nterface
Strobe Sel ect" i n thi s chapter.
Chapter 7 367
ADC/Interface Section
Flatness Control (RF Gain DACs)
Flatness Control (RF Gain DACs)
Refer to functi on bl ock M of A3 I nterface Assembl y Schemati c
Di agram (sheet 4 of 6) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer
Component Level I nformation.
RF Gai n DACs control the A15 assembl y atness compensati on
ampl i ers. The RF Gai n DACs are arranged so that the output of one
DAC i s the vol tage reference for the other DAC. Thi s resul ts i n an RF
GAI N vol tage whi ch i s exponenti al l y proporti onal to the DAC setti ngs.
Each DAC i s set to the same val ue. The A15 RF assembl y converts the
RF GAI N si gnal to a current for dri vi ng the PI N di ode attenuators i n
the Fl atness Compensati on Ampl i ers. The exponenti al l y-varyi ng
vol tage compensates for the nonl i near resi stance-versus-current
characteri sti c of the PI N di odes.
1. Pl ace the WR PROT/WR ENA jumper on the A2 control l er assembl y
i n the WR ENA posi ti on.
2. Press CAL, MORE 1 OF 2, SERVICE CAL DATA, FLATNESS, and
FLATNESS DATA. Press NEXT BAND unti l "FLATNESS BAND #0" i s
di spl ayed.
3. Press the L key unti l "DATA @ 300 MHz" i s di spl ayed. Note the
number di rectl y underneath "DATA @ 300 MHz"; thi s i s the RF Gai n
DAC val ue.
4. Connect a posi ti ve DVM l ead to A3J400 pi n 13 and the negati ve
DVM l ead to A3TP4.
5. Check that the DVM readi ng i ncreases from near 0 Vdc to between
1.3 and 1.9 Vdc as the RF Gai n DAC setti ng i s i ncreased from 0 to
4095.
6. I f the DVM readi ngs are i ncorrect, press PRESET, SGL SWP, CAL,
MORE 1 OF 2, SERVICE CAL DATA, FLATNESS, and FLATNESS
DATA. Press NEXT BAND unti l "FLATNESS BAND #0" i s di spl ayed.
Press the L key unti l "DATA @ 300 MHz" i s di spl ayed. Proceed as
fol l ows:
a. Check the +10 V reference.
b. Check for narrow, l ow-goi ng pul ses at A3U417 pi n 13 (LWRCLK).
c. Whi l e rotati ng the front panel knob, check for narrow, l ow-goi ng
pul ses at A3U417 pi n 1 (LDAC1) and pi n 14 (LDACU1).
d. Whi l e rotati ng the front panel knob, check for narrow, l ow-goi ng
pul ses at U417 pi n 16 (L_I A0) and pi n 15 (I A4).
7. I f the LWRCLK, LDAC1, or LDACU1 i s i ncorrect, refer to the
I nterface Strobe Sel ect bl ock i n thi s chapter.
368 Chapter 7
ADC/Interface Section
Flatness Control (RF Gain DACs)
8. Pl ace the WR PROT/WR ENA jumper on the A2 control l er assembl y
i n the WR PROT posi ti on. Press PRESET.
Chapter 7 369
ADC/Interface Section
A3 Assembly Video Circuits
A3 Assembly Video Circuits
Vol tages from A3J101 to the A3 Vari abl e Gai n Ampl i er correspond
(approxi matel y) to on-screen si gnal l evel s. (One vol t corresponds to the
top of the screen and zero vol ts corresponds to the bottom of the screen.)
Thi s i s true for both l og and l i near setti ngs except when the spectrum
anal yzer i s i n 1 dB/di v or 2 dB/di v. I n these cases the l og expand
ampl i er i s sel ected, and 1 V corresponds to top-screen and 0.8 or 0.9 V
corresponds to bottom-screen. The spectrum anal yzer can be set to zero
span at the peak of a si gnal to generate a constant dc vol tage i n the
vi deo ci rcui ts duri ng sweeps.
1. Di sconnect W26 from A3J101 and W20 from A2J4.
2. Connect W26 to A2J4.
3. Set the HP 8560E/EC to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz
Sweep ti me ................................................................. 20 ms
Resol uti on bandwi dth .............................................. 1 MHz
Log/di vi si on ........................................................... 10 dB/di v
4. I f a trace i s di spl ayed, troubl eshoot the A3 assembl y. I f a trace i s
absent, connect an osci l l oscope to the rear panel BLKG/GATE
OUTPUT.
5. The presence of a TTL si gnal (TTL l ow duri ng 20 ms sweep)
i ndi cates a good A3 I nterface Assembl y. Troubl eshoot the I F secti on.
6. I f the BLKG/GATE OUTPUT i s al ways at a TTL hi gh or l ow,
troubl eshoot the A3 tri gger/vi deo gati ng ci rcui ts.
7. Reconnect W26 to A3J101 and W20 to A2J4.
8. Remove the A3 assembl y shi el d.
9. I f the vi deo l ters appear faul ty, see "Vi deo Fi l ter" i n thi s chapter.
10.I f there appears to be a peak detector probl em, refer to
"Posi ti ve/Negati ve Peak Detectors" i n thi s chapter.
11.Connect CAL OUTPUTto I NPUT50 of the HP 8560E/EC, and set
the control s as fol l ows:
Center frequency .................................................. 300 MHz
Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz
Reference l evel ...................................................... 10 dBm
12.I f the spectrum anal yzer works correctl y i n 5 dB/di v and 10 dB/di v
but not i n 1 dB/di v or 2 dB/di v, refer to "Log Offset/Log Expand" i n
thi s chapter. Conti nue wi th step 13 i f the probl em i nvol ves on-screen
ampl i tude errors whi ch appear to ori gi nate i n the vi deo chai n.
370 Chapter 7
ADC/Interface Section
A3 Assembly Video Circuits
13.Press CAL and IF ADJ ON OFF unti l OFF i s underl i ned. Moni tor
A3TP9 wi th an osci l l oscope. I f the vol tage i s not approxi matel y +1
Vdc, troubl eshoot the Log Ampl i er on A4. (Refer to the I F
troubl eshooti ng procedure i n Chapter 8.)
14.To conrm proper vi deo i nput to the vi deo ci rcui t, set the HP
8560E/EC to Log 10 dB per di vi si on and change the reference l evel
i n 10 dB steps from 10 dBm to +30 dBm. At each 10 dB step, the
i nput vol tage shoul d change 100 mV. The i nput l evel shoul d be +0.6
Vdc for a +30 dBm reference l evel .
NOTE The on-screen ampl i tude l evel wi l l probabl y not change as expected,
si nce the vi deo ci rcui try i s assumed to be faul ty.
15.Moni tor A3TP14 whi l e steppi ng the reference l evel from 10 dBm to
+30 dBm. I f the vol tage does not step approxi matel y 100 mV per 10
dB step, refer to "Vi deo MUX" i n thi s chapter.
16.I f the Vi deo MUX i s worki ng properl y, moni tor A3TP15 wi th the
osci l l oscope and step the reference l evel from 10 dBm to +30 dBm.
I f the vol tage does not change 100 mV per 10 dB step, refer to "Vi deo
Fi l ter" i n thi s chapter.
17.I f the vol tage at A3TP15 i s correct, move the osci l l oscope probe to
A3TP17 and step the reference l evel between 10 dBm and +30
dBm. I f the vol tage does not change 100 mV per 10 dB step, refer to
"Vi deo Fi l ter Buffer Ampl i er" i n thi s chapter.
18.I f the vol tage at A3TP17 i s correct, move the osci l l oscope probe to
A3TP6. Set the fol l owi ng control s to keep the ADC MUX set to the
MOD_VI DEO i nput duri ng the sweep.
SWEEP TI ME ................................................................... 50 s
DETECTOR MODE ................................................ SAMPLE
19.Step the reference l evel from 10 dBm to +30 dBm whi l e moni tori ng
the vol tage change on the osci l l oscope. I f the vol tage does not change
100 mV per 10 dB step, refer to "ADC MUX" i n thi s chapter.
20.I f the vol tage at A3TP6 i s correct, move the osci l l oscope probe to
A3TP8 and step the reference l evel between 10 dBm and +30 dBm.
I f the vol tage at A3TP8 i s not the same as that at A3TP6, repl ace
A3U110.
21.I f the vol tage at A3TP8 and A3TP6 are equal , move the osci l l oscope
probe to A3TP7.
22.Change the reference l evel from 10 dBm to 0 dBm. The vol tage
change on A3TP7 shoul d be between 630 mV and 770 mV. I f the
vol tage change i s outsi de of these l i mi ts, refer to "Vari abl e Gai n
Ampl i er (VGA)" i n thi s chapter. The gai n of the VGA shoul d be 7
10%.
Chapter 7 371
ADC/Interface Section
A3 Assembly Video Circuits
Log Offset/Log Expand
Refer to functi on bl ock X of A3 I nterface Assembl y Schemati c
Di agram (sheet 5 of 6) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer
Component Level I nformation.
The l og scal es are modi ed usi ng a combi nati on of ampl i cati on and
di gi tal trace mani pul ati on. The vi deo i nput to the A3 assembl y i s ei ther
10 dB/di v or l i near. To obtai n the 5 dB/di v scal e, the CPU mani pul ates
the trace data from the 10 dB/di v scal e. To obtai n the 2 dB/di v scal e, the
vi deo si gnal i s ampl i ed and offset so that top-screen i n 10 dB/di v
corresponds to top-screen i n 2 dB/di v. To obtai n the 1 dB/di v scal e, the
CPU mani pul ates trace data from the 2 dB/di v scal e.
I n 2 dB/di v, Log Offset/Log Expand ampl i es the top 20 dB of the
di spl ay. Thi s i s done by offsetti ng the vi deo si gnal by 0.8 V and
provi di ng a gai n of 5 to the top 0.2 V of the vi deo si gnal . The 0.8 V
offset i s accompl i shed by si nki ng 2 mA through R114 by current source
U105/Q101.
1. On the HP 8560E/EC, press PRESET, SPAN, ZERO SPAN, CAL, and IF
ADJ OFF.
2. Di sconnect W26 (coax 2) from A3J101 and connect the output of a
functi on generator to A3J101.
3. Set the functi on generator to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Output ................................................................. Si ne wave
Ampl i tude ........................................................ 1 V pk-to-pk
DC Offset .............................................................. +500 mV
Frequency ................................................................... 50 Hz
4. Set the HP 8560E/EC sweep ti me to 50 ms.
5. Adjust the functi on generator ampl i tude and offset unti l the si ne
wave l l s the enti re grati cul e area.
6. Measure and note the functi on generator peak-to-peak vol tage usi ng
an osci l l oscope.
V
(10 dB/di v)
=______________________________V
7. Set the HP 8560E/EC to 2 dB/di v.
8. Readjust the functi on generator ampl i tude and offset unti l the si ne
wave agai n l l s the enti re grati cul e area.
9. Measure the functi on generator peak-to-peak vol tage and dc offset.
V
(2 dB/di v)
= ______________________________V
10.The rati o of vol tage recorded i n step 6 to the vol tage recorded i n step
9 shoul d be 5 3%. I f the rati o i s not 5, troubl eshoot the A3 assembl y.
11.Reconnect W26 to A3J101.
372 Chapter 7
ADC/Interface Section
A3 Assembly Video Circuits
Video MUX
Refer to functi on bl ock U of A3 I nterface Assembl y Schemati c
Di agram (sheet 5 of 6) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer
Component Level I nformation.
1. Press PRESET and set the HP 8560E/EC control s as fol l ows:
Center frequency ..................................................... 300 MHz
Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz
2. Press SGL SWP, CAL, and IF ADJ OFF. Connect the CAL OUTPUT to
the I NPUT 50 connector.
3. Check for a TTL hi gh on A3U104 pi n 2 and a TTL l ow on U104 pi n
10. Set the spectrum anal yzer to 2 dB/di v and check for a TTL hi gh
on A3U104 pi n 10 and a TTL l ow on A3U104 pi n 2.
4. I f the l ogi c l evel s on A3U104 are i ncorrect, check the LLOG_STB
si gnal as fol l ows:
a. Moni tor A3U104 pi n 9 wi th an osci l l oscope or l ogi c probe. Check
that a 1 mi crosecond, l ow-goi ng pul se i s present when swi tchi ng
between 10 dB/di v and 2 dB/di v.
b. Check the i nputs to A3U104 (pi ns 3 and 11) whi l e swi tchi ng
between 10 dB/di v and 2 dB/di v.
c. I f the l ogi c si gnal s are i ncorrect, refer to "Anal og Bus Ti mi ng"and
"Anal og Bus Dri vers" i n thi s chapter.
5. Check comparators A3U109A/C for proper outputs. The outputs
shoul d be hi gh when the noni nverti ng i nput i s greater than the
threshol d vol tage of +1.3 Vdc.
6. I f A3U104 and A3U109 are worki ng properl y, set the AMPLITUDE
and REF LVL to 0 dBm.
7. Moni tor the vol tage at A3TP14 whi l e swi tchi ng the spectrum
anal yzer between 10 dB/di v and 2 dB/di v. The vol tage shoul d swi tch
between 0.8 and 0.4 Vdc.
8. I f the vol tage at A3TP14 i s i ncorrect, suspect ei ther A3Q220 or
A3Q221.
9. The Vi deo MUX wi l l appear faul ty i f A3CR109 i s shorted or l eaky.
Di ode A3CR109 cl amps the vol tage at A3TP14 to 0.4 V when i n l og
expand, wi th l ess than 0.8 V at J101. To conrm thi s fai l ure, l i ft the
cathode of di ode A3CR109 and repeat steps 1 through 7.
10.To return the HP 8560E/EC to automati c sweep, press SWEEP,
SWEEPCONT SGL or press PRESET.
Video Filter
Refer to functi on bl ock V of A3 I nterface Assembl y Schemati c
Chapter 7 373
ADC/Interface Section
A3 Assembly Video Circuits
Di agram (sheet 5 of 6) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer
Component Level I nformation.
The HP 8560E/EC uses di gi tal l teri ng for 1 Hz to 100 Hz vi deo
bandwi dths. An RC l ow-pass l ter i s used for 300 Hz to 3 MHz vi deo
bandwi dths. Vari ous seri es resi stances and shunt capaci tances swi tch
i nto the vi deo l ter to change i ts cutoff frequency.
When Gated Vi deo i s sel ected, the vi deo si gnal i s "gated" (turned on
peri odi cal l y for a set durati on of ti me). Thi s functi on i s shown i n bl ock
V of the bl ock di agram as a seri es swi tch that al l ows the vi deo si gnal to
pass onl y when i t i s cl osed. The actual swi tch, U109B/CR118, shunts
the vi deo to ground (vi deo si gnal i s passed onl y when the swi tch i s
open). The control ci rcui try for thi s swi tch i s descri bed under
"Tri ggeri ng or Vi deo Gati ng Probl ems" i n thi s chapter. The rear panel
EXT/GATE TRI G I NPUT provi des the connecti on for tri ggeri ng i n the
Gated Vi deo mode. The gate output si gnal i s avai l abl e at the rear panel
BLKG/GATE OUTPUT connector. Posi ti ve or negati ve edge mode, or
l evel mode can be sel ected from the front panel .
1. Press PRESET and set the HP 8560E/EC control s to the fol l owi ng
setti ngs:
Center frequency .................................................. 225 MHz
Span ...................................................................... 550 MHz
Sweep ti me ............................................. Uncoupl ed (MAN)
2. Press CAL and IF ADJ OFF.
3. Step the Vi deo BW from 3 MHz to 10 kHz. At each step, the
peak-to-peak devi ati on of the noi se shoul d decrease.
4. Step the Vi deo BW down to 1 Hz. At each step, the ampl i tude of the
LO feedthrough shoul d decrease.
5. Refer to Tabl e 7-7 on page 374 and check for correct l atched l evel s
for the sel ected vi deo bandwi dth setti ng.
6. I f the output of l atch A3U102 i s not correct, tri gger an osci l l oscope
on LLOG_STB (U102 pi n 9) and moni tor U102 pi n 1 and other l atch
i nputs whi l e changi ng the vi deo bandwi dth.
7. I f the i nputs are i ncorrect, troubl eshoot the anal og bus. Correct
i nputs wi th bad outputs i ndi cate a faul ty U102.
8. Check that the outputs of A3U111A, A3U111B, and A3U107A/B/C/D
are correct for thei r i nputs. The outputs shoul d be hi gh wi th
noni nverti ng i nputs hi gher than the +1.4 V threshol d vol tage. I f a
vol tage drop i s noti ced across these components, suspect A3CR109 or
A3Q317B. Si nce no dc current ows through any of the seri es
resi stances or FETS (drai n to source), no vol tage drops shoul d occur.
9. To return the HP 8560E/EC to automati c sweep, press SWEEP,
374 Chapter 7
ADC/Interface Section
A3 Assembly Video Circuits
SWEEP CONT SGL or PRESET.
Video Filter Buffer Amplier
Refer to functi on bl ock W of A3 I nterface Assembl y Schemati c
Di agram (sheet 5 of 6) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer
Component Level I nformation.
The vi deo l ter buffer ampl i er provi des outputs for vi deo tri gger,
posi ti ve and negati ve peak detectors, and the anal og zero-span (sweeps
<30 ms). The zero-span vi deo output i s termi nated i n 500 ohms on the
A2 Control l er assembl y. The ampl i er i s a hi gh-i nput-i mpedance buffer
ampl i er wi th a gai n of one when properl y termi nated.
Current source U307C provi des twi ce the current of Q316. Resi stor
R145 and current source U307D shi ft the dc l evel . Resi stor R260
termi nates the peak detector i nputs i n 500 ohms. The untermi nated
gai n i s 1.1. Di ode CR114 prevents l atchup duri ng posi ti ve overdri ve
condi ti ons whi l e CR113 protects Q318 duri ng overdri ve. Di ode CR117
i s a 12.7 V zener that l i mi ts the peak detector output to +1.5 V.
Typi cal l y, l i mi ti ng occurs at +1.1 V.
Positive/Negative Peak Detectors
Refer to functi on bl ocks Y and Z of A3 I nterface Assembl y Schemati c
Di agram (sheet 5 of 6) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer
Component Level I nformation.
The fol l owi ng i nformati on pertai ns to the posi ti ve peak detector and i s
appl i cabl e to troubl eshooti ng the negati ve peak detector.
The posi ti ve peak detector consi sts of an i nput ampl i er (A3U204 and
Table 7-7 A3U102 Latch Outputs
Video BW Pin
2
Pin
5
Pin
7
Pin
10
Pin
12
Pin
15
300 Hz H L L L L L
1 kHz L L L L L H
3 kHz L H L L L L
10 kHz L L L L H L
30 kHz H L H L L L
100 kHz L L H L L H
300 kHz L H H L L L
1 MHz L L H L H L
3 MHz L L L H L L
Chapter 7 375
ADC/Interface Section
A3 Assembly Video Circuits
A3Q210) fol l owed by detector di odes (A3CR203 and A3CR204) and hol d
capaci tor A3C217. Output ampl i er A3Q206, Q211, and Q212 buffers
the hol d capaci tor. Both the i nput and output ampl i ers have a gai n of
one. Each ampl i er has l ocal feedback. On the output ampl i er, the
emi tter of Q212 connects to the gate of Q206. On the i nput ampl i er the
feedback goes through Q209 and Q208 back to the base of U204D.
Gl obal feedback occurs from the output ampl i er through R223 back to
the i nput ampl i er U204D. The peak detector resets through Q207.
1. Press PRESET and set the HP 8560E/EC control s as fol l ows:
Center frequency .................................................. 300 MHz
Span ...................................................................... 500 MHz
Resol uti on bandwi dth ............................................... AUTO
Vi deo bandwi dth ........................................................ AUTO
Log dB/di vi si on ..................................................... 10 dB/di v
2. I f the HP 8560E/EC does not meet the condi ti ons i n steps a through
e bel ow, the posi ti ve and negati ve peak detectors are probabl y faul ty.
Conti nue wi th step 3 to check the detectors.
a. The peak-to-peak devi ati on of the noi se i n NORMAL detector
mode shoul d be approxi matel y two di vi si ons. Press TRACE,
TRACE B, CLEAR WRITE B, VIEW B, TRACE A, MORE 1 of 3, and
DETECTOR MODES.
b. Sel ect DETECTOR POS PEAK mode.
c. Conrm that the noi se i s about one-thi rd di vi si on peak-to-peak.
The noi se shoul d al so be no hi gher than the top of the noi se l evel
i n NORMAL detector mode.
d. Sel ect DETECTOR NEG PEAK mode. The noi se shoul d be about
one-thi rd of a di vi si on peak-to-peak. The noi se shoul d al so be no
l ower than the bottom of the noi se i n NORMAL mode.
e. Sel ect DETECTOR SAMPLE mode. Check that the noi se appears
between the top and bottom of the noi se i n NORMAL mode.
3. On the HP 8560E/EC, connect the front panel CAL OUTPUT to the
I NPUT 50 and set the control s to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Center frequency .................................................. 300 MHz
Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz
Sweep ti me ....................................................................... 5 s
Detector mode ................................................... POS PEAK
4. Moni tor A3TP17 and A3TP16 si mul taneousl y wi th an osci l l oscope.
5. Change the reference l evel from 10 dBm to +30 dBm and veri fy a
vol tage change at both A3TP17 and A3TP16 of 0.9 V to 0.5 V i n 100
mV steps.
6. Check the enti re range of the detector by substi tuti ng a dc source at
J101 and varyi ng i ts output from 0 V to 1 V.
376 Chapter 7
ADC/Interface Section
A3 Assembly Video Circuits
7. I f the peak detector appears l atched up, check LPOS_RST(U422 pi n
4) for a negati ve TTL l evel reset pul ses. The reset pul ses shoul d
occur every 130 s and shoul d be approxi matel y 250 ns wi de.
8. I f the reset pul ses are absent, troubl eshoot the Peak Detector Reset
ci rcui try.
9. I f the reset pul ses are present, check the gate of Q207. The pul ses
shoul d be posi ti ve-goi ng from 12.7 V to 1.35 V.
10.The peak detector can be made i nto a uni ty gai n ampl i er by
shorti ng the cathode of CR203 to the anode of CR204. I f the peak
detector functi ons normal l y as a uni ty gai n ampl i er, suspect Q208
or CR203 or CR204.
Peak Detector Reset
Refer to functi on bl ock R of A3 I nterface Assembl y Schemati c
Di agram (sheet 4 of 6) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer
Component Level I nformation.
1. Press PRESET on the HP 8560E/EC and set the control s as fol l ows:
Center frequency ........................................................ 300 MHz
Span .................................................................................... 0 Hz
Sweep ti me ............................................................................ 5 s
Detector mode ......................................................... POS PEAK
2. Check that HHOLD (A3U526 pi n 11) has 18 s wi de pul ses every
128 s.
3. Check that HODD (U408 pi n 5) i s a square wave wi th a peri od of
16.7 ms (2 sweep ti me/600).
4. Check LPOS_RST (U422 pi n 4) for 200 ns l ow-goi ng pul ses every
128 s.
5. Check LNEG_RST (A3U422 pi n 12) for 200 ns l ow-goi ng pul ses
every 128 s.
6. Set the detector mode to NORMAL and check that LNEG_RST
(A3U422 pi n 12) has two pul ses spaced 40 s apart and then a si ngl e
pul se approxi matel y 88 s from the second pul se.
7. Check HMUX_SEL0 (A3U408 pi n 3) and HMUX_SEL1 (A3U408 pi n
9) accordi ng to Tabl e 7-8 on page 377.
Chapter 7 377
ADC/Interface Section
A3 Assembly Video Circuits
Rosenfell Detector
Refer to functi on bl ock S of A3 I nterface Assembl y Schemati c Di agram
(sheet 4 of 6) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level
I nformation.
I f both HPOS_HLDNG and HNEG_HLDNG are hi gh duri ng the same
bucket, HROSENFELL wi l l al so be set hi gh. Thi s i ndi cates that the
vi deo si gnal probabl y consi sts of noi se, si nce i t rose and fel l duri ng the
same peri od. The HROSENFELL si gnal i s val i d onl y when the
NORMAL (rosenfel l ) detector mode i s sel ected.
1. Remove anythi ng connected to the HP 8560E/EC front panel I NPUT
50 connector. Press PRESET on the HP 8560E/EC and set the
control s as fol l ows:
Center frequency .................................................. 300 MHz
Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz
Sweep ti me ....................................................................... 5 s
Detector mode ...................................................... NORMAL
2. Check LPOS_RST and LNEG_RST as descri bed i n "Peak Detector
Reset."
3. Check A3U423 pi n 4 for two l ow-goi ng 3.3 s pul ses 40 s apart
occurri ng every 130 s.
4. Check that HROSENFELL (A3U610 pi n 6) has two pul ses spaced
approxi matel y 40 s apart and then a thi rd pul se 60 s from the
second pul se. Each pul se shoul d be approxi matel y 10 s wi de and
l ow-goi ng.
5. Moni tor HROSENFELL wi th an osci l l oscope whi l e reduci ng the
vi deo bandwi dth from 1 MHz to 1 kHz.
6. As the vi deo bandwi dth i s decreased to 1 kHz, the HROSENFELL
l i ne shoul d i ncreasi ngl y show a l ow l ogi c l evel . Wi th a vi deo
bandwi dth of 1 kHz, a nearl y at l i ne shoul d be di spl ayed on the
CRT.
7. Set the sweep ti me to 50 ms. External l y tri gger the osci l l oscope
Table 7-8 HMUX_SELO/1 versus Detector Mode
Detector Mode HMUX_SEL0
(U408 pin 3)
HMUX_SEL1
(U408 pin 9)
NORMAL 15 s pul se every 128 s 40 s pul se every 128 s
SAMPLE H H
POS PEAK H L
NEG PEAK L H
378 Chapter 7
ADC/Interface Section
A3 Assembly Video Circuits
usi ng the HP 8560E/EC rear panel BLKG/GATE OUTPUT.
8. Check that HPOS_HLDNG (A3U416 pi n 4) i s mostl y hi gh wi th a 1
MHz vi deo bandwi dth and mostl y l ow wi th a 1 kHz vi deo bandwi dth.
9. Check that HNEG_HLDNG (U416 pi n 9) i s mostl y hi gh wi th a 1
MHz vi deo bandwi dth and mostl y l ow wi th a 1 kHz vi deo bandwi dth.
ADC MUX
Refer to functi on bl ock AA of A3 I nterface Assembl y Schemati c
Di agram (sheet 6 of 6) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer
Component Level I nformation.
The ADC MUX swi tches vari ous i nputs i nto the vi deo path for
conversi on by the ADC. The SCAN RAMP i nput i s used duri ng sweeps
havi ng a wi dth of equal to or greater than 2.01 MHz ti mes N, to control
the ti mi ng of the ADC operati ons. Some combi nati on of MOD_VI DEO,
NEG_PEAK, and POS_PEAK i s used for the vi deo si gnal to be
converted by the ADC. The YTO ERR, FCMUX, CAL OSC TUNE, and
OFL ERR i nputs are used onl y duri ng di agnosti c and auto adjust
routi nes and duri ng retrace.
1. Set the HP 8560E/EC to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Center frequency ..................................................... 300 MHz
Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz
Reference l evel ......................................................... 10 dBm
Sweep ti me ....................................................................... 50 s
DETECTOR MODE ................................................ SAMPLE
2. Refer to Tabl e 7-9 on page 379 and check for correct l ogi c l evel s at
A3U108 pi ns 1, 15, and 16. Check for proper output si gnal s at TP6.
I f the sel ect l i nes are not changi ng, suspect the ADC ASM or the
VGA/ADC MUX Control . I f the sel ect l i nes are changi ng, but the
proper vi deo i nputs are not bei ng swi tched to the output, repl ace
U108. I n SAMPLE mode, the i nput i s MOD_VI DEO (pi n 7); i n POS
PEAK mode, the i nput i s POS_PEAK (pi n 5); and i n NEG PEAK
mode, the i nput i s NEG_PEAK (pi n 6).
3. Check for the presence of the YTO ERR si gnal at A3J2 pi n 42 wi th
an osci l l oscope probe.
4. I f ERR 300 YTO UNLK or 301 YTO UNLK occurs and the vol tage i s
near zero duri ng a sweep and posi ti ve duri ng retrace (YTO i s bei ng
l ocked), the faul t i s on the A3 assembl y. I f a constant dc vol tage i s
present, refer to the Synthesi zer secti on troubl eshooti ng procedure
Chapter 7 379
ADC/Interface Section
A3 Assembly Video Circuits
i n Chapter 10.
5. Set the HP 8560E/EC to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Span .......................................................................... 5 MHz
Sweep ti me ................................................................. 50 ms
6. Check for the presence of the SCAN RAMP si gnal by connecti ng an
osci l l oscope probe to A3J2 pi n 45 (component si de of A3J2). Connect
the negati ve-probe l ead to A3TP4.
7. A 0 to 10 V ramp shoul d be present i n both LI NE and FREE RUN
tri gger modes. I f the waveform i s present onl y i n LI NE tri gger, ADC
control si gnal HBADC_CLK0 may be faul ty. Refer to "ADC Control
Si gnal s" i n thi s chapter.
8. I f the scan ramp i s present, but i s not bei ng swi tched to the output of
U108, repl ace U108. I f the scan ramp i s absent i n ei ther mode, do
the fol l owi ng:
a. Connect the osci l l oscope probe to A3J400 pi n 15 (HSCAN).
b. A TTL si gnal (hi gh duri ng 50 ms sweep ti me and l ow duri ng
retrace) shoul d be present, i ndi cati ng A3 i s worki ng properl y.
Refer to the Synthesi zer secti on troubl eshooti ng procedure i n
Chapter 10. A faul ty TTL si gnal i ndi cates a bad A3 I nterface
assembl y.
9. Set the HP 8560E/EC to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Sweep ti me ............................................................... 100 ms
Span ...................................................................... 100 MHz
10.Press CAL and IF ADJ ON and check for the presence of the CAL OSC
TUNE si gnal by moni tori ng A3J401 pi n 25 wi th an osci l l oscope. I f
ERR 499 CAL UNLK i s di spl ayed and a si gnal wi thi n the range of
10 V to +10 V i s present duri ng part of the retrace peri od, the faul t
i s on the A3 assembl y.
11.I f a constant dc vol tage i s present duri ng the sweep and al l of the
retrace peri od, refer to the I F Secti on troubl eshooti ng procedure i n
Chapter 8.
Table 7-9 Logic Levels at A3U108
Detector
Mode
U108pin 1 U108pin15 U108pin16
SAMPLE H L H
POS PEAK H L L
NEG PEAK L L H
380 Chapter 7
ADC/Interface Section
A3 Assembly Video Circuits
Variable Gain Amplier (VGA)
Refer to functi on bl ock AB of A3 I nterface Assembl y Schemati c
Di agram (sheet 6 of 6) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer
Component Level I nformation.
The VGA provi des adjustabl e gai n i n the vi deo path. I ts nomi nal gai n of
7 can be adjusted 10%. U112 removes dc offset to keep U113 i n i ts
monotoni c range. (Both U112 and U113 are set to the same val ue.) The
DAC setti ngs cannot be changed from the front panel .
Track and Hold
Refer to functi on bl ock AC of A3 I nterface Assembl y Schemati c
Di agram (sheet 6 of 6) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer
Component Level I nformation.
1. Press PRESET on the HP 8560E/EC and set the control s as fol l ows:
Center frequency ..................................................... 300 MHz
Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz
Detector mode ............................................................. Sampl e
Reference l evel ......................................................... 70 dBm
Log dB/di vi si on .......................................................... 2 dB/di v
Sweep ti me ................................................................... 50 ms
2. Di sconnect any si gnal from the spectrum anal yzer i nput. A ful l scal e
di spl ay of sampl ed noi se shoul d be present.
3. Tri gger an osci l l oscope on the posi ti ve goi ng edge of HHOLD
(A3U506 pi n 16).
4. The waveform at A3TP10 shoul d be random noi se wi th an average
l evel of approxi matel y 4 V. The noi se shoul d have a at spot i n i ts
response whi l e HHOLD i s hi gh, i ndi cati ng proper operati on of U114.
Chapter 7 381
ADC/Interface Section
A3 Assembly ADC Circuits
A3 Assembly ADC Circuits
The ADC consi sts of a 12-bi t DAC, 12-bi t successi ve approxi mati on
regi ster (SAR), data mul ti pl exers, and data l atches. The ADC ASM
(al gori thmi c state machi ne) control s the ADC. Ei ght i nputs are
control l ed by the ADC MUX. These i ncl ude a posi ti ve peak detector,
negati ve peak detector, sampl ed vi deo, scan ramp, YTO error vol tage,
FC MUX vol tages, Cal Osci l l ator tune vol tage, and offset l ock error
vol tage. A MUX on the A14 frequency control assembl y sel ects whi ch
vol tage i s sent to the ADC MUX on the FC MUX si gnal l i ne.
Duri ng NORMAL detector mode sweeps, when noi se i s detected by the
rosenfel l detector, the ADC ASM automati cal l y swi tches between POS
PEAK and NEG PEAK.
ADC Control Signals
Refer to functi on bl ocks B and F of A3 I nterface Assembl y Schemati c
Di agram (sheet 2 of 6) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer
Component Level I nformation.
The ADC requi res two si gnal s from the A2 control l er assembl y:
HBADC_CLK0 and HBBKT_PULSE. HBBKT_PULSE i s used onl y i n
zero span. Use the fol l owi ng steps to veri fy the si gnal s:
1. Di sconnect W22 from A2J8.
2. I f a 10 MHz TTL si gnal i s absent on W22, refer to the 10 MHz
Reference (on the A15 RF assembl y) troubl eshooti ng procedure i n
Chapter 11.
3. Set the HP 8560E/EC SPAN to zero.
4. Reconnect W22.
5. Wi th an osci l l oscope probe, moni tor A3J401 pi n 20.
6. I f TTL pul ses are absent, the A2 control l er assembl y i s faul ty. Refer
to Chapter 9. The presence of TTL pul ses i ndi cates a faul ty A3
assembl y.
7. Moni tor A3J401 pi n 23 (HBADC_CLK0). I f a 1 MHz TTL cl ock
si gnal i s present, HBADC_CLK0 i s worki ng properl y.
8. I f HBKT_PULSE or HBADC_CLK0 i s mi ssi ng, di sconnect A3W1
from A2J2.
9. Moni tor A2U5 pi n 3 for HBKT_PULSE and A2U5 pi n 7 for
HBADC_CLK0.
10.I f HBADC_CLK0 i s absent, troubl eshoot the A2 control l er assembl y.
11.HBKT_PULSE i s absent, refer to the i nformati on on troubl eshooti ng
382 Chapter 7
ADC/Interface Section
A3 Assembly ADC Circuits
the frequency counter i n Chapter 9.
12.Reconnect A3W1 to A2J2.
ADC Start/Stop Control
Refer to functi on bl ock B of A3 I nterface Assembl y Schemati c Di agram
(sheet 2 of 6) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level
I nformation.
The ADC Start/Stop Control determi nes the start ti me of al l ADC
conversi ons. Mul ti pl exer A3U509 chooses the source of the start si gnal .
Both HSTART_SRC and HBUCKET tel l the ASM to start a conversi on.
1. Press PRESET on the HP 8560E/EC and set the fol l owi ng control s:
Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz
Sweep ti me ....................................................................... 60 s
Detector mode .......................................................... SAMPLE
2. Check for a TTL hi gh at A3U509 pi n 2 and a TTL l ow at A3U509 pi n
14.
3. Set the detector mode to NORMAL.
4. Check that A3U509 pi ns 2 and 14 are both TTL l ow.
5. Set the HP 8560E/EC to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Span ............................................................................. 1 MHz
Detector mode .......................................................... SAMPLE
6. Check for a TTL hi gh at A3U509 pi n 2 and a TTL l ow at A3U509 pi n
14.
7. Press CAL and REALIGN LO &IF. Duri ng the real i gnment, A3U509
pi n 2 shoul d be TTL l ow and pi n 14 shoul d be TTL hi gh unti l the 10
kHz and narrower resol uti on bandwi dths are adjusted. I f correct,
the Start/Stop Control ci rcui try i s bei ng sel ected properl y by the
processor and U508 i n the ADC Regi ster bl ock i s worki ng properl y.
8. Press PRESET on the HP 8560E/EC and set the control s as fol l ows:
Span .................................................................................... 0 Hz
Detector mode ............................................................. SAMPLE
Sweep ti me .................................................................... 400 ms
9. Check that A3U509 pi n 7 has posi ti ve 15 s pul ses wi th a 667 s
peri od (sweep ti me/600). Check that A3U509 pi n 9 has posi ti ve 15 s
pul ses wi th a 667 s peri od (sweep ti me/600). The pul ses shoul d be
present duri ng the sweep but absent duri ng retrace.
10.Set the detector mode to NORMAL.
11.Check that A3U509 pi n 9 has pul ses every 130 s and U509 pi n 7
has pul ses every 667 s (al though pul se wi dths may be changi ng).
Chapter 7 383
ADC/Interface Section
A3 Assembly ADC Circuits
ADC ASM
Refer to functi on bl ock F of A3 I nterface Assembl y Schemati c Di agram
(Sheet 2 of 6) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level
I nformation.
1. Press PRESET on the HP 8560E/EC and set the control s as fol l ows:
Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz
Sweep ti me ..................................................................... 60 s
Detector mode ....................................................... SAMPLE
2. Check that HSTART_SRC (U504 pi n 4) goes TTL hi gh, causi ng
HHOLD (U506 pi n 16) to go hi gh 15 s l ater.
3. Check that HSTART_ADC (U506 pi n 15) goes TTL hi gh 19 s after
HSTART_SRC goes hi gh.
4. HHOLD shoul d stay TTL hi gh for approxi matel y 18 s, and
HSTART_ADC shoul d stay hi gh for approxi matel y 31 s.
5. Check that LCMPLT (U504 pi n 15) goes TTL l ow 12 s after
HSTART_ADC goes hi gh (12 bi ts at 1 s per bi t). LCMPLTi ndi cates
that the successi ve approxi mati on state machi ne (SASM) has
compl eted the ADC conversi on.
6. Check that LDONE (U506 pi n 19) goes TTL l ow approxi matel y 2 s
after LCMPLT goes l ow.
ADC
Refer to functi on bl ock A of A3 I nterface Assembl y Schemati c Di agram
(sheet 2 of 6) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level
I nformation.
The successi ve approxi mati on state machi ne (SASM) consi sts of
A3U527 and A3U528. Upon the occurrence of HSTART_ADC, the
SASM successi vel y toggl es bi ts from hi gh to l ow starti ng wi th the most
si gni cant bi t. The di gi tal resul t i s then converted to an anal og current
i n DAC U518 and compared wi th the SAMPLED VI DEO. I f the DAC
current i s too hi gh, the output of U512 wi l l be l ow, tel l i ng the SASM
that the "guess" was hi gh and that the bi t just toggl ed shoul d remai n
l ow. I t then moves on to the next most si gni cant bi t unti l al l 12 bi ts
have been "guessed" at. Each "guess" takes 1 s (one cycl e of
HBADC_CLK0), or 12 s to compl ete a conversi on. When the
conversi on i s compl eted, the SASM sets LCMPLT l ow. The bi ts are
wri tten to the data bus by buffers U514 and U516.
384 Chapter 7
ADC/Interface Section
A3 Assembly ADC Circuits
1. Set the HP 8560E/EC control s as fol l ows:
Center frequency ..................................................... 300 MHz
Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz
Sweep ti me ....................................................................... 60 s
Detector mode .......................................................... SAMPLE
2. Tri gger an osci l l oscope on HSTART_ADC (U506 pi n 15) and moni tor
the outputs of the SASM (U527 pi ns 18 and 19; U528 pi ns 14 thru
23). Each bi t shoul d start hi gh and be swi tched l ow. I t wi l l ei ther
stay l ow or return to a hi gh state 1 s l ater, dependi ng on the
compari son at U512.
3. I f the outputs do not exhi bi t thi s bi t pattern, and the ADC ASM
checks are worki ng properl y, suspect A3U527, U528, or one of the
l atches (U514/516). I f the output of comparator U512 does not toggl e
back and forth duri ng a conversi on, suspect ei ther U512 or one of the
cl i ppi ng di odes (CR500/CR501).
NOTE Because currents are bei ng summed at U512 pi ns 2 and 3, vol tage
l evel s at these poi nts are di fcul t to i nterpret.
Ramp Counter
Refer to functi on bl ock D of A3 I nterface Assembl y Schemati c Di agram
(sheet 2 of 6) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level
I nformation.
The ramp counter i s used for sweeps wi th wi dths greater than 2.0 MHz
ti mes N. The anal og sweep ramp i s compared to the di gi tal ramp
counter. When the anal og sweep ramp exceeds the DAC output
generated for that ramp counter setti ng, HRAMP_COMP toggl es hi gh,
i ndi cati ng the end of a bucket. The ramp counter counts hori zontal
buckets. There are 601 buckets per sweep, so the ramp (bucket) counter
counts from 0 to 600. The ramp counter i s i ncremented by
HRST_PK_ENA.
1. Press PRESET on the HP 8560E/EC and set the control s as fol l ows:
Span ............................................................................. 5 MHz
Detector mode .......................................................... SAMPLE
2. For spans greater than 2.0 MHz ti mes N0, HODD (A3U525 pi n 3) i s
a square wave wi th a peri od dened by (2 sweep ti me/600). For
exampl e, for a 6 s sweep ti me, HODD has a peri od of 20 ms. The
ramp (bucket) counter wi l l be odd every other bucket.
Chapter 7 385
ADC/Interface Section
A3 Assembly Control Circuits
A3 Assembly Control Circuits
A di gi tal control probl em wi l l cause the fol l owi ng three steps to fai l :
1. On the HP 8560E/EC, press AMPLITUDE, ATTEN MAN, 7, 0, and dB.
2. A cl i ck shoul d be heard after pressi ng dB i n step 1, unl ess ATTEN
was previ ousl y set to 70 dB.
3. Press 1, 0, and dB. Another cl i ck shoul d be heard. I f no cl i cks were
heard, but the ATTEN val ue di spl ayed on the CRT changed, the
di gi tal control si gnal s are not operati ng properl y.
Analog Bus Drivers
Refer to functi on bl ock N of A3 I nterface Assembl y Schemati c Di agram
(sheet 4 of 6) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level
I nformation.
1. Press PRESET on the HP 8560E/EC, and set the control s as fol l ows:
Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz
Tri gger ....................................................................... Si ngl e
2. Moni tor A3U401 pi n 3 (LRF_STB) wi th an osci l l oscope or l ogi c
probe. Thi s i s the strobe for the A15 RF Assembl y.
3. Press AUX CTRL and REAR PANEL and check that pul ses occur when
toggl i ng between 10 MHz INT and 10 MHz EXT.
4. Moni tor U401 pi n 5 (LFC_STB) wi th an osci l l oscope or l ogi c probe.
Thi s i s the strobe for the A14 frequency control assembl y.
5. Press AMPLITUDE and check that pul ses occur when toggl i ng
between ATTEN setti ngs of 10 and 20 dB.
6. Moni tor U401 pi n 7 (LI F_STB) wi th an osci l l oscope or l ogi c probe.
Thi s i s the strobe for the A5 I F assembl y.
7. Press AMPLITUDE and check that pul ses occur when toggl i ng
between REF LVL setti ngs of 10 dBm and 20 dBm.
8. Moni tor U401 pi n 9 (LLOG_STB) wi th an osci l l oscope or l ogi c probe.
Thi s i s the strobe for the l og ampl i er on the A4 assembl y.
9. Press AMPLITUDE and check that pul ses occur when toggl i ng
between LINEAR and LOG dB/DIV.
10.To check the Address and Data Li nes, pl ace a jumper from A3TP1
and A3TP2 to A3U406 pi n 20 (+5 V).
11.Check that address l i nes A0 through A7 and data l i nes D0 through
D7 are al l TTL hi gh.
386 Chapter 7
ADC/Interface Section
A3 Assembly Control Circuits
12.I f any address or data l i ne i s l ow, press LINE to turn spectrum
anal yzer off and di sconnect the W2 control cabl e from A3J2. Press
LINE to turn spectrum anal yzer on. I gnore any error messages.
13.Check that address l i nes A0 through A7 and data l i nes D0 through
D7 are al l hi gh. I f al l address and data l i nes are hi gh, suspect a faul t
ei ther i n W2 or one of the other four assembl i es whi ch connect to
W2.
14.I f any address or data l i ne i s l ow, check the appropri ate i nput of
ei ther U405 (data l i nes) or U406 (address l i nes).
15.I f a data l i ne i nput i s stuck l ow, check the data bus buffer. I f an
address l i ne i nput i s stuck l ow, check A3W1 and the A2 control l er
assembl y.
16.I f the appropri ate i nput i s hi gh or toggl i ng between hi gh and l ow,
suspect a fai l ure i n ei ther U405 (data l i nes) or U406 (address l i nes).
17.Remove jumpers.
Analog Bus Timing
Refer to functi on bl ock P of A3 I nterface Assembl y Schemati c Di agram
(sheet 4 of 6) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level
I nformation.
Anal og bus ti mi ng (ABT) generates the strobes for the A4, A5, A14, and
A15 assembl i es. The A14 frequency control assembl y al so requi res a
qual i er for i ts strobe, LVFC_ENABLE. A3U400 and A3U414 provi de a
2 s del ay between the ti me HANA_BUS goes hi gh and the enabl e l i ne
to demul ti pl exer A3U407 goes l ow.
1. Press PRESET on the HP 8560E/EC and set the control s as fol l ows:
Center frequency ..................................................... 300 MHz
Span ......................................................................... 100 MHz
2. Check that A3U407 pi n 1 goes l ow approxi matel y 2 s after
HANA_BUS (A3U400 pi n 3) goes hi gh.
3. I f HANA_BUS i s absent, check for pul ses on ABTA3U505 pi n 2 and
I A10 (A3U505 pi n 5).
4. I f A3U407 pi n 1 i s not del ayed 2 s from HANA_BUS, check for the
presence of the 1 MHz HBADC_CLK0.
5. I f A3U407 pi n 1 i s not del ayed 2 s from HANA_BUS and
HBADC_CLK0 i s correct, suspect a faul t i n ei ther A3U414 or
A3U400.
6. Press PRESET and set the control s as fol l ows:
Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz
Tri gger ...................................................................... SI NGLE
Chapter 7 387
ADC/Interface Section
A3 Assembly Control Circuits
7. Moni tor A3U401 pi n 3 (LR_STB) wi th an osci l l oscope or l ogi c probe.
Thi s i s the strobe for the A15 RF assembl y.
8. Press AUX CTRL and REAR PANEL and check that pul ses occur when
toggl i ng between 10 MHz INT and 10 MHz EXT.
9. Moni tor A3U401 pi n 5 (LF_STB) wi th an osci l l oscope or l ogi c probe.
Thi s i s the strobe for the A14 frequency control assembl y.
10.Press AMPLITUDE and check that pul ses occur when toggl i ng
between ATTEN setti ngs of 10 and 20 dB.
11.Moni tor A3U401 pi n 7 (LI _STB) wi th an osci l l oscope or l ogi c probe.
Thi s i s the strobe for the A5 I F assembl y.
12.Press AMPLITUDE and check that pul ses occur when toggl i ng
between REF LVL setti ngs of 10 dBm and 20 dBm.
13.Moni tor A3U401 pi n 9 (LV_STB) wi th an osci l l oscope or l ogi c probe.
Thi s i s the strobe for the A4 l og ampl i er/cal osci l l ator assembl y.
14.Press AMPLITUDE and check that pul ses occur when toggl i ng
between LINEAR and LOG DB/DIV.
Interface Strobe Select
Refer to functi on bl ock K of A3 I nterface Assembl y Schemati c Di agram
(sheet 3 of 6) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level
I nformation.
I nterface strobe sel ect generates the vari ous strobes used by ci rcui ts on
the A3 I nterface Assembl y. Tabl e 7-10 on page 387 and Tabl e 7-11 on
page 388 are the truth tabl es for demul ti pl exers A3U410 and A3U500.
Table 7-10 Demultiplexer A3U410 Truth Table
Selected Output Line IA1 IA2 IA3
Pi n 15, LSCAN_KBD L L L
Pi n 14, LDACU1 H L L
Pi n 13, LDAC1 L H L
Pi n 12, LDAC2 H H L
Pi n 11, LDAC3 L L H
Pi n 10 H L H
Pi n 9, LTI MER L H H
Pi n 7, LADC_REG1 H H H
388 Chapter 7
ADC/Interface Section
A3 Assembly Control Circuits
Table 7-11 Demultiplexer A3U500 Truth Table
Selected Output Line IA0 IA1 IA2
Pi n 15, LSENSE_KBD L L L
Pi n 14, LI NT_PRI OR H L L
Pi n 13, LADC_DATA1 L H L
Pi n 12, LDAC_DATA0 H H L
Pi n 11, HCNTR_LD0 L L H
Pi n 10, HCNTR_LD1 H L H
Pi n 9, LRPG_RD L H H
Pi n 7, LADC_REG0 H H H
Chapter 7 389
ADC/Interface Section
A16 Assembly Fast ADC Circuits (8560E with Option 007)
A16 Assembly Fast ADC Circuits
(8560E with Option 007)
The fast ADC consi sts of vi deo si gnal scal i ng and l i mi ti ng ampl i ers, an
8-bi t ash ADC, peak/pi t detecti on of the di gi ti zed vi deo si gnal , a 32
K-byte RAM, and the fast ADC control ci rcui try.
Video Input Scaling Ampliers and Limiter
Refer to functi on bl ock L of the A16 fast ADC assembl y schemati c
di agram i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level
I nformation.
The vi deo i nput scal i ng ampl i ers hel p provi de scal i ng (10 dB/di v, 5
dB/di v, 2 dB/di v, or 1 dB/di v) and buffer the ash vi deo output. When
the GAI NX2 control l i ne i s l ow, swi tch U44D i s open and swi tch
U44C i s cl osed. Thus, the scal ed vi deo at TP26 vi rtual l y fol l ows the
vi deo i nput (0 - 1 V). When the GAI NX2 control l i ne i s hi gh, swi tch
U44C i s open and swi tch U44D i s cl osed. Ampl i er U43 then provi des a
gai n of 2(V
i n
) 1 V. Vol tage cl amp CR4 prevents the scal ed vi deo i nput
to ampl i er U45 from goi ng more negati ve than 0.35 V or more
posi ti ve than +1.25 V.
NOTE When measuri ng vol tages or waveforms on the A16 fast ADC assembl y,
connect the ground (or common) l ead to the ground-pl ane trace on the
A16 assembl y. Thi s di gi tal ground pl ane i s total l y i sol ated from the
chassi s.
1. Press PRESET on the HP 8560E Opti on 007 and set the control s as
fol l ows:
Center frequency .................................................. 300 MHz
Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz
Reference l evel ...................................................... 10 dBm
Log/di vi si on ........................................................... 10 dB/di v
Sweep ti me ................................................................. 20 ms
2. Connect the CAL OUTPUT to the I NPUT 50 connector.
3. Adjust the HP 8560E Opti on 007 reference l evel to pl ace the si gnal
at the top grati cul e l i ne on the CRT di spl ay.
4. Measure the dc l evel at TP25. I f the vol tage measured i s not +1.0
0.15 V, troubl eshoot the A3 i nterface assembl y.
5. Measure the dc l evel at TP26. The l evel shoul d be approxi matel y the
same as the l evel measured at TP25. I f not, suspect swi tch U44.
6. Set the HP 8560E Opti on 007 scal e to 5dB per di vi si on.
390 Chapter 7
ADC/Interface Section
A16 Assembly Fast ADC Circuits (8560E with Option 007)
7. Adjust the HP 8560E Opti on 007 reference l evel to pl ace the si gnal
at the top grati cul e l i ne on the CRT di spl ay.
8. Measure the dc l evel at TP25 and TP26. The l evel shoul d be +1.0
0.25 V. I f the l evel measured at TP26 di ffers from the l evel
measured at TP25 by more than 0.25 vol ts, troubl eshoot U43 and
associ ated ci rcui try.
9. Di sconnect the CAL OUTPUT si gnal from the I NPUT 50
connector.
10.The l evel at TP26 shoul d drop to 0.35 Vdc. I f the l evel i s l ess (more
negati ve) than 0.35 Vdc, repl ace vol tage cl amp CR4.
11.Measure the dc l evel of the ash vi deo at TP27. The l evel shoul d be
near 0 Vdc wi th the si gnal at the bottom grati cul e l i ne (no i nput to
the spectrum anal yzer).
12.Connect the CAL OUTPUT to the I NPUT 50 connector.
13.Measure the dc l evel of the ash vi deo at TP27. The l evel shoul d be
near +1.7 Vdc.
8-Bit Flash ADC
Refer to functi on bl ock I of the A16 fast ADC assembl y schemati c
di agram i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level
I nformation.
The ash ADC (U35) converts the anal og vi deo si gnal i nto 8-bi t di gi tal
val ues at a xed rate of 12 megasampl es per second.
NOTE When measuri ng vol tages or waveforms on the A16 fast ADC assembl y,
connect the ground (or common) l ead to the ground-pl ane trace on the
A16 assembl y. Thi s di gi tal ground pl ane i s total l y i sol ated from the
chassi s.
1. Press PRESET on the HP 8560E Opti on 007 and set the control s as
fol l ows:
Center frequency ..................................................... 300 MHz
Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz
Reference l evel ......................................................... 20 dBm
Log/di vi si on ................................................................ 5 dB/di v
Sweep ti me ................................................................... 20 ms
2. Connect the CAL OUTPUT to the I NPUT 50 connector.
3. Pi ns 4 through 10 (ADC7-ADC1) and pi n 21 (ADC0) of U35 shoul d
al l be hi gh (l ogi c 1), correspondi ng to an ADC di gi tal count of 255 for
the anal og i nput of +2 vol ts or greater.
4. Di sconnect the CAL OUTPUT si gnal from the I NPUT 50
connector.
Chapter 7 391
ADC/Interface Section
A16 Assembly Fast ADC Circuits (8560E with Option 007)
5. Pi ns 4 through 10 (ADC7-ADC1) and pi n 21 (ADC0) of U35 shoul d
al l be l ow (l ogi c 0), correspondi ng to an ADC di gi tal count of zero for
the anal og i nput of 0 vol ts or l ess.
Peak/Pit Detection
Refer to functi on bl ock J of the A16 fast ADC assembl y schemati c
di agram i n the HP 8560 E-Series Component Level I nformation.
Peak detecti on or pi t (negati ve peak) detecti on can be enabl ed
whenever the sampl e rate i s l ess than 12 MHz (sweep ti mes greater
than 50 s). Peak detecti on uses the maxi mum val ue of al l the sampl es
taken wi thi n each bucket (between adjacent di spl ay poi nts). Pi t
detecti on uses the mi ni mum val ue of al l the sampl es taken wi thi n each
bucket. And sampl e detecti on uses the l ast sampl e of al l the sampl es
taken wi thi n each bucket.
The di fferent detecti on modes are i mpl emented by sel ecti vel y cl ocki ng
l atch U30, dependi ng on the state of LP/Q whi ch i s generated i n PAL
U1 (bl ock A). When LP/Q i s l ow, U30 i s cl ocked by WCLK. When LP/Q
i s hi gh, U30 i s not cl ocked. LP/Qi s a functi on of the 12M_SEL, SCLK-1,
LSAMPLE, LPEAK, P_LO, and P_HI si gnal s. See Tabl e 7-12 on
page 392.
I f the sampl e rate i s 12 MHz, 12M_SEL i s hi gh, whi ch forces LP/Q l ow
so that every sampl e i s cl ocked i nto l atch U30 and l atched i nto RAM
U32 (bl ock K). I f the sampl e rate i s l ess than 12 MHz and the detecti on
mode i s peak or pi t, the SCLK-1, LPEAK, P_LO, and P_HI si gnal s
control the LP/Q si gnal . I n these detecti on modes, l atch U30 stores the
peak or pi t val ue of the sampl es taken for each bucket. The 8-bi t di gi tal
magni tude comparator, U31, compares the i nput byte (P) wi th the
output byte (Q) from l atch U30. When P i s greater than Q, P_LO i s l ow
(0) and P_HI i s hi gh (1). When P i s l ess than Q, P_LO i s hi gh (1) and
P_HI i s l ow (0). When P i s equal to Q, P_LO and P_HI are both l ow (0).
See Tabl e 7-12 on page 392.
392 Chapter 7
ADC/Interface Section
A16 Assembly Fast ADC Circuits (8560E with Option 007)
32 K-Byte Static RAM
Refer to functi on bl ock K of the A16 fast ADC assembl y schemati c
di agram i n the HP 8560 E-Series Component Level I nformation.
The stati c RAM stores the ash ADC sampl es that are taken when the
fast ADC ci rcui try i s i n the "wri te"mode. When not i n the "wri te"mode,
the stati c RAM i s read by the CPU on the A2 control l er assembl y to
retri eve the fast ADC data.
The 8-bi t Q bus connects the outputs of l atch U30 to the data port of
stati c RAM U32.
Table 7-12 LP/Q Truth Table
Mode LP/Q 12M_SEL SCLK-1 LSAMPLE LPEAK P_LO P_HI
12MHz L H X X X X X
SAMPLE L X X L X X X
POS L L L H L L H
PEAK H L L H L H L
H L L H L L L
NEG H L L H H L H
PEAK L L L X H H L
(Pi t) H L L H H L L
Cl ocki ng L L H H X X X
Peak/Pi t
Sampl e
Chapter 7 393
ADC/Interface Section
A16 Assembly Fast ADC Control Circuits (8560E with Option 007)
A16 Assembly Fast ADC Control Circuits
(8560E with Option 007)
The fast ADC control ci rcui ts consi st of the CPU i nterface and control
regi sters, the reference cl ock, a cl ock and sampl e rate generator, a
tri gger ci rcui t, a 16-bi t post-tri gger counter, a 15-bi t ci rcul ar address
counter, a vi deo tri gger comparator, and the reference and power suppl y
ci rcui ts.
CPU Interface and Control Registers
Refer to functi on bl ock A of the A16 fast ADC assembl y schemati c
di agram i n the HP 8560 E-Series Component Level I nformation.
The A16 assembl y di gi tal i nterface to the A2 control l er assembl y
consi sts of an 8-bi t bi -di recti onal data bus, one address l i ne, a
most-si gni cant byte strobe, and a l east-si gni cant byte strobe.
The A16 fast ADC assembl y can be accessed by rmware (on the A2
control l er assembl y) at two l ogi cal addresses. When the address l i ne
(ADDR3) i s l ow, the pri mary address i s sel ected. When the ADDR3 i s
hi gh, the secondary address i s sel ected. The data transfers between the
A16 fast ADC assembl y and the A2 control l er assembl y are cl ocked by
the two strobe l i nes, MSB_STRB and LSB_STRB. 16-bi t word transfers
occur as two sequenti al byte transfers; the most-si gni cant byte rst,
fol l owed by the l east-si gni cant byte.
The pri mary address (ADDR3 l ow) contai ns the 16-bi t control word
wri tten by the rmware on the A2 control l er assembl y. The secondary
address (ADDR3 hi gh) supports both 8-bi t byte and 16-bi t word reads
and wri tes. There i s no read/wri te l i ne on the A16 fast ADC assembl y to
control the di recti on of data transfer. The fast ADC i s precongured to
read or wri te by setti ng the appropri ate bi ts i n the 16-bi t control word.
Refer to Tabl e 7-13 on page 394. I f the control word i s not correct, i t
may resul t i n a bus coni ct.
394 Chapter 7
ADC/Interface Section
A16 Assembly Fast ADC Control Circuits (8560E with Option 007)
Table 7-13 Control Word at Primary Address (U3 and U4)
Bit Mnemonic State Description
Bi t 0 WRI TE Al l ows sampl es to be wri tten to FADC
memory.
1 Al l on-board cl ocks runni ng and sampl es
bei ng wri tten to FADC memory. (FADC
memory cannot be read by A2 control l er i n
thi s mode.)
0 Al l on-board cl ocks turned off and no
sampl es bei ng wri tten to FADC memory.
(FADC memory can be read by A2 control l er.)
Bi t 1 ARM Arms the FADC assembl y for a tri gger.
1 FADC assembl y armed to accept tri gger from
HSWP l i ne or vi deo tri gger.
0 FADC assembl y cannot be tri ggered.
Bi t 2 GAI NX2 Turns on X2 l og expand ampl i er.
1 A16U43 turned on. (5 dB/di v or 1 dB/di v
scal e)
0 A16U43 turned off. (10 dB/di v, 2 dB/di v, or
l i near scal e)
Bi t 3 VTRI G_POL Control s di gi tal vi deo tri gger pol ari ty.
1 Negati ve-edge vi deo tri gger
0 Posi ti ve-edge vi deo tri gger
Bi t 4 LSAMPLE Enabl es sampl e detecti on mode.
1 Sampl e detecti on mode di sabl ed.
Sampl e detecti on mode enabl ed
Chapter 7 395
ADC/Interface Section
A16 Assembly Fast ADC Control Circuits (8560E with Option 007)
Bi t 5 LADCEN Enabl es FADC memory for "wri tes". (Toggl ed
i n conjuncti on wi th bi t 0.)
1 Di sabl es FADC memory for "wri tes".
0 Enabl es FADC memory for "wri tes".
Bi t 6 LLOADADDR Enabl es l oad address counter.
1 "Wri tes" to the address counter di sabl ed.
0 "Wri tes" to the address counter enabl ed.
Bi t 7 LLOADPOST Enabl es l oad post-tri gger counter.
1 "Wri tes" to the post-tri gger counter di sabl ed.
0 "Wri tes" to the post-tri gger counter enabl ed.
Bi t 8 LVTRI G_EN Enabl es di gi tal vi deo tri gger on A16.
1 Di gi tal vi deo tri gger di sabl ed.
0 Di gi tal vi deo tri gger enabl ed.
Bi t 9 LREADCLK Cl ocks counters duri ng "read"mode. Used to
l oad post-tri gger counter or address counter.
Al so used to post-i ncrement address counter
fol l owi ng memory "reads".
1 Read cl ock di sabl ed.
0 Read cl ock enabl ed.
Table 7-13 Control Word at Primary Address (U3 and U4)
Bit Mnemonic State Description
396 Chapter 7
ADC/Interface Section
A16 Assembly Fast ADC Control Circuits (8560E with Option 007)
Bi t
10
LREADMEM Enabl es read FADC memory.
1 Read FADC memory di sabl ed.
0 Read FADC memory enabl ed.
Bi t
11
LREADADDR Enabl es read tri gger address l atch.
1 "Reads" from tri gger address l atch di sabl ed.
0 "Reads" from tri gger address l atch enabl ed.
Bi t
12
LRATELATCH Enabl es l oad sampl e rate l atch.
1 "Wri tes" to the sampl e rate l atch are
di sabl ed.
0 "Wri tes" to the sampl e rate l atch are
enabl ed.
Bi t
13
LRLSHSWP Rel eases HSWP strobe.
1 Rel ease HSWP strobe di sabl ed.
0 Rel ease HSWP strobe enabl ed.
Bi t
14
LLOADTRI G Enabl es l oad vi deo tri gger l evel .
1 Load di gi tal vi deo tri gger l evel di sabl ed.
0 Load di gi tal vi deo tri gger l evel enabl ed.
Table 7-13 Control Word at Primary Address (U3 and U4)
Bit Mnemonic State Description
Chapter 7 397
ADC/Interface Section
A16 Assembly Fast ADC Control Circuits (8560E with Option 007)
Reference Clock
Refer to functi on bl ock B of the A16 fast ADC assembl y schemati c
di agram i n the HP 8560 E-Series Component Level I nformation.
The reference cl ock ci rcui try takes the 8 MHz CMOS square wave cl ock
from the A2 control l er assembl y (vi a W59, coax 839) and tri pl es the
frequency to 24 MHz. I nverters U5A and U5B provi de the proper match
for the 8 MHz cl ock i nput, and al so the desi red dri ve l evel i nto the 24
MHz bandpass l ter. The 24 MHz bandpass l ter consi sts of R5, C8, L1,
C9, C10, L2, C11, L3, C12, L4, C13, C14, and R6. I nverters U6A and
U6B provi de ampl i cati on of the 24 MHz cl ock to produce CMOS l evel s,
and al so buffer the 24 MHz cl ock output.
Clock and Sample Rate Generator
Refer to functi on bl ock C of the A16 fast ADC assembl y schemati c
di agram i n the HP 8560 E-Series Component Level I nformation.
The cl ock and sampl e rate generator takes the 24 MHz reference cl ock
si gnal and generates al l of the vari ous cl ock si gnal s used on the A16
fast ADC assembl y. The sampl e rate generator consi sts of CMOS l atch
U15, CMOS counters U14 and U16, and CMOS i p-ops U7B and U9A.
The sampl e rate generator onl y control s the rate at whi ch the stati c
RAM address counter (15-bi t ci rcul ar address counter) and the 16-bi t
post-tri gger counter are cl ocked (ACLK and PCLK respecti vel y). The
sampl e rate generator al so control s the number of ash ADC sampl es
taken per bucket. The range of the sampl e rate i s 1 sampl e per bucket
(12 MHz rate) to 256 sampl es per bucket (l ess than 12 MHz rate).
SCLK-1 i s an i nput to PAL U1 (bl ock A) and affects the LP/Q si gnal to
ensure that the rst sampl e of a bucket i s al ways cl ocked i nto l atch U30
(bl ock J) and wri tten i nto stati c RAM U32 (bl ock K) when the detecti on
mode i s peak or pi t and the sampl e rate i s l ess than 12 MHz. Refer to
Tabl e 7-12, LP/Q Truth Tabl e i n thi s chapter.
Bi t
15
LPEAK Peak/pi t detecti on mode control .
1 Enabl es pi t (negati ve-peak) detecti on mode i f
LSAMPLE (Bi t 4) i s al so hi gh.
0 Enabl es peak detecti on mode i f LSAMPLE
(Bi t 4) i s hi gh.
Table 7-13 Control Word at Primary Address (U3 and U4)
Bit Mnemonic State Description
398 Chapter 7
ADC/Interface Section
A16 Assembly Fast ADC Control Circuits (8560E with Option 007)
Trigger
Refer to functi on bl ock D of the A16 fast ADC assembl y schemati c
di agram i n the HP 8560 E-Series Component Level I nformation.
When the A16 fast ADC i s tri ggered, the current stati c RAM address i s
l atched i nto tri gger address l atches U27 and U28 (bl ock G), and the
post-tri gger counter (U19, U20, U21, U22, and U47) begi ns counti ng.
Sampl es conti nue to be wri tten to consecuti ve addresses i n RAM U32
unti l the post-tri gger counter reaches i ts termi nal count. The CPU on
the A2 control l er assembl y moni tors the HSWP l i ne and starts a
software ti mer when HSWP goes hi gh after bei ng tri ggered. The
software ti mer i s set to sl i ghtl y l onger than the post-tri gger counter wi l l
be counti ng, so at the end of the "ti me-out", the post-tri gger counter has
al ready reached i ts termi nal count. At the end of thi s "ti me-out", the
CPU on the A2 control l er assembl y takes the fast ADC out of "wri te"
mode and reads l atches U27 and U28 to determi ne the stati c RAM
address of the sampl e that was taken when the tri gger occurred. The
CPU then wri tes the tri gger address (read at U27/U28) to the fast ADC
stati c RAM address counter (15-bi t ci rcul ar address counter). I f
pre-tri gger or post-tri gger (del ay) i s bei ng used, the CPU adds or
subtracts appropri atel y and wri tes the "adjusted"tri gger address to the
stati c RAM counter. The CPU then begi ns readi ng the fast ADC data,
starti ng from the tri gger (or offset tri gger) address.
The tri gger ci rcui try i s enabl ed by the ARM si gnal (bi t 1 of the fast
ADC control word). Once a tri gger occurs, the fast ADC cannot be
tri ggered agai n unti l the ARM l i ne goes l ow (di sarmed), then hi gh
agai n (armed).
The fast ADC i s tri ggered by the HSWP l i ne i n FREE RUN, LINE, and
EXTERNAL tri gger modes. When VIDEO tri gger i s bei ng used, a
synchronous di gi tal vi deo tri gger si gnal , VCLK, i s generated by PAL U1
(bl ock A) and U17A (bl ock D).
316-Bit Post-Trigger Counter
Refer to functi on bl ock E of the A16 fast ADC assembl y schemati c
di agram i n the HP 8560 E-Series Component Level I nformation.
The 16-bi t post-tri gger counter control s the number of stati c RAM
memory l ocati ons that wi l l be wri tten after the tri gger occurs. Thi s
counter consi sts of U19, U20, U21, U22, and U47. The counter i s l oaded
from the CPU on the A2 control l er assembl y when the A16 fast ADC
assembl y i s i n "read" mode. The CPU l oads the counter by rst setti ng
the LLOADPOST (bi t 7 of the fast ADC control word) and the
LREADCLK (bi t 9 of the fast ADC control word) to thei r l ow state. The
CPU then wri tes the 16-bi t word to the fast ADC secondary address.
The ri si ng edge of PCLK then l atches the 16-bi t data i nto the
post-tri gger counter.
Chapter 7 399
ADC/Interface Section
A16 Assembly Fast ADC Control Circuits (8560E with Option 007)
The post-tri gger counter begi ns counti ng upward i n "wri te"mode on the
rst ri si ng edge of PCLK after the LCOUNT si gnal from the tri gger
ci rcui t goes l ow. The frequency of PCLK i s the programmed sampl e
rate. When the post-tri gger counter reaches i ts termi nal count, the
LSTOP si gnal goes l ow and di sabl es the stati c RAM address counter
from further counti ng. LSTOP al so forces LCOUNThi gh i n NAND gate
U11D, whi ch di sabl es the post-tri gger counter.
15-Bit (32 K) Circular Address Counter
Refer to functi on bl ock G of the A16 fast ADC assembl y schemati c
di agram i n the HP 8560 E-Series Component Level I nformation.
Thi s 15-bi t programmabl e ci rcul ar counter provi des the address l i nes of
the stati c RAM (U32). The counter consi sts of U23, U24, U25, and U26.
I t counts upward from 0 to 32767 and then back to 0 i n a ci rcul ar
fashi on. When a tri gger occurs, l atches U27 and U28 l atch the current
stati c RAM address so that the CPU on the A2 control l er assembl y can
l ater read the l atches and determi ne the stati c RAM address of the
sampl e that was taken when the tri gger occurred.
The CPU l oads the address counter duri ng "read" mode by rst setti ng
LLOADADDR (bi t 6 of the fast ADC control word) and LREADCLK (bi t
9 of the fast ADC control word) to thei r l ow state. The CPU then wri tes
the 16-bi t l oad val ue to the CPU secondary address. The ri si ng edge of
ACLK then l atches the 16-bi t data i nto the address counter.
After the address counter i s l oaded by the CPU duri ng "read"mode, the
stati c RAM i s read by the CPU. The RAM i s read by rst setti ng
LREADMEM (bi t 10 of the fast ADC control word) and LREADCLK (bi t
9 of the fast ADC control word) to thei r l ow state. Si nce the
LREADCLK control bi t i s l ow, a negati ve-goi ng pul se on the ACLK l i ne
wi l l occur on every stati c RAM "read" by the CPU. Thi s causes the
address counter to i ncrement at the end of each stati c RAM "read" so
that the address counter automati cal l y post-i ncrements to the next
address of RAM U32. I n order for thi s address post-i ncrement to occur,
the LSTOP count enabl e si gnal from the post-tri gger counter must be
hi gh. LSTOP goes l ow when the post-tri gger counter reaches i ts
termi nal count i n the "wri te" mode to stop the address counter from
counti ng. When the fast ADC assembl y i s changed from "wri te"mode to
"read"mode, LSTOP wi l l be l ow. So the CPU on the A2 control l er board
must al ways rst program the post-tri gger counter to a val ue other
than the termi nal count (65535) to force LSTOP hi gh.
Video Trigger Comparator
Refer to functi on bl ock M of the A16 fast ADC assembl y schemati c
di agram i n the HP 8560 EC-Series Component Level I nformation.
Thi s 8-bi t di gi tal magni tude comparator, U34, compares the di gi ti zed
sampl es from the ash ADC (l atch U29 output) to the programmed
400 Chapter 7
ADC/Interface Section
A16 Assembly Fast ADC Control Circuits (8560E with Option 007)
vi deo tri gger l evel . The vi deo tri gger l evel val ue on I OB2 through I OB7
i s l atched i nto the P i nput (top porti on of U34) by the rmware on the
A2 control l er assembl y when the fast ADC i s i n "read"mode. When the
sampl e on the Q i nput i s hi gher than the vi deo tri gger l evel on the P
i nput, V_HI output i s hi gh, and V_LO output i s l ow. When the Q i nput
i s l ower than the P i nput, V_HI output i s l ow and V_LO output i s hi gh.
And when P i s equal to Q, both V_HI and V_LO are l ow. These two
si gnal s (V_HI and V_LO) go to PAL U1 (bl ock A) and are used to cl ock
the vi deo tri gger generator (bl ock D).
402 Chapter 7
ADC/Interface Section
A16 Assembly Fast ADC Control Circuits (8560E with Option 007)
404 Chapter 7
ADC/Interface Section
A16 Assembly Fast ADC Control Circuits (8560E with Option 007)
405
8 IF Section
406 Chapter 8
IF Section
Introduction
Introduction
The I F Secti on contai ns the A4 Log Ampl i er/Cal Osci l l ator and A5 I F
assembl i es.
Troubl eshooti ng Usi ng the TAM........................................ page 408
Troubl eshooti ng the Log Ampl i er wi th the TAM.......... page 409
Troubl eshooti ng A5 wi th the TAM................................... page 409
Troubl eshooti ng the Cal Osci l l ator wi th the TAM.......... page 413
Automati c I F Adjustment ................................................... page 415
Parameters Adjusted ........................................................ page 416
Requi rements .................................................................... page 417
Performance Test Fai l ures .................................................. page 419
I F Gai n Uncertai nty Performance Test ........................... page 419
Scal e Fi del i ty Performance Test....................................... page 420
Resol uti on Bandwi dths Performance Tests ..................... page 420
Log Ampl i er Assembl y (P/O A4)....................................... page 421
Log Ampl i er ..................................................................... page 421
Li near Ampl i ers .............................................................. page 422
Vi deo Offset ....................................................................... page 423
Vi deo Output ..................................................................... page 424
Frequency Counter Prescal er/Condi ti oner ...................... page 425
AM/FM Demodul ator ........................................................ page 425
4.8 kHz I F Fi l ters .............................................................. page 426
10.7 MHz I F Fi l ters........................................................... page 426
4.8 kHz and 10.7 MHz I F Fi l ters ..................................... page 427
10.6952 MHz VCXO.......................................................... page 428
I nput Swi tch ...................................................................... page 428
LO Swi tch .......................................................................... page 428
Synchronous Detector ....................................................... page 429
Li mi ter ............................................................................... page 429
I sol ati on Ampl i er ............................................................ page 430
Detector/Mi xer ................................................................... page 430
Log Offset/Gai n Compensati on ........................................ page 430
Log Offset Compensati on.................................................. page 430
Log Gai n Compensati on.................................................... page 430
Vi deo MUX ........................................................................ page 431
A5 I F Assembl y ................................................................... page 432
I F Si gnature ...................................................................... page 433
Common I F Si gnature Probl ems ...................................... page 441
1 MHz Resol uti on Bandwi dth Probl ems .......................... page 445
30 kHz Resol uti on Bandwi dth Probl ems ......................... page 447
3 kHz and 10 kHz Resol uti on Bandwi dth Probl ems ....... page 448
Step Gai ns ......................................................................... page 449
Cal Osci l l ator Assembl y (P/O A4) ...................................... page 450
Cal Osci l l ator Unl ock at Begi nni ng of I F Adjust............. page 451
I nadequate CAL OSC AMPTD Range ............................. page 452
300 Hz to 3 kHz Resol uti on Bandwi dth Out of Speci cati on ... page 453
Chapter 8 407
IF Section
Introduction
Low-Pass Fi l ter ................................................................. page 459
Sweep Generator ............................................................... page 460
AM/FM Demodul ati on, Audi o Ampl i er, and Speaker ... page 460
NOTE Because the cal osci l l ator ci rcui try on the A4 assembl y i s such an
i ntegral part of the I F adjustment, al ways check thi s assembl y rst,
before checki ng the rest of the I F Secti on. A faul ty cal osci l l ator can
cause many apparent "faul ts" i n the rest of the I F Secti on.
408 Chapter 8
IF Section
Troubleshooting Using the TAM
Troubleshooting Using the TAM
When usi ng Automati c Faul t I sol ati on, the TAM i ndi cates suspected
ci rcui ts that need to be manual l y checked. Use Tabl e 8-1 on page 408 to
l ocate the manual procedure. Tabl e 8-2 on page 410 l i sts assembl y test
connectors associ ated wi th each Manual Probe Troubl eshooti ng test.
Fi gure 8-1 on page 408 i l l ustrates the l ocati on of A4 and A5 test
connectors. Fi gure 8-2 on page 412 i l l ustrates the l evel s and paths
through the I F Secti on.
Figure 8-1 A4 and A5 Test Connectors
Table 8-1 Automatic Fault Isolation References
Suspected Circuit Indicated by
Automatic Fault Isolation
Manual Procedure to Perform
Check Cal Osci l l ator on A4 Assembl y Troubl eshooti ng the Cal Osc wi th the TAM
Check I nput Swi tch on A5 I F Assembl y Troubl eshooti ng A5 wi th the TAM
Check Li near Ampl i ers on A4
Assembl y
Li near Ampl i ers
Check Log Expand on A3 I nterface
Assembl y
Refer to "Log Expand" i n thi s chapter
Check Step Gai ns on A5 I F Assembl y Step Gai ns
Check Vi deo Offsets on A4 Assembl y Vi deo Offset (steps 1 through 4)
Check VI DEO OUT on A4 Assembl y Vi deo Output
Chapter 8 409
IF Section
Troubleshooting Using the TAM
Troubleshooting the Log Amplier with the TAM
Manual probe troubl eshooti ng tests several dc bi as poi nts and si gnal
path vol tages. A dc bi as i s measured i n the l i mi ter and a faul t here
i ndi cates a broken l i mi ter stage. Si gnal path vol tages are measured at
the i nput, after the vi deo ampl i er i n the l i near path, after the offset
and gai n compensati on ci rcui ts i n the l og path, and after the vi deo
offset.
The cal osci l l ator on A4 i s used as an i nput to the l og amp for the
purpose of measuri ng gai ns. Faul ts i n the si gnal path vol tages i ndi cate
broken ci rcui try i n pri or stages. Thi s techni que l ocates dead stages, but
mi ght not report sl i ghtl y degraded ones. Both +15 V and 15 V are
measured. The revi si on code i s on J11.
Troubleshooting A5 with the TAM
Manual Probe Troubl eshooti ng cal cul ates stage bi as-currents whi ch
test the operati on of the I F chai n. (Thi s techni que l ocates dead stages,
but mi ght not report sl i ghtl y degraded ones.) DACs that are moni tored
are l i sted bel ow:
I FDAC1 .........................................................................A5U812
I FDAC2 .........................................................................A5U813
I FDAC3 .........................................................................A5U809
I FDAC4 .........................................................................A5U807
I FDAC5 .........................................................................A5U810
I FDAC6 .........................................................................A5U806
410 Chapter 8
IF Section
Troubleshooting Using the TAM
Table 8-2 TAM Tests versus Test Connectors
Connector Manual Probe Troubleshooting
Test
Measured Signal Lines
A3J105 Vi deo I nput to I nterface MS1
Vi deo to Rear Panel MS2
Vi deo MUX MS3
Log Offset/Log Expand MS1,MS3
Vi deo Fi l ter Buffer Ampl i er MS3, MS5, OS1
Vi deo Peak Detectors MS5, MS6
ADC MUX MS6
Vari abl e Gai n Ampl i er MS6, MS7
Track and Hol d MS7, MS8
A3J400 Vi deo Tri gger DAC MS1
Revi si on MS2
Real Ti me DAC #1 MS3
RF Gai n DACs MS6
ADC Start/Stop Control MS7
Tri gger MS8
A4J9 Cal Osc Sweep Gen Hardware MS1, MS2
Cal Osc Tune Li ne Test MS3
Cal Osc ALC Test MS4
Cal Osc Sweep Gen Output MS6
A4J10 Log Amp I nput Swi tch MS1
Log Amp Li mi ter Bi as MS2
Posi ti ve 15 V Suppl y MS5
A4J11 Logamp Li near Output MS2
Logamp Li near MUX Path MS2,MS3,MS8
Logamp Log Output MS3
Logamp Compensati on MS3,MS4
Logamp Log MUX Path MS4,MS8
Logamp Vi deo Offset MS8
15 Vol t Suppl y MS7
Revi si on MS5
A5J6 1st Step Gai n Stage 1 MS1, MS2, MS8
1st Step Gai n Stage 2 MS1, MS2, MS3
1st XTAL Pol e Stage MS2, MS3, MS4
2nd XTAL Pol e Stage MS3, MS4, MS5
1st LC Pol e Stage 1 MS4, MS5, MS6
1st LC Pol e Stage 2 MS5, MS6, MS7
A5J7 Ref 15 dB Attenuator Stage MS1, MS2, MS3
2nd Step Gai n Stage MS2, MS3, MS4
2nd/3rd Step Gai n Stage MS3, MS4, MS5
3rd Step Gai n Stage MS4, MS5, MS6
Fi ne Atten/3rd XTL Pol e MS5, MS6, MS7
3rd XTAL Pol e Stage MS6, MS7, MS8
Chapter 8 411
IF Section
Troubleshooting Using the TAM
A5J8 Revi si on MS8
4th XTAL Pol e Stage MS1, MS2, MS3
Post Ampl i er Stage 1 MS2, MS3, MS4
Post Ampl i er Stage 3 MS3, MS4, MS5
3rd LC Pol e Stage MS5, MS6, MS7
4th LC Pol e Stage MS6, MS7
A5J9 I FDAC Channel s `A' MS1
I FDAC Channel s `B' MS3
I FDAC Channel s `C' MS4
I FDAC Channel s `D' MS2
Latched I F Control Li nes MS5
Negati ve 15 V Suppl y MS6
5 Vol t Suppl y MS7
10 Vol t Reference MS8
Table 8-2 TAM Tests versus Test Connectors
Connector Manual Probe Troubleshooting
Test
Measured Signal Lines
412 Chapter 8
IF Section
Troubleshooting Using the TAM
Figure 8-2 IF Section Troubleshooting with the TAM
Both the di gi tal control and DACs are mul ti pl exed onto test poi nt
"channel s" through resi sti ve networks. One DAC from each of the
quad-DAC packages feeds i nto a network. The TAM vari es each DAC
i ndi vi dual l y to i sol ate whi ch ones fai l ed. Si mi l arl y, 10
di gi tal l y-control l ed l i nes feed i nto a network and are moni tored by the
TAM. The channel s used to moni tor the DACs are l i sted bel ow:
1. On the HP 8560E/EC, press PRESET, MODULE, and Diagnose. Sel ect
Cal Osc Troubleshooting Mode.
2. On the HP 8560E/EC, di sconnect W27 (coax 3) from A5J5 and
moni tor the output of A5J5 wi th a second spectrum anal yzer.
Chapter 8 413
IF Section
Troubleshooting Using the TAM
3. Set the other spectrum anal yzer control s as fol l ows:
Span .......................................................................... 5 MHz
Reference l evel ...................................................... 20 dBm
Center frequency ................................................. 10.7 MHz
4. On the HP 8560E/EC, set the cal osci l l ator to 10.7 MHz by sel ecti ng
Fixed Tuned to 10.7 MHz.
5. A 25 dBm si gnal from A5J5 shoul d be di spl ayed. I f the si gnal i s
mi ssi ng, di sconnect W52 (coax 9) from A5J4. Thi s i s the cal osci l l ator
si gnal i nput from the cal osci l l ator on the A4 assembl y.
6. Connect the end of cabl e W52 to the i nput of the second spectrum
anal yzer. The si gnal comi ng from cabl e W52 shoul d be 35 dBm at
10.7 MHz. I f the cal osci l l ator si gnal from cabl e W52 i s correct, the
A5 I F assembl y i s probabl y at faul t.
Troubleshooting the Cal Oscillator with the TAM
1. Enter the TAM Cal Osc Troubl eshooti ng Mode.
2. On the spectrum anal yzer, di sconnect cabl e W52 (coax 9) from A5J4
and connect thi s end of cabl e W52 to the i nput of a second spectrum
anal yzer.
3. Set the control s of the second spectrum anal yzer connected to cabl e
W52 to the fol l owi ng:
Span ........................................................................... 5 MHz
Reference l evel ...................................................... 30 dBm
Center frequency .................................................. 10.7 MHz
4. Sel ect each of the xed-tuned frequenci es. Veri fy at each frequency
that the si gnal ampl i tude measures 35 dBm. I f the frequency i s
i ncorrect, do the fol l owi ng:
a. Veri fy that the reference di vi der output (A4U811 pi n 9) i s 100
kHz. I f i t i s not, veri fy that the 10 MHz reference i s present at
A4U811 pi n 1.
b. Veri fy that the frequency found on the output of the di vi der
(A4U808 pi n 15) matches the output of the reference di vi der.
Matchi ng frequenci es i ndi cate the osci l l ator l oop i s l ocked. I f the
l oop i s not l ocked, troubl eshoot the di vi der, osci l l ator, or phase
detector.
c. Veri fy that the frequency found at the di vi der i nput (A4U808 pi n
3) matches the CW frequency chosen i n step a. Matchi ng
frequenci es i ndi cate a properl y worki ng osci l l ator. I f the
frequency i s di fferent, troubl eshoot the di vi der.
d. Repeat step c for al l the CW frequenci es provi ded by the test.
5. Sel ect each of the sweep wi dths (these sweeps are centered about
414 Chapter 8
IF Section
Troubleshooting Using the TAM
10.7 MHz).
6. Reduce the span of the other spectrum anal yzer to check that the cal
osci l l ator i s actual l y sweepi ng. I f the osci l l ator i s not sweepi ng,
perform the fol l owi ng steps:
a. The output of the sweep generator ci rcui t (A4U804 pi n 8 of
functi on bl ock Z) shoul d be a seri es of negati ve-goi ng parabol as
(frequency and ampl i tude vary dependi ng on the sweep wi dth
chosen). Tabl e 8-3 on page 414 l i sts the RANGE, MA0, and MA1
val ues for the sweep wi dths. I f a fai l ure i s i ndi cated i n the
I F/LOG CHECK, press More Info to provi de more detai l ed
i nformati on about the detected fai l ure. I f an HP-I B pri nter i s
avai l abl e, connect i t to the spectrum anal yzer HP-I B connector,
then press Print Page for a hard-copy output.
Table 8-3 Sweep Width Settings
Sweep
Width
Sweep
Time
Res BW
Adjusted
RANGE
A4U105Pin6
MA1 A4U105
Pin 2
MA0 A4U105
Pin 5
20 kHz 5 ms 10 kHz +5 V 0 V 0 V
10 kHz 10 ms 3 kHz +5 V 0 V +5 V
4 kHz 30 ms 1 kHz +5 V +5 V 0 V
2 kHz 15 ms 300 Hz +5 V +5 V +5 V
Chapter 8 415
IF Section
Automatic IF Adjustment
Automatic IF Adjustment
The spectrum anal yzer performs an automati c adjustment of the I F
Secti on whenever needed.
The cal osci l l ator on the A4 assembl y provi des a sti mul us si gnal whi ch
i s routed through the I F duri ng the retrace peri od.
The A3 I nterface assembl y measures the response usi ng i ts
anal og-to-di gi tal converter (ADC). The spectrum anal yzer turns the cal
osci l l ator off duri ng a sweep.
When I F ADJ i s ON, the spectrum anal yzer readjusts part of the I F
ci rcui try duri ng each retrace peri od to readjust the I F compl etel y every
5 mi nutes.
Automati c I F adjustment i s performed upon the fol l owi ng condi ti ons:
Power on: (unl ess STOP ALIGN i s pressed). The I F parameter
vari abl es are i ni ti al i zed to val ues l oaded i n program ROM and al l
possi bl e I F adjustments are made. I f STOP ALIGN i s pressed, the
adjustment i s hal ted.
I f REALIGN LO &IF i s sel ected: Al l possi bl e I F adjustments (and LO
adjustments) are made wi th the most recent I F parameter vari abl es
used as the starti ng poi nt.
I f FULL IF ADJ i s sel ected: Al l possi bl e I F adjustments are made wi th
the most recent I F parameter vari abl es used as the starti ng poi nt.
(FULL IF ADJ i s l ocated i n the CAL menu.)
I f ADJ CURR IF STATE i s sel ected: Al l ampl i tude data and some
resol uti on bandwi dths are adjusted. The bandwi dths adjusted are a
functi on of the currentl y sel ected resol uti on bandwi dth setti ng.
Between sweeps: I F ADJ must be set to ON. When I F ADJ i s OFF,
an A i s di spl ayed al ong the l eft si de of the grati cul e.
I f a FULL I F ADJ sequence cannot proceed beyond the ampl i tude
porti on, check the output of the cal osci l l ator on the A4 assembl y as
fol l ows:
1. Di sconnect cabl e W52 (coax 9) from A5J4. Connect cabl e W52 to the
i nput of a second spectrum anal yzer.
2. Set the second spectrum anal yzer center frequency to 10.7 MHz and
the reference l evel to 30 dBm.
3. On the HP 8560E/EC under test, press FULL IF ADJ and observe the
di spl ay of the second spectrum anal yzer.
4. I f a 35 dBm si gnal does not appear, the cal osci l l ator i s probabl y at
faul t.
416 Chapter 8
IF Section
Automatic IF Adjustment
Parameters Adjusted
The fol l owi ng I F parameters are adjusted i n the sequence l i sted:
1. Ampl i tude
a. Vi deo Offsets: anal og (usi ng l og ampl i er vi deo offset DAC) and
di gi tal (appl yi ng stored constant to al l readi ngs)
1. Li near Scal e Offset
2. Log Scal e Offset
1. Wi deband and Narrowband modes.
2. 0 to 60 dB range i n 10 dB steps.
3. 10 dB/DI V and 2 dB/DI V (l og expand) modes.
b. Step Gai ns (A5 I F Assembl y)
1. Fi rst Step Gai n for 16 di fferent DAC setti ngs.
2. Second Step Gai n for 16 di fferent DAC setti ngs.
3. Thi rd Step Gai n for 0, 15, and 30 dB attenuati on rel ati ve to
maxi mum gai n.
4. Fi ne Attenuator for 32 evenl y-spaced DAC setti ngs.
c. Log Ampl i er Sl opes and Fi del i ty
1. Wi deband (RES BW 300 kHz through 2 MHz) and
Narrowband modes (RES BW 300 Hz through 100 kHz)
2. 10 dB/DI V and 2 dB/DI V (l og expand) modes
d. Li near Scal e Gai ns - On the l og ampl i er assembl y (P/O A4)
e. Peak Detector Offsets (both Posi ti ve and Negati ve Peak Detectors
wi th respect to normal sampl e path used by Auto I F Adjust)
2. LC Bandwi dths
a. 300 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth center frequency, bandwi dth, and
gai n
b. 1 MHz resol uti on bandwi dth center frequency, bandwi dth, and
gai n
c. 2 MHz resol uti on bandwi dth gai n
d. 100 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth center frequency, bandwi dth, and
gai n
e. 30 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth center frequency, bandwi dth, and
gai n
f. Gai n of al l resol uti on bandwi dth rel ati ve to the 300 kHz RES BW
Chapter 8 417
IF Section
Automatic IF Adjustment
3. Crystal Bandwi dths
a. The cal osci l l ator sweep rate i s measured agai nst the 100 kHz
resol uti on bandwi dth l ter ski rt. Thi s resul t i s used i n
compensati ng the sweeps used for adjusti ng the crystal
bandwi dths.
b. 10 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth
1. Center frequency of LC tank that l oads the crystal
2. Symmetry adjustment to cancel crystal case capaci tance
3. Bandwi dth
c. 3 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth: center frequency of LC tank and
bandwi dth of resol uti on bandwi dth
d. 1 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth: bandwi dth
e. 300 Hz resol uti on bandwi dth: bandwi dth
f. Gai n of al l resol uti on bandwi dth rel ati ve to the 300 kHz RES BW
4. Di gi tal Bandwi dths (1 Hz through 100 Hz; 10 Hz through 100 Hz i f
Opti on 103)
a. VCXO (nal LO) tuned to al i gn di gi tal bandwi dths wi th crystal
bandwi dth center frequency
b. Overal l gai n
c. Gai n vari ati on wi th i nput frequency
Requirements
For the Automati c I F Adjustment routi ne to work, the spectrum
anal yzer must provi de the fol l owi ng basi c functi ons:
Power suppl i es
Control si gnal s
ADC
10 MHz Frequency Reference to the A4 l og amp/cal osci l l ator
A15 RF Assembl y i sol ati on from the RF si gnal duri ng I F adjustment
A15 RF assembl y i sol ati on i s a functi on of the REDI R si gnal i n the A15
Fl atness Compensati on Control bl ock.
418 Chapter 8
IF Section
Automatic IF Adjustment
The references agai nst whi ch the Automati c I F Adjustment routi ne
al i gns are:
10 MHz reference (A15)
Li near Scal e Fi del i ty, especi al l y the 10 dB gai n stage i n A4 Li near
Ampl i er bl ock.
15 dB Reference Attenuator (A5)
Cal Osci l l ator output power (A4)
Chapter 8 419
IF Section
Performance Test Failures
Performance Test Failures
Fai l ures i n I F-Secti on-rel ated performance tests may be i nvesti gated
usi ng the fol l owi ng i nformati on:
IF Gain Uncertainty Performance Test
Fai l ure of thi s performance test i ndi cates a possi bl e probl em wi th the
spectrum anal yzer I F gai n ci rcui ts. Assumi ng no major I F probl ems
causi ng I F adjustment errors, I F gai n probl ems i n the rst 50 dB of I F
gai n (REF LVLs of 0 dBm to 50 dBm wi th 10 dB ATTEN) are a resul t
of faul ts on the A5 I F Assembl y. I F gai n probl ems i n the next 60 dB of
I F gai n (REF LVLs of 60 dBm to 110 dBm, 10 dB ATTEN) resul t from
l og ampl i er faul ts on the A4 assembl y.
A si gnal l evel of 5 dBm i s requi red at i nput (A5J3) for di spl ayi ng a
si gnal at top screen wi th 10 dB i nput attenuati on and a 0 dBm
reference l evel . I sol ate I F gai n probl ems on the l og ampl i er assembl y
(A4) wi th the fol l owi ng steps:
1. On the spectrum anal yzer press PRESET, SPAN, ZERO
SPAN, FREQUENCY, 1 GHz, AMPLITUDE, 50 dBm.
2. Press CAL and IF ADJ OFF.
3. Di sconnect cabl e W27 (coax 3) from A5J5 and connect cabl e W27 to
the output of a si gnal generator.
4. Set the si gnal generator control s as fol l ows:
Ampl i tude ............................................................. +10 dBm
Frequency ............................................................ 10.7 MHz
5. Si mul taneousl y decrease the si gnal generator output and the
spectrum anal yzer REF LVL i n 10 dB steps. The si gnal di spl ayed by
the spectrum anal yzer shoul d remai n at the reference l evel for each
step. I f the si gnal devi ates from the reference l evel , troubl eshoot the
vi deo offset ci rcui try on the A4 assembl y.
6. Repeat steps 1 through 5 wi th the spectrum anal yzer set to l i near.
420 Chapter 8
IF Section
Performance Test Failures
Scale Fidelity Performance Test
Fai l ure of thi s performance test i ndi cates a possi bl e probl em wi th the
A4 assembl y.
I f the Li near, 5 dB/DI V, or 10 dB/DI V scal es are out of speci cati on,
the faul t i s most l i kel y on the l og ampl i er assembl y (P/O A4).
I f onl y the 1 dB/DI V or 2 dB/DI V scal es are out of speci cati on, the
faul t i s most l i kel y on the A3 i nterface assembl y.
Resolution Bandwidths Performance Tests
Most resol uti on bandwi dth probl ems are a resul t of A5 I F assembl y
fai l ures. The resol uti on bandwi dths are adjusted i n the fol l owi ng
sequence usi ng 300 kHz as the reference: 1 MHz, 2 MHz, 100 kHz, 30
kHz, 10 kHz, 3 kHz, 1 kHz, 300 Hz, 100 Hz, 30 Hz, 10 Hz, 3 Hz, and 1
Hz. The 3 Hz and 1 Hz bandwi dths are not avai l abl e wi th Opti on 103.
I f the I F adjustment routi ne encountered an error, the previ ousl y
adjusted resol uti on bandwi dths shoul d be worki ng properl y and defaul t
DAC val ues are used for the remai ni ng resol uti on bandwi dth setti ngs.
I f the I F bandpass adjustments and the automati c I F adjustments fai l
to bri ng the resol uti on bandwi dths wi thi n speci cati on, troubl eshoot
the A5 I F assembl y.
Chapter 8 421
IF Section
Log Amplier Assembly (P/O A4)
Log Amplier Assembly (P/O A4)
The l og ampl i er assembl y on A4 performs several functi ons. I t
provi des l og and l i near paths converti ng the 10.7 MHz I F si gnal to
vi deo. I n addi ti on i t al so provi des offset ci rcui try, AM/FM demodul ator
ci rcui try, a frequency counter output, and down conversi on of the 10.7
MHz I F to 4.8 kHz for use by the di gi tal I F.
The l og amp resul ts are real i zed by usi ng a wi de dynami c range l i near
detector fol l owed by a vi deo l og amp. The detector i s used for both
l i near and l og paths and contai ns a mi xer that acts as the down
converter mi xer for the di gi tal I F.
CAUTION For troubl eshooti ng, i t i s recommended that you use an acti ve probe,
such as an HP 85024A, and another spectrum anal yzer. I f an HP 1120A
acti ve probe i s bei ng used wi th a spectrum anal yzer havi ng dc coupl ed
i nputs, such as the HP 8566A/B, HP 8569A/B and the HP 8562A/B,
ei ther set the acti ve probe for an ac-coupl ed output or use a dc-bl ocki ng
capaci tor between the acti ve probe and the spectrum anal yzer i nput.
Fai l ure to do thi s can resul t i n damage to the spectrum anal yzer or the
probe.
Log Amplier
Refer to functi on bl ocks K, L, and AE of A4 Log Ampl i er Schemati c
Di agram i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level
I nformation. The l og ampl i er recei ves the detected vi deo si gnal from
the Detector/Mi xer and outputs a vol tage proporti onal to the l og of the
i nput vol tage. The l i near output i s tapped off at the emi tter of U501D.
U507 provi des i nput offset adjustment capabi l i ty and adjusts the offset
of the op amp formed by U501A, B, C, and D. Q502 i s a buffer. Q501
swi tches i n addi ti onal offset for di gi tal RBWs. The l ogari thmi c
characteri sti c of the base-emi tter juncti on of U502B i s used i n the
feedback path to produce the l oggi ng affect. U502D i s used to adjust for
non-l i neari ti es i n the l i near mode. R531 i s used to adjust l og del i ty at
the top of the screen.
Use the fol l owi ng steps to veri fy proper operati on of the l og ampl i er
chai n:
1. Press CAL and IF ADJ OFF. Set the di gi tal mul ti meter to read dc vol ts
and connect the negati ve l ead to the chassi s of the spectrum
anal yzer.
2. Remove W27 from A4J3 and i nject a 10.7 MHz si gnal of +10 dBm
i nto A4J3.
3. Set the spectrum anal yzer to l og mode, wi th a resol uti on bandwi dth
of 300 kHz and si ngl e sweep.
422 Chapter 8
IF Section
Log Amplier Assembly (P/O A4)
4. Usi ng the DMM, check the vol tage at U503 pi n 6.
5. Veri fy that thi s l evel i s about 700 mV.
6. Adjust the source ampl i tude to pl ace the si gnal at the reference
l evel .
7. Reduce the i nput si gnal l evel i n 10 dB steps, down to 60 dBm, whi l e
noti ng the vol tage di spl ayed on the DMM. The vol tage shoul d
i ncrease (become l ess negati ve) at a rate of 30 mV for each 10 dB
decrease i n i nput power. Troubl eshoot the A4 assembl y i f the si gnal
does not decrease properl y.
8. Set the spectrum anal yzer resol uti on bandwi dth to 100 kHz to pl ace
the wi de/narrow l ter i n narrow mode.
9. Repeat steps 2 through 7.
10.I f l og del i ty i s poor near the bottom of the screen or the 1 MHz
resol uti on bandwi dth i s narrow, a faul t mi ght exi st i n the
wi de/narrow l ter swi tch. (Refer to functi on bl ock G of A4 l og
ampl i er schemati c di agram i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum
Analyzer Component Level I nformation.) Check thi s swi tch as fol l ows:
a. Moni tor vol tages on A4U302 pi ns 1 and 7 whi l e changi ng the
spectrum anal yzer resol uti on bandwi dth from 100 kHz to 300
kHz.
b. I f the vol tages do not come wi thi n a few vol ts of the +15 V and 15
V suppl i es, U103 and U302 are suspect.
c. Di sconnect the di gi tal mul ti meter and reconnect W27 to A4J3.
Linear Ampliers
Refer to functi on bl ock C of A4 l og ampl i er schemati c di agram (sheet 2
of 4) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level
I nformation. The Li near Amps consi st of two vari abl e gai n stages,
U201C and U201E as wel l as the buffer ampl i er A4U201B, A4U201D,
and A4Q201. The l i near ampl i ers provi de 0 to 40 dB of I F gai n i n 10
dB steps. The gai n of A4U201C can be i ncreased by 20 dB by turni ng on
A4CR201 and A4CR210 wi th the control l i ne LI N_20B. The gai n of
A4U201E can be i ncreased by ei ther 10 dB or 20 dB wi th the control
l i nes LI N_10 or LI N_20A respecti vel y. The gai n can be sel ected by
setti ng the spectrum anal yzers reference l evel .
Chapter 8 423
IF Section
Log Amplier Assembly (P/O A4)
Total gai n can be measured by i njecti ng the speci ed power i nto A4J3
and measuri ng the total gai n provi ded by A4U201C and A4U201E. The
fol l owi ng procedure provi des a means of troubl eshooti ng the l i near
ampl i ers:
1. On the spectrum anal yzer, press PRESET, SPAN, ZERO
SPAN, CAL, IF ADJ OFF, FREQUENCY, 1 GHz, AMPLITUDE, 50 dBm,
LINEAR, MORE, AMPTD
UNITS, dBm, and AMPLITUDE.
2. Di sconnect W27 (coax 3) from A4J3 and connect the output of a
si gnal generator to A4J3.
3. Set the si gnal generator control s as fol l ows:
Ampl i tude ................................................................ +6 dBm
Frequency ............................................................ 10.7 MHz
4. Si mul taneousl y decrease the si gnal generator output and spectrum
anal yzer REF LVL i n 10 dB steps to 90 dBm. At each step, the
si gnal di spl ayed on the spectrum anal yzer shoul d be wi thi n one
di vi si on of the previ ous posi ti on.
5. I f a probl em exi sts, i sol ate i t by compari ng the actual gai n of
A4U201C and A4U201E wi th those l i sted i n the gai n gui del i nes,
above.
6. Reconnect W27 (coax 3) to A4J3.
Video Offset
Refer to functi on bl ock P of A4 l og ampl i er schemati c di agram (sheet 3
of 4) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level
I nformation.
The ci rcui t provi des a programmabl e vi deo offset, wi th a step si ze of 5
mV, from 300 mV to +900 mV.
1. On the spectrum anal yzer, press PRESET, SPAN, ZERO
SPAN, FREQUENCY, 1 GHz, AMPLITUDE, 50 dBm, CAL, IF ADJ OFF.
2. Di sconnect W27 (coax 3) from A4J3 and connect a si gnal generator
to A4J3.
Table 8-4 IF Gain Application Guidelines (ATTEN=10 dB)
Power into
A4J 3
Reference
Level
Gain of A4U201C
(Pin 8 in; Pin 3 out)
Gain of A4U201
(Pin 3in; Pin 10out)
Total
Gain
+6 dBm 50 dBm 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB
4 dBm 60 dBm 0 dB 10 dB 10 dB
14dBm 70 dBm 0 dB 20 dB 20 dB
24 dBm 80 dBm 20 dB 10 dB 30 dB
34 dBm 90 dBm 20 dB 20 dB 40 dB
424 Chapter 8
IF Section
Log Amplier Assembly (P/O A4)
3. Set the si gnal generator control s as fol l ows:
Ampl i tude ................................................................ +10 dBm
Frequency ............................................................... 10.7 MHz
4. Si mul taneousl y decrease the si gnal generator output and spectrum
anal yzer reference l evel i n 10 dB steps down to 110 dBm. At each
step, the si gnal di spl ayed on the spectrum anal yzer shoul d be cl ose
to the reference l evel .
5. Reconnect W27 (coax 3) to A4J3 and cycl e the spectrum anal yzer
power. Press STOP REALIGN when i t appears.
6. On the spectrum anal yzer, press SWEEP, SINGLE, CAL, and IF ADJ
OFF.
7. The offset DAC, A4U102 pi n 2, shoul d now be at i ts defaul t val ue of
approxi matel y +2.45 V. The vol tage at U601 pi n 3 shoul d be
approxi matel y 0 V for a DAC output of 2.45 V.
8. I f thi s defaul t offset vol tage i s i ncorrect, DAC U102 i s the most
probabl e cause.
Video Output
1. On the spectrum anal yzer, press PRESET, FREQUENCY, 300 MHz,
SPAN, 100 Hz, AMPLITUDE, 10 dBm, SGLSWP, CAL and IF ADJ OFF.
2. Connect the CAL OUTPUT to the I NPUT 50 connector.
3. Di sconnect W54 (coax 2) from A4J4. Connect a short SMB to SMB
cabl e from A4J4 to an SMB tee and connect W54 to the tee. Connect
a test cabl e from the tee to the i nput of an osci l l oscope.
4. Set the osci l l oscope control s as fol l ows:
Ampl i tude scal e ................................................... 200 mV/di v
Offset ........................................................................ +400 mV
Coupl i ng ............................................................................... dc
Sweep ti me .............................................................. 50 s/di v
5. The osci l l oscope shoul d di spl ay a 4.8 kHz si ne wave.
6. Di sconnect the cabl e from the CAL OUTPUT and the I NPUT 50
connectors.
7. Set the resol uti on bandwi dth to 2 MHz.
8. Broadband noi se shoul d be di spl ayed on the osci l l oscope from
approxi matel y +200 mV to +400 mV.
9. As the REF LVL i s decreased i n 10 dB steps from 10 dBm to 70
dBm, the noi se di spl ayed on the osci l l oscope shoul d i ncrease i n 100
mV i ncrements. I f thi s response i s not observed, refer to "Step
Gai ns" and "Vi deo Offset" i n thi s chapter.
Chapter 8 425
IF Section
Log Amplier Assembly (P/O A4)
10.Reconnect cabl e W54 to A4J4.
Frequency Counter Prescaler/Conditioner
Refer to functi on bl ock Q of A4 l og ampl i er schemati c di agram (sheet 4
of 4) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level
I nformation.
The frequency counter prescal er/condi ti oner di vi des the frequency by
two, and then attenuates i t. The ci rcui t consi sts of frequency di vi der
(U703A) and an output attenuator. The frequency di vi der turns on onl y
when the i nstrument i s counti ng.
AM/FM Demodulator
Refer to functi on bl ock R of A4 Log Ampl i er Schemati c Di agram (sheet
4 of 4) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level
I nformation.
The demodul ator ci rcui try on the l og ampl i er on A4 produces a
l ow-l evel audi o si gnal . Thi s audi o si gnal i s then ampl i ed by the audi o
ampl i er on A4. The FM demodul ator demodul ates narrowband FM (5
kHz devi ati on) si gnal s. The detector demodul ates AM si gnal s.
1. I f demodul ati on probl ems occur when the spectrum anal yzer i s i n
the frequency domai n, perform the Frequency Span Accuracy
performance test and, i f necessary, the YTO Adjustments procedure.
2. I f an FM si gnal cannot be demodul ated, perform the Demodul ator
Adjustment procedure. I f the output of A4C707 cannot be adjusted
as descri bed i n the Demodul ator Adjustment procedure,
troubl eshoot the FM Demodul ator or Audi o MUX ci rcui ts on A4.
426 Chapter 8
IF Section
Log Amplier Assembly (P/O A4)
4.8 kHz IF Filters
Refer to functi on bl ock N of A4 Log Ampl i er Schemati c Di agram (sheet 3 of 4)
i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level I nformation.
Probl ems wi th the 4.8 kHz l ters can resul t i n spuri ous si gnal s
appeari ng 2.88 kHz to 3.52 kHz greater than the frequency of the
desi red response. Al so, ERR 536 RBW <300 may occur when probl ems
exi st wi th the 4.8 kHz I F l ters.
Measure the passband of the 4.8 kHz I F Fi l ters as descri bed i n the
fol l owi ng procedure:
1. On the spectrum anal yzer, press CAL, IF ADJ OFF, SPAN, and 600 Hz.
2. Di sconnect W27 from A4J3 and i nject a 10.7 MHz si gnal of 20 dBm i nto
A4J3.
3. Fi ne-tune the frequency of the si gnal generator to center the si gnal
on the screen. Set the si gnal generator to sweep one 2 kHz span
about thi s center frequency. Press SGL SWP on the HP 8563E.
4. Set another spectrum anal yzer, such as the HP 8566A/B, to 4.8 kHz
center frequency and 2 kHz span.
CAUTION I f a dc bl ock i s not used, damage to the HP 8566A/B resul ts. The
HP 8566A/B and many other spectrum anal yzers have dc-coupl ed
i nputs and cannot tol erate dc vol tages on thei r i nputs.
5. Connect the VI DEO OUTPUT(rear panel ) of the spectrum anal yzer
through a 20 dB attenuator and dc bl ock to the i nput of the
HP 8566A/B. Set the sweep ti me of the HP 8566A/B to 10 seconds.
6. Set the HP 8566A/B to si ngl e tri gger and press TRACE A
CLEAR-WRITE. Tri gger a sweep of the HP 8566A/B and the si gnal
generator si mul taneousl y. The HP 8566A/B shows the passband of
the 4.8 kHz I F l ters. The 3 dB bandwi dth of the l ters shoul d be
1.2 kHz. The passband of the l ters shoul d be at wi thi n 2 dB over
800 Hz.
7. Reconnect W27 (coax 3) to A4J3.
10.7 MHz IF Filters
1. Press PRESET, FREQUENCY, 300 MHz, SPAN, 600 Hz, CAL, and IF ADJ
OFF.
2. Di sconnect W29 (coax 7) from A5J3. Set the si gnal generator for a
10.7 MHz si gnal at 50 dBm and connect i t to A5J3.
3. Fi ne tune the frequency of the si gnal generator to center the si gnal
on the HP 8560E/EC di spl ay. Set the si gnal generator to sweep one 2
kHz span about thi s center frequency.
Chapter 8 427
IF Section
Log Amplier Assembly (P/O A4)
4. On the HP 8560E/EC, press SGL SWP.
5. Di sconnect W27 (coax 3) from A5J5. Connect a test cabl e from A5J5
to the i nput of an HP 8566A/B.
6. Set the HP 8566A/B as fol l ows:
Center frequency ................................................. 10.7 MHz
Span ........................................................................... 2 kHz
Reference l evel ..................................................... +10 dBm
Sweep ......................................................................... Si ngl e
7. Press TRACE A CLEAR-WRITE on the HP 8566A/B.
8. Tri gger a sweep on the si gnal generator and on the HP 8566A/B
si mul taneousl y. The HP 8566A/B shoul d di spl ay a 3 dB bandwi dth of
approxi matel y 500 Hz.
9. Reconnect W27 (coax 3) to A5J5 and W29 (coax 7) to A5J3.
4.8 kHz and 10.7 MHz IF Filters
1. On the HP 8560E/EC, press PRESET, FREQUENCY, 300 MHz, SPAN,
600 Hz, CAL, and IF ADJ OFF.
2. Di sconnect W29 (coax 7) from A5J3. Set the si gnal generator for a
10.7 MHz si gnal at 60 dBm and connect i t to A5J3.
3. Fi ne tune the frequency of the si gnal generator to center the si gnal
on the HP 8560E/EC di spl ay. Set the si gnal generator to sweep one 2
kHz span about thi s center frequency.
4. On the HP 8560E/EC, press SGL SWP.
5. Set the HP 8566A/B to 4.8 kHz center frequency and 2 kHz span.
CAUTION Damage to the HP 8566A/B resul ts i f a dc bl ock i s not used. The HP
8566A/B and many other spectrum anal yzers have dc-coupl ed i nputs
and cannot tol erate dc vol tages on thei r i nputs.
6. Connect the VI DEO OUTPUT(rear panel ) of the spectrum anal yzer
through a 20 dB attenuator and dc bl ock to the i nput of the HP
8566A/B. Set the sweep ti me of the HP 8566A/B to 10 seconds.
7. Set the HP 8566A/B to si ngl e tri gger and press TRACE A
CLEAR-WRITE. Tri gger a sweep on the HP 8566A/B and on the si gnal
generator si mul taneousl y. The HP 8566A/B shoul d show a 3 dB
bandwi dth of 600 Hz 100 Hz.
8. Reconnect W29 (coax 7) to A5J3.
428 Chapter 8
IF Section
Log Amplier Assembly (P/O A4)
10.6952 MHz VCXO
Refer to functi on bl ock E of A4 l og ampl i er schemati c di agram (sheet 2
of 4) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level
I nformation.
The purpose of the 10.6952 MHz vol tage-control l ed crystal osci l l ator
(VCXO) i s to provi de an LO for down-converti ng the peak of the
10.7 MHz I F l ter passband to 4.8 kHz. Si nce the peak of the passband
of the 10.7 MHz I F l ters i s 10.7 MHz 300 Hz, the frequency of the
VCXO i s between 10.6949 MHz and 10.6955 MHz. Thi s frequency can
best be measured at the col l ector of A4Q202.
The center frequency of the 300 Hz resol uti on-bandwi dth l ters and the
1 Hz to 100 Hz l ters shoul d di ffer no more than 10 Hz. I f the center
frequency i s di fferent by more than thi s, or i f no si gnal i s present i n the
1 Hz to 100 Hz resol uti on-bandwi dth setti ngs, troubl eshoot the 10.6952
MHz VCXO.
Error message ERR 539 may occur i f the VCXO i s not osci l l ati ng. I f
probl ems exi st wi th the VCXO control vol tage, error messages
ERR 536 or ERR 530 may occur.
Between sweeps the VCXO, at ti mes, i s turned off. To prevent the
osci l l ator from turni ng off, press PRESET, FREQUENCY, 0.3 GHz, SPAN,
1 kHz, SGL SWP, CAL, and IF ADJ OFF.
Input Switch
Refer to functi on bl ock D of A4 Log Ampl i er Schemati c Di agram (sheet
2 of 4) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level
I nformation.
The i nput swi tch swi tches between l og and l i near modes. I n addi ti on i t
contai ns a 20 dB attenuator whi ch i s used onl y i n di gi tal resol uti on
bandwi dth setti ngs. CR207, CR208, and CR209 form the i nput swi tch.
CR205 and CR206 swi tch i n R234 when i n l i near mode to mai ntai n a
constant i mpedance at J3. CR210, CR211, CR212, and CR221 swi tch
the 20 dB attenuator i n and out.
LO Switch
Refer to functi on bl ock F of A4 Log Ampl i er Schemati c Di agram (sheet
2 of 4) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level
I nformation.
The LOswi tch swi tches the l i mi ter i nput between the 10.7 MHz path or
the 10.6952 MHz VCXO path.
Chapter 8 429
IF Section
Log Amplier Assembly (P/O A4)
Synchronous Detector
A wi de dynami c range l i near detector i s real i zed by the l i mi ter (bl ock
G), the i sol ati on ampl i er (bl ock H), the LO ampl i er (bl ock I ), and the
detector/mi xer (bl ock J). The combi nati on of these ci rcui ts form what i s
commonl y known as a synchronous detector.
The i nput si gnal i s spl i t between two paths. One path ows through the
i sol ati on ampl i er and the other path ows through the l i mi ter and LO
ampl i er The path owi ng through the l i mi ter generates the LO for the
detector/mi xer bl ock. The path through the i sol ati on ampl i er dri ves
the RF port.
To troubl eshoot thi s group of ci rcui ts set the RBW to 300 kHz. I nject
10.7 MHz at +6 dbm i nto J3. Probe the gate of A4Q404 or A4Q405 wi th
a scope. Look for a 0 to 3 V square wave. Decrease the i nput power
from +6 dBm to 84 dBm i n 10 dB steps. The square wave si gnal shoul d
remai n unchanged. I t i s normal for the phase of the si gnal to ji tter at
the l owest si gnal l evel s.
The si gnal s at the gates of A4Q404 and A4Q405 shoul d be 180 degrees
out of phase from each other. I f they are not 180 degrees out of phase or
one of the si gnal s are not present, troubl eshoot the LO Ampl i er or the
FETs i n the mi xer. I f the si gnal i s not a symmetri cal square wave,
troubl eshoot the LO ampl i er. I f the si gnal drops out prematurel y or i s
not present at al l , troubl eshoot the l i mi ter or LO ampl i er.
Repeat the procedure for an RBW 100 kHz. I f the l og ampl i er works
i n the 300 kHz RBW but not i n the narrower RBWs, troubl eshoot the
l og narrow l ter i n the l i mi ter or i sol ati on ampl i er. A4CR302 and
A4CR303 are varactor di odes i n the l i mi ter l ter and are used to tune
the l ter.
Limiter
Refer to functi on bl ock G of A4 Log Ampl i er Schemati c Di agram (sheet
2 of 4) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level
I nformation.
The l i mi ter consi sts of 7 i denti cal 20 dB gai n stages. A "l og narrow
l ter"i s swi tched i n for RBWs 100 kHz. Thi s l ter i s swi tched i n usi ng
the control l i nes NARROW between the 4th and 5th stages. Duri ng
normal operati on, the l i mi ter serves to ampl i fy even the smal l est
10.7 MHz si gnal s up to a l evel sufci ent to dri ve the LO Ampl i er and
subsequent detector/mi xer. Thi s si gnal serves as the LO for the mi xer
ci rcui try.
430 Chapter 8
IF Section
Log Amplier Assembly (P/O A4)
Isolation Amplier
Refer to functi on bl ock H of A4 Log Ampl i er Schemati c Di agram
(sheet 3 of 4) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level
I nformation.
The i sol ati on ampl i er prevents LO port to RF port feedthrough i n the
mi xer from feedi ng back to the i nput of the l i mi ter and causi ng l oop
osci l l ati ons. I n addi ti on, the i sol ati on ampl i er matches the phase of
the non-l i mi ted si gnal path to the phase of the l i mi ted si gnal path. The
i sol ati on ampl i er shoul d have a gai n of about 4 dB and al so has a "l og
narrow l ter" that i s swi tched wi th the control l i ne NARROWB.
Detector/Mixer
Refer to functi on bl ock J of A4 Log Ampl i er Schemati c Di agram (sheet
3 of 4) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level
I nformation.
Sum and di fference frequenci es are produced i n the Detector/Mi xer.
The di fference frequency produces vi deo (dc to approxi matel y 3 MHz),
si nce the two si gnal s are at the same frequency. Duri ng di gi tal
resol uti on bandwi dths the two si gnal s are separated by about 4.8 kHz.
Log Offset/Gain Compensation
Refer to functi on bl ocks L and M of A4 Log Ampl i er Schemati c
Di agram (sheet 3 of 4) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer
Component Level I nformation.
Log Offset Compensation
The gai n of A4U503 i s set to uni ty, wi th A4R539 and A4R540 combi ni ng
for a gai n of 0.5. Therefore, the gai n from A4U503 pi n 3 to A4U508 pi n
3 shoul d be 0.5.
Log Gain Compensation
The gai n of A4U508 i s nomi nal l y 6.8, measuri ng from pi n 3 to pi n 8. To
check the l og offset/gai n compensati on ci rcui ts, i nject a +10 dBm si gnal
i nto J3 wi th the spectrum anal yzer set to l og mode. Measure A4U503
pi n 3, V
i n
(1) and A4U508 pi n 3, V
out
(1) and record the resul ts.
Decrease the i nput l evel to 40 dBm and make the same measurements
recordi ng V
i n
(2) and V
out
(2).
The gai n i s then:
Thi s gi ves an offset-i ndependent gai n measurement.
v
OUT
1 ( ) v
OUT
2 ( ) ( )
v
IN
1 ( ) v
IN
2 ( ) ( )
----------------------------------------------------
Chapter 8 431
IF Section
Log Amplier Assembly (P/O A4)
Video MUX
The vi deo MUX swi tches the vi deo output between l i near, l og and 4.8
kHz I F (for di gi tal RBWs). The demod vi deo i s an unused feature. The
easi est way to troubl eshoot thi s ci rcui t i s to l ook for bl own FETs. Bad
FETs are characteri zed by havi ng si gni cant gate current. Onl y one of
the si gnal l i nes LI N_VI DEO, I F_VI DEO or LOG_VI DEO shoul d be
hi gh (+15 V) at any gi ven ti me. The others shoul d be l ow (15 V). Al so
l ook for a vol tage drop of several vol ts across the gate resi stors R601,
R605, R609, or R613 when i n ei ther the off or on state. Thi s i ndi cates
gate current and thus a bad FET.
432 Chapter 8
IF Section
A5 IF Assembly
A5 IF Assembly
The i nput swi tch connects the I F to ei ther the cal osci l l ator on the A4
assembl y or the 10.7 MHz I F output from the A15 RF assembl y. The
automati c I F adjustment uses the cal osci l l ator on A4 at i nstrument
turn-on and between sweeps to al i gn the I F l ters and step-gai n
ampl i ers. Duri ng sweeps the i nput swi tch sel ects the 10.7 MHz I F
output from A15. The LC l ters are vari abl e-bandwi dth l ters that
provi de resol uti on bandwi dths from 30 kHz to 2 MHz. The automati c I F
adjustment sets the bandwi dths and center frequenci es of each l ter
stage.
The crystal l ters are vari abl e-bandwi dth l ters that provi de resol uti on
bandwi dths from 300 Hz to 10 kHz. The automati c I F adjustment sets
the l ter bandwi dths and symmetry.
The step-gai n ampl i ers consi st of the rst step-gai n stage, second
step-gai n stage, and thi rd step-gai n stage. These ampl i ers provi de
gai n when the spectrum anal yzer reference l evel i s changed. The
ampl i ers al so provi de gai n range to compensate for vari ati ons i n the
I F l ter gai ns, whi ch change wi th bandwi dth and envi ronmental
condi ti ons, and band conversi on l oss i n the front end. Fi xed-gai n
ampl i ers shi ft the si gnal l evel s to l ower the noi se of the I F chai n.
The assembl y has two vari abl e attenuators. The ne attenuator
provi des the 0.1 dB reference l evel steps. The reference 15 dB
attenuator provi des a reference for automati c adjustment of the
step-gai n ampl i ers and the l og ampl i er. The reference 15 dB
attenuator al so provi des gai n for changes i n spectrum anal yzer
reference l evel .
Vari ous buffer ampl i ers provi de a hi gh-i nput i mpedance to prevent
l oadi ng of the previ ous l ter pol e and a l ow-output i mpedance to dri ve
the next l ter pol e.
Di gi tal control si gnal s from the W2 control cabl e, the "anal og bus,"
dri ve the control ci rcui try. At the begi nni ng of each sweep, the anal og
bus sets each control l i ne for i nstrument operati on. At the end of each
sweep, the anal og bus sets each control l i ne for the next porti on of the
automati c I F adjustment routi ne. I F adjustments conti nuousl y remove
the effects of component dri ft as the spectrum anal yzer temperature
changes.
The assembl y contai ns a reference l i mi ti ng ampl i er. Thi s ampl i er
provi des a known amount of l i mi ti ng for the automati c I F adjustment
routi nes. (Li mi ti ng occurs onl y duri ng the automati c I F adjustment
routi nes.) The LC34_Short swi tches are open duri ng sweeps. The
current i n the reference l i mi ter i s i ncreased duri ng sweeps to prevent
l i mi ti ng.
Chapter 8 433
IF Section
A5 IF Assembly
CAUTION For troubl eshooti ng, i t i s recommended that you use an acti ve probe,
such as an HP 85024A, and another spectrum anal yzer. I f an HP 1120A
acti ve probe i s bei ng used wi th a spectrum anal yzer havi ng dc-coupl ed
i nputs, such as the HP 8566A/B, HP 8569A/B and the HP 8562A/B,
ei ther set the acti ve probe for an ac-coupl ed output or use a dc-bl ocki ng
capaci tor between the acti ve probe and the spectrum anal yzer i nput.
CAUTION Do not short control vol tages to ground. These vol tages are not
short-ci rcui t protected. DACs damaged by shorti ng these vol tages
mi ght not fai l unti l several weeks after the shorti ng takes pl ace.
Do not short power-suppl y vol tages to ground. The spectrum anal yzer
power-suppl y current l i mi ti ng cannot protect the resi stors i n seri es
wi th the power suppl y.
NOTE Some transi stors have col l ectors connected to the case. El ectri cal
connecti on of the case to the col l ector mi ght not be rel i abl e, maki ng
col l ector vol tage measurements on the transi stor case unrel i abl e.
IF Signature
1. Di sconnect W27 (coax 3) from A5J5.
2. Connect an SMB tee to A5J5, usi ng a short coaxi al cabl e wi th SMB
connectors.
3. Connect one output of the tee to cabl e W27 (coax 3).
4. Connect an HP 85024A acti ve probe, wi th a 10:1 di vi der i nstal l ed, to
the other output of the tee.
5. Connect the output (type N connector) of the acti ve probe to the
i nput of the HP 8566A/B spectrum anal yzer.
6. Connect the probe power cabl e to the HP 8560E/EC front panel
PROBE POWER connector (you may need to use a probe power
extensi on cabl e, HP 10131B).
7. Set the HP 8566A/B control s as fol l ows:
Reference l evel ......................................................... +10 dBm
Center frequency .................................................... 10.7 MHz
Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz
Resol uti on bandwi dth .............................................. 300 kHz
Vi deo bandwi dth ....................................................... 300 kHz
Sweep ti me ....................................................................... 5.5 s
Tri gger .......................................................................... Si ngl e
8. On the HP 8566A/B, press SHIFT (trace A bl ank) to set detector to
SAMPLE mode.
434 Chapter 8
IF Section
A5 IF Assembly
9. On the HP 8560E/EC, press PRESET and set the control s as fol l ows:
Center frequency ...................................................... 300 MHz
Span .............................................................................. 5 MHz
10.On the HP 8560E/EC, press SGL SWP and CAL.
11.Si mul taneousl y press SINGLE on the HP 8566A/B and ADJ CURR IF
STATE on the HP 8560E/EC. The I F si gnature i s di spl ayed on the HP
8566A/B di spl ay. I t may be necessary to experi ment wi th di fferent
ti me i nterval s between i ni ti ati ng the sweep on the HP 8566A/B and
i ni ti ati ng the current I F state adjustment on the HP 8560E/EC.
12.Compare the I F si gnature to the si gnature of a properl y operati ng
spectrum anal yzer i l l ustrated i n Fi gure 8-3 on page 435. I f the
si gnatures do not cl osel y resembl e each other, a more detai l ed vi ew
of the si gnature may show the fai l ed hardware.
a. Set the HP 8566A/B control s as fol l ows:
Sweep ti me ........................................................ 550 ms
dB/DI V ................................................................... 5 dB
Reference l evel ................................................ 5 dBm
b. Press SINGLE on the HP 8566A/B and, a very short ti me l ater,
press ADJ CURR IF STATE on HP 8560E/EC. Fi gure 8-4 on page
436 through Fi gure 8-8 on page 440 i l l ustrate detai l ed I F
si gnatures of a properl y operati ng HP 8560E/EC. I t may be
necessary to experi ment wi th di fferent ti me i nterval s between
i ni ti ati ng the sweep on the HP 8566A/B and i ni ti ati ng the current
I F state adjustment on the HP 8560E/EC to obtai n the waveforms
shown. Note the changes i n the HP 8566A/B vi deo bandwi dth and
sweep ti me.
13.Reconnect W27 (coax 3) to A5J5.
Chapter 8 435
IF Section
A5 IF Assembly
Figure 8-3 IF Adjust Signature
436 Chapter 8
IF Section
A5 IF Assembly
Figure 8-4 Detailed IF Adjust Signature (1)
Chapter 8 437
IF Section
A5 IF Assembly
Figure 8-5 Detailed IF Adjust Signature (2)
438 Chapter 8
IF Section
A5 IF Assembly
Figure 8-6 Detailed IF Adjust Signature (3)
Chapter 8 439
IF Section
A5 IF Assembly
Figure 8-7 Detailed IF Adjust Signature (4)
440 Chapter 8
IF Section
A5 IF Assembly
Figure 8-8 Detailed IF Adjust Signature (5)
Chapter 8 441
IF Section
A5 IF Assembly
Common IF Signature Problems
Region A of Figure 8-4 on page 436 is noisy:
Suspect the rst LC pol e.
Region B of Figure 8-4 on page 436 is at:
Suspect the thi rd step-gai n stage, the ne attenuator, or the fourth
LC-pol e output ampl i er.
Region C of Figure 8-4, Detailed IF Adjust Signature (1), has
no 15 dB step:
Suspect the reference 15 dB attenuator.
Region D of Figure 8-4 on page 436 is at:
Suspect the second step-gai n stage.
Entire signature noisy:
I f the si gnature resembl es Fi gure 8-9 on page 442, suspect a broken
rst step-gai n stage or a break i n the si gnal path i n the i nput swi tch,
rst crystal pol e, or second crystal pol e.
Correct shape but noisy:
I f the si gnature resembl es Fi gure 8-10 on page 443, suspect the second
crystal -pol e output ampl i er.
Amplitude of Region B of Figure 8-11 on page 444 varies more
than 12 dB:
Suspect the thi rd step-gai n stage output ampl i er.
Region B of Figure 8-12 on page 445 is kinked:
Suspect the fourth LC-pol e output ampl i er.
442 Chapter 8
IF Section
A5 IF Assembly
Figure 8-9 Noisy Signature
Chapter 8 443
IF Section
A5 IF Assembly
Figure 8-10 Noise with Correct Shape
444 Chapter 8
IF Section
A5 IF Assembly
Figure 8-11 Region B Amplitude Variation
Chapter 8 445
IF Section
A5 IF Assembly
Figure 8-12 Region B Amplitude Offset
1 MHz Resolution Bandwidth Problems
Check the crystal shorti ng swi tches as fol l ows:
1. On the spectrum anal yzer, press PRESET and set the control s as
fol l ows:
Resol uti on bandwi dth ................................................. 1 MHz
Span .......................................................................... 500 kHz
Center frequency ..................................................... 300 MHz
2. On the spectrum anal yzer, connect the 300 MHz CAL OUTPUT to
the I NPUT 50 .
3. I f the trace atness i s not wi thi n 2.5 dB, a fai l ure probabl y exi sts.
4. A trace si mi l ar to Fi gure 8-13 on page 446 i ndi cates a crystal short
fai l ure.
5. Press SPAN to set the spectrum anal yzer to 3 MHz. A trace that
sl opes across the screen (see Fi gure 8-14 on page 447) i ndi cates a
fai l ed LC pol e. To i sol ate the broken pol e refer to the shape factor
i nformati on i n "30 kHz Resol uti on Bandwi dth Probl ems."
446 Chapter 8
IF Section
A5 IF Assembly
Figure 8-13 Faulty Crystal Short
Chapter 8 447
IF Section
A5 IF Assembly
Figure 8-14 Faulty LC Pole
30 kHz Resolution Bandwidth Problems
Shape factor too hi gh: Shape factor i s the rati o of the 60 dB bandwi dth
to the 3 dB bandwi dth. Shape factor shoul d be l ess than 15:1. I f one of
the LC pol es mal functi ons, the shape factor may be the onl y i ndi cati on
of the fai l ure. I sol ate the non-functi oni ng pol e wi th the I F si gnature.
Regi on E of Fi gure 8-8 on page 440 i l l ustrates the four LC- pol e
adjustments. Take several si gnatures to exami ne the LC-pol e
adjustments. I f one of the four secti ons of Regi on E i s consi stentl y
l onger than the others, the correspondi ng LC pol e i s faul ty.
I F gai n compressi on: FETtransi stors Q301, Q303, Q700, and Q701 can
deteri orate wi th age. Measuri ng l ess than 0 vol ts on the FET source
i ndi cates a bad FET.
Bandwi dth too wi de: Check for contami nati on on the pri nted-ci rcui t
board. Cl ean the board as requi red.
448 Chapter 8
IF Section
A5 IF Assembly
3 kHz and 10 kHz Resolution Bandwidth Problems
Asymmetri c Fi l ter Response: Check the crystal symmetry control wi th
the fol l owi ng steps:
1. Press PRESET.
2. Set the spectrum anal yzer control s as fol l ows:
Resol uti on bandwi dth ................................................ 3 kHz
Span ........................................................................ 100 kHz
Center frequency .................................................. 300 MHz
3. On the spectrum anal yzer, connect the 300 MHz CAL OUTPUT to
the I NPUT 50 .
4. A trace si mi l ar to Fi gure 8-15 on page 448 i ndi cates a fai l ed
crystal -symmetry ci rcui t.
Narrow 10 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth: Check for pri nted-ci rcui t board
contami nati on. Cl ean the board as requi red.
I F Gai n Compressi on i n 10 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth: FET transi stors
Q202, Q203, Q501, and Q503 can deteri orate wi th age. Measuri ng l ess
than 0 vol ts on the FET source i ndi cates a bad FET.
Figure 8-15 Faulty Crystal Symmetry
Chapter 8 449
IF Section
A5 IF Assembly
Step Gains
Refer to functi on bl ocks B, H, and I of A5 I F l ter schemati c di agram
(sheets 1 of 3 and2 of 3) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer
Component Level I nformation.
1. On the spectrum anal yzer, press PRESET, SPAN, ZERO
SPAN, FREQUENCY, and 1 GHz.
2. Press CAL and IF ADJ OFF.
3. Di sconnect W29 (coax 7) from A5J3 and W27 (coax 3) from A5J5.
4. I nject a 5 dBm, 10.7 MHz si gnal i nto A5J3.
5. Moni tor the output of A5J5 wi th another spectrum anal yzer.
6. Si mul taneousl y decrease the si gnal generator output and spectrum
anal yzer reference l evel i n 10 dB steps down to a 50 dBm reference
l evel .
7. At each step, the si gnal di spl ayed on the other spectrum anal yzer
shoul d be cl ose to +10 dBm. (More subtl e I F gai n probl ems mi ght
requi re smal l er si gnal generator and reference l evel steps.)
8. Reconnect W29 to A5J3 and W27 (coax 3) to A5J5.
450 Chapter 8
IF Section
Cal Oscillator Assembly (P/O A4)
Cal Oscillator Assembly (P/O A4)
The cal osci l l ator on the A4 assembl y suppl i es the sti mul us si gnal for
automati c I F adjustments. Normal l y, the osci l l ator operates onl y duri ng
retrace (for a few mi l l i seconds) to adjust part of the I F. (Al l I F
parameters are to be readjusted about every 5 mi nutes.) Wi th
conti nuous I F adjust ON, a group of I F parameters are adjusted duri ng
each retrace peri od (non-di srupti ve). I f conti nuous I F adjust i s OFF, the
most recent I F cal i brati on data i s used.
The I F parameters adjusted i ncl ude step gai ns, l og ampl i er gai n and
offset, bandwi dth centeri ng, 3 dB bandwi dth, bandwi dth ampl i tude,
and crystal -l ter symmetry.
The cal osci l l ator provi des three types of output si gnal s (al l 35 dBm):
10.7 MHz
9.9 to 11.5 MHz i n 100 kHz steps
Frequency sweeps from 20 kHz to 2 kHz centered at 10.7 MHz
(l asti ng 5 to 60 ms respecti vel y)
The si gnal s perform the fol l owi ng functi ons:
Adjust gai ns, l og amps, and vi deo sl opes and offsets.
Adjust 3 dB bandwi dth and center frequenci es of LC resol uti on
bandwi dth l ters (30 kHz through 1 MHz).
Adjust 3 dB bandwi dth, symmetry, and gai n of the crystal resol uti on
bandwi dth l ters (300 Hz through 10 kHz).
The cal osci l l ator uses a phase-l ocked l oop (PLL). The osci l l ator
(functi on bl ock X) i s l ocked to the i nstrument 10 MHz reference. The
reference di vi der (functi on bl ock U) di vi des the reference and del i vers a
100 kHz TTL si gnal to the phase detector (functi on bl ock V). The
di vi de-by-N ci rcui try (functi on bl ock Y) di vi des the osci l l ator output of
9.9 MHz to 11.5 MHz (by 99 to 115) resul ti ng i n a 100 kHz output to the
phase detector. When the cal -osci l l ator PLL i s l ocked, narrow posi ti ve
and negati ve of equal wi dth pul ses occur at the phase detector output.
Si nce the phase detector dri ves a l ow-i nput i mpedance at the l oop
i ntegrator, observe the posi ti ve pul ses at A4CR808 anode and negati ve
pul ses at A4CR809 cathode.
The l oop i ntegrator acts as a l ow-pass l ter that l ters the pul ses and
i nverts the resul t. I f the anode of A4CR808 i s more posi ti ve (wi th
respect to ground) than the cathode of A4CR809 i s negati ve, the l oop
i ntegrator output shoul d saturate to approxi matel y 13 V. Conversel y,
i f the anode of A4CR808 i s l ess posi ti ve than the cathode of A4CR809 i s
negati ve, the i ntegrator shoul d saturate to a posi ti ve vol tage.
Chapter 8 451
IF Section
Cal Oscillator Assembly (P/O A4)
NOTE I f error messages ERR 581 AMPL or ERR 582 AMPL appears, refer to
error message ERR 582 AMPL i n Chapter 6 and perform the procedure
provi ded.
1. The osci l l ator output frequency shoul d exceed 11.5 MHz i f the CAL
OSC TUNE l i ne, A4U804 pi n 14, exceeds +9 V. The osci l l ator
frequency shoul d be l ess than 9.9 MHz i f CAL OSC TUNE i s l ess
than 9 V. The osci l l ator onl y operates when CALOSC_OFF i s l ow (0
V).
2. I f the cal osci l l ator remai ns l ocked (no error code ERR 499 di spl ayed)
but does not have the correct output l evel , troubl eshoot the output
l evel i ng ci rcui try (functi on bl ocks AA, AB, and AC) or output
attenuator (functi on bl ock AD).
Cal Oscillator Unlock at Beginning of IF Adjust
1. Press LINE to turn the spectrum anal yzer off and then on. The words
IF ADJUST STATUS appear on the di spl ay 10 seconds after the
i nstrument i s turned on (assumi ng the rest of the i nstrument i s
worki ng correctl y). I mmedi atel y observe the l ower ri ght corner of
the di spl ay for error messages. I f the message ERR499 CAL UNLK
appears (before errors ERR 561, ERR 562 and ERR 565), the cal
osci l l ator i s unabl e to phase-l ock. Expect to see the ERR 499 message
for onl y about 1 second.
2. I f the spectrum anal yzer regi sters an unl ocked cal osci l l ator,
conti nue wi th step 3 to veri fy the presence of external l y suppl i ed
si gnal s.
3. Check A4U811 pi n 9 for a 100 kHz TTL-l evel square wave veri fyi ng
operati on of A4U811, A4Q802, and the 10 MHz i nput si gnal from
A4J7.
4. Check the +15 VF, +5 VF and 15 V power suppl i es, and +10 V
reference on the A4 assembl y.
5. Check that A4U807 pi n 5 (CALOSC_OFF) becomes TTL l ow (0 V) at
the start of a FULL I F ADJ (press CAL and FULL IF ADJ). The phase
modul ati on output at A4U804 pi n 8 shoul d al so remai n at 0 vol ts. I f
these checks are correct, troubl eshoot bl ocks V, W, X, and Y. See
Fi gure 8-21 on page 463, A4 Log Ampl i er/Cal Osci l l ator Bl ock
Di agram (2 of 2).
452 Chapter 8
IF Section
Cal Oscillator Assembly (P/O A4)
Inadequate CAL OSC AMPTD Range
Refer to functi on bl ock AC of A4 Log Ampl i er Schemati c Di agram i n
the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level I nformation.
1. I f A4R826, CAL OSC AMPTD, has i nadequate range to perform the
I F Ampl i tude Adjustment, press CAL.
2. Rotate A4R826 ful l y cl ockwi se and di sconnect W52 (coax 9) from
A5J4.
3. Connect A5J4 to the i nput of a second spectrum anal yzer.
4. Set the other spectrum anal yzer control s as fol l ows:
Center frequency ................................................. 10.7 MHz
Reference l evel ....................................................... 30 dBm
5. Observe the spectrum anal yzer di spl ay whi l e pressi ng FULL IF
ADJ. The si gnal l evel shoul d be greater than 34.55 dBm. I f the
si gnal l evel i s i ncorrect, conti nue wi th step 7.
6. Rotate A4R826 ful l y countercl ockwi se. The si gnal shoul d be l ess
than 36.25 dBm. I f the si gnal l evel i s correct at both setti ngs,
troubl eshoot the A5 I F assembl y. I f the si gnal l evel i s i ncorrect,
conti nue wi th step 7.
7. Troubl eshoot the ALC l oop on thi s assembl y usi ng the fol l owi ng
steps:
a. Connect a posi ti ve DVM probe to A4J9 pi n 4.
b. On the spectrum anal yzer, press CAL.
c. Press FULL IF ADJ. Observe the DVM readi ng between the
di spl ayed messages IF ADJUST STATUS: 300 kHz RBW and IF
ADJUST STATUS: 3 kHz RBW. Duri ng thi s ti me peri od, the vol tage
shoul d be wi thi n a 2 to 10 Vdc range.
d. Observe the DVM readi ng whi l e IF ADJUST STATUS: AMPLITUDE
i s di spl ayed. The readi ng shoul d be wi thi n the 2 to 10 Vdc range.
e. I f the DVM readi ng i s outsi de the range i n step c but i nsi de the
range i n step d, suspect a reacti ve component i n the l ter.
8. I f the ALC l oop i s worki ng correctl y (A4J9 pi n 4 wi thi n the test
tol erances gi ven), then ei ther the output attenuator i s defecti ve, or
A4U810 pi n 6 (i n ALC l oop i ntegrator) i s outsi de of i ts +3 to +6 Vdc
range.
9. Reconnect W52 (coax 9) to A5J4.
Chapter 8 453
IF Section
Cal Oscillator Assembly (P/O A4)
300 Hz to 3 kHz Resolution Bandwidth Out of
Specication
1. I f the 3 dB bandwi dth of one of these l ters i s i ncorrect, suspect a
fai l ure of one of the ve avai l abl e sweeps from the sweep generator
i n the cal osci l l ator (functi on bl ock Z). These sweeps are generated
by changi ng the swi tch setti ngs of A4U803 whi ch routes si gnal s
through A4U802 and A4U804.
2. Di sconnect W52 (coax 9) from A4J8.
3. Connect the source connecti on of a 3 dB power spl i tter (Mi ni ci rcui ts
Model : ZSC J-2-1) to A4J8. Connect one output of the power spl i tter
to the i nput of an HP 8566A/B spectrum anal yzer. Connect the other
output of the power spl i tter to cabl e W52 (coax 9).
NOTE I f a 3 dB power spl i tter i s not avai l abl e, an SMB tee and an acti ve probe
may be substi tuted. Connect the acti ve probe between the tee and the
other spectrum anal yzer. The absol ute power l evel s are approxi matel y
3 dB hi gher than those stated bel ow, due to the el i mi nati on of the 3 dB
power spl i tter.
4. Press INSTR PRESET on the HP 8566A/B and set the control s as
fol l ows:
Center frequency .................................................... 10.8 MHz
Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz
Reference l evel ......................................................... 43 dBm
Resol uti on bandwi dth .............................................. 100 kHz
Vi deo bandwi dth ......................................................... 10 kHz
Sweep ti me .................................................................... 50 ms
Scal e ......................................................................... 1 dB/DI V
Sweep ............................................................................ Si ngl e
5. On the spectrum anal yzer, press PRESET and CAL.
6. Press FULL IF ADJ. When the di spl ay reads ADJUSTING IF:
10 kHz RBW, press SINGLE on the HP 8566A/B.
7. The HP 8566A/B screen i l l ustrates frequency versus ti me of the cal
osci l l ator output sweeps. See Fi gure 8-16 on page 455. The sl ope of
the HP 8566A/B 100 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth i s used to detect
frequency changes. Sweeps that vary (greater than 30%) from the
normal l evel s, tri gger error code ERR 581 or ERR
582.
454 Chapter 8
IF Section
Cal Oscillator Assembly (P/O A4)
8. Press FULL IF ADJ. When the di spl ay reads ADJUSTING IF: 3
kHz, press SINGLE on the HP 8566A/B.
9. Fi gure 8-17 on page 456 i l l ustrates normal operati on. Severe
fai l ures (sl ope error greater than 30 percent) and subtl e 3 kHz
resol uti on bandwi dth errors (l ess than 30 percent) i ndi cate a
probl em wi th A4U802, A4U803, A4U804, or A4U106.
10.Severe fai l ure of the bandwi dth accompani ed by subtl e errors i n the
output si gnal i ndi cate an A5 fai l ure.
11.Set the HP 8566A/B control s as fol l ows:
Center frequency ............................................. 10.710 MHz
Resol uti on bandwi dth .............................................. 10 kHz
Vi deo bandwi dth ......................................................... 1 kHz
Sweep ti me ............................................................... 200 ms
12.On the spectrum anal yzer, press FULL IF ADJ. When the message IF
ADJUST STATUS:1 kHz RBW appears, press SINGLE on the HP
8566A/B.
13.Fi gure 8-18 on page 457 i l l ustrates normal operati on. Severe
fai l ures (sl ope error greater than 30%) and subtl e 3 kHz resol uti on
bandwi dth errors (l ess than 30%) i ndi cate a probl em wi th A4U802,
U803, U804, or U106.
14.On the spectrum anal yzer, press FULL IF ADJ. When the message IF
ADJUST STATUS: 300 Hz RBW appears, press SINGLE on the HP
8566A/B.
15.Fi gure 8-19 on page 458 i l l ustrates normal operati on. Severe
fai l ures (sl ope error >30%) and 3 kHz resol uti on bandwi dth errors
(l ess than 30%) i ndi cate a probl em wi th A4U802, U803, U804, or
U106.
16.Reconnect W52 (whi te) to A4J8.
Chapter 8 455
IF Section
Cal Oscillator Assembly (P/O A4)
Figure 8-16 Output Waveform, 10 kHz Resolution Bandwidth
456 Chapter 8
IF Section
Cal Oscillator Assembly (P/O A4)
Figure 8-17 Output Waveform, 3 kHz Resolution Bandwidth
Chapter 8 457
IF Section
Cal Oscillator Assembly (P/O A4)
Figure 8-18 Output Waveform, 1 kHz Resolution Bandwidth
458 Chapter 8
IF Section
Cal Oscillator Assembly (P/O A4)
Figure 8-19 Output Waveform, 300 Hz Resolution Bandwidth
Chapter 8 459
IF Section
Cal Oscillator Assembly (P/O A4)
Figure 8-20 Failed Crystal Set Symptoms
Low-Pass Filter
Refer to functi on bl ock AB of A4 Log Ampl i er Schemati c Di agram i n
the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level I nformation.
1. Connect a DVM posi ti ve probe to A4J9 pi n 4.
2. On the spectrum anal yzer, press CAL.
3. Press FULL IF ADJUST. Observe the DVM readi ng between the
di spl ayed messages IF ADJUST STATUS: 300 kHz RBW and IF
ADJUST STATUS: 3 kHz RBW. Duri ng thi s ti me peri od, the vol tage
shoul d be wi thi n a 2 to 10 Vdc range.
4. Observe the DVM readi ng whi l e IF ADJUST STATUS: AMPLITUDE i s
di spl ayed. The readi ng shoul d be wi thi n the 2 to 10 Vdc range.
5. I f the DVM readi ng i s outsi de the range i n step 3 but i nsi de the
range i n step 4, suspect a reacti ve component i n the l ter.
460 Chapter 8
IF Section
Cal Oscillator Assembly (P/O A4)
Sweep Generator
Refer to functi on bl ock Z of A4 l og ampl i er schemati c di agram i n the
HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level I nformation.
A properl y operati ng sweep generator generates a seri es of
negati ve-goi ng parabol as. Before the sweep, swi tches A4U802C and
A4U802D turn on, shorti ng A4C802 and A4C801 (the output i s at 0
vol ts). These swi tches open to start the sweep. The output of A4U804A,
pi n 1, i s 0.35 V to 10 V, dependi ng on the sweep wi dth sel ected by
A4U802A and A4U803A. Thi s vol tage appears across A4R801.
Capaci tor A4C801 i ntegrates the current through A4R801. The output
of A4U804B i s a strai ght, negati ve-goi ng ramp. Capaci tor A4C802 and
resi stor A4R802 i ntegrate the output of A4U804A whi ch starts a
negati ve ramp (A4U804C) at the begi nni ng of the sweep. The ramp
from A4U804B i s added to the current i n A4R802 vi a A4U803B.
I ntegrati ng thi s ramp resul ts i n the parabol i c output waveform.
AM/FM Demodulation, Audio Amplier, and Speaker
Refer to functi on bl ocks R, S, and T of A4 Log Ampl i er Schemati c
(sheet 4 of 4) Di agram i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer
Component Level I nformation.
I f the audi o ci rcui ts are not functi oni ng use the fol l owi ng procedure to
i sol ate the probl em:
1. Set an AM si gnal generator control s as fol l ows:
Frequency ............................................................. 100 MHz
Ampl i tude ................................................................ 6 dBm
Modul ati on type .................................................... 80%AM
Modul ati on frequency .............................................. 400 Hz
2. Set the spectrum anal yzer control s as fol l ows:
Center frequency .................................................. 100 MHz
Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz
Sweep ti me ................................................................. 50 ms
Reference l evel ........................................................... 0 dBm
Resol uti on bandwi dth .............................................. 10 kHz
Ampl i tude scal e LI NEAR
3. Adjust the spectrum anal yzer reference l evel and center frequency to
di spl ay the 400 Hz modul ati on frequency ei ght di vi si ons
peak-to-peak.
4. On the spectrum anal yzer, press AUX CTRL, AM/FM DEMOD, AM
DEMOD ON, and set the sweep ti me to 5 seconds.
5. Vary the vol ume and l i sten for the vari ati on i n speaker output l evel .
Cl i ppi ng i s normal at the hi ghest vol ume l evel s.
6. I f the audi o i s not worki ng correctl y, moni tor the si gnal at A4U704
Chapter 8 461
IF Section
Cal Oscillator Assembly (P/O A4)
pi n 3 wi th an osci l l oscope. The si gnal shoul d be 20 mV peak-to-peak
25% (wi th +2.5 V of dc bi as). I f the si gnal measures outsi de these
l i mi ts, the faul t i s pri or to the audi o ampl i er (bl ock T).
7. I f the si gnal i s correct, troubl eshoot the audi o ampl i er and speaker.
462 Chapter 8
IF Section
Cal Oscillator Assembly (P/O A4)
464 Chapter 8
IF Section
Cal Oscillator Assembly (P/O A4)
466 Chapter 8
IF Section
Cal Oscillator Assembly (P/O A4)
468 Chapter 8
IF Section
Cal Oscillator Assembly (P/O A4)
469
9 Controller Section
470 Chapter 9
Controller Section
Introduction
Introduction
The control l er secti on i ncl udes the A2 control l er assembl y, A19 HP-I B
assembl y, and BT1 battery. The presence of a di spl ay (grati cul e and
annotati on) veri es that most of the A2 control l er assembl y i s operati ng
properl y.
Troubl eshooti ng Usi ng the TAM (8560E).......................... page 471
Bl ank Di spl ay (8560E)...................................................... page 471
Di gi tal Si gnature Anal ysi s DSA (8560E)........................ page 474
Di spl ay Probl ems (8560E) .................................................. page 475
Li ne Generators ................................................................ page 475
Bl anki ng ............................................................................ page 476
Di spl ay Jumbl ed or Trace Off Screen .............................. page 478
I ntensi ty ............................................................................ page 482
Bad Characters or Grati cul e ............................................ page 483
Long Li nes Di mmer than Short Li nes ............................. page 483
Anal og Zero-Span Probl ems (8560E) ................................ page 486
Frequency-Count Marker Probl ems................................... page 487
Frequency Counter .............................................................. page 489
State- and Trace-Storage Probl ems ................................... page 499
Keyboard Probl ems ............................................................. page 500
NOTE When measuri ng vol tages or waveforms, make ground connecti ons to
A2TP3. The metal board-standoffs are not grounded and shoul d not be
used when taki ng measurements.
Chapter 9 471
Controller Section
Troubleshooting Using the TAM (8560E)
Troubleshooting Using the TAM (8560E)
Tabl e 9-1 on page 471 l i sts assembl y test connectors associ ated wi th
each Manual Probe Troubl eshooti ng test. Fi gure 9-1 on page 472
i l l ustrates the l ocati on of the A2 test connectors.
Blank Display
Use the fol l owi ng procedure i f the i nstrument di spl ay i s bl ank. Thi s
procedure substi tutes an HP-I B pri nter for the di spl ay.
1. Connect the pri nter to the HP 8560E and set the pri nter address to
the val ue requi red by the TAM. Thi s i s usual l y 1.
2. Al l of the power-suppl y i ndi cator LEDs al ong the edge of the A2
control l er assembl y shoul d be l i t.
3. The rear panel CRT+110 VDC ON i ndi cator mi ght not be l i t, even i f
the +110 V i s present.
4. Connect the TAM probe cabl e to A2J11.
5. Press MODULE, SOFT KEY #3, , and SOFT
Table 9-1 TAM Tests versus Test Connectors
Connector Manual Probe
Troubleshooting Test
Measured Signal Lines
A2J11 ADC/MUX Test MS1, MS3 through MS6, MS8
DAC test MS2, MS7, OS1
A2J201 10 vol t reference test MS4
Swi tch dri ve test MS8
Buffered X &Y DAC outputs MS2, MS7
X l i ne gen test MS6
Y l i ne gen test MS1
I ntensi ty offset output MS3
A2J202 Revi si on MS1
X, Y, &Z Output Offset MS3, MS4, MS7
X output ampl i er MS7
Y output ampl i er MS3
Bl anki ng test MS8
Focus DAC test MS2
472 Chapter 9
Controller Section
Troubleshooting Using the TAM (8560E)
KEY #1. (The top soft key i s #1.)
6. The yel l ow LED next to A2J11 shoul d bl i nk approxi matel y ten
ti mes. I f the LED fai l s to bl i nk correctl y, troubl eshoot the di gi tal
secti on of the A2 control l er assembl y.
7. Move the probe cabl e to A2J202. Press SOFT KEY #1 and wai t ve
seconds.
8. Press SOFT KEY #4. The resul ts shoul d be sent to the pri nter.
9. I f a fai l ure i s i ndi cated i n any of these tests, the faul t l i es on the A2
control l er assembl y. To obtai n more i nformati on:
a. Press the step down key, one l ess ti me than the test number.
(For exampl e, press i t twi ce for the thi rd test on the l i st.)
b. Press SOFT KEY #3, then SOFT KEY #4, and when the pri ntout i s
compl ete, SOFT KEY #6.
Figure 9-1 A2 Test Connectors
10.Move the probe cabl e to A2J201, press SOFT KEY #1 and wai t ve
seconds.
11.Press SOFT KEY #4. The resul ts wi l l be sent to the pri nter. Fol l ow the
procedure i n step 9 to obtai n more i nformati on on any of the tests.
Chapter 9 473
Controller Section
Troubleshooting Using the TAM (8560E)
12.I f no fai l ures were i ndi cated i n testi ng the A2 control l er, move the
probe cabl e to A17J4.
13.Press SOFT KEY #1 and wai t ve seconds.
14.Press SOFT KEY #4. The resul ts wi l l be sent to the pri nter.
15.I f no fai l ure i s i ndi cated i n the pri ntout, refer to "Hi gh Vol tage
Suppl i es" i n Chapter 12.
474 Chapter 9
Controller Section
Digital Signature Analysis DSA (8560E)
Digital Signature Analysis DSA (8560E)
Di gi tal si gnature anal ysi s (DSA) pl aces mi croprocessor, A2U1, i n a
si mpl i ed known state. Thi s si mpl i ed state consi sts of pl aci ng a
one-word i nstructi on, MOVE QUI CK, (0111 XX10 XXXX XXX0) on the
data bus. The mi croprocessor cycl es through i ts address range
conti nual l y readi ng the i nstructi on. Perform the fol l owi ng DSA
procedure to test the operati on of mi croprocessor, A2U1:
1. Set the HP 8560E LINE swi tch off.
2. Move the DSA jumper on J3 (l ocated i n the mi ddl e of the A2
assembl y) from the DI Sabl e posi ti on to the ENAbl e posi ti on.
3. Remove jumper A2E1. A2E1 i s a 16 pi n dual -i n-l i ne package l ocated
i n the mi ddl e of the A2 Assembl y. Set the HP 8560E LINE swi tch
on.
4. Use an osci l l oscope to conrm that address l i nes, address strobe, and
chi p sel ects are toggl i ng at proper l evel s.
5. Use an osci l l oscope to check the address l i ne sequenci ng. The si gnal
on each l i ne (starti ng wi th A1 and endi ng wi th A23) shoul d be
one-hal f the frequency of the previ ous l i ne.
6. I f step 4 reveal s probl ems, mi croprocessor A2U1 i s probabl y faul ty.
7. Set the HP 8560E LINE swi tch off. Repl ace jumper A2E1. Move the
DSA jumper from connecti ng E5 and E6 back to connecti ng E6 and
E7.
Chapter 9 475
Controller Section
Display Problems (8560E)
Display Problems (8560E)
NOTE See page page 621 for i nformati on on troubl eshooti ng 8560EC di spl ay
probl ems.
Line Generators
Refer to functi on bl ocks D and I of A2 control l er schemati c di agram
(sheet 1 of 4) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Component Level I nformation.
The l i ne generators convert the di gi tal di spl ay i nformati on to an anal og
output sui tabl e to dri ve the A17 CRT dri ver assembl y. These ci rcui ts
change the di gi tal words i nto vectors, or l i nes, whi ch move the beam of
the CRT. The vectors are each 6 s l ong (wi dth of the I NTEGRATE
pul se) fol l owed by a 1 s SAMPLE pul se. When characters of text are
bei ng drawn, the vectors are 3 s l ong.
1. On the HP 8560E press PRESET.
2. On the HP 8560E, press CAL, MORE, and CRT ADJ PATTERN. I f the
di spl ay i s bl ank, press the bottom softkey and then the top softkey.
3. Set an osci l l oscope to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Ampl i tude scal e ........................................................ 3 V/di v
Sweep ti me ............................................................. 1 ms/di v
Tri ggeri ng .............................................................. External
4. External l y tri gger the osci l l oscope off the si gnal at A2U207 pi n 8
(LBRI GHT).
5. Compare the si gnal s at the fol l owi ng test poi nts wi th those
i l l ustrated i n Fi gure 9-2 on page 476.
X POS: A2J202 pi n 14
Y POS: A2J202 pi n 3
Z OUT: A2J201 pi n 3
BLANKI NG: A2J202 pi n 15
NOTE Waveforms di spl ayed on an anal og scope may show consi derabl y more
spi kes. Thi s i s normal and i s due to the wi der di spl ayed bandwi dth.
6. Troubl eshoot the ci rcui ts associ ated wi th any bad waveforms.
476 Chapter 9
Controller Section
Display Problems (8560E)
Figure 9-2 Line Generator Output Waveforms
Blanking
Refer to functi on bl ock J of A2 Control l er Schemati c Di agram (sheet 1
of 4) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Component Level I nformation.
1. Usi ng an osci l l oscope, check for bl anki ng pul ses at A2J202 pi n 15.
A2U206 pi n 6 shoul d be at a TTL hi gh. Bl anki ng pul ses turn the
CRT beam off duri ng the sampl e ti me of the l i ne generators and
when movi ng the CRT beam to a new posi ti on for drawi ng the next
vector.
2. Set an osci l l oscope to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Ampl i tude scal e ........................................................... 4 V/di v
Ampl i tude offset ........................................................... +2.5 V
Sweep ti me .............................................................. 20 s/di v
Tri ggeri ng ................................................................. External
3. External l y tri gger the osci l l oscope off the si gnal at A2U207 pi n 8
(LBRI GHT).
4. Compare the bl anki ng-ci rcui t i nput si gnal s at the fol l owi ng test
poi nts wi th those i l l ustrated i n Fi gure 9-3 on page 477.
BLANKI NG: J202 pi n 15
BLANK: U214 pi n 12
VECTOR: U214 pi n 11
U213 pi n 13
Chapter 9 477
Controller Section
Display Problems (8560E)
5. The waveforms i n Fi gure 9-3 on page 477 must match the ti mi ng of
the vectors bei ng drawn. To do thi s, U215B i s used to adjust the
l eadi ng edge, and U215A i s used to adjust the trai l i ng edge. The rst
si x hori zontal di vi si ons show the l i ne drawi ng mode where the
VECTOR pul ses are 6 s apart. The remai ni ng di vi si ons shows
character mode (VECTOR pul ses 3 s apart). The BLANK pul ses are
synchroni zed to the VECTOR pul ses by U214B. The fourth trace
shows the doubl e pul ses whi ch del ay the l eadi ng and trai l i ng edges
of the bl anki ng pul ses.
6. Set the osci l l oscope to the fol l owi ng setti ngs to expand the rst and
fourth traces. Thi s di spl ays how the ri si ng edges of U213-13
determi ne the transi ti ons of the bl anki ng pul ses. See Fi gure 9-4 on
page 478.
Ampl i tude scal e ............................................................. 4 V/di v
Ampl i tude offset ............................................................. +2.5 V
Sweep ti me .................................................................. 2 s/di v
Del ay from tri gger ............................................................ 96 s
Tri ggeri ng ................................................................... External
Figure 9-3 Blanking Waveforms
478 Chapter 9
Controller Section
Display Problems (8560E)
Figure 9-4 Expanded Blanking Waveforms
Display J umbled or Trace Off Screen
Refer to functi on bl ocks D and I of A2 control l er schemati c di agram
(sheet 1 of 4) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Component Level I nformation.
The two l i ne generators are i denti cal ci rcui ts, so the fol l owi ng steps
appl y to both. The X generator i s referenced bel ow, wi th Y generator
references i n parentheses.
1. The vol tage at A2U202B pi n 7 shoul d measure 10.0 V.
2. Perform steps 1 through 5 of "Li ne Generators"i n thi s chapter. I f the
X POS and Y POS waveforms l ook di fferent from those i l l ustrated i n
Fi gure 9-2 on page 476, check the waveforms at the l ow-pass l ter
i nput (functi on bl ock E i n the component-l evel i nformati on bi nder).
3. The waveform at the l ow-pass l ter shoul d l ook l i ke X POS i n Fi gure
9-2 on page 476 but have an ampl i tude from 0 V to +5 V.
4. I f the waveform i n step 3 i s i ncorrect, set an osci l l oscope to the
fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Ampl i tude scal e ......................................................... 10 V/di v
Sweep ti me .............................................................. 20 s/di v
Tri ggeri ng ................................................................. External
5. Tri gger the osci l l oscope on the si gnal at U207 pi n 8 (LBRI GHT).
6. Compare the l i ne-generator i nput si gnal s at the fol l owi ng test poi nts
wi th those i l l ustrated i n Fi gure 9-5 on page 479. I NTEGRATE and
SAMPLE waveforms are repl i cas of VECTOR except for pol ari ty and
Chapter 9 479
Controller Section
Display Problems (8560E)
ampl i tude. LCHAR i s l ow when characters are drawn.
I NTEGRATE: Q202 col l ector
SAMPLE: Q201 col l ector
LCHAR: U207 pi n 9
VECTOR: U213 Pi n 9
Figure 9-5 Switch Driver Waveform LCHAR
7. Al l of the DAC i nputs shoul d change state two or more ti mes wi thi n
a 5 ms wi ndow. I f one or more DAC bi ts are not worki ng correctl y,
thi s wi l l effect the enti re di spl ay, especi al l y the di agonal l i nes that
go from l ower l eft to upper ri ght. When these l i nes are drawn, both
the X and Y DACs are stepped one count at a ti me. A "stuck"bi t wi l l
di stort the di agonal i n a repeti ti ve manner. The qui cker the
repeti ti on, the l ess si gni cant the "stuck" bi t. Hori zontal di storti ons
appl y to the X LI NE GENERATOR DAC, whi l e verti cal di storti ons
appl y to the Y LI NE GENERATOR DAC. The DACS have current
outputs so they are not readi l y observabl e wi th an osci l l oscope.
Conti nue wi th step 8 to observe the DAC outputs.
8. To break the effect of feedback i n the l i ne generators and to observe
the output of the DACs, short J201 pi n 13 (J201 pi n 1) to TP3 (GND)
to observe U201 pi n 1 and TP2 (U203 pi n 1 and TP1.) Conti nue wi th
step 9.
9. Set an osci l l oscope to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Ampl i tude scal e ............................................ 5 V/di v
Sweep ti me .................................................. 1 ms/di v
480 Chapter 9
Controller Section
Display Problems (8560E)
Coupl i ng ................................................................ ac
Tri ggeri ng .................................................. External
10.Tri gger the osci l l oscope on the si gnal at U207 pi n 8 (LBRI GHT).
11.The fol l owi ng waveforms shoul d l ook l i ke Fi gure 9-6 on page 481 on
the osci l l oscope. The top two traces are for the X l i ne generator and
the bottom two traces for the Y l i ne generator.
X l i ne generator
U201 pi n 1
TP2
Y l i ne generator
U203 pi n 1
TP1
12.Fi gure 9-7 on page 481 i l l ustrates the waveforms i n step 11
expanded to show rel ati ve ti mi ng. the second and fourth traces are
del ayed by 5 ms from the rst and thi rd. The osci l l oscope setti ngs
are changed as fol l ows:
Sweep ti me .............................................................. 20 s/di v
13.Fi gure 9-8 on page 482 i l l ustrates the waveforms of properl y
worki ng l i ne generators. Whenever there i s a pul se on TP2 (or TP1),
the appropri ate i ntegrator U201B (or U203B) generates a ramp (the
output vector) whi ch feeds back to U201A (U203A) and shows on i ts
output.
Chapter 9 481
Controller Section
Display Problems (8560E)
Figure 9-6 Distorted X/Y Line Generator Waveforms
Figure 9-7 Expanded X/Y Line Generator Waveforms
482 Chapter 9
Controller Section
Display Problems (8560E)
Figure 9-8 Normal X/Y Line Generator Waveforms
Intensity
1. The l ength of the vector bei ng drawn can effect i ntensi ty. U210A,
U210C, and U210D sum the l engths of the X and Y vectors. Refer to
"Long Li nes Di mmer than Short Li nes" i n thi s chapter.
2. Short A2U207 pi n 6 to pi n 7. I f the di spl ay does not bri ghten,
troubl eshoot LBRI GHTswi tch, U207B. Thi s swi tch i ntensi es trace
A and acti ve softkeys.
3. Short A2U207 pi n 2 to pi n 3. I f the di spl ay does not bri ghten,
troubl eshoot DEF1 swi tch, U207A. Thi s swi tch i s used i n anal og
zero-span.
4. Change the i ntensi ty (under DISPLAY). I f the i ntensi ty does not
change, troubl eshoot the i ntensi ty DAC, A2U212A. (A2U212A i s
control l ed from the front panel .) The ampl i tude of the waveform at
U211A pi n 1 shoul d i ncrease or decrease wi th i ntensi ty changes.
5. Cl amp U211B l i mi ts the vol tage to about 4.2 V. Short A2J201-1 to
ground and set the i ntensi ty DAC to a number greater than 80. A
major porti on of the waveform shoul d be l i mi ted to 4.2 V.
6. I f a major porti on of the waveform i s not l i mi ted to 4.2 V,
troubl eshoot the maxi mum bri ghtness cl amp, A2U211C.
Chapter 9 483
Controller Section
Display Problems (8560E)
Bad Characters or Graticule
I f the di spl ayed characters are bad but the grati cul e i s correct (or i f the
symptoms are reversed), troubl eshoot the X- and Y- generator swi tches
A2U207D and A2U207C. Check that the swi tch dri ver si gnal LCHAR i s
worki ng properl y. Refer to "Di spl ay Jumbl ed or Trace Off Screen" i n
thi s chapter.
Long Lines Dimmer than Short Lines
Refer to functi on bl ock M of A2 control l er schemati c di agram (sheet 1 of
4) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Component Level I nformation.
The Z output functi on bl ock contai ns the absol ute val ue ci rcui ts whi ch
determi ne the i ntensi ty of vectors drawn on the di spl ay. The vector
l ength i s approxi mated by the sum of the X l ength and Y l ength. The
vol tage correspondi ng to the X l ength, X, i s converted to current by
R274. I f the vol tage i s negati ve, i t i s ampl i ed by 2 i n A2U210C,
converted to current by A2R246, and added to the current from
A2R274. Thi s effecti vel y turns both negati ve and posi ti ve vol tages i nto
posi ti ve currents, hence absol ute val ue.
1. Short A2J201 pi n 13 to ground (A2TP3).
2. Connect channel A of an osci l l oscope to A2J201 pi n 2. Connect
channel B to A2U210D-14.
3. Set an osci l l oscope to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Ampl i tude scal e ...................................................... 10 V/di v
Sweep ti me ............................................................. 1 ms/di v
Tri ggeri ng .............................................................. External
4. External l y tri gger the osci l l oscope off the si gnal at A2U207 pi n 8
(LBRI GHT).
5. The waveforms shoul d l ook l i ke those i l l ustrated i n Fi gure 9-9 on
page 484. I f the waveform at J201 pi n 2 i s bad, troubl eshoot the X
l i ne generator (functi on bl ock D of the A2 control l er schemati c, sheet
1 of 4).
6. I f the waveform at U210D pi n 14 i s bad, troubl eshoot the Z output
ci rcui t (functi on bl ock M of A2 control l er schemati c, sheet 1 of 4).
7. Remove the short from J201 pi n 13 to ground. Short A2J201 pi n 1 to
ground.
484 Chapter 9
Controller Section
Display Problems (8560E)
Figure 9-9 Delta X Waveform
8. Move the osci l l oscope channel A probe to J201 pi n 14.
9. The waveforms shoul d l ook l i ke those i l l ustrated i n Fi gure 9-10 on
page 485. I f the waveform at J201 pi n 14 i s bad, troubl eshoot the Y
l i ne generator (functi on bl ock I of A2 control l er schemati c, sheet 1 of
4).
10.I f the waveform at U210D pi n 14 i s bad, troubl eshoot the Z output
ci rcui t (functi on bl ock M of A2 control l er schemati c, sheet 1 of 4).
11.Remove the jumpers.
Chapter 9 485
Controller Section
Display Problems (8560E)
Figure 9-10 Delta Y Waveform
486 Chapter 9
Controller Section
Analog Zero-Span Problems (8560E only)
Analog Zero-Span Problems (8560E only)
1. On the HP 8560E, press PRESET, SPAN, ZERO SPAN, SWEEP, 1, ms,
CAL, MORE, and CRT ADJ PATTERN.
2. Set an osci l l oscope to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Ampl i tude scal e ......................................................... 10 V/di v
Sweep ti me ............................................................... 1 ms/di v
Tri ggeri ng ................................................................. External
3. External l y tri gger the osci l l oscope off the si gnal at A2U207 pi n 8
(LBRI GHT).
4. The di spl ay shoul d be si mi l ar to Fi gure 9-11 on page 486 except that
the untri ggered trace shoul d show at the l eft edge of the screen. I n
these setti ngs, DEF1 causes swi tchi ng between the l i ne generators
and the anal og i nputs (sweep and vi deo). DEF1 remai ns hi gh when
the CRT adjust pattern i s on. Refer to functi on bl ock M of the A2
control l er schemati c, 1 of 4.
5. The sweep i nput from J1-41 shoul d go from 0 V to +10 V; the vi deo I n
si gnal shoul d go from about 0 V to 1 V from the bottom to the top of
the screen. Appl y a dc vol tage to A2J4, Vi deo I n, to test the ci rcui t.
6. I n Fi gure 9-11 on page 486, there i s no synchroni zati on between
DEF1 and the vi deo patterns X POS and Y POS when DEF1 i s TTL
hi gh. The Y POS l evel when DEF1 i s l ow i s the Vi deo I n l evel .
Figure 9-11 DEF1 Synchronization
Chapter 9 487
Controller Section
Frequency-Count Marker Problems (8560EC)
Frequency-Count Marker Problems (8560EC)
The FREQ COUNT functi on works by di vi di ng the 10.7 MHz I F si gnal
by two (prescal i ng) and counti ng the di vi ded-down si gnal usi ng the
frequency counter on the A2 control l er assembl y . The prescal er i s on
the A4 Log ampl i er/cal osci l l ator assembl y . Perform the fol l owi ng
steps to determi ne whether the probl em i s on the A4 l og ampl i er/cal
osci l l ator or the A2 control l er assembl y:
1. Di sconnect W53 from A2J13.
2. Connect the output of a synthesi zed source, such as an HP 3335A, to
A2J13.
3. Set the synthesi zed source to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Ampl i tude .................................................................... +10 dBm
Frequency ................................................................... 5.35 MHz
4. Set the spectrum anal yzer to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Center frequency ...................................................... 300 MHz
Span .............................................................................. 1 MHz
5. On the spectrum anal yzer, press FREQ COUNT. The frequency
counter actual l y reads one hal f the frequency of the 10.7 MHz I F. I f
the CNTfrequency di spl ay reads al l asteri sks, the frequency counter
i s probabl y at faul t.
6. I f a val i d frequency i s di spl ayed, troubl eshoot the prescal er on the
A4 l og ampl i er/cal osci l l ator assembl y.
7. Reconnect W53 to A2J13.
488 Chapter 9
Controller Section
Frequency-Count Marker Problems (8560E)
Frequency-Count Marker Problems (8560E)
The FREQ COUNT functi on works by di vi di ng the 10.7 MHz I F si gnal
by two (prescal i ng) and counti ng the di vi ded-down si gnal usi ng the
frequency counter on the A2 control l er assembl y (bl ock Z of the A2
schemati c di agram). The prescal er i s on the A4 Log ampl i er/cal
osci l l ator assembl y (bl ock Q of the A4 schemati c di agram). Perform the
fol l owi ng steps to determi ne whether the probl em i s on the A4 l og
ampl i er/cal osci l l ator or A2 control l er assembl y:
1. Di sconnect W53 from A2J7.
2. Connect the output of a synthesi zed source, such as an HP 3335A, to
A2J7.
3. Set the synthesi zed source to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Ampl i tude .................................................................... +10 dBm
Frequency ................................................................... 5.35 MHz
4. Set the spectrum anal yzer to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Center frequency ...................................................... 300 MHz
Span .............................................................................. 1 MHz
5. On the spectrum anal yzer, press FREQ COUNT. The frequency
counter actual l y reads one hal f the frequency of the 10.7 MHz I F. I f
the CNTfrequency di spl ay reads al l asteri sks, the frequency counter
i s probabl y at faul t.
6. I f a val i d frequency i s di spl ayed, troubl eshoot the prescal er on the
A4 l og ampl i er/cal osci l l ator assembl y.
7. Reconnect W53 to A2J7.
Chapter 9 489
Controller Section
Frequency Counter (8560EC)
Frequency Counter (8560EC)
The frequency counter counts the frequency of the l ast I F and provi des
accurate ti mi ng si gnal s for di gi tal zero-spans. The ci rcui t al so provi des
ti mi ng si gnal s to the ADC (anal og to di gi tal converter) on the A3
i nterface assembl y. The nomi nal i nput frequency i s 5.35 MHz (10.7
MHz di vi ded by 2). The 10 MHz reference from the A15 RF assembl y
provi des the frequency reference i n the frequency count mode. The
frequency reference i n di gi ti zed zero spans (sweep ti mes 30 ms) i s the
4 MHz HPI B_CLK, sel ected by a cl ock sel ect mul ti pl exer i n U35.
The 10 MHz reference from the A15 RF assembl y i s rst l tered and
passed through a comparator to generate a TTL, 50 percent duty cycl e
si gnal . C128, L16, and R91 provi de a bandpass l ter centered at 10
MHz. The output of comparator U33B i s the actual reference used for
the Frequency Counter. An addi ti onal stage of l teri ng i s performed on
thi s si gnal to provi de a 10 MHz si gnal for the A17 LCD Dri ver
assembl y.
I n the frequency count mode, the 10 MHz reference i s prescal ed by 5 to
generate a 2 MHz ti mebase. Thi s ti mebase feeds through the cl ock
sel ect mul ti pl exer i n U35 to the CLK2 i nput of programmabl e ti mer
U15. The output (OUT2) of programmabl e ti mer U15 i s the gati ng
si gnal (HBKT_PULSE); i t performs the frequency count. The gati ng
ti me i nterval i s a functi on of the counter resol uti on whi ch may be set
between 10 Hz and 1 MHz. Tabl e 9-2 on page 490 l i sts the gate ti me for
each setti ng of COUNTER RES. The gate ti me i s the peri od duri ng
whi ch HBKT_PULSE (pi n 20 of U15) i s l ow.
The FREQ COUNT i nput, A2J13, i s gated by HBKT_PULSE. The
gated si gnal cl ocks di vi de-by-16 counters wi thi n U35. These counters
are cascaded to form a di vi de-by-256 counter. The MSB of thi s counter,
CD7, cl ocks the CLK0 i nput of U15. The frequency of CD7 i s a functi on
of COUNTER RES as shown i n Tabl e 9-2 on page 490. I f ti mer U15
overows, OUT0 wi l l be set, generati ng CNTOVFLI RQ, whi ch wi l l
i nterrupt the CPU.
I f I RQAK2 i s hi gh, HBKT_PULSE wi l l generate FREQCNTLI RQ.
Upon recei vi ng the FREQCNTLI RQ i nterrupt, the CPU l atches the
CD0 to CD7 onto the BI D bus by setti ng LCDRD (l ow counter data
read) l ow and readi ng the counter data from the BI D bus. The CPU wi l l
al so read the data from the ti mer, U15, by setti ng L8254CS and
LCNTLRD l ow, pl aci ng the ti mer data on the BI D bus. The CPU then
resets I RQAK2 l ow.
490 Chapter 9
Controller Section
Frequency Counter (8560EC)
1. Di sconnect W22 from A2J9.
2. I f a 10 MHz, TTL-l evel si gnal i s not present at the end of W22,
conti nue wi th step 3. I f a 10 MHz si gnal i s present at W22, proceed
as fol l ows:
a. Reconnect W22 to A2J9.
b. Set the spectrum anal yzer to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Span ................................................................... ZeroSpan
Sweep ti me ................................................................ 20 ms
c. Moni tor the si gnal at A2J2 pi n 21. Thi s i s an output of the
frequency counter, HBUCKET PULSE.
d. I f HBUCKET PULSE i s stuck hi gh, troubl eshoot the frequency
counter.
3. Check for a 10 MHz si gnal at A15J302. I f the si gnal i s not present at
A15J302, the A15 RF assembl y i s probabl y defecti ve.
Table 9-2 Gate Times
Counter Res Gate Time*
(U15 pin 20
low state)
A2TP16 A2TP15
10 Hz 200 ms 2 MHz 4.18 kHz
100 Hz 20 ms 2 MHz 418 Hz
1 kHz 2 ms 2 MHz 41.8 Hz
10 kHz 2 ms 2 MHz 41.8 Hz
100 kHz 2 ms 2 MHz 41.8 Hz
1 MHz 2 ms 2 MHz 41.8 Hz
* U15 pi n 10 = (FREQ COUNT i nput Gate Ti me)/256
Chapter 9 491
Controller Section
Frequency Counter (8560)
Frequency Counter (8560)
See functi on bl ock Z of A2 schemati c di agram (sheet 4 of 4) i n the HP
8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level I nformation.
The frequency counter counts the frequency of the l ast I F and provi des
accurate ti mi ng si gnal s for di gi tal zero-spans. The ci rcui t al so provi des
ti mi ng si gnal s to the A3 i nterface assembl y ADC (anal og to di gi tal
converter). The nomi nal i nput frequency i s 5.35 MHz (10.7 MHz
di vi ded by 2). The ci rcui t frequency reference i n the frequency count
mode i s the 10 MHz reference from the A15 RF assembl y. The
frequency reference i n di gi ti zed zero spans (sweep ti mes 30 ms) i s the
4 MHz HPI B_CLK, sel ected by MUX U704.
I n the frequency count mode, U702 prescal es the 10 MHz reference by 5
to generate a 2 MHz ti mebase. Thi s ti mebase feeds through MUX U704
to programmabl e-ti mer U700 CLK2 i nput. Programmabl e-ti mer U700
output (OUT2) i s the gati ng si gnal (HBKT_PULSE) for performi ng the
frequency count. The gati ng ti me i nterval i s a functi on of the counter
resol uti on whi ch may be set between 10 Hz and 1 MHz. Tabl e 9-2 on
page 490 l i sts the gate ti me for each setti ng of COUNTER RES. The
gate ti me i s the peri od duri ng whi ch U511 pi n 3 i s hi gh.
The FREQ COUNT i nput, A2J7, i s gated i n U511B by HBKT_PULSE.
The gated si gnal cl ocks di vi de-by-16 counters U703A and U703B. These
counters are cascaded to form a di vi de-by-256 counter. The MSB of thi s
counter, CD7, cl ocks the CLK0 i nput of U700. The frequency of CD7 i s a
functi on of COUNTER RES as shown i n Tabl e 9-2 on page 490. I f ti mer
U700 overows, OUT0 wi l l be set and U701B cl ocked, generati ng
CNTOVFLI RQ, whi ch wi l l i nterrupt the CPU.
I f I RQAK2 i s hi gh, HBKT_PULSE wi l l cl ock U701A, generati ng
FREQCNTLI RQ. Upon recei vi ng the FREQCNTLI RQ i nterrupt, the
CPU l atches the CD0 to CD7 onto the BI D bus by setti ng LCDRD (l ow
counter data read) l ow and readi ng the counter data from the BI D bus.
The CPU wi l l al so read the data from the ti mer, U700, by setti ng
L8254CS and LCNTLRD l ow, pl aci ng the ti mer data on the BI D bus.
The CPU resets U701A by setti ng I RQAK2 l ow vi a the BI D bus and
l atch U506.
492 Chapter 9
Controller Section
Frequency Counter (8560)
1. Di sconnect W22 from A2J8.
2. I f a 10 MHz, TTL-l evel si gnal i s not present at the end of W22,
conti nue wi th step 3. I f a 10 MHz si gnal i s present at W22, proceed
as fol l ows:
a. Reconnect W22 to A2J8.
b. Set the spectrum anal yzer to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Span ................................................................... ZeroSpan
Sweep ti me ................................................................ 20 ms
c. Moni tor the si gnal at A2J2 pi n 21. Thi s i s an output of the
frequency counter, HBUCKET PULSE.
d. I f HBUCKET PULSE i s stuck hi gh, troubl eshoot the frequency
counter.
3. Check for a 10 MHz si gnal at A15J302. I f the si gnal i s not present at
A15J302, the A15 RF assembl y i s probabl y defecti ve.
Table 9-3 Gate Times
Counter Res Gate Time*
(U511 pin 3
high state)
A2TP16 A2TP15
10 Hz 200 ms 2 MHz 4.18 kHz
100 Hz 20 ms 2 MHz 418 Hz
1 kHz 2 ms 2 MHz 41.8 Hz
10 kHz 2 ms 2 MHz 41.8 Hz
100 kHz 2 ms 2 MHz 41.8 Hz
1 MHz 2 ms 2 MHz 41.8 Hz
* TP15 = (FREQ COUNT i nput Gate Ti me)/256
Chapter 9 493
Controller Section
Video Input Scaling Ampliers and Limiter (8560EC)
Video Input Scaling Ampliers and Limiter
(8560EC)
The vi deo i nput scal i ng ampl i ers hel p provi de scal i ng (10 dB/di v, 5
dB/di v, 2 dB/di v, or 1 dB/di v) and buffer the ash vi deo output. When
the GAI NX2 control l i ne i s l ow, swi tch U44D i s open and swi tch U44C
i s cl osed. Thus, the scal ed vi deo at TP26 vi rtual l y fol l ows the vi deo
i nput (0 - 1 V). When the GAI NX2 control l i ne i s hi gh, swi tch U44C i s
open and swi tch U44D i s cl osed. Ampl i er U43 then provi des a gai n of
2(V
i n
) 1 V. Vol tage cl amp CR4 prevents the scal ed vi deo i nput to
ampl i er U45 from goi ng more negati ve than 0.35 V or more posi ti ve
than +1.25 V.
NOTE When measuri ng vol tages or waveforms on the Fast ADC secti on of the
A2 control l er assembl y, connect the ground (or common) l ead to the
ground-pl ane trace associ ated wi th the shi el d. Thi s di gi tal ground
pl ane i s total l y i sol ated from the chassi s.
1. Press PRESET on the HP 8560 EC-seri es spectrum anal yzer and set
the control s as fol l ows:
Center frequency ............................................. 300 MHz
Span ......................................................................... 0 Hz
Reference l evel ................................................. 10 dBm
Log/di vi si on .................................................... 10 dB/DI V
Sweep ti me ............................................................ 20 ms
2. Connect the CAL OUTPUT to the I NPUT 50 connector.
3. Adjust the spectrum anal yzer reference l evel to pl ace the si gnal at
the top grati cul e l i ne on the LCD di spl ay.
4. Measure the dc l evel at pi n 3 of U10. I f the vol tage measured i s not
+1.0 0.15 V, troubl eshoot the A3 i nterface assembl y.
5. Measure the dc l evel at pi n 3 of U17. The l evel shoul d be
approxi matel y the same as the l evel measured at pi n 3 of U10. I f not,
suspect swi tch U9.
6. Set the spectrum anal yzer scal e to 5dB per di vi si on.
7. Adjust the spectrum anal yzer reference l evel to pl ace the si gnal at
the top grati cul e l i ne on the LCD di spl ay.
8. Measure the dc l evel at pi n 3 of U10 and pi n 3 of U17. The l evel
shoul d be +1.0 0.25 V. I f the l evel measured at pi n 3 of U17 di ffers
from the l evel measured at pi n 3 of U10 by more than 0.25 vol ts,
troubl eshoot U10 and associ ated ci rcui try.
494 Chapter 9
Controller Section
Video Input Scaling Ampliers and Limiter (8560EC)
9. Di sconnect the CAL OUTPUT si gnal from the I NPUT 50
connector.
10.The l evel at pi n 3 of U10 shoul d drop to 0.35 Vdc. I f the l evel i s l ess
(more negati ve) than 0.35 Vdc, repl ace vol tage cl amp D3.
11.Measure the dc l evel of the ash vi deo at pi n 2 of R47. The l evel
shoul d be near 0 Vdc wi th the si gnal at the bottom grati cul e l i ne (no
i nput to the spectrum anal yzer).
12.Connect the CAL OUTPUT to the I NPUT 50 connector.
13.Measure the dc l evel of the ash vi deo at pi n 2 of R47. The l evel
shoul d be near +1.7 Vdc.
Chapter 9 495
Controller Section
12-Bit Flash ADC (8560EC)
12-Bit Flash ADC (8560EC)
The ash ADC (U22) converts the anal og vi deo si gnal i nto 12-bi t di gi tal
val ues at a xed rate of 12 megasampl es per second.
When measuri ng vol tages or waveforms on the Fast ADC of the A2
control l er assembl y, connect the ground (or common) l ead to the
ground-pl ane trace associ ated wi th the shi el d. Thi s di gi tal ground
pl ane i s total l y i sol ated from the chassi s.
1. Press PRESET on the spectrum anal yzer and set the control s as
fol l ows:
Center frequency ..................................................... 300 MHz
Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz
Reference l evel ......................................................... 20 dBm
Log/di vi si on .............................................................. 5 dB/DI V
Sweep ti me .................................................................... 20 ms
2. Connect the CAL OUTPUT to the I NPUT 50 connector.
3. Pi ns 2 through 13 (ADC0-ADC11) of U22 shoul d al l be hi gh (l ogi c 1),
correspondi ng to an ADC di gi tal count of 255 for the anal og i nput of
+2 vol ts or greater.
4. Di sconnect the CAL OUTPUT si gnal from the I NPUT 50
connector.
5. Pi ns 2 through 13 (ADC0-ADC11) of U22 shoul d al l be l ow (l ogi c 0),
correspondi ng to an ADC di gi tal count of zero for the anal og i nput of
0 vol ts or l ess.
496 Chapter 9
Controller Section
32 K-Byte Static RAM (8560EC)
32 K-Byte Static RAM (8560EC)
The stati c RAM stores the ADC sampl es that are taken when the Fast
ADC ci rcui try i s i n the "wri te"mode. When not i n the "wri te"mode, the
stati c RAM i s read by the CPU to retri eve the fast ADC data. The 8-bi t
DFADC bus connects the outputs of l atches wi thi n U35 to the data port
of stati c RAM U21.
Chapter 9 497
Controller Section
Reference Clock (8560EC)
Reference Clock (8560EC)
The reference cl ock ci rcui try takes the 8 MHz square wave cl ock and
tri pl es the frequency to 24 MHz. Thi s i s accompl i shed through two
stages of l teri ng of the 8 MHz si gnal , to extract the thi rd harmoni c.
The 8 MHz si gnal i s rst passed through a hi gh pass l ter consi sti ng of
C123 and L15. The the si gnal passes through a bandpass l ter centered
at 24 MHz, consi sti ng of C106, C08, L13, and R80. The comparator
U28B generates a square wave. The si gnal then passes through a
second stage of l teri ng by usi ng the bandpass l ter consi sti ng of C89,
C88, L12, and R77. Comparator U28A then regenerates the square
wave. A di vi de-by-two i p op i n U16 di vi des the 24 MHz si gnal to
create the 12 MHz si gnal used by the ADC.
498 Chapter 9
Controller Section
16 MHz Harmonic Filter (8560EC)
16 MHz Harmonic Filter (8560EC)
The 16 MHz Harmoni c Fi l ter generates a 16 MHz si gnal through a
seri es of stages, consi sti ng of a l ter and a comparator. The 10 MHz
reference si gnal from the A15 RF assembl y i s rst prescal ed by 2.5 to
yi el d a 4 MHz si gnal wi th a 20 percent duty cycl e. Thi s prescal i ng i s
performed wi thi n U35. The 4 MHz si gnal i s then passed, rst, through
a hi gh pass l ter, and then, through a bandpass l ter at 16 MHz. The
hi gh pass l ter consi sts of R85, C122, and L14. The bandpass l ter
consi sts of L19 and C139. The l ter basi cal l y l ters the fourth harmoni c
of the 4 MHz si gnal to generate a 16 MHz si gnal . The resul ti ng si gnal i s
then passed through comparator U34A to generate a 16 MHz square
wave. Three more stages, consi sti ng of a bandpass l ter fol l owed by a
comparator, further l ter the si gnal so that a cl ean 16 MHz si gnal
resul ts. The 16 MHz si gnal whi ch i s the resul t of these successi ve
stages of l teri ng i s output at pi n 10 of U34. U35 buffers thi s si gnal to
provi de the 16 MHz cl ock for the CPU. I n addi ti on, di vi de-by-two i p
ops are l ocated wi thi n U35, whi ch generate 8 MHz and 4 MHz si gnal s.
Chapter 9 499
Controller Section
State- and Trace-Storage Problems
State- and Trace-Storage Problems
State storage i s i n the two of the four Program RAMs and trace storage
i s i n the two di spl ay RAMs. Wi th l ow battery vol tage, i t i s normal for
states and traces to be retai ned i f the power i s off for l ess than 1
mi nute. I f the power i s l eft off for more than thi rty mi nutes wi th l ow
battery vol tage, the stored states and traces wi l l be l ost.
The fol l owi ng steps test battery backup for EC-seri es i nstruments:
1. Measure the vol tage on W6 at A2J3. I f the vol tage i s l ess than 2.6 V,
check the BT1 battery.
2. I f the battery vol tage i s correct, reconnect W6 to A2J3, turn the
anal yzer power off and wai t 5 mi nutes.
3. Measure the vol tage at A2U19 pi n 32and A2U26 pi n 32.
4. I f the vol tage i s l ess than 2.0 Vdc, the RAM power battery-backup
ci rcui try on the A2 control l er assembl y i s probabl y at faul t.
The fol l owi ng steps test battery backup for E-seri es i nstruments:
1. Measure the vol tage on W6 at A2J10. I f the vol tage i s l ess than
2.6 V, check the BT1 battery.
2. I f the battery vol tage i s correct, reconnect W6 to A2J10, turn the
anal yzer power off and wai t 5 mi nutes.
3. Measure the vol tage at A2U101 pi n 28 and A2U102 pi n 28.
4. I f the vol tage i s l ess than 2.0 Vdc, the RAM power battery-backup
ci rcui try on the A2 control l er assembl y i s probabl y at faul t.
500 Chapter 9
Controller Section
Keyboard Problems
Keyboard Problems
I f the anal yzer does not respond to keys bei ng pressed or the knob bei ng
rotated, the faul t coul d be ei ther on the A3 i nterface assembl y or the A2
control l er assembl y. To i sol ate the A2 control l er assembl y, use the
fol l owi ng procedure. Thi s procedure tests the anal yzer response over
HP-I B and the keyboard/RPG i nterrupt request si gnal .
1. Enter and run the fol l owi ng BASI C program:
10 OUTPUT 718; "IP; SP 1 MHz;"
20 WAIT 2 ! Wait 2 seconds
30 OUTPUT 718;"AT 70 DB;"
40 WAIT 2 ! Wait 2 seconds
50 OUTPUT 718;"AT 30 DB;"
60 WAIT 2 ! Wait 2 seconds
70 OUTPUT 718;"AT 10 DB;"
80 END
2. When the program runs, three or four cl i cks shoul d be heard. Thi s i s
the A9 i nput attenuator changi ng attenuati on val ue.
3. I f the di spl ay shows the anal yzer to be i n RMT and the ATTEN
val ue di spl ayed on the LCD (CRT on E-seri es i nstruments) changed
accordi ng to the program, the A2 control l er assembl y i s worki ng
properl y. Refer to Chapter 8, "ADC/I nterface Secti on."
4. I f there was no response over HP-I B, the A2 control l er i s probabl y
defecti ve. Be sure to al so check the A19 HP-I B assembl y and A19W1.
5. I f there was an i mproper response (for exampl e, the di spl ayed
ATTEN val ue changed but no cl i cks were heard), the A2 control l er i s
probabl y worki ng properl y.
6. On EC-seri es i nstruments, attach a l ogi c probe to A2U35 pi n 213.
On E-seri es i nstruments, attach a l ogi c probe to A2U2 pi n 2.
Look for pul ses whi l e pressi ng a key and rotati ng the knob (RPG).
Thi s i s the i nterrupt request si gnal for the keyboard and RPG.
7. I f the i nterrupt request si gnal i s al ways l ow, troubl eshoot the A2
control l er assembl y.
8. I f the i nterrupt request si gnal i s al ways hi gh, the faul t i s on ei ther
the A3 i nterface or A1A1 keyboard assembl y.
502 Chapter 9
Controller Section
Keyboard Problems
sj118c
15-BIT (32K)
CIRCULAR
ADDRESS
COUNTER AND
LATCH
POWER
SUPPLIES
RESET
CIRCUITRY
FLAT PANEL
DISPLAY
CONNECTION
BUS
INTERCONNECTS
DISPLAY
CONTROL
EEPROM FLASH RAM POWER
BATTERY
BACKUP
16 MHz
HARMONIC
FILTER
FREQUENCY
COUNTER
INPUT/
OUTPUT
HP-IB
FAST ADC
CONTROL
16-BIT
POST-TRIGGER
COUNTER
32K RAM
TRIGGER
PEAK/PIT
DETECTION
VIDEO
TRIGGER
COMPARATOR
RAM
10MHz IN
J5
VIDEO
INPUT
0-1V
FREQUENCY
COUNTER
J13
J9
J10
10MHz_DSPL
J8
DISPLAY
CABLE
J2
POWER
CABLE
-12.6VF
+5VF
-15VF
+15VF
+28V
CPU INTERFACE
AND CONTROL
REGISTERS
VIDEO INPUT
SCALING
AMPLIFIERS
AND LIMITER
POWER
SUPPLIES
(FADC) +5VF
+5VF
-15VF
+15VF
8 MHz TTL
8 MHz TTL
4 MHz TTL
REF CLOCK
(24 MHz)
CLOCK AND
SAMPLE RATE
GENERATOR
12-BIT
ADC
+RP
FLASH
VIDEO
ADCO-
ADC11
DFADCO-
DFADC7
TIMING AND CONTROL BUS
TIMING AND CONTROL BUS
AFADCO-
AFADC14
MEMORY
ADDRESS BUS
P2-P7
IOB2-
IOB7
IOB DATABUS IOBO-IOB15
IOBO-IOB7
FADC CONTROL
FADC CONTROL
HSWP
J1-6
HP-IB
J7
J1
INTERFACE
CABLE
A3
OPTION
MODULE
J11
BATTERY
J3
BATTERY
LHALT
DRESET
16 MHz TTL
TO
FUNCTION
BLOCKS
LMUX
IDO-7
BIDO-7
ADDRESS BUS
DCNTO-15
CHIP SELECT
AND CONTROL
CPU
Note: Shaded area indicates the functions implemented in U35
Note: Dark Shaded area indicates the
functions implemented in U16.
8560 EC-SERIES
CONTROLLER SECTION
Figure 9 - 13 Controller Block Diagram
504 Chapter 9
Controller Section
Keyboard Problems
505
10 Synthesizer Section
506 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
Introduction
Introduction
The synthesi zer secti on i ncl udes the A7 rst LO di stri buti on ampl i er,
A11 YTO, and parts of the A14 frequency control and A15 RF
assembl i es. Si mpl i ed and detai l ed bl ock di agrams for each assembl y
are l ocated at the end of thi s chapter.
Synthesi zer Troubl eshooti ng Secti on................................. page 508
Test Setup Troubl eshooti ng................................................ page 514
Troubl eshooti ng Usi ng the TAM........................................ page 515
General PLL Troubl eshooti ng ............................................ page 520
PLL Locked at Wrong Frequency ..................................... page 520
Unl ocked PLL .................................................................... page 521
Unl ocked Reference PLL (100 MHz VCXO) ...................... page 524
Operati on (100 MHz VCXO)............................................. page 524
Troubl eshooti ng (100 MHz VCXO)................................... page 524
Thi rd LO Dri ver Ampl i er (100 MHz VCXO) ................. page 528
Unl ocked Reference PLL (600 MHz SAWR)...................... page 529
Operati on (600 MHz SAWR)............................................. page 529
Troubl eshooti ng (600 MHz SAWR) .................................. page 529
Thi rd LO Dri ver Ampl i er (600 MHz SAWR)................. page 533
Unl ocked Offset Lock Loop (Sampl i ng Osci l l ator) ............ page 534
Operati on ........................................................................... page 534
Troubl eshooti ng................................................................. page 534
Unl ocked YTO PLL ............................................................. page 538
Operati on ........................................................................... page 538
Troubl eshooti ng an Unl ocked YTO PLL .......................... page 540
Unl ocked Fracti onal N PLL................................................ page 547
Operati on ........................................................................... page 547
Conrmi ng an Unl ocked Condi ti on.................................. page 547
Fracti onal N PLL .............................................................. page 548
Frequency Span Accuracy Probl ems .................................. page 555
Determi ni ng the Fi rst LO Span ....................................... page 555
Conrmi ng Span Probl ems............................................... page 556
YTO Mai n Coi l Span Probl ems (LO Spans >20 MHz) ...... page 556
YTO FM Coi l Span Probl ems (LO Spans 2.01 MHz to 20 MHz)page 557
Fracti onal N Span Probl ems (LO Spans 2 MHz) .......... page 559
Fi rst LO Span Probl ems (Al l Spans)................................ page 559
Phase Noi se Probl ems......................................................... page 561
Phase Noi se i n Locked versus Lock-and-Rol l Spans ....... page 561
Reference versus Reference PLL Phase Noi se ................ page 562
Fracti onal N versus Offset PLL or YTO PLL Phase Noi se page 562
Fracti onal N PLL Phase Noi se ......................................... page 562
Sampl er and Sampl er I F .................................................... page 563
Sweep Generator Ci rcui t .................................................... page 565
A21 OCXO........................................................................... page 574
Chapter 10 507
Synthesizer Section
Introduction
CAUTION Al l of the assembl i es are extremel y sensi ti ve to el ectrostati c di scharge
(ESD). For further i nformati on regardi ng el ectrostati c cauti ons, refer to
"El ectrostati c Di scharge I nformati on" i n Chapter 1.
CAUTION Usi ng an acti ve probe, such as an HP 85024A, wi th a spectrum
anal yzer i s recommended for troubl eshooti ng the RF ci rcui try. I f an HP
1120A acti ve probe i s bei ng used wi th a spectrum anal yzer, such as the
HP 8566A/B, or HP 8569A/B havi ng dc coupl ed i nputs, ei ther set the
acti ve probe for an ac coupl ed output or use a dc bl ocki ng capaci tor (HP
11240B) between the acti ve probe and the spectrum-anal yzer i nput.
Some spectrum anal yzers can be set to ac coupl ed. Fai l ure to do thi s can
resul t i n damage to the spectrum anal yzer or the probe.
508 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
Synthesizer Troubleshooting Section
Synthesizer Troubleshooting Section
The A11 YTO (the HP 8560E/EC rst LO) i s a YI G-tuned osci l l ator
whi ch tunes from 2.95 to 6.8107 GHz. The A7 LO di stri buti on ampl i er
(LODA) l evel s the output of A11 and di stri butes the si gnal to the A8
l ow band mi xer, A10 YI G-tuned mi xer/l ter, A15U100 sampl er, and the
1ST LO OUTPUT on the front panel . The synthesi zer secti on i ncl udes
the fol l owi ng PLLs (Phase Locked Loops):
The fracti onal N PLL i s someti mes swept backwards (hi gher frequency
to l ower frequency). Thi s i s necessary because of the way i n whi ch the
sampl er I F si gnal i s produced.
NOTE The frequency control board i s di gi tal l y control l ed. I f mul ti pl e fai l ures
appear i n unrel ated areas of the ci rcui try, the control may be at faul t.
Refer to the troubl eshooti ng procedures i n thi s chapter for further hel p
on i sol ati ng those fai l ures.
The TAM tests the si gnal path ci rcui try by di gi tal l y control l i ng the
hardware and moni tori ng the control l i nes to make sure they are
respondi ng properl y. Use the TAM automati c faul t i sol ati on routi ne or
veri fy the RF l evel s manual l y to ensure proper operati on.
Check A3 ADC MUX function block (steps 1-4)
1. Connect posi ti ve l ead of a DVM to A15J200 pi n 13, and the negati ve
l ead to A15J200 pi n 6. Thi s measures the sampl i ng osci l l ator tune
vol tage, whi ch i s an i nput to the ADC MUX of the A3 i nterface
assembl y.
2. Set the HP 8560E/EC to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz
Center frequency .................................................. 389.5 MHz
Tri gger .......................................................................... Si ngl e
3. Use the data entry keys to tune the CENTER FREQ to the val ues
l i sted i n Tabl e 10-1 on page 509.
YTO PLL A7, A11, A14 and A15 assembl i es
Offset PLL (sampl i ng osci l l ator
PLL)
A15 RF assembl y
Fractional N PLL A14 frequency control assembl y
Reference PLL A15 RF assembl y
Chapter 10 509
Synthesizer Section
Synthesizer Troubleshooting Section
4. As the sampl i ng osci l l ator frequency i s i ncreased, the DVM readi ng
shoul d al so i ncrease. I f the tune vol tage i s correct, but the ADC
measures the vol tage and determi nes i t to be out of speci cati on,
troubl eshoot the A3 assembl y ADC MUX.
Check A14J 301 10 MHz reference input (steps 5-8)
5. Di sconnect W37 from A14J301.
6. Connect a test cabl e from W37 to the i nput of another spectrum
anal yzer. Tune the other spectrum anal yzer to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Center frequency .................................................... 10 MHz
Span .......................................................................... 2 MHz
7. The ampl i tude of the 10 MHz reference si gnal shoul d measure >1
dBm. I f the si gnal does not measure >1 dBm, troubl eshoot the A15
10 MHz di stri buti on, and A21 OCXO (i f not Opti on 103).
8. Reconnect W37 to A14J301.
Check rst LO (steps 9-11)
Table 10-1 Center Frequency Tuning Values
HP 8560E/EC Center
Frequency (MHz)
Sampling Oscillator
Frequency (MHz)
2156.3 285.000
2176.3 286.364
2199.5 287.500
2230.3 288.462
799.3 288.889
2263.3 290.000
2282.3 290.909
2302.3 291.667
2155.3 292.500
2158.3 293.478
2336.3 294.444
2196.3 295.000
1.3 296.000
2378.3 296.471
2410.3 297.000
2422.3 297.222
510 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
Synthesizer Troubleshooting Section
9. Connect the CAL OUTPUT to I NPUT 50 .
10.Set the HP 8560E/EC to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Center frequency ..................................................... 300 MHz
Span ......................................................................... 100 MHz
Tri gger .......................................................................... CONT
11.I f the rst LO i s present, a si gnal shoul d be di spl ayed at about 10
dBm (approxi matel y 20 MHz from the center frequency). I f no
si gnal i s di spl ayed and ERR 334 LO AMPL i s not present, suspect
the A7 LODA. I f no si gnal i s di spl ayed and ERR 334 LO AMPL i s
present, check the A11 YTO as fol l ows:
a. Set jumper A14J23 to the TEST posi ti on.
b. Set the HP 8560E/EC to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Center frequency ...................................................... 50 Hz
CF step ................................................................ 300 MHz
Span .............................................................................0 Hz
c. Connect a power meter di rectl y to the output of the A11 YTO.
d. Press the HP 8560E/EC step-up key and measure the YTOoutput
power at each step.
e. Veri fy that the output power of the A11 YTO i s between +9 and
+13 dBm.
f. Set jumper A14J23 to the NORM posi ti on and reconnect the A11
YTO.
Check A14 frequency control assembly (steps 12-17)
12.On the HP 8560E/EC, press PRESET, SPAN, ZERO SPAN, CAL, MORE
1 OF 2, FREQ DIAGNOSE, and FRAC N FREQ. Note the fracti onal N
osci l l ator frequency. (I gnore the mi nus si gn, i f present.)
13.Check A14J304 (FRAC N TEST) port wi th a spectrum anal yzer for
thi s exact frequency. The ampl i tude shoul d be approxi matel y 10
dBm.
14.Di sconnect W32 from A14J501 and connect the output of a si gnal
source to A14J501. Remove the jumper from A14J23. Connect the
posi ti ve l ead of a DVM to A14J23 pi n 1, and the negati ve l ead to
A14J23 pi n 3. See Fi gure 10-1 on page 511.
15.Set the si gnal source to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Power ........................................................................... 0 dBm
Frequency ............................. Frequency recorded i n step 12
Fracti onal N Osci l l ator Frequency = __________________MHz
Chapter 10 511
Synthesizer Section
Synthesizer Troubleshooting Section
16.Tune the source to 1 kHz l ess than the fracti onal N frequency. The
vol tage measured on the DVM shoul d be approxi matel y 12 Vdc.
17.Tune the source to a frequency 1 kHz greater than the fracti onal N
frequency. The vol tage measured on the DVM shoul d be
approxi matel y 12 Vdc.
18.I f the DVM readi ng does not change, the A14 frequency control
assembl y i s defecti ve. Reconnect W32 to A14J501.
Figure 10-1 YTO Loop Test Setup
Check A15 RF assembly (steps 18-25)
19.Di sconnect W34 from A15U100J1 and di sconnect W32 from
A15J101.
20.Connect a frequency counter to A15J101. Connect a hi gh-frequency
test cabl e from an HP 8340A/B synthesi zed sweeper to A15U100J1.
See Fi gure 10-2 on page 512.
21.Connect a BNC cabl e from the HP 8560E/EC 10 MHz REF I N/OUT
to the HP 8340A/B FREQUENCY STANDARD EXT i nput.
22.Set the HP 8340A/B to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
512 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
Synthesizer Troubleshooting Section
Frequency standard EXT
Power l evel 5 dBm
23.Set the HP 8560E/EC to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz
Tri gger .......................................................................... Si ngl e
24.Set the HP 8560E/EC and HP 8340A/B frequenci es to the
combi nati ons l i sted i n Tabl e 10-2 on page 513 and press SGL SWP on
the spectrum anal yzer.
Figure 10-2 Sampler and Sampling Oscillator Test Setup
25.At each combi nati on, the frequency counter shoul d measure a
sampl er I F as shown i n Tabl e 10-2 on page 513. (The sampl i ng
osci l l ator of the offset PLL tunes to the frequenci es l i sted i n the
tabl e.) I f the frequency counter does not read the i ndi cated sampl er
I F 10 kHz, suspect the A15 RF assembl y.
26.Reconnect W34 to A15U100J1 and W32 to A15J101.
27.The 1ST LO OUTPUT, l ocated on the front panel , must be
termi nated i n 50 . I f the YTO unl ocks onl y wi th certai n center
frequency and span combi nati ons, check that the termi nati on i s i n
pl ace.
28.Set the HP 8560E/EC CENTER FREQ and SPAN to generate the
unl ock condi ti ons.
Chapter 10 513
Synthesizer Section
Synthesizer Troubleshooting Section
29.On the HP 8560E/EC, press SGL SWP.
30.Move jumper A14J23 to the TEST posi ti on.
31.Di sconnect W34 from A15U100J1 and measure the power of the
si gnal at the end of W34.
32.I f the power i s l ess than 6.5 dBm, suspect W34, A7 LODA, or A11
YTO.
33.Move jumper A14J23 to the NORM posi ti on.
Table 10-2 Sampling Oscillator Test Frequencies
HP 8340A CW
Frequency(GHz)
HP 8560E/EC
Center
Frequency
(MHz)
Offset PLL
Sampling
Oscillator Freq
(MHz)
Counter Reading
Sampler IF
(MHz)
6.067000 2156.3 285.000 82.000
6.087000 2176.3 286.364 73.364
6.110200 2199.5 287.500 72.700
6.141000 2230.3 288.462 83.308
4.710000 799.3 288.889 87.778
6.174000 2263.3 290.000 84.000
6.193000 2282.3 290.909 83.909
6.213000 2302.3 291.667 88.000
6.066000 2155.3 292.500 76.500
6.069000 2158.3 293.478 94.044
6.247000 2336.3 294.444 63.667
6.107000 2196.3 295.000 88.000
3.912000 1.3 296.000 64.000
6.289000 2378.3 296.471 63.118
6.321000 2410.3 297.000 84.000
6.333000 2422.3 297.222 91.333
514 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
Test Setup Troubleshooting
Test Setup Troubleshooting
Some synthesi zer secti on probl ems requi re pl aci ng the YTO PLL i n an
unl ocked condi ti on. Do thi s by movi ng jumper A14J23 to the TEST
posi ti on. Thi s grounds the YTO ERROR si gnal and stops the CPU from
detecti ng an unl ocked YTO. The FM coi l dri ver output i s set to i ts
mi d-range l evel causi ng the YTO to be control l ed onl y by the mai n coi l
tune DAC.
I t i s best to troubl eshoot the synthesi zer secti on wi th the HP 8560E/EC
span set to 0 Hz (even though i t i s sti l l possi bl e to sweep the Mai n and
FM coi l s of the YTO).
Wi th the YTO i n i ts unl ocked condi ti ons and the span set to 0 Hz, the
nomi nal YTO frequency i s not necessari l y the val ue l i sted as LO FREQ
i n the Frequency Di agnose menu. The YTO has an i ni ti al pretune
accuracy of 20 MHz. To di spl ay the nomi nal YTOfrequency, press CAL,
MORE 1 OF 2, FREQ DIAGNOSE, LO FREQ.
The fracti onal N osci l l ator frequency i s the same as the desi red sampl er
I F. To di spl ay the fracti onal N osci l l ator frequency press CAL, MORE 1
OF 2, FREQ DIAGNOSE, FRAC N FREQ. I f the sampl er I F i s negati ve
(YTO frequency i s l ower than the desi red sampl i ng osci l l ator
harmoni c), the fracti onal N frequency wi l l be di spl ayed as a negati ve
number.
Chapter 10 515
Synthesizer Section
Troubleshooting Using the TAM
Troubleshooting Using the TAM
When usi ng automati c faul t i sol ati on, the TAM i ndi cates suspected
ci rcui ts that need to be manual l y checked. Use Tabl e 10-4 on page 516
to l ocate the manual procedure.
Tabl e 10-5 on page 517 l i sts assembl y test connectors associ ated wi th
each manual probe troubl eshooti ng test. Fi gure 10-3 on page 515
i l l ustrates the l ocati on of A14 and A15 test connectors.
The pi n l ocati ons of a 16-pi n TAM connector are i ndi cated i n Fi gure
10-4 on page 516. Tabl e 10-3 on page 516 i ndi cates the correspondence
between a measured si gnal l i ne and the TAM connector pi n.
Figure 10-3A14andA15Test Connectors
516 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
Troubleshooting Using the TAM
Figure 10-4TAMConnector PinLocations
Table 10-3 Measured Signal Line Location
Measured Signal Line Connector Pin
MSL1 pi n 1
MSL2 pi n 2
MSL3 pi n 3
MSL4 pi n 4
MSL5 pi n 5
GND pi n 6
MSL6 pi n 13
MSL7 pi n 14
MSL8 pi n 15
Table 10-4 Automatic Fault Isolation References
Suspected Circuit Indicated by Automatic
Fault Isolation
Manual Procedure to Perform
Check the YTO l oop
Check rst LO Conrmi ng a Faul ty Synthesi zer Secti on
(steps 9-11)
Check rst LO pretune frequency and ampl i tude Unl ocked YTO PLL (steps 10-13)
Check 3rd LO dri ve Thi rd LO Dri ver Ampl i er (steps 1-6)
Check 10 MHz reference to phase/frequency Unl ocked Reference PLL (steps 8-13)
detector
Check for 10 MHz si gnal at other i nput to Unl ocked Reference PLL (steps 12 and 13)
phase/frequency detector
Check A3 ADC MUX functi on bl ock Conrmi ng a Faul ty Synthesi zer Secti on (steps
1-4)
Check A14 frequency control assembl y Conrmi ng a Faul ty Synthesi zer Secti on
(steps 12-17)
Check A14J301 10 MHz REF i nput Conrmi ng a Faul ty Synthesi zer Secti on
(steps 5-8)
Check A15 RF assembl y Conrmi ng a Faul ty Synthesi zer Secti on
(steps 18-25)
Chapter 10 517
Synthesizer Section
Troubleshooting Using the TAM
Check current source Fi rst LO Span Probl ems (Al l Spans) (steps
14-21)
Check FM l oop sense Unl ocked YTO PLL (steps 28-34)
Check l evel at ampl i er I nput Thi rd LO Dri ver Ampl i er (steps 1-6)
Check l evel s i nto mi xer U400 Unl ocked Offset PLL (steps 3-13)
Check l oop references Unl ocked Offset PLL (steps 1 and 2)
Check mai n coi l tune DAC Unl ocked YTO PLL (steps 45-49)
Check mai n coi l coarse and ne DACs Unl ocked YTO PLL (steps 41-44)
Check offset span accuracy Fi rst LO Span Probl ems 2 MHz (step 8)
Check phase/frequency detector Unl ocked Reference PLL (steps 17-22)
Check path to phase/frequency detector Unl ocked Offset PLL (steps 3-7, 14-19)
Check fracti onal N osci l l ator Unl ocked YTO PLL (steps 14-18)
Check sampl er dri ve output of A7 LODA Unl ocked YTO PLL (steps 19-22)
Check sampl er I F Unl ocked YTO PLL (steps 23-27)
Check sampl er/sampl er I F operati on Sampl er and Sampl er I F (steps 1-15)
Check span attenuator Fi rst LO Span Probl ems (Al l Spans) (steps
6-13)
Check sweep generator Sweep Generator Ci rcui t
Check the 600 MHz reference l oop ampl i er Unl ocked Reference PLL (steps 23-26)
Check the YTO l oop Unl ocked YTO PLL
Check YTO FM coi l dri ver Fi rst LOSpan Probl ems (2.01 MHz to 20 MHz)
(step 6)
Check YTO FM coi l dri ver and mai n l oop error
vol tage dri ver
Unl ocked YTO PLL (steps 35-40)
Table 10-5 TAM Tests versus Test Connectors
Connector
Manual Probe
Troubleshooting Test
Measured Signal
Lines
A14J15 Sweep generator MS8
Span attenuator DAC MS7
Span attenuator swi tches MS7
Sweep + tune mul t i nput amp MS1, OS1
Sweep + tune mul t i nput swi tches MS1, MS3
A14J16 FAV generator MS4
FAV gen 0.5 V/GHz output MS5
A14J17 Mai n coi l coarse DAC MS3
Mai n coi l ne DAC MS2
Mai n coi l DACs output MS5
Table 10-4 Automatic Fault Isolation References
Suspected Circuit Indicated by Automatic
Fault Isolation
Manual Procedure to Perform
518 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
Troubleshooting Using the TAM
Mai n l oop error vol t DVR MS4
Opti on dri ve MS8
Opti on dri ve swi tch MS7
Opti on dri ve DAC MS6
A14J18 10 V reference MS1, MS2
LODA dri ve MS5, MS6, MS7,
MS8
Mai n coi l tune DAC MS3
Sweep gen DAC MS4*
Sweep gen DAC MS4*
A14J19 Second conv PI N swi tch MS8
Second conv mi xer bi as MS1
Second conv drai n bi as MS3
Second conv doubl er bi as MS4
Second conv dri ver bi as MS5
Fi rst mi xer dri ve swi tch MS7
Fi rst mi xer dri ve DAC MS6
A14J302 Revi si on MS7
Fracti onal N out MS1
Di vi ded reference MS4
Feedback buffer bi as MS5
Outamp bi as MS6
A15J200 Posi ti ve 15 vol t suppl y MS1
Sampl er dri ve buffer bi as MS2
Sampl i ng osci l l ator bi as MS3
Offset l ock dri ve buffer MS4
* Onl y on A14 assembl i es wi th part numbers 08560-60059,
08560-69059, 08560-60062, 08560-69062.
Table 10-5 TAM Tests versus Test Connectors
Connector
Manual Probe
Troubleshooting Test
Measured Signal
Lines
Chapter 10 519
Synthesizer Section
Troubleshooting Using the TAM
A15J200 OFL error vol tage MS6
Negati ve 10 vol t suppl y MS8
Offset l ock l oop BW DAC MS5,MS7,MS8
A15J400 Posi ti ve 15 vol t suppl y MS2
Offset l ock RF buffer MS4
I F AMP/l i mi ter bi as MS6
Offset l ock l oop buffer D MS7
Offset l ock l oop buffer C MS8
Sampl er bi as test MS3
A15J502 Posi ti ve 15 vol t suppl y MS2
Thi rd LO tune vol tage MS3
Offset l ock l oop buffer MS4
600 MHz osci l l ator bi as MS5
Cal i brator AGC amp bi as MS6
Cal i brator ampl adj MS7
3rd LO dri ver amp MS1, MS8
A15J602 Posi ti ve 15 vol t suppl y MS8
Fl atness compensati on 3 MS2
Fl atness compensati on 2 MS5
Fl atness compensati on 1 MS6
SI G I D col l ector bi as (Opti on 008) MS7
RF gai n control test MS1, MS3
A15J901 Revi si on MS3
External mi xer swi tch MS1, MS8
Si gnal I D swi tch (Opti on 008) MS5, MS6
Ten vol t reference MS4
External mi xer bi as MS7
* Onl y on A14 assembl i es wi th part numbers 08560-60059,
08560-69059, 08560-60062, 08560-69062.
Table 10-5 TAM Tests versus Test Connectors
Connector
Manual Probe
Troubleshooting Test
Measured Signal
Lines
520 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
General PLL Troubleshooting
General PLL Troubleshooting
The synthesi zer secti on rel i es heavi l y on phase-l ocked l oops (PLL).
Typi cal l y, faul ty PLLs are ei ther l ocked at the wrong frequency or
unl ocked. The i nformati on bel ow appl i es to troubl eshooti ng these two
cl asses of probl ems on a general i zed PLL.
PLL Locked at Wrong Frequency
Numbers i n the fol l owi ng text i denti fy i tems i n Fi gure 10-5 on page
521.
Any frequency errors at reference (1) wi l l be mul ti pl i ed by N/M on
the PLL output.
A sampl er reference-frequency error (2) wi l l be mul ti pl i ed by i ts
harmoni c on the PLL output.
A mi xer reference-frequency error (3) produces the i denti cal error on
the PLL output.
I f di vi der i nput or output frequenci es (4) are wrong, check for
i ncorrect di vi de numbers and data control l i ng the di vi ders.
Chapter 10 521
Synthesizer Section
General PLL Troubleshooting
Figure 10-5 PLL Locked at Wrong Frequency
Unlocked PLL
An unl ocked PLL can be caused by probl ems i nsi de or outsi de the PLL.
Troubl eshoot thi s probl em by worki ng backward from the osci l l ator as
descri bed i n the steps bel ow. Numbers i n the fol l owi ng text i denti fy
i tems i n Fi gure 10-6 on page 522.
522 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
General PLL Troubleshooting
1. The l oop i ntegrator output vol tage (1) shoul d be attempti ng to tune
the osci l l ator to the correct frequency.
The vol tage at (1) shoul d i ncrease as the frequency i ncreases on
al l of the PLLs:
Figure 10-6 Unlocked PLL
2. I f the i ntegrator output vol tage changes i n the manner descri bed i n
Table 10-6 TAM Tests versus Test Connectors
PLL Measurement Point
YTO PLL A14J23 pi n 1 (YTO ERROR)
Reference PLL A15J502 pi n 3 (LO3 ERR)
Sampl er PLL A15J200 pi n 13 (OFL ERR)
Fracti onal N PLL A14TP13 (I NTEGRATOR)
Chapter 10 523
Synthesizer Section
General PLL Troubleshooting
step 1, the probl em i s external to the PLL. For exampl e, the
reference frequency coul d be faul ty. I f the i ntegrator output vol tage
appears i ncorrect, conrm that the pul ses out of the phase detector
(2) are attempti ng to tune the osci l l ator i n the correct di recti on.
3. I f the phase detector output i s bad, check the i nputs to the detector
(3). One i nput shoul d be hi gher i n frequency than the other; thi s
shoul d match the phase detector outputs.
4. Conrm proper power l evel s for the si gnal s at the i nput to the "N"
di vi ders (4), the reference i nputs (5 and 7), and the l oop feedback
path (6).
524 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
Unlocked Reference PLL (100 MHz VCXO)
Unlocked Reference PLL (100 MHz VCXO)
NOTE The fol l owi ng i nformati on i s for A15 RF assembl i es 08563-60054 and
l ater. For earl i er A15 RF assembl i es, proceed to Unlocked Reference
PLL (600 MHz SAWR) i n thi s chapter.
Operation (100 MHz VCXO)
The 600 MHz reference i s generated by tri pl i ng, then doubl i ng the
output of the 100 MHz phase-l ocked l oop. I f the 600 MHz reference i s
off frequency, the 100 MHz phase-l ock ci rcui try i s probabl y at faul t. I f
there i s no si gnal present at A15J701, or i f the l evel i s l ess than 3
dBm, the 100 MHz VCXO, the tri pl er, or the doubl er ci rcui try has
probabl y fai l ed. Refer to functi on bl ocks Q, R, and S of the A15 RF
schemati c (sheet 2 of 4) i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer
Component Level I nformation.
Troubleshooting (100 MHz VCXO)
Check 100 MHz
VCXO, tripler,
and doubler
(steps 1-7)
1. Usi ng an acti ve probe/spectrum anal yzer combi nati on, such as the
HP 85024A/HP 8566B, measure the tri pl er output at A15TP700. The
tri pl er output shoul d be +3 dBm 2 dB.
2. I f the tri pl er output i s wi thi n tol erance, suspect the doubl er
ci rcui try. Refer to functi on bl ock S of the A15 RF schemati c (sheet 2
of 4).
3. I f the tri pl er output i s too l ow, probe the output of A15U700 RF
ampl i er. The l evel shoul d be +16.5 dBm 2 dB. The l evel at the
i nput of A15U700 shoul d be +8.5 dBm 2 dB.
4. I f the l evel at the i nput of A15U700 i s too l ow, suspect a faul ty 100
MHz VCXO. Refer to functi on bl ock Q of the A15 RF schemati c
(sheet 2 of 4).
5. On the spectrum anal yzer, press AUX CTRL, REAR PANEL, and 10
MHz INT.
6. Measuri ng the tune vol tage i ndi cates i f the 100 MHz PLL i s l ocked.
Connect the ground l ead the vol tmeter to A15J1 pi n 3 and measure
the vol tage at A15J700 pi n 3.
7. The tune vol tage shoul d be between +1 and +24 Vol ts. I f the tune
vol tage i s i ncorrect, pl ace the P700 jumper (on A15J700) i n the
TESTposi ti on (pi n 1 to pi n 2). Thi s sets the tune vol tage for varactor
A15CR700 to the nomi nal +13 Vol ts, maki ng i t easi er to troubl eshoot
the 100 MHz VCXO, tri pl er, and doubl er. Remember to return P700
jumper to the NORMAL posi ti on when you have ni shed
troubl eshooti ng the osci l l ator ci rcui try.
Chapter 10 525
Synthesizer Section
Unlocked Reference PLL (100 MHz VCXO)
8. I f the 100 MHz osci l l ator i s worki ng, the reason for the unl ocked
condi ti on i s ei ther a probl em i n the 10 MHz reference or a faul t i n
the si gnal path around the l oop.
Check 10 MHz
reference to
phase/frequency
detector (steps
9-14)
9. On the spectrum anal yzer, press AUX CTRL, REAR PANEL, and 10
MHz INT.
10.Check the 10 MHz reference frequency accuracy by connecti ng a
frequency counter to A15J301 and veri fy that the reference
frequency i s 10 MHz 40 Hz after a 5 mi nute warm-up peri od.
11.I f a 10 MHz si gnal >1 V peak-to-peak i s not present at A15J301,
refer to the "10 MHz Reference" i n Chapter 11.
12.Measure the si gnal at TP301 wi th an osci l l oscope. Refer to functi on
bl ock M of A15 RF schemati c.
13.Measure the si gnal at U502 pi n 11 wi th an osci l l oscope. Refer to
functi on bl ock X of A15 RF schemati c. Thi s si gnal shoul d be TTL
l evel s at 10 MHz wi th a 60 percent duty cycl e.
14.I f TTL-l evel si gnal s (approxi matel y 10 MHz) are not present, check
si gnal s backwards through the l oop to nd a faul t i n the si gnal path.
15.Measure the si gnal s at the fol l owi ng test poi nts wi th an acti ve
probe/spectrum anal yzer combi nati on:
16.I f an approxi matel y 10 MHz TTL si gnal i s present at U502 pi n 11
wi th 60 percent duty cycl e, and the RF porti on of the phase-l ock l oop
i s functi oni ng, the faul t probabl y l i es i n the phase/frequency detector
or the 100 MHz l ock l oop i ntegrator.
Check
phase/frequency
detector (steps
17-22)
17.Moni tor U504 pi n 5 and U503 pi n 9 wi th an osci l l oscope. These are
the two outputs of the phase/frequency detector. Refer to functi on
bl ock O of A15 RF schemati c.
18.A l ocked l oop wi l l exhi bi t stabl e, narrow (approxi matel y 20 ns wi de),
and posi ti ve-goi ng TTL pul ses occurri ng at a 10 MHz rate at U504
pi n 5 and U503 pi n 9.
19.I f the l oop i s unl ocked, but si gnal s are present on both i nputs of the
phase/frequency detector, the output pul ses wi l l be superi mposed on
each other.
Juncti on of 100 MHz, +2.5 dBm 2 dB
C570 and C571
Juncti on of R715, 100 MHz, 3 dBm 2 dB
R716, R567, and R568
U700 pi n 3 100 MHz, +16.5 dBm 2 dB
U700 pi n 1 100 MHz, +8.5 dBm 2 dB
526 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
Unlocked Reference PLL (100 MHz VCXO)
20.I f the l oop i s unl ocked, and there i s no si gnal at one of the
phase/frequency detector i nputs, one phase detector output wi l l be at
TTL l ow and the other wi l l be at TTL hi gh. For exampl e, i f there i s
no i nput si gnal at U504 pi n 3, U504 pi n 5 wi l l be TTL l ow and U503
pi n 9 wi l l be TTL hi gh. I f there i s no i nput si gnal at U503 pi n 11,
U503 pi n 9 wi l l be TTL l ow and U504 pi n 5 wi l l be TTL hi gh.
21.To remove the 10 MHz reference i nput to the phase/frequency
detector, press AUX CTRL, REAR PANEL, and 10 MHz EXT wi th no
si gnal appl i ed to the rear panel 10 MHz REF I N/OUT connector.
22.To remove the di vi ded-down 100 MHz si gnal from the
phase/frequency detector, short R595. Refer to functi on bl ock X of
A15 RF schemati c.
Check the 100
MHz lock loop
integrator (steps
23-27)
23.Remove 10 MHz reference i nput to the phase/frequency detector by
pressi ng AUX CTRL, REAR PANEL, and 10 MHz EXT. No si gnal shoul d
be connected to the rear panel 10 MHz REF I N/OUT connector.
NOTE The outputs of phase/frequency detector are l ow-pass l tered to reduce
the 10 MHz component of the si gnal . The l tered si gnal s are then
i ntegrated by U506 and the resul t i s fed to the tune l i ne of the 100 MHz
VCXO.
24.Check that the vol tage on A15J502 pi n 3 i s l ess than 0 Vdc. Refer to
functi on bl ock P of A15 RF schemati c.
25.Press AUX CTRL, REAR PANEL, and 10 MHz INT and remove the
di vi ded-down 100 MHz i nput to the phase/frequency detector by
shorti ng R572.
26.Check that the vol tage on A15J502 pi n 3 i s greater than 13 Vdc.
27.I f the l oop i s l ocked, the vol tage on A15J502 pi n 3 shoul d be between
0 and +6 Vdc.
28.I f the front panel CAL OUTPUT ampl i tude i s out of speci cati on
and cannot be brought wi thi n speci cati on by adjusti ng A15R561,
CAL AMPTD, check the cal i brator AGC ampl i er wi th the fol l owi ng
steps. Refer to functi on bl ock W of A15 RF schemati c.
NOTE The 300 MHz CAL OUTPUT si gnal comes from the tri pl ed 100 MHz
whi ch i s passed through a l evel i ng l oop. The 300 MHz si gnal passes
through a l ow-pass l ter for reduci ng hi gher harmoni cs. These
harmoni cs can fool the detector. The 300 MHz si gnal passes through a
vari abl e attenuator control l ed by PI N di ode CR503 whi ch i s control l ed
by the feedback l oop. Di ode CR504 i s the detector di ode (the same type
as CR505). Di ode CR504 provi des temperature compensati on between
the reference vol tage and the detected RF vol tage.
Chapter 10 527
Synthesizer Section
Unlocked Reference PLL (100 MHz VCXO)
Measure the l evel of 300 MHz at A15 TP505 wi th an acti ve
probe/spectrum anal yzer combi nati on. I f the si gnal i s l ess than +2
dBm, repeat the rst 27 steps of thi s procedure.
I f the si gnal at thi s poi nt i s correct, pl ace a short across the PI N
di ode CR503.
I f the si gnal l evel at the CAL OUTPUTi s sti l l l ess than 10 dBm
wi th CR503 shorted out, troubl eshoot the RF forward path
through ampl i er Q505. (The si gnal ampl i tude decreases.)
I f the CAL OUTPUT si gnal l evel i s greater than 10 dBm,
troubl eshoot the PI N di ode attenuator, the detector, or the
feedback path.
29.Measure the detector vol tage at A15J502 pi n 14. The vol tage shoul d
measure approxi matel y +0.3 Vdc when the CAL OUTPUT si gnal i s
at 10 dBm. Thi s vol tage shoul d change wi th adjustment of
A15R561, CAL AMPTD.
30.Check that the vol tage at U507A Pi n 3 i s +1.7 Vdc. I f thi s vol tage i s
not correct, there may be a probl em wi th the +10 V reference.
31.Measure vol tage at U507B pi n 5 whi l e adjusti ng R561. Thi s i s the
temperature-compensated adjustabl e vol tage reference to whi ch the
detected vol tage i s compared. I t shoul d vary between +0.15 V and
+0.6 V.
32.Adjust R561 to i ts l i mi ts and veri fy that the output U507B pi n 7
measures approxi matel y +1 Vdc at one l i mi t and 12 Vdc at the
other l i mi t.
528 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
Unlocked Reference PLL (100 MHz VCXO)
Third LO Driver Amplier (100 MHz VCXO)
The thi rd LO dri ver ampl i er (Q503) ampl i es the 300 MHz from the
300 MHz di stri buti on ampl i er to a sufci ent l evel to dri ve the LO port
of the doubl e bal anced mi xer. Duri ng the SI G I D operati on, di odes
CR501 and CR502 turn off the 3rd LO dri ver ampl i er i n order to
mi ni mi ze the amount of 300 MHz goi ng to the doubl e-bal anced mi xer.
Check level at
amplier input
(steps 1-6)
1. Press AUX CTRL, INTERNAL MIXER. Press SIG ID OFF, i f opti on 008 i s
i nstal l ed.
2. Use an acti ve-probe/spectrum-anal yzer combi nati on to conrm the
power l evel of the 300 MHz si gnal at the fol l owi ng test poi nts:
3. I f the si gnal at A15X602 pi n 5 i s l ow, but the si gnal at A15TP504 i s
correct, press AUX CTRL, INTERNAL MIXER. Press SIG ID
OFF, i f present.
4. Check that PI N di ode swi tches CR603 and CR605 are reverse bi ased
by approxi matel y +10 Vdc. Refer to functi on bl ock F of A15 RF
schemati c.
5. Measure 300 MHz si gnal at A15TP503 usi ng an acti ve
probe/spectrum anal yzer combi nati on. I f the si gnal i s not
approxi matel y +10 dBm, refer to "Unl ocked Reference PLL (100
MHz VCXO)" i n thi s chapter.
6. I f the l evel at the TP503 i s correct, but si gnal at TP504 i s too l ow, the
faul t i s probabl y i n the ampl i er.
A15X602 pin 5 +7 dBm
A15TP504 +15 dBm
Chapter 10 529
Synthesizer Section
Unlocked Reference PLL (600 MHz SAWR)
Unlocked Reference PLL (600 MHz SAWR)
NOTE The fol l owi ng i nformati on i s for A15 RF assembl i es earl i er than
08563-60054, 08563-60055, or 08563-60056. For A15 RF assembl i es
wi th the aforementi oned HP part numbers or l ater, refer to Unlocked
Reference PLL (100 MHz VCXO) earl i er i n thi s chapter.
Operation (600 MHz SAWR)
The reference PLL 600 MHz output i s generated by a 600 MHz SAWR
(surface acousti cal wave resonator) VCO. The SAWR provi des a hi gh Q
feedback path i n the osci l l ator ensuri ng good phase noi se. I f the
osci l l ator i s off-frequency, the phase-l ock ci rcui try i s probabl y at faul t.
I f there i s no si gnal present at A15J701, or i f the l evel i s l ess than 3
dBm, the osci l l ator has fai l ed. Transi stor Q703 provi des acti ve bi as for
osci l l ator transi stor Q701. Transi stor Q704 provi des acti ve bi as for 600
MHz buffer ampl i er Q702. Refer to functi on bl ocks Q and R of A15 RF
schemati c i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level
I nformation.
Troubleshooting (600 MHz SAWR)
1. I f Q701 and Q703 are functi oni ng, check the bi as on varactors
CR701 and CR702. The varactors shoul d be reverse-bi ased between
0 V and 18 V, dependi ng on tune vol tage.
2. I f the acti ve devi ces are functi oni ng properl y, check the SAWR by
pl aci ng a 100-ohm resi stor across U701 pi ns 1 and 2. Thi s bypasses
the SAWR, but provi des the equi val ent l oss of a correctl y functi oni ng
SAWR.
3. I f the osci l l ator begi ns to osci l l ate, the SAWR i s probabl y defecti ve.
4. On the HP 8560E/EC, press AUX CTRL, REAR PANEL, and 10 MHz
INT.
5. Measuri ng tune l i ne vol tage (LO3 ERR) i ndi cates i f the Reference
PLL i s l ocked. Measure the vol tage at A15J502 pi n 3. Connect the
ground l ead to A15J200 pi n 6.
6. I f vol tage i s not between 0 V and 5.75 V, the l oop i s unl ocked and ERR
333 600 UNLK shoul d be di spl ayed on the CRT.
7. I f the 600 MHz osci l l ator i s worki ng, the reason for the unl ocked
condi ti on i s ei ther a probl em i n the 10 MHz reference or a faul t i n
the si gnal path around the l oop.
530 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
Unlocked Reference PLL (600 MHz SAWR)
Check 10 MHz reference to phase/frequency detector (steps
8-13)
8. On the HP 8560E/EC, press AUX CTRL, REAR PANEL, and 10 MHz
INT.
9. Check the 10 MHz reference frequency accuracy by connecti ng a
frequency counter to A15J301 and veri fy that the reference
frequency i s 10 MHz 40 Hz after a 5 mi nute warm-up peri od.
10.I f a 10 MHz si gnal >1 V peak-to-peak i s not present at A15J301,
refer to the "10 MHz Reference" i n Chapter 11.
11.Measure the si gnal on U504 pi n 3 wi th an osci l l oscope. Refer to
functi on bl ock O of A15 RF schemati c.
12.Measure the si gnal at U504 pi n 11 wi th an osci l l oscope. Refer to
functi on bl ock O of A15 RF schemati c. Thi s si gnal shoul d be TTL
l evel s at 10 MHz wi th a 90 percent duty cycl e.
13.I f TTL-l evel si gnal s (approxi matel y 10 MHz) are not present, check
si gnal s backwards through the l oop to nd a faul t i n the si gnal path.
14.Use an osci l l oscope to check for 50 MHz TTL l evel si gnal at U503 pi n
2. Refer to functi on bl ock X of A15 RF schemati c.
15.Measure the si gnal s at the fol l owi ng test poi nts wi th an acti ve
probe/spectrum anal yzer combi nati on such as an HP 85024A/HP
8566A/B. The si gnal l evel at TP701 shoul d be sufci ent to dri ve an
ECL i nput.
16.I f an approxi matel y 10 MHz TTL si gnal i s present at U504 pi n 11
wi th 90 percent duty cycl e, and the RF porti on of the phase-l ock l oop
i s functi oni ng, the faul t probabl y l i es i n the phase/frequency detector
or the 600 MHz reference l oop ampl i er.
Check phase/frequency detector (steps 17-22)
17.Moni tor U504 pi ns 5 and 9 wi th an osci l l oscope. These are the two
outputs of the phase/frequency detector. Refer to functi on bl ock O of
A15 RF schemati c.
18.A l ocked l oop wi l l exhi bi t stabl e, narrow (approxi matel y 20 ns wi de),
and posi ti ve-goi ng TTL pul ses occurri ng at a 10 MHz rate at U504
pi ns 5 and 9.
U502 pin 2 50 MHz, +3 dBm
U502 pin 15 300 MHz, +3 dBm
TP503 300 MHz, approxi matel y +8 dBm
TP502 300 MHz (ECL l evel ), approxi matel y +3 dBm
TP701 600 MHz (ECL l evel ), approxi matel y +3 dBm
Chapter 10 531
Synthesizer Section
Unlocked Reference PLL (600 MHz SAWR)
19.I f the l oop i s unl ocked, but si gnal s are present on both i nputs of the
phase/frequency detector, the output pul ses wi l l be superi mposed on
each other.
20.I f the l oop i s unl ocked, and there i s no si gnal at one of the
phase/frequency detector i nputs, one phase detector output wi l l be at
TTL l ow and the other wi l l be at TTL hi gh. For exampl e, i f there i s
no i nput si gnal at U504 pi n 3, U504 pi n 5 wi l l be TTL l ow and U504
pi n 9 wi l l be TTL hi gh. I f there i s no i nput si gnal at U504 pi n 11,
U504 pi n 9 wi l l be TTL l ow and U504 pi n 5 wi l l be TTL hi gh.
21.To remove the 10 MHz reference i nput to the phase/frequency
detector, press AUX CTRL, REAR PANEL, and 10 MHz EXT wi th no
si gnal appl i ed to the rear panel 10 MHz REF I N/OUT connector.
22.To remove the di vi ded-down 600 MHz si gnal from the
phase/frequency detector, short R572. Refer to functi on bl ock W of
A15 RF schemati c.
Check the 600 MHz reference loop amplier (steps 23-26)
NOTE The outputs of phase/frequency detector are l ow-pass l tered to reduce
the 10 MHz component of the si gnal . The l tered si gnal s are then
i ntegrated by U506 and the resul t i s fed to the tune l i ne of the 600 MHz
osci l l ator.
23.Remove 10 MHz reference i nput to the phase/frequency detector by
pressi ng AUX CTRL, REAR PANEL, and 10 MHz EXT. No si gnal shoul d
be connected to the rear panel 10 MHz REF I N/OUT connector.
24.Check that the vol tage on A15J502 pi n 3 i s l ess than 0 Vdc. Refer to
functi on bl ock P of A15 RF schemati c.
Press AUX CTRL, REAR PANEL, and 10 MHz INT and remove the
di vi ded-down 600 MHz i nput to the phase/frequency detector by
shorti ng R572.
25.Check that the vol tage on A15J502 pi n 3 i s greater than 5.75 Vdc.
26.Repl ace C519 i n X501.
27.I f the l oop i s l ocked, the vol tage on A15J502 pi n 3 shoul d be between
0 V and +5.75 Vdc.
NOTE The 300 MHz CAL OUTPUT si gnal comes from the di vi ded down 600
MHz whi ch i s passed through a l evel i ng l oop. The 300 MHz si gnal
passes through a l ow-pass l ter for reduci ng hi gher harmoni cs. These
harmoni cs can fool the detector. The 300 MHz si gnal passes through a
vari abl e attenuator control l ed by PI N di ode CR503 whi ch i s control l ed
by the feedback l oop. Di ode CR504 i s the detector di ode (the same type
as CR505). Di ode CR504 provi des temperature compensati on between
the reference vol tage and the detected RF vol tage.
532 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
Unlocked Reference PLL (600 MHz SAWR)
28.I f the front panel CAL OUTPUT ampl i tude i s out of speci cati on
and cannot be brought wi thi n speci cati on by adjusti ng A15R561,
CAL AMPTD, check the cal i brator AGC ampl i er wi th the fol l owi ng
steps. Refer to functi on bl ock W of A15 RF schemati c.
Measure the l evel of 300 MHz at A15 TP505 wi th an acti ve
probe/spectrum anal yzer combi nati on. I f the si gnal i s l ess than +2
dBm, repeat the rst 29 steps of thi s procedure.
I f the si gnal at thi s poi nt i s correct, pl ace a short across the PI N
di ode CR503.
I f the si gnal l evel at the CAL OUTPUTi s sti l l l ess than 10 dBm
wi th CR503 shorted out, troubl eshoot the RF forward path
through ampl i er Q505. (The si gnal ampl i tude decreases.)
I f the CAL OUTPUT si gnal l evel i s greater than 10 dBm,
troubl eshoot the PI N di ode attenuator, the detector, or the
feedback path.
29.Measure the detector vol tage at A15J502 pi n 14. The vol tage shoul d
measure approxi matel y +0.3 Vdc when the CAL OUTPUT si gnal i s
at 10 dBm. Thi s vol tage shoul d change wi th adjustment of
A15R561, CAL AMPTD.
30.Check that the vol tage at U507A Pi n 3 i s +1.7 Vdc. I f thi s vol tage i s
not correct, there may be a probl em wi th the +10 V reference.
31.Measure vol tage at U507B pi n 5 whi l e adjusti ng R561. Thi s i s the
temperature-compensated adjustabl e vol tage reference to whi ch the
detected vol tage i s compared. I t shoul d vary between +0.15 V and
+0.6 V.
32.Adjust R561 to i ts l i mi ts and veri fy that the output U507B pi n 7
measures approxi matel y +1 Vdc at one l i mi t and 12 Vdc at the
other l i mi t.
Chapter 10 533
Synthesizer Section
Unlocked Reference PLL (600 MHz SAWR)
Third LO driver amplier (600 MHz SAWR)
The thi rd LO dri ver ampl i er (Q503) ampl i es the 300 MHz from the
600 MHz phase-l ock l oop to a sufci ent l evel to dri ve the LO port of the
doubl e bal anced mi xer. Duri ng the SI G I D operati on, (Opti on 008 onl y),
di odes CR501 and CR502 turn off the 3rd LO dri ver ampl i er i n order
to mi ni mi ze the amount of 300 MHz goi ng to the doubl e-bal anced
mi xer.
Check level at amplier input (steps 1-6)
1. Press AUX CTRL, INTERNAL MIXER. For Opti on 008, press SIG ID OFF.
2. Use an acti ve-probe/spectrum-anal yzer combi nati on to conrm the
power l evel of the 300 MHz si gnal at the fol l owi ng test poi nts:
3. I f the si gnal at A15TP602 i s l ow, but the si gnal at A15TP504 i s
correct, press AUX CTRL, INTERNAL MIXER. For Opti on 008, press SIG
ID OFF.
4. Check that PI N di ode swi tches CR603 and CR605 are reverse bi ased
by approxi matel y +10 Vdc. Refer to functi on bl ock F of A15 RF
schemati c.
5. Measure 300 MHz si gnal at A15TP503 usi ng an acti ve
probe/spectrum anal yzer combi nati on. I f the si gnal i s not
approxi matel y +10 dBm, refer to "Unl ocked Reference PLL (600
MHz SAWR)" i n thi s chapter.
6. I f the l evel at the TP503 i s correct, but si gnal at TP504 i s too l ow, the
faul t i s probabl y i n the ampl i er.
A15TP602 +7 dBm
A15TP504 +15 dBm
534 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
Unlocked Offset Lock Loop (Sampling Oscillator)
Unlocked Offset Lock Loop
(Sampling Oscillator)
Operation
The offset l ock l oop dri ves the A15U100 sampl er. The offset l ock l oop
sampl i ng osci l l ator tunes to one of si xteen di screte frequenci es between
285 MHz and 297.222 MHz. Refer to A15 schemati c. Mi xer A15U400
mi xes the osci l l ator output wi th 300 MHz from the reference PLL,
produci ng a 3 MHz to 15 MHz I F si gnal . The 3 MHz to 15 MHz si gnal i s
compared i n the phase/frequency detector wi th the di vi ded-down 300
MHz from the reference PLL. The phase/frequency detector dri ves a
vol tage-to-current di ode swi tch whi ch dri ves the l oop i ntegrator. Loop
bandwi dth swi tches vary the l oop bandwi dth to mi ni mi ze noi se
si debands. The sampl i ng osci l l ator must produce l ow noi se because the
A15U100 sampl er mul ti pl i es noi se by a factor of approxi matel y 24.
Tabl e 10-7 on page 535 l i sts the prescal er and postscal er di vi de
numbers i n the offset l oop reference di vi de chai n, for each of the 16
di screte frequenci es to whi ch the offset l ock l oop may be set. I t al so
i ndi cates what the reference frequency i nto the phase/frequency di vi de
chai n i s. Refer to functi on bl ock AN on the RF schemati c.
Troubleshooting
Check loop references (steps 1 and 2)
1. Use an acti ve probe and spectrum anal yzer to conrm the presence
of the fol l owi ng reference to the offset l ock l oop i nput:
2. Thi s si gnal i s not correct, refer to "Unl ocked Reference PLL" i n thi s
chapter.
Check levels into mixer (steps 3-13)
3. Set the HP 8560E/EC to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Center frequency ..................................................... 300 MHz
Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz
Tri gger ...................................................................... SI NGLE
4. Force the PLL to unl ock by shorti ng A15X201 pi n 1 to A15X201 pi n 5
wi th a short l ength of wi re. Then connect a dc power suppl y to
A15J200 pi n 16.
5. Moni tor A15TP201 wi th an acti ve probe/spectrum anal yzer
combi nati on. Vary the dc suppl y unti l the frequency of the sampl i ng
A15TP404 300 MHz at +5 dBm
Chapter 10 535
Synthesizer Section
Unlocked Offset Lock Loop (Sampling Oscillator)
osci l l ator i s 296 MHz.
6. The vol tage requi red to tune the osci l l ator shoul d measure between
+15 Vdc and +19 Vdc. I f the vol tage i s out of thi s range, perform the
sampl i ng osci l l ator adjustment i n Chapter 2.
7. Vary the vol tage to tune the sampl i ng osci l l ator to 296 MHz.
8. Use an acti ve probe/spectrum anal yzer combi nati on to measure the
300 MHz LO si gnal at the fol l owi ng test poi nt:
9. I f the si gnal i s not measured near the i ndi cated power, troubl eshoot
the offset l ock l oop buffer (functi on bl ock AM of A15 RF schemati c
sheet 3 of 4).
A15TP402 +7 dBm
Table 10-7 Sampling Oscillator PLL Divide Numbers
Sampling
Oscillator
Frequency
(MHz)
Center
Frequency*
(MHz)
Reference Divide Chain Reference
Frequency
(MHz)
Prescaler Postscaler
285.000 2156.3 10 2 15.000
286.364 2176.3 11 2 13.636
287.500 2199.5 8 3 12.500
288.462 2230.3 13 2 11.538
288.888 799.3 9 3 11.111
290.000 2263.3 10 3 10.000
290.909 2282.3 11 3 9.091
291.666 2302.3 9 4 8.333
292.500 2155.3 8 5 7.500
293.478 2158.3 23 2 6.522
294.444 2336.3 9 6 5.556
295.000 2196.3 10 6 5.000
296.000 1.3 15 5 4.000
296.471 2378.3 17 5 3.529
297.000 2410.3 20 5 3.000
297.222 2422.3 18 6 2.778
* To set the sampl i ng osci l l ator to a desi red frequency, set span
to 0 Hz and CENTER FREQ to the val ue l i sted i n the tabl e.
536 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
Unlocked Offset Lock Loop (Sampling Oscillator)
10.Measure the 296 MHz l oop feedback si gnal at the fol l owi ng test
poi nt:
11.I f the feedback si gnal i s not near the i ndi cated power, measure the
si gnal s at the fol l owi ng test poi nts on the feedback path. Refer to
functi on bl ocks AD, AG, and AH of A15 RF schemati c.
12.Measure the 4 MHz l oop-I F si gnal at the mi xer output. The
frequency of the I F i s the same as the reference frequency and can be
found i n Tabl e 10-7 on page 535.
13.I f the I F si gnal i s not near the i ndi cated power, troubl eshoot the l oop
mi xer (functi on bl ock AI ).
Check path to phase/frequency detector (steps 14-19)
14.Measure the l oop I F si gnal at the i nput to the I F ampl i er/l i mi ter
(functi on bl ock AK):
15.Conrm the presence of a 4 MHz square-wave reference frequency
si gnal at U406 pi n 3. The square wave i s TTL whose peak val ues
shoul d be l ess than +0.6 V and greater than +2.2 V.
16.Di sconnect the jumper from X201 pi ns 1 and 5. Di sconnect the dc
power suppl y whi ch i s connected to A15J200 pi n 16.
17.Set HP 8560E/EC to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Center frequency ..................................................... 300 MHz
Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz
18.Use an osci l l oscope to conrm the presence of a 4 MHz TTL-l evel
reference frequency si gnal at U406 pi n 11.
19.Connect a short across A15R425. Connect A15U406 pi ns 3 and 11
together. Thi s puts the same si gnal on both the phase/frequency
detector i nputs.
20.Observe the phase/frequency detector outputs, U406 pi ns 6 and 9,
wi th an osci l l oscope. Narrow TTL pul ses shoul d be present. Pi n 9 i s
normal l y l ow, pul si ng hi gh, and pi n 6 i s normal l y hi gh, pul si ng l ow.
A15TP400 +2 dBm
A15TP200 +4 dBm
A15TP201 +9 dBm
A15TP202 +5.5 dBm
A15R447 (end nearest L414) 6 dBm
A15L428 (end nearest U411) 4 MHz (approxi matel y 6 dBm)
Chapter 10 537
Synthesizer Section
Unlocked Offset Lock Loop (Sampling Oscillator)
21.Check the end of L417 (nearest C445) wi th an osci l l oscope. Wi th the
osci l l oscope i nput ac-coupl ed, a tri angl e waveform approxi matel y 20
mVp-p shoul d be present.
22.Short C441 wi th a wi re jumper. (Connect the jumper from the end of
R462 nearest C441 to the end of R460 nearest C443.) Thi s changes
the l oop i ntegrator i nto a vol tage fol l ower. Refer to functi on bl ock AB
of A15 RF schemati c.
23.Check the vol tages at the fol l owi ng poi nts:
24.I f the vol tages are not correct, suspect A15U408.
25.Remove the jumpers.
A15U408 pin 6 +2.5 Vdc (approxi matel y)
A15X201 pin 1 +2.5 Vdc (approxi matel y)
538 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
Unlocked YTO PLL
Unlocked YTO PLL
Operation
The A11 YTO i s l ocked to two other osci l l ators: the fracti onal N
osci l l ator, and the offset PLL sampl i ng osci l l ator. For LO spans of 2.01
MHz and greater, ei ther the FM or mai n coi l of the YTO i s swept
di rectl y. For LO spans of 2 MHz and l ess, the fracti onal N osci l l ator i s
swept. The sampl i ng osci l l ator remai ns xed-tuned duri ng al l sweeps.
The output of A11 YTO feeds through the A7 LO di stri buti on ampl i er
(LODA) to the A15U100 sampl er. The offset PLL sampl i ng osci l l ator,
whi ch dri ves the sampl er, osci l l ates between 285 and 297.222 MHz. The
sampl er generates harmoni cs of the sampl i ng osci l l ator and one of
these harmoni cs mi xes wi th the YTOfrequency to generate the sampl er
I F frequency. As a resul t, the frequency of the sampl er I F i s determi ned
by the fol l owi ng equati on:
Where:
F
I F
i s the sampl er I F
F
YTO
i s the YTO frequency
N i s the desi red sampl i ng osci l l ator harmoni c
F
SAMP
i s the sampl i ng osci l l ator frequency
Noti ce that F
I F
can be posi ti ve or negati ve dependi ng upon whether
the sampl i ng osci l l ator harmoni c used i s l ess than or greater than
the YTO frequency. The actual sampl er I F i s al ways posi ti ve, but the
si gn i s carri ed al ong as a "bookkeepi ng" functi on whi ch determi nes
whi ch way to sweep the fracti onal N osci l l ator (up or down) and
what pol ari ty the YTO error vol tage shoul d have (posi ti ve or
negati ve) to mai ntai n l ock.
To check i f a negati ve sampl er I F i s sel ected, press CAL, MORE 1 OF
2, FREQ DIAGNOSE, FRAC N FREQ. I f the fracti onal N osci l l ator
frequency i s posi ti ve, the sampl er I F i s al so posi ti ve. A negati ve
fracti onal N frequency i ndi cates that the sampl er I F i s negati ve.
Noti ce that the pol ari ty of the YTO l oop error vol tage (YTO ERROR)
out of the YTO l oop phase/frequency detector changes as a functi on
of the pol ari ty of the sampl er I F. That i s, for posi ti ve sampl er I Fs, an
i ncreasi ng YTO frequency resul ts i n an i ncreasi ng YTO ERROR
si gnal . For negati ve sampl er I Fs, an i ncreasi ng YTO frequency
resul ts i n a decreasi ng YTO ERROR si gnal . Thi s i mpl i es that to
mai ntai n l ock i n both cases, the sense of YTO ERROR must be
F
IF
F
YTO
N F
SAMP
( ) =
Chapter 10 539
Synthesizer Section
Unlocked YTO PLL
reversed such that, wi th a negati ve sampl er I F, an i ncreasi ng YTO
ERROR resul ts i n an i ncreasi ng YTO frequency. Thi s i s
accompl i shed wi th error-si gn ampl i er, A14U328B. Thi s ampl i er
can be rmware-control l ed to operate as ei ther an i nverti ng or
non-i nverti ng ampl i er. Di gi tal control l i ne ERRSGN (from
A14U313 pi n 19) control s the pol ari ty of thi s ampl i er. When
ERRSGN i s hi gh (posi ti ve sampl er I F), the ampl i er has a posi ti ve
pol ari ty.
I n fracti onal N spans (LO Spans 2 MHz), the YTO remai ns l ocked
to the sweepi ng fracti onal N PLL. Thus, the sampl er I F must al ways
equal the fracti onal N osci l l ator frequency (condi ti ons for l ock). Si nce
the YTO must al ways sweep up i n frequency, for negati ve sampl er
I Fs, the fracti onal N osci l l ator must sweep from a hi gher frequency
to a l ower frequency. Thi s i s necessary si nce an i ncreasi ng YTO
frequency decreases the sampl er I F for negati ve sampl er I Fs. The
opposi te i s true for posi ti ve sampl er I Fs, so i n these cases, the
fracti onal N osci l l ator sweeps more conventi onal l y from a l ower
frequency to a hi gher frequency.
Tabl e 10-8 on page 539 summari zes the ampl i er pol ari ti es for the
vari ous combi nati ons of sampl er I F pol ari ti es and LO spans.
The YTO mai n coi l l ter i s used to i mprove resi dual FM i n FM and
fracti onal N spans. See functi on bl ock I of A14 frequency control
schemati c i n the Component-Level I nformati on bi nder. Transi stors
Q304 and Q305 swi tch the l ter (capaci tor C36 and resi stor R48)
i nto the ci rcui t. Transi stor Q303 and U333 keep C36 charged duri ng
mai n spans so the frequency does not jump when C36 i s swi tch i n.
Table 10-8 Amplier Polarities
YTOError Sign
Amplier
ERRSGN
(A14U313 pin
19)
Fracti onal N Posi ti ve Posi ti ve TTL Hi gh
Osci l l ator
Swept
Sampl er I F
Negati ve Negati ve TTL Low
Sampl er I F
FM/Mai n YTO Posi ti ve Posi ti ve TTL Hi gh
Coi l s Swept Sampl er I F
Negati ve Negati ve TTL Low
Sampl er I F
540 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
Unlocked YTO PLL
Troubleshooting an Unlocked YTO PLL
1. I f the YTO PLL i s unl ocked, error code 301 shoul d be di spl ayed.
Pl ace the HP 8560E/EC i n zero span. Fi gure 10-7 on page 541
i l l ustrates the si mpl i ed YTO PLL.
2. Move the jumper on A14J23 to connect pi ns 2 and 3 (TESTposi ti on).
Refer to Fi gure 10-3 on page 515 for the l ocati on of A14J23. Error
code 301 shoul d no l onger be di spl ayed. (The YTO PLL feedback
path i s now open and the YTO error vol tage i s forced to zero.)
3. On the HP 8560E/EC, press CAL, MORE 1 OF 2, FREQ
DIAGNOSE, and LO FREQ. The di spl ayed LO FREQ i s the desi red
YTO frequency cal cul ated. Record cal cul ated frequency of the YTO
bel ow:
4. Measure the YTO frequency at the front panel 1ST LO OUTPUT
jack and record bel ow:
YTO Frequency (cal cul ated) = ________________________GHz
YTO Frequency (measured) =________________________ GHz
Chapter 10 541
Synthesizer Section
Unlocked YTO PLL
Figure 10-7 Troubleshooting an Unlocked YTO PLL
5. Cal cul ate the YTO frequency error by subtracti ng the frequency
recorded i n step 3 from the frequency recorded i n step 4. Record the
resul t bel ow:
YTO Frequency Error = YTO Frequency
(MEASURED)
YTO
Frequency
(CALCULATED)
6. On the HP 8560E/EC, press MORE 1 OF 2, FREQ DIAGNOSE, and
FRAC N FREQ. Record the fracti onal N frequency bel ow:
YTO Frequency Error = ________________________MHz
Fracti onal N frequency = _____________________________MHz
542 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
Unlocked YTO PLL
CAUTION Repl acement of the phase/frequency detector chi p A14U204 i s not
recommended. The part i s very del i cate and requi res speci al tool i ng to
i nstal l successful l y.
7. I f the YTO frequency error recorded i n step 5 i s greater than 20
MHz, do the fol l owi ng:
Check the YTO Adjustments usi ng the TAM or the procedure i n
Chapter 2.
Check the YTO DACs usi ng the procedure i n steps 41 through 49
bel ow, or usi ng manual probe troubl eshooti ng wi th the TAM on
A14J17 and A14J18.
Refer to steps 9 through 33 bel ow.
8. I f the YTO Frequency error recorded i n step 5 i s l ess than 20 MHz,
do the fol l owi ng:
Measure the frequency at A14J304. The frequency shoul d be
equal to the frequency recorded i n step 6. I f not, refer to
"Unl ocked Fracti onal N PLL" i n thi s chapter.
Measure the i nput and output l evel s of the A15U100 sampl er. I f
the sampl er appears defecti ve, check the LO dri ve to the sampl er
as descri bed i n "Sampl er and Sampl er I F."
Refer to steps 34 through 51 bel ow.
Check rst LO pretune frequency and amplitude (steps 10-13)
9. The pretuned frequency of the rst LO must be sufci entl y accurate
for the YTO l oop to acqui re l ock. The ampl i tude of the rst LO must
be sufci ent to dri ve the A15U100 sampl er. Perform the YTO
Adjustment procedure, parti cul arl y the YTO mai n coi l adjustments.
(I f avai l abl e, use a synthesi zed mi crowave spectrum anal yzer
i nstead of the mi crowave frequency counter speci ed i n the
adjustment procedure.)
10.I f the YTO mai n coi l cannot be adjusted, proceed to step 33 to
troubl eshoot the mai n coi l coarse and ne DACs and mai n coi l tune
DAC.
11.The 1ST LO OUTPUT on the front panel shoul d measure between
+14.5 and +18.5 dBm i n ampl i tude.
12.I f the 1ST LO OUTPUT ampl i tude i s out of the speci ed range,
perform the rst LO di stri buti on ampl i er adjustment procedure.
Refer to Chapter 2.
Chapter 10 543
Synthesizer Section
Unlocked YTO PLL
Check the fractional N oscillator (steps 14-18)
13.Set the HP 8560E/EC to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Center frequency .................................................. 300 MHz
Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz
14.Moni tor the fracti onal N PLL output at A14J304 (FRAC N TEST)
wi th a synthesi zed spectrum anal yzer such as an HP 8568A/B or HP
8566A/B. Refer to functi on bl ock AI of A14 frequency control
schemati c.
15.The si gnal at A14J304 (FRAC N TEST) shoul d measure
approxi matel y 10 dBm at 66.7 MHz. I f the l oop i s unl ocked, the
sampl er I F frequency can al so be seen on A14J304, about 30 dB l ess
than the fracti onal N si gnal , when unl ocked.
16.I f a probl em exi sts onl y at parti cul ar center frequency and span
setti ngs, determi ne the desi red fracti onal N osci l l ator frequency by
pressi ng CAL, MORE 1 OF 2, FREQ DIAGNOSE, FRAC N
FREQ and setti ng the HP 8560E/EC to SI NGLE tri gger mode.
17.I f the fracti onal N osci l l ator frequency i s not correct, refer to
"Unl ocked Fracti onal N PLL" i n thi s chapter.
Check sampler drive output of A7 LODA (steps 19-22)
18.Set jumper A14J23 to the TEST posi ti on and set the HP 8560E/EC
to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Center frequency .................................................... 2.9 GHz
Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz
19.Di sconnect cabl e W34 from A15U100J1.
20.Use a power meter to measure the A7 LODA sampl er-dri ve output at
the end of W34. The power shoul d measure greater than 9 dBm.
21.Pl ace jumper A14J23 i n the NORMAL posi ti on and reconnect W34
to A15U100J1.
Check sampler IF (steps 23-27)
22.Set the HP 8560E/EC to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Center frequency .................................................. 300 MHz
Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz
23.Pl ace jumper A14J23 i n the TEST posi ti on.
24.Di sconnect W32 from A15J101. Moni tor the sampl er I F output
(A15J101, SAMPLER I F) wi th a synthesi zed spectrum anal yzer
such as an HP 8568A/B or HP 8566A/B.
544 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
Unlocked YTO PLL
25.The sampl er I F shoul d measure between 46 MHz and 86 MHz at 15
dBm to +2 dBm. I f the si gnal frequency or ampl i tude i s i ncorrect,
refer to "Unl ocked Offset PLL" i n thi s chapter.
26.Set jumper A14J23 i n the NORMAL posi ti on. Reconnect W32 to
A15J101.
Check FM loop sense (steps 28-34)
27.Set jumper A14J23 i n the TEST posi ti on.
28.Set the HP 8560E/EC to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Center frequency ..................................................... 300 MHz
Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz
29.Connect an RF si gnal -generator output to A14J501. Set the si gnal
generator to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Frequency .................................................................. 56 MHz
Ampl i tude .................................................................... 0 dBm
30.Moni tor A14J17 pi n 1 wi th a DVM or osci l l oscope. Connect ground to
A14J17 pi n 6.
31.As the si gnal generator frequency i s i ncreased to 76 MHz, the
vol tage at A14J17 pi n 1 shoul d change from approxi matel y +12 V to
12 V.
32.Set the si gnal generator to the fol l owi ng setti ngs and repeat step 30.
Frequency .................................................................. 56 MHz
Ampl i tude ................................................................ 15 dBm
33.I f the vol tage moni tored i n step 30 i s correct wi th a 0 dBm output
but not wi th 15 dBm output, suspect the l i mi ti ng ampl i er functi on
bl ock AE.
34.Pl ace jumper A14J23 i n the NORMAL posi ti on and reconnect W32
to A14J501.
Check YTO FM coil driver and main loop error voltage driver
(steps & 35-40)
35.To troubl eshoot the YTO FM coi l dri ver, refer to step 6 of "Fi rst-LO
Span Probl ems (2.01 MHz to 20 MHz)."
36.Steps 36 through 40 veri fy that the YTO-l oop error vol tage i s
reachi ng the FM coi l . The mai n l oop error vol tage dri ver has a gai n
of ei ther 1.5 or 15; the spectrum anal yzer rmware control s the gai n
duri ng the l ocki ng process. The error vol tage i s read by the ADC on
the A3 i nterface assembl y. A14U326D cal i brates out any offsets from
true ground. A14U326A i nverts the sense of the YTO l oop to l ock the
YTO on l ower sampl er-si debands (YTO frequency < (sampl er
frequency sampl er harmoni c)). The fracti onal N frequency
Chapter 10 545
Synthesizer Section
Unlocked YTO PLL
i ndi cated i n the FREQ DI AGNOSE menu wi l l be negati ve when
l ocki ng to l ower si debands. Refer to functi on bl ocks E, M, and N of
A14 frequency control schemati c i n the Component Level I nformation.
Set the HP 8560E/EC to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Center frequency .................................................. 300 MHz
Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz
37.Remove jumper A14J23 and connect a dc power suppl y to A14J23
pi n 2. Connect ground to A14J23 pi n 3. Set the dc power suppl y to
+7.5 Vdc.
38.Veri fy the nomi nal test-poi nt vol tages l i sted i n Tabl e 10-9 on
page 545.
39.Change the i nput vol tage to 7.5 vol ts and re-veri fy that the vol tages
l i sted i n Tabl e 10-9 on page 545 are the same except for a change i n
pol ari ty.
40.Change the CENTER FREQ to 678.8 MHz wi th the span remai ni ng 0
Hz. Thi s wi l l change the swi tch setti ng of U326A and i nvert the
vol tages l i sted i n Tabl e 10-9 on page 545.
Check main coil coarse and ne DACs (steps 41-44)
41.The mai n coi l coarse and ne DACs correct any i ni ti al pretune
errors i n the YTO mai n coi l . The DACs adjust the FM-coi l current to
zero before any sweep begi ns. Refer to functi on bl ock J of A14
frequency control schemati c.
42.Set the HP 8560E/EC to the setti ngs l i sted bel ow. Thi s sets both
DACs to 128 (the DAC setti ng range i s 0 to 255).
Center frequency .................................................. 300 MHz
Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz
Tri gger ......................................................... SI NGLE, EXT
(wi th no external tri gger connected)
43.Press SAVE, PWR ON STATE and turn off the spectrum anal yzer.
44.Pl ace jumper A14J23 i n the TESTposi ti on and turn on the spectrum
anal yzer.
Check main coil tune DAC (steps 45-49)
Table 10-9 Voltages in FM Coil and Main Loop Drivers
Measurement Points Voltages
A14U405 pi n 6 +2.8 Vdc
A14U322 pi n 2 0 Vdc
A14J17 pi n 4 >+10 Vdc
546 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
Unlocked YTO PLL
45.Veri fy the vol tages l i sted i n Tabl e 10-10 on page 546.
46.Pl ace jumper A14J23 i n the NORMAL posi ti on.
47.Set the HP 8560E/EC to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Center frequency ..................................................... 300 MHz
Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz
48.Pl ace jumper A14J23 i n the TEST posi ti on.
49.Measure the output of the mai n coi l tune DAC (A14J18 pi n 3) wi th a
DVM. Refer to functi on bl ock E of A14 frequency control schemati c.
50.I f the HP 8560E/EC center frequency i s 300 MHz, the vol tage at
A14J18 pi n 3 shoul d measure 3.35 V 0.25 V. The vol tage may al so
be determi ned from the fol l owi ng equati on:
V = (Fi rst LO Frequency 2.95 GHz) 2.654 V/GHz
51.The vol tage at A14U330 pi n 2 shoul d measure 3.4 V 0.2 Vdc. Thi s
represents a current setti ng the YTO to approxi matel y 2.95 GHz.
52.Return jumper A14J23 to the NORMAL posi ti on.
Table 10-10 Main Coil Coarse and Fine DACs Voltages
Measurement Points Voltages
A14J17 pi n 2 5 Vdc
A14J17 pi n 3 5 Vdc
A14J17 pi n 5 +5Vdc
Chapter 10 547
Synthesizer Section
Unlocked Fractional N PLL
Unlocked Fractional N PLL
Operation
The fracti onal N osci l l ator i s used i n the HP 8560E/EC as a reference
for the rst LO phase l ocked l oop. I t provi des the 1 Hz start-frequency
resol uti on for the rst LO, and i s the means by whi ch the rst LO i s
swept i n LO spans of 2 MHz or l ess (fracti onal N spans). The prescal er,
fracti onal N di vi der, and the postscal er are preset at power-on.
The PLL operates to produce an output frequency i n the range of 60
MHz to 96 MHz sel ectabl e i n 1 Hz i ncrements. The output frequency
can be swept (i ncreasi ng or decreasi ng) over a sel ectabl e 100 Hz to 2
MHz range.
To determi ne the fracti onal N frequency for any gi ven center frequency,
press CAL, MORE 1 OF 2, FREQ DIAGNOSE, and FRAC N FREQ. The FRAC
N FREQ frequency di spl ayed i s the frequency that wi l l be measured at
A14J304 wi th the HP 8560E/EC i n zero span.
Conrming an Unlocked Condition
1. Set the HP 8560E/EC to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Center frequency .................................................. 300 MHz
Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz
2. Connect A14J304 FRAC N TEST to the i nput of a synthesi zed
spectrum anal yzer and vi ew the fracti onal N PLL output at 66.7
MHz.
NOTE I f a synthesi zed spectrum anal yzer i s not avai l abl e, connect A14J304 to
the i nput of a 20 dB gai n ampl i er, such as an HP 8447E. Connect the
output of the ampl i er to the i nput of a frequency counter.
3. I f the fracti onal N osci l l ator measures a stabl e 66.7 MHz, the
fracti onal N PLL i s probabl y l ocked.
4. Check the two LEDs vi si bl e through the shi el d on A14. I f ei ther LED
i s l i t, the fracti onal N PLL i s not l ocked.
5. I f ei ther LED on A14 i s l i t, and no error message i s di spl ayed, check
FC MUX A14U305. Refer to functi on bl ock AH of A14 frequency
control schemati c.
548 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
Unlocked Fractional N PLL
6. I f nei ther LED i s l i t, but the output frequency i s wrong by more than
1 MHz, check the postscal er, functi on bl ock AV.
7. Check that the postscal er i s di vi di ng properl y. The frequency at
A14J304 shoul d be equal to the frequency at A14TP4 di vi ded by
ei ther 5, 6, or 7. Refer to Tabl e 10-11 on page 548. To keep the di vi de
number at a constant val ue set the spectrum anal yzer to:
Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz
Tri gger ............................................................ SI NGLE, EXT
(wi th no external tri gger connected)
I f the output frequency i s wrong by l ess than 1 MHz, the phase
l ocked l oop i s not unl ocked but sti l l requi res repai r. Conti nue wi th
the "Fracti onal N Osci l l ator PLL" secti on.
Fractional N PLL
The fracti onal N PLL provi des a synthesi zed frequency i n the range of
60 MHz to 96 MHz. The 800 MHz to 1020 MHz vol tage control l ed
osci l l ator (VCO) i n the l oop i s di vi ded down to l ock wi th the 2.5 MHz
reference. Si mul taneousl y, the VCO i s di vi ded by two and then by
ei ther 5, 6, or 7 to generate the 60 MHz to 96 MHz output.
The prescal er (functi on bl ock AR) suppl i es the cl ock si gnal for the
fracti onal di vi der and i s requi red for the fracti onal di vi der to operate.
At the start of a fracti onal N sweep, the fracti onal di vi der i s set to a
val ue for the start frequency and a sweep rate. I t then sweeps for as
l ong as HSCAN i s hi gh. Use the fol l owi ng procedure to troubl eshoot
unl ocked l oop probl ems or probl ems of l ocki ng to the wrong frequency
(by l ess than 1 MHz):
1. Check the two LEDs on A14 frequency control assembl y. I f ei ther
LED i s l i t, the fracti onal N phase l ocked l oop i s not l ocked.
2. The 10 MHz reference i s requi red for fracti onal N operati on. I t i s
di vi ded by four to 2.5 MHz i n the reference di vi der ci rcui try, bl ock
AN. I t i s used to l ock the di vi ded vol tage control l ed osci l l ator (VCO)
frequency. Check that the 10 MHz reference i s present at A14J301.
The 10 MHz reference i s deri ved from the 600 MHz reference on the
Table 10-11 Postscaler Divide Numbers
Divide
Number
D11 D10 D9 Input Range
(MHz)
(A14J 304)
Output
Range
(MHz)
(A14TP4)
7 0 0 1 840 to 973 60.0 to 69.5
6 0 1 0 834 to 987.96 69.5 to 82.33
5 0 1 1 823.2 to 960 82.33 to 96.0
Chapter 10 549
Synthesizer Section
Unlocked Fractional N PLL
A15 RF assembl y.
3. Change the spectrum anal yzer from the fracti onal N span to 0 Hz.
4. Check the frequency at A14TP1. I t shoul d equal the val ue found by
pressi ng CAL, MORE 1 OF 2, FREQ DIAGNOSE, and RAW OSC FREQ.
5. Check the tune vol tage at the ungrounded end of C135.
6. Look up the expected probl em area i n Tabl e 10-12 on page 549 wi th
the i nformati on from steps 4 and 5. Go to the appropri ate
troubl eshooti ng steps.
Table 10-12 UnlockedFractional N TroubleshootingAreas(08560-60069and
Above)
Measured VCO
Frequency
Relative to
Expected Value
Tune Voltage
Less than
4 V
About
3.3 V
Between
2 V and
+10 V
About
+11 V
Greater
than
+12.5 V
Measured >
expected
VCO cl amp VCO Di vi der or
i ntegrator
Di vi der or
i ntegrator
VCO cl amp
Measured <
expected
VCO cl amp Di vi der or
i ntegrator
Di vi der or
i ntegrator
VCO VCO cl amp
Measured, not
osci l l ati ng
VCO cl amp VCO VCO VCO VCO cl amp
Table 10-13 UnlockedFractional N TroubleshootingAreas(08560-60062and
below)
MeasuredVCO
Frequency
Relative to
Expected
Value
Tune Voltage
Less
than
12.5 V
About
11 V
Between
10 V
About
+11 V
Greater
than+12.5
V
Measured >
expected
VCO
cl amp
VCO Di vi der or
i ntegrator
Di vi der or
i ntegrator
VCO cl amp
Measured <
expected
VCO
cl amp
Di vi der or
i ntegrator
Di vi der or
i ntegrator
VCO VCO cl amp
Measured, not
osci l l ati ng
VCO
cl amp
VCO VCO VCO VCO cl amp
550 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
Unlocked Fractional N PLL
7. VCO cl amp troubl eshooti ng: Q131, Q132 and the associ ated
components shoul d l i mi t the tune vol tage at R240 to about 3.3 V to
+11 V (11 V for 08560-60062 and bel ow). I f the i ntegrator (i ts
output vol tage i s on TP13) tri es to produce a vol tage outsi de thi s
range, excess current i s shunted through CR131 and Q131 for
posi ti ve excursi ons or CR132 and Q132 for negati ve excursi ons. The
base of Q131 shoul d be at about +9.60 V, and the base of Q132
shoul d be at about 2.09 V for proper operati on. I f troubl eshooti ng
an earl i er A14 frequency control assembl y (08560-60062 and bel ow),
the bases of Q131 and Q132 shoul d be at about 9.6 V for proper
operati on.
8. VCOtroubl eshooti ng: Check the dc bi ases i n the VCOfuncti on bl ock.
The bi as vol tages, for some poi nts i n the VCO, are i ndi cated i n
Fi gure 10-8 on page 551 (or Fi gure 10-8a for earl i er i nstruments).
Chapter 10 551
Synthesizer Section
Unlocked Fractional N PLL
Figure 10-8 VCO Bias Voltages for A14 Assemblies 08560-60069 and Above
552 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
Unlocked Fractional N PLL
Figure 10-8a VCO Bias Voltages for A14 boards(08560-60062 and below)
9. Di vi der and i ntegrator troubl eshooti ng: Measure the frequency of
the pul ses at TP6 i n bl ock AO. Look up the expected probl em area i n
Tabl e 10-14 on page 553 and go to the appropri ate troubl eshooti ng
Chapter 10 553
Synthesizer Section
Unlocked Fractional N PLL
steps.
10.Di vi der troubl eshooti ng:
a. Check the frequency at A14TP2. I t shoul d be equal to the
frequency at A14TP1 di vi ded by two.
b. The si gnal at A14TP3 shoul d be greater than 14 dBm.
c. Use an anal og osci l l oscope to vi ew the si gnal at A14TP5. Adjust
the scope tri ggeri ng to vi ew the di vi de-by-16 si gnal . The
frequency at thi s poi nt wi l l be varyi ng as the prescal er changes
i ts di vi de number to ei ther 16, 17, 20, or 21. The prescal er uses 16
as the di vi de number most frequentl y. The frequency di spl ayed on
the osci l l oscope shoul d equal the frequency from TP2 di vi ded by
16.
d. Use an osci l l oscope to vi ew the si gnal at pi n 8 of U112. I ts
average frequency shoul d be gi ven by:
f = f(A14TP5) 80 MHz/RAW OSC FREQ
where: f(A14TP5) i s the frequency measured at TP5, and RAW
OSC FREQ comes from step 4 (A14TP1).
I f the frequency i s i n error, the fracti onal di vi der, bl ock AS, i s not
functi oni ng. Check that FRAC N RUN on U113 pi n 39 i s hi gh.
e. Use an osci l l oscope to veri fy that the si gnal s at N_i n (U112 pi n 8)
and N_out (TP6) are i denti cal except for a sub-mi crosecond del ay.
11.Detector and i ntegrator troubl eshooti ng:
a. Check the phase detector output on TP11 i n bl ock AO. I f F_ref i s
hi gher i n frequency than TP6 (recl ocked VCO/N), then the
average vol tage at TP11 shoul d be posi ti ve by 0.05 V to 10 V. I f
F_ref i s l ower, TP11 shoul d be 0.05 V to 10 V.
b. The pol ari ty of the output of the l oop gai n (bl ock AP, TP12) shoul d
be the same as the pol ari ty of the i nput (TP11).
Table 10-14 Divider and Integrator Troubleshooting
Measured
VCO
Frequency
Relative to
Expected
Value
TP6 Frequency
zero <2.5 MHz 2.5 MHz >2.5 MHz
Measured >
expected
Di vi ders Di vi ders Di vi ders Det or
i ntegrator
Measured <
expected
Both Det or
i ntegrator
Di vi ders Di vi ders
554 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
Unlocked Fractional N PLL
c. The i ntegrator op amp (U106) output (TP13) shoul d try to go very
posi ti ve (about +12 V) i f i ts average i nput (TP12) i s posi ti ve. I f i ts
average i nput i s negati ve, i t shoul d try to go very negati ve (about
4 V). I f i ts average i nput i s zero and i t i s functi oni ng correctl y, i t
may take on any output vol tage between 4 V and +12 V (between
12 V and +12 V for 08560-60062 and bel ow).
Chapter 10 555
Synthesizer Section
Frequency Span Accuracy Problems
Frequency Span Accuracy Problems
The HP 8560E/EC empl oys l ock-and-rol l tuni ng to sweep the rst LO
for spans greater than 2.0 MHz. The rst LO i s l ocked to the start
frequency i mmedi atel y after the previ ous sweep has been compl eted.
The rst LO i s then unl ocked, and, when a tri gger si gnal i s detected,
the rst LO sweeps (rol l s).
When there i s a consi derabl e del ay between the end of one sweep and
the begi nni ng of the next, the actual rst LO start frequency may di ffer
from the l ocked start frequency. Thi s start frequency dri ft wi l l be most
noti ceabl e i n a 2.01 MHz LO span (the narrowest FM coi l span). Thi s
dri ft i s not noti ceabl e i n ei ther free run or l i ne tri gger modes. The
sweep i s generated by di fferent osci l l ators i n the synthesi zer secti on
dependi ng on the desi red rst-LO span (due to harmoni c mi xi ng, thi s i s
not necessari l y the same as the span setti ng of the spectrum anal yzer).
Refer to Tabl e 10-15 on page 555 for a l i sti ng of sweep-si gnal
desti nati ons versus Fi rst LO spans. Sweepi ng the fracti onal N
osci l l ator resul ts i n sweepi ng the YTO FM coi l . There i s a one-to-one
rel ati onshi p between the fracti onal N osci l l ator frequency span and the
rst-LO span. The fracti onal N osci l l ator sweep i s generated di gi tal l y.
The osci l l ator i s al ways synthesi zed, rather than empl oyi ng l ock and
rol l tuni ng.
Determining the First LO Span
The rst-LO span depends on the spectrum anal yzer harmoni c-mi xi ng
number. Use the fol l owi ng steps to determi ne the span of the rst LO:
1. Read the span setti ng di spl ayed on the HP 8560E/EC.
2. Determi ne the harmoni c-mi xi ng number from the i nformati on i n
Tabl e 10-16 on page 556.
Table 10-15 Sweep Signal Destination versus Span
First LO Span Sweep Signal Destination
>20 MHz A11 YTO mai n coi l
2.01 MHz to 20 MHz A11 YTO FM coi l
2 MHz None Fracti onal N osci l l ator
sweeps wi thout a sweep ramp
si gnal .
556 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
Frequency Span Accuracy Problems
3. Use the fol l owi ng equati on to determi ne the rst LO span used.
4. Refer to Tabl e 10-15 on page 555 to determi ne the ci rcui t associ ated
wi th the span.
Conrming Span Problems
1. I f al l rst LO spans or onl y rst LO spans of 2.01 MHz or greater are
affected, perform the YTO Adjustment procedure i n Chapter 2.
On the HP 8560E/EC press CAL, REALIGN LO &IF, and retest al l
spans.
I f the YTO adjustment has sufci ent range and onl y LO spans of
2.01 MHz or greater are faul ty, test YTO l i neari ty by performi ng
step c.
Test the span i n questi on at di fferent center frequenci es i n the
same band. I f the span accuracy changes si gni cantl y (2% or
more), suspect the A11 YTO.
2. I f rst LO spans of 2 MHz or l ess onl y are faul ty, suspect the A14
fracti onal N PLL.
3. I f there are several spans i n the mai n coi l and FM coi l ranges
affected, suspect the A14 span attenuator.
YTO Main Coil Span Problems (LO spans >20 MHz)
For YTO mai n coi l spans, the YTO i s l ocked at the begi nni ng of the
sweep and the sweep ramp i s summed i nto the mai n coi l tune dri ver.
1. Perform the YTO adjustment procedure i n Chapter 2. I f the YTO
adjustments cannot be performed, conti nue wi th step 2.
2. Set the HP 8560E/EC to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Start frequency .......................................................... 10 MHz
Stop frequency ........................................................... 2.9 GHz
Table 10-16 Harmonic Mixing Number versus Center Frequency
Center Frequency Harmonic MixingNumber
1 kHz to 2.9 GHz 1
18 GHz to 325 GHz 6 through 54 dependi ng upon
l ock harmoni c sel ected
First LO Span
Display Span Setting
Current Band Harmonic Mixing Number
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- =
Chapter 10 557
Synthesizer Section
Frequency Span Accuracy Problems
3. Veri fy that a 1.2 V to 4.8 V ramp (approxi matel y) i s present at
A14U331 pi n 2.
I f thi s ramp i s not present, troubl eshoot the mai n/FM sweep swi tch. See
functi on bl ock H of A14 frequency control schemati c (sheet 2 of 5).
4. Measure the output of the mai n coi l tune DAC at A14J18 pi n 3. At
the frequency setti ngs of step 2, thi s shoul d be 2.48 V.
I f the vol tage i s not 2.48 V, troubl eshoot the mai n coi l tune DAC. See
functi on bl ock E of A14 frequency control schemati c (sheet 2 of 5).
YTOFMCoil Span Problems(LOspans2.01MHz to20
MHz)
I n YTO FM coi l spans, the YTO l oop i s l ocked and then opened whi l e
the sweep ramp i s summed i nto the FM coi l . The FM coi l sensi ti vi ty i s
corrected by changi ng the sensi ti vi ty of the FM coi l dri ver.
1. Perform the YTO Adjustment procedure i n Chapter 2. I f the YTO
adjustments cannot be performed, conti nue wi th thi s procedure.
2. Set the HP 8560E/EC to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Center frequency .................................................. 300 MHz
Span ........................................................................ 20 MHz
Sweep ti me ................................................................. 50 ms
3. Check for the presence of a 0 V to 10 V sweep ramp at A14J15 pi n
14 (i nput to the mai n/FM sweep swi tch). Refer to functi on bl ock H of
A14 frequency control schemati c (sheet 2 of 5).
4. Check for the presence of a 0 V to +5 V sweep ramp at A14U405 pi n
6 (YTO FM coi l dri ver). Refer to functi on bl ock M of A14 frequency
control schemati c (sheet 2 of 5).
5. Check the state of the Mai n/FM sweep swi tches as i ndi cated i n
Tabl e 10-17 on page 558.
6. The rest of the procedure troubl eshoots the YTO FM coi l dri ver. Refer to
functi on bl ock M of A14 frequency control schemati c (sheet 2 of 5).
558 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
Frequency Span Accuracy Problems
7. Set the HP 8560E/EC to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Center frequency ..................................................... 300 MHz
Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz
Tri gger ............................................................ SI NGLE, EXT
a. On the HP 8560E/EC, press SAVE, SAVE STATE, STATE 0.
b. Remove jumper A14J23 and connect a dc vol tage source to
A14J23 pi n 2. Connect the vol tage source ground to A14J23 pi n 3.
c. Connect a mi crowave frequency counter or spectrum anal yzer to
the HP 8560E/EC 1ST LO OUTPUT (front panel output).
d. Set the dc vol tage source output for 0 Vdc and note the 1st LO
frequency.
e. Set the dc vol tage source output for +10 Vdc. The rst LO
frequency shoul d momentari l y i ncrease approxi matel y
+15.6 MHz.
f. The vol tage at A14U332 pi n 2 shoul d be approxi matel y 19% of
the vol tage at A14J23 pi n 2.
g. I f the rst LO frequency di d not change i n step e, turn off the HP
8560E/EC LINE swi tch and di sconnect W10 from A14J3.
h. Pl ace a jumper between A14J3 pi ns 9 and 10. Pl ace a 50 , 3 watt
resi stor across A14J3 pi ns 5 and 6 (resi stor, HP part number
0811-1086). Set the LINE swi tch on.
i . On the HP 8560E/EC, press RECALL, STATE, STATE 0.
j. The vol tage at A14U332 pi n 2 shoul d be approxi matel y 19% of
the vol tage at A14J23 pi n 2.
k. I f the vol tage at U332 pi n 2 i s correct wi th A14J3 pi ns 9 and 10
shorted, but was i ncorrect wi th W10 connected, the YTO FM coi l
i s probabl y open; repl ace the A11 YTO.
l . Repl ace jumper A14J23. Remove the jumper and resi stor from
A14J3. Reconnect W10 to A14J3.
Table 10-17 Settings of Sweep Switches
Switch Switch State Switch Control
Line (Pin #)
Control Line
State (TTL)
U318A Cl osed 1 Hi gh
U318B Open 16 Hi gh
U318C Cl osed 9 Low
U318D Open 8 Low
Chapter 10 559
Synthesizer Section
Frequency Span Accuracy Problems
Fractional N Span Problems (LO spans 2 MHz)
I f the fracti onal N spans are i naccurate or nonexi stent, but the
fracti onal N PLL i s l ocked to the correct frequency and other spans are
correct, there may be a probl em wi th the HSCAN si gnal . Check that
HSCAN i s present at the fracti onal di vi der, U113 pi n 41 i n functi on
bl ock AS. HSCAN comes from the A3 i nterface assembl y and goes to the
sweep generator ci rcui try i n functi on bl ock A and to Fracti onal N.
First LO Span Problems (All Spans)
1. Set the HP 8560E/EC to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Center frequency .................................................. 300 MHz
Span .......................................................................... 2 MHz
Resol uti on BW .......................................................... 1 MHz
Vi deo BW .................................................................. 1 MHz
Sweep ti me ................................................................. 50 ms
2. Check that there i s 0 V to +10 V ramp of 50 ms durati on at A14J15
pi n 15.
3. I f a scan ramp i s not present, refer to "Sweep Generator" i n thi s
chapter.
4. I f there i s a 0 to 10 V ramp at A14J15 pi n 14, the faul t i s probabl y
i n the Mai n/FM sweep swi tch. See functi on bl ock H of A14 frequency
control schemati c.
5. Check that there i s a 0 V to +10 V ramp at U325 pi n 1. The spectrum
anal yzer ADC obtai ns i nformati on about the sweep from thi s node.
Check span attenuator (steps 6-13)
1. Conti nue wi th step 7 to check the span attenuator. See functi on
bl ock L of A14 frequency control schemati c (sheet 2 of 5).
2. Wi th the spectrum anal yzer set to the setti ngs i n step 1, moni tor
A14U323 pi n 6 wi th an osci l l oscope. A 0 V to 10 V ramp shoul d be
present.
3. Change the spectrum anal yzer span to 10 MHz and check for a 0 V to
5 V ramp at U323 pi n 6.
4. Change the spectrum anal yzer span to 2.01 MHz and check for a 0 V
to 1 V ramp at U323 pi n 6.
560 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
Frequency Span Accuracy Problems
5. Set the spectrum anal yzer to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Start frequency .......................................................... 10 MHz
Stop frequency ........................................................... 2.9 GHz
Sweep ti me ................................................................... 80 ms
6. Moni tor A14J15 pi n 14 for a 0 V to 7.4 V ramp. Swi tches U317A,
U317B, and U317D shoul d be open and U317C shoul d be cl osed.
7. Change the spectrum anal yzer SPAN to 365 MHz and check for a 0
to 936 mV ramp at A14J15 pi n 14. Swi tches U317A, B, and C
shoul d be open and U317D cl osed.
8. Change the spectrum anal yzer SPAN to 36.5 MHz and check for a 0
to 93.6 mV ramp at A14J15 pi n 14. Swi tches U317B, C, and D
shoul d be open and U317A cl osed.
Chapter 10 561
Synthesizer Section
Phase Noise Problems
Phase Noise Problems
System phase noi se can be a resul t of noi se generated i n many di fferent
areas of the spectrum anal yzer. When the spectrum anal yzer i s
functi oni ng correctl y, the noi se can be observed as a functi on of the
di stance away (the offset) from the carri er frequency. The major
contri butor to system noi se can be characteri zed as comi ng from speci c
ci rcui t areas dependi ng upon the offset frequency.
Some very general recommendati ons can be made for i denti fyi ng whi ch
ci rcui try i s the cause of the noi se at certai n offsets. The
recommendati ons bel ow appl y wi th a center frequency of 1 GHz.
Phase Noise in Locked versus Lock-and-Roll Spans
I nput a si gnal to the spectrum anal yzer. Set the center frequency to the
i nput si gnal frequency, set the span to 2 MHz, and pl ot the di spl ay. Thi s
pl ots the system noi se for a l ocked sweep. Pl ot the di spl ay agai n wi th a
span of 2.01 MHz (l ock and rol l sweep). The crossover poi nt of the noi se
oor of the two pl ots i s typi cal l y at an offset of about 50 kHz, for a
functi oni ng i nstrument.
I f the crossover poi nt i s shi fted out to a hi gher offset frequency, suspect
the YTO l oop ci rcui try.
I f the crossover poi nt i s shi fted i n to a l ower offset frequency, suspect
the offset or fracti onal N l oop ci rcui try.
Table 10-18 Settings of Sweep Switches
Carrier Frequency Offset Major Contributor (when
working correctly)
100 Hz Reference (OCXO or TCXO)
1 kHz 100 MHz (or 600 MHz)
reference PLL
3 kHz Fracti onal N PLL
10 kHz to 150 kHz Offset l ock l oop or YTO l oop
>150 kHz YTO
562 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
Phase Noise Problems
Reference versus Reference PLL Phase Noise
I f the probl em seems to be i n the frequency reference or reference PLL
ci rcui try, measure the noi se wi th i nternal and external references. I f
there i s no di fference, suspect the ci rcui try associ ated wi th the 100
MHz VCXO (or the SAWR A15U701 on earl i er A15 RF assembl i es). I f
there i s a di fference, l ook at 10 MHz di stri buti on, OCXO, or TCXO.
Fractional N versus Offset PLL or YTO PLL Phase
Noise
I f the spectrum anal yzer has excessi ve noi se at >1 kHz offset, measure
the noi se wi th center frequenci es of 100 MHz and 2.5 GHz.
I f the measurements are equal , suspect the fracti onal N ci rcui try and
the YTO l oop ci rcui try on the A14 frequency control assembl y.
I f the measurements di ffer by 2 dB to 5 dB, wi th the 2.5 GHz
measurement at a hi gher noi se l evel , suspect the offset l ock l oop
ci rcui try.
Fractional NPLL PhaseNoise(08560-60062andbelow
only)
Check the noi se on the 5 V regul ators on A14, parti cul arl y the regul ator
i n the reference di vi der ci rcui try A14U121. Refer to functi on bl ock AN
on the A14 frequency control assembl y schemati c.
The noi se l evel of the vol tage regul ator shoul d be <1 mV. The typi cal
noi se l evel i s 40 V RMS between 10 Hz and 100 kHz.
A coaxi al probe wi th very l i ttl e unshi el ded ti p area shoul d be used to
avoi d pi cki ng up radi ated 60 Hz. Check that your measurement i s
val i d by probi ng ground on the ci rcui t and veri fyi ng that the
measured val ue i s wel l under the 1 mV threshol d that i ndi cates a
defecti ve regul ator.
There can al so be phase noi se probl ems i f the l oop gai n i s i ncorrect. See
functi on bl ock AP for l oop gai n troubl eshooti ng i nformati on.
Chapter 10 563
Synthesizer Section
Sampler and Sampler IF
Sampler and Sampler IF
The A15U100 sampl er creates and mi xes harmoni cs of the sampl i ng
osci l l ator wi th the rst LO. The resul ti ng sampl er I F (60 MHz to 96
MHz) i s used to phase-l ock the YTO. The sampl er I F l ters unwanted
products from the output of A15U100 and ampl i es the I F to a l evel
sufci ent to dri ve the YTO l oop. When the I F i s l ess than 87.14 MHz,
PI N di odes swi tch a 120 MHz l ow pass l ter i n the sampl er I F secti on.
1. Set HP 8560E/EC to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Center frequency .................................................. 300 MHz
Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz
2. Di sconnect W32 from A15J101.
3. Connect the i nput of a power spl i tter to A15J101. Connect W32 to
one of the spl i tter outputs. Connect the other spl i tter output to the
i nput of another spectrum anal yzer.
4. I f a 66.7 MHz si gnal , greater than 15 dBm, i s not di spl ayed on the
other spectrum anal yzer, set a mi crowave source to the fol l owi ng
setti ngs:
Frequency ......................................................... 4.2107 GHz
Ampl i tude ............................................................... 5 dBm
5. Connect the mi crowave source to A15U100J1. A 66.7 MHz si gnal at
approxi matel y 0 dBm shoul d be di spl ayed on the other spectrum
anal yzer.
6. Use an acti ve probe/spectrum anal yzer combi nati on to measure the
si gnal at the fol l owi ng test poi nts:
7. I f a correct si gnal i s seen at A15TP201 but the si gnal at A15TP101 i s
wrong, proceed as fol l ows:
Use an osci l l oscope to measure the si gnal s at the fol l owi ng test
poi nts:
A15J 400 pin 1 +0.8 Vdc to +1.6 Vdc (0.5 Vp-p vari ati on)
A15J 400 pin 3 0.8 Vdc to 1.6 Vdc (0.5 Vp-p vari ati on)
A15TP101 66.7 MHz, 8 dBm
A15TP201 296 MHz, +9 dBm
564 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
Sampler and Sampler IF
I f these l evel s are wrong, perform the "Power and Sampl er Match
Adjustments" i n the sampl er osci l l ator adjustment procedure.
Refer to Chapter 2.
I f adjusti ng the sampl er match does not bri ng the si gnal at
A15TP101 wi thi n speci cati on when the si gnal at A15TP201 i s
correct, the A15U100 sampl er i s defecti ve.
8. The sampl er I F si gnal at A15J101 i s 60 MHz to 96 MHz at 10 dBm
to +5 dBm. I f the si gnal at A15TP101 i s correct, but the si gnal at
A15J101 i s wrong, the faul t l i es i n the sampl er I F ci rcui try. Conti nue
wi th the fol l owi ng steps.
9. Set the HP 8560E/EC to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Center frequency ........................................................ 300 MHz
Span .................................................................................... 0 Hz
10.Set a mi crowave source to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Frequency ............................................................ 4.2107 GHz
Ampl i tude .................................................................. 5 dBm
11.Connect the mi crowave source to A15U100J1.
12.Measure the si gnal at U103 pi n 1 usi ng an acti ve probe/spectrum
anal yzer combi nati on.
13.I f a 94.7 MHz si gnal , approxi matel y 14 dBm, i s present, but the
si gnal at A15J101 i s l ow, suspect U103.
14.When U104 pi n 3 i s at TTL l ow, U104 pi n 6 shoul d near 15 Vdc and
PI N di odes CR101, CR102, and CR103 shoul d be reverse-bi ased.
15.Set HP 8560E/EC to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Center frequency .................................................... 89.3 MHz
Span ................................................................................. 0 Hz
16.Check that U104 pi n 3 i s at a TTL hi gh and U104 pi n 6 i s greater
than +7 V. PI N di odes CR101, CR102, and CR103 shoul d al l be
turned on wi th about 7 mA of forward current.
17.Di sconnect the power spl i tter and reconnect W32 to A15J101.
Chapter 10 565
Synthesizer Section
Sweep Generator Circuit (for Spectrum Analyzers with 100 s max. Sweep Time)
Sweep Generator Circuit (for Spectrum
Analyzers with 100 s max. Sweep Time)
The sweep generator operates by feedi ng a constant current from DAC
U307 i nto an i ntegrator, U320B. See functi on bl ock A of A14 frequency
control schemati c. Thi s current i s scal ed by resi stors R20 through R24
and U312B/C/D. See Fi gure 10-9 on page 566. The capaci tors used i n
the i ntegrator depend on the sweepti me range; smal l er-val ue capaci tors
provi de faster sweep ti mes.
The i ntegrati on i s i ni ti ated by HSCAN goi ng hi gh. Thi s opens U312A
whi ch pl aces the output of U320A near 15 Vdc, turni ng CR6 off and
al l owi ng the output of i ntegrator U320B to ramp from 0 V to +10 Vdc.
The anal yzer ADC moni tors the scan ramp at U325A pi n 1 vi a the scan
ramp attenuator U320B pi n 7. When the ramp reaches +10 V (for
si ngl e-band sweeps), HSCAN i s brought l ow and the i ntegrati on ends.
Duri ng normal non-fast-zero spans (sweep ti mes >30 ms), comparators
U319A and B are hi gh. Thi s turns off di odes CR1, CR2 and turns on
transi stors Q1 and Q2. The i ntegrati ng current has a maxi mum val ue
of 236 A.
Duri ng retrace, HSCAN i s l ow, cl osi ng U306B and U312A. See Fi gure
10-10 on page 567. The output of U320A tri es to go hi gh, turni ng CR6
on and sourci ng current through R26. Thi s current di scharges the
capaci tors i n the i ntegrator, forci ng U320B pi n 7 toward 0 Vdc.
Ul ti matel y, the output of U320B wi l l be brought and hel d to 0 V by
U320A suppl yi ng a current equal to that whi ch i s sunk by the current
source. For more i nformati on, refer to "Fi rst-LO Span Probl ems
(Mul ti band Sweeps)" i n thi s chapter.
566 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
Sweep Generator Circuit (for Spectrum Analyzers with 100 s max. Sweep Time)
Figure 10-9 Simplied Sweep Generator
Chapter 10 567
Synthesizer Section
Sweep Generator Circuit (for Spectrum Analyzers with 100 s max. Sweep Time)
Figure 10-10 Simplied Sweep Generator during Retrace
568 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
Sweep Generator Circuit (for Spectrum Analyzers with 2000 s max. Sweep Time)
Sweep Generator Circuit (for Spectrum
Analyzers with 2000 s max. Sweep Time)
The sweep generator ci rcui try generates a ramp from 0 to 10 vol ts
duri ng the sweep ti me. The avai l abl e sweep ti mes range from 50 s to
2,000 seconds. The sweep ti mes are generated i n two di fferent ranges, a
50 s to 30 ms range and a 50 ms to 2,000 second range. The 50 s to 30
ms range i s onl y needed for anal og zero span sweeps.
The sweep generator i s control l ed wi th an 8-bi t l atch and the control
si gnal HSCAN. The l atch, U308, control s the sweep rate. HSCAN
determi nes when to reset the scan ramp and when to l et i t sweep.
Operati on of the 50 ms to 2,000 second range wi l l be descri bed usi ng a
50 ms sweep ti me as the exampl e. For a 50 ms sweep ti me, Q1 shorts
out C16. The D to A converter U307, has zero output current. U334A i s
a buffer wi th zero offset, because there i s no current comi ng out of
U307. The bufferi ng of U334 makes the base-emi tter vol tages on Q3A
and Q3B the same. These two transi stors are matched, so thei r col l ector
currents shoul d be i denti cal when thei r base-emi tter vol tages are
i denti cal . The emi tter current of Q3B i s 200 A, therefore the emi tter
current of Q3A i s 200 A and the sweep ramp i s generated by C14. The
sweep ti me i s gi ven by the formul a:
Where V i s equal to 10 Vol ts.
Wi th a capaci tance of 1F and a current of 200A, the sweep ti me
shoul d be 50 ms. The DAC setti ng i s i ncreased for l onger sweep ti mes.
Thi s i ncreases the current sunk by the DAC output U307 pi n 4, whi ch
i ncreases the emi tter vol tage on Q3A, decreasi ng the base-emi tter
vol tage drop. Q3A acts as an exponenti ator and reduces i ts col l ector
current, creati ng a sl ower sweep ramp.
For the shorter sweep ti mes, 50 s to 30 ms, Q1 i s opened putti ng C16
i n seri es wi th C14. Thi s changes the effecti ve capaci tance from 1 F to
1,000 pF, or a reducti on of 1,000 to 1.
The HSCAN si gnal uses Q2 to reset the ramp. Q2 shorts the i ntegrator
and sets i ts output nomi nal l y to ground.
Check the sweep
generator circuit
1. Press PRESET and set the spectrum anal yzer to the fol l owi ng
setti ngs:
Center frequency ..................................................... 300 MHz
Span ......................................................................... 100 MHz
Sweep ti me ................................................................... 50 ms
2. Usi ng an osci l l oscope, check that the sweep ramp at A14U320 pi n 6
sweeptime capacitance C14 ( )
V
current
---------------- - =
Chapter 10 569
Synthesizer Section
Sweep Generator Circuit (for Spectrum Analyzers with 2000 s max. Sweep Time)
sweeps l i nearl y from 0 to +10 Vol ts i n 50 ms, then resets to 0 Vol ts.
3. Change the sweep ti me to 10 seconds and check that the sweep ramp
(U320 pi n 6) sweeps l i nearl y from 0 to +10 Vol ts i n 10 seconds, then
resets to 0 Vol ts.
4. Change the spectrum anal yzer setti ngs as fol l ows:
Span .............................................................................. 0 Hz
Sweep ti me ................................................................. 10 ms
5. Check that the ramp (U320 pi n 6) sweeps l i nearl y from 0 to +10
Vol ts i n 10 ms, then resets to 0 Vol ts.
6. I f the any of the sweep ti mes were not wi thi n speci cati on or the
sweep ramp appeared to be non-l i near i n the precedi ng steps,
proceed wi th the fol l owi ng steps:
7. Connect the negati ve l ead of a vol tmeter to A14Q3 pi n 8 and connect
the posi ti ve l ead to A14U312 pi n 1 to check the temperature sensor
(U312).
8. The vol tage at pi n 1 shoul d be 10 mV/C ti mes the temperature of
the A14 frequency control assembl y. (For exampl e, i f the ambi ent
temperature i s approxi matel y 20C, and the A14 frequency control
assembl y i s 10C warmer, the actual temperature of the A14
assembl y i s 30C and U312 pi n 1 shoul d measure 300 mV.)
9. To check the temperature-dependent offset vol tage generator,
connect the posi ti ve l ead of the vol tmeter A14Q3 pi n 6. The
vol tmeter shoul d read 600 mV 150 mV.
10.To check the DAC buffer, A14U334A, connect the posi ti ve l ead of the
vol tmeter to A14U334 pi n 2. The vol tmeter shoul d read the same
vol tage measured at A14Q3 pi n 6, wi thi n 2 mV. (The same vol tage
shoul d be present at U334 pi n 3.)
11.To check the buffered DAC, press PRESET and set the spectrum
anal yzer as fol l ows:
Center frequency .................................................. 300 MHz
Span ...................................................................... 100 MHz
Sweep ti me ................................................................. 50 ms
12.Connect the posi ti ve l ead of the vol tmeter to A14U334 pi n 1. The
vol tmeter shoul d read the same vol tage measured at U334 pi n 2,
wi thi n 2 mV.
13.Change the spectrum anal yzer sweep ti me to 2000 seconds. The
vol tage at A14U334 pi n 1 shoul d i ncrease by 275 mV 20 mV
(compared to the vol tage measured i n step 12).
570 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
Sweep Generator Circuit (for Spectrum Analyzers with 2000 s max. Sweep Time)
Figure 10-11 Simplied Synthesizer Section
Chapter 10 571
Synthesizer Section
Sweep Generator Circuit (for Spectrum Analyzers with 2000 s max. Sweep Time)
Figure 10-12 Simplied A14 Assembly Block Diagram
572 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
Sweep Generator Circuit (for Spectrum Analyzers with 2000 s max. Sweep Time)
Figure 10-13 Simplied A15 Assembly Block Diagram (100 MHz PLL)
Chapter 10 573
Synthesizer Section
Sweep Generator Circuit (for Spectrum Analyzers with 2000 s max. Sweep Time)
Figure 10-13a Simplied A15 Assembly Block Diagram (600 MHz PLL)
574 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
A21 OCXO
A21 OCXO
The spectrum anal yzer uses an oven-control l ed crystal osci l l ator
(OCXO). I t i s del eted i n Opti on 103 and repl aced by a
temperature-compensated crystal osci l l ator (TCXO), l ocated on the A15
RF assembl y. Connectors J305 and J306 on the A15 RF assembl y are
l ocated where the TCXO woul d be i nstal l ed i n an Opti on 103. The oven
i n the OCXO i s powered onl y when the spectrum anal yzer i s powered
on; there i s no standby mode of operati on. The OCXO osci l l ator
operates onl y when the i nternal frequency reference i s sel ected. Control
l i ne HEXT (Hi gh = EXTernal frequency reference) i s i nverted by
A15U303B to generate LEXT. (Refer to the A15 RF assembl y schemati c
di agram, bl ock M, sheet 2 of 4.) LEXTi s sent to the OCXO vi a A15J306
pi n 4. When LEXT i s l ow, the osci l l ator i n the OCXO wi l l be turned off.
Repl acement OCXOs are factory adjusted after a compl ete warmup and
after the speci ed agi ng rate has been achi eved. Thus, readjustment
shoul d typi cal l y not be necessary after OCXO repl acement, and i s
general l y not recommended.
I f adjustment i s necessary, the spectrum anal yzer must be on
conti nuousl y for a mi ni mum of 24 hours i mmedi atel y pri or to osci l l ator
adjustment to al l ow both the temperature and frequency of the
osci l l ator to stabi l i ze. Fai l ure to al l ow sufci ent stabi l i zati on ti me coul d
resul t i n osci l l ator mi sadjustment.
Check operati on of the A21 OCXO as fol l ows:
1. Di sconnect W49 (Coax 82) from A15J305. Connect the output of W49
to the i nput of another spectrum anal yzer.
2. Check that the fundamental frequency i s 10 MHz and that the
power l evel i s 0 dBm 3 dB. Al so check that the harmoni cs are at
l east 25 dBc. Excessi ve harmoni cs can generate spuri ous responses
on the fracti onal N osci l l ator on the A14 frequency control assembl y.
3. I f the OCXO has no output, check A15J306 pi n 1 for +15 Vdc. Check
A15J306 pi n 4 for a TTL-hi gh l evel .
4. I f A15J306 pi n 4 i s at a TTL-l ow l evel , press AUX CTRL and REAR
PANEL. Press 10 MHz EXT INT unti l I NTi s underl i ned. A15J306 pi n 4
shoul d read a TTL-hi gh l evel . Press 10 MHz EXT INT unti l EXT i s
underl i ned. A15J306 pi n 4 shoul d read a TTL-l ow l evel .
576 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
A21 OCXO
578 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
A21 OCXO
580 Chapter 10
Synthesizer Section
A21 OCXO
581
11 RF Section
582 Chapter 11
RF Section
Introduction
Introduction
The RF secti on converts the i nput si gnal to a 10.7 MHz I F
(I ntermedi ate Frequency). See Fi gure 11-5 on page 615 for a detai l ed
bl ock di agram.
NOTE The bl ock di agrams for the A14 and A15 assembl i es are l ocated i n
Chapter 10, "Synthesi zer Secti on."
Troubl eshooti ng Usi ng the TAM........................................ page 584
Low Band Probl ems (30 Hz to 2.9 GHz) ............................ page 587
Low Band Probl ems ............................................................ page 588
A7 LODA (LO Di stri buti on Ampl i er)............................... page 589
A8 Low Band Mi xer ............................................................ page 591
A9 I nput Attenuator ........................................................... page 592
A13 Second Converter ......................................................... page 594
A14 Frequency Control Assembl y ...................................... page 596
A7 LODA Dri ve ................................................................. page 596
A15 RF Assembl y ................................................................ page 598
Conrmi ng a Faul ty Thi rd Converter .............................. page 598
Conrmi ng a Thi rd Converter Output............................. page 598
Thi rd Converter ................................................................. page 599
Fl atness Compensati on Control ....................................... page 600
Control Latches ................................................................ page 601
SI G I D Osci l l ator (Opti on 008)......................................... page 602
10 MHz Reference ............................................................. page 603
A10 Tracki ng Generator (Opti on 002) ............................... page 607
Bl ock Di agram Descri pti on............................................... page 607
Output Goes Unl evel ed (ERR 900 or ERR 901) .............. page 608
Excessi ve Resi dual FM..................................................... page 610
Fl atness Out-of-Tol erance ................................................ page 610
Verni er Accuracy Out-of-Tol erance .................................. page 611
Harmoni c/Spuri ous Outputs Too Hi gh ............................ page 612
Power Sweep Not Functi oni ng Properl y .......................... page 613
No Power Output............................................................... page 613
CAUTION Al l of the RF assembl i es are extremel y sensi ti ve to El ectrostati c
Di scharge (ESD). For further i nformati on regardi ng el ectrostati c
cauti ons, refer to "El ectrostati c Di scharge" i n Chapter 1.
Chapter 11 583
RF Section
Introduction
CAUTION Use of an acti ve probe, such as an HP 85024A, wi th another spectrum
anal yzer i s recommended for troubl eshooti ng the RF ci rcui try. I f an HP
1120A Acti ve Probe i s bei ng used wi th a spectrum anal yzer, such as the
HP 8566A/B or the HP 8562A/B, havi ng dc coupl ed i nputs, ei ther set
the acti ve probe for an ac coupl ed output or use a dc bl ocki ng capaci tor
(HP 11240B) between the acti ve probe and the spectrum anal yzer
i nput. Fai l ure to do thi s can resul t i n damage to the spectrum anal yzer
or to the probe.
584 Chapter 11
RF Section
Troubleshooting Using the TAM
Troubleshooting Using the TAM
When usi ng Automati c Faul t I sol ati on, the TAM i ndi cates suspected
ci rcui ts that need to be manual l y checked. Use Tabl e 11-1 on page 584
to l ocate the manual procedure.
Tabl e 11-2 on page 585 l i sts assembl y test connectors associ ated wi th
each Manual Probe Troubl eshooti ng test. Fi gure 11-1 on page 584
i l l ustrates the l ocati on of A15 test connectors.
Figure 11-1 A14 and A15 Test Connectors
Table 11-1 Automatic Fault Isolation References
Suspected Circuit Indicated by
Automatic Fault Isolation
Manual Procedure to Perform
Check 2nd I F Ampl i er Thi rd Converter
Check 2nd I F Di stri buti on Thi rd Converter
Check 10.7 MHz I F Out of Doubl e
Bal anced Mi xer
Thi rd Converter
Check 300 MHz CAL OUTPUT Cal i brator Ampl i tude Adjustment i n
Chapter 2
Chapter 11 585
RF Section
Troubleshooting Using the TAM
Check A7 1st LO Di stri buti on Ampl i er A7 LODA (LO Di stri buti on Ampl i er)
Check A8 Low Band Mi xer A8 Low Band Mi xer
Check A9 I nput Attenuator A9 I nput Attenuator
Check A13 Second Converter A13 Second Converter
Check A13J2 I NT 2nd I F A13 Second Converter (steps 1 to 6)
Check A15 Control Latches Control Latches
Check A15J601 10.7 MHz Thi rd Converter Output
Check External 10 MHz Reference
Operati on
10 MHz Reference (steps 5 to 11)
Check Gai n of Fl atness Compensati on
Ampl i er
Thi rd Converter
Check I NT 10 MHz Reference Operati on 10 MHz Reference (steps 1 to 4)
Check LO Feedthrough Low Band Probl ems (1 kHz to 2.9
GHz) (steps 1 to 3)
Check LO Power Low Band Probl ems (steps 4 to 9)
Check PI N Swi tch PI N Swi tch
Check PI N Swi tches i n SI G I D Osci l l ator SI G I D Osci l l ator
Check Second Converter Control A13 Second Converter
Check SI G I D Osci l l ator Si gnal I D Osci l l ator Adjustment i n
Chapter 2
Check SI G I D Osci l l ator Operati on SI G I D Osci l l ator
Check Thi rd Converter Low Band Probl ems (step 10)
Table 11-2 TAM Tests versus Test Connectors
Connector Manual Probe Troubleshooting Test Measured
Signal
Lines
A14J17 Mai n Coi l Course DAC MS3
A14J18 LODA Dri ve MS5, MS6,
MS7, MS8
A14J19 Second Conv PI N Swi tch MS8
Second Conv Mi xer Bi as MS1
Table 11-1 Automatic Fault Isolation References
Suspected Circuit Indicated by
Automatic Fault Isolation
Manual Procedure to Perform
586 Chapter 11
RF Section
Troubleshooting Using the TAM
A14J19 Second Conv Drai n Bi as MS3
Second Conv Doubl er Bi as MS4
Second Conv Dri ver Bi as MS5
Fi rst Mi xer Dri ve Swi tch MS7
Fi rst Mi xer Dri ve DAC MS6
A14J302 Revi si on MS7
A15J400 I F AMP/Li mi ter Bi as MS6
A15J502 Thi rd LO Tune Vol tage MS3
3rd LO Dri ver Amp MS1, MS8
A15J602 SI G I D Col l ector Bi as MS7
RF Gai n Control Test MS1, MS3
A15J901 Revi si on MS3
External Mi xer Swi tch MS1, MS8
Si gnal I D Swi tch MS5, MS6
External Mi xer Bi as MS7
RF Gai n Test MS2
Table 11-2 TAM Tests versus Test Connectors
Chapter 11 587
RF Section
Low Band Problems (30 Hz to 2.9 GHz)
Low Band Problems (30 Hz to 2.9 GHz)
1. Di sconnect al l i nputs from the front panel I NPUT 50 connector.
2. Set the HP 8560E/EC to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Center frequency ...........................................................0 Hz
Span ........................................................................... 1 MHz
I nput attenuati on ..........................................................0 dB
3. The LO feedthrough ampl i tude observed on the di spl ay shoul d be
between 6 and 30 dBm.
NOTE The marker wi l l not peak search on the LO feedthrough when i n a
non-zero span. To measure the LO feedthrough ampl i tude wi th the
markers, set the span to 0 Hz and center frequency to 0 Hz. Press MKR
ON.
4. I f the LOfeedthrough ampl i tude i s wi thi n l i mi ts, but si gnal s are l ow,
the RF path fol l owi ng the A8 Low Band Mi xer i s operati ng properl y.
5. I f the LO feedthrough ampl i tude i s hi gher than 5 dBm (si gnal wi l l
be "cl i pped" at top of screen) and si gnal s are l ow i n ampl i tude,
suspect a defecti ve A8 Low Band Mi xer.
6. Check A13 Second Converter mi xer di ode bi as at A14J19 pi n 1. The
bi as vol tage shoul d be between 150 and 900 moved.
7. Troubl eshoot the si gnal path. Refer to the power l evel s l i sted on
Fi gure 11-3 on page 604, RF Secti on Troubl eshooti ng Bl ock
Di agram.
588 Chapter 11
RF Section
Low Band Problems
Low Band Problems
1. On the HP 8560E/EC, press PRESET and REALIGN LO &IF. I f any
error messages are di spl ayed, refer to "Error Messages" i n Chapter
6.
2. Perform "External Mi xer Ampl i tude Adjustment" i n Chapter 2. I f
thi s adjustment cannot be compl eted, perform the steps l ocated i n
"Thi rd Converter" i n thi s chapter.
3. Perform the "Fi rst LO Output Ampl i tude" performance test. (Refer
to the HP 8560E-SeriesSpectrumAnalyzer Calibration Guideor use
the TAM functi onal test.)
4. I f the performance test fai l s, perform the "Fi rst LO Di stri buti on
Ampl i er Adjustment" i n Chapter 2. I f the adjustment fai l s, set the
HP 8560E/EC to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
5. Pl ace the jumper on A14J23 i n the TESTposi ti on. Remove W38 from
the i nput of the A7 LODA.
6. Use a power meter or another spectrum anal yzer to measure the
output of A11 YTO. The power shoul d be between +2 dBm and +13
dBm.
7. Reconnect W38 to the LODA. Pl ace the jumper on A14J23 i n the
NORM posi ti on.
8. I f ERR 334 (unl evel ed output) i s present and the A11 YTO power
output i s correct, the A7 LODA dri ve ci rcui t may be defecti ve. Refer
to "A7 LODA (LO Di stri buti on Ampl i er)" i n thi s chapter.
9. Troubl eshoot the si gnal path. Refer to the power l evel s l i sted on
Fi gure 11-5 on page 615, RF Secti on Troubl eshooti ng Bl ock
Di agram.
10.Check Thi rd Converter as fol l ows:
a. On the HP 8560E/EC, press PRESET and set the control s as
fol l ows:
Center frequency ................................................. 300 MHz
Span .............................................................................0 Hz
b. I nject a 28 dBm, 310.7 MHz si gnal i nto A15J801.
c. I f a at l i ne i s di spl ayed wi thi n 2 dB of the reference l evel , but the
"External Mi xer Ampl i tude Adjustment" fai l s, troubl eshoot the
A15 RF assembl y.
Chapter 11 589
RF Section
A7 LODA (LO Distribution Amplier)
A7 LODA (LO Distribution Amplier)
NOTE YTO unl ock errors may occur i f the power del i vered to the A15A2
Sampl er i s l ess than 9.5 dBm. Frequency response wi l l be degraded i n
both i nternal and external mi xi ng modes i f the output power i s l ow or
unl evel ed.
Error 334 may be di spl ayed i f the LO OUTPUTconnector on the front
panel i s not properl y termi nated i nto a 50 termi nati on.
CAUTION Connecti ng or di sconnecti ng the A7 LODA bi as wi th the LINE swi tch on
wi l l destroy the A7 LODA. Al ways press LINE to turn spectrum anal yzer
off before removi ng or rei nstal l i ng W12 to ei ther the A7 LODA or
A14J10.
1. Press LINE to turn spectrum anal yzer off. Di sconnect W12 from
A14J10.
2. Connect a jumper between A14J10 pi n 5 and A14J19 pi n 6. Connect
a jumper between A14J18 pi n 13 and A14J18 pi n 1.
3. Connect the posi ti ve l ead of a DVM to A14J18 pi n 14, and the
negati ve l ead to A14J18 pi n 6.
4. Press LINE to turn spectrum anal yzer on.
5. The vol tage measured on the DVM shoul d be more negati ve than
9.4 Vdc.
6. Move the jumper from A14J18 pi n 1 to A14J18 pi n 2. The vol tage
measured on the DVM shoul d be more posi ti ve than +12.3 Vdc.
7. I f the vol tages do not meet the l i mi ts l i sted i n steps 5 and 6,
troubl eshoot the A14 frequency control assembl y.
8. Connect the posi ti ve DVM l ead to A14J10 pi n 1.
9. The measured vol tage shoul d be approxi matel y +5 Vdc. I f the
vol tage i s not +5 Vdc, troubl eshoot the A14 frequency control
assembl y.
10.Connect the posi ti ve l ead of a DVM to A14J18 pi n 15. The vol tage
shoul d measure wi thi n 10 mV of the GATE BI AS vol tage l i sted on
A7 LODA l abel .
11.I f thi s vol tage i s not wi thi n the correct range, refer to "LO
Di stri buti on Ampl i er Adjustment" i n Chapter 2, "Adjustment
Procedures."
590 Chapter 11
RF Section
A7 LODA (LO Distribution Amplier)
12.I f the vol tage vari es between 0 Vdc and 2 Vdc, adjust the GATE
BI AS for a DVM readi ng wi thi n 10 mV of the GATE BI AS vol tage
l i sted on A7 LODA l abel . I f the vol tage does not vary between 0 Vdc
and 2 Vdc, troubl eshoot the A14 frequency control assembl y.
13.Di sconnect the jumper from A14J19 to A14J10. Press LINE to turn
spectrum anal yzer off. Reconnect W12 to A14J10. Press LINE to turn
spectrum anal yzer on.
14.I f the DVM readi ng changes si gni cantl y, the A7 LODA i s probabl y
defecti ve.
Chapter 11 591
RF Section
A8 Low Band Mixer
A8 Low Band Mixer
1. Connect the HP 8560E/EC CAL OUTPUT to I NPUT 50 .
2. Set the HP 8560E/EC as fol l ows:
Center frequency ................................................... 300 MHz
Span ...............................................................................0 Hz
I nput attenuati on ........................................................10 dB
3. I f the spectrum anal yzer seri al number prex i s 3632A or greater,
make sure A8 i s recei vi ng the 5V and 4V suppl y vol tages from
frequency control board assembl y A14 vi a cabl e assembl y W12.
4. Usi ng another spectrum anal yzer, check for approxi matel y 21 dBm
(300 MHz) at the i nput of A8. (Thi s l evel can easi l y be measured at
the output of FL1 by di sconnecti ng W45 from FL1.)
5. I f the l evel at the i nput of A8 i s l ess than 25 dBm, suspect FL1
l ow-pass l ter, or A9 i nput attenuator. Refer to power l evel s shown
on Fi gure 11-5, RF Secti on Troubl eshooti ng Bl ock Di agram.
6. Check for approxi matel y 30 dBm (3.9107 GHz) at the output of A8.
(Thi s l evel can easi l y be measured at the output of FL2 by
di sconnecti ng W57 from FL2.)
7. I f the l evel at the output of A8 i s l ess than 35 dBm, suspect A8 l ow
band mi xer or FL2 l ow-pass l ter.
592 Chapter 11
RF Section
A9 Input Attenuator
A9 Input Attenuator
1. Perform the "I nput Attenuator Accuracy" test i n the HP 8560
E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Calibration Guide.
2. I f there i s a step-to-step error of approxi matel y 10 dB or more,
conti nue wi th step 3.
3. On the HP 8560E/EC, press AMPLITUDE, and ATTEN AUTO MAN unti l
MAN i s underl i ned.
4. Step the i nput attenuator from 0 dB to 70 dB. A "cl i ck" shoul d be
heard at each step. The absence of a cl i ck i ndi cates faul ty attenuator
dri ve ci rcui try.
5. Moni tor the pi ns of A14U420 wi th a l ogi c probe or DVM whi l e
setti ng the i nput attenuator to the val ues l i sted i n Tabl e 11-3 on
page 593.
NOTE The l ogi c l evel s l i sted i n Tabl e 11-3 on page 593 show the defaul t AC
usage (Pi n 5 l ow, Pi n 6 hi gh). DC usage (Pi n 5 hi gh, Pi n 6 l ow) i s not
shown.
6. I f one or more l ogi c l evel s l i sted i n Tabl e 11-3 on page 593 i s
i ncorrect, di sconnect W11 from A14J6 and repeat step 4 checki ng
onl y pi ns 3, 5, 11, and 13 of A14U420. Pi ns 4, 6, 10, and 12 shoul d al l
read l ow TTL l evel s.
7. I f one or more l ogi c l evel s l i sted i n Tabl e 11-3 on page 593 i s
i ncorrect wi th W11 di sconnected, troubl eshoot the A14 frequency
control assembl y.
8. I f al l l ogi c l evel s are correct, the A9 i nput attenuator i s probabl y
defecti ve.
Chapter 11 593
RF Section
A9 Input Attenuator
Table 11-3 Attenuator Pin Values
A14U420 Pin Number
ATTEN
Setting
3 4 5 6 10 11 12 13
(dB) 20 dB 20 dB DC AC 40dB 40dB 10 dB 10 dB
0 hi gh l ow l ow hi gh l ow hi gh l ow hi gh
10 hi gh l ow l ow hi gh l ow hi gh hi gh l ow
20 l ow hi gh l ow hi gh l ow hi gh l ow hi gh
30 l ow hi gh l ow hi gh l ow hi gh hi gh l ow
40 hi gh l ow l ow hi gh hi gh l ow l ow hi gh
50 hi gh l ow l ow hi gh hi gh l ow hi gh l ow
60 l ow hi gh l ow hi gh hi gh l ow l ow hi gh
70 l ow hi gh l ow hi gh hi gh l ow hi gh l ow
594 Chapter 11
RF Section
A13 Second Converter
A13 Second Converter
CAUTION The A13 assembl y i s extremel y sensi ti ve to El ectrostati c Di scharge
(ESD). For further i nformati on regardi ng el ectrostati c cauti ons, refer to
"El ectrostati c Di scharge I nformati on" i n Chapter 1.
1. Connect the HP 8560E/EC CAL OUTPUT to the I NPUT 50
connector.
2. Set the HP 8560E/EC to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Center frequency ...................................................... 300 MHz
Span ..................................................................................0 Hz
I nput attenuati on ...........................................................10 dB
3. Di sconnect W35 (coax 92) from A13J2.
4. Connect a test cabl e from A13J2 to the i nput of another spectrum
anal yzer.
5. Tune the other spectrum anal yzer to 310.7 MHz. The si gnal
di spl ayed on the other spectrum anal yzer shoul d be approxi matel y
38 dBm.
6. Remove the test cabl e from A13J2 and reconnect W35 to A13J2.
7. Di sconnect W33 (coax81) from A13J4 and connect W33 through a
test cabl e to the i nput of another spectrum anal yzer.
8. Tune the other spectrum anal yzer to a center frequency of 600 MHz.
9. I f a 600 MHz si gnal i s not present, or i ts ampl i tude i s l ess than 5
dBm, the faul t i s probabl y on the A15 RF assembl y.
10.Reconnect W33 to A13J4.
11.Connect the posi ti ve l ead of a DVM to A14J19 pi n 15, and the
negati ve l ead to A14J19 pi n 6.
12.I f the DVM does not measure between +14.0 Vdc and +15.0 Vdc,
perform the fol l owi ng:
a. Press LINE to turn spectrum anal yzer off and di sconnect W13
from A14J12.
b. Press LINE to turn spectrum anal yzer on and set the spectrum
anal yzer to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Center frequency ................................................. 300 MHz
Span ....................................................................... 10 MHz
Chapter 11 595
RF Section
A13 Second Converter
c. The vol tage shoul d measure +15 Vdc 0.2 V. I f the vol tage
measures outsi de thi s l i mi t, the A14 frequency control assembl y
i s probabl y defecti ve.
d. Press LINE to turn spectrum anal yzer off, reconnect W13 to
A14J12, and press LINE to turn spectrum anal yzer on. Set the HP
8560E/EC to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Center frequency .............................................. 300 MHz
Span ..........................................................................0 Hz
13.Move the posi ti ve l ead of the DVM to A14J19 pi n 1. The vol tage
shoul d measure between 150 m Vdc and 800 mVdc. I f the vol tage
measures outsi de thi s l i mi t, the A13 Second Converter i s probabl y
defecti ve.
596 Chapter 11
RF Section
A14 Frequency Control Assembly
A14 Frequency Control Assembly
NOTE The bl ock di agrams for the A14 and A15 assembl i es are l ocated i n
Chapter 10, "Synthesi zer Secti on."
A7 LODA Drive
Refer to functi on bl ock Z on the A14 Frequency Control schemati c i n
the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level I nformation.
1. Set the HP 8560E/EC to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Center frequency ...................................................... 300 MHz
Span .............................................................................. 2 MHz
2. On the HP 8560E/EC, press SGL SWP and measure the si gnal power
at the output of A7 (see i tem (1) of Fi gure 11-2 on page 597).
3. I f the output power i s l ow, the A14U429B output vol tage at A14J18
pi n 14 (i tem (2) of Fi gure 11-2 on page 597) shoul d be greater than 0
V. I f the output power i s hi gh, the vol tage shoul d be more negati ve
than 10 V. I f the vol tages do not measure as i ndi cated, check that
the vol tages at A14J18 pi ns 5 and 13, i tem (4), are consi stent wi th
the output of the operati onal ampl i er.
NOTE I f a TAM i s avai l abl e, use Manual Probe Troubl eshooti ng to make
measurements on A14J18 pi ns 5, 13, and 14. These vol tages are
referred to as AMP CNTL, LO SENSE, and PI N ATTEN respecti vel y.
4. I f the vol tages measure as i ndi cated i n step 3, measure the A11 YTO
output. (See i tem (3) of Fi gure 11-2 on page 597.)
5. I f al l measurements are wi thi n l i mi ts, refer to "A7 LODA (LO
Di stri buti on Ampl i er)" i n thi s chapter.
Chapter 11 597
RF Section
A14 Frequency Control Assembly
Figure 11-2 A7 LODA Drive
598 Chapter 11
RF Section
A15 RF Assembly
A15 RF Assembly
NOTE The bl ock di agrams for the A14 and A15 assembl i es are l ocated i n
Chapter 10, "Synthesi zer Secti on."
Conrming a Faulty Third Converter
1. Perform the "I F I nput Ampl i tude Accuracy" performance test i n the
HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Calibration Guide i f Opti on
002 i s not present. Thi s exerci ses most of the thi rd converter.
2. I f the performance test fai l s or Opti on 002 i s present, perform the
"External Mi xer Ampl i tude Adjustment" i n Chapter 2.
3. I f adjustment cannot be made, di sconnect W35 (coax 92) from
A15J801.
4. On the HP 8560E/EC, press PRESET and set the control s to the
fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Center frequency ...................................................... 300 MHz
Span ..................................................................................0 Hz
5. Connect a si gnal generator to A15J801.
6. Set the si gnal generator to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Frequency ....................................................... 310.7 MHz CW
Power ................................................................................. 28 dBm
7. I f a at l i ne i s di spl ayed wi thi n 2 dB of the reference l evel and the
performance test passed, troubl eshoot mi croci rcui ts A7, A8, A9, and
A13.
8. I f a at l i ne i s di spl ayed wi thi n 2 dB of the reference l evel and the
performance test fai l ed, troubl eshoot the A15 RF Assembl y.
9. Di sconnect the si gnal generator and reconnect W35 (coax 92) to
A15J801.
Conrming a Third Converter Output
1. Connect the HP 8560E/EC CAL OUTPUT to the I NPUT 50
connector.
2. Set the HP 8560E/EC to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Center frequency ...................................................... 300 MHz
Span ..................................................................................0 Hz
I nput attenuati on ...........................................................10 dB
3. Press SGL SWP, CAL, IF ADJ OFF.
Chapter 11 599
RF Section
A15 RF Assembly
4. Di sconnect W29 (coax 7) from A15J601.
5. Connect a test cabl e from A15J601 to the i nput of another spectrum
anal yzer.
6. Tune the other spectrum anal yzer to 10.7 MHz. The si gnal di spl ayed
on the other spectrum anal yzer shoul d be approxi matel y 15 dBm.
7. Remove the test cabl e from A15J601 and reconnect W29 to A15J601.
Third Converter
Refer to functi on bl ocks A, B, C, D, and E on A15 RF Secti on schemati c
i n the HP 8560 E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level I nformation.
The 3rd converter consi sts of the 2nd I F di stri buti on, 2nd I F ampl i er,
doubl e bal anced mi xer, 10.7 MHz bandpass l ter, and atness
compensati on ampl i er. The 2nd I F di stri buti on swi tches between two
possi bl e 2nd I F i nputs: the i nternal l y generated 2nd I F, or the external
mi xi ng I F I NPUT(non-Opti on 002 spectrum anal yzers onl y). A vari abl e
dc bi as can be appl i ed to the I F I NPUT for external mi xers whi ch
requi re such bi as. The sel ected i nput i s fed to the 2nd I F Ampl i er. Thi s
ampl i er consi sts of four stages of gai n and two stages of SAW l ters
for i mage frequency rejecti on.
The atness compensati on ampl i er consi sts of two xed-gai n stages
and two stages of vari abl e gai n. Thi s provi des an overal l adjustabl e
gai n of 4 dB to 30 dB. Thi s gai n i s adjusted duri ng an spectrum
anal yzer sweep to compensate for front-end conversi on l oss versus
frequency. Perform the fol l owi ng steps to test the ampl i er gai n:
The 10.7 MHz bandpass l ter provi des a broadband termi nati on to the
mi xer whi l e l teri ng out unwanted mi xer products.
1. On the HP 8560E/EC, press AUX CTRL, then INTERNAL
MIXER.
2. I n the 2nd I F di stri buti on (functi on bl ock A), di ode CR802 shoul d be
forward bi ased and di ode CR801 shoul d be reverse bi ased.
3. Di sconnect W35 (coax 92) and connect a si gnal source to A15J801.
Set the source to the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Frequency ........................................................... 310.7 MHz
Ampl i tude ...................................................................... 30 dBm
4. Use an acti ve probe wi th another spectrum anal yzer to measure the
si gnal at A15TP601 (functi on bl ock C). The si gnal shoul d measure
17 dBm 4 dB conrmi ng the operati on of the 2nd I F Ampl i er.
5. Use an acti ve probe wi th another spectrum anal yzer to measure the
300 MHz i nto the LO port of the thi rd mi xer. The si gnal shoul d
measure at l east +20 dBm.
6. Measure the power of the mi xer 10.7 MHz I F output. The si gnal
600 Chapter 11
RF Section
A15 RF Assembly
l evel shoul d be approxi matel y 22 dBm.
7. Move the A2 control l er assembl y WR PROT/WR ENA jumper to the
WR ENA posi ti on.
8. Whi l e measuri ng the si gnal at the mi xer 10.7 MHz I F output, adjust
the si gnal source unti l the l evel of the 10.7 MHz I F i s 40 dBm.
9. On the HP 8560E/EC, press SGL SWP, CAL, IF ADJ OFF, MORE 1 OF 2,
and FLATNESS. I ncrease the gai n of the atness compensati on
ampl i ers to maxi mum by enteri ng 0 usi ng the data keys. Thi s sets
the gai ns i n the atness compensati on ampl i ers to thei r maxi mum
val ues.
10.Connect the other spectrum anal yzer to A15J601 and measure the
10.7 MHz I F si gnal l evel . The si gnal shoul d measure greater than
10 dBm. I f the si gnal l evel i s i ncorrect, conti nue wi th step 13.
11.Enter 4095 i nto the HP 8560E/EC Fl atness Data. The si gnal l evel at
A15J601 shoul d measure l ess than 36 dBm. Thi s sets the gai n of
atness compensati on ampl i ers to a mi ni mum. I f the si gnal l evel i s
i ncorrect, conti nue wi th step 13.
12.Check that the gai n stages are properl y bi ased and functi oni ng.
13.Check the attenuator stages and atness compensati on control
ci rcui try.
a. For mi ni mum gai n (atness data equal s 4095), RF GAI N
(A15U909 pi n 10) shoul d be at 1.6 Vdc and the current through
each secti on as measured across R667 or R668 shoul d be about 7
mA.
b. For maxi mum gai n (atness data equal s 0), RF GAI N (A15U909
pi n 10) shoul d be at approxi matel y 0 Vdc and the current through
each attenuator secti on shoul d be cl ose to 0 mA.
CAUTION As l ong as the atness data just entered i s not stored, the
previ ousl y-stored atness data wi l l be present after the power i s cycl ed.
14.Move the WR PROT/WR ENA jumper on the A2 control l er assembl y
to the WR PROT posi ti on.
15.Reconnect the cabl e to A15J801.
Flatness Compensation Control
Refer to functi on bl ock G on A15 RF Secti on schemati c i n the HP 8560
E-Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level I nformation.
The atness compensati on control consi sts of a buffer amp (U909C) and
two i denti cal vol tage-to-current converters (U909B and U909D). The
thermi stor RT901 i n the buffer amp provi des temperature
compensati on for the PI N di odes i n the gai n stages and the SAWl ters.
Chapter 11 601
RF Section
A15 RF Assembly
The gai n of the Fl atness compensati on ampl i ers i s dri ven to a
mi ni mum by the REDI R l i ne goi ng l ow duri ng automati c I F
adjustment.
Con